Distance Protection 7SA6xx (Manual) PDF

Preface
Introduction 1
Functions 2
SIPROTEC
Mounting and Commissioning 3
Distance Protection Technical Data 4
7SA6
V4.61 and higher
Appendix A
Literature
Manual
Glossary
Index
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Disclaimer of liability Registered Trademarks
We have checked the text of this manual against the hardware SIPROTEC, SINAUT, SICAM and DIGSI are registered trade-
and software described. However, deviations from the descrip- marks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this manual might
tion cannot be completely ruled out, so that no liability can be ac- be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes
cepted for any errors or omissions contained in the information would infringe the rights of the owner.
given. Release 4.61.03
The information given in this document is reviewed regularly and
any necessary corrections will be included in subsequent edi-
tions. We appreciate any suggestions for improvement.
We reserve the right to make technical improvements without
notice.
Copyright
Copyright Siemens AG 2005. All rights reserved.
Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation
and communication of its contents, is not authorized except
where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for damages. All
rights reserved, particularly for the purposes of patent application
or trademark registration.
7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Preface
Purpose of this This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into service
Manual of device 7SA6. In particular, one will find:
Descriptions of device functions and settings;
Instructions for mounting and commissioning;
Compilation of the technical specifications;
As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the
Appendix.
General information about design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC 4
devices are laid down in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with adjust-
ment, checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automatic and control
facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants.
Applicability of this This manual is valid for SIPROTEC 4 Distance Protection 7SA6; firmware version
Manual V4.61 and higher
Indication of Con- This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communi-
formity ties on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromag-
netic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical
equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 73/23
EEC).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with
Article 10 of the Council Directives in agreement with the generic standards
EN61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for the EMC directive, and with the standard EN
60255-6 for the low-voltage directive.
This device is designed and produced for industrial use.
The product conforms with the international standard of the series IEC 60255 and
the German standard VDE 0435.
Further Standards IEEE Std C37.90-*
This product is UL-certified according to the Technical Data:
Additional Support In case of further questions concerning the SIPROTEC 4 system, please contact your
local Siemens representative.
7SA6 Manual 3
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Preface
Training Courses Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions may
be directed to our training centre in Nuremberg.
Instructions and The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for
Warnings an appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them!
The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
DANGER!
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precau-
tions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and
consequential damage thereof.
Note:
indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual
which is essential to highlight.
WARNING!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.
Death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if the device
is not handled properly.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and in the vicinity of this equipment. The per-
sonnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings and maintenance procedures of
this manual as well as the safety regulations.
Successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper transportation,
storage, mounting and assembly and the observance of the warnings and instructions
of the unit manual.
In particular, the general installation and safety regulations for work in power current
plants (e.g. ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and international regulations) must
be observed.
Definition QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

Prerequisites to proper and safe operation of this product are proper transport,
proper storage, setup, installation, operation, and maintenance of the product, as
well as careful operation and servicing of the device within the scope of the warn-
ings and instructions of this manual. Qualifications are:
Training and Instruction to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
Training and instruction (or other qualification) for switching, earthing, and des-
ignating devices and systems.
Training in rendering first aid.
4 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Preface
Typographic and To designate terms which refer in the text to information of the device or for the
Graphical Conven- device, the following fonts are used:
tions Parameter names
Designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-
word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with
DIGSI), are marked in bold letters of a monospace font. The same goes for the titles
of menus.
1234A
Parameter addresses have the same character style as parameter names. Param-
eter addresses in overview tables contain the suffix A, if the parameter is only avail-
able using the option Display additional settings.
Parameter Conditions
Possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the
display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation soft-
ware DIGSI), are additionally written in italics. The same goes for the options of the
menus.
Annunciations
Designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other
devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation
marks.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can
be obviously derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Device-internal logical input signal
Device-internal (logical) output signal
Internal input signal of an analog quantity
External binary input signal with number (binary input, input

indication)
External binary output signal with number (device indication)
External binary output signal with number (device indication)

used as input signal
Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with
the address 1234 and the possible settings ON and OFF
Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 60617-12 and IEC
60617-13 or symbols derived from these standards. Some of the most frequently used
are listed below:
7SA6 Manual 5
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Preface
Input signal of an analog quantity
AND gate
OR gate
Exclusive OR (antivalence): output is active, if only one of

the inputs is active
Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active if both
inputs are active or inactive at the same time
Dynamic inputs (edgetriggered) above with positive, below

with negative edge
Formation of one analog output signal from a number of
analog input signals
Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator
(name)
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting

address and parameter designator (name)
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)
Static memory (RS-flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting

input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)
6 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.1 Overall Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2 Application Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2 Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.1.1 Functional Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.1.1.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.1.1.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.1.2 Power System Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.1.2.1 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.1.2.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.1.3 Change Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1.3.1 Purpose of the Setting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.3.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.3.4 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1.4 Power System Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.1.4.1 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.1.4.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
7SA6 Manual 7
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
2.2 Distance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

2.2.1 Distance protection, general settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2.2.1.1 Earth Fault Detection ............................................... 64
2.2.1.2 Pickup .......................................................... 68
2.2.1.3 Calculation of the Impedances ....................................... 73
2.2.1.4 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.2.1.5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.2.2 Distance protection with quadrilateral characteristic (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.2.2.1 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.2.2.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
2.2.2.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.2.3 Distance zones (Circle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2.2.3.1 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2.2.3.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.2.3.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2.2.4 Tripping Logic of the Distance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2.2.4.1 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2.2.4.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2.3 Power swing detection (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

2.3.1 Method of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
2.3.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
2.3.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.3.4 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.4 Protection data interfaces and communication topology (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

2.4.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2.5 Remote signals via protection data interface (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

2.5.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
2.6 Teleprotection for distance protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

2.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2.6.3 PUTT (Pickup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.6.4 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT) . . 164
2.6.5 Direct Underreach Transfer Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
2.6.6 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.6.7 Directional Comparison Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.6.8 Directional Unblocking Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
2.6.9 Directional Blocking Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
2.6.10 Pilot Wire Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
2.6.11 Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
2.6.12 Transient Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
2.6.13 Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
2.6.14 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2.6.15 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2.7 Earth fault overcurrent protection in earthed systems (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

2.7.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2.7.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
2.8 Teleprotection for earth fault overcurrent protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

2.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
2.8.2 Directional Comparison Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2.8.3 Directional Unblocking Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
2.8.4 Directional Blocking Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
2.8.5 Transient Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
2.8.6 Measures for Weak or Zero Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
2.8.7 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
2.8.8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
2.9 Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

2.9.1 Echo Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
2.9.2 Classical Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
2.9.2.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
2.9.3 Tripping According to Specification RTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
2.9.3.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
2.9.4 Table overview for classical and RTE Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
2.9.4.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
2.9.4.2 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
7SA6 Manual 9
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
2.10 External direct and remote tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

2.10.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
2.10.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
2.11 Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

2.11.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
2.11.3 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
2.11.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
2.12 Instantaneous high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (SOTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

2.12.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
2.12.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
2.13 Earth fault detection in non-earthed systems (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

2.13.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
2.13.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
2.14 Automatic reclosure function (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

2.14.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
2.14.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
2.15 Synchronism and voltage check (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

2.15.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
2.15.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
2.16 Under and over-voltage protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

2.16.1 Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
2.16.2 Undervoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
2.16.3 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
2.16.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
2.17 Frequency protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

2.17.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
2.17.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
2.18 Fault locator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

2.18.1 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
2.18.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
2.18.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
2.19 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

2.19.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
2.19.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
2.20 Thermal overload protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

2.20.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
2.20.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
2.21 Analog outputs (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

2.21.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
2.21.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
2.22 Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

2.22.1 Measurement Supervision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
2.22.1.1 Hardware Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
2.22.1.2 Software Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
2.22.1.3 Monitoring External Transformer Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
2.22.1.4 Monitoring the Phase Angle of the Positive Sequence Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
2.22.1.5 Fault Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
2.22.1.6 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
2.22.1.7 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
2.22.2 Trip circuit supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
2.22.2.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
2.22.2.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
7SA6 Manual 11
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
2.23 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

2.23.1 Function Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
2.23.1.1 Line Energisation Detection ........................................... 419
2.23.1.2 Detection of the Circuit Breaker Position ............................... 424
2.23.1.3 Open Pole Detector ................................................. 426
2.23.1.4 Pickup Logic of the Entire Device ...................................... 428
2.23.1.5 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device ..................................... 430
2.23.2 Circuit breaker trip test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
2.23.2.1 Functional Description ................................................ 436
2.23.2.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
2.23.3 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
2.23.3.1 Trip-dependent Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
2.23.3.2 Spontaneous Indications on the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
2.23.3.3 Switching Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
2.23.3.4 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
2.23.3.5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
2.23.4 EN100-Modul. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
2.23.4.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
12 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
2.24 Auxiliary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

2.24.1 Commissioning Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
2.24.1.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
2.24.2 Processing of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
2.24.3 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
2.24.3.1 Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
2.24.3.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
2.24.4 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
2.24.5 Oscillographic Fault Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
2.24.5.1 Description .......................................................... 457
2.24.5.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
2.24.5.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
2.24.6 Demand Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
2.24.6.1 Long-term Average Values .............................................. 459
2.24.6.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
2.24.6.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
2.24.7 Min/Max Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
2.24.7.1 Reset .............................................................. 461
2.24.7.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
2.24.7.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
2.24.8 Set Points (Measured Values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
2.24.8.1 Limit Value Monitoring ................................................. 464
2.24.8.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
2.24.9 Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
2.24.9.1 Power Metering .................................................... 466
2.24.9.2 Setting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
2.25 Command Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

2.25.1 Control Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
2.25.1.1 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
2.25.1.2 Sequence in the Command Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
2.25.1.3 Switchgear Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
2.25.2 Control Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
2.25.3 Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
2.25.4 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
7SA6 Manual 13
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
3 Mounting and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
3.1 Mounting and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

3.1.1 Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
3.1.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
3.1.2.2 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
3.1.2.3 Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
3.1.2.4 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
3.1.2.5 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
3.1.3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
3.1.3.1 Panel Flush Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
3.1.3.2 Rack and Cubicle Mounting ................................... 520
3.1.3.3 Panel Surface Mounting ............................................ 523
3.1.3.4 Mounting with Detached Operator Panel ......................... 524
3.2 Checking Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
3.2.2 Checking the Protection Data Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
3.2.3 Power Plant Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
3.3 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

3.3.1 Test Mode / Transmission Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
3.3.2 Checking the Time Synchronization Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
3.3.3 Checking the System Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
3.3.4 Checking the States of the Binary Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
3.3.5 Checking the Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
3.3.6 Checking the Communication Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
3.3.7 Test Mode for Teleprotection Scheme with Protection Data Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
3.3.8 Tests for the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
3.3.9 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
3.3.10 Direction Check with Load Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
3.3.11 Polarity Check for the Voltage Measuring Input U4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
3.3.12 Earth Fault Check in a Non-earthed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
3.3.13 Polarity Check for the Current Input I4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
3.3.14 Measuring the Operating Time of the Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
3.3.15 Checking the Teleprotection System with Distance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
3.3.16 Testing the Signal Transmission with Earth Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
3.3.17 Checking the Signal Transmission for Breaker Failure Protection and/or Stub Fault Protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
3.3.18 Checking the Signal Transmission for Internal and External Remote Tripping . . . 562
3.3.19 Testing User-Defined Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
3.3.20 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
3.3.21 Trip / Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices . . . . . . . 564
3.3.22 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings for Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
14 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
4 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

4.1.1 Analog inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
4.1.2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
4.1.4 Communication Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
4.1.5 Electrical tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
4.1.6 Mechanical stress tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
4.1.8 Service conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
4.1.9 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
4.1.10 Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
4.2 Distance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
4.3 Power Swing Detection (with impedance pickup) (optional)

587
4.4 Teleprotection for Distance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
4.5 Earth Fault Protection in Earthed Systems (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
4.6 Earth Fault Protection Teleprotection Schemes (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
4.7 Weak-Infeed Tripping (classical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
4.8 Weak-infeed tripping (French Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
4.9 Protection Data Interface and Communication Topology (optional) . . . . . 602
4.10 External Direct and Remote Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
4.11 Time overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
4.12 Instantaneous high-current switch-onto-fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . 608
4.13 Earth Fault Detection in a Non-Earthed System (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
4.14 Automatic Reclosure Function (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
4.15 Synchronism and voltage check (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
4.16 Voltage Protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
4.17 Frequency Protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
4.18 Fault locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
4.19 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
4.20 Thermal overload protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
4.21 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
4.22 Transmission of Binary Information (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
4.23 User Defined Functions (CFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
7SA6 Manual 15
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
4.24 Ancillary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
4.25 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

4.25.1 Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting (Size 1/3) 631
4.25.2 Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting (Size 1 /2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
4.25.3 Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting (Size 2/3)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
4.25.5 Housing for Panel Surface Mounting (housing size 1/3) . . . . . . . . . 635
4.25.6 1
Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size /2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
4.25.7 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
4.25.8 Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel (housing size 1/2) . 637
4.25.9 Surface Mounting Housing with Detached Operator Panel (Housing Size 1/1) . . . . . . . . . 638
4.25.10 Detached Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
A Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

A.1.1 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
A.1.1.1 Ordering Code (MLFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
A.1.2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
A.2 Terminal Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

A.2.1 Housing for Panel Flush or Cubicle Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
A.2.2 Housing for Panel Surface Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
A.2.3 Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
A.3 Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

A.3.1 Current Transformer Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
A.3.2 Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
A.4 Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713

A.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
A.4.2 Binary Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
A.4.3 Binary Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
A.4.4 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
A.4.5 Default Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
A.4.6 Pre-defined CFC Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
A.5 Protocol-dependent Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
A.6 Functional Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
A.7 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
A.8 Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
A.9 Group Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
A.10 Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
16 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
Literature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
7SA6 Manual 17
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Contents
18 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Introduction 1
The SIPROTEC 4 7SA6 is introduced in this chapter. The device is presented in its
application, characteristics, and functional scope.
1.1 Overall Operation 20

1.2 Application Scope 23
1.3 Characteristics 26
7SA6 Manual 19
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1 Introduction
1.1 Overall Operation
The digital Distance Protection SIPROTEC 4 7SA6 is equipped with a powerful mi-
crocomputer system. This provides fully numerical processing of all functions in the
device, from the acquisition of the measured values up to the output of commands to
the circuit breakers. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the 7SA6.
Analog Inputs The measuring inputs MI transform the currents and voltages derived from the instru-
ment transformers and match them to the internal signal levels for processing in the
device. The device has 4 current and 4 voltage inputs. Three current inputs are pro-
vided for measurement of the phase currents, a further measuring input (I4) may be
configured to measure the earth current (residual current from the current transformer
star-point), the earth current of a parallel line (for parallel line compensation) or the
star-point current of a power transformer (for earth fault direction determination).
Figure 1-1 Hardware structure of the digital Distance Protection 7SA6
20 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1.1 Overall Operation
A voltage measuring input is provided for each phase-earth voltage. A further voltage
input (U4) may optionally be used to measure either the displacement voltage, the ad-
ditional voltage for synchronism and voltage check or any other voltage UX (for over-
voltage protection). The analog signals are then routed to the input amplifier group
IA.
The input amplifier group IA provides high-resistance termination for the analog input
quantities. It consists of filters that are optimized for measured value processing with
regard to bandwidth and processing speed.
The AD analog digital converter group contains analog/digital converters and memory
components for data transfer to the microcomputer system.
Microcomputer Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system C also exe-
System cutes the actual protection and control functions. They especially consist of:
Filtering and conditioning of the measured signals,
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities
Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protective functions
Querying of limit values and time sequences,
Control of signals for logical functions,
Reaching trip and close command decisions,
Stocking messages, fault data and fault values for fault analysis purposes,
Administration of the operating system and its functions, e.g. data storage, realtime
clock, communication, interfaces, etc.
The information is provided via output amplifier OA.
Binary Inputs and Binary inputs and outputs from and to the computer system are routed via the I/O
Outputs modules (inputs and outputs). The computer system obtains the information from the
system (e.g remote resetting) or the external equipment (e.g. blocking commands).
Additional outputs are mainly commands that are issued to the switching devices and
messages for remote signalling of events and states.
Front Elements LEDs and an LC display provide information on the function of the device and indicate
events, states and measured values.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local inter-
action with the local device. All information of the device can be accessed using the
integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control
settings, operating and fault messages, and measured values (see also Chapter 2 and
SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/).
Devices with control functions also allow station control on the front panel.
7SA6 Manual 21
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1 Introduction
Serial Interfaces Via the serial operator interface in the front panel the communication with a personal
computer using the operating program DIGSI is possible. This facilitates a comfortable
handling of all device functions.
The service interface can also be used for communication with a personal computer
using DIGSI. This is especially well suited for the central interrogation of the devices
from a PC or for remote operation via a modem.
All device data can be transmitted to a central evaluating unit or control center through
the serial system (SCADA) interface. This interface may be provided with various
physical transmission modes and different protocols to suit the particular application.
A further interface is provided for time synchronization of the internal clock through ex-
ternal synchronization sources.
Further communication protocols can be realized via additional interface modules.
Protection Data Depending on the version one Protection Data Interface can be available. Via this in-
Interface (optional) terface the data for the teleprotection scheme and further information such as closing
the local circuit breaker, other external trip commands coupled via binary inputs and
binary information can be transmitted to other ends.
Power Supply These described functional units are supplied by a power supply PS with the neces-
sary power in the different voltage levels. Brief supply voltage dips which may occur
on short circuits in the auxiliary voltage supply of the power system are usually bridged
by a capacitor (see also Technical Data, Sub-section 4.1).
22 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1.2 Application Scope
The digital distance protection SIPROTEC 4 7SA6 is a selective and quick protection
for overhead lines and cables with single- and multi-ended infeeds in radial, ring or any
type of meshed systems of any voltage levels. The network neutral can be earthed,
compensated or isolated.
The device incorporates the functions which are normally required for the protection
of an overhead line feeder and is therefore capable of universal application. It may
also be applied as time-graded back-up protection to all types of comparison protec-
tion schemes used on lines, transformers, generators, motors and busbars of all
voltage levels.
The devices located at the ends of the protected zone exchange measuring informa-
tion via teleprotection functions with conventional connections (contacts) or via option-
al protection data interfaces using dedicated communication links (usually fibre optic
cables) or a communication network. If the 7SA6 devices are equipped with a protec-
tion data interface, they can be used for a protection object with 2 ends. Lines with
three terminals (teed feeders) require at least one device with two protection data in-
terfaces (7SA522).
Protective The basic function of the device is the recognition of the distance to the fault with dis-
Elements tance protection measurement. In particular for complex multiphase faults, the dis-
tance protection has a non-switched 6-impedance-loops design (full scheme). Differ-
ent pickup schemes enable a good adaption to system conditions and the user
philosophy. The network neutral can be isolated, compensated or earthed (with or
without earth current limiting). The use on long, heavily-loaded lines is possible with
or without series compensation.
The distance protection may be supplemented by teleprotection using various signal
transmission schemes (for fast tripping on 100 % of the line length). In addition, an
earth fault protection for high resistance earth faults (ordering option) is available,
which may be directional, non-directional and may also be incorporated in signal
transmission. On lines with weak or no infeed at one line end, it is possible to achieve
fast tripping at both line ends by means of the signal transmission schemes. Subse-
quent to energizing the line onto a fault which may be located along the entire line
length, it is possible to achieve a non-delayed trip signal.
In the event of a failure of the measured voltages due to a fault in the secondary cir-
cuits (e.g. trip of the voltage transformer mcb or a blown fuse) the device can automat-
ically revert to an emergency operation with an integrated overcurrent protection, until
the measured voltage again becomes available. Alternatively, the time delayed over-
current protection may be used as back-up time delayed overcurrent protection, i.e. it
functions independent and parallel to the distance protection.
Depending on the version ordered, most short-circuit protection functions may also trip
single-pole. They may work in co-operation with an integrated automatic reclosure
(available as an option) which enables single-pole, three-pole or single and three-pole
automatic reclosure as well as several interrupt cycles on overhead lines. Before re-
closure after three-pole tripping, the device can check the validity of the reclosure
through voltage and/or synchronism check (can be ordered optionally). It is also pos-
sible to connect an external automatic reclosure and/or synchronism check as well as
double protection with one or two automatic reclosure functions.
7SA6 Manual 23
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1 Introduction
Apart from the mentioned fault protection functions additional protection functions are
possible, such as earth fault detection (for isolated or compensated systems), multi-
stage overvoltage, undervoltage and frequency protection, circuit breaker failure pro-
tection, protection and protection against effects of power swings (for impedance
pickup simultaneously active as power swing blocking for the distance protection) and
a thermal overload protection which protects the equipment (especially cables) from
unpermissible heating due to overload. For the rapid location of the damage to the line
after a fault, a fault locator is integrated which also may compensate the influence of
parallel lines.
Digital If the distance protection is to be complemented by digital teleprotection schemes, the

Transmission of data required for this purpose can be transmitted via the protection data interface by
Protection Data employing a digital communication link. Communication via the protection data inter-
(optional) faces can be used for transmitting further information. Besides measured values also
binary commands or other information can be transmitted.
Control Functions The device is equipped with control functions which operate, close and open, switch-
gear via the integrated operator panel, the system interface, binary inputs, and using
a personal computer with DIGSI software. Using auxiliary contacts of the switch and
binary inputs of the device, switching states feedbacks are issued. The current status
(or position) of the primary equipment can be read out at the device, and used for in-
terlocking or plausibility monitoring. The number of the devices to be switched is
limited by the binary inputs and outputs available in the device or the binary inputs and
outputs allocated for the switch position feedbacks. Depending on the resource one
(single point indication) or two binary inputs (double point indication) can be used. The
capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by appropriate settings for
the switching authority (remote or local), and by the operating mode (interlocked/non-
interlocked, with or without password request). Interlocking conditions for switching
(e.g. switchgear interlocking) can be established using the integrated user-defined
logic.
Indications and The operating messages provide information about conditions in the power system
Measured Values; and the device. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated can be dis-
Fault Recording played locally and communicated via the serial interfaces.
Device messages can be assigned to a number of LEDs on the front panel (allocat-
able), can be externally processed via output contacts (allocatable), linked with user-
definable logic functions and/or issued via serial interfaces (see Communication
below).
During a fault (power system fault) important events and changes in conditions are
saved in fault logs (Event Log or Trip Log). Instantaneous fault values are also saved
in the device and may be analyzed subsequently.
24 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Communication Serial interfaces are available for the communication with operating, control and
memory systems.
A 9-pin DSUB socket on the front panel is used for local communication with a person-
al computer. By means of the SIPROTEC 4 operating software DIGSI all operational
and evaluation tasks can be executed via this operator interface, such as specifying
and modifying configuration parameters and settings, configuring user-specific logic
functions, retrieving operational messages and measured values, inquiring device
conditions and measured values, issuing control commands.
To establish an extensive communication with other digital operating, control and
memory components the device may be provided with further interfaces depending on
the order variant.
The service interface can be operated via the RS232 or RS485 interface and also
allows communication via modem. For this reason, remote operation is possible via
personal computer and the DIGSI operating software, e.g. to operate several devices
via a central PC.
The system interface is used for central communication between the device and a
control centre. It can be operated through the RS232, RS485 or FO port. For data
transmission there are several standardized protocols available. An EN100 module
allows to integrate the devices into the 100 MBit Ethernet communication networks of
the process control and automation systems using IEC 61850 protocols. In parallel to
the link with the process control and automation system, this interface can also handle
DIGSI communication and inter-relay communication using GOOSE.
Another interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via ex-
ternal synchronization sources (IRIG-B or DCF77).
Other interfaces provide for communication between the devices at the ends of the
protected object. These protection data interfaces have been mentioned above in the
protection functions.
The operator and service interface allow to operate the device remotely or locally,
using a standard browser. This is possible during commissioning, checking and also
during operation of the devices at all ends of the protected object, using a communi-
cation network. For this a special tool, the WEB-Monitor, is provided, which has been
optimized for distance protection.
7SA6 Manual 25
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1 Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
General Features Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system

Complete digital processing of measured values and control, from the sampling of
the analog input values up to the closing and tripping commands to the circuit
breakers
Complete galvanic and reliable separation between internal processing circuits
from the measurement, control, and power supply circuits by analog input transduc-
ers, binary inputs and outputs and the DC/DC or AC/DC converters
Complete scope of functions which are normally required for the protection of a line
feeder
Digital protection data transmission, may be used for teleprotection with permanent
monitoring of disturbance, fault or transfer time deviations in the communication
network with automatic runtime re-adjustment
Distance protection system realizable for 3 ends
Simple device operation using the integrated operator panel or a connected person-
al computer with operator guidance
Storage of fault indications as well as instantaneous values for fault recording
DistanceProtection Protection for all types of faults in systems with earthed, compensated or isolated
starpoint
Different pickup schemes enable the adaption to different system conditions and
user philosophies: Either overcurrent pickup, voltage and phase-angle controlled
pickup or impedance pickup
Either polygonal or circle tripping characteristic
Reliable differentiation between load and fault conditions also on long, high-loaded
lines
High sensitivity in the case of a weakly loaded system, extreme stability against
load jumps and power swings
Optimum adaption to the line parameters by means of the polygonal tripping char-
acteristic with diverse configuration parameters and load trapezoid (elimination of
the possible load impedances);
Resistance tolerance (margin) for arc faults and fault resistances can be increased
by extending the circle tripping characteristic in R direction
Six measuring systems for each distance zone
Six distance zones, selectable as forward, reverse or non-directional reaching, one
may be used as an overreach zone
Nine time stages for the distance zones
Fault direction with cross-polarized voltages and voltage memory, dynamically un-
limited direction sensitivity, not influenced by transient responses of capacitive
voltage transformers,
Suitable for lines with series compensation
Insensitive to current transformer saturation
Compensation against the influence of a parallel line
26 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1.3 Characteristics
Shortest tripping time is approx. 17 ms (for fN = 50 Hz) or 15 ms (for fN = 60 Hz)

Phase segregated tripping (in conjunction with single-pole or single- and three-pole
auto-reclosure)
Non-delayed tripping following switch onto fault
Two sets of earth impedance compensation
Power swing Power swing detection with dZ/dt measurement with three measuring systems
supplement
Power swing detection up to a maximum of 7 Hz swing frequency;
(optionally for
impedance pickup) In service also during single-pole dead times
Settable power swing programs
Prevention of undesired tripping by the distance protection during power swings
Tripping for out-of-step conditions can also be configured
Teleprotection Different procedures may be set:

Supplement
Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip = PUTT (directly, via pickup or a separately
settable overreach zone);
Comparison schemes (Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip = POTT or blocking
schemes, with separate overreach zone or directional pickup)
Pilot wire comparison / reverse interlocking (with direct voltage for local connections
or extremely short lines)
Suitable for lines with two or three ends
Phase segregated transmission possible in lines with two ends
Optionally signal exchange of the devices via dedicated communication links (in
general optical fibres) or a communication network, in this case a phase-segregat-
ed transmission with two or three line ends and continuous monitoring of the com-
munication paths and the signal propagation delay with automatic re-adjustment.
Earth Fault Time overcurrent protection with maximally three definite time stages (DT) and one
Protection inverse time stage (IDMT) for high resistance earth faults in earthed systems
(optional)
For inverse time protection a selection from various characteristics based on
several standards can be made
The inverse time stage can also be set as fourth definite time stage
High sensitivity (depending on the version from 3 mA);
Phase current stabilization against fault currents during current transformer satura-
tion
Second harmonic inrush restraint
Optionally earth fault protection with an inverse tripping time dependent on zero se-
quence voltage or zero sequence power
Each stage can be set to be non-directional or directional in the forward or reverse
direction
Single-pole tripping enabled by integrated phase selector
7SA6 Manual 27
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1 Introduction
Direction determination with automatic selection of the larger of zero sequence

voltage or negative sequence voltage (U0, IY or U2), with zero sequence system
quantities (I0, U0), with zero sequence current and transformer starpoint current (I0,
IY), with negative sequence system quantities (I2, U2) or with zero sequence power
(3I0 3U0)
One or more stages may function in conjunction with teleprotection; also suited for
lines with three ends
Instantaneous tripping by any stage when switching onto a fault
Transmission of Transmission of the measured values from all ends of the protected object
Information (only
Transmission of 4 commands to all ends
with protection data
interface) Transmission of 24 additional binary signals to all ends
Tripping at Line Possible in conjunction with teleprotection schemes

Ends with no or
Allows fast tripping at both line ends, even if there is no or only weak infeed avail-
Weak Infeed
able at one line end
Phase segregated tripping and single-pole automatic reclosure (version with single-
pole tripping)
External Direct and Tripping at the local line end from an external device via a binary input
Remote Tripping
Tripping of the remote line end by internal protection functions or an external device
via a binary input (with teleprotection)
Time Overcurrent Selectable as emergency function in the case of measured voltage failure, or as
Protection backup function independent of the measured voltage
Two definite time stages (DT) and one inverse time stage (IDMT), each for phase
currents and earth current
For IDMT protection a selection from various characteristics based on several stan-
dards is possible
Blocking capability e.g. for reverse interlocking with any element
Instantaneous tripping by any stage when switching onto a fault
Additional stage, e.g. stub protection, for fast tripping of faults between the current
transformer and line isolator (when the isolator switching status feed back is avail-
able); particularly suited to sub-stations with 11/2 circuit breaker arrangements.
Instantaneous Fast tripping for all faults on total line length

High-Current
Selectable for manual closure or following each closure of the circuit breaker
Switch-onto-Fault
Protection With integrated line energization detection
Sensitive Earth For compensated or isolated networks

Fault Detection
Detection of the displacement voltage
(optional)
Determination of earth-faulted phases
Sensitive earth fault directional determination
Angle error correction for current transformers
28 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1.3 Characteristics
Automatic Reclo- For reclosure after single-pole, three-pole or single-pole and three-pole tripping
sure Function
Single or multiple reclosure (up to 8 reclosure attempts)
(optional)
With separate action times for every reclosure attempt, optionally without action
times
With separate dead times after single-pole and three-pole tripping, separate for the
first four reclosure attempts
Controlled optionally by protection pickup with separate dead times after single,
two-pole and three-pole pickup
Optionally with adaptive dead time, reduced dead time and dead line check.
Synchronism and Verification of the synchronous conditions before reclosing after three-pole tripping
Voltage Check
Fast measuring of voltage difference UDiff of the phase angle difference Diff and fre-
(optional)
quency difference fDiff
Alternatively, check of the de-energized state before reclosing
Closing at asynchronous system conditions with prediction of the synchronization
time
Settable minimum and maximum voltage
Verification of the synchronous conditions or de-energized state also possible
before the manual closing of the circuit breaker, with separate limit values
Phase angle correction for voltage measurement across a power transformer
Measuring voltages optionally phase-phase or phase-earth
Voltage Protection Overvoltage and undervoltage detection with different stages

(optional)
Two overvoltage stages for the phase-earth voltages
Two overvoltage stages for the phase-phase voltages
Two overvoltage stages for the positive sequence voltage, optionally with com-
pounding
Two overvoltage stages for the negative sequence voltage
Two overvoltage stages for the zero sequence voltage or any other single-phase
voltage
Settable drop-off to pick-up ratios
Two undervoltage stages for the phase-earth voltages
Two undervoltage stages for the phase-phase voltages
Two undervoltage stages for the positive sequence voltage
Settable current criterion for undervoltage protection functions
Frequency Monitoring on underfrequency (f<) and/or overfrequency (f>) with 4 frequency limits
Protection and delay times that are independently adjustable
(optional)
Very insensitive to phase angle changes
Large frequency range (approx. 25 Hz to 70 Hz).
7SA6 Manual 29
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1 Introduction
Fault Location Initiated by trip command or reset of the pickup

Computation of the distance to fault with dedicated measured value registers
Fault location output in ohm, kilometers or miles and % of line length
Parallel line compensation can be selected
Taking into consideration the load current in case of single-phase earth faults fed
from both sides (settable)
Output of the fault location in the BCD code or as analog value (depending on the
order variant)
Circuit Breaker With definite time current stages for monitoring current flow through every pole of
Failure Protection the circuit breaker
(optional)
With definite time monitoring time steps for single-pole and three-pole tripping
Start by trip command of every internal protection function
Start by external trip functions possible
Single-stage or two-stage
Short dropout and overshoot times
Thermal Overload Thermal replica of the current heat losses of the protected object
Protection
R.M.S. measurement of all three conductor currents
(optional)
Settable thermal and current-dependent warning stages
Analog Outputs Output of up to four analog measured values (depending on the variant ordered):
(optional) Measured values, fault location, breaking fault current
User Defined Logic Freely programmable linkage between internal and external signals for the imple-
Functions (CFC) mentation of user-defined logic functions
Typical logic functions
Time delays and set point interrogation
Commissioning; Display of magnitude and phase angle of local and remote measured values
Operation (only
Display of measured values of the communication link, such as runtime and avail-
with protection data
ability
interface)
Command Switchgear can be switched on and off manually via local control keys, the program-
Processing mable function keys on the front panel, via the system interface (e.g. by SICAM or
LSA), or via the operator interface (using a personal computer and the operating
software DIGSI);
Feedback on switching states via the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (for com-
mands with feedback)
Plausibility monitoring of the circuit breaker position and monitoring of interlocking
conditions for switching operations
30 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1.3 Characteristics
Monitoring Availability of the device is greatly increased by monitoring of the internal measure-
Functions ment circuits, auxiliary power supply, hardware, and software
Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are monitored
using summation and symmetry check techniques
Trip circuit supervision
Checking for the load impedance, the measured direction and the phase sequence
Monitoring the signal transmission of the optional digital communication path
Additional Battery buffered real time clock, which may be sychronized via a synchronization
Functions signal (e.g. DCF77, IRIGB via satellite receiver), binary input or system interface
Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front display. In-
dication of measured values of the remote end or of all ends (for devices with pro-
tection data interfaces);
Fault event memory (trip log) for the last 8 network faults (faults in the power sys-
tem), with real time stamps
Earth fault protocols for up to 8 earth faults (devices with sensitive earth fault detec-
tion)
Fault recording and data transfer for fault recording for a maximum time range of
15 s
Statistics: Counter with the trip commands issued by the device, as well as record-
ing of the fault current data and accumulation of the interrupted fault currents
Communication with central control and memory components possible via serial in-
terfaces (depending on the individual ordering variant), optionally via electrical
RS485 bus connection, fiber optic cable or a modem connection
Commissioning aids such as connection and direction checks as well as circuit
breaker test functions
The WEB-Monitor (installed on a PC or a laptop) widely supports the testing and
commissioning procedure by providing a graphic presentation of the protection
system with phasor diagrams. All currents and voltages from all ends of the system
are displayed on the screen provided that the devices are connected via protection
data interfaces.
7SA6 Manual 31
C53000-G1176-C156-5
1 Introduction
32 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Functions 2
This chapter describes the individual functions available on the SIPROTEC 4 device
7SA6. It shows the setting possibilities for each function in maximum configuration.
Guidelines for establishing setting values and, where required, formulae are given.
Additionally, on the basis of the following information, it may be defined which func-
tions are to be used.
2.1 General 35
2.2 Distance Protection 64
2.3 Power swing detection (optional) 138
2.4 Protection data interfaces and communication topology (optional) 147
2.5 Remote signals via protection data interface (optional) 156
2.6 Teleprotection for distance protection 159
2.7 Earth fault overcurrent protection in earthed systems (optional) 195
2.8 Teleprotection for earth fault overcurrent protection (optional) 226
2.9 Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed 245
2.10 External direct and remote tripping 257
2.11 Overcurrent protection 260
2.12 Instantaneous high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (SOTF) 277
2.13 Earth fault detection in non-earthed systems (optional) 280
2.14 Automatic reclosure function (optional) 288
2.15 Synchronism and voltage check (optional) 321
2.16 Under and over-voltage protection (optional) 336
2.17 Frequency protection (optional) 356
2.18 Fault locator 363
2.19 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) 368
2.20 Thermal overload protection (optional) 386
2.21 Analog outputs (optional) 391
2.22 Monitoring Function 396
2.23 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test 419
7SA6 Manual 33
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.24 Auxiliary Functions 443

2.25 Command Processing 467
34 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
2.1 General
A few seconds after the device is switched on, the default display appears on the LCD.
Depending on the device version either measured values (four-line display) or a
single-phase switching diagram of the feeder status (graphic display) is displayed in
the 7SA6.
Configuration settings can be entered by using a PC and the operating software DIGSI
and transferred via the operator interface on the front panel of the device or via the
service interface. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System
Description. Entry of password no. 7 (for parameter set) is required to modify configu-
ration settings. Without the password, the settings may be read, but may not be mod-
ified and transmitted to the device.
The function parameters, i.e. settings of function options, threshold values, etc., can
be entered via the keypad and displayed on the front of the device, or by means of a
personal computer connected to the front or service interface of the device utilising the
DIGSI software package. The level 5 password (individual parameters) is required.
The default password is 000000.
2.1.1 Functional Scope
2.1.1.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions
The 7SA6 device contains a series of protective and additional functions. The hard-
ware and firmware provided is designed for this scope of functions. In addition, the
command functions can be matched to the system conditions. In addition, individual
functions may be enabled or disabled during configuration, or interaction between
functions may be adjusted.
Example for the configuration of scope of functions:
A substation has feeders with overhead lines and transformers. Fault location is to be
performed on the overhead lines only. In the devices for the transformer feeders this
function is therefore Disabled.
The available protection and supplementary functions can be configured as Enabled
or Disabled. For some functions, a choice may be presented between several
options which are explained below.
Functions configured as Disabled are not processed by the 7SA6. There are no in-
dications, and corresponding settings (functions, limit values) are not displayed during
setting.
Note
The functions and default settings available depend on the order variant of the device.
7SA6 Manual 35
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes
Determination of The scope of functions with the available options is set in the Functional Scope dialog
Functional Scope box to match plant requirements.
Most settings are self-explaining. The special cases are described below.
Special Cases If use of the setting group changeover function is desired, address 103 Grp Chge
OPTION should be set to Enabled. In this case, up to four different groups of settings
may be changed quickly and easily during device operation (see also Section 2.1.3).
With the setting Disabled only one parameter group is available.
Address 110 Trip mode is only valid for devices that trip single-pole or three-pole.
Set 1-/3pole to enable also single-pole tripping i.e., if you want to use single-pole or
single-pole/multi-pole automatic reclosure. This requires an internal automatic reclos-
ing function to be available or an external reclosing device. Additionally the circuit
breaker must be suited for single-pole tripping.
Note
If you have changed address 110, save your changes first via OK and reopen the
dialog box since the other setting options depend on the selection in address 110.
The type of characteristic to be used by the distance protection function can be select-
ed in address 115 DIS Charact. (only for region Germany, 10th digit of the ordering
code = A). The characteristics Quadrilateral and Circleare available.
If the circle characteristic is used, the same aspects apply for pickup of the distance
protection (address 114 Dis. PICKUP) as for the polygon characteristic. In other
words, if you set Dis. PICKUP = Z< (quadrilat.), the implicit pickup of the dis-
tance protection also follows the circle characteristics: the largest sections of each dis-
tance zone constitute the pickup criteria.
You can select from various pickup procedures for the distance protection relay: The
properties of these procedures are described in detail in Section 2.2.1. If the fault
current magnitude is a reliable criterion for distinction between a fault occurrence and
load operation (incl. tolerable overload), set address 114 Dis. PICKUP = I>
(overcurr.) (overcurrent pickup). If the voltage surge is required as another pickup
criterion, set U/I (voltage-dependent current pickup). For heavily loaded high-voltage
lines and very-high-voltage lines the setting U/I/ (voltage and phase-angle depen-
dent current pickup) may be required. With the setting Z< (quadrilat.) (pickup)
the R and X reaches of the distance zones which are set highest establish the pickup
criteria. If you set 114 Dis. PICKUP = Disabled, the distance protection function
and all associated functions will not be available.
Please note that the power swing supplement (see also Section 2.3) only works to-
gether with the Z< (quadrilat.) pickup. In all other cases it is ineffective, even
though you have set address 120 Power Swing = Enabled.
36 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
To complement the distance protection by teleprotection schemes, you can select the
desired scheme at address 121 Teleprot. Dist.. You can select the permissive
underreach transfer trip with pickup PUTT (Pickup) and with overreach zone PUTT
(Z1B), the teleprotection scheme POTT, directional comparison pickup
Dir.Comp.Pickup, unblocking with Z1B UNBLOCKING, blocking scheme
BLOCKING, and the schemes with pilot wire comparison Pilot wire comp and
Rev. Interlock. If the device features a protection data interface for communica-
tion via a digital transmission line, set SIGNALv.ProtInt here. The procedures are
described in detail in Section 2.6. If you do not want to use teleprotection in conjunc-
tion with distance protection set Disabled.
For communication of the protection signal the device may feature a protection data
interface (depending on the ordered version). To communicate via this protection data
interface, instruct the device at address 145 to use the protection data interface 1 P.
INTERFACE 1 (Enabled). A protected object with two ends requires one protection
data interface for each of the two relays. If there is more than one end, it must be
ensured that all associated devices are connected directly or indirectly (via other de-
vices) which means that at least one of the devices must be equipped with 2 protection
data interfaces (e.g. 7SA522). Subsection 2.4 Protection Data Topology provides
more information.
With address 125 Weak Infeed you can select a supplement to the teleprotection
schemes. Set Enabled to apply the classical scheme for echo and weak infeed trip-
ping. The setting Logic no. 2 switches this function to the french specification. This
setting is available in the device variants for the region France (only version 7SA6***-
**D** or 10th digit of order number = D).
At address 126 Back-Up O/C, you can set the characteristic group which the time
overcurrent protection uses for operation. In addition to the definite time overcurrent
protection, an inverse time overcurrent protection may be configured. Depending on
the ordered version, the latter operates either according to an IEC characteristic (TOC
IEC) or an ANSI characteristic (TOC ANSI). For the characteristics please refer to the
Technical Data. With the device variants for the region Germany (10th digit of ordering
code = A), the third definite time overcurrent stage is only availabe if the setting TOC
IEC /w 3ST is active. You can also disable the time overcurrent protection
(Disabled).
At address 131 Earth Fault O/C you can select the type of characteristic which
the earth fault protection uses for operation. In addition to the definite time overcurrent
protection, which covers up to three phases, an inverse-time earth fault protection
function may be configured depending on the ordered version. The latter operates
either according to an IEC characteristic (TOC IEC) or an ANSI characteristic (TOC
ANSI) or according to a logarithmic-inverse characteristic (TOC Logarithm.). If an
inverse-time characteristic is not required, the stage usually designated inverse time
can be used as the fourth definite-time stage (Definite Time). Alternatively, it is
possible to select an earth fault protection with inverse-time characteristic U0
inverse (only for region Germany, 10th digit of the ordering code = A) or a zero-se-
quence power protection Sr inverse (only for region France, 10th digit of ordering
code = D). For the characteristics please refer to the Technical Data. You can also
disable the earth fault protection (Disabled).
When using the earth fault protection, it can be complemented by teleprotection
schemes. Select the desired scheme at address 132 Teleprot. E/F. You can
select the direction comparison scheme Dir.Comp.Pickup, the unblocking scheme
UNBLOCKING and the blocking scheme BLOCKING. The procedures are described in
detail in Section 2.8. If the device features a protection data interface for communica-
tion via a digital link, set SIGNALv.ProtInt here. If you do not want to use telepro-
tection in conjunction with earth fault protection set Disabled.
7SA6 Manual 37
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Address 145 P. INTERFACE 1 is also valid for communication of the teleprotection

for earth fault protection via teleprotection interface, as described above.
If the device features an automatic reclosing function, address 133 and 134 are of im-
portance. Automatic reclosure is only permitted for overhead lines. It must not be used
in any other case. If the protected object consists of a combination of overhead lines
and other equipment (e.g. overhead line in unit with a transformer or overhead line/ca-
ble), reclosure is only permissible if it can be ensured that it can only take place in the
event of a fault on the overhead line. If no automatic reclosing function is desired for
the feeder at which 7SA6 operates, or if an external device is used for reclosure, set
address 133 Auto Reclose to Disabled.
In the address mentioned the number of desired reclosure cycles is set. You can select
1 AR-cycle to 8 AR-cycles. You can also set ADT (adaptive dead times). In this
case the behaviour of the automatic reclosing function is determined by the cycles of
the remote end. The number of cycles must however be configured at least in one of
the line ends which must have a reliable infeed. The other end or other ends, if there
are more than two line ends may operate with adaptive dead time. Section 2.14 pro-
vides detailed information on this topic.
The AR control mode at address134 allows a maximum of four options. Firstly, it
can be determined whether the auto-reclose cycles are carried out according to the
fault type detected by pickup of the starting protective function(s) (only three-pole trip-
ping), or according to the type of trip command. Secondly, the automatic reclosing
function can be operated with or without action time.
The setting Trip with T-action / Trip without T-action ... (default
setting = With trip command ... ) is preferred if single-pole or single-pole/three-pole
auto-reclose cycles are provided for and possible. In this case, different dead times
(for every AR-cycle) are possible after single-pole tripping and after three-pole trip-
ping. The tripping protection function determines the type of tripping: single-pole or
three-pole. The dead time is controlled dependent on this.
The setting Pickup with T-action / Pickup without T-action ... ...
(Pickup with T-action ...) is only possible and visible if only three-pole tripping is de-
sired. This is the case when either the ordering number of the device model indicates
that it is only suited for three-pole tripping, or when only three-pole tripping is config-
ured (address 110 Trip mode = 3pole only, see above). In this case you can set
different dead times for the auto-reclose cycles following single-pole, two-pole and
three-pole faults. The decisive factor here is the pickup situation of the protective
functions at the instant the trip command disappears. This control mode enables also
the dead times to be made dependent on the type of fault in the case of three-pole
reclosure cycles. Tripping is always three-pole.
The setting Trip with T-action action time) provides an action time for each
auto-reclose cycle. The action time is started by a general pickup of all protection func-
tions. If there is yet no trip command when the action time has expired, the corre-
sponding automatic reclosure cycle cannot be executed. Section 2.14 provides de-
tailed information on this topic. For time graded protection this setting is
recommended. If the protection function which is to operate with automatic reclosure,
does not have a general pickup signal for starting the action times, select ... Trip
without T-action.
38 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
Address 137 U/O VOLTAGE allows to activate the voltage protection function with a
variety of undervoltage and overvoltage protection stages. In particular, the overvolt-
age protection with the positive sequence system of the measuring voltages provides
the option to calculate the voltage at the other, remote line end via integrated com-
pounding. This is particularly useful for long transmission lines where no-load or low-
load conditions prevail and an overvoltage at the other line end (Ferranti effect) is to
cause tripping of the local circuit breaker. In this case set address 137 U/O VOLTAGE
to Enabl. w. comp. (available with compounding). Do not use compounding in lines
with series capacitors!
For the fault location you can determine at address 138 Fault Locator, Enabled
and Disabled that the fault distance is output in BCD code (4 bit units, 4 bit tens and
1 bit hundreds and data valid) via binary outputs (with BCD-output). A corre-
sponding number of output relays (No 1143 to 1152) must be made available and al-
located for this purpose.
For the trip circuit supervision set at address 140 Trip Cir. Sup. the number of
trip circuits to be monitored: 1 trip circuit, 2 trip circuits or 3 trip
circuits, unless you omit it (Disabled).
Depending on the ordered version, the device features a number of analog outputs (0
to 20 mA). 2 outputs can be available at port B (mounting location B), 2 further
outputs at port D (mounting location D). You can select for the available analog
outputs at address 150 to 153 the kind of analog quantities that are output. Several
measured values and the fault location are available.
2.1.1.3 Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
110 Trip mode 3pole only 3pole only Trip mode
1-/3pole
114 Dis. PICKUP Z< (quadrilat.) Z< (quadrilat.) Distance protection pickup
I> (overcurr.) program
U/I
U/I/
Disabled
115 DIS Charact. Quadrilateral Quadrilateral Characteristic of distance zones
Circle
120 Power Swing Disabled Disabled Power Swing detection
Enabled
121 Teleprot. Dist. PUTT (Z1B) Disabled Teleprotection for Distance prot.
PUTT (Pickup)
POTT
Dir.Comp.Pickup
UNBLOCKING
BLOCKING
Rev. Interlock
Pilot wire comp
SIGNALv.ProtInt
Disabled
122 DTT Direct Trip Disabled Disabled DTT Direct Transfer Trip
Enabled
7SA6 Manual 39
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

124 SOTF Overcurr. Disabled Disabled Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF
Enabled Overcurrent
125 Weak Infeed Disabled Disabled Weak Infeed (Trip and/or Echo)
Enabled
Logic no. 2
126 Back-Up O/C Disabled TOC IEC Backup overcurrent
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
TOC IEC /w 3ST
130 Sens. Earth Flt Disabled Disabled Sensitive Earth Flt.(comp/ isol.
Enabled starp.)
131 Earth Fault O/C Disabled Disabled Earth fault overcurrent
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
TOC Logarithm.
Definite Time
U0 inverse
Sr inverse
132 Teleprot. E/F Dir.Comp.Pickup Disabled Teleprotection for Earth fault over-
SIGNALv.ProtInt curr.
UNBLOCKING
BLOCKING
Disabled
133 Auto Reclose 1 AR-cycle Disabled Auto-Reclose Function
2 AR-cycles
3 AR-cycles
4 AR-cycles
5 AR-cycles
6 AR-cycles
7 AR-cycles
8 AR-cycles
ADT
Disabled
134 AR control mode Pickup w/ Tact Trip w/ Tact Auto-Reclose control mode
Pickup w/o Tact
Trip w/ Tact
Trip w/o Tact
135 Synchro-Check Disabled Disabled Synchronism and Voltage Check
Enabled
136 FREQUENCY Prot. Disabled Disabled Over / Underfrequency Protection
Enabled
137 U/O VOLTAGE Disabled Disabled Under / Overvoltage Protection
Enabled
Enabl. w. comp.
138 Fault Locator Enabled Enabled Fault Locator
Disabled
with BCD-output
139 BREAKER FAILURE Disabled Disabled Breaker Failure Protection
Enabled
enabled w/ 3I0>
140 Trip Cir. Sup. Disabled Disabled Trip Circuit Supervision
1 trip circuit
2 trip circuits
3 trip circuits
40 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General

142 Ther. OVERLOAD Disabled Disabled Thermal overload protection
Enabled
145 P. INTERFACE 1 Enabled Enabled Protection Interface 1 (Port D)
Disabled
147 NUMBER OF RELAY 2 relays 2 relays Number of relays
3 relays
150 AnalogOutput B1 Disabled Disabled Analog Output B1 (Port B)
IL2 [%]
UL23 [%]
|P| [%]
|Q| [%]
d [%]
d [km]
d [miles]
Imax TRIP [pri]
IL2 [%]
UL23 [%]
|P| [%]
|Q| [%]
d [%]
d [km]
d [miles]
Imax TRIP [pri]
152 AnalogOutput D1 Disabled Disabled Analog Output D1 (Port D)
IL2 [%]
UL23 [%]
|P| [%]
|Q| [%]
d [%]
d [km]
d [miles]
Imax TRIP [pri]
IL2 [%]
UL23 [%]
|P| [%]
|Q| [%]
d [%]
d [km]
d [miles]
Imax TRIP [pri]
7SA6 Manual 41
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.1.2 Power System Data 1
The device requires some plant and power system data in order to be able to adapt its
functions accordingly, dependent on the actual application. The data required include
for instance rated data of the substation and the measuring transformers, polarity and
connection of the measured quantities, if necessary features of the circuit breakers,
and others. Furthermore, there is a number of settings associated with several func-
tions rather than a specific protection, control or monitoring function. The Power
System Data 1 can only be changed from a PC running DIGSI and are discussed in
this section.
General In DIGSI double-click on Settings to display the relevant selection. A dialog box with
the tabs Transformers, Power System and Breaker will open under Power System
Data 1 in which you can configure the individual parameters. The following subsec-
tions are structured in the same way.
Current In address 201 CT Starpoint, the polarity of the wye-connected current transform-
Transformer ers is specified (the following figure also goes for only two current transformers). The
Polarity setting determines the measuring direction of the device (forward = line direction). A
change in this setting also results in a polarity reversal of the earth current inputs IE or
IEE.
Figure 2-1 Polarity of current transformers
42 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
Nominal Values of In addresses 203 Unom PRIMARY and 204 Unom SECONDARY the device obtains in-
the Transformers formation on the primary and secondary rated voltage (phase-to-phase voltage) of the
voltage transformers.
It is important to ensure that the rated secondary current of the current transformer
matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will incorrectly calculate
primary amperes.
Correct entry of the primary data is a prerequisite for the correct computation of oper-
ational measured values with primary magnitude. If the settings of the device are per-
formed with primary values using DIGSI, these primary data are an indispensable re-
quirement for the correct function of the device.
VoltageConnection The device features four voltage measuring inputs, three of which are connected to
the set of voltage transformers. Various possibilities exist for the fourth voltage input
U4 :
Connection of the U4 input to the open delta winding e-n of the voltage transformer
set:
Address 210 is then set to: U4 transformer = Udelta transf..
When connected to the e-n winding of a set of voltage transformers, the voltage
transformation ratio of the voltage transformers is usually:
The factor Uph/Udelta (secondary voltage, address 211 Uph / Udelta) must be
set to 3/3 = 3 1.73. For other transformation ratios, i.e. the formation of the dis-
placement voltage via an interconnected transformer set, the factor must be cor-
rected accordingly. This factor is of importance if the 3U0> protective element is
used and for the monitoring of the measured values and the scaling of the measure-
ment and disturbance recording signals.
Connection of the U4 input to perform the synchronism check:
Address 210 is then set to: U4 transformer = Usy2 transf..
If the voltage transformers for the protective functions Usy1 are located on the out-
going feeder side, the U4 transformer has to be connected to a busbar voltage Usy2.
Synchronisation is also possible if the voltage transformers for the protective func-
tions Usy1 are connected on busbar side, in which case the additional U4 transform-
er must be connected to a feeder voltage.
If the transformation ratio differs, this can be adapted with the setting in address
215 Usy1/Usy2 ratio. In address 212 Usy2 connection, the type of voltage
connected to measuring point Usy2 for synchronism check is configured. The device
then selects automatically the voltage at measuring point Usy1. If the two measuring
points used for synchronism check i.e. feeder voltage transformer and busbar
voltage transformer are not separated by devices that cause a relative phase
shift, then the parameter in address 214 Usy2-Usy1 is not required. This pa-
rameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. If however a
power transformer is connected in between, its vector group must be considered.
The phase angle from Usy1 to Usy2 is evaluated positively.
7SA6 Manual 43
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Example: (see also Figure 2-2)

Busbar 400 kV primary, 110 V secondary,
Feeder 220 kV primary, 100 V secondary,
Transformer 400 kV / 220 kV, vector group Dy(n) 5
The transformer vector group is defined from the high side to the low side. In this
example, the feeder voltage is connected to the low voltage side of the transformer.
If Usync (busbar or high voltage side) is placed at zero degrees, then Uline is at 5
x 30 (according to the vector group) in the clockwise direction, i.e. at 150. A pos-
itive angle is obtained by adding 360:
Address 214: Usy2-Usy1 = 360 - 150 = 210.
The busbar transformers supply 110 V secondary for primary operation at nominal
value while the feeder transformer supplies 100 V secondary. Therefore, this differ-
ence must be balanced:
Address 215: Usy1/Usy2 ratio = 100 V / 110 V = 0.91.
Figure 2-2 Busbar voltage measured via transformer
Connection of the U4 input to any other voltage signal UX, which can be processed
by the overvoltage protection function:
Address 210 is then set to: U4 transformer = Ux transformer.
If the input U4 is not required, set:
Address 210 U4 transformer = Not connected.
Factor Uph / Udelta (address 211, see above) is also of importance in this case,
as it is used for scaling the measured data and fault recording data.
44 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
Current Connection The device features four current measurement inputs, three of which are connected
to the set of current transformers. Various possibilities exist for the fourth current input
I4:
Connection of the I4 input to the earth current in the starpoint of the set of current
transformers on the protected feeder (normal connection):
Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = In prot. line and address
221 I4/Iph CT = 1.
Connection of the I4 input to a separate earth current transformer on the protected
feeder (e.g. a summation CT or core balance CT):
Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = In prot. line and address
221 I4/Iph CT is set:
This is independent of whether the device has a normal measuring current input for
I4 or a sensitive measuring current input for (for sensitive earth fault detection in un-
earthed power systems).
Example:
Phase current transformers 500 A / 5 A
Earth current transformer 60 A / 1 A
Connection of the I4 input to the earth current of the parallel line (for parallel line
compensation of the distance protection and/or fault location):
Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = In paral. line and usually
address 221 I4/Iph CT = 1.
If the set of current transformers on the parallel line however has a different trans-
formation ratio to those on the protected line, this must be taken into account in
address 221:
Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = In paral. line and address
221 I4/Iph CT = IN paral. line / IN prot. line
Example:
Current transformers on protected line 1200 A
Current transformers on parallel line 1500 A
Connection of the I4 input to the starpoint current of a transformer; this connection

is occasionally used for the polarisation of the directional earth fault protection:
Address 220 is then set to: I4 transformer = IY starpoint, and address 221
I4/Iph CT is according to transformation ratio of the starpoint transformer to the
transformer set of the protected line.
If the input I4 is not required, set:
Address 220 I4 transformer = Not connected,
Address 221 I4/Iph CT is then irrelevant.
In this case, the neutral current is calculated from the sum of the phase currents.
7SA6 Manual 45
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Nominal frequency The nominal frequency of the system is set in address 230 Rated Frequency. The
presetting according to the ordering code (MLFB) only needs to be changed if the
device is applied in a region different to the one indicated when ordering. You can set
50 Hz or 60 Hz.
System Starpoint The manner in which the system starpoint is earthed must be considered for the
correct processing of earth faults and double earth faults. Accordingly, set for address
207 SystemStarpoint = Solid Earthed, Peterson-Coil or Isolated. For
low-resistant earthed systems set Solid Earthed.
Phase Rotation Use address 235 PHASE SEQ. to change the default setting (L1 L2 L3 for clockwise
rotation) if your power system has a permanent anti-clockwise phase sequence (L1
L3 L2).
Distance Unit Address 236 Distance Unit determines the distance unit (km or Miles) for the
fault location indications. If the compounding function of the voltage protection is used,
the overall line capacitance is calculated from the line length and the capacitance per
unit length. If compounding is not used and fault location is not available, this param-
eter is of no consequence. Changing the distance unit will not result in an automatic
conversion of the setting values which depend on this distance unit. They have to be
re-entered into their corresponding valid addresses.
Mode of Earth Matching of the earth to line impedance is an essential prerequisite for the accurate
Impedance measurement of the fault distance (distance protection, fault locator) during earth
(Residual) faults. In address 237 Format Z0/Z1 the format for entering the residual compen-
Compensation sation is determined. It is possible to use either the ratio RE/RL, XE/XL or to enter
the complex earth (residual) impedance factor K0. The setting of the earth (residual)
impedance factors is done in the power system data 2 (refer to Section 2.1.4).
Single-pole Address 238 EarthFltO/C 1p specifies whether the earth-fault settings for single-
Tripping on an pole tripping and blocking in the single-pole dead time are accomplished together for
Earth Fault all stages (setting stages together) or separately (setting stages separat.).
The actual settings are specified with the settings for earth fault overcurrent protection
in earthed systems (see section 2.7.2) with the irrelevant addresses hidden. This pa-
rameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
Operating time of The circuit breaker closing time T-CB close at address 239 is required if the device
the circuit breaker is to close also under asynchronous system conditions, no matter whether for manual
closing, for automatic reclosing after three-pole tripping, or both. The device will then
calculate the time for the close command such that the voltages are phase-synchro-
nous the instant the breaker poles make contact.
46 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
Trip Command In address 240 the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is set. This
Duration applies to all protection and control functions which may issue a trip command. It also
determines the duration of the trip pulse when a circuit breaker trip test is initiated via
the device. This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Set-
tings.
In address 241 the maximum close command duration TMax CLOSE CMD is set. It
applies to all close commands issued by the device. It also determines the length of
the close command pulse when a circuit breaker test cycle is issued via the device. It
must be long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker has securely closed. There is
no risk in setting this time too long, as the close command will in any event be termi-
nated following a new trip command from a protection function. This parameter can
only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
Circuit Breaker Test 7SA6 allows a circuit breaker test during operation by means of a tripping and a
closing command entered on the front panel or using DIGSI. The duration of the trip
command is set as explained above. Address 242 T-CBtest-dead determines the
duration from the end of the trip command until the start of the close command for this
test. It should not be less than 0.1 s.
2.1.2.2 Settings
Addresses which have an appended "A" can only be changed with DIGSI, under Ad-
ditional Settings.

201 CT Starpoint towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint
towards Busbar
203 Unom PRIMARY 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 400.0 kV Rated Primary Voltage
204 Unom SECONDARY 80 .. 125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (Ph-Ph)
205 CT PRIMARY 10 .. 5000 A 1000 A CT Rated Primary Current
206 CT SECONDARY 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current
5A
207 SystemStarpoint Solid Earthed Solid Earthed System Starpoint is
Peterson-Coil
Isolated
210 U4 transformer Not connected Not connected U4 voltage transformer is
Udelta transf.
Usy2 transf.
Ux transformer
211 Uph / Udelta 0.10 .. 9.99 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To
Open-Delta-VT
212 Usy2 connection L1-E L1-L2 VT connection for Usy2
L2-E
L3-E
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
214A Usy2-Usy1 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment Usy2-Usy1
215 Usy1/Usy2 ratio 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Matching ratio Usy1 / Usy2
7SA6 Manual 47
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

220 I4 transformer Not connected In prot. line I4 current transformer is
In prot. line
In paral. line
IY starpoint
221 I4/Iph CT 0.010 .. 5.000 1.000 Matching ratio I4/Iph for CT's
230 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
60 Hz
235 PHASE SEQ. L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Phase Sequence
L1 L3 L2
236 Distance Unit km km Distance measurement unit
Miles
237 Format Z0/Z1 RE/RL, XE/XL RE/RL, XE/XL Setting format for zero seq.comp.
K0 format
238A EarthFltO/C 1p stages together stages together Earth Fault O/C: setting for 1pole
stages separat. AR
239 T-CB close 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB
240A TMin TRIP CMD 0.02 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Minimum TRIP Command Dura-
tion
241A TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Maximum Close Command Dura-
tion
242 T-CBtest-dead 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Dead Time for CB test-autoreclo-
sure
2.1.3 Change Group
2.1.3.1 Purpose of the Setting Groups
Up to four independent setting groups can be created for establishing the device's
function settings. During operation, the user can locally switch between setting groups
using the operator panel, binary inputs (if so configured), the operator and service in-
terface per PC, or via the system interface. For reasons of safety it is not possible to
change between setting groups during a power system fault.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as
Enabled during configuration (see Section 2.1.1.2). In 7SA6 devices, four indepen-
dent setting groups (A to D) are available. Whereas setting values and options may
vary, the selected scope of functions is the same for all groups.
Setting groups enable the user to save the corresponding settings for each applica-
tion. When they are needed, settings may be loaded quickly. All setting groups are
stored in the relay. Only one setting group may be active at a given time.
48 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
General If multiple setting groups are not required. Group A is the default selection. Then, the
rest of this section is not applicable.
If multiple setting groups are desired, the setting group change option must be set to
Grp Chge OPTION = Enabled in the relay configuration of the functional scope
(Section 2.1.1.2, address 103). For the setting of the function parameters, you can
configure each of the required setting groups A to D, one after the other. A maximum
of 4 is possible. To find out how to proceed, how to copy and to reset settings groups
to the delivery state, and how to switch between setting groups during operation,
please refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Two binary inputs enable changing between the 4 setting groups from an external
source.
2.1.3.3 Settings

302 CHANGE Group A Group A Change to Another Setting Group
Group B
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
2.1.3.4 Information List
No. Information Type of In- Comments

formation
- Group A IntSP Group A
- Group B IntSP Group B
- Group C IntSP Group C
- Group D IntSP Group D
7 >Set Group Bit0 SP >Setting Group Select Bit 0
8 >Set Group Bit1 SP >Setting Group Select Bit 1
7SA6 Manual 49
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.1.4 Power System Data 2
The general protection data (P.System Data 2) include settings associated with all
functions rather than a specific protection, monitoring or control function. In contrast
to the P.System Data 1 as discussed before, these can be changed over with the
setting groups and can be configured via the operator panel of the device.
Rating of the Pro- The rated primary voltage (phase-to-phase) and rated primary current (phases) of the
tected Object protected equipment are entered in the address 1103 FullScaleVolt. and 1104
FullScaleCurr.. These settings are required for indication of operationalmeasured
values in percent. If these rated values match the primary VT's and CT's, they corre-
spond to the settings in address 203 and 205 (Subsection 2.1.2.1).
General Line Data The settings of the line data in this case refers to the common data which is indepen-
dent of the actual distance protection grading.
The line angle (address 1105 Line Angle) may be derived from the line parameters.
The following applies:
where RL is being the resistance and XL the reactance of the protected feeder. The line
parameters may either apply to the entire line length, or be per unit of line length as
the quotient is independent of length. Furthermore it makes no difference if the quo-
tients are calculated with primary or secondary values.
The line angle is of major importance, e.g. for earth impedance matching according to
amount and angle or for compounding in overvoltage protection.
Calculation Example:
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the following data:
R'1 = 0.19 /km
X'1 = 0.42 /km
The line angle is computed as follows
In address 1105 the setting Line Angle = 66 is entered.

Address 1211 Distance Angle specifies the angle of inclination of the R sections
of the distance protection polygons. Usually you can also set the line angle here as in
address 1105.
50 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
The directional values (power, power factor, work and related min., max., mean and
setpoint values), calculated in the operational measured values, are usually defined
with positive direction towards the protected object. This requires that the connection
polarity for the entire device was configured accordingly in the Power System Data 1
(compare also Polarity of Current Transformers, address 201). But it is also possible
to define by setting the forward direction for the protection functions and the positive
direction for the power etc. differently, e.g. so that the active power flow (from the line
to the busbar is indicated in the positive sense. Set under address 1107 P,Q sign
the option reversed. If the setting is not reversed (default), the positive direction
for the power etc. corresponds to the forward direction for the protection functions.
The reactance value X' of the protected line is entered as reference value x' at
address 1110 in /km if the distance unit was set as kilometer (address 236, see
section 2.1.2.1 at Distance Unit), or at address 1112 in /mile if mile was selected
as distance unit. The corresponding line length is entered in address 1111 Line
Length in kilometers or under address 1113 in miles. If the distance unit in address
236 is changed after the per unit length impedances in address 1112 or 1111 or the
line length in address 1113 or 1110 have been entered, the line data must be entered
again for the revised unit of length.
The capacitance value C' of the protected line is required for compounding in overvolt-
age protection. Without compounding it is of no consequence. It is entered as a refer-
ence value c' at address 1114 in F/km if set to distance unit kilometres (address
236, see section 2.1.2.1 at Distance Unit), or at address 1115 in F/mile if mile was
set as distance unit. If the unit of line length in address 236 is changed, then the rele-
vant line data in the address range from 1110 to 1115 must be re-entered for the
revised unit of length.
When entering the parameters with a personal computer and DIGSI, the values can
also be entered as primary values. If the nominal quantities of the primary transform-
ers (U, I) are set to minimum, primary values allow only a rough setting of the value
parameters. In such cases it is preferable to set the parameters in secondary quanti-
ties.
For conversion of primary values to secondary values the following applies in general:
Likewise, the following goes for the reactance setting of a line:
where
NCT = Current transformer ratio
NVT = Transformation ratio of voltage transformer
The following applies for the capacitance per distance unit:
7SA6 Manual 51
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 as above
R'1 = 0.19 /km
X'1 = 0.42 /km
C' = 0.008 F/km
Current Transformer 600 A / 1 A
Voltage transformer 110 kV / 0.1 kV
The secondary per distance unit reactance is therefore:
In address 1110 the setting x' = 0.229 /km is entered.

The secondary per distance unit capacitance is therefore:
In address 1114 the setting c' = 0.015 F/km is entered.
Earth Impedance Setting of the earth to line impedance ratio is an essential prerequisite for the accurate
Ratio measurement of the fault distance (distance protection, fault locator) during earth
faults. This compensation is either achieved by entering the resistance ratio RE/RL and
the reactance ratio XE/XL or by entry of the complex earth (residual) compensation
factor K0. Which of these two entry options applies, was determined by the setting in
address 237 Format Z0/Z1 (refer to Section 2.1.2.1). Only the addresses applicable
for this setting will be displayed.
Earth Impedance When entering the resistance ratio RE/RL and the reactance ratio XE/XL the addresses
(Residual) 1116 to 1119 apply. They are calculated separately, and do not correspond to the real
Compensation with and imaginary components of ZE/ZL. A computation with complex numbers is therefore
Scalar Factors not necessary! The ratios are obtained from system data using the following formulas:
RE/RL and XE/XL
Resistance ratio: Reactance ratio:
Where
R0 = Zero sequence resistance of the line
X0 = Zero sequence reactance of the line
R1 = Positive sequence resistance of the line
X1 = Positive sequence reactance of the line
These values may either apply to the entire line length or be based on a per unit of line
length, as the quotients are independent of length. Furthermore it makes no difference
if the quotients are calculated with primary or secondary values.
52 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data
R1/s = 0.19 /km positive sequence impedance
X1/s = 0.42 /km positive sequence impedance
R0/s = 0.53 /km zero sequence impedance
X0/s = 1.19 /km zero sequence impedance
(where s = line length)
For earth impedance ratios, the following emerge:
The earth impedance (residual) compensation factor setting for the first zone Z1 may
be different from that of the remaining zones of the distance protection. This allows the
setting of the exact values for the protected line, while at the same time the setting for
the back-up zones may be a close approximation even when the following lines have
substantially different earth impedance ratios (e.g. cable after an overhead line). Ac-
cordingly, the settings for the address 1116 RE/RL(Z1)and 1117 XE/XL(Z1) are
determined with the data of the protected line while the addresses 1118
RE/RL(Z1B...Z5) and 1119 XE/XL(Z1B...Z5) apply to the remaining zones
Z1B and Z2 up to Z5 (as seen from the relay location).
Note
When addresses 1116 RE/RL(Z1) and 1118 RE/RL(Z1B...Z5) are set to about
2.0 or more, please keep in mind that the zone reach in R direction should not be set
higher than the previously determined (see Section 2.2.2.2/margin heading Resis-
tance Tolerance). If this is not observed, it may happen that phase-to-earth impedance
loops are measured in an incorrect distance zone, which may lead to loss of tripping
coordination in the case of earth faults with fault resistances.
Earth Impedance When the complex earth impedance (residual) compensation factor K0 is set, the ad-
(Residual) dresses 1120 to 1123 apply. In this case it is important that the line angle is set cor-
Compensation with rectly (address 1105, see margin heading General Line Data) as the device needs
Magnitude and the line angle to calculate the compensation components from the K0. These earth im-
Angle (K0Factor) pedance compensation factors are defined with their magnitude and angle which may
be calculated with the line data using the following equation:
Where
Z0 = (complex) zero sequence impedance of the line
Z1 = (complex) positive sequence impedance of the line
7SA6 Manual 53
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
These values may either apply to the entire line length or be based on a per unit of line
length, as the quotients are independent of length. Furthermore it makes no difference
if the quotients are calculated with primary or secondary values.
For overhead lines it is generally possible to calculate with scalar quantities as the
angle of the zero sequence and positive sequence system only differ by an insignifi-
cant amount. With cables however, significant angle differences may exist as illustrat-
ed by the following example.
110 kV single-conductor oil-filled cable 3 185 mm2 Cu with the following data
Z1/s = 0.408 ej73 /km positive sequence impedance
Z0/s = 0.632 ej18.4 /km zero sequence impedance
(where s = line length)
The calculation of the earth impedance (residual) compensation factor K0 results in:
The magnitude of K0 is therefore
When determining the angle, the quadrant of the result must be considered. The fol-
lowing table indicates the quadrant and range of the angle which is determined by the
signs of the calculated real and imaginary part of K0.
Table 2-1 Quadrants and ranges of the angle K0

Real part Imaginary tan (K0) Quadrant/range Calculation
part
+ + + I 0 ... +90 arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ IV 90 ... 0 arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ III 90 ... 180 arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) 180
+ II +90 ... +180 arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180
In this example the following result is obtained:
54 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
The magnitude and angle of the earth impedance (residual) compensation factors
setting for the first zone Z1 and the remaining zones of the distance protection may be
different. This allows the setting of the exact values for the protected line, while at the
same time the setting for the back-up zones may be a close approximation even when
the following lines have substantially different earth impedance factors (e.g. cable after
an overhead line). Accordingly, the settings for the address 1120 K0 (Z1)and 1121
Angle K0(Z1) are determined with the data of the protected line while the addresses
1122 K0 (> Z1) and 1123 Angle K0(> Z1) apply to the remaining zones Z1B
and Z2 up to Z5 (as seen from the relay mounting location).
Note
If a combination of values is set which is not recognized by the device, it operates with
preset values K0 = 1 e0. The information Dis.ErrorK0(Z1) (No. 3654) or
DisErrorK0(>Z1) (No. 3655) appears in the event logs.
Parallel Line If the device is applied to a double circuit line (parallel lines) and parallel line compen-
Mutual Impedance sation for the distance and/or fault location function is used, the mutual coupling of the
(optional) two lines must be considered. A prerequisite for this is that the earth (residual) current
of the parallel line has been connected to the measuring input I4 of the device and that
this was configured with the power system data (Section 2.1.2.1) by setting the appro-
priate parameters.
The coupling factors may be determined using the following equations:
Resistance ratio: Reactance ratio:
where
R0M = Mutual zero sequence resistance (coupling resistance) of the line
X0M = Mutual zero sequence reactance (coupling reactance) of the line
R1 = Positive sequence resistance of the line
X1 = Positive sequence reactance of the line
These values may either apply to the entire double circuit line length or be based on
a per unit of line length, as the quotient is independent of length. Furthermore it makes
no difference whether the quotients are calculated with primary, or secondary values.
These setting values only apply to the protected line and are entered in the addresses
1126 RM/RL ParalLine and 1127 XM/XL ParalLine.
For earth faults on the protected feeder there is in theory no additional distance pro-
tection or fault locator measuring error when the parallel line compensation is used.
The setting in address 1128 RATIO Par. Comp is therefore only relevant for earth
faults outside the protected feeder. It provides the current ratio IE/IEP for the earth
current balance of the distance protection (in Figure 2-3 for the device at location II),
above which compensation should take place. In general, a presetting of 85 % is suf-
ficient. A more sensitive (larger) setting has no advantage. Only in the case of a severe
system asymmetry, or a very small coupling factor (XM/XL below approximately 0.4),
may a smaller setting be useful. A more detailed explanation of parallel line compen-
sation can be found in Section 2.2.1 under distance protection.
7SA6 Manual 55
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-3 Distance with parallel line compensation at II
The current ratio may also be calculated from the desired distance of the parallel line
compensation and vice versa. The following applies (refer to Figure 2-3):
CT saturation 7SA6 contains a saturation detector which largely detects the measuring errors result-
ing from the saturation of the current transformers and initiates a switchover to dis-
tance measurement. The threshold above which it picks up can be set in address
1140 I-CTsat. Thres.. This is the current level above which saturation may be
present. The setting disables the saturation detector. This parameter can only be
altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. If current transformer saturation is
expected, the following equation may be used as a thumb rule for this setting:
PN = Nominal CT burden [VA]

Pi = Nominal CT internal burden [VA]
P' = Actual connected burden (protection device + connection cable)
Circuit breaker Information regarding the circuit breaker position is required by various protection and
status supplementary functions to ensure their optimal functionality. The device has a circuit
breaker status recognition which processes the status of the circuit breaker auxiliary
contacts and contains also a detection based on the measured currents and voltages
for opening and closing (see also Section 2.23.1).
In address 1130 the residual current PoleOpenCurrent is set, which will definitely
not be exceeded when the circuit breaker pole is open. If parasitic currents (e.g.
through induction) can be excluded when the circuit breaker is open, this setting may
be very sensitive. Otherwise this setting must be increased. Usually the presetting is
sufficient. This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Set-
tings.
56 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
The residual voltage PoleOpenVoltage, which will definitely not be exceeded when
the circuit breaker pole is open, is set in address 1131. Voltage transformers must be
on the line side. The setting should not be too sensitive because of possible parasitic
voltages (e.g. due to capacitive coupling). It must in any event be set below the small-
est phase-earth voltage which may be expected during normal operation. Usually the
presetting is sufficient. This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Addi-
tional Settings.
The switch-on-to-fault activation (seal-in) time SI Time all Cl. (address 1132)
determines the activation period of the protection functions enabled during each ener-
gization of the line (e.g. fast tripping high-current stage). This time is started by the in-
ternal circuit breaker switching detection when it recognizes energization of the line or
by the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts, if these are connected to the device via binary
input to provide information that the circuit breaker has closed. The time should there-
fore be set longer than the circuit breaker operating time during closing plus the oper-
ating time of this protection function plus the circuit breaker operating time during
opening. This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
In address 1134 Line Closure the criteria for the internal recognition of line ener-
gization are determined. Manual CLOSE means that only the manual close signal via
binary input or the integrated control is evaluated as closure. I OR U or ManCl
implies that in addition, the measured current or voltage are used to determine closure
of the circuit breaker, whereas CB OR I or M/C means that , either CB auxiliary
contact status or measured current are used to detect line closure. If the voltage trans-
former are not situated on the line side, the setting CB OR I or M/C must be used.
In the case of I or Man.Close only the currents or the manual close signals are
used to recognize closing of the circuit breaker.
Address 1135 Reset Trip CMD determines under which conditions a trip command
is reset. If CurrentOpenPole is set, the trip command is reset as soon as the current
disappears. It is important that the value set in address 1130 PoleOpenCurrent
(see above) is undershot. If Current AND CB is set, the circuit breaker auxiliary
contact must send a message that the circuit breaker is open. It is a prerequisite for
this setting that the position of the auxiliary contacts is allocated via a binary input.
For special applications, in which the device trip command does not always lead to a
complete cutoff of the current, the setting Pickup Reset can be chosen. In this case,
the trip command is reset as soon as the pickup of the tripping protection function
drops off and - just as with the other setting options- the minimum trip command dura-
tion (address 240) has elapsed. The setting Pickup Reset makes sense, for in-
stance, during the test of the protection equipment, when the system-side load current
cannot be cut off and the test current is injected in parallel to the load current.
While the time SI Time all Cl. (address 1132, refer above) is activated following
each recognition of line energization, SI Time Man.Cl (address 1150) is the time
following manual closure during which special influence of the protection functions is
activated (e.g. increased reach of the distance protection). This parameter can only be
altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
7SA6 Manual 57
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Note
For CB Test and automatic reclosure the CB auxiliary contact status derived with the
binary inputs >CB1 ... (No. 366 to 371, 410 and 411) are relevant for the circuit breaker
test and for the automatic reclosure to indicate the CB switching status. The other
binary inputs >CB ... (No. 351 to 353, 379 and 380) are used for detecting the status
of the line (address 1134) and for reset of the trip command (address 1135). Address
1135 is also used by other protection functions, e.g. by the echo function, energization
in case of overcurrent etc. For use with one circuit breaker only, both binary input func-
tions, e.g. 366 and 351, can be allocated to the same physical input. For applications
with 2 circuit breakers per feeder (1.5 circuit breaker systems or ring bus), the binary
inputs >CB1... must be connected to the correct circuit breaker. The binary inputs
>CB... then need the correct signals for detecting the line status. In certain cases, an
additional CFC logic may be necessary.
Address 1136 OpenPoleDetect. defines the criteria for operating the open-pole de-
tector (see also section 2.23.1, sub-section Open-Pole Detector). When using the
default setting w/ measurement, all available data are evaluated that indicate single-
pole dead time. The internal trip command and pickup indications, the current and
voltage measured values and the CB auxiliary contacts are used. To evaluate only the
auxiliary contacts including the phase currents, set address 1136 to Current AND
CB. If you do not wish to detect single-pole dead time, set OpenPoleDetect. to OFF.
For manual closure of the circuit breaker via binary inputs, it can be specified in
address 1151 MAN. CLOSE whether the integrated manual CLOSE detection checks
the synchronism between the busbar voltage and the voltage of the switched feeder.
This setting does not apply for a close command via the integrated control functions.
If the synchronism check is desired, the device must either feature the integrated syn-
chronism check function or an external device for synchronism check must be con-
nected.
If the internal synchronism check is applied, the synchronism check function must be
enabled; an additional voltage Usy2 for synchronism check must be connected to the
device and this must be correctly parameterised in the Power System Data (Section
2.1.2.1, address 210 U4 transformer = Usy2 transf. and the associated fac-
tors).
If no synchronism check is to be performed with manual closing, set MAN. CLOSE =
w/o Sync-check. If a check is desired, set with Sync-check. To not use the
MANUAL CLOSE function of the device, set MAN. CLOSE to NO. This may be reason-
able if the close command is output to the circuit breaker without involving the 7SA6,
and the relay itself is not desired to issue a close command.
For commands via the integrated control (local control, DIGSI, serial interface)
address 1152 Man.Clos. Imp. determines whether a particular close command via
the integrated control function should be treated by the protection (like instantaneous
re-opening when switching onto a fault) like a MANUAL CLOSE command via binary
input. This address also informs the device for which switchgear this applies. You can
select from the switching devices which are available for the integrated control.
Choose that circuit breaker which usually operates for manual closure and, if required,
for automatic reclosure (usually Q0). If none is set here, a CLOSE command via the
control will not generate a MANUAL CLOSE impulse for the protection function.
58 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General
Three-pole Three-pole coupling is only relevant if single-pole auto-reclosures are carried out. If
coupling not, tripping is always three-pole. The remainder of this margin heading section is then
irrelevant.
Address 1155 3pole coupling determines whether any multi-phase pickup leads
to a three-pole tripping command, or whether only multi-pole tripping decisions result
in a three-pole tripping command. This setting is only relevant with one- and three-pole
tripping and therefore only available in this version. More information on this functions
is also contained in Subsection 2.23.1 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device.
With the setting with PICKUP every fault detection in more than one phase leads to
three-pole coupling of the trip outputs, even if only a single-phase earth fault is situated
within the tripping region, and further faults only affect the higher zones, or are located
in the reverse direction. Even if a single-phase trip command has already been issued,
each further fault detection will lead to three-pole coupling of the trip outputs.
If, on the other hand, this address is set to with TRIP, three-pole coupling of the trip
output (three-pole tripping) only occurs when more than one pole is tripped. Therefore
if a single-phase fault is located within the zone of tripping, and a further arbitrary fault
is outside the tripping zone, single-phase tripping is possible. Even a further fault
during the single-pole tripping will only cause three-pole coupling if it is located within
the tripping zone.
An exception to this is power swing detection. When power swing is detected, only
three-pole tripping is possible.
This parameter is valid for all protection functions of 7SA6 which are capable of single-
pole tripping.
The difference made by this parameter becomes apparent when multiple faults are
cleared, i.e. faults occurring almost simultaneously at different locations in the net-
work.
If, for example, two single-phase ground faults occur on different lines these may
also be parallel lines (Figure 2-4), the protective relays of all four line ends detect a
fault L1-L2-E, i.e. the pickup image is consistent with a two-phase earth fault. If single
pole tripping and reclosure is employed, it is therefore desirable that each line only
trips and recloses single pole. This is possible with setting 1155 3pole coupling =
with TRIP. In this manner each of the four relays at the four line ends recognizes
that single pole tripping for the fault on the respective line is required.
Figure 2-4 Multiple fault on a double-circuit line
In some cases, however, a three-pole tripping would be preferable for this fault sce-
nario, for example in the event that the double-circuit line is located in the vicinity of a
large generator unit (Figure 2-5). This is because the generator considers the two
single-phase to earth faults as one double-phase earth fault, with correspondingly high
dynamic load on the turbine shaft. With the setting 1155 3pole coupling = with
PICKUP, the two lines are switched off three-pole, since each device picks up as with
L1-L2-E, i.e. as with a multi-phase fault.
7SA6 Manual 59
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-5 Multiple fault on a double-circuit line next to a generator
Address 1156 Trip2phFlt determines that the short-circuit protection functions

perform only a single-pole trip in case of isolated two-phase faults (clear of earth), pro-
vided that single-pole tripping is possible and permitted. This allows a single-pole au-
tomatic reclosure cycle for this kind of fault. Of the two phases you can specify whether
the leading phase (1pole leading ), or the lagging phase 1pole lagging )
is tripped. The parameter is only available in versions with single-pole and three-pole
tripping. This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
If this possibility is to be used, you have to bear in mind that the phase selection should
be the same throughout the entire network and that it must be the same at all ends of
one line. More information on the functions is also contained in Section 2.23.1 Pickup
Logic for the Entire Device. The presetting 3pole is usually used.
2.1.4.2 Settings
ditional Settings.
The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the
corresponding secondary nominal current of the current transformer.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Comments

1103 FullScaleVolt. 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 400.0 kV Measurement: Full Scale
Voltage (100%)
1104 FullScaleCurr. 10 .. 5000 A 1000 A Measurement: Full Scale
Current (100%)
1105 Line Angle 10 .. 89 85 Line Angle
1107 P,Q sign not reversed not reversed P,Q operational measured
reversed values sign
1110 x' 1A 0.0050 .. 9.5000 /km 0.1500 /km x' - Line Reactance per
length unit
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 /km 0.0300 /km
1111 Line Length 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km Line Length
1112 x' 1A 0.0050 .. 15.0000 /mi 0.2420 /mi x' - Line Reactance per
length unit
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 /mi 0.0484 /mi
1113 Line Length 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles Line Length
1114 c' 1A 0.000 .. 100.000 F/km 0.010 F/km c' - capacit. per unit line
len. F/km
5A 0.000 .. 500.000 F/km 0.050 F/km
1115 c' 1A 0.000 .. 160.000 F/mi 0.016 F/mi c' - capacit. per unit line
len. F/mile
5A 0.000 .. 800.000 F/mi 0.080 F/mi
1116 RE/RL(Z1) -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. comp. factor
RE/RL for Z1
60 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General

1117 XE/XL(Z1) -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. comp. factor
XE/XL for Z1
1118 RE/RL(Z1B...Z5) -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. comp.factor
RE/RL for Z1B...Z5
1119 XE/XL(Z1B...Z5) -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. comp.factor
XE/XL for Z1B...Z5
1120 K0 (Z1) 0.000 .. 4.000 1.000 Zero seq. comp. factor K0
for zone Z1
1121 Angle K0(Z1) -135.00 .. 135.00 0.00 Zero seq. comp. angle for
zone Z1
1122 K0 (> Z1) 0.000 .. 4.000 1.000 Zero seq.comp.factor
K0,higher zones >Z1
1123 Angle K0(> Z1) -135.00 .. 135.00 0.00 Zero seq. comp. angle,
higher zones >Z1
1126 RM/RL ParalLine 0.00 .. 8.00 0.00 Mutual Parallel Line comp.
ratio RM/RL
1127 XM/XL ParalLine 0.00 .. 8.00 0.00 Mutual Parallel Line comp.
ratio XM/XL
1128 RATIO Par. Comp 50 .. 95 % 85 % Neutral current RATIO
Parallel Line Comp
1130A PoleOpenCurrent 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Pole Open Current
Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
1131A PoleOpenVoltage 2 .. 70 V 30 V Pole Open Voltage
Threshold
1132A SI Time all Cl. 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Seal-in Time after ALL clo-
sures
1133A T DELAY SOTF 0.05 .. 30.00 sec 0.25 sec minimal time for line open
before SOTF
1134 Line Closure only with ManCl only with ManCl Recognition of Line Clo-
I OR U or ManCl sures with
CB OR I or M/C
I or Man.Close
1135 Reset Trip CMD CurrentOpenPole CurrentOpenPole RESET of Trip Command
Current AND CB
Pickup Reset
1136 OpenPoleDetect. OFF w/ measurement open pole detector
Current AND CB
w/ measurement
1140A I-CTsat. Thres. 1A 0.2 .. 50.0 A; 20.0 A CT Saturation Threshold
5A 1.0 .. 250.0 A; 100.0 A
1150A SI Time Man.Cl 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.30 sec Seal-in Time after
MANUAL closures
1151 MAN. CLOSE with Sync-check NO Manual CLOSE
w/o Sync-check COMMAND generation
NO
7SA6 Manual 61
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

1152 Man.Clos. Imp. (Setting options depend None MANUAL Closure Impulse
on configuration) after CONTROL
1155 3pole coupling with PICKUP with TRIP 3 pole coupling
with TRIP
1156A Trip2phFlt 3pole 3pole Trip type with 2phase
1pole leading faults
1pole lagging
1211 Distance Angle 30 .. 90 85 Angle of inclination, dis-
tance charact.

formation
301 Pow.Sys.Flt. OUT Power System fault
302 Fault Event OUT Fault Event
303 E/F Det. OUT E/Flt.det. in isol/comp.netw.
351 >CB Aux. L1 SP >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L1
356 >Manual Close SP >Manual close signal
357 >Blk Man. Close SP >Block manual close cmd. from external
361 >FAIL:Feeder VT SP >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped)
362 >FAIL:Usy2 VT SP >Failure: Usy2 VT (MCB tripped)
366 >CB1 Pole L1 SP >CB1 Pole L1 (for AR,CB-Test)
371 >CB1 Ready SP >CB1 READY (for AR,CB-Test)
378 >CB faulty SP >CB faulty
379 >CB 3p Closed SP >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed
380 >CB 3p Open SP >CB aux. contact 3pole Open
381 >1p Trip Perm SP >Single-phase trip permitted from ext.AR
382 >Only 1ph AR SP >External AR programmed for 1phase only
383 >Enable ARzones SP >Enable all AR Zones / Stages
385 >Lockout SET SP >Lockout SET
386 >Lockout RESET SP >Lockout RESET
410 >CB1 3p Closed SP >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CB-Test)
411 >CB1 3p Open SP >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB-Test)
501 Relay PICKUP OUT Relay PICKUP
503 Relay PICKUP L1 OUT Relay PICKUP Phase L1
506 Relay PICKUP E OUT Relay PICKUP Earth
507 Relay TRIP L1 OUT Relay TRIP command Phase L1
62 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.1 General

formation
510 Relay CLOSE OUT Relay GENERAL CLOSE command
511 Relay TRIP OUT Relay GENERAL TRIP command
512 Relay TRIP 1pL1 OUT Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L1
515 Relay TRIP 3ph. OUT Relay TRIP command Phases L123
530 LOCKOUT IntSP LOCKOUT is active
533 IL1 = VI Primary fault current IL1
536 Definitive TRIP OUT Relay Definitive TRIP
545 PU Time VI Time from Pickup to drop out
546 TRIP Time VI Time from Pickup to TRIP
560 Trip Coupled 3p OUT Single-phase trip was coupled 3phase
561 Man.Clos.Detect OUT Manual close signal detected
562 Man.Close Cmd OUT CB CLOSE command for manual closing
563 CB Alarm Supp OUT CB alarm suppressed
590 Line closure OUT Line closure detected
591 1pole open L1 OUT Single pole open detected in L1
7SA6 Manual 63
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.2 Distance Protection
Distance protection is the main function of the device. It is characterized by high mea-
suring accuracy and the ability to adapt to the given system conditions. It is supple-
mented by a number of additional functions.
2.2.1 Distance protection, general settings
2.2.1.1 Earth Fault Detection
Functional Recognition of an earth fault is an important element in identifying the type of fault, as
Description the determination of the valid loops for measurement of the fault distance and the
shape of the distance zone characteristics substantially depend on whether the fault
at hand is an earth fault or not. The 7SA6 has a stabilized earth current measurement,
a zero sequence current/negative sequence current comparison as well as a displace-
ment voltage measurement.
Furthermore, special measures are taken to avoid a pickup for single earth faults in an
isolated or resonant-earthed system.
Earth Current 3I0 For earth current measurement, the fundamental sum of the numerically filtered phase
currents is supervised to detect if it exceeds the set value (parameter 3I0>
Threshold). Restraint is provided against spurious operation resulting from unsym-
metrical operating currents and error currents in the secondary circuits of the current
transformer due to different degrees of current transformer saturation during short-cir-
cuits without earth: the actual pick-up threshold automatically increases as the phase
current increases (Figure 2-6). The dropout threshold is approximately 95 % of the
pickup threshold.
Figure 2-6 Earth current stage: pickup characteristic
64 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Negative Sequence On long, heavily loaded lines, large currents could cause excessive restraint of the
Current 3I2> earth current measurement (ref. Figure 2-6). To ensure secure detection of earth faults
in this case, a negative sequence comparison stage is additionally provided. In the
event of a single-phase fault, the negative sequence current I2 has approximately the
same magnitude as the zero sequence current I0. When the ratio zero sequence
current / negative sequence current exceeds a preset ratio, this stage picks up. For
this stage, too, parabolic characteristic provides restraint in the event of large negative
sequence currents. Figure 2-7 illustrates this relationship. A release by means of the
negative sequence current comparison requires a current of at least0.2 IN for 3I0 and
3I2.
Figure 2-7 Characteristic of the I0/I2 stage
Displacement For the neutral displacement voltage recognition the displacement voltage (3U0) is
Voltage 3U0 numerically filtered and the fundamental frequency is monitored to recognize whether
it exceeds the set threshold. The dropout threshold is approximately 95 % of the
pickup threshold. In earthed systems (3U0> Threshold) it can be used as an addi-
tional criterion for earth faults. For earthed systems, the U0criterion may be disabled
by applying the setting.
Logical The current and voltage criteria supplement each other, as the displacement voltage
Combination for increases when the zero sequence to positive sequence impedance ratio is large,
Earthed Systems whereas the earth current increases when the zero sequence to positive sequence im-
pedance ratio is smaller. Therefore, the current and voltage criteria for earthed
systems are normally ORed. However, the two criteria may also be ANDed (settable,
see Figure 2-8). Setting 3U0> Threshold to infinite makes this criterion ineffective.
If the device detects a current transformer saturation in any phase current, the voltage
criterion is indeed crucial to the detection of an earth fault since irregular current trans-
former saturation can cause a faulty secondary zero-sequence current although no
primary zero-sequence current is present.
If displacement voltage detection has been made ineffective by setting 3U0>
Threshold to infinite, earth fault detection with the current criterion is possible even
if the current transformers are saturated.
7SA6 Manual 65
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
The earth fault recognition alone does not cause a general pickup of the distance pro-
tection, but merely controls the further fault detection modules. It is only alarmed in
case of a general fault detection.
Figure 2-8 Earth fault detection logic for earthed systems
Earth Fault In order to prevent undesired pickup of the earth fault detection, caused by load cur-
Recognition during rents during single-pole open condition, a modified earth fault detection is used during
Single-Pole Open single-pole open condition in earthed power systems (Figure 2-9). In this case, the
Condition magnitudes of the currents and voltages are monitored in addition to the angles
between the currents.
Figure 2-9 Earth fault recognition during single-pole open condition (example: single-pole
dead time L1)
66 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Logical In non-earthed systems (isolated system starpoint or resonant-earthed by means of a

Combination for Peterson coil) the measured displacement voltage is only used for pickup on double
Non-earthed earth faults. Earth fault detection by means of the displacement voltage is only possi-
Systems ble for asymmetric phase-to-phase voltages. In this way, double earth faults can be
detected even if no or only little earth current flows via the measuring point. What is
more, the symmetry criterion prevents undesired pickup on single earth faults. The
maximum asymmetry to be expected for a load current or a single earth fault can be
set via parameter 1223 Uph-ph unbal.. Furthermore, in these systems a simple
earth fault is assumed initially and the fault detection is suppressed in order to avoid
an erroneous pickup as a result of the earth fault inception transients. After a time
delay T3I0 1PHAS which can be set, the fault detection is released again; this is nec-
essary for the distance protection to still be able to detect a double earth fault with one
base point on a dead-end feeder. If the phase-to-phase voltages are asymmetrical,
this indicates a double earth fault and the pickup is released immediately.
Figure 2-10 Symmetry detection for phase-to-phase voltages

k= Setting of parameter 1223
Figure 2-11 Earth fault detection in isolated or resonant-earthed systems
7SA6 Manual 67
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.2.1.2 Pickup
Fault detection has to detect a faulty condition in the power system and to initiate all
the necessary procedures for selective clearance of the fault:
Start of the delay times for the directional and non-directional final stages,
Determination of the faulted loop(s),
Enabling of impedance calculation and direction determination,
Enabling of tripping command,
Initiation of supplementary functions
Indication/output of the faulted conductor(s).
Depending on the ordered version, the 7SA6 distance protection features a range of
fault detection modes, from which the appropriate type for the particular system con-
ditions can be selected. If the device only features impedance fault detection accord-
ing to its ordering code or if you have set the pickup mode Dis. PICKUP = Z<
(quadrilat.) (address 114) during configuration, please continue with section
2.2.1 Calculation of the Impedances. This type of fault detection works implicitly, i.e
the above-mentioned operations are executed automatically as soon as a fault is de-
tected in one of the distance zones.
Overcurrent Overcurrent pickup is a phase-selective pickup procedure. After numeric filtering, the
starting currents are monitored in each phase for transgression of a set value. A signal is
output for the phase(s) where the set threshold has been exceeded.
For processing the measured values (see Section 2.2.1 Calculation of the Impedanc-
es), the phase-selective pickup signals are converted into loop information. This
depends on the earth fault detection and - in earthed power systems - on the param-
eter 1ph FAULTS according to Table 2-2. For single-phase pickup without earth fault
detection in non-earthed power systems the phase-phase loop is always selected.
The phases that have picked up are signalled. If an earth fault has been detected, it
will also be alarmed.
The pickup will drop out if the signal falls below 95% of the pickup value.
Table 2-2 Loops and phase indications for single-phase overcurrent pickup
Pickup Earth Fault Parameter Valid Loop Alarmed

Module Detection 1ph FAULTS Phase(s)
L1 No L3-L1 L1, L3
L2 No phase-phase L1-L2 L1, L2
L3 No L2-L3 L2, L3
L1 No L1-E L1
L2 No phase-earth 1) L2-E L2
L3 No L3-E L3
L1 Yes L1-E L1, E
L2 Yes any L2-E L2, E
L3 Yes L3-E L3, E
1)
only active for earthed power systems
68 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Voltage-Dependent The U/I pickup is a per phase and per loop pickup mode. Here the phase currents
Current Fault must exceed a threshold, while the threshold value depends on the magnitude of the
Detection U/I loop voltage.
(Optional)
Pickup on earth faults is effectively suppressed in networks with non-earthed neutral
points by means of the measures described above in Section Earth Fault Detection.
The basic characteristics of the U/I pick-up can be seen from the currentvoltage char-
acteristic shown in Figure 2-12. The first requirement for every phase pickup is that of
the minimum current Iph> is exceeded. For the evaluation of phase-phase loops,
both relevant phase currents have to exceed this value. Above this current, the current
pickup is voltage-dependent with the slope being determined by the settings U(I>)
and U(I>>). For short-circuits with large currents the overcurrent pickup Iph>> is su-
perimposed. The bold dots in Figure 2-12 mark the settings which determine the ge-
ometry of the current/voltage characteristic.
The phases that have picked up are signalled. The picked up loops are relevant for
processing the measured values.
Loop pickup will drop out if the signal falls below 95 % of the respective current value
or exceeds approx. 105 % of the respective voltage value.
Figure 2-12 U/I characteristic
7SA6 Manual 69
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Pickup Modes The adaptation to different network conditions is determined by pickup modes.
The setting (PROGAM U/I) determines whether the phasephase loops or the phase
earth loops are always valid, or whether this depends on the earth fault detection. This
allows a very flexible adaptation to the network conditions. Optimum control mainly
depends on whether the network neutral is not earthed (isolated or compensated), has
a lowresistance or effective earthing. Setting notes are given in Section 2.2.1.4.
The evaluation of phaseearth loops is characterized by a high sensitivity in the event
of earth faults and is therefore highly advantageous in networks with earthed star
points. It automatically adapts to the prevailing infeed conditions; i.e. in the weak-
infeed operation mode it becomes more current-sensitive, with high load currents the
pickup threshold will be higher. This applies in particular if the network neutral is
earthed lowresistance. If only the phase-earth loops are evaluated, it must be
ensured that the overcurrent stage Iph>> responds in the event of phase-phase
faults. If only one measuring system picks up, it can be decided whether this will result
in a pickup of the phase-earth loops or the phase-phase loops in the earthed network
(see Table 2-3).
Table 2-3 Loops and phase indications for single-phase overcurrent pickup U I; Phase-to-
earth-voltages program
Pickup Measur- Measur- Earth fault Parameter Valid Alarmed
module ing ing detection 1ph FAULTS Loop Phase(s)
Current Voltage
L1 L1 L1-E No L3-L1 L1, L3
L2 L2 L2-E No phasephase L1-L2 L1, L2
L3 L3 L3-E No L2-L3 L2, L3
L1 L1 L1-E No L1-E L1
L2 L2 L2-E No phase-earth 1) L2-E L2
L3 L3 L3-E No L3-E L3
L1 L1 L1-E Yes L1-E L1, E
L2 L2 L2-E Yes any L2-E L2, E
1) only active for earthed power systems
When evaluating phasephase loops, the sensitivity towards phasephase faults is

particularly high. In extensive compensated networks this selection is advantageous
because it excludes pickup as a result of single earth faults on principle. With two- and
three-phase faults it automatically adapts to the prevailing infeed conditions, i.e. in the
weak-infeed operation mode it becomes more current-sensitive, with strong infeed
and high load currents the pickup threshold will be higher. If only phase-phase faults
are evaluated, the measuring loop is independent of the earth-fault detection, there-
fore this procedure is not suitable for earthed networks (see Table 2-4).
Table 2-4 Loops and phase indications for single-phase overcurrent pickup U I;
Phase-to-earth-voltages program
Pickup Measur- Measur- Earth Fault Parameter Valid Alarmed

module ing ing Detection 1ph FAULTS Loop Phase(s)
Current Voltage
L1 L1 L1-L2 L1-L2 L1, L2
L2 L2 L2-L3 any any L2-L3 L2, L3
L3 L3 L3-L1 L3-L1 L1, L3
70 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
If the option has been chosen whereby voltage loop selection is dependent on earth-
fault detection, then high sensitivity applies to phase-earth faults and to phasephase
faults. On principle, this option is independent of the treatment of the network neutral,
however, it requires that the earthfault criteria according to Section Earth Fault De-
tection are met for all earth faults or double earth faults (see Table 2-5).
Table 2-5 Loops and phase indications for single-phase overcurrent pickup U I; Phase-to-
earth-voltages program for earth fault, phase-to-phase voltages without earth
fault
Module ing ing Detection 1ph FAULTS Loop Phase(s)
Current Voltage
L1 L1 L1-L2 No L1-L2 L1, L2
L2 L2 L2-L3 No any L2-L3 L2, L3
L3 L3 L3-L1 No L3-L1 L1, L3
Finally, it is also possible to only evaluate phase-earth voltage loops if an earth fault
has been detected. For phase-phase faults only the overcurrent Iph>> will then pick
up. This is advantageous in networks with neutral points that have been earthed low
resistance, i.e. using earth-fault current limiting measures (so-called semisolid earth-
ing). In these cases only earth faults must be detected by the U/I pickup. In such net-
works it is usually even undesirable that phase-phase faults lead to a U/I pickup.
The measuring loop is independent of the setting 1ph FAULTS. Table 2-6 shows the
assignment of phase currents, loop voltages and measuring results.
Table 2-6 Loops and phase indications for single-phase overcurrent pickup U I;
Phase-to-earth-voltages program for earth fault, I>> without earth fault

Module ing ing Detection 1ph FAULTS Loop Phase(s)
Current Voltage
L1 L1 L1-E No no pickup
L2 L2 L2-E No any no alarm
L3 L3 L3-E No via UPh-E
The pickup signals of the loops are converted into phase signals so that the faulted
phase(s) can be indicated. If an earth fault has been detected, it will also be alarmed.
7SA6 Manual 71
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Voltage and Phase-angle controlled U/I pickup can be applied when the U/I characteristic criteria
Angle-dependent can no longer distinguish reliably between load and short-circuit conditions. This is the
Current Pickup case with small source impedances together with long lines or a sequence of lines and
U/I/ (Optional) intermediate infeed. Then the local measured voltage will only drop to a small extent
in the event of a short-circuit at the line end or in the back-up range of the distance
protection so that the phase angle between current and voltage is required as an ad-
ditional criterion for fault detection.
The U/I/ pickup is a per phase and per loop pickup mode. It is crucial for the phase
currents to exceed the pickup threshold, with the pickup value being dependent on the
size of the loop voltages and the phase angle between current and voltage.
A precondition for measuring the phase-to-phase angles is that the associated phase
currents as well as the current difference relevant for the loop have exceeded a
minimum value Iph> that can be set. The angle is determined by the phasetophase
voltage and its corresponding current difference.
A precondition for measuring the phase-earth angle is that the associated phase
current has exceeded a settable minimum value Iph> and that an earth fault has been
detected or only phase-to-earth measurements have been stipulated by setting pa-
rameters. The angle is determined by the phase-to-earth voltage and its correspond-
ing phase current without considering the earth current.
Pickup on earth faults is effectively suppressed in networks with non-earthed neutral
points by means of the measures described in Section Earth Fault Detection.
The basic characteristics of the U/I/ pick-up can be seen from the currentvoltage
characteristic shown in Figure 2-13. Initially it is shaped like the U/I pickup character-
istic (Figure 2-12).
For angles in the range of large phase difference, i.e. in the short-circuit angle area
above the threshold angle >, the characteristic between U(I>) and U(I>) also takes
effect; it is cut off by the overcurrent stage I>. The bold dots in Figure 2-13 mark the
settings which determine the geometry of the current/voltage characteristic. The
angle-dependent area, i.e. the area within the short-circuit angle of the characteristic
in Figure 2-13, can either be set to affect in forward direction (in direction of line) or in
both directions.
72 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-13 U/I/ characteristic
Loop pickup will drop out if the signal falls below 95% of the respective current value
or exceeds approx. 105% of the respective voltage value. A hysteresis of 5 applies
to phase-angle measuring.
The adaptation to different network conditions is determined by pickup modes. As the
U/I/ pickup is an extension of the U/I pickup, the same program options are available.
Table 2-3 to 2-6 also apply for singlephase pick-up.
2.2.1.3 Calculation of the Impedances
A separate measuring system is provided for each of the six possible impedance loops
L1-E, L2-E, L3-E, L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1. The phase-earth loops are evaluated when an
earth fault detection is recognized and the phase current exceeds a settable minimum
value Minimum Iph>. The phase-phase loops are evaluated when the phase current
in both of the affected phases exceeds the minimum value Minimum Iph>.
A jump detector synchronizes all the calculations with the fault inception. If a further
fault occurs during the evaluation, the new measured values are immediately used for
the calculation. The fault evaluation is therefore always done with the measured
values of the current fault condition.
7SA6 Manual 73
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Phase-Phase To calculate the phase-phase loop, for instance during a two-phase short circuit L1-
Loops L2 (Figure2-14) the loop equation is:
IL1 ZL IL2 ZL = UL1-E UL2-E
with
U, I the (complex) measured quantities and
Z = R + jX the (complex) line impedance.
The line impedance is computed to be
Figure 2-14 Short-circuit of a phase-phase loop
The calculation of the phase-phase loop does not take place as long as one of the con-
cerned phases is switched off (during single-pole dead time), to avoid an incorrect
measurement with the undefined measured values existing during this state. A state
recognition (refer to Section 2.23.1) provides the corresponding block signal. A logic
block diagram of the phase-phase measuring system is shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Logic for a phasephase measuring unit, shown by the example of the L1-L2
loop
74 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Phase-Earth Loops For the calculation of the phase-earth loop, for example during an L3-E short-circuit
(Figure 2-16) it must be noted that the impedance of the earth return path does not
correspond to the impedance of the phase.
Figure 2-16 Short-circuit of a phase-earth loop
In the faulted loop
the voltage UL3-E, the phase current IL3 and the earth current IE are measured. The im-
pedance to the fault location results from:
and
with
UL3-E = phasor of the short circuit voltage
IL3 = phasor of the phase short-circuit current
IE = phasor of the earth short-circuit current
U = phase angle of the short-circuit voltage
L = phase angle of the phase short-circuit current
E = phase angle of the earth short-circuit current
The factors RE/RL and XE/XL are dependent only from the line constants, and no longer
from the distance to fault.
7SA6 Manual 75
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
The evaluation of the phase-earth loop does not take place as long as the affected
phase is switched off (during single-pole dead time), to avoid an incorrect measure-
ment with the undefined measured values existing in this state. A state recognition
provides the corresponding block signal. A logic block diagram of the phase-earth
measuring system is shown in Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-17 Logic of the phase-earth measuring system
Unfaulted Loops The above considerations apply to the relevant short-circuited loop. A pickup with the
current-based fault detection modes (I>, U/I, U/I/) guarantees that only the faulty
loop(s) is/are released for the distance calculation. All six loops are calculated for the
impedance pickup; the impedances of the unfaulted loops are also influenced by the
short-circuit currents and voltages in the short-circuited phases. During a L1-E fault for
example, the short-circuit current in phase L1 also appears in the measuring loops L1-
L2 and L3-L1. The earth current is also measured in loops L2-E and L3-E. Combined
with load currents which may flow, the unfaulted loops produce the so called apparent
impedances which have nothing to do with the actual fault distance.
These apparent impedances in the unfaulted loops are usually larger than the short-
circuit impedance of the faulted loop because the unfaulted loop only carries a part of
the fault current and always has a larger voltage than the faulted loop. For the selec-
tivity of the zones, they are usually of no consequence.
Apart from the zone selectivity, the phase selectivity is also important to achieve
correct identification of the faulted phases, required to alarm the faulted phase and es-
pecially to enable single-pole automatic reclosure. Depending on the infeed condi-
tions, close-in short-circuits may cause unfaulted loops to see the fault further away
than the faulted loop, but still within the tripping zone. This would cause three-pole trip-
ping and therefore void the possibility of single-pole automatic reclosure. As a result
power transfer via the line would be lost.
In the 7SA6 this is avoided by the implementation of a loop verification function which
operates in two steps:
Initially, the calculated loop impedances and its components (phase and/or earth) are
used to simulate a replica of the line impedance. If this simulation returns a plausible
line image, the corresponding loop pickup is designated as a definitely valid loop.
If the impedances of more than one loop are now located within the range of the zone,
the smallest is still declared to be a valid loop. Furthermore, all loops that have an im-
pedance which does not exceed the smallest loop impedance by more than 50% are
declared as being valid. Loops with larger impedance are eliminated. Those loops
which were declared as being valid in the initial stage, cannot be eliminated by this
stage, even if they have larger impedances.
76 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
In this manner unfaulted apparent impedances are eliminated on the one hand, while
on the other hand, unsymmetrical multi-phase faults and multiple short-circuits are
recognized correctly.
The loops that were designated as being valid are converted to phase information so
that the fault detection correctly alarms the faulted phases.
Double Faults in In systems with an effectively or low-resistant earthed starpoint, each connection of a
Effectively Earthed phase with earth results in a short-circuit condition which must be isolated immediately
Systems by the closest protection systems. Fault detection occurs in the faulted loop associat-
ed with the faulted phase.
With double earth faults, fault detection is generally in two phase-earth loops. If both
earth loops are in the same direction, a phase-phase loop may also pick up. It is pos-
sible to restrict the fault detection to particular loops in this case. It is often desirable
to block the phase-earth loop of the leading phase, as this loop tends to overreach
when there is infeed from both ends to a fault with a common earth fault resistance
(Parameter 1221 2Ph-E faults = Block leading ). Alternatively, it is also pos-
sible to block the lagging phase-earth loop (Parameter 2Ph-E faults = Block
lagging ). All the affected loops can also be evaluated (Parameter 2Ph-E faults
= All loops), or only the phase-phase loop (Parameter 2Ph-E faults = -
loops only) or only the phase-earth loops (Parameter 2Ph-E faults = -E
loops only). All these restrictions presuppose that the affected loops have the same
direction.
In Table 2-7 the measured values used for the distance measurement in earthed
systems during double earth faults are shown.
Table 2-7 Evaluation of the measured loops for double earth faults in an earthed system
in case both earth faults are close to each other
Loop pickup Evaluated loop(s) Setting of parameter 1221
L1-E, L2-E, L1-L2 L2-E, L1-L2 2Ph-E faults = Block leading
L2-E, L3-E, L2-L3 L3-E, L2-L3
L1-E, L3-E, L3-L1 L1-E, L3-L1
L1-E, L2-E, L1-L2 L1-E, L1-L2 2Ph-E faults = Block lagging
L2-E, L3-E, L2-L3 L2-E, L2-L3
L1-E, L3-E, L3-L1 L3-E, L3-L1
L1-E, L2-E, L1-L2 L1-E, L2-E, L1-L2 2Ph-E faults = All loops
L2-E, L3-E, L2-L3 L2-E, L3-E, L2-L3
L1-E, L3-E, L3-L1 L1-E, L3-E, L3-L1
L1-E, L2-E, L1-L2 L1-L2 2Ph-E faults = - loops only
L2-E, L3-E, L2-L3 L2-L3
L1-E, L3-E, L3-L1 L3-L1
L1-E, L2-E, L1-L2 L1-E, L2-E 2Ph-E faults = -E loops only
L2-E, L3-E, L2-L3 L2-E, L3-E
L1-E, L3-E, L3-L1 L1-E, L3-E
During three phase faults the fault detection of all three phase-phase loops usually
occurs. In this case the three phase-phase loops are evaluated. If earth fault detection
also occurs, the phase-earth loops are also evaluated.
7SA6 Manual 77
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Double earth faults In isolated or resonant-earthed networks a single earth fault does not result in a short
in non-earthed circuit current flow. There is only a displacement of the voltage triangle (Figure 2-18).
systems For the system operation this state is no immediate danger. The distance protection
must not pick up in this case even though the voltage of the phase with the earth fault
is equal to zero in the whole galvanically connected system. Any load currents will
result in an impedance value that is equal to zero. Therefore a single-phase pickup
phase-earth without earth current pickup is avoided in the 7SA6.
Figure 2-18 Earth fault in non-earthed neutral system
With the occurrence of earth faults especially in large resonant-earthed systems

large fault inception transient currents can appear that may evoke the earth current
pick-up. In case of an overcurrent pick-up there may also be a phase current pick-up.
The 7SA6 features special measures against such spurious pickups.
With the occurrence of a double earth fault in isolated or resonant-earthed systems it
is sufficient to switch off one of the faults. The second fault may remain in the system
as a simple earth fault. Which of the faults is switched off depends on the double earth
fault preference which is set the same in the whole galvanically-connected system.
With 7SA6 the following double earth fault preferences (Parameter 1220 PHASE
PREF.2phe) can be selected:
Acyclic L3 before L1 before L2 L3 (L1) ACYCLIC

Cyclic L3 before L1 before L2 before L3 L3 (L1) CYCLIC
Cyclic L1 before L3 before L2 before L1 L1 (L3) CYCLIC
All loops are measured All loops
In all eight preference options, one earth fault is switched off according to the prefer-
ence scheme. The second fault can remain in the system as a simple earth fault. It can
be detected with the Earth Fault Detection in Non-earthed Systems (optional).
The 7SA6 also enables the user to switch off both fault locations of a double earth
fault. Set the double earth fault preference to All loops.
Table 2-8 lists all measured values used for the distance measuring in isolated or res-
onant-earthed systems.
78 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 2-8 Evaluation of the Measuring Loops for Multi-phase Pickup in the Non-earthed
Network
Loop pickup Evaluated loop(s) Setting of parameter 1220

L1-E, L2-E, (L1-L2) L1-E PHASE PREF.2phe = L3 (L1) ACYCLIC
L2-E, L3-E, (L2-L3) L3-E
L1-E, L3-E, (L3-L1) L3-E
L2-E, L3-E, (L2-L3) L3-E
L1-E, L3-E, (L3-L1) L1-E
L2-E, L3-E, (L2-L3) L2-E
L1-E, L3-E, (L3-L1) L1-E
L2-E, L3-E, (L2-L3) L2-E
L1-E, L3-E, (L3-L1) L1-E
L2-E, L3-E, (L2-L3) L3-E
L1-E, L3-E, (L3-L1) L3-E
L2-E, L3-E, (L2-L3) L2-E
L1-E, L3-E, (L3-L1) L3-E
L1-E, L2-E, (L1-L2) L1-E PHASE PREF.2phe = L3 (L1) CYCLIC
L2-E, L3-E, (L2-L3) L2-E
L1-E, L3-E, (L3-L1) L3-E
L1-E, L2-E, (L1-L2) L2-E PHASE PREF.2phe = L1 (L3) CYCLIC
L2-E, L3-E, (L2-L3) L3-E
L1-E, L3-E, (L3-L1) L1-E
L1-E, L2-E, (L1-L2) L1-E, L2-E PHASE PREF.2phe = All loops
L2-E, L3-E, (L2-L3) L2-E, L3-E
L1-E, L3-E, (L3-L1) L3-E; L1-E
Parallel Line During earth faults on parallel lines, the impedance values calculated by means of the
Measured Value loop equations are influenced by the coupling of the earth impedance of the two con-
Correction ductor systems (Figure 2-19). This causes measuring errors in the result of the imped-
(optional) ance computation unless special measures are taken. A parallel line compensation
may therefore be activated. In this manner the earth current of the parallel line is taken
into consideration by the line equation and thereby allows for compensation of the
coupling influence. The earth current of the parallel line must be connected to the
device for this purpose. The loop equation is then modified as shown below, refer also
to Figure 2-16.
IL3 ZL IE ZE IEP ZM = UL3-E
where IEP is the earth current of the parallel line and the ratios RM/RL and XM/XL are
constant line parameters, resulting from the geometry of the double circuit line and the
nature of the ground below the line. These line parameters are input to the device
along with all the other line data during the parameterization of the device.
7SA6 Manual 79
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-19 Earth fault on a double circuit line
Without parallel line compensation, the earth current on the parallel line will in most
cases cause the reach threshold of the distance protection to be shortened (under-
reach of the distance measurement). In some cases for example when the two
feeders are terminated to different busbars, and the location of the earth fault is on one
of the remote busbars (at B in Figure 2-19) it is possible that an overreach may
occur.
The parallel line compensation only applies to faults on the protected feeder. For faults
on the parallel line, the compensation may not be carried out, as this would cause
severe overreach. The relay located in position II in Figure 2-19 must therefore not be
compensated.
Earth current balance is therefore additionally provided in the device, which carries out
a cross comparison of the earth currents in the two lines. The compensation is only
applied to the line end where the earth current of the parallel line is not substantially
larger than the earth current in the line itself. In example in Figure 2-19, the current IE
is larger than IEP: compensation is applied at I in that ZM IEP is included in the evalu-
ation; at II compensation is not applied.
Switching onto If the circuit breaker is manually closed onto a short circuit, the distance protection can
a fault issue an instantaneous trip command. By setting parameters it may be determined
which zone(s) is/are released following a manual close (refer to Figure 2-20). The line
energization information (input SOTF) is derived from the state recognition.
Figure 2-20 Circuit breaker closure onto a fault
80 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
At address 1201 FCT Distance the distance protection function can be switched ON
or OFF.
Minimum Current The minimum current for fault detection Minimum Iph> (address 1202) in case of
impedance pickup is set somewhat (approx. 10 %) below the minimum short-circuit
current that may occur. For the other pickup modes it is set at address 1611.
Earth fault In systems with earthed starpoint, the setting 3I0> Threshold (address 1203) is
detection set somewhat below the minimum expected earth fault current. 3I0 is defined as the
sum of the phase currents |IL1 + IL2 + IL3|, which equals the starpoint current of the set
of current transformers. In non-earthed systems the setting value is recommended to
be below the earth current value for double earth faults.
The preset value 3I0>/ Iphmax = 0,10 (address 1207) usually is recommended for
the slope of the 3I0 characteristic. This setting can only be changed in DIGSI at
Display Additional Settings.
Addresses 1204 and 1209 are only relevant for earthed power systems. In non-
earthed systems they are not accessible.
When setting 3U0> Threshold (address 1204), care must be taken that operational
asymmetries do not cause a pickup. 3U0 is defined as the sum of the phase-to-earth
voltages |UL1-E + UL2-E + UL3-E|. If the U0 criterion is not required, address 1204 is set
to .
In earthed power systems the earth fault detection can be complemented by a zero
sequence voltage detection function. You can determine whether an earth fault is de-
tected when a zero sequence current or a zero sequence voltage threshold is exceed-
ed or when both criteria are met. 3I0> OR 3U0> (default setting) applies at address
1209 E/F recognition if only one of the two criteria is valid. Select 3I0> AND
3U0> to activate both criteria for earth-fault detection. This setting can only be
changed in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. If you want to detect only the earth
current, set 3I0> OR 3U0> and also 3U0> Threshold (address 1204) to .
Note
Under no circumstances set address 1204 3U0> Threshold to , if you have set
address 1209 E/F recognition = 3I0> AND 3U0>, or earth-fault detection will
no longer be possible.
In isolated-neutral systems or resonant-earthed systems, earth fault detection for

double earth faults is equally possible using the zero-sequence voltage. The threshold
value can be set at address 1205 3U0> COMP/ISOL.. If the U0-criterion for double
earth faults is not used, set this value to .
Earth fault detection for double earth faults using the U0-criterion is only possible with
asymmetrical, phase-to-phase voltages. Address 1223 Uph-ph unbal. allows you
to specify how great the asymmetries can become due to load and single-pole earth
fault conditions.
If the earth fault detection by the I0-criterion threatens to pick up due to fault inception
transients following the occurrence of a single-pole earth fault, the detection can be
delayed via parameter T3I0 1PHAS (address 1206).
7SA6 Manual 81
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Application In applications for, or in the proximity of, series-compensated lines (lines with series
with Series- capacitors) address 1208 SER-COMP. is set to YES, to ensure that the direction de-
Compensated termination operates correctly in all cases. The influence of the series capacitors on
Lines the direction determination is described in Section 2.2.2 under margin heading Direc-
tion Determination in Case of Series-compensated Lines.
Start of Delay Times As was mentioned in the description of the measuring technique, each distance zone
generates an output signal which is associated with the zone and the affected phase.
The zone logic combines these zone fault detections with possible further internal and
external signals. The delay times for the distance zones can be started either all to-
gether on general fault detection by the distance protection function, or individually at
the moment the fault enters the respective distance zone. Parameter Start Timers
(address 1210) is set by default to on Dis. Pickup. This setting ensures that all
delay times continue to run together even if the type of fault or the selected measuring
loop changes, e.g. because an intermediate infeed is switched off. This is also the pre-
ferred setting in the case of other distance protection relays in the power system
working with this start timing. Where grading of the delay times is especially important,
for instance if the fault location shifts from zone Z3 to zone Z2, the setting on Zone
Pickup should be chosen.
Angle of inclination The shape of the tripping characteristic is among other factors influenced by the incli-
of the tripping nation angle Distance Angle (address 1211). Details about the tripping character-
characteristics istics can be found in Sub-section 2.2.2 under margin header Operating Polygons).
Usually, the line angle is set here, i.e. the same value as in address 1105 Line
Angle (Section 2.1.4.1). Irrespective of the line angle it is, however, possible to select
a different inclination angle of the tripping characteristic.
Parallel Line The mutual coupling between the two lines of a double-circuit configuration is only rel-
Measured Value evant to the 7SA6 when it is applied on a double-circuit line and when it is intended to
Correction implement parallel line compensation. A prerequisite is that the earth current of the
(optional) parallel line is connected to the I4 measuring input of the device and this is entered in
the configuration settings. In this case, address 1215 Paral.Line Comp has to be
set to YES (default setting).
The coupling factors were already set as part of the general protection data (Section
2.1.4.1), as was the reach of the parallel line compensation.
Double Earth Faults The loop selection for double earth faults is set in address 1221 2Ph-E faults
in Effectively (Phase-Phase-Earth fault detection). This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at
Earthed Systems Display Additional Settings. In most cases, Block leading (blocking of the
leading phase, default setting) is favourable because the leading phase-earth loop
tends to overreach, especially in conjunction with large earth fault resistance. In
certain cases (fault resistance phase-phase larger than phase-earth) the setting
Block lagging (blocking of the lagging phase) may be more favourable. The
evaluation of all affected loops with the setting All loops allows a maximum degree
of redundancy. It is also possible to evaluate as loop - loops only. This ensures
the most accuracy for two phase-to-earth faults. Ultimately it is possible to declare the
phase-to-earth loops as valid (setting -E loops only).
82 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Double earth faults In isolated or resonant-earthed systems it must be guaranteed that the preference for
in non-earthed double earth faults in whole galvanically-connected systems is consistent. The double
systems earth fault preference is set in address 1220 PHASE PREF.2phe.
7SA6 enables the user to detect all base points of a multiple earth fault. PHASE
PREF.2phe = All loops means that each earth fault point on a protected line is
switched off independent from the preference. It can also be combined with a different
preference. For a transformer feeder, for example, any base point can be switched off
following occurrence of a double earth fault, whereas L1 (L3) ACYCLIC is consis-
tently valid for the remainder of the system.
If the earth fault detection threatens to pick up due to fault inception transients follow-
ing the occurrence of a single earth fault, the detection can be delayed via parameter
T3I0 1PHAS (address 1206). Usually the presetting (0.04 s) is sufficient. For large
resonant-earthed systems the time delay should be increased. Set parameter T3I0
1PHAS to if the earth current threshold can also be exceeded during steady-state
conditions. Then, even with high earth current, no single-phase pickup is possible any-
more. Double earth faults are, however, detected correctly and evaluated according to
the preference mode.
Switching onto To determine the reaction of the distance protection during closure of the circuit
a fault breaker onto a dead fault, the parameter in address 1232 SOTF zone is used. The
setting Inactive specifies that there is no special reaction, i.e. all distance stages
operate according to their set zone parameters. The setting Zone Z1B causes all
faults inside the overreaching zone Z1B (in the direction specified for these zones) to
be cleared without delay following closure of the circuit breaker. If Z1B undirect.
is set, the zone Z1B is relevant, but it acts in both directions, regardless of the operat-
ing direction set in address 1351 Op. mode Z1B. The setting PICKUP implies that
the non-delayed tripping following line energization is activated for all recognized
faults in any zone (i.e. with general fault detection of the distance protection).
Load range (only When using the impedance pickup function on long heavily loaded lines, the risk of en-
for impedance croachment of the load impedance into the tripping characteristic of the distance pro-
pickup) tection may exist. To exclude the risk of unwanted fault detection by the distance pro-
tection during heavy load flow, a load trapezoid characteristic may be set for tripping
characteristics with large R-reaches, which excludes such unwanted fault detection by
overload. This load trapezoid does not apply for the other pickup modes since the trip
polygons are only released after pickup and the pickup function fulfills the task of dis-
tinguishing clearly between load operation and short-circuit. This load area is consid-
ered in the description of the tripping characteristics (see also Section 2.2.2).
The R-value R load (-E) (address 1241) refers to the phase-earth loops, R load
(-) (address 1243) to the phase-phase loops. The values are set somewhat (ap-
prox. 10 %) below the minimum expected load impedance. The minimum load imped-
ance results when the maximum load current and minimum operating voltage exist.
7SA6 Manual 83
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 100 MVA corresponds to
Imax = 525 A
minimum operating voltage
Umin = 0.9 UN
Voltage Transformer 110 kV / 0.1 kV
The resulting minimum load impedance is therefore:
This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and
DIGSI. The conversion to secondary values is
when applying a security margin of 10 % the following is set:

primary: R load (-) = 97.98 or
secondary: R load (-) = 10.69 .
The spread angle of the load trapezoid load (-E) (address 1242) and load
(-) (address 1244) must be greater (approx. 5) than the maximum arising load
angle (corresponding to the minimum power factor cos).
Minimum power factor
cos min = 0.63
max = 51
Setting value load (-) = max + 5 = 56.
84 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Overcurrent, U/I Depending on the ordered version, the 7SA6 distance protection has a series of pick-
and U/I/ Pickup up modes from which the one matching the respective network conditions best can be
selected (also see order data in the Appendix).
If the device does not feature an explicit pickup function or if during configuration of
the protection functions (Section 2.1.1.2) you have selected as pickup type Dis.
PICKUP = Z< (quadrilat.) (address 114), the mentioned settings are not relevant
and cannot be accessed.
Available pickup modes are described in Section 2.2.1 in detail. If the device has
several alternative pickup modes, one option has been selected when configuring in
address 114. Below, parameters are given and discussed for all pickup modes. With
the following settings, only those parameters will appear that apply for the selected
pickup mode.
With the U/I(/) pickup mode you can determine the voltage measurement and, if ap-
plicable, the phase-angle measurement for phase-to-earth measuring units, and for
phase-to-phase measuring loops separately. Address 1601 PROGAM U/I indicates
which loop voltages apply to phase-to-earth and which to phase-to-phase:
In networks with earthed starpoint, a selection using UPh-E with earth faults and UPh-
Ph with non-earthed faults is often preferred (address 1601 PROGAM U/I =
LE:Uphe/LL:Uphp). This mode has a maximum sensitivity for all fault types; howev-
er, it requires the unambiguous detection of earth faults via the earth-fault detection
function (also see Section 2.2.1). Otherwise, a mode using UPh-E for all fault types may
be useful (address 1601 PROGAM U/I = LE:Uphe/LL:Uphe), accepting lesser sen-
sitivity for earth-free faults, since the overcurrent stage Iph>> usually picks up there.
In networks with lowresistance earthed starpoint, the U/I/ pickup should only
come into effect on earth faults as phase-to-phase faults are detected by the overcur-
rent pickup. In this case it is reasonable to set address 1601 PROGAM U/I =
LE:Uphe/LL:I>>.
In isolated or resonant-earthed power systems it is possible to control the U/I/
pickup using phase-to-phase voltages only (address 1601 PROGAM U/I =
LE:Uphp/LL:Uphp). Naturally, this excludes pickup by single earth faults, however,
it also does not allow a correct double earth fault detection, therefore it is suitable only
for small isolated cable networks.
Two further general settings refer to the final times, i.e. the tripping times in a worst
case scenario for faults outside all distance zones. They should be set above the delay
times for distance zones providing a final back-up option (see also configuration of the
function settings for the distance zones in Section 2.2.2.2).
The directional final time DELAY FORW. PU (address 1602) only works with short-
circuits in forward (line) direction if there is no impedance within a distance zone after
pickup.
The non-directional final time DEL. NON-DIR PU (address 1603) works for all faults
if there is no impedance within a distance zone after pickup.
7SA6 Manual 85
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Overcurrent Pickup The maximum operational load current that can occur is crucial for the setting of over-
current pick-up. Pickup due to overload must be ruled out! Therefore the pickup
value Iph>> (address 1610) must be set above the maximum (over-)load current that
is expected (approx. 1.2 times). In this case, it must be ensured that the minimum fault
current is above this value. If this is not the case, U/I pickup is required.
Maximum operational current (incl. overload) is 680 A, for current transformers 600
A/5 A, minimum short circuit is 1200 A. The following settings are made:
Iph>> = IL max 1.2 = 680 A 1.2 = 816 A
This value is sufficiently below the minimum short-circuit current of 1200 A. When con-
figuring via PC and DIGSI, this value can be entered directly as primary value. The
conversion to secondary values is
The condition for minimum short-circuit current also applies to earth faults (in the
earthed network) or for double earth faults as long as overcurrent pickup is solely
used.
U/I(/) pickup If U/I pickup is required because the minimum short-circuit current is below the
maximum load current (incl. a safety factor of 1.2), the condition for maximum load
current in respect to Iph>> still has to be observed. Then, the minimum current limit
Iph> (address 1611) is set to below the minimum short-circuit current (approx. 10 %).
This also applies to the phase currents during earth faults or double earth faults.
In address 1630 1ph FAULTS you can choose whether a phase-to-earth loop shall
be selected in an earthed network during single-phase pickup without earth current (IE
release). The setting 1ph FAULTS = PHASE-EARTH is useful if no or only little earth
current can flow via the measuring point in the event of earth faults. With 1ph FAULTS
= PHASE-PHASEONLY the leading phase-phase loop is measured in the event of a
single-phase pick-up in the earthed network. This parameter can only be altered in
DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
The meaning of the settings is illustrated in Figure 2-21. Iph> (section a, address
1611) is the minimum current as described in the previous section, Iph>> (section c)
is the overcurrent pickup.
86 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-21 Parameters of the U/I/ pickup
Angular dependence is not needed in the majority of cases. Then the voltage-depen-
dent section b is valid which results in the characteristic a-b-c. When controlling with
Uphe the voltages for phase-to-earth current are inserted in address 1612 Uph-e
(I>>) and 1613 Uph-e (I>) for the voltage-dependent section b. When controlling
with Uphph the voltages for phase-to-phase are set in address 1614 Uph-ph (I>>)
and 1615 Uph-ph (I>). The relevant settings are determined according to the
pickup mode (see above).
The characteristic has to be set such that it is just below the minimum expected
voltage at the maximum expected load current. If in doubt, check the pickup conditions
in accordance with the U/I characteristic.
7SA6 Manual 87
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Angular If a distinction between short-circuit and load conditions is not always possible using
Dependence the U/I characteristic, which is independent of the phase angle, the angular dependent
section d-e can additionally be used. This is required for long lines and section of lines
with intermediate infeed in combination with small source impedances. Then the local
measured voltage will only drop to a small extent in the event of a short-circuit at the
line end or in the back-up range of the distance protection so that the phase angle
between current and voltage is required as an additional criterion for fault detection.
The parameters Iphi> (address 1616) and Uph-e (Iphi>) (address 1617) or
Uph-ph (Iphi>) (address 1618) determine the characteristic in the range of large
angles K, i.e. in the short-circuit angular range. The threshold angles themselves,
which define the short-circuit angle range K, are set in address 1620 > and 1621
<. The short-circuit angle range K is between these two angles. Here, too, the re-
quired voltage settings according to the pickup mode (see above) are relevant.
The characteristic for the load angle range has to be set in a way that is just below the
minimum expected operating voltage at the maximum expected load current. In the
range of the short-circuit angles SC it must be ensured that load current may not
cause pickup in this area. If reactive power has to be transferred via this line, it must
be ensured that the maximum reactive current at minimum operating voltage is not
within the pickup range, i.e. the short-circuit angle range SC. If in doubt, check the
pickup conditions in accordance with the U/I/ characteristic. An arithmetic short-
circuit calculation is recommended for extensive networks.
The lower threshold angle > (address 1620) should be between the load angle and
the short-circuit angle. Therefore it must be set smaller than the line angle L = arctan
(XL/RL) (approx. 10 to 20). Subsequently, you should check that the angle is not ex-
ceeded during load conditions. If this is the case, for instance because the reactive
power has to be transferred via this line, it must be ensured that the parameters of the
voltage-dependent segment d, that is Iphi> and Uph-e (Iphi>) or Uph-ph
(Iphi>) rule out a pickup as the result of reactive power (see above).
The upper threshold angle < (address 1621) is not critical. 100 to 120 should be
sufficient in all cases.
Angular dependence, i.e. increasing the sensitivity for a large short-circuit angle with
section d and e in the characteristic, can be limited to the forward direction (line direc-
tion) using address 1619 EFFECT . In this case, EFFECT is set to Forward. Oth-
erwise EFFECT = forward&reverse. This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI
at Display Additional Settings.
88 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.2.1.5 Settings
ditional Settings.

1201 FCT Distance ON ON Distance protection is
OFF
1202 Minimum Iph> 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.10 A Phase Current threshold
for dist. meas.
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 0.50 A
1203 3I0> Threshold 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.10 A 3I0 threshold for neutral
current pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 0.50 A
1204 3U0> Threshold 1 .. 100 V; 5V 3U0 threshold zero seq.
voltage pickup
1205 3U0> COMP/ISOL. 10 .. 200 V; 40 V 3U0> pickup (comp/ isol.
star-point)
1206 T3I0 1PHAS 0.00 .. 0.50 sec; 0.04 sec Delay 1ph-faults
(comp/isol. star-point)
1207A 3I0>/ Iphmax 0.05 .. 0.30 0.10 3I0>-pickup-stabilisation
(3I0> /Iphmax)
1208 SER-COMP. NO NO Series compensated line
YES
1209A E/F recognition 3I0> OR 3U0> 3I0> OR 3U0> criterion of earth fault rec-
3I0> AND 3U0> ognition
1210 Start Timers on Dis. Pickup on Dis. Pickup Condition for zone timer
on Zone Pickup start
1211 Distance Angle 30 .. 90 85 Angle of inclination, dis-
tance charact.
1212 R-reserve NO NO Reserve for fault resis-
YES tance
1215 Paral.Line Comp NO YES Mutual coupling parall.line
YES compensation
1220 PHASE PREF.2phe L3 (L1) ACYCLIC L3 (L1) ACYCLIC Phase preference for 2ph-
L1 (L3) ACYCLIC e faults
L2 (L1) ACYCLIC
L1 (L2) ACYCLIC
L3 (L2) ACYCLIC
L2 (L3) ACYCLIC
L3 (L1) CYCLIC
L1 (L3) CYCLIC
All loops
1221A 2Ph-E faults Block leading Block leading Loop selection with 2Ph-E
Block lagging faults
All loops
- loops only
-E loops only
7SA6 Manual 89
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

1223 Uph-ph unbal. 5 .. 50 % 25 % Max Uph-ph unbal. for 1ph
Flt. detection
1232 SOTF zone PICKUP Inactive Instantaneous trip after
Zone Z1B SwitchOnToFault
Inactive
Z1B undirect.
1241 R load (-E) 1A 0.100 .. 600.000 ; R load, minimum Load Im-
pedance (ph-e)
5A 0.020 .. 120.000 ;
1242 load (-E) 20 .. 60 45 PHI load, maximum Load
Angle (ph-e)
1243 R load (-) 1A 0.100 .. 600.000 ; R load, minimum Load Im-
pedance (ph-ph)
5A 0.020 .. 120.000 ;
1244 load (-) 20 .. 60 45 PHI load, maximum Load
Angle (ph-ph)
1305 T1-1phase 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1-1phase, delay for
single phase faults
1306 T1-multi-phase 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1multi-ph, delay for multi
phase faults
single phase faults
phase faults
1317A Trip 1pole Z2 NO NO Single pole trip for faults in
YES Z2
1325 T3 DELAY 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.60 sec T3 delay
1355 T1B-1phase 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1B-1phase, delay for
single ph. faults
1356 T1B-multi-phase 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1B-multi-ph, delay for
multi ph. faults
1357 1st AR -> Z1B NO YES Z1B enabled before 1st
YES AR (int. or ext.)
1601 PROGAM U/I LE:Uphe/LL:Uphp LE:Uphe/LL:Uphp Pickup program U/I
LE:Uphp/LL:Uphp
LE:Uphe/LL:Uphe
LE:Uphe/LL:I>>
1602 DELAY FORW. PU 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 1.20 sec Trip delay for Forward-
PICKUP
1603 DEL. NON-DIR PU 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 1.20 sec Trip delay for non-direc-
tional PICKUP
1610 Iph>> 1A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 1.80 A Iph>> Pickup (overcurrent)
5A 1.25 .. 50.00 A 9.00 A
1611 Iph> 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A Iph> Pickup (minimum cur-
rent)
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
90 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5

1612 Uph-e (I>>) 20 .. 70 V 48 V Undervoltage (ph-e) at
Iph>>
1613 Uph-e (I>) 20 .. 70 V 48 V Undervoltage (ph-e) at
Iph>
1614 Uph-ph (I>>) 40 .. 130 V 80 V Undervoltage (ph-ph) at
Iph>>
1615 Uph-ph (I>) 40 .. 130 V 80 V Undervoltage (ph-ph) at
Iph>
1616 Iphi> 1A 0.10 .. 8.00 A 0.50 A Iphi> Pickup (minimum
current at phi>)
5A 0.50 .. 40.00 A 2.50 A
1617 Uph-e (Iphi>) 20 .. 70 V 48 V Undervoltage (ph-e) at
Iphi>
1618 Uph-ph (Iphi>) 40 .. 130 V 80 V Undervoltage (ph-ph) at
Iphi>
1619A EFFECT forward&reverse forward&reverse Effective direction of phi-
Forward pickup
1620 > 30 .. 60 50 PHI> pickup (lower set-
point)
1621 < 90 .. 120 110 PHI< pickup (upper set-
point)
1630A 1ph FAULTS PHASE-EARTH PHASE-EARTH 1ph-pickup loop selection
PHASE-PHASEONLY (PU w/o earth)

formation
3603 >BLOCK 21 Dist. SP >BLOCK 21 Distance
3611 >ENABLE Z1B SP >ENABLE Z1B (with setted Time Delay)
3613 >ENABLE Z1Binst SP >ENABLE Z1B instantanous (w/o T-Delay)
3617 >BLOCK Z4-Trip SP >BLOCK Z4-Trip
3618 >BLOCK Z5-Trip SP >BLOCK Z5-Trip
3619 >BLOCK Z4 Ph-E SP >BLOCK Z4 for ph-e loops
3620 >BLOCK Z5 Ph-E SP >BLOCK Z5 for ph-e loops
3651 Dist. OFF OUT Distance is switched off
3652 Dist. BLOCK OUT Distance is BLOCKED
3653 Dist. ACTIVE OUT Distance is ACTIVE
3654 Dis.ErrorK0(Z1) OUT Setting error K0(Z1) or Angle K0(Z1)
3655 DisErrorK0(>Z1) OUT Setting error K0(>Z1) or Angle K0(>Z1)
3671 Dis. PICKUP OUT Distance PICKED UP
3672 Dis.Pickup L1 OUT Distance PICKUP L1
3675 Dis.Pickup E OUT Distance PICKUP Earth
3681 Dis.Pickup 1pL1 OUT Distance Pickup Phase L1 (only)
7SA6 Manual 91
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
3682 Dis.Pickup L1E OUT Distance Pickup L1E
3685 Dis.Pickup L12 OUT Distance Pickup L12
3694 Dis.Pickup123E OUT Distance Pickup123E
3695 Dis Pickup L1 OUT Dist.: Phi phase L1 Pickup
3701 Dis.Loop L1-E f OUT Distance Loop L1E selected forward
3704 Dis.Loop L1-2 f OUT Distance Loop L12 selected forward
3707 Dis.Loop L1-E r OUT Distance Loop L1E selected reverse
3710 Dis.Loop L1-2 r OUT Distance Loop L12 selected reverse
3713 Dis.Loop L1E<-> OUT Distance Loop L1E selected non-direct.
3716 Dis.Loop L12<-> OUT Distance Loop L12 selected non-direct.
3719 Dis. forward OUT Distance Pickup FORWARD
3720 Dis. reverse OUT Distance Pickup REVERSE
3741 Dis. Z1 L1E OUT Distance Pickup Z1, Loop L1E
3744 Dis. Z1 L12 OUT Distance Pickup Z1, Loop L12
3747 Dis. Z1B L1E OUT Distance Pickup Z1B, Loop L1E
3750 Dis. Z1B L12 OUT Distance Pickup Z1B, Loop L12
92 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5

formation
3755 Dis. Pickup Z2 OUT Distance Pickup Z2
3771 Dis.Time Out T1 OUT DistanceTime Out T1
3780 Dis.TimeOut T1B OUT DistanceTime Out T1B
3781 Dis.TimeOut Tfw OUT DistanceTime Out Forward PICKUP
3782 Dis.TimeOut Tnd OUT DistanceTime Out Non-directional PICKUP
3801 Dis.Gen. Trip OUT Distance protection: General trip
3802 Dis.Trip 1pL1 OUT Distance TRIP command - Only Phase L1
3805 Dis.Trip 3p OUT Distance TRIP command Phases L123
3811 Dis.TripZ1/1p OUT Distance TRIP single-phase Z1
3813 Dis.TripZ1B1p OUT Distance TRIP single-phase Z1B
3816 Dis.TripZ2/1p OUT Distance TRIP single-phase Z2
3817 Dis.TripZ2/3p OUT Distance TRIP 3phase in Z2
3818 Dis.TripZ3/T3 OUT Distance TRIP 3phase in Z3
3819 Dis.Trip FD-> OUT Dist.: Trip by fault detection, forward
3820 Dis.Trip <-> OUT Dist.: Trip by fault detec, rev/non-dir.
3821 Dis.TRIP 3p. Z4 OUT Distance TRIP 3phase in Z4
3822 Dis.TRIP 3p. Z5 OUT Distance TRIP 3phase in Z5
3823 DisTRIP3p. Z1sf OUT DisTRIP 3phase in Z1 with single-ph Flt.
3824 DisTRIP3p. Z1mf OUT DisTRIP 3phase in Z1 with multi-ph Flt.
3825 DisTRIP3p.Z1Bsf OUT DisTRIP 3phase in Z1B with single-ph Flt
3826 DisTRIP3p Z1Bmf OUT DisTRIP 3phase in Z1B with multi-ph Flt.
3850 DisTRIP Z1B Tel OUT DisTRIP Z1B with Teleprotection scheme
7SA6 Manual 93
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.2.2 Distance protection with quadrilateral characteristic (optional)
The distance protection has a polygonal tripping characteristic. Depending on which

version was ordered (10th digit of the order number = A), a circular tripping character-
istic can be set. If only the circle tripping characteristic is required, please go to Section
2.2.3.
2.2.2.1 Method of Operation
Operating In total there are five independent and one additional controlled zone for each fault im-
Polygons pedance loop. Figure 2-22 shows the shape of the polygons as example. The first
zone is shaded and forward directional. The third zone is reverse directional.
In general, the polygon is defined by means of a parallelogram which intersects the
axes with the values R and X as well as the tilt Dist. A load trapezoid with the setting
RLoad and Load may be used to cut the area of the load impedance out of the polygon.
The axial coordinates can be set individually for each zone; Dist, RLoad and Load are
common for all zones. The parallelogram is symmetrical with respect to the origin of
the RXcoordinate system; the directional characteristic however limits the tripping
range to the desired quadrants (refer to Direction determination below).
The R-reach may be set separately for the phase-phase faults and the phase-earth
faults to achieve a larger fault resistance coverage for earth faults if this is desired.
For the first zone Z1 an additional settable tilt exists, which may be used to prevent
overreach resulting from angle variance and/or two ended infeed to short-circuits with
fault resistance. For Z1B and the higher zones this tilt does not exist.
94 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-22 Polygonal characteristic (setting values are marked by dots)
Determination of For each loop an impedance vector is also used to determine the direction of the short-
Direction circuit. Usually similar to the distance calculation, ZL is used. However, depending on
the quality of the measured values, different computation techniques are used. Im-
mediately after fault inception, the short-circuit voltage is disturbed by transients. The
voltage memorized prior to fault inception is therefore used in this situation. If even the
steady-state short-circuit voltage (during a close-up fault) is too small for direction de-
termination, an unfaulted voltage is used. This voltage is in theory quadrature to the
actual short-circuit voltage for both phase-earth loops as well as for phase-phase
loops (refer to Figure 2-23). This is taken into account when computing the direction
vector by means of a 90 rotation. In Table 2-9 the allocation of the measured values
to the six fault loops for the determination of the fault direction is shown.
7SA6 Manual 95
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-23 Direction determination with quadrature voltages
Table 2-9 Voltage and current values for the determination of fault direction
Loop Measuring Actual short-circuit Quadrature voltage

Current (Direc- voltage
tion)
L1-E IL1 UL1-E UL2 - UL3
L1-E1) IL1 - IE1) UL1-E UL2 - UL3
L2-E1) IL2 - IE1) UL2-E UL3 - UL1
L3-E1) IL3 - IE1) UL3-E UL1 - UL2
L1-L2 IL1 - IL2 UL1 - UL2 UL2-L3 - UL3-L1
1)
with consideration of earth impedance compensation
If there is neither a current measured voltage nor a memorized voltage available which
is sufficient for measuring the direction, the relay selects the Forward direction. In
practice this can only occur when the circuit breaker closes onto a de-energized line,
and there is a fault on this line (e.g. closing onto an earthed line).
Figure 2-24 shows the theoretical steady-state characteristic. In practice, the limits of
the directional characteristic when using memorized voltages is dependent on both
the source impedance and the load transferred across the line prior to fault inception.
Accordingly the directional characteristic includes a safety margin with respect to the
borders of the first quadrant in the RX diagram (Figure 2-24).
96 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-24 Directional characteristic in the R-X-diagram
Since each zone can be set to Forward, Reverse or Non-Directional, different

(centrically mirrored) directional characteristics are available for Forward and
Reverse. A non-directional zone has no directional characteristic. The entire tripping
region applies here.
Characteristics of The theoretical steady-state directional characteristic shown in Figure 2-24 applies to
the Directional faulted loop voltages. In the case of quadrature voltages or memorized voltage, the
Measurement position of the directional characteristic is dependent on both the source impedance
as well as the load transferred across the line prior to fault inception.
Figure 2-25 shows the directional characteristic using quadrature or memorized
voltage as well as taking the source impedance into account (no load transfer). As
these voltages are equal to the corresponding generator voltage E and they do not
change after fault inception, the directional characteristic is shifted in the impedance
diagram by the source impedance ZS1 = E1/I1. For the fault location F1 (Figure 2-25a)
the short-circuit location is in the forward direction and the source impedance is in the
reverse direction. For all fault locations, right up to the device location (current trans-
formers), a definite Forward decision is made (Figure 2-25b). If the current direction
is reversed, the position of the directional characteristic changes abruptly (Figure 2-
25c). A reversed current I2 now flows via the measuring location (current transformer)
which is determined by the source impedance ZS2 + ZL. When load is transferred
across the line, the directional characteristic may additionally be rotated by the load
angle.
7SA6 Manual 97
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-25 Directional characteristic with quadrature or memorized voltages
Determination of The directional characteristics and their displacement by the source impedance apply
Direction in Case of also for lines with series capacitors. If a short-circuit occurs behind the local series ca-
Series-compensat- pacitors, the short-circuit voltage however reverses its direction until the protective
ed Lines spark gap has picked up (see Figure 2-26).
Figure 2-26 Voltage characteristic while a fault occurs after a series capacitor.
a) without pickup of the protective spark gap
b) with pickup of the protective spark gap
The distance protection function would thus detect a wrong fault direction. The use of
memorized voltages however ensures that the direction is correctly detected (see
Figure 2-27a).
98 7SA6 Manual
C53000-G1176-C156-5
Since the voltage prior to the fault is used for determining the direction, the zeniths of
the directional characteristics in dependence of the source impedance and infeed con-
ditions before the fault are thus far displaced that the capacitor reactance which is
always smaller than the series reactance does not cause the apparent direction re-
versal (Figure 2-27b).
If the short-circuit is located before the capacitor, from the relay location (current trans-
former) in reverse direction, the zeniths of the directional characteristics are shifted to
the other direction (Figure 2-27c). A correct determination of the direction is thus also
ensured in this case.
Figure 2-27 Determination of direction in case of series-compensated lines
Pickup and Using the fault detection modes I, U/I or U/I/, the impedances that were calculated
Assignment to the from the valid loops, are assigned, after the pick-up, to the zone characteristics set for
Polygons the distance protection. To avoid unstable signals at the boundaries of a polygon, the
characteristics have a hysteresis of approximately 5 % i.e. as soon as it has been de-
termined that the fault impedance lies within a polygon, the boundaries are increased
by 5 % in all directions. The loop information is also converted to phase segregated
information.
Using the impedance pickup the calculated loop impedances are also assigned to the
zone characteristics set for the distance protection, but without a query of an explicit
fault detection scheme. The pickup range of the distance protection is determined
from the thresholds of the largest-set polygon taking into consideration the respective
direction. Here the loop information is also converted into faulted phase indication.
7SA6 Manual 99
C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Pickup signals are generated for each zone and converted into phase information,
e.g. Dis. Z1L1L1 (internal message) for zone Z1 and phase L1. This means that each
phase and each zone is provided with separate pickup information. The information is
then processed in the zone logic and by additional functions (e.g. teleprotection logic,
Section 2.6). The loop information is also converted to phase-segregated information.
Another condition for pickup of a zone is that the direction matches the direction con-
figured for this zone (refer also to Section 2.3). Furthermore the distance protection
may not be blocked or switched off completely. Figure 2-28 shows these conditions.
Figure 2-28 Release logic for one zone (example for Z1)
In total, the following zones are available:

Independent zones:
1st zone (fast tripping zone) Z1 with X(Z1); R(Z1) -, RE(Z1) -E; delayable
with T1-1phase or T1-multi-phase,
2nd zone (backup zone) Z2 with X(Z2); R(Z2) -, RE(Z2) -E; may be
delayed by T2-1phase or T2-multi-phase,
3rd zone (backup zone) Z3 with X(Z3); R(Z3) -, RE(Z3) -E; may be
delayed by T3 DELAY,
4th zone (backup zone) Z4 with X(Z4); R(Z4) -, RE(Z4) -E; may be
delayed by T4 DELAY,
5th zone (backup zone) Z5 with X(Z5)+ (forward) and X(Z5)- (reverse); R(Z5)
-, RE(Z5) -E, delayable with T5 DELAY.
Dependent (controlled) zone:
Overreaching zone Z1B with X(Z1B); R(Z1B) -, RE(Z1B) -E; may be
delayed by T1B-1phase or T1B-multi-phase.
100 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Grading It is recommended to initially create a grading coordination chart for the entire galvan-
Coordination Chart ically interconnected system. This diagram should reflect the line lengths with their
primary reactances X in /km. For the reach of the distance zones, the reactances X
are the deciding quantity.
The first zone Z1 is usually set to cover 85 % of the protected line without any trip time
delay (i.e. T1 = 0.00 s). The protection clears faults in this range without additional
time delay, i.e. the tripping time is the relay basic operating time.
The tripping time of the higher zones is sequentially increased by one time grading in-
terval. The grading margin must take into account the circuit breaker operating time
including the spread of this time, the resetting time of the protection equipment as well
as the spread of the protection delay timers. Typical values are 0.2 s to 0.4 s. The
reach is selected to cover up to approximately 80 % of the zone with the same set time
delay on the shortest neighbouring feeder (see Figure 2-29).
Figure 2-29 Setting the reach Example for device A

s1, s2 Protected line section
When using a personal computer and DIGSI to apply the settings, these can be op-
tionally entered as primary or secondary values.
In the case of parameterization with secondary quantities, the values derived from the
grading coordination chart must be converted to the secondary side of the current and
voltage transformers. In general:
Accordingly, the reach for any distance zone can be specified as follows:
where
NCT = Current transformer ratio
NVT = Transformation ratio of voltage transformer
7SA6 Manual 101

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
s (length) = 35 km
R1/s = 0.19 /km
X1/s = 0.42 /km
R0/s = 0.53 /km
X0/s = 1.19 /km
Current Transformer 600 A/5 A
The following line data is calculated:
RL = 0.19 /km 35 km = 6.65
XL = 0.42 /km 35 km = 14.70
For the first zone, a setting of 85 % of the line length should be applied, which results
in primary:
X1prim = 0.85 XL = 0.85 14.70 = 12.49
or secondary:
Resistance The resistance setting R allows a reserve for fault resistance which appears as an ad-
Tolerance ditional resistance at the fault location and is added to the impedance of the line con-
ductors. It comprises, for example, the resistance in arcs, the earth distribution resis-
tance of earth points and others. The setting must consider these fault resistances, but
should at the same time not be larger than necessary. On long heavily loaded lines,
the setting may extend into the load impedance range. Fault detection due to overload
conditions is then prevented with the load trapezoid. Refer to margin heading Load
range (only for impedance pickup) in Subsection 2.2.1. The resistance tolerance may
be separately set for the phase-phase faults on the one hand and the phase-earth
faults on the other hand. It is therefore possible to allow for a larger fault resistance for
earth faults for example.
Most important for this setting on overhead lines, is the resistance of the fault arc. In
cables on the other hand, an appreciable arc can not exist. On very short cables, care
must however be taken that an arc fault on the local cable termination is inside the set
resistance of the first zone.
The standard value for the arc voltage UArc is approx. 2.5 kV per meter of arc length.
102 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Example:
A maximum arc voltage of 8 kV is assumed for phase-phase faults (line data as
above). If the minimum primary short-circuit current is assumed to be 1000 A this cor-
responds to 8 primary. The resistance setting for the first zone, including a safety
margin of 20%, would be
primary:
R1Prim = 0.5 RArc 1.2 = 0.5 8 1.2 = 4.8
or secondary:
Only half the arc resistance was applied in the equation, as it is added to the loop im-
pedance and therefore only half the arc resistance appears in the per phase imped-
ance. Since an arc resistance is assumed to be present in this case, infeed from the
opposite end need not be considered.
The resistance RL of the line itself can be ignored with SIPROTEC 4 devices. It is taken
into account by the shape of the polygon, provided that the inclination angle of the
polygon Distance Angle (address 1211) is not set greater than the line angle Line
Angle (address 1105).
A separate resistance tolerance can be set for earth faults. Figure 2-30 illustrates the
relationships.
Figure 2-30 Resistance measurement of the distance protection in the presence of arc faults
The maximum arc resistance RArc must be determined for setting the distance zone in
R direction. The maximum arc fault resistance is attained when the smallest fault
current at which an arc is still present flows during an earth fault.
7SA6 Manual 103

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
The earth fault resistance measured by the distance protection then results from the
formula below (it is assumed that I1 and IE are in phase opposition):
with
RRE Resistance measured by the SIPROTEC distance protection
RL1 Line resistance up to the fault location
RArc Arc resistance
RE/RL Setting in the distance protection (address 1116 and 1118)
I2/I1 Ratio between earth fault currents at the opposite end and the local
end. For a correct R setting of the distance zone, the most unfavour-
able case must be considered. This most unfavourable case would be
a maximum earth fault current at the opposite end and a minimum
earth fault current at the local end. Moreover, the currents considered
are the r.m.s. values without phase displacement. Where no informa-
tion is available on the current ratio, a value of approx. 3 can be as-
sumed. On radial feeders with negligible infeed from the opposite end,
this ratio is 0.
RTF Effective tower footing resistance of the overhead line system. Where
no information is available on the amount of tower footing resistance,
a value of 3 can be assumed for overhead lines with earth wire (see
also /5/).
The following recommended setting applies for the resistance tolerance of distance
zone Z1:
with
R1E Setting in the distance protection RE(Z1) -E, address 1304
1.2 Safety margin 20%
The resistance RL of the line itself can be ignored with SIPROTEC 4 devices. It is taken
into account by the shape of the polygon, provided that the inclination angle of the
polygon Distance Angle (address 1211) is not set greater than the line angle Line
Angle (address 1105).
104 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Example:
Arc length: 2 m
Minimum fault current: 1.0 kA
Effective tower footing resistance of the overhead line system: 3
with
I2/I1 =3
RE/RL = 0,6
Current transformer 600 A / 5 A
The arc resistance would be:
and the tower footing resistances RTF = 3

As a result, the resistance must be set to
primary:
or secondary:
In practice, the ratio between resistance and reactance setting is situated in the ranges
shown below (see also /5/):
Type of Line R/X Ratio of the Zone Setting

Short underground cable lines 3 to 5
(approx. 0.5 km to 3 km / 0.3 to 1.88 miles)
Longer underground cable lines 2 to 3
(> 3 km / 1.88 miles)
Short overhead lines < 10 km (6.25 miles) 2 to 5
Overhead lines < 100 km (62.5 miles) 1 to 2
Long overhead lines between 100 km and 200 km 0.5 to 1
(62.5 miles and 125 miles)
Long EHV lines > 200 km (125 miles) 0,5
7SA6 Manual 105

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Note
The following must be kept in mind for short lines with a high R/X ratio for the zone
setting: The angle errors of the current and voltage transformers cause a rotation of
the measured impedance in the direction of the R axis. If due to the polygon, RE/RL-
and XE/XL settings the loop reach in R direction is large in relation to the X direction,
there is an increased risk of external faults being shifted into zone Z1. A grading factor
85% should only be used up to R/X 1 (loop reach). For larger R/X settings, a reduced
grading factor for zone Z1 can be calculated with the following formula (see also /5/).
The reduced grading factor is calculated from:

GF = Grading factor = reach of zone Z1 in relation to the line length
R = Loop reach in R direction for zone Z1 = R1 (1+RE/RL)
X = Loop reach in X direction for zone Z1 = X1 (1+XE/XL)
U = Voltage transformer angle error (typical: 1)
I = Current transformer angle error (typical: 1)
In addition or as an alternative, it is also possible to use the setting 1307 Zone

Reduction, to modify the inclination of the zone Z1 polygon and thus prevent over-
reach (see Figure 2-22).
Note
On long lines with small R/X ratio, care must be taken to ensure that the R reach of
the zone settings is at least about half of the associated X setting. This is especially
important for zone Z1 and overreach zone Z1B in order to achieve the shortest possi-
ble tripping times.
Independent Zones By means of the parameter MODE = Forward or Reverse or Non-Directional

Z1 up to Z5 each zone can be set (address 1301 Op. mode Z1, 1311 Op. mode Z2, 1321 Op.
mode Z3, 1331 Op. mode Z4 and 1341 Op. mode Z5). This allows any combina-
tion of graded zones - forward, reverse or non-directional -, for example on transform-
ers, generators or bus couplers. In the fifth zone different reach in the X direction can
be set for forward or reverse. Zones that are not required are set Inactive.
The values derived from the grading coordination chart are set for each of the required
zones. The setting parameters are grouped for each zone. For the first zone these are
the parameters R(Z1) - (address 1302) for the R intersection of the polygon ap-
plicable to phase-phase faults, X(Z1) (address 1303) for the X intersection (reach),
RE(Z1) -E (address 1304) for the R intersection applicable to phase-earth faults
and delay time settings.
106 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
If a fault resistance at the fault location (arc, tower footing etc.) causes a voltage drop
in the measured impedance loop, the phase angle difference between this voltage and
the measure loop current may shift the determined fault location in X direction. Param-
eter 1307 Zone Reduction allows an inclination of the upper limit of zone Z1 in the
1st quadrant (see Figure 2-22). This prevents spurious pickup of zone Z1 in the pres-
ence of faults outside the protected area. Since any detailed calculation in this context
can only apply for one specific system and fault condition, and a next to unlimited
number of complex calculations would be required to determine the setting, we
suggest here a simplified but well-proven method:
Figure 2-31 Equivalent circuit diagram for the recommended angle setting Zone
Reduction.
The voltage drop at the fault location is:

UF = (IA + IB) RF
If IA and IB have equal phase, then UF and IA have equal phase too. In this case the
fault resistance RF does not influence the measured X in the loop, and the Zone
Reduction can be set to 0.
In practice, IA and IB do not have equal phase; the difference results mostly from the
phase difference between UA and UB. This angle (also called load angle) is therefore
used to determine the Zone Reduction angle.
Figure 2-32 Recommended setting for 1307 Zone Reduction (this graphic applies for overhead lines with a line angle
of more than 60. A smaller setting may be chosen for cables or protected objects with a smaller angle)
7SA6 Manual 107

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
The first step to determine the setting for 1307 Zone Reduction is to determine the
maximum load angle for normal operation (by computer simulation). If this information
is not available, a value of about 20 can be assumed for Western Europe. For other
regions with less closely meshed systems, larger angles may have to be chosen. The
next step is to select from Figure 2-32 the curve that matches the load angle. With the
set ratio R1/X1 (zone Z1 polygon) the appropriate setting for 1307 Zone Reduction
is then determined.
Example:
With a load angle of 20 and a setting R/X = 2.5 (R1 = 25 , X1 = 10 ), a setting of
10 is adequate for 1307 Zone Reduction.
Different delay times can be set for single- and multiple-phase faults in the first zone:
T1-1phase (address 1305) and T1-multi-phase (address 1306). The first zone
is typically set to operate without additional time delay.
For the remaining zones the following correspondingly applies:
X(Z2) (address 1313), R(Z2) - (address 1312), RE(Z2) -E (address 1314);
X(Z5)+ (address1343) for forward direction, X(Z5)- (address 1346) for reverse di-
rection, R(Z5) - (address 1342), RE(Z5) -E (address 1344).
For the second zone it is also possible to set separate delay times for single- and multi-
phase faults. In general the delay times are set the same. If stability problems are ex-
pected during multiple-phase faults a shorter delay time can be considered for T2-
multi-phase (address 1316) while a higher setting for single phase faults may be
tolerated T2-1phase (address 1315).
The zone timers for the remaining zones are set with the parameters T3 DELAY (ad-
dress 1325), T4 DELAY (address 1335) and T5 DELAY (address 1345).
If the device is provided with the capability to trip single-pole, single-pole tripping is
then possible in the zones Z1 and Z2. While single-pole tripping usually applies to
single-phase faults in zone Z1 (if the remaining conditions for single-pole tripping are
satisfied), this may also be selected for the second zone with address 1317 Trip
1pole Z2. Single pole tripping in zone Z2 is only possible if this address is set to YES.
The default setting is NO.
Note
For instantaneous tripping (undelayed) in the forward direction, the first zone Z1
should always be used, as only the zone Z1 and Z1B are guaranteed to trip with the
shortest operating time of the device. The further zones should be used sequentially
for grading in the forward direction.
If instantaneous tripping (undelayed) is required in the reverse direction, the zone Z3
should be used for this purpose, as only this zone ensures instantaneous pickup with
the shortest device operating time for faults in the reverse direction. This setting is also
recommended in teleprotection BLOCKING schemes.
With binary input indications 3619 >BLOCK Z4 Ph-E and 3620 >BLOCK Z5 Ph-
E zones Z4 and Z5 may be blocked for phase-earth loops. To block these zones per-
manently for phase-earth loops, said binary inputs must be set to the logic value of 1
via CFC.
108 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Zone Z5 is preferably set as a non-directional final stage. It should include all other
zones and also have sufficient reach in reverse direction. This ensures adequate
pickup of the distance protection in response to fault conditions and correct verification
of the short-circuit loops even under unfavourable conditions.
Note
Even if you do not need a non-directional distance stage, you should set Z5 according
to the above aspects. Setting T5 to infinite prevents that this stage causes a trip.
Controlled Zone The overreaching zone Z1B is a controlled zone. The normal zones Z1 to Z5 are not
Z1B influenced by Z1B. There is therefore no zone switching, but rather the overreaching
zone is activated or deactivated by the corresponding criteria. In address 1351 Op.
mode Z1B = Forward, it can also be switched Reverse or Non-Directional. If
this stage is not required, it is set to Inactive in address 1351. The setting options
are similar to those of zone Z1: address 1352 R(Z1B) -, address 1353 X(Z1B),
address 1354 RE(Z1B) -E. The delay times for single-phase and multiple-phase
faults can again be set separately: T1B-1phase (address 1355) and T1B-multi-
phase (address 1356). If parameter Op. mode Z1B is set to Forward or Reverse,
a non-directional trip is also possible in case of closure onto a fault if parameter 1232
SOTF zone is set to Z1B undirect. (see also Section 2.2.1.4).
Zone Z1B is usually used in combination with automatic reclosure and/or teleprotec-
tion systems. It can be activated internally by the teleprotection functions (see also
Section 2.6) or the integrated automatic reclosure (if available, see also Section 2.14),
or externally by a binary input. It is generally set to at least 120 % of the line length.
On three-terminal line applications (teed feeders), it must be set to securely reach
beyond the longest line section, even when there is additional infeed via the tee point.
The delay times are set in accordance with the type of application, usually to zero or
a very small delay. When used in conjunction with teleprotection comparison
schemes, the dependence on the fault detection must be considered (refer to margin
heading Distance Protection Prerequisites in Section 2.6.14.
If the distance protection is used in conjunction with an automatic recloser, it can be
determined in address 1357 1st AR -> Z1B which distance zones are released prior
to a rapid automatic reclosure. Usually the overreaching zone Z1B is used for the first
cycle (1st AR -> Z1B = YES). This may be suppressed by changing the setting of
1st AR -> Z1B to NO. In this case the overreaching zone Z1B is not released before
and during the 1st automatic reclose cycle. Zone Z1 is always released. The setting
only has an effect when the service condition of the automatic reclose function is input
to the device via binary input >Enable ARzones (No 383).
The zones Z4 and Z5 can be blocked using a binary input message 3619 >BLOCK
Z4 Ph-E or 3620 >BLOCK Z5 Ph-E for phase-earth loops. To block these zones
permanently for phase-earth loops, said binary inputs must be set to the logic value of
1 via CFC.
7SA6 Manual 109

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.2.2.3 Settings
ditional Settings.

1301 Op. mode Z1 Forward Forward Operating mode Z1
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
1302 R(Z1) - 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 1.250 R(Z1), Resistance for ph-
ph-faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.250
1303 X(Z1) 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 2.500 X(Z1), Reactance
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.500
1304 RE(Z1) -E 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 2.500 RE(Z1), Resistance for ph-
e faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.500
single phase faults
phase faults
1307 Zone Reduction 0 .. 45 0 Zone Reduction Angle
(load compensation)
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
ph-faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.500
1313 X(Z2) 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 5.000 X(Z2), Reactance
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 1.000
e faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 1.000
single phase faults
phase faults
YES Z2
1321 Op. mode Z3 Forward Reverse Operating mode Z3
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
ph-faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 1.000
110 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

1323 X(Z3) 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 10.000 X(Z3), Reactance
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.000
e faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.000
1331 Op. mode Z4 Forward Non-Directional Operating mode Z4
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
ph-faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
1333 X(Z4) 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 12.000 X(Z4), Reactance
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
e faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
1341 Op. mode Z5 Forward Inactive Operating mode Z5
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
ph-faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
1343 X(Z5)+ 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 12.000 X(Z5)+, Reactance for
Forward direction
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
e faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
1346 X(Z5)- 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 4.000 X(Z5)-, Reactance for
Reverse direction
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.800
1351 Op. mode Z1B Forward Forward Operating mode Z1B
Reverse (overrreach zone)
Non-Directional
Inactive
1352 R(Z1B) - 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 1.500 R(Z1B), Resistance for ph-
ph-faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.300
1353 X(Z1B) 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 3.000 X(Z1B), Reactance
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.600
1354 RE(Z1B) -E 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 3.000 RE(Z1B), Resistance for
ph-e faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.600
single ph. faults
7SA6 Manual 111

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

multi ph. faults
2.2.3 Distance zones (Circle)
The distance protection 7SA6 has a polygonal trip characteristic. Depending on the
version ordered (10th digit of the ordering code = A) a circular tripping characteristic
can be chosen. If only the polygonal tripping characteristic is used, please read Sub-
section 2.2.2.
2.2.3.1 Functional Description
Basic Circle One impedance circle is defined for each distance zone. It represents the tripping
characteristic of the corresponding zone. It is a circle that is centered around the origin
of the R-X coordinate system. In total there are five independent zones (Z1 to Z5) and
one additional controlled zone (Z1B) for each fault impedance loop. Since the circle
cannot distinguish between a positive (forward direction) and a negative (reverse di-
rection) impedance, the tripping zones are restricted to the desired quadrants by di-
rectional curves (see below under Determination of Direction). Figure 2-33 shows
the shape of the impedance circles as an example. The first zone is shaded and
forward directional. The third zone is reverse directional. Zone Z5 is non-directional.
The impedance circle is defined by its radius; it forms the locus diagram of constant
impedance Z = R2 + X2. This means that the radius determines the reach of a dis-
tance zone in the R-X diagram and is not dependent on the short-circuit angle SC.
112 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-33 Circle characteristic
Increased As the circular characteristic is symmetrically centered around the coordinate origin,
Resistance its resistance tolerance, i.e. the margin, in the case of faults near the reach threshold
Tolerance is limited. Therefore arc resistances, which typically occur on overhead lines, can only
be covered to a certain extent. In the case of close-up faults (X 0), a fault resistance
R can be detected up to the magnitude set for the impedance Z. This is sufficient for
long cables, provided that the arc resistance at the local cable termination is compen-
sated by the R reach of the circle. Remember that in the cable itself no significant arc
resistance can occur.
In order to achieve a sufficient resistance tolerance for overhead lines even close to
the reach threshold, the tripping characteristic can be extended in the R direction.
Such an extension makes also sense if in the case of short cables an increased
resistance tolerance is needed. This is the case if the resistance of the arc flashover
at the local cable sealing end is higher than the cable impedance at the reach thresh-
old of the first distance protection zone.
The increase of the resistance tolerance takes effect below a settable threshold angle
, which should be roughly equal to the line angle. Figure 2-34 shows an example for
the 1st zone and an angle = 60. The somewhat darker shaded area is the resis-
tance margin gained as compared with the lighter shaded impedance circle.
7SA6 Manual 113

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-34 Example of an increased resistance tolerance
The threshold angle can be set separately for each zone. In zones that are set in
reverse direction, the increased resistance tolerance area is, of course similar, mir-
rored by the coordinate origin.
The resistance tolerance is increased according to the formula
with
ZBal Balance point impedance = actual zone limit
Zr Set impedance = radius of the basic circle
Set threshold angle = angle below which the increased resistance
tolerance takes effect
SC Actual short-circuit angle = angle of the calculated short-circuit im-
pedance
When a threshold angle is set, the reach threshold lies still on the impedance circle:
because SC = , sin ( ) = 0, i.e. ZBal = Zr. For larger angles, the impedance circle
applies by definition; an increase of the resistance tolerance would be meaningless
and ineffective in such a context. With smaller angles, the resistance tolerance is in-
creased by sin ( SC), i.e. by sin if SC = 0.
114 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Load Area When using the impedance circle as an implicit pickup characteristic (Z<) on long,
heavily loaded lines, the risk of encroachment of the load impedance into the tripping
characteristic of the distance protection may exist. To exclude the risk of unwanted
fault detection by the distance protection during heavy load flow, a load trapezoid char-
acteristic may be set for tripping characteristics with large R sections, to prevent such
unwanted pickup by overload. This load trapezoid does not apply to the other pickup
modes since the distance zones are only released after pickup and the pickup function
fulfills the task of distinguishing clearly between load operation and short-circuit.
The load trapezoid "cuts out" the load impedance area from the circle characteristics
(Figure 2-35). It also has an effect on the area of increased resistance tolerance, as
can be seen in the figure for the 1st zone. Its shape is defined by the minimum load
resistance RLoad and the load area angle Load. These values are the same for all
zones.
Figure 2-35 Circle characteristic with load trapezoid Example
7SA6 Manual 115

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Determination of For each loop, an impedance vector calculated from the measured short-circuit
Direction values is used to determine the direction of the short-circuit. Usually, similar to the dis-
tance calculation, the determined short-circuit impedance ZL is used. However, de-
pending on the quality of the measured values, different computation techniques are
used. Immediately after fault inception, the short-circuit voltage is disturbed by tran-
sients. The voltage memorized prior to fault inception is therefore used in this situation.
If the steady-state short-circuit voltage (during a close-up fault) is too small for direc-
tion determination, an unfaulted voltage can be used. This voltage is in theory in
quadrature to the actual short-circuit voltage for both phase-earth loops as well as for
phase-phase loops (refer to Figure 2-23). This is taken into account when computing
the direction vector by means of a 90 rotation. Table 2-10 shows the allocation of the
measured values to the six fault loops for the determination of the fault direction.
Figure 2-36 Direction determination with quadrature voltages
Table 2-10 Voltage and current values for the determination of fault direction
Loop Measured Faulted-loop Voltage Quadrature Voltage

Current (Direc-
tion)
L1-E1) IL1 - IE1) UL1-E UL2 - UL3
L2-E1) IL2 - IE1) UL2-E UL3 - UL1
L3-E1) IL3 - IE1) UL3-E UL1 - UL2
1)
with consideration of the earth impedance compensation
116 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
If there is neither a current (actual) measured voltage nor a memorized voltage avail-
able which is suitable for measuring the direction, the relay selects the Forward di-
rection. In practice this can only occur when the circuit breaker closes onto a de-ener-
gized line, and there is a fault on this line (e.g. closing onto an earthed line).
Figure 2-37 shows the theoretical steady-state characteristic. In practice, the limits of
the directional characteristic when using memorized voltages is dependent on both
the source impedance and the load transferred across the line prior to fault inception.
Accordingly the directional characteristic includes a safety margin with respect to the
limits of the first quadrant in the R-X diagram.
Figure 2-37 Directional characteristic in the R-X-diagram
Since each zone can be set to Forward, Reverse or Non-Directional, different

(mirrored by the origin) directional characteristics are available for Forward and
Reverse. A non-directional zone has no directional characteristic. The entire tripping
region applies here.
Characteristics of The theoretical steady-state directional characteristic shown in Figure 2-37 applies to
the Directional faulted loop voltages. In the case of quadrature voltages or memorized voltage, the
Measurement position of the directional characteristic is dependent on both the source impedance
as well as the load transferred across the line prior to fault inception.
Figure 2-38 shows the directional characteristic using quadrature or memorized
voltage as well as taking the source impedance into account (no load transfer). As
these voltages are equal to the corresponding generator voltage E and they do not
change after fault inception, the directional characteristic is shifted in the impedance
diagram by the source impedance ZS1 = E1/I1. For the fault location F1 (Figure 2-38a)
the short-circuit location is in the forward direction and the source impedance is in the
reverse direction. For all fault locations, right up to the device location (current trans-
formers), a definite Forward decision is made (Figure 2-38b). If the current direction
is reversed, the position of the directional characteristic changes abruptly (Figure 2-
38c). A reversed current I2 now flows via the measuring location (current transformer)
which is determined by the source impedance ZS2 + ZL. When load is transferred
across the line, the directional characteristic may additionally be rotated by the load
angle.
7SA6 Manual 117

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-38 Directional characteristic with quadrature or memorized voltages
Determination of The directional characteristics and their displacement by the source impedance also
Direction in apply for lines with series capacitors. If a short-circuit occurs behind the local series
Case of Series- capacitors, the short-circuit voltage however is inverted until the protective spark gap
compensated Lines has picked up (see Figure 2-39).
Figure 2-39 Voltage characteristic for a short-circuit after a series capacitor

a) Without pickup of the protective spark gap PSG
b) With pickup of the protective spark gap PSG
The distance protection function would thus detect a wrong fault direction. The use of
memorized voltages however ensures that the direction is correctly detected (see
Figure 2-40a).
118 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Since the voltage prior to the fault is used for determining the direction, the peak dis-
placement of the directional characteristics in dependence of the source impedance
and infeed conditions before the fault are thus far apart so that the capacitor reactance
which is always smaller than the source reactance does not cause an apparent
direction reversal (Figure 2-40b).
If the short-circuit is located before the capacitor, from the relay location (current trans-
former) in reverse direction, the peak displacement of the directional characteristics
are shifted to the other direction (Figure 2-40c). A correct determination of the direction
is thus also ensured in this case.
Figure 2-40 Determination of direction in case of series-compensated lines
Pickup and If you have selected an explicit pickup scheme when configuring the protection func-
Assignment to the tions, the impedances that were calculated from the valid loops, are assigned, after
Trip Zone the pickup, to the zone characteristics set for the distance protection. This means that,
if the pickup scheme I>, U/I or U/I/ is used, the valid loops are taken into account
after the pickup. The loop information is also converted to phase segregated informa-
tion
Using the impedance pickup, the calculated loop impedances are also assigned to the
zone characteristics set for the distance protection, but without consideration of an ex-
plicit fault detection scheme. The pickup range of the distance protection is deter-
mined from the bounderies of the largest-set distance zone, taking into consideration
the respective direction. To avoid unstable signals at the boundaries of the character-
istics, the characteristics have a hysteresis of approximately 5 %, i.e. as soon as it has
been determined that the fault impedance lies within a trip zone, the boundaries are
increased by 5 % in all directions. Here the loop information is also converted into
faulted phase indication.
7SA6 Manual 119

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Pickup signals are generated for each zone and converted into phase information,
e.g. Dis. Z1 L1 for zone Z1 and phase L1. This means that each phase and each
zone is provided with separate pickup information. The information is then processed
in the zone logic and by additional functions (e.g. teleprotection logic, Subsection 2.6).
The loop information is also converted to phase segregated information. Further con-
ditions for the pickup of a zone are that the direction corresponds to the set direction
for the zone, and that the zone is not blocked (refer to Subsection 2.3). Furthermore
the distance protection may not be blocked or switched off completely. Figure 2-41 il-
lustrates these conditions for the 1st zone.
Figure 2-41 Release logic for a zone (example for Z1)
In total, the following zones are available:

Independent zones:
1st zone (fast tripping zone) Z1 with circle radius ZR(Z1); may be delayed by T1-
1phase and T1-multi-phase,
2nd zone (backup zone) Z2 with circle radius ZR(Z2); may be delayed by T2-
1phase and T2-multi-phase,
3rd zone (backup zone) Z3 with circle radius ZR(Z3); may be delayed by T3
DELAY,
4th zone (backup zone) Z4 with circle radius ZR(Z4); may be delayed by T4
DELAY,
5th zone (backup zone) Z5 with circle radius ZR(Z5); may be delayed by T5
DELAY,
Dependent (controlled) zone:
Overreaching zone Z1B with circle radius ZR(Z1B); may be delayed by T1B-
1phase or T1B-multi-phase.
The threshold angle for the increased resistance tolerance can be set individually for
each zone, provided that the resistance tolerance has been set to YES in address
1212 R-reserve.
120 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Grading It is recommended to initially create a grading coordination chart for the entire galvan-
coordination chart ically interconnected system. This diagram should reflect the line lengths with their
primary impedance Z in /phase. The impedances Z determine the circle radii and are
the deciding quantities for the reach of the distance zones.
The first zone Z1 is usually set to cover 85 % of the protected line without any trip time
delay (i.e. T1 = 0.00 s). The protection clears faults in this range without additional
time delay, i.e. the tripping time is the relay basic operating time.
The tripping time of the higher zones is sequentially increased by one time grading in-
terval. The grading margin must take into account the circuit breaker operating time
including the spread of this time, the resetting time of the protection equipment as well
as the spread of the protection delay timers. Typical values are 0.2 s to 0.4 s. The
reach is selected to cover up to approximately 80 % of the zone with the same set time
delay on the shortest neighbouring feeder (see Figure 2-29).
Figure 2-42 Setting the reach Example for device A

s1, s2 Protected line section
tionally entered as primary or secondary values.
In the case of parameterization with secondary quantities, the values derived from the
grading coordination chart must be converted to the secondary side of the current and
voltage transformers. In general:
Accordingly, the reach for any distance zone can be specified as follows:
with
NCTR = Current transformer ratio
NVT = Transformation ratio of voltage transformers
7SA6 Manual 121

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Belted cable 10 kV with aluminium sheath 3 x 120 mm2, with the following data:
s (length) = 8.5 km (5.3 miles)
R1/s = 0.15 /km
X1/s = 0.10 /km
R0/s = 0.83 /km
X0/s = 0.31 /km
Current transformer 500 A / 5 A
Voltage transformer 10 kV/0.1 kV
The following line data is calculated:
ZL = 0.152 + 0.102 /km 8.5 km = 0.18 /km 8.5 km = 1.53
For the first zone, a setting of 85 % of the line length should be applied, which results
in primary:
X1Prim = 0.85 XL = 0.85 1.53 = 1.30
or secondary:
122 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Resistance The natural resistance tolerance of the impedance circle is the horizontal distance
Tolerance between the line angle and the perimeter of the circle.
With overhead lines, the presence of a fault resistance (arc) will therefore cause an
underreach of the distance zones, because the resistance tolerance at the reach
threshold is zero, but increases quickly and dramatically in the direction of the coordi-
nate origin (Figure 2-43).
Figure 2-43 Resistance tolerance of the impedance circle for overhead lines
Zr Reach setting
ZL Line impedance
L Line angle
RL Arc resistance
ZSC Short-circuit impedance
SC Short-circuit angle
The resistance tolerance RL depends in this case on the line angle and on the under-
reach of the distance zone top be tolerated. With a line angle L = 80 and an under-
reach of 10 %, for instance, it is 30 % of the balance point impedance (Table 2-11).
7SA6 Manual 123

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Table 2-11 Resistance Tolerance of the Impedance Circle

Line Angle L Resistance Tolerance RL for Tolerable Underreach of
10 % 15 % 20 %
85 36 % 45 % 53 %
80 30 % 40 % 47 %
75 26 % 35 % 42 %
70 22 % 31 % 38 %
65 19 % 27 % 35 %
60 17 % 25 % 32 %
All percentages are referred to the balance point impedance (circle radius).
With cables, the relevant factor is not the resistance tolerance in the proximity of the
reach threshold, but the local resistance tolerance. Since electric arcs within the cable
are practically impossible, only arc faults on the local cable termination need to be
taken into account for the resistance tolerance (Figure 2-44).
The impedance circle compensates fault resistances up to the magnitude value of the
balance point impedance (Figure 2-45).
Figure 2-44 Cable feeder with arc fault at the local sealing end
124 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-45 Local resistance tolerance of the impedance circle for cables
Increased To increase the margin for fault resistance, you can set the increased resistance toler-
Resistance ance to YES in address 1212 R-reserve. The impedance circle is in that case ex-
Tolerance tended in R direction (Figure 2-46). The angle determines the transition from the im-
pedance circle to the increased resistance tolerance curve.
Figure 2-46 Example of an increased resistance tolerance
7SA6 Manual 125

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
This extension causes an increase of the resistance tolerance both close to the reach
threshold and close to the mounting location. The curvature of the extension curve in
X direction may lead to an overreach; within limits, however, this overreach can be tol-
erated since the threshold limit normally has a safety margin of 15 % with respect to
the next station, i.e. the line end.
With a threshold angle (e.g. parameter ALPHA(Z1), address 1503, for the 1st zone)
of 45 and less, the extension does not lead to an overreach. The higher is set, the
higher the potential overreach will be. Figure 2-47 illustrates the shape of the tripping
characteristic with different angles .
Figure 2-47 Qualitative trajectory of the tripping characteristic with increased resistance tolerance
Since the overreach and the resistance tolerance depend both on the line angle and
on the setting angle , a few orientation values are given below.
With overhead lines, the critical factor is the resistance tolerance for arc faults in the
proximity of the reach threshold. The threshold angle (e.g. parameter ALPHA(Z1),
address 1503, for the 1st zone) must be chosen so that a high resistance tolerance
without unacceptable high overreach takes effect.
1. The angle ALPHA should not be set higher than the line angle.
2. The angle ALPHA should not exceed 75.
If these hints are disregarded, arc faults may cause an increased overreach. Table 2-
12 illustrates these correlations with a few examples of the approximative overreach
caused by an increased resistance tolerance setting.
Table 2-12 Approximate Overreach with Increased Resistance Tolerance
Setting Potential Overreach Caused by an Arc Fault with a Line Angle of

ALPHA
90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50
1) 1) 1) 1)
75 10 % 11 % 12 % 14 % 1)
70 3% 4% 5% 7% 10 % 1) 1) 1) 1)
65 0% 0% 0% 0% 3% 7% 1) 1) 1)
1)
60 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4% 1)
55 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 2% 1)
50 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 1%
1)
Here the condition L would not be fulfilled
126 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
As in the basic circle, the amount of the resistance tolerance RL depends on the line
angle and on the distance zone underreach to be tolerated (see also Figure 2-46).
Table 2-13 shows the approximate resistance tolerance with a tolerable underreach of
15 %.
Table 2-13 Resistance Tolerance with an Increased Resistance Tolerance Setting

Setting Resistance Tolerance RL for a Tolerable Underreach of 15 % with a Line Angle of
ALPHA
90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50
1) 1) 1) 1)
75 148 % 141 % 135 % 129 % 1)
70 137 % 131 % 125 % 120 % 116 % 1) 1) 1) 1)
65 125 % 118 % 112 % 108 % 105 % 102 % 1) 1) 1)
1)
60 107 % 100 % 96 % 93 % 91 % 90 % 89 % 1)
55 2) 2) 59 % 86 % 71 % 73 % 75 % 77 % 1)
2) 2) 2) 2) 2)
50 36 % 55 % 61 % 65 %
All percentages are referred to the set balance point impedance (circle radius).
1) Here the condition L would not be fulfilled

2)
Underreach higher than 15 %
With cables, the key factor is not the resistance tolerance in the proximity of the reach
threshold, but the local resistance tolerance, i.e. for SC = 0. Here again, the angle
ALPHA should not be set higher than the line angle in order to avoid overreach. The
resistance tolerance is determined by the value R (X = 0) of the extended tripping char-
acteristic. Table 2-14 shows some values for different settings of ALPHA. It can be cal-
culated for any value with the formula
RL = Zr (1 + sin) with Zr = set reach (impedance)
The line angle is not relevant for the actual resistance tolerance. Once again, it is
assumed that the circle radius is equivalent to the impedance of the line length to be
protected, i.e. that its setting is approx. 85 % of the cable impedance.
Table 2-14 Local Resistance Tolerance with an Increased Resistance Tolerance Setting
Setting Resistance tolerance RL with X = 0

75 196 %
70 193 %
65 190 %
60 186 %
55 181 %
50 176 %
45 170 %
40 164 %
35 157 %
30 150 %
25 142 %
20 134 %
15 125 %
10 117 %
All percentages are referred to the balance point impedance (circle radius).
7SA6 Manual 127

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
For the higher zones, it usually makes sense to choose a lower resistance tolerance
than for the 1st zone (always referred to the impedance reach). This is achieved by
setting a smaller threshold angle ALPHA.
Independent Zones By means of the parameter MODE = Forward or Reverse or Non-Directional

Z1 up to Z5 each zone can be set (address 1301 Op. mode Z1, 1311 Op. mode Z2, 1321 Op.
mode Z3, 1331 Op. mode Z4 and 1341 Op. mode Z5). This option allows any
combination of forward, reverse or non-directional graded zones, for example on
transformers, generators or bus couplers. Zones that are not required are set
Inactive.
The values derived from the grading coordination chart are set for each of the required
zones. The setting parameters are grouped for each zone. For the 1st zone, the reach
is represented by the impedance ZR(Z1) (address 1502). An example for determina-
tion of the impedance is given below under margin heading Grading Coordination
Chart.
Different delay times can be set for single- and multiple-phase faults in the first zone:
T1-1phase (address 1305) and T1-multi-phase (address 1306). The first zone
is typically set to operate without additional time delay.
If you have set an increased resistance tolerance in the general distance protection
settings (address 1212 R-reserve = YES), you can set for each zone the angle
below which the extension in R direction takes effect. This is set for the 1st zone in
address 1503 ALPHA(Z1). For more details, please refer to marging heading In-
creased Resistance Tolerance above.
For the remaining zones the following correspondingly applies:
ZR(Z2) (address 1512) and ALPHA(Z2) (address 1513);
ZR(Z5) (address 1542) and ALPHA(Z5) (address 1543).
For the 2nd zone it is also possible to set separate delay times for single- and multi-
phase faults. In general the delay times are set the same. If stability problems are ex-
pected during multiple-phase faults, a shorter delay time can be considered for T2-
multi-phase (address 1316), while a higher setting for single phase faults may be
tolerated for T2-1phase (address 1315).
The zone timers for the remaining zones are set with the parameters T3 DELAY (ad-
dress 1325), T4 DELAY (address 1335) and T5 DELAY (address 1345).
If the device is provided with the capability to trip single-pole, single-pole tripping is
then possible in the zones Z1 and Z2. While single-pole tripping usually applies to
single-phase faults in Z1 (if the remaining conditions for single-pole tripping are satis-
fied), this may also be selected for the second zone with address 1317 Trip 1pole
Z2. Single-pole tripping in zone 2 is only possible if this address is set to YES. The
default setting is NO.
128 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Note
For instantaneous tripping (undelayed) in the forward direction, the first zone Z1
should always be used, as only the Z1 and Z1B are guaranteed to trip with the shortest
operating time of the device. The further zones should be used sequentially for
grading in the forward direction.
If instantaneous tripping (undelayed) is required in the reverse direction, the zone Z3
should be used for this purpose, as only this zone ensures instantaneous pickup with
the shortest device operating time for faults in the reverse direction. This setting is also
recommended in teleprotection BLOCKING schemes.
With binary input indications 3619 >BLOCK Z4 Ph-E and 3620 >BLOCK Z5 Ph-
E zones Z4 and Z5 for phase-earth loops may be blocked. To block these zones per-
manently for phase-earth loops, binary input indications must be set to the logic value
1 using CFC.
Controlled zone The overreaching zone Z1B is a controlled zone. The normal zones Z1 to Z5 are not
Z1B influenced by Z1B. There is therefore no zone switching, but rather the overreaching
zone is activated or deactivated by the corresponding criteria. In address 1351 Op.
mode Z1B = Forward, it can also be switched Reverse or Non-Directional. If
this stage is not required, it is set to Inactive in address 1351. The setting options
are similar to those of zone Z1: Address 1552 ZR(Z1B) and address 1553
ALPHA(Z1B). The delay times for single-phase and multiple-phase faults can again
be set separately: T1B-1phase (address 1355) and T1B-multi-phase (address
1356).
Zone Z1B is usually used in combination with automatic reclosure and/or teleprotec-
tion systems. It can be activated internally by the teleprotection functions (see also
Section 2.6) or the integrated automatic reclosure (if available, see also Section 2.14),
or externally by a binary input. It is generally set to at least 120 % of the line length.
On three-terminal line applications (teed feeders), it must be set to securely reach
beyond the longest line section, even when there is additional infeed via the tee point.
The delay times are set in accordance with the type of application, usually to zero or
a very small delay. When used in conjunction with teleprotection comparison
schemes, the dependence on the fault detection must be considered (refer to margin
heading Distance Protection Prerequisites in Section 2.6.14.
If the distance protection is used in conjunction with an automatic recloser, it can be
determined in address 1357 1st AR -> Z1B if this distance zone is released prior
to a rapid automatic reclosure. Usually the overreaching zone Z1B is used for the first
cycle (1st AR -> Z1B = YES). This may be suppressed by changing the setting of
1st AR -> Z1B to NO. In this case the overreaching zone Z1B is not released before
and during the 1st automatic reclose cycle. Zone Z1 is always released. With an ex-
ternal automatic reclose device the setting only has an effect when the service condi-
tion of this device is input via binary input >Enable ARzones (No. 383).
7SA6 Manual 129

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.2.3.3 Settings
ditional Settings.

Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
single phase faults
phase faults
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
single phase faults
phase faults
YES Z2
1321 Op. mode Z3 Forward Reverse Operating mode Z3
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
1331 Op. mode Z4 Forward Non-Directional Operating mode Z4
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
1341 Op. mode Z5 Forward Inactive Operating mode Z5
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
1351 Op. mode Z1B Forward Forward Operating mode Z1B
Reverse (overrreach zone)
Non-Directional
Inactive
single ph. faults
multi ph. faults
130 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

1502 ZR(Z1) 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 2.500 ZR(Z1), radius of circle Z1
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.500
1503 ALPHA(Z1) 10 .. 90 ; 0 60 ALPHA(Z1), angle for R-
reserve
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 1.000
reserve
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.000
reserve
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
reserve
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
reserve
1552 ZR(Z1B) 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 3.000 ZR(Z1B), radius of circle
Z1B
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.600
1553 ALPHA(Z1B) 10 .. 90 ; 0 60 ALPHA(Z1B), angle for R-
reserve
7SA6 Manual 131

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.2.4 Tripping Logic of the Distance Protection
General Device Using the fault detection modes I, U/I or U/I/, the signal Dis. PICKUP(general
Pickup pickup of the distance protection function) is generated after the pickup as soon as one
of the conditions for pickup is fulfilled. As soon as any of the distance zones has de-
termined with certainty that the fault is inside the tripping range, the signal Dis.
PICKUP is generated when using the impedance pickup.
This signal Dis. PICKUP is alarmed and made available for the initialisation of in-
ternal and external supplementary functions. (e.g. teleprotection signal transmission,
automatic reclosure).
Zone Logic of the As was mentioned in the description of the measuring technique, each distance zone
Independent Zones generates an output signal which is associated with the zone and the affected phase.
Z1 up to Z5 The zone logic combines these zone fault detections with possible further internal and
external signals. The delay times for the distance zones can be started either all to-
gether on general fault detection by the distance protection function, or individually at
that moment the fault enters the respective distance zone. Parameter Start Timers
(address 1210) is set by default to on Dis. Pickup . This setting ensures that all
delay times continue to run together even if the type of fault or the selected measuring
loop changes, e.g. because an intermediate infeed is switched off. This is also the pre-
ferred setting in the case of other distance protection relays in the power system
working with this start timing. Where grading of the delay times is especially important,
for instance if the fault location shifts from zone Z3 to zone Z2, the setting on Zone
Pickup should be chosen. The simplified zone logic is shown in Figure 2-48 for zone
Z1, Figure 2-49 for zone Z2 and Figure 2-50 for zone Z3. Zones Z4 and Z5 function
according to Figure 2-51.
In the case of zones Z1, Z2 and Z1B single-pole tripping is possible for single-phase
faults, if the device version includes the single-pole tripping option. Therefore the
event output in these cases is provided for each pole. Different trip delay times can be
set for single-phase and multiple-phase faults in these zones. In further zones, the trip-
ping is always three pole.
Note
Binary input >1p Trip Perm (No. 381) must be activated to achieve single-pole
tripping. The internal automatic reclosing function may also grant the single-pole per-
mission. The binary input is usually controlled by an external automatic reclosure
device.
132 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The trip delay times of the zones (except for Z1 which is usually always set without
delay) can be bypassed. The grading times are started either via zone pickup or
general pickup of the distance protection function. The undelayed release results from
the line energization logic, which may be externally initiated via the circuit breaker
close signal derived from the circuit breaker control switch or from an internal line en-
ergization detection. Zones Z4 and Z5 may be blocked by external criteria (No. 3617
>BLOCK Z4-Trip, No. 3618 >BLOCK Z5-Trip).
Figure 2-48 Tripping logic for the 1st zone
Figure 2-49 Tripping logic for the 2nd zone
7SA6 Manual 133

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-50 Tripping logic for the 3rd zone
Figure 2-51 Tripping logic for the 4th and 5th zone, shown for Z4
134 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Zone Logic of the The controlled zone Z1B is usually applied as an overreaching zone. The logic is
Controlled Zone shown in Figure 2-52. It may be activated via various internal and external functions.
Z1B The binary inputs for external activation of Z1B of the distance protection are
>ENABLE Z1B and >Enable ARzones. The former can, for example, be from
an external teleprotection device, and only affects Z1B of the distance protection. The
latter can also be controlled, e.g. by an external automatic reclosure device. In addi-
tion, it is possible to use the zone Z1B as a rapid autoclosure stage that only operates
for single-pole faults, for example, if only single-pole automatic reclose cycles are ex-
ecuted.
It is possible for the 7SA6 to trip single-pole during two-phase faults without earth-con-
nection in the overreaching zone when single-pole automatic reclosure is used.
As the device features an integrated teleprotection function, release signals from this
function may activate the zone Z1B, provided that the internal teleprotection signal
transmission function has been configured to one of the available schemes with pa-
rameter 121 Teleprot. Dist., i.e., the function has not been set to Disabled. If
the integrated AR function is activated, zone Z1B can be released in the first AR cycle
provided that parameter 1357 1st AR -> Z1B is set accordingly.
If the distance protection is operated with one of the signal transmission methods de-
scribed in section 2.6 the signal transmission logic controls the overreaching zone, i.e.
it determines whether a non-delayed trip (or delayed with T1B) is permitted in the
event of faults in the overreaching zone (i.e. up to the reach limit of zone Z1B).
Whether the automatic reclosure device is ready for reclosure or not is irrelevant,
because the teleprotection function ensures the selectivity over 100% of the line
length and fast tripping.
If, however, the signal transmission is switched off or the transmission path is dis-
turbed, the internal automatic reclosure circuit can determine whether the overreach-
ing zone (Z1B in the distance protection) is released for fast tripping. If no reclosure is
expected (e.g. circuit breaker not ready) the normal grading of the distance protection
(i.e. fast tripping only for faults in zone Z1) must apply to retain selectivity.
Fast tripping before reclosure is also possible with multiple reclosures. Appropriate
links between the output signals (e.g. 2nd reclosure ready: 2890, AR
2.CycZoneRel) and the inputs for enabling/releasing non-delayed tripping of the
protection functions can be established via the binary inputs and outputs (383,
>Enable ARzones) or the integrated user-definable logic functions (CFC).
7SA6 Manual 135

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-52 Tripping logic for the controlled zone Z1B
136 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Tripping Logic The output signals generated by the individual zones are logically connected to the
output signals Dis.Gen. Trip, Dis.Trip 1pL1, Dis.Trip 1pL2,
Dis.Trip 1pL3, Dis.Trip 3p in the actual tripping logic. The single-pole in-
formation implies that tripping will take place single-pole only. Furthermore, the zone
that initiated the tripping is identified; if single-pole tripping is possible, this is also
alarmed, as shown in the zone logic diagrams (Figures 2-48 up to 2-52). The actual
generation of the commands for the tripping (output) relay is executed within the trip-
ping logic of the entire device.
The trip delay times of the distance stages and intervention options which are also pro-
cessed in the tripping logic of the distance protection were already considered with the
zone settings.
Further setting options which affect the tripping are described as part of the tripping
logic of the device.
7SA6 Manual 137

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.3 Power swing detection (optional)
The 7SA6 has an integrated power swing supplement which allows both the blocking
of trips by the distance protection during power swings (power swing blocking) and the
calculated tripping during unstable power swings (out-of-step tripping). To avoid un-
controlled tripping, the distance protection devices are supplemented with power
swing blocking functions. At particular locations in the system, out-of-step tripping
devices are also applied to split the system into islanded networks at selected loca-
tions, when system stability (synchronism) is lost due to severe (unstable) power
swings.
2.3.1 Method of Operation
Following dynamic events such as load jumps, short-circuits, reclose dead times or
switching actions it is possible that the generators must realign themselves, in an os-
cillatory manner, with the new load balance of the system. The distance protection reg-
isters large transient currents during the power swing and, especially at the electrical
centre, small voltages (Figure 2-53). Small voltages with simultaneous large currents
apparently imply small impedances, which again could lead to tripping by the distance
protection. In expansive networks with large transferred power, even the stability of the
energy transfer could be endangered by such power swings.
Figure 2-53 Power swing
Note
The power swing supplement works together with the impedance pickup and is only
available in this combination.
The function description is demonstrated by way of the polygon characteristic. It is

analogously relevant for the circle characteristic (considering the corresponding im-
pedance circles instead of the polygons).
System power swings are three-phase symmetrical processes. Therefore in general a
certain degree of measured value symmetry may be assumed. System power swings
may however also occur during unsymmetrical processes, e.g. during two-phase
short-circuits or during single-pole dead times. The power swing detection in the 7SA6
is therefore based on three measuring systems. For each phase, a dedicated measur-
ing system is available. Even if a power swing has been detected, any subsequent
short-circuits will result in the fast cancellation of the power swing block in the affected
phases, thereby allowing the tripping of the distance protection.
138 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
To detect a power swing, the rate of change of the impedance vectors is measured.
The message is triggered when the impedance vector enters the power swing mea-
suring range PPOL (refer to Figure 2-54) and the other criteria of power swing detec-
tion are met. The fault detection range APOL is made up for the polygonal character-
istic of the largest set values for R and X of all the activated zones. The power swing
zone has a minimum distance ZDiff of 5 (at IN = 1 A) or 1 (at IN = 5 A) in all direc-
tions from the fault detection zone. In the event of a short-circuit (1), the impedance
vector abruptly changes from the load condition into this fault detection range. How-
ever, in the event of a power swing, the apparent impedance vector initially enters the
power swing range PPOL and only later enters the fault detection range APOL (2). It
is also possible that a power swing vector will enter the area of the power swing range
and leave it again without coming into contact with the fault detection range (3). If the
vector enters the power swing polygon and passes through it leaving on the opposite
side, then the sections of the network seen from the relay location have lost synchro-
nism (4): The power transfer is unstable.
Figure 2-54 Pickup characteristic of the power swing detection for a polygon.
The rate of change of the 3 impedance vectors is monitored in 1/4 cycle intervals.
7SA6 Manual 139

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-55 Impedance vector during power swing
Trajectory The rate of change of the impedance vector is very important for the differentiation
Continuity and between faults and power swing conditions. This is shown in Figure 2-55. During the
Monotony power swing the measured impedance from one sample to the next has a defined
change in R and X, referred to as dR(k) and dX(k). Important is also the fact that from
one sample to the next the difference is small: i.e. |dR(k) dR(k+1)| < threshold.
During a fault entry there is a rapid change that will not cause the power swing function
to pick up.
Trajectory Stability When the impedance vector enters the impedance characteristic during a power
swing this is on a point of the elliptical curve that corresponds to steady state instabil-
ity. For release of the power swing detection a further criterion is therefore used. In
Figure 2-56 the range for steady state instability is shown. This range is detected in
7SA6. This is done by calculating the centre of the ellipse and checking if the actual
measured X value is less than this value.
Figure 2-56 Steady state instability range
140 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Trajectory In addition to these measures, a comparison of the three phases is done to ensure that
Symmetry they are symmetrical. During a power swing condition in the single pole open condi-
tion, only two of the three phases will have an impedance trajectory. In this case only
these 2 remaining phase trajectories are checked to ensure that they are symmetrical.
Power Swing To ensure stable and secure operation of the power swing detection without risking un-
Detection wanted power swing blocking during power system faults, a logical combination of a
number of measuring criteria are used.
Figure 2-57 Logic diagram of power swing detection
In Figure 2-57 a simplified logic diagram for the power swing function is given. This
measurement is done on a per phase basis although Figure 2-57 only shows the logic
for one phase. Before a power swing detected signal is generated, the measured im-
pedance must be inside the power swing polygon (PPOL).
7SA6 Manual 141

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
In the following there are 4 measuring criteria:

Trajectory continuity The calculated R and X values must create a constant
line. There must be no jump from one measured value
to the next. Refer to Figure 2-55.
Trajectory monotony The impedance trajectory must initially not change R-
direction. Refer to Figure 2-55.
Trajectory symmetry The trajectory of each phase is evaluated. If no fault is
present these 3 trajectories must be symmetrical.
During single pole open conditions the remaining 2 tra-
jectories must be symmetrical.
Trajectory stability When the impedance trajectory enters the PPOL
during a swing condition, the system must be in the
area of steady state instability. In Figure 2-56 this cor-
responds to the lower half of the circle.
All these conditions must be true for the generation of a power swing block condition.
Once the power swing block condition is set it will remain picked up until the imped-
ance vector leaves the power swing polygon (PPOL). This is unless a fault occurs
during this phase. The detection of a jump in the trajectory or non-symmetry of the tra-
jectories will reset the power swing blocking condition. The power swing detection can
be blocked via a binary input.
Power Swing The power swing blocking affects the distance protection. If the criteria for power
Blocking swing detection have been fulfilled in at least one phase, the following reactions are
possible in relation to the power swing blocking function (set in address 2002 P/S
Op. mode):
Blocking of the trip command for all zones (All zones block): The trip command
of the distance protection is blocked for all zones during a power swing.
Blocking of the trip command for the first zone only (Z1/Z1B block): The trip
command of the first zone (Z1) and that of the overreaching zone (Z1B) are blocked
during a power swing. Faults in other zones are tripped with the associated grading
time.
Blocking of the trip command for the higher zones only (Z2 to Z5 block): the
higher zones (Z2 to Z5) are blocked for the tripping during a power swing. Only a
pickup in the first zone or the overreach zone (Z1 and Z1B) can lead to a trip com-
mand.
Blocking of the first two zones (Z1,Z1B,Z2 block): The trip commands of the first
and second zones (Z1 and Z2) and the overreaching zone (Z1B) are blocked during
a power swing. A pickup in one of the higher zones (Z3 to Z5) can still lead to a trip.
The effect of the power swing block on the distance protection will be prolonged for a
defined time (address 2007 Trip DELAY P/S). Thus transient states (e.g. switching
operations) are compensated, which occur during a power swing and cause a jump in
the measured quantities.
142 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-58 Blocking logic of the power swing supplement
Only trip commands in those phases are blocked in which power swings were detect-
ed. The associated measures taken apply to all phases when power swing has been
detected. They are active for as long as the measured impedance vector is inside the
power swing range PPOL, or if due to an abrupt change of the associated impedance
vector the power swing criteria are no longer satisfied.
It is possible with No. 4160 >Pow. Swing BLK to block the power swing detection
via a binary input.
The logic shown in Figure 2-59 applies similarly for all other zones.
7SA6 Manual 143

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-59 Blocking logic of the power swing supplement for zone Z1
Power Swing If tripping in the event of an unstable power swing (out-of-step condition) is desired,
Tripping the parameter PowerSwing trip = YES is set. If the criteria for power swing detec-
tion are satisfied, the distance protection is initially blocked according to the configured
program for power swing blocking, to avoid tripping by the distance protection.
When the impedance vectors identified by the power swing detection exit the power
swing characteristic PPOL, the sign of the R components in the vectors are checked
to see if they are the same on exiting and entering the pickup polygon. If this is the
case, the power swing process is inclined to stabilize. Otherwise, the vector passed
through the power swing characteristic (loss of synchronism, case (4) in Figure 2-54).
Stable power transmission is then no longer possible. . The device outputs an alarm
to that effect (No. 4163 P.Swing unstab.), provided that the parameter in
address 2006 PowerSwing trip is set to NO. The alarm No. 4163 P.Swing
unstab. is a pulse with a duration of approx. 50 ms, which can also be processed
further via output relay, e.g. for a cycle counter or a pulse counter.
Once instability is detected, the device issues a three-pole trip command, thereby iso-
lating the two system segments from each other. Power swing tripping is alarmed.
As the operating range of the power swing supplement depends on the distance pro-
tection settings, the power swing tripping can only be active when the distance protec-
tion has been activated.
144 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.3.2 Setting Notes
The power swing supplement is only active if it has been set to Power Swing =
Enabled (address 120) during the configuration. For Power Swing no other param-
eters have to be set.
The four possible programs may be set in address 2002 P/S Op. mode, as de-
scribed in Section 2.3: All zones block, Z1/Z1B block, Z2 to Z5 block or
Z1,Z1B,Z2 block.
Additionally the tripping function for unstable oscillations (out-of-step condition, loss of
system synchronism) can be set with parameter PowerSwing trip (address 2006),
which should be set to YES if required (presetting is NO). In the event of power swing
tripping it is recommended to set P/S Op. mode = All zones block for the power
swing blocking, to avoid premature tripping by the distance protection.
The tripping delay after power swing blocking can be set in address 2007 Trip
DELAY P/S.
Note
In order to ensure optimum power swing detection even under unfavourable condi-
tions, it is recommended to set a non-directional distance zone. This zone should
include all other zones. Preferably zone Z5 should be used for this. If tripping in zone
Z5 is not desired, the delay time T5 can be set to infinite. The distance to the zones
included in Z5 is not critical and may even be zero. The setting in negative X5 direction
should not be less than about 50% of the value of the positive X5 direction, i.e. address
1346 50% address 1343.
7SA6 Manual 145

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.3.3 Settings

2002 P/S Op. mode All zones block All zones block Power Swing Operating mode
Z1/Z1B block
Z2 to Z5 block
Z1,Z1B,Z2 block
2006 PowerSwing trip NO NO Power swing trip
YES
2007 Trip DELAY P/S 0.08 .. 5.00 sec; 0 0.08 sec Trip delay after Power Swing
Blocking
2.3.4 Information List

formation
4160 >Pow. Swing BLK SP >BLOCK Power Swing detection
4163 P.Swing unstab. OUT Power Swing unstable
4164 Power Swing OUT Power Swing detected
4166 Pow. Swing TRIP OUT Power Swing TRIP command
4167 Pow. Swing L1 OUT Power Swing detected in L1
146 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.4 Protection data interfaces and communication topology (optional)
Where a teleprotection scheme is to be used to achieve 100 % instantaneous protec-

tion (Section 2.6), digital communication channels can be used for data transmission
between the devices. In addition to the protection data, other data can be transmitted
and thus be made available at the line ends. This data includes synchronization and
topology data, as well as remote trip signals, remote annunciation signals and mea-
sured values. The topology of the protection data communication system is constitut-
ed by the allocation of devices to the ends of the protected object and by the allocation
of communication paths to the protection data interfaces of the devices.
Communication For a standard layout of lines with two ends, you require one protection data interface
Topology for each device. The protection data interface is named PDI 1 (see also Figure 2-60).
The corresponding protection data interface must be configured as Enabled during
configuring the scope of functions (see Section 2.1.1). Additionally the indices for the
devices have to be assigned (see also Section 2.4.2 at margn heading Protection
Data Topology).
Figure 2-60 Distance protection for two ends with two 7SA6 devices with one protection data
interface each (transmitter/ receiver)
Using three ends, at least one 7SA522 device with two protection data interfaces is
required. Thus a communication chain can be formed. The number of devices (ad-
dress 147 NUMBER OF RELAY) must correspond to the number of ends of the pro-
tected object. Please observe that only current transformer sets that limit the protected
object are counted. The line in Figure 2-61, for instance, has three ends and three
devices. It is limited by three current transformer sets.
The communication chain begins at the device with index 1 at its protection data inter-
face P. INTERFACE 1, continues in the device with index 3 at PDI2, runs from device
with index 3 from P. INTERFACE 1 to the device with index 2 at P. INTERFACE 1.
The example shows that the indexing of the devices must not necessarily have to cor-
respond to the arrangement of the communication chain. Which protection data inter-
face is connected to which protection data interface does not play a role.
7SA6 Manual 147

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-61 Distance protection for three ends with two 7SA6 and one 7SA522, chain topol-
ogy
Communication The communication can be carried out directly via fiber optic connections or via com-
Media munication networks. Which kind of media is used depends on the distance and on
the communication media available. For shorter distances, direct connection via fiber
optic cables with a transmission rate of 512 kBit/s is possible. Otherwise we recom-
mend communication converters. A transmission via copper cables and communica-
tion networks can also be realized. Please take into consideration that the responding
times of the protection data communication depend on the quality of transmission and
that they are prolonged in case of a reduced transmission quality and/or an increased
operating time.
Figure 2-62 shows some examples for communication connections. In case of a direct
connection the distance depends on the type of the optical fibre. Table 2-15 lists the
options available. The modules in the device are replaceable. For ordering information
see Appendix, under Accessories.
Table 2-15 Communication via Direct Connection
Module in Connector Fibre Type Optical Perm. Path At- Distance,

the Device Type Wavelength tenuation Typical
FO5 ST Multimode 820 nm 8 dB 1.5 km (0.94
62.5/125 m miles)
FO6 ST Multimode 820 nm 16 dB 3.5 km (2.18
62.5/125 m miles)
FO7 ST Monomode 1300 nm 7 dB 10 km (6.2
9/125 m miles)
FO8 FC Monomode 1300 nm 18 dB 35 km (21.75
9/125 m miles)
FO17 LC Monomode 1300 nm 13 dB 24 km (14.9
9/125 m miles)
FO18 LC Monomode 1300 nm 29 dB 60 km (37.3
9/125 m miles)
FO19 LC Monomode 1550 nm 29 dB 100 km (62
9/125 m miles)
148 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
If a communication converter is used, the device and the communication converter are
linked with a FO5 module via optical fibres. The converter itself is equipped with dif-
ferent interfaces for the connection to the communication network. For ordering infor-
mation see Appendix, Subsection Accessories.
Figure 2-62 Examples for communication connections
Note
The redundancy of different communication connections (for ring topology) requires a
consequent separation of the devices connected to the communication network. For
example, different communication routes should not be conducted via the same mul-
tiplexer card, as there is no alternative which could be used if the multiplexer card
should fail.
Functional Logout In an overall topology up to 3 devices that use teleprotection, it is possible to take out
one device, e.g. for maintenance purposes, from the protection function Teleprotec-
tion without having to re-parameterize the device. A logged out device (in the Func-
tional Logout) no longer participates in the teleprotection, but still sends and receives
remote indications and commands (see Section 2.4.2 under Communication Topol-
ogy).
7SA6 Manual 149

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Disturbance and The communication is continuously monitored by the devices. Single faulty data tele-
Transmission grams are not a direct risk if they occur only occasionally. They are recognized and
Failure counted in the device which detects the disturbance and can be read out as statistical
information.
If several faulty telegrams or no data telegrams at all are received, this is regarded as
a Disturbance as soon as a time delay for data disturbance alarm (default setting 100
ms, can be altered) is exceeded. A corresponding alarm is output. When the system
offers no alternative way of communication (as for the ring topology), the teleprotec-
tion scheme is disabled. As soon as the data transmission operates properly again,
the devices will automatically switch back to the teleprotection scheme.
Transmission time jumps that, for example, can occur in case of switchings in the com-
munication network can be recognized and corrected by the device. After at most 2
seconds the transmission times are measured again.
If the communication is interrupted for a permanent period (which is longer than a set-
table time period), this can be regarded as a transmission Failure of the communica-
tion. A corresponding alarm is output. Otherwise the same reactions apply as for the
data disturbance.
2.4.2 Setting Notes
General Protection data interfaces connect the devices with the communication media. The
communication is permanently monitored by the devices. Address 4509 T-DATA
DISTURB defines after which delay time the user is informed about a faulty or missing
telegram. Address 4510 T-DATAFAIL is used to set the time after which a transmis-
sion failure alarm is output.
Protection Data Protection data interface 1 can be turned ON or OFF at address 4501 STATE PROT I
Interface 1. If it is switched OFF, this corresponds to a transmission failure. In case of a chain
topology the transmission of data can not continue their operation.
In address 4502 CONNEC. 1 OVER you can select the transmission medium which
to connect to protection data interface 1. The following selection is possible:
F.optic direct, i.e. communication directly by fibre-optic cable with 512 kBit/s,
Com conv 64 kB, i.e. via communication converters with 64 kBit/s (G703.1 or X.21
or S0),
Com conv 128 kB, i.e. via communication converters with 128 kBit/s (X.21, copper
cable),
Com conv 512 kB, i.e. via communication converters with 512 kBit/s (X.21).
The possibilities may vary for the different device versions. The data must be identical
at both ends of a communication route.
The devices measure and monitor the signal transit times. Deviations are corrected,
as long as they are within the permissible range.
150 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The maximum permissible signalling time (address 4505 PROT 1 T-DELAY) is set to
a value that does not exceed the usual value of communication media. This parameter
can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. If it is exceeded during
operation (e.g. because of switchover to a different way of transmission), the message
PI1 TD alarm will be issued. Once a fault has been detected in the communica-
tion of the protection data interface, the time at address 4511 Td ResetRemote is
started for resetting the remote signals. Please note that only the time of the device is
considered whose remote end has failed. Thus the same time is valid for all devices
following in a chain.
Communication First of all, define your communication topology: number the devices consecutively.
Topology This numbering is a serial device index that serves for your own overview. It starts for
each distance protection system (i.e. for each protected object) with 1. For the dis-
tance protection system the device with index 1 is always the absolute-time master,
i.e. the absolute time management of all devices which belong together depends on
the absolute time management of this device. As a result the time information of all
devices is comparable at all times. The device index serves for unique definition of the
devices within the distance protection system (i.e. for one protected object).
An ID number is also to be given to each single device (device-ID). The deviceID is
used by the communication system to identify each individual device. It must be
between 1 and 65534 and must be unique within the communication system. The ID
number identifies the devices in the communication system since the exchange of in-
formation between several distance protection systems (thus also for several protect-
ed objects) can be executed via the same communication system.
Please make sure that the possible communications links and the existing interfaces
are in accordance with each other. If not all devices are equipped with two protection
data interfaces, those with only one protection data interface must be located at the
ends of the communication chain.
If you work with different physical interfaces and communications links, please make
sure that every protection data interface corresponds to the projected communication
link.
For a protected object with two ends (e.g. a line) the addresses 4701 ID OF RELAY
1 and 4702 ID OF RELAY 2 are set, e.g. for device 1 the device-ID 1 and for device
2 the device-ID 2 (Figure 2-63). The indices of the devices and the device-IDs do not
have to match here, as mentioned above.
7SA6 Manual 151

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-63 Distance protection topology for 2 ends with 2 devices - example
For a protected object with more than two ends (and corresponding devices), the third
end is allocated to its device ID at parameter addresses 4703 ID OF RELAY 3. A
maximum of 3 line ends is possible with 3 devices. Figure 2-64 gives an example with
3 relays. During the configuration of the protection functions the number of devices re-
quired for the relevant case of application was set in address 147 NUMBER OF RELAY.
Device IDs can be entered for as many devices as were configured under that ad-
dress, no further IDs are offered during setting.
152 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-64 Distance protection topology for 3 ends with 3 devices - example
In address 4710 LOCAL RELAY you finally indicate the actual local device. Enter the
index for each device (according to the consecutive numbering used). Each index
from 1 to the entire number of devices must be used once, but may not be used twice.
Make sure that the parameters of the distance protection topology for the distance pro-
tection system are conclusive:
Each device index can only be used once;
Each device index must be allocated unambiguously to one device ID;
Each device-index must be the index of a local device once;
The device with index 1 is the source for the absolute time management (absolute
time master).
During startup of the protection system, the above listed conditions are checked. If one
out of these conditions is not fulfilled, no protection data can be transmitted. The
device signals DT inconsistent (Device table inconsistent).
Device Logout A device can be removed from the topology via the receive signal 3484 Logout so
that the remaining relays can still assume their protection function.
If a device logs out functionally, the number of protecting device reduces. In this case
the teleprotection schemes are automatically switched from 3 to 2 end. If no remote
end is available, Dis.T.Carr.Fail is signalled.
7SA6 Manual 153

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.4.3 Settings
ditional Settings.

4501 STATE PROT I 1 ON ON State of protection interface 1
OFF
4502 CONNEC. 1 OVER F.optic direct F.optic direct Connection 1 over
Com conv 64 kB
Com conv 128 kB
Com conv 512 kB
4505A PROT 1 T-DELAY 0.1 .. 30.0 ms 30.0 ms Prot 1: Maximal permissible delay
time
4509 T-DATA DISTURB 0.05 .. 2.00 sec 0.10 sec Time delay for data disturbance
alarm
4510 T-DATAFAIL 0.0 .. 60.0 sec 6.0 sec Time del for transmission failure
alarm
4511 Td ResetRemote 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; 0.00 sec Remote signal RESET DELAY for
comm.fail
4701 ID OF RELAY 1 1 .. 65534 1 Identification number of relay 1
4710 LOCAL RELAY relay 1 relay 1 Local relay is
relay 2
relay 3
154 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

formation
3196 local Teststate IntSP Local relay in Teststate
3215 Wrong Firmware OUT Incompatible Firmware Versions
3217 PI1 Data reflec OUT Prot Int 1: Own Datas received
3227 >PI1 light off SP >Prot Int 1: Transmitter is switched off
3229 PI1 Data fault OUT Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty data
3230 PI1 Datafailure OUT Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure
3233 DT inconsistent OUT Device table has inconsistent numbers
3234 DT unequal OUT Device tables are unequal
3235 Par. different OUT Differences between common parameters
3236 PI1<->PI2 error OUT Different PI for transmit and receive
3239 PI1 TD alarm OUT Prot Int 1: Transmission delay too high
3243 PI1 with VI Prot Int 1: Connected with relay ID
3457 Ringtopology OUT System operates in a closed Ringtopology
3458 Chaintopology OUT System operates in a open Chaintopology
3464 Topol complete OUT Communication topology is complete
3475 Rel1Logout IntSP Relay 1 in Logout state
3484 Logout IntSP Local activation of Logout state
3487 Equal IDs OUT Equal IDs in constellation
3491 Rel1 Login OUT Relay 1 in Login state
7SA6 Manual 155

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.5 Remote signals via protection data interface (optional)
2.5.1 Description
7SA6 allows the transmission of up to 28 items of binary information of any type from
one device to the other via the communications links provided for protection tasks.
Four of 28 information items are transmitted like protection signals with high priority,
i.e. very fast, and are therefore especially suitable for the transmission of external pro-
tection and trip signals which are generated outside of 7SA6. The other 24 are trans-
mitted in the back-ground and are therefore suitable for any information that does not
depend on high-speed transmission, such as information on the events taking place
in a substation which may also be useful in other substations as well.
The information is injected into the device via binary inputs and can be output at the
other ends again via binary outputs. The integrated user-defined CFC logic allows to
perform on both the transmitting and the receiving side logical operations on the
signals and on other information from the protection and monitoring functions of the
devices.
The binary outputs and the binary inputs to be used must be allocated appropriately
during the configuration of the input and output functions (see SIPROTEC 4 System
Description ). The 4 high-priority signals are injected into the device via the binary
inputs >Remote Trip1 to >Remote Trip4, are transmitted to the devices at
the other ends and can be processed at each receiving side with the output functions
RemoteTrip1 rec to RemoteTrip4 rec.
If the remote signals are to be used for direct remote tripping, they must be allocated
at the send side via CFC with the function that is to perform the transfer trip at the op-
posite side, and at the receiving side, also via CFC, with the >Ext. TRIP ... input sig-
nals.
The other 24 items of information reach the device via the binary inputs >Rem.
Signal 1 to >Rem.Signal24 and are available under Rem.Sig 1recv etc.
at the receiving side.
For the transmission of binary information no settings are required. Each device sends
the injected information to all other devices at the ends of the protected object, al-
though the protection data topology is incomplete. Where selection is necessary, it will
have to be carried out by appropriate allocation and, if necessary, by a link at the re-
ceiving side.
Even devices that have logged out functionally (Functional Logout) can send and
receive remote signals and commands.
The annunciations Dev x available of the topology detection function can be used to
determine whether the signals of the sending devices are still available. They are
issued if device x is actively involved in the communication topology and this state is
stable.
Once a fault has been detected in the communication of the protection data interface,
the time at address 4511 Td ResetRemote is started for resetting the remote sig-
nals.
156 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.5 Remote signals via protection data interface (optional)

formation
3541 >Remote Trip1 SP >Remote Trip 1 signal input
3545 RemoteTrip1 rec OUT Remote Trip 1 received
3549 >Rem. Signal 1 SP >Remote Signal 1 input
3550 >Rem.Signal 2 SP >Remote Signal 2 input
3558 >Rem.Signal10 SP >Remote Signal 10 input
3573 Rem.Sig 1recv OUT Remote signal 1 received
3582 Rem.Sig10recv OUT Remote signal 10 received
7SA6 Manual 157

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
158 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.6 Teleprotection for distance protection
2.6.1 General
Purpose of Faults which occur on the protected line, beyond the first distance zone, can only be
Teleprotection cleared selectively by the distance protection after a delay time. On line sections that
are shorter than the smallest sensible distance setting, faults can also not be selec-
tively cleared instantaneously.
To achieve non-delayed and selective tripping on 100 % of the line length for all faults
by the distance protection, the distance protection can exchange and process infor-
mation with the opposite line end by means of signal transmission systems. This can
be done in a conventional way using send and receive contacts. As an alternative,
digital communication lines can be used for signal transmission (ordering option).
Transmission A distinction is made between underreach and overreach schemes.

mode:
In underreach schemes, the protection is set with a normal grading characteristic. If a
trip command occurs in the first zone, the other line end receives this information via
a transmission channel. There the received signal initates a trip, either by activation of
overreach zone Z1B or via a direct trip command.
7SA6 allows:
PUTT (Pickup),
Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT),
Direct (Underreach) Transfer Trip
In overreach schemes, the protection works from the start with a fast overreaching
zone. This zone, however, can only cause a trip if the opposite end also detects a fault
in the overreaching zone. A release (unblock) signal or a block signal can be transmit-
ted. The following teleprotection schemes are differentiated:
Permissive (release) schemes:
Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) with overreaching zone Z1B
Directional comparison,
Unblocking with overreaching zone Z1B.
Blocking scheme:
Blocking of overreaching zone Z1B.
Schemes via pilot wire:
Pilot Wire Comparison
Reverse Interlocking
As the distance zones Z1 ... Z5 (without Z1B) function independently, an instanta-
neous trip in Z1 without a release or blocking signal is always possible. If fast tripping
in Z1 is not required (e.g. on very short lines), then Z1 must be delayed with T1.
7SA6 Manual 159

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Transmission The pilot wire comparison, that is exclusively applied to short lines, enables the user
channels to operate a pilot wire pair (pilot wires or control wires) with direct current to guarantee
the exchange of information between the line ends. Also the reverse interlocking op-
erates with DC control signals.
For the signal transmission, one channel in each direction is required. For example,
fibre optic connections or voice frequency modulated high frequency channels via pilot
cables, power line carrier or microwave radio links can be used for this purpose.
If the device is equipped with an optional protection data interface, digital communica-
tion can be used for signal transmission; these include: e.g.: Fibre optic cables, com-
munication networks or dedicated cables.
The following signal transmission schemes are suited for these kinds of transmission:
Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT),
Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) (with overreaching zone Z1B).
7SA6 allows also the transmission of phase-selective signals. This presents the ad-
vantage that single-pole automatic reclosure can be carried out even when two single-
phase faults occur on different lines in the system. Where the digital protection data
interface is used, the signal transmission is always phase segregated.
The signal transmission schemes are also suited to three terminal lines (teed feeders).
In this case, a signal is transmitted from each of the three ends to each of the others
in both directions. Phase segregated transmission is only possible for three terminal
line applications if digital communication channels are used.
During disturbances in the transmission path, the teleprotection supplement may be
blocked without affecting the normal time graded distance protection. The measuring
reach control (enable zone Z1B) can be transmitted from the internal automatic
reclose function or via the binary input >Enable ARzones from an external reclo-
sure device. With conventional signal transmission schemes, the disturbance is sig-
nalled by a binary input, with digital communication it is detected automatically by the
protection device.
160 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Activation and The teleprotection function can be switched on and off by means of the parameter
Deactivation 2101 FCT Telep. Dis., or via the system interface (if available) and via binary input
(if this is allocated). The switched state is saved internally (refer to Figure 2-65) and
secured against loss of auxiliary supply. It is only possible to switch on from the source
where previously it had been switched off from. To be active, it is necessary that the
function is not switched off from one of the three switching sources.
Figure 2-65 Activation and deactivation of teleprotection
2.6.3 PUTT (Pickup)
The following scheme is suited for conventional transmission media.
Principle The PUTT scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-66. In the case of a fault inside
zone Z1, the transfer trip signal is sent to the opposite line end. The signal received
there initiates the trip, provided that the protection function has picked up. The transmit
signal can be prolonged by TS (settable in address 2103 Send Prolong.), to com-
pensate for possible differences in the pickup time at the two line ends. The distance
protection is set such that the first zone reaches up to approximately 85% of the line
length. On three terminal lines Z1 is also set to approximately 85 % of the shorter line
section, but at least beyond the tee-off point.
The overreach zone Z1B is without consequence for the teleprotection scheme in this
operating mode. It may, however, be controlled by the automatic reclosing function
(see also section 2.14).
7SA6 Manual 161

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-66 Operation scheme of the permissive underreach transfer trip with pickup
Sequence The permissive transfer trip should only send for faults in the Forward direction. Ac-
cordingly, the first zone Z1 of the distance protection must definitely be set to Forward
in address 1301 Op. mode Z1, refer also to Section 2.2.1 under the margin heading
Independent Zones Z1 up to Z5.
On two terminal lines, the signal transmission may be phase segregated. Send and
receive circuits in this case are built up for each phase. On three terminal lines, the
transmit signals are sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signals are then com-
bined with an OR logic function. With the parameter Type of Line (address 2102)
the device is informed as to whether it has one or two opposite line ends.
If at one line end there is weak or zero infeed, so that the distance protection does not
pick up, the circuit breaker can still be tripped. This weak-infeed tripping is referred
to in Section 2.9.2.
162 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-67 Logic diagram of the permissive underreach transfer trip (PUTT) with pickup (one line end)
7SA6 Manual 163

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.6.4 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Acceleration Z1B (PUTT)
The following procedure is suited for both conventional and digital transmission media.
Principle Figure 2-68 shows the operation scheme for the permissive underreach transfer trip
with zone acceleration. In the case of a fault inside zone Z1, the transfer trip signal is
sent to the opposite line end. The signal received there causes tripping if the fault is
detected in the pre-set direction inside the zone Z1B. The transmit signal can be pro-
longed by TS (settable in address 2103 Send Prolong.), to compensate for possible
differences in the pickup time at the two line ends. The distance protection is set such
that the first zone reaches up to approximately 85% of the line length, the overreaching
zone, however, is set to reach beyond the opposite substation (approximately 120%
of the line length). On three terminal lines Z1 is also set to approximately 85 % of the
shorter line section, but at least beyond the tee-off point. Care must be taken to ensure
that Z1 does not reach beyond one of the two other line ends. Z1B must securely
reach beyond the longer line section, even when additional infeed is possible via the
tee point. For this procedure, transmission via a protection data interface (if provided)
is offered.
In protective relays equipped with a protection data interface, address 121
Teleprot. Dist. allows to set SIGNALv.ProtInt. At address 2101 FCT
Telep. Dis. PUTT (Z1B) can be set.
Figure 2-68 Operation scheme of the permissive underreach transfer trip method via Z1B
164 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Sequence The permissive transfer trip only works for faults in the Forward direction. According-
ly, the first zone Z1 and the overreaching zone of the distance protection must definite-
ly be set to Forward in address 1301 Op. mode Z1 and 1351 Op. mode Z1B, refer
also to Section 2.2.2 under the margin heading Independent Zones Z1 up to Z5 and
Controlled Zone Z1B).
Figure 2-69 Logic diagram of the permissive underreach transfer trip (PUTT) using Z1B (one line end, conventional, no
protection data interface)
7SA6 Manual 165

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-70 Logic diagram of the permissive underreach transfer trip (PUTT) using Z1B
(one line end, with protection data interface)
166 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
bined with an OR logic function. If the parameter Teleprot. Dist. (address 121)
is set to SIGNALv.ProtInt and parameter NUMBER OF RELAY (address 147) is set
to 3 relays, the device is informed about two remote ends. The default setting is 2
relays, which corresponds to one remote end. If digital protection transmission is
applied and the protection data interface is used, signals will always be transmitted
phase-selectively.
If conventional transmission is used, the parameter Type of Line (address 2102)
informs the device whether it has one or two opposite line ends.
During disturbance of the signal transmission path, the overreaching zone Z1B may
be activated by an automatic reclosure by setting parameter 1st AR -> Z1B, and
by an external recloser device via the binary input >Enable ARzones.
If at one line end there is weak or zero infeed, so that the distance protection does not
pick up, the circuit breaker can still be tripped. This weak-infeed tripping is described
in Section 2.9.2.
2.6.5 Direct Underreach Transfer Trip
Principle As is the case with PUTT (pickup) or PUTT with zone acceleration, a fault in the first
zone Z1 is transmitted to the opposite line end by means of a transfer trip signal. The
signal received there causes a trip without further queries after a short security margin
Tv (settable in address 2202 Trip Time DELAY) (Figure 2-71). The transmit signal
can be prolonged by TS (settable in address 2103 Send Prolong.), to compensate
for possible differences in the pickup time at the two line ends. The distance protection
is set such that the first zone reaches up to approximately 85% of the line length. On
three terminal lines Z1 is also set to approximately 85 % of the shorter line section, but
at least beyond the tee-off point. Care must be taken to ensure that Z1 does not reach
beyond one of the two other line ends. The overreaching zone Z1B is not required
here. It may, however, be activated by internal automatic reclosure or external criteria
via the binary input >Enable ARzones.
The advantage compared to the permissive underreach transfer trip with zone accel-
eration lies in the fact that both line ends are tripped without the necessity for any
further measures, even if one line end has no infeed. There is however no further su-
pervision of the trip signal at the receiving end.
The direct underreach transfer trip application is not provided by its own selectable
teleprotection scheme setting, but implemented by setting the teleprotection supple-
ment to operate in the permissive underreach transfer trip scheme (address 121
Teleprot. Dist. = PUTT (Z1B) or PUTT (Pickup)), and using the binary inputs
for direct external trip at the receiving end. Correspondingly, the transmit circuit in
Section The principle of PUTT (Figure 2-67) applies. For the receive circuit the logic
of the external trip as described in Section 2.10 applies.
bined with a logical OR function.
7SA6 Manual 167

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-71 Function diagram of the direct underreach transfer trip scheme
2.6.6 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT)
Principle The permissive overreach transfer mode uses a permissive release principle. The
overreaching zone Z1B, set beyond the opposite station, is decisive. This mode can
also be used on extremely short lines where a setting of 85% of line length for zone
Z1 is not possible and accordingly selective non-delayed tripping could not be
achieved. In this case however zone Z1 must be delayed by T1, to avoid non selective
tripping by zone Z1 (Figure 2-72).
If the distance protection recognizes a fault inside the overreaching zone Z1B, it ini-
tially sends a release signal to the opposite line end. If the unblock frequency fU is
faultlessly received from the opposite end, a release signal is routed to the trip logic.
A prerequisite for fast tripping is therefore that the fault is recognized inside Z1B in the
forward direction at both line ends. The distance protection is set such that the over-
reaching zone Z1B reaches beyond the opposite station (approximately 120% of line
length). On three terminal lines, Z1B must be set to reliably reach beyond the longer
line section, even if there is an additional infeed via the tee point. The first zone is set
in accordance with the usual grading scheme, i.e. approximately 85% of the line
length; on three terminal lines at least beyond the tee point.
The transmit signal can be prolonged by TS (settable under address 2103 Send
Prolong.). The prolongation of the send signal only comes into effect if the protec-
tion has already issued a trip command. This ensures release of the opposite line end
even when the short-circuit has been switched off rapidly by the independent zone Z1.
For all zones except Z1B, tripping results without release from the opposite line end,
allowing the protection to function with the usual grading characteristic independent of
the signal transmission.
For this procedure, transmission via a protection data interface (if provided) is offered.
In protective relays equipped with a protection data interface, address 121
Teleprot. Dist. allows to set SIGNALv.ProtInt. At address 2101 FCT
Telep. Dis. POTT can be set.
168 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-72 Function diagram of the permissive overreach transfer trip method
Sequence The permissive overreach transfer trip only functions for faults in the Forward direc-
tion. Accordingly, the first overreach zone ZB1of the distance protection must definite-
ly be set to Forward in addresses 1351 Op. mode Z1B, refer also to Section 2.2.2
under the margin heading Controlled Zone ZB1.
transmit signal is sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signals are then com-
bined with a logical AND gate, as all three line ends must transmit a send signal during
an internal fault. If the parameter Teleprot. Dist. (address 121) is set to
SIGNALv.ProtInt and parameter NUMBER OF RELAY (address 147) is set to 3
relays, the device is informed about two remote ends. The default setting is 2
relays, which corresponds to one remote end. In protective relays equipped with one
protection data interface, signal transmission is always phase segregated (Figure 2-
74).
If conventional transmission is used, parameter Type of Line (address 2102)
informs the device whether it has one or two opposite line ends (Figure 2-73).
be activated by an automatic reclosure by setting parameter 1st AR -> Z1B, and
by an external recloser device via the binary input >Enable ARzones.
The occurrence of erroneous signals resulting from transients during clearance of ex-
ternal faults or from direction reversal resulting during the clearance of faults on par-
allel lines, is neutralized by the Transient Blocking.
On feeders with single-sided infeed, the line end with no infeed cannot generate a
release signal, as no fault detection occurs there. To achieve tripping by the permis-
sive overreach transfer scheme even in this case, the device contains a special func-
tion. This Weak Infeed Function (echo function) is referred to in Section Measures
for Weak and Zero Infeed. It is activated when a signal is received from the opposite
line end in the case of three terminal lines from at least one of the opposite line ends
without the device having detected a fault.
The circuit breaker can also be tripped at the line end with no or only weak infeed. This
weak-infeed tripping is referred to in Section 2.9.2.
7SA6 Manual 169

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-73 Logic diagram of the permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) scheme
(one line end, conventional, no protection data interface)
170 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-74 Logic diagram of the permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) scheme
(one line end, with protection data interface)
7SA6 Manual 171

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.6.7 Directional Comparison Pickup
Principle The directional comparison scheme is a permissive scheme. Figure 2-75 shows the
operation scheme.
Figure 2-75 Operation scheme of the directional comparison pickup
If the distance protection detects a fault in line direction, it initially sends a release
signal to the opposite line end. If a release signal is also received from the opposite
line end, a trip signal is transmitted to the trip relay. This is only the case if the opposite
line end also detects a fault in line direction. A prerequisite for fast tripping is therefore
that the fault is recognized in both line ends in forward direction. The distance stages
operate independent from the directional comparison pickup.
172 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Sequence Figure 2-76 shows the logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme for one line
end.
an internal fault. With the setting parameter Type of Line (address 2102) the
device is informed as to whether it has one or two opposite line ends.
tion. The weak-infeed function (echo function) is activated when a signal is received
from the opposite line end in the case of three terminal lines from at least one of the
opposite line ends without the device having detected a fault.
7SA6 Manual 173

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-76 Logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme (one line end)
174 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.6.8 Directional Unblocking Scheme
Principle The unblocking method is a permissive release scheme. It differs from the permissive
overreach transfer scheme in that tripping is possible also when no release signal is
received from the opposite line end. It is therefore mainly used for long lines when the
signal must be transmitted across the protected line by means of power line carrier
(PLC) and the attenuation of the transmitted signal at the fault location may be so
severe that reception at the other line cannot necessarily be guaranteed. Here, a
special unblocking logic takes effect.
The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-77.
Two signal frequencies which are keyed by the transmit output of the 7SA6 are re-
quired for the transmission. If the transmission device has a channel monitoring, then
the monitoring frequency f0 is keyed over to the working frequency fU (unblocking fre-
quency). When the protection recognizes a fault inside the overreaching zone Z1B, it
initiates the transmission of the unblock frequency fU. During the quiescent state or
during a fault outside Z1B, or in the reverse direction, the monitoring frequency f0 is
transmitted.
If the unblock frequency fU is faultlessly received from the opposite end, a release
signal is routed to the trip logic. Accordingly, it is a prerequisite for fast tripping, that
the fault is recognized inside Z1B in the forward direction at both line ends. The dis-
tance protection is set such that the overreaching zone Z1B reaches beyond the op-
posite station (approximately 120% of line length). On three terminal lines, Z1B must
be set to reliably reach beyond the longer line section, even if there is an additional
infeed via the tee point. The first zone is set in accordance with the usual grading
scheme, i.e. approximately 85% of the line length; on three terminal lines at least
beyond the tee point.
7SA6 Manual 175

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-77 Function diagram of the directional unblocking method
For all zones except Z1B, tripping results without release from the opposite line end,
allowing the protection to function with the usual grading characteristic independent of
the signal transmission.
Sequence Figure 2-78 shows the logic diagram of the unblocking scheme for one line end.
The unblock scheme only functions for faults in the forward direction. Accordingly,
the overreaching zone Z1B of the distance protection must definitely be set to
Forward: in Address 1351 Op. mode Z1B, see also Subsection 2.2.1 at margin
heading Controlled Zone Z1B.
receive circuits in this case are built up for each phase. On three terminal lines the
send signal is transmitted to both opposite ends. The receive signals are then com-
an internal fault. With the setting parameter Type of Line (address 2102) the
An unblock logic is inserted before the receive logic, which in essence corresponds to
that of the permissive overreach transfer scheme, see Figure 2-79. If an interference
free unblock signal is received, a receive signal, e.g. >Dis.T.UB ub 1, appears
and the blocking signal, e.g. >Dis.T.UB bl 1 disappears. The internal signal Un-
block 1 is passed on to the receive logic, where it initiates the release of the over-
reaching zone Z1B of the distance protection (when all remaining conditions have
been fulfilled).
176 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
If the transmitted signal does not reach the other line end because the short-circuit on
the protected feeder causes too much attenuation or reflection of the transmitted
signal, neither the unblocking signal e.g., >Dis.T.UB ub 1, nor the blocking
signal >Dis.T.UB bl 1 will appear on the receiving side. In this case, the release
Unblock 1 is issued after a security delay time of 20 ms and passed onto the receive
logic. This release is however removed after a further 100 ms via the timer stage
100/100 ms. When the transmission is functional again, one of the two receive signals
must appear again, either >Dis.T.UB ub 1or >Dis.T.UB bl 1; after a further
100 ms (drop-off delay of the timer stage 100/100 ms) the quiescent state is reached
again, i.e. the direct release path to the signal Unblock L1 and thereby the usual
release is possible.
If none of the signals is received for a period of more than 10 s the alarm Dis.T.UB
Fail1 is generated.
be activated by an automatic reclosure (internal or external) via the binary input
>Enable ARzones.
tion. This Weak Infeed Function (echo function) is referred to in Section Measures
for Weak and Zero Infeed. It is activated when a signal is received from the opposite
line end in the case of three terminal lines from at least one of the opposite line ends
without the device having detected a fault.
7SA6 Manual 177

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-78 Send and enabling logic of the unblocking scheme
178 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-79 Unblock logic
7SA6 Manual 179

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.6.9 Directional Blocking Scheme
Principle In the case of the blocking scheme, the transmission channel is used to send a block
signal from one line end to the other. The signal may be sent directly after fault incep-
tion (jump detector above dotted line in Figure 2-80), and stopped immediately, as
soon as the distance protection detects a fault in the forward direction, alternatively the
signal is only sent when the distance protection detects the fault in the reverse direc-
tion. It is stopped immediately as soon as the distance protection detects a fault in
forward direction. Tripping is possible with this scheme even if no signal is received
from the opposite line end. It is therefore mainly used for long lines when the signal
must be transmitted across the protected line by means of power line carrier (PLC)
and the attenuation of the transmitted signal at the fault location may be so severe that
reception at the other line cannot necessarily be guaranteed.
Faults inside the overreaching zone Z1B, which is set to approximately 120% of the
line length, will initiate tripping if a blocking signal is not received from the other line
end. On three terminal lines, Z1B must be set to reliably reach beyond the longer line
section, even if there is an additional infeed via the tee point. Due to possible differ-
ences in the pickup times of the devices at both line ends and due to the signal trans-
mission time delay, the tripping must be somewhat delayed by TV in this case.
To avoid signal race conditions, a transmit signal can be prolonged by the settable time
TS once it has been initiated.
Figure 2-80 Function diagram of the blocking scheme
180 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Sequence Figure 2-81 shows the logic diagram of the blocking scheme for one line end.
The overreach zone Z1B is blocked which is why it must be set to Forward (address
1351 Op. mode Z1B, see also Section 2.2.1 at margin heading Controlled Zone
Z1B).
bined with a logical OR gate as no blocking signal must be received from any line end
during an internal fault. With the parameter Type of Line (address 2102) the device
is informed as to whether it has one or two opposite line ends.
7SA6 Manual 181

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-81 Logic diagram of the blocking scheme (one line end)
182 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
As soon as the distance protection has detected a fault in the reverse direction, a
blocking signal is transmitted (e.g. Dis.T.SEND, No. 4056). The transmitted signal
may be prolonged by setting address 2103 accordingly. The blocking signal is
stopped if a fault is detected in the forward direction (e.g. Dis.T.BL STOP, No.
4070). Very rapid blocking is possible by transmitting also the output signal of the jump
detector for measured values. To do so, the outputDisJumpBlocking (No. 4060)
must also be allocated to the transmitter output relay. As this jump signal appears at
every measured value jump, it should only be used if the transmission channel can be
relied upon to respond promptly to the disappearance of the transmitted signal.
If there is a disturbance in the signal transmission path the overreaching zone can be
blocked via a binary input. The distance protection operates with the usual time
grading characteristic (non delayed trip in Z1). The overreach zone Z1B may, howev-
er, be activated by internal automatic reclosure or external criteria via the binary input
>Enable ARzones.
allel lines, is neutralized by the Transient Blocking. The received blocking signals
also prolong the release by the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address
2110) if it has been present for at least the waiting time TrBlk Wait Time (address
2109), see Figure 2-86). After expiration of TrBlk BlockTime (address 2110) the
delay time Release Delay (address 2108) is restarted.
It lies in the nature of the blocking scheme that single end fed short-circuits can also
be tripped rapidly without any special measures, as the non feeding end cannot gen-
erate a blocking signal.
7SA6 Manual 183

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.6.10 Pilot Wire Comparison
In the pilot wire comparison the overreaching zone Z1B functions as instantaneous
zone at both ends of the protected line. Zone Z1B is set to reach beyond the next sta-
tion. The pilot wire comparison avoids non-selective tripping.
The information exchange between both line ends is carried out via a closed quiescent
current loop (Figure 2-82) that is fed by a substation battery. One NC contact must be
allocated for each signal output, the receiving input must be configured to low-active.
As an alternative two auxiliary relay combinations (e.g. 7PA5210-3D) are possible for
inverting the contact.
In the quiescent state the pilot wires carry direct current that, at the same time, moni-
tors the healthy state of the connection.
If the distance protection picks up, the following signal appears:Dis.T.SEND. The
NC contact is opened and the pilot wire loop is initially interrupted. A trip by Z1B is
blocked via the receiving input >DisTel Rec.Ch1. If the protection system then
detects a fault within the overreaching zone Z1B, the send signal resets. The NC
contact returns to its quiescent state (closed). If the loop in the remote station is also
closed after the same sequence, the loop is energized again: the tripping is again re-
leased at both ends.
In case the short-circuit occurred outside the protected line the pilot wire loop is also
interrupted by the pickup of both devices (both NC contacts Dis.T.SEND are
opened). Since the send signal will not reset at least at one of the line ends (fault is
not in line direction in zone Z1B), the loop at that end will remain open. Both receiving
inputs are deenergized and block the tripping (because of L-active). The other dis-
tance stages including Z1, however, operate independently so that the back-up pro-
tection function is not affected.
For lines shorter than the shortest settable line please take into consideration that the
first distance zone is either set to disabled or that T1 is delayed for at least one grading
time interval.
If the line has single-end infeed an instantaneous trip for the whole line is possible.
Since no pickup occurs on the non-feeding line end, the loop is not interrupted at that
point, but only on the feeding line end. After the fault is detected within Z1B, the loop
will be closed again and the trip command is executed.
To guarantee that the time period between pickup and tripping of the protection func-
tion is sufficient to open and close the pilot wire loop, T1B must be delayed for a short
period. If the pilot wire comparison is used with two different types of devices at both
line ends (e.g. 7SA6 at one line end and a standard protection relay at the other end)
care must be taken that the difference in pickup and trip delay of the two devices,
which may be considerable, does not lead to an unwanted release. This must also be
taken into consideration for the delay of T1B.
The quiescent state loop ensures a steady check of the pilot wire connections against
interruptions. Since the loop is interrupted during each fault, the signal for pilot wire
failure is delayed by 10 s. The pilot wire comparison supplement is then blocked. It
does not need to be blocked from external as the pilot wire failure is recognized inter-
nally. The other stages of the distance protection continue operating according to the
normal grading coordination chart.
Due to the low current consumption of the binary inputs it may be necessary to addi-
tionally burden the pilot wire loop with an external shunt connected resistor so that the
binary inputs are not hold by the charge of the pilot wire after an interruption of the
184 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
loop. As an alternative it is possible to connect auxiliary relay combinations (e.g.

7PA5210-3D).
Figure 2-82 Pilot wire comparison - principle
Please take note that both binary inputs are connected in series with each other and
the resistance of the pilot wires. Therefore the loop voltage must not be too low or the
pickup voltage of the binary inputs must not be too high.
Operation with three terminals is also possible if the device allows it. The following
figure shows the logic for two terminals.
Figure 2-83 Receive circuit of pilot wire comparison logic
The isolation voltage of the pilot wires and the binary inputs and outputs must also be
taken into account. In the event of an earth fault the induced longitudinal voltage must
neither exceed 60% of the isolation voltage of the pilot wires nor 60% of the isolation
of the device. The pilot wire comparison is therefore only suited for short lines.
7SA6 Manual 185

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.6.11 Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection
If the distance protection function of the 7SA6 is used as backup protection in single-
end fed transformer feeders, the reverse interlocking function ensures a fast protec-
tion of the busbar without endangering the selectivity for faults on the outgoing feed-
ers.
Figure 2-84 shows the logic for reverse interlocking.
Figure 2-84 Logic diagram of the reverse interlocking
According to Figure 2-85 the distance zones Z1 and Z2 serve as back-up stages for
faults on the outgoing lines, for example a fault in F2. For distance grading the shortest
outgoing line is to be used.
The overreach zone Z1B, whose delay time T1B must be set longer than the pickup
time Ta of the protection devices of the outgoing lines, is blocked after the pickup of
an inferior protection. The pickup signal is sent (according to Figure 2-85) via the
receive input (4006 >DisTel Rec.Ch1) of the distance protection. If no signal is
received this zone guarantees fast tripping of the busbar for
faults on the busbar, such as for example in F1,
failure of the line protection during a fault, such as for example in F2.
186 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The reverse interlocking of the distance protection is performed by specific release or

blocking of the overreach zone Z1B. It can be realized by the blocking mode (parallel
connection of the NO contacts as illustrated in Figure 2-85) or the release mode
(series connection of the NC contacts).
To avoid transient false signals after clearance of external faults, the blocking condition
of the reverse interlocking is extended by a transient blocking time (TB in Figure 2-85).
Figure 2-85 Reverse interlocking - functional principle and grading example
7SA6 Manual 187

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.6.12 Transient Blocking
In the overreach schemes, the transient blocking provides additional security against
erroneous signals due to transients caused by clearance of an external fault or by fault
direction reversal during clearance of a fault on a parallel line.
The principle of transient blocking scheme is that following the incidence of an external
fault, the formation of a release signal is prevented for a certain (settable) time. In the
case of permissive schemes, this is achieved by blocking of the transmit and receive
circuit.
Figure 2-86 shows the principle of the transient blocking for a directional comparison
and for a permissive scheme.
If, following fault detection, a non-directional fault or a fault in the reverse direction is
determined within the waiting time TrBlk Wait Time (address 2109), the transmit
circuit and the release of the overreaching zone Z1B are prevented. This blocking is
maintained for the duration of the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (ad-
dress 2110) also after the reset of the blocking criterion. But if a trip command is
already present in Z1, the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime is terminated
and thus the blocking of the signal transmission scheme in the event of an internal fault
is prevented.
In the case of the blocking scheme, the transient blocking also prolongs the received
block signal as shown in the logic diagram Figure 2-86. After expiration of TrBlk
BlockTime (address 2110) the delay time Release Delay (address 2108) is re-
started.
Figure 2-86 Transient blocking for permissive schemes
188 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.6.13 Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed
In cases where there is weak or no infeed present at one line end, the distance pro-
tection will not pick up. Neither a trip nor a send signal can therefore be generated
there. With the comparison schemes, using a permissive signal, fast tripping could not
even be achieved at the line end with strong infeed without special measures, as the
end with weak infeed does not transmit a permissive release signal.
To achieve fast tripping at both line ends in such cases, the distance protection pro-
vides special supplements for feeders with weak infeed.
To enable the line end with the weak infeed condition to trip independently, 7SA6 has
a special tripping function for weak infeed conditions. As this is a separate protection
function with a dedicated trip command, it is described separately in Section 2.9.2.
Echo Function If there is no fault detection, the echo function causes the received signal to be sent
back to the other line end as an echo, where it is used to initiate permissive tripping.
The common echo signal (see Figure 2-113, Section 2.9.1) is triggered both by the dis-
tance protection and by the earth fault protection. Figure 2-87 shows the generation
of the echo release by the distance protection.
The detection of the weak infeed condition and accordingly the requirement for an
echo are combined in a central AND gate. The distance protection must neither be
switched off nor blocked, as it would otherwise always produce an echo due to the
missing fault detection. If, however, the time delayed overcurrent protection is used as
an emergency function, an echo is nevertheless possible if the distance protection is
out of service, because the fault detection of the emergency overcurrent protection re-
places the distance protection fault detection. During this mode of operation, the emer-
gency overcurrent protection must naturally not also be blocked or switched off.
Even when the emergency overcurrent protection does not pick up an echo is created
for permissive release scheme during emergency function. The time overcurrent pro-
tection at the weaker end must operate with more sensitivity than the distance protec-
tion at the end with high infeed. Otherwise the selectivity concerning 100% of the line
length is not given.
The essential condition for an echo is the absence of distance protection or overcur-
rent protection fault detection with the simultaneous reception of a signal from the tele-
protection scheme logic, as shown in the corresponding logic diagrams (Figure 2-
73,2-74, 2-76 and Figure 2-78).
When the distance protection picks up single-pole or two-pole, it is nevertheless pos-
sible to send an echo if the measurement of the phases that have not picked up has
revealed weak infeed.
To avoid an incorrect echo following switching off of the line and reset of the fault de-
tection, the RS flip-flop in Figure 2-87 latches the fault detection condition until the
signal receive condition resets, thereby barring the release of an echo. The echo can
in any event be blocked via the binary input >Dis.T.BlkEcho.
Figure 2-87 shows the generation of the echo release signal. Since there is a correla-
tion between this function and the weak infeed tripping function, it is described sepa-
rately (see Section 2.9.1).
7SA6 Manual 189

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-87 Generation of the echo release signal
2.6.14 Setting Notes
General The teleprotection supplement of distance protection is only in service if it is set during
the configuration to one of the possible modes of operation in address 121. Depend-
ing on this configuration, only those parameters which are applicable to the selected
mode appear here. If the teleprotection supplement is not required the address 121 is
set to Teleprot. Dist. = Disabled.
Conventional The following modes are possible with conventional transmission links (as described
Transmission in Subsection 2.6):
Direct Underreach Transfer Trip Remote trip without any pickup,
PUTT (Pickup) PUTT (Pickup)
PUTT (Z1B) Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Accel-
eration Z1B (PUTT)
POTT Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT),
Dir.Comp.Pickup Directional Comparison Pickup,
UNBLOCKING Directional Unblocking scheme,
BLOCKING Directional Blocking scheme,
Pilot wire comp Pilot Wire Comparison,
Rev. Interlock Reverse Interlocking
At address 2101 FCT Telep. Dis. the use of a teleprotection scheme can be
turned ON or OFF.
If the teleprotection has to be applied to a three terminal line the setting in address
2102 must be Type of Line = Three terminals, if not, the setting remains Two
Terminals.
190 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Digital The following modes are possible with digital transmission using the protection data
Transmission interface (described in Subsection 2.6):
PUTT (Z1B) Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Accel-
eration Z1B (PUTT)
POTT Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT).
The desired mode is selected in address 2101 FCT Telep. Dis.. The use of a tele-
protection scheme can also be turned OFF here. Address 147 NUMBER OF RELAY
indicates the number of ends and must be set identically in all devices. The distance
protection scheme via the protection data interface is only active if parameter 121
Teleprot. Dist. was set to SIGNALv.ProtInt for all devices in a constellation.
Distance Protection For all applications of teleprotection schemes (except PUTT), it must be ensured that
Prerequisites the fault detection of the distance protection in the reverse direction has a greater
reach than the overreaching zone of the opposite line end (refer to the shaded areas
in Figure 2-88 on the right hand side)! This is normally predefined for the U/I/ pickup
since the local voltage of a reverse fault is smaller than the voltage of the remote sup-
plying end. For impedance pickup at least one of the distance stages must be set to
Reverse or Non-Directional. During a fault in the shaded area (in the left section
of the picture), this fault would be in zone Z1B of the protection at B as zone Z1B is
set incorrectly. The distance protection at A would not pick up and therefore interpret
this as a fault with single end infeed from B (echo from A or no block signal at A). This
would result in a false trip!
The blocking scheme needs furthermore a fast reverse stage to generate the blocking
signal. Apply zone 3 with non-delayed setting to this end.
Figure 2-88 Distance protection setting with permissive overreach schemes
Time Settings The send signal prolongation Send Prolong.(address 2103) must ensure that the
send signal reliably reaches the opposite line end, even if there is very fast tripping at
the sending line end and/or the signal transmission time is relatively long. In the case
of the permissive overreaching schemes POTT, Dir.Comp.Pickup and
UNBLOCKING this signal prolongation time is only effective if the device has already
issued a trip command. This ensures the release of the other line ends even if the
short-circuit has been cleared very rapidly by the instantaneous zone Z1. In the case
of the blocking scheme BLOCKING, the transmit signal is always prolonged by this
time. In this case, it corresponds to a transient blocking following a reverse fault. This
parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
In order to detect steady-state line faults such as open circuits, a monitoring time
Delay for alarm is started when a fault is detected (address 2107). Upon expira-
tion of this time the fault is considered a permanent failure. This parameter can only
be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
7SA6 Manual 191

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
With the release delay Release Delay (address 2108) the release of the zone Z1B
can be delayed. This is only required for the blocking scheme BLOCKING to allow suf-
ficient transmission time for the blocking signal during external faults. This delay only
has an effect on the receive circuit of the teleprotection; conversely the permissive
signal is not delayed by the set time delay T1B of the overreaching zone Z1B. For
Pilot wire comp and Rev. Interlock T1B must be delayed so that there is
enough time between the pickup of the distance protection function and the trip signal
of zone Z1B.
Transient Blocking The parameters TrBlk Wait Time and TrBlk BlockTime serve the transient
blocking with the permissive overreaching schemes POTT and UNBLOCKING. With
permissive underreach transfer trip they are of no consequence.
The time TrBlk Wait Time (address 2109) is a waiting time prior to transient block-
ing. Only if the distance protection does not recognize a forward fault inside this time
after fault detection, will the transient blocking become activated in the permissive
overreach transfer schemes. In the case of the blocking scheme, the waiting time pre-
vents transient blocking in the event that the blocking signal reception from the oppo-
site line end is very fast. With the setting there is no transient blocking. This param-
eter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
The transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 2110) must be definitely
longer than the duration of transients resulting from the inception or clearance of ex-
ternal short circuits. The send signal is blocked during this time with the permissive
overreach schemes POTT and UNBLOCKING if the protection had initially detected a
reverse fault. In the case of the blocking scheme BLOCKING, the blocking of the Z1B
release is prolonged by this time by both the detection of a reverse fault and the (block-
ing) received signal. After expiration of TrBlk BlockTime (address 2110) the delay
time Release Delay (address 2108) is restarted for the blocking scheme. Since the
blocking scheme always requires setting the delay time Release Delay, the tran-
sient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 2110) can usually be set very short.
This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
Echo Function The echo function settings are common to all weak infeed measures and summarized
in tabular form in Section 2.9.2.2.
Note
The ECHO SIGNAL (No. 4246) must be allocated separately to the output relays for
the transmitter actuation, as it is not contained in the transmit signals of the transmis-
sion functions. On the digital protection data interface with permissive overreach
transfer trip mode, the echo is transmitted as a separate signal without taking any
special measures.
192 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.6.15 Settings
ditional Settings.

2101 FCT Telep. Dis. ON ON Teleprotection for Distance prot. is
PUTT (Z1B)
POTT
OFF
2102 Type of Line Two Terminals Two Terminals Type of Line
Three terminals
2103A Send Prolong. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Time for send signal prolongation
2107A Delay for alarm 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 10.00 sec Time Delay for Alarm
2108 Release Delay 0.000 .. 30.000 sec 0.000 sec Time Delay for release after
pickup
2109A TrBlk Wait Time 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.04 sec Transient Block.: Duration exter-
nal flt.
2110A TrBlk BlockTime 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Transient Block.: Blk.T. after ext.
flt.
7SA6 Manual 193

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
4001 >Dis.Telep. ON SP >Distance Teleprotection ON
4002 >Dis.Telep.OFF SP >Distance Teleprotection OFF
4003 >Dis.Telep. Blk SP >Distance Teleprotection BLOCK
4005 >Dis.RecFail SP >Dist. teleprotection: Carrier faulty
4006 >DisTel Rec.Ch1 SP >Dis.Tele. Carrier RECEPTION Channel 1
4007 >Dis.T.RecCh1L1 SP >Dis.Tele.Carrier RECEPTION Channel 1,L1
4010 >Dis.T.Rec.Ch2 SP >Dis.Tele. Carrier RECEPTION Channel 2
4030 >Dis.T.UB ub 1 SP >Dis.Tele. Unblocking: UNBLOCK Channel 1
4031 >Dis.T.UB bl 1 SP >Dis.Tele. Unblocking: BLOCK Channel 1
4032 >Dis.T.UB ub1L1 SP >Dis.Tele. Unblocking: UNBLOCK Ch. 1, L1
4035 >Dis.T.UB ub 2 SP >Dis.Tele. Unblocking: UNBLOCK Channel 2
4036 >Dis.T.UB bl 2 SP >Dis.Tele. Unblocking: BLOCK Channel 2
4040 >Dis.T.BlkEcho SP >Dis.Tele. BLOCK Echo Signal
4050 Dis.T.on/off BI IntSP Dis. Teleprotection ON/OFF via BI
4052 Dis.Telep. OFF OUT Dis. Teleprotection is switched OFF
4054 Dis.T.Carr.rec. OUT Dis. Telep. Carrier signal received
4055 Dis.T.Carr.Fail OUT Dis. Telep. Carrier CHANNEL FAILURE
4056 Dis.T.SEND OUT Dis. Telep. Carrier SEND signal
4057 Dis.T.SEND L1 OUT Dis. Telep. Carrier SEND signal, L1
4060 DisJumpBlocking OUT Dis.Tele.Blocking: Send signal with jump
4068 Dis.T.Trans.Blk OUT Dis. Telep. Transient Blocking
4070 Dis.T.BL STOP OUT Dis. Tele.Blocking: carrier STOP signal
4080 Dis.T.UB Fail1 OUT Dis. Tele.Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 1
4081 Dis.T.UB Fail2 OUT Dis. Tele.Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 2
4082 Dis.T.BL STOPL1 OUT DisTel Blocking: carrier STOP signal, L1
4085 Dis.T.RecL1Dev1 OUT Dis.Tele.Carrier RECEPTION, L1, Device1
194 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.7 Earth fault overcurrent protection in earthed systems (optional)
In earthed systems, where extremely large fault resistances may exist during earth
faults (e.g. overhead lines without earth wire, sandy soil) the fault detection of the dis-
tance protection will often not pick up because the resulting earth fault impedance
could be outside the fault detection characteristic of the distance protection.
The 7SA6 distance protection features protection functions for high-resistance earth
faults in earthed power systems. These options are available depending on the
ordered model:
Three overcurrent stages with definite time tripping characteristic (definite time),
One overcurrent stage with inverse time characteristic (IDMT) or
One zero sequence voltage stage with inverse time characteristic
One zero sequence power stage with inverse time characteristic
The elements may be configured independently from each other and combined ac-
cording to the user's requirements. If the fourth current-, voltage or power-dependent
stage is not required, it may be employed as a fourth definite time stage.
Each stage may be set to be non directional or directional forward or reverse. A
signal transmission may be combined with these four stages. For each stage it may
be determined if it should coordinate with the teleprotection function. If the protection
is applied in the proximity of transformers, an inrush restraint can be activated. Fur-
thermore, blocking by external criteria is possible via binary inputs (e.g. for reverse in-
terlocking or external automatic reclosure). During energization of the protected
feeder onto a dead fault it is also possible to release any stage, or also several, for
non-delayed tripping. Stages that are not required, are set inactive.
Measured The zero-sequence current is used as measured variable. According to its definition
Quantities equation it is obtained from the sum of the three phase currents, i.e.
3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3. Depending on the version ordered, and the configured application
for the fourth current input I4 of the device, the zero-sequence current can be mea-
sured or calculated.
If the input I4 is connected in the starpoint of the set of current transformers or to a
separate earth current transformer, on the protected feeder, the earth current is direct-
ly available as a measured value.
If the device is fitted with the highly sensitive current input for I4, this current I4 is used
with the factor I4/Iph CT (address 221, refer to Section 2.1.2.1). As the linear range
of this measuring input is severely restricted in the high range, this current is only eval-
uated up to an amplitude of approx. 1.6A. In the event of larger currents, the device
automatically switches over to the evaluation of the zero sequence current derived
from the phase currents. Naturally, all three phase currents obtained from a set of
three star-connected current transformers must be available and connected to the
device. The processing of the earth current is then also possible if very small as well
as large earth fault currents may occur.
7SA6 Manual 195

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
If the fourth current input I4 is otherwise utilized, e.g. for a transformer starpoint current
or for the earth current of a parallel line, the device calculates the zero-sequence
current from the phase currents. Naturally in this case also all three phase currents
derived from a set of three star connected current transformers must be available and
connected to the device.
The zero sequence voltage is determined by its defining equation 3 U0 = UL1-E + UL2-
E + UL3-E Depending on the application for the fourth voltage input U4 of the device, the
zero sequence voltage can be measured or calculated. If the fourth voltage input is
connected to the open delta winding Udelta of a voltage transformer set and if it is con-
figured accordingly (address 210 U4 transformer = Udelta transf., see
Section 2.1.2.1), this voltage is used with the factor Uph / Udelta (address 211,
see Section 2.1.2.1). If not, the device calculates the zero-sequence voltage from the
phase voltages. Naturally, all three phase-to-earth voltages obtained from a set of
three star-connected voltage transformers must be available and connected to the
device.
Definite Time Very The triple zero-sequence current 3 I0 is passed through a numerical filter and then
High Set Current compared with the set value 3I0>>>. If this value is exceeded an alarm is issued.
Stage 3I0>>> After the corresponding delay time T 3I0>>> has expired, a trip command is issued
which is also alarmed. The reset threshold is approximately 95 % of the pickup thresh-
old.
Figure 2-89 shows the logic diagram of the 3I0>>> stage. The function modules di-
rection determination, permissive teleprotection, switch onto fault, and inrush sta-
bilization are common to all stages and described below. They may, however, affect
each stage individually. This is accomplished with the following setting parameters:
Op. mode 3I0>>>, determines the operating direction of the stage: Forward,
Reverse, Non-Directional or Inactive,
3I0>>> Telep/BI determines whether a non-delayed trip with the teleprotection
scheme or via binary input 1310 >EF InstTRIP is possible (YES) or not (NO),
3I0>>>SOTF-Trip, determines whether during switching onto a fault tripping
shall be instantaneous (YES) or not (NO) with this stage.
3I0>>>InrushBlk which is used to switch the inrush stabilization (rush blocking)
on (YES) or off (NO).
196 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-89 Logic diagram of the 3I0>>> stage
7SA6 Manual 197

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Definite Time High The logic of the high-set current stage 3I0>> is the same as that of the 3I0>>> stage.
Set Current Stage In all references 3I0>>> must merely be replaced with 3I0>>. In all other respects
3I0>> Figure 2-89 applies.
Definite Time The logic of the overcurrent stage 3I0>, too, is the same as that of the 3I0>>> stage.
Overcurrent Stage In all references 3I0>>> must merely be replaced with 3I0>. In all other respects
3I0> Figure 2-89 applies. This stage operates with a specially optimized digital filter that
completely suppresses all harmonic components beginning with the 2nd harmonic.
Therefore it is particularly suited for a highly-sensitive earth fault detection.
A fourth, definite time stage can be implemented by setting the inverse-time stage
(refer to the next paragraph) to a definite-time stage.
Inverse Time The logic of the stages with inverse time delay functions in the same way as the re-
Overcurrent Stage maining stages. This stage operates with a specially optimized digital filter that com-
3I0P pletely suppresses all harmonic components beginning with the 2nd harmonic. There-
fore it is particularly suited for a highly-sensitive earth fault detection. However, the
time delay is calculated here based on the type of the set characteristic, the intensity
of the earth current and a time multiplier 3I0p Time Dial (IEC characteristic, Figure
2-90) or a time multiplier TimeDial TD3I0p (ANSI characteristic). A pre-selection of
the available characteristics was already carried out during the configuration of the
protection functions. Furthermore, an additional fixed delay Add.T-DELAY may be
selected. The characteristics are shown in the Technical Data.
Fig. 2-90 shows the logic diagram. The setting addresses of the IEC characteristics
are shown by way of an example. In the setting information the different setting ad-
dresses are described in detail.
It is also possible to implement this stage equally with a definite time delay. In this case
3I0p PICKUP is the pickup threshold and Add.T-DELAY the definite time delay. The
inverse time characteristic is then effectively bypassed.
198 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-90 Logic diagram of the 3I0P stage (inverse time overcurrent protection), for example IEC characteristics
Inverse Time The inverse logarithmic characteristic differs from the other inverse characteristics
Overcurrent Stage mainly by the fact that the shape of the curve can be influenced by a number of pa-
with Logarithmic rameters. The slope and a time shift 3I0p MaxT-DELAY which directly affect the
Inverse curve, can be changed. The characteristics are shown in the Technical Data.
Characteristic
Figure 2-91 shows the logic diagram. In addition to the curve parameters, a minimum
time 3I0p MinT-DELAY can be determined; below this time no tripping can occur.
Below a current factor of 3I0p Startpoint, which is set as a multiple of the basic
setting 3I0p PICKUP, no tripping can take place.
Further information regarding the effect of the various parameters can be found in the
setting information of the function parameters in Section 2.7.2.
The remaining setting options are the same as for the other curves.
7SA6 Manual 199

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-91 Logic diagram of the 3I0P stage for the inverse logarithmic characteristic
Zero Sequence The zero sequence voltage time protection operates according to a voltage-depen-
Voltage Time dent trip time characteristic. It can be used instead of the time overcurrent stage with
Protection inverse time delay.
(U0-inverse)
The voltage/time characteristic can be displaced in voltage direction for a determined
constant voltage U0inv. minimum, valid for t and in time direction by a deter-
mined constant time T forw. (U0inv)). The characteristics are shown in the Tech-
nical Data.
200 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-92 shows the logic diagram. The tripping time depends on the level of the
zero sequence voltage U0. For meshed earthed systems the zero sequence voltage
increases towards the earth fault location. The inverse characteristic results in the
shortest command time for the relay closest to the fault. The other relays then reset.
Figure 2-92 Directional zero-sequence voltage time protection with non-directional backup stage
7SA6 Manual 201

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
A further time stage T rev. (U0inv) provokes non-directional tripping with a

voltage-independent delay. This stage can be set above the directional stage. When
tripping with this stage it is, however, a prerequisite that the time of the voltage-con-
trolled stage has already expired (without directional check). In case the zero se-
quence voltage is too low or the voltage transformer circuit breaker is tripped, this
stage is also disabled.
Zero-sequence The zero sequence power protection operates according to a power-dependent trip
power protection time characteristic. It can be used instead of an inverse time overcurrent stage.
The power is calculated from the zero-sequence voltage and the zero-sequence cur-
rent. The component Sr is decisive in direction of a configurable compensation angle
comp, which is also referred to as compensated zero-sequence power, i.e.
Sr = 3I0 3U0 cos( Comp)
where = (U0; I0). Comp thus determines the direction of the maximum sensitivity
(cos( Comp) = 1 if = Comp). Due to its sign information the power calculation au-
tomatically includes the direction. The power for the reverse direction can be deter-
mined by reversing the sign.
The power-time characteristic can be displaced in power direction via a reference
value Sref (= basic value for the inverse characteristic for = comp) and in time direc-
tion by a factor k.
202 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-93 Zero-sequence power protection
Figure 2-93 shows the logic diagram. The tripping time depends on the level of the
compensated zero sequence power Sr as defined above. For meshed earthed
systems the zero sequence voltage and the zero sequence current increase towards
the earth fault location. The inverse characteristic results in the shortest command
time for the relay closest to the fault. The other relays then reset.
7SA6 Manual 203

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Phase current Non-symmetrical load conditions in multiple-earthed systems or different current

restraint transformer errors can result in a zero sequence current. This zero sequence current
could cause faulty pickup of the earth current stages if low pickup thresholds are set.
To avoid this, the earth current stages are stabilized by the phase current: as the
phase currents increase, the pickup thresholds are increased (Figure 2-94). The sta-
bilization factor (= slope) may be changed by means of the parameter Iph-STAB.
Slope (address 3104). It applies to all stages.
Figure 2-94 Phase current stabilization
Inrush stabilization If the device is connected to a transformer feeder, large inrush currents can be expect-
ed when the transformer is energized; if the transformer starpoint is earthed, also in
the zero sequence path. The inrush current may be a multiple of the rated current and
flow for several tens of milliseconds up to several minutes.
Although the fundamental current is evaluated by filtering of the measured current, an
incorrect pickup during energization of the transformer may result if very short delay
times are set. In the rush current there is a substantial portion of fundamental current
depending on the type and size of the transformer that is being energized.
The inrush stabilization blocks tripping of all those stages for which it has been acti-
vated, for as long as the rush current is recognized.
The inrush current is characterized by a relatively large amount of second harmonic
(twice rated frequency). This second harmonic is almost non-existent in the short-
circuit current. Numerical filters that carry out a Fourier analysis of the current are used
for the frequency analysis. As soon as the harmonic content is greater than the set
value (2nd InrushRest), the affected stage is blocked.
Inrush blocking is not effective below a certain current threshold. This threshold is
22 mA on the secondary side for devices with sensitive earth current transformer and
0.41 IN for devices with normal earth current transformer.
204 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Direction The direction determination is carried out with the measured current IE (= 3I0), which
Determination with is compared to a reference voltage UP.
Zero-Sequence
The voltage required for direction determination UP may be derived of the starpoint
System
current IY of an earthed transformer (source transformer), provided that the transform-
er is available.
Moreover, both the zero sequence voltage 3U0 and the starpoint current IY of a trans-
former can be used for measurement. The reference magnitude UP then is the sum of
the zero sequence voltage 3U0 and a value which is proportional to reference current
IY. This value is about 20 V for rated current (Figure 2-95).
The directional polarization using the transformer starpoint current is independent of
voltage transformers and therefore also functions reliably during a fault in the voltage
transformer secondary circuit. It is, however, a requirement that not all, but at least a
substantial amount of the earth fault current flows via the transformer, the starpoint
current of which is measured.
For the determination of direction, a minimum current 3I0 and a minimum displace-
ment voltage which can be set as 3U0> is required. If the displacement voltage is too
small, the direction can only be determined if direction measurement is done with the
transformer starpoint current and this exceeds a minimum value corresponding to the
setting IY>. Direction determination with 3U0 is blocked if the device detects a fault
condition in the voltage transformer secondary circuit (binary input reports trip of the
voltage transformer mcb, Fuse Failure Monitor, measured voltage failure monitoring)
or a single-pole dead time.
Figure 2-95 Directional characteristic of the earth fault protection
Direction It is advantageous to use negative sequence system values for the direction measure-
Determination with ment if the resulting zero sequence voltages during earth faults are too small for an
Negative Phase- accurate measurement or when the zero sequence values are subject to interference
Sequence System by, for example, mutual coupling from a parallel line. It can also be used if the zero
sequence voltage is not available at the device.
7SA6 Manual 205

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Otherwise this function operates the same as the direction measurement with zero se-
quence current and zero sequence voltage. Instead of 3 I0 and 3 U0 the negative se-
quence signals 3 I2 and 3 U2 are simply used for the measurement. These signals
must also have a minimum magnitude of 3I2> or 3U2>.
It is also possible to determine the direction with the zero sequence system or the neg-
ative sequence system. In this case the device determines whether the zero sequence
voltage or the negative sequence voltage is larger. The direction is determined by the
larger of the two values. The direction is not determined during the single-pole dead
time.
Determination of The zero-sequence power may also be used for direction determination. In this case
Direction with the sign of the compensated zero-sequence power is decisive. This is the zero-se-
Compensated Zero quence power component as mentioned in the above paragraph Zero-Sequence
Sequence Power Power Sr in direction of a configurable compensation angle comp, i.e.
Sr = 3I03U0cos( Comp).
The direction determination yields
forward if Sr is positive and Sr > S FORWARD,
reverse if Sr negative and |Sr| > S FORWARD,
For the determination of direction, a minimum current 3I0 and a minimum displace-
ment voltage which can be set as 3U0> is required. The prerequisite is still that the
compensated zero-sequence power has a configurable minimum magnitude. Direc-
tion determination is also blocked if the device detects a fault condition in the voltage
transformer secondary circuit (binary input reports trip of the voltage transformer mcb,
Fuse Failure Monitor, measured voltage failure monitoring) or a single-pole dead
time. Figure 2-96 gives an example for the directional characteristic.
Figure 2-96 Directional characteristic with zero sequence power, example Sr = setting value
S FORWARD
206 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Selection of the Since the earth fault protection employs the quantities of the zero sequence system
Earth Faulted and the negative sequence system, the faulted phase cannot be determined directly.
Phase To enable single-pole automatic reclosure in case of high-resistance earth faults, the
earth fault protection function features a phase selector. By means of the distribution
of the currents and voltages it detects whether a fault is single-phase or multiple-
phase. If the fault is single-phase, it selects the faulted phase. The phase selector is
blocked during a single-pole dead time.
Once a multi-phase fault has been detected, a three-pole trip command is generated.
Three-pole tripping is also initiated if single-pole tripping is not permitted (due to the
setting or three-pole coupling of other internal extra functions or external devices via
binary input, e.g. reclosing device).
The phase selector evaluates the phase-to-earth voltages, the phase currents and the
symmetrical components of the currents. If a single-phase fault can be detected with
certainty due to a considerable voltage collapse or a high overcurrent, the trip is initi-
ated in the concerned phase. Three-pole tripping is initiated accordingly if the currents
and/or voltages indicate a multi-phase fault.
If the methods described cannot detect the fault type beyond doubt, the negative se-
quence system and the zero sequence system are ultimately filtered out of the phase
currents. The phase angle between negative sequence current and zero sequence
current is used to determine the fault type, i.e. whether the fault is single-phase or
multi-phase. To this end, the phase currents are also evaluated to rectify the load
current if necessary. This method relies on the fact that in the event of a single phase
fault the fault-free phases can conduct either no fault currents at all or only such fault
currents that are approximately in phase.
The phase selector has an action time of approximately 40ms. If the phase selector
has not made a decision during this time, three-pole tripping is initiated. Three-pole
tripping is initiated anyway as soon as a multi-pole fault has been detected, as de-
scribed above.
Figure 2-97 shows the logic diagram. The phase determined by the phase selector
can be processed selectively for each phase, for example the internal information E/F
PickupL1 etc. is used for phase-selective signal transmission.
External signaling of the phase-selective pickup is accomplished via the information
E/F L1 selec. etc. They appear only if the phase was clearly detected. Single-
pole tripping requires of course the general prerequisites to be fulfilled (device must
be suited for single-pole tripping, single-pole tripping allowed).
7SA6 Manual 207

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-97 Logic diagram of single-pole tripping with phase selector
208 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Blocking The earth fault protection can be blocked by the distance protection. If in this case a
fault is detected by the distance protection, the earth fault protection will not trip. This
gives the selective fault clearance by the distance protection preference over tripping
by the earth fault protection. The blocking can be restricted by configuration to single-
phase or multi-phase faults and to faults in distance zone Z1 or Z1/Z1B. The blocking
only affects the time sequence and tripping by the earth fault protection function and
after the cause of the blocking has been cleared, it is maintained for approximately 40
ms to prevent signal race conditions. During blocking of the entire protection function
the indication EF TRIP BLOCK (No. 1335) is issued. With blocking of individual
stages, the signals E/F 3I0>>>BLOCK (No.14080) to E/F 3I0p BLOCK (No.
14083).are issued.
The earth fault protection can also be blocked during the single-pole dead time of an
automatic reclose cycle. This prevents an incorrect measurement resulting from the
zero sequence current and voltage signals arising in this state. The blocking affects
optionally the entire protection function or the individual stages and is maintained for
approximately 40 ms after reclosure to prevent signal race conditions. The blocking of
the entire function is issued as indication E/F BLOCK (No. 1332). The blocking of
the individual stages is issued as indications 14080 to 14083.
If the device is combined with an external automatic reclose device or if single-pole
tripping can result from a separate (parallel tripping) protection device, the earth fault
protection must be blocked via binary input during the single-pole open condition.
Switching Onto an The line energization detection can be used to achieve quick tripping when energizing
Earth Fault the circuit breaker in case of an earth fault. The earth fault protection can then trip
three-pole without delay. Parameters can be set to determine for which stage(s) the
non-delayed tripping following energization apply (see also logic diagrams from Figure
2-89 to Figure 2-93).
The non-delayed tripping in case of line energization detection is blocked as long as
the inrush-stabilization recognizes a rush current. This prevents instantaneous trip-
ping by a stage which, under normal conditions, is sufficiently delayed during energi-
zation of a transformer.
7SA6 Manual 209

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.7.2 Setting Notes
General During the configuration of the device scope of functions (refer to Section 2.1.1,
address 131 Earth Fault O/C) it was determined which group of characteristics is
to be available. Only those parameters that apply to the available characteristics, ac-
cording to the selected configuration and the version of the device, are accessible in
the procedures described below.
Parameter 3101 FCT EarthFltO/C can be used to switch the earth fault protection
ON or OFF. This refers to all stages of the earth fault protection.
If not required, each of the four stages can be deactivated by setting its MODE... to
Inactive (see below).
Blocking The earth fault protection can be blocked by the distance protection to give preference
to the selective fault clearance by the distance protection over tripping by the earth
fault protection. In setting address 3102 BLOCK for Dist. it is determined whether
blocking is carried out during each fault detection of the distance protection (every
PICKUP) or only during single-phase fault detection by the distance protection
(1phase PICKUP) or only during multiple-phase fault detection by the distance pro-
tection (multiph. PICKUP). If blocking is desired, set NO.
It is also possible to block the earth fault protection trip only for pickup of the distance
protection on the protected line section. To block the earth fault protection for faults
occurring within zone Z1, set address 3174 BLK for DisZone to in zone Z1. To
block the earth fault protection for faults occurring within zone Z1 or Z1B, set address
3174 BLK for DisZone to in zone Z1/Z1B. If, however, blocking of the earth
fault protection by the distance protection is to take effect regardless of the fault loca-
tion, set address 3174 BLK for DisZone to in each zone.
Address 3102 thus refers to the fault type and address 3174 to the fault location. The
two blocking options create an AND condition. To block the earth fault protection only
for single-phase faults occurring within zone Z1, set address 3102 BLOCK for
Dist. = 1phase PICKUP and 3174 BLK for DisZone = in zone Z1. To block
the earth fault protection for any fault type (any distance protection pickup) occurring
within zone Z1, the setting 3102 BLOCK for Dist. = every PICKUP and 3174
BLK for DisZone = in zone Z1 applies.
The earth fault protection must be blocked during single-pole automatic reclose dead
time to avoid pick-up with the zero sequence values and, if applicable, the negative
sequence values arising during this state.
When setting the power system data (section 2.1.2.1), it was specified whether all
stages of the earth fault protection are blocked together or separately during the
single-pole dead time.
When setting 238 EarthFltO/C 1p to stages together, parameter 3103 BLOCK
1pDeadTim becomes visible; the parameters for phase-selective blocking are hidden.
Parameter 3103 BLOCK 1pDeadTim must be set to YES (default setting for devices
with single-pole tripping) if it is desired that a single-pole automatic reclosure takes
places. If not, set NO.
Setting parameter 3103 BLOCK 1pDeadTim to YES completely blocks the earth fault
protection if the Open Pole Detector has recognized a single-pole dead time. If no
single-pole tripping is carried out in the protected network, it is recommended to set
this parameter to NO.
210 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Regardless of how parameter address 3103 BLOCK 1pDeadTim is set, the earth fault
protection will always be blocked during the single-pole dead time if it has issued a trip
command itself. This is necessary because otherwise the picked up earth fault protec-
tion cannot drop out if the fault current was caused by load current.
When setting 238 EarthFltO/C 1p to stages separat., the parameters for
phase-selective blocking become visible (3116 BLK /1p 3I0>>>, 3126 BLK /1p
3I0>>, 3136 BLK /1p 3I0> and 3157 BLK /1p 3I0p), parameter 3103 BLOCK
1pDeadTim is hidden.
The parameters 3116, 3126, 3136 and 3157 are used to define which stages are
blocked during the single-pole dead time. If the corresponding stage is to be blocked,
the setting YES remains unchanged. If not, set No (non-dir.).
Note
Stages of the earth fault protection, which are set not to be blocked during the single-
pole dead time, will not be blocked even if the earth fault protection itselfs gives a
single-pole trip command. Pickup and trip command of the earth fault protection can
thus only drop out if the earth current caused by the load current lies below the thresh-
old value of such a stage.
Trip When setting the power system data (section 2.1.2.1), it was specified whether single-
pole tripping is set for all stages of the earth fault protection together or separately.
When setting 238 EarthFltO/C 1p to stages together, parameter 3109 Trip
1pole E/F becomes visible; the parameters for phase-selective settings are hidden.
Address 3109 Trip 1pole E/F specifies that the earth fault protection trips single
pole, provided the faulted phase can be determined with certainty. This address is only
valid for devices that have the option to trip single-pole. If you are using single-pole
automatic reclosure, the setting YES (default setting) remains valid. Otherwise set NO.
When setting 238 EarthFltO/C 1p to stages separat., the parameters for the
phase-selective setting are visible (3117 Trip 1p 3I0>>>, 3127 Trip 1p 3I0>>,
3137 Trip 1p 3I0> and 3158 Trip 1p 3I0p), parameter 3109 Trip 1pole
E/F is hidden.
Parameters 3117, 3127, 3137 and 3158 are used to define which stages will trip
single-pole, provided that the faulted phase can be determined with certainty. If the
corresponding stage is to trip single-pole, the setting YES remains unchanged. If not,
set No (non-dir.).
7SA6 Manual 211

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Definite Time First of all, the mode for each stage is set: address 3110 Op. mode 3I0>>>, address
Stages 3120 Op. mode 3I0>> and address 3130 Op. mode 3I0>. Each stage can be set
to operate Forward (usually towards line), Reverse (usually towards busbar) or
Non-Directional (in both directions). If a single stage is not required, set its mode
to Inactive.
The definite time stages 3I0>>> (address 3111), 3I0>> (address 3121) and 3I0>
(address 3131) can be used for a three-stage definite time overcurrent protection.
They can also be combined with the inverse time stage 3I0p PICKUP (address 3141,
see below). The pick up thresholds should in general be selected such that the most
sensitive stage picks up with the smallest expected earth fault current.
The 3I0>> and 3I0>>> stages are best suited for fast tripping stages (instantaneous),
as these stages use an abridged filter with shorter response time. On the other hand,
the stages 3I0> and 3I0P are best suited for very sensitive earth fault detection due to
their effective method of suppressing harmonics.
If no inverse time stage, but rather a fourth definite time stage is required, the inverse
time stage can be implemented as a definite time stage. This must already be taken
regard of during the configuration of the protection functions (refer to Section 2.1.1.2,
address 131 Earth Fault O/C = Definite Time). For this stage, the address
3141 3I0p PICKUP then determines the current pickup threshold and address 3147
Add.T-DELAY the definite time delay.
The values for the time delay settings T 3I0>>> (address 3112), T 3I0>> (address
3122) and T 3I0> (address 3132) are derived from the earth fault grading coordina-
tion diagram of the system.
During the selection of the current and time settings, regard must be taken as to
whether a stage should be direction dependent and whether it uses teleprotection.
Refer also to the margin headings Determination of Direction and Teleprotection
with Earth Fault Protection.
The set time delays are pure additional delays, which do not include the operating time
(measuring time).
212 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Inverse-Time Stage If the fourth stage has been configured as an inverse time overcurrent stage with IEC
with IEC characteristic (address 131 Earth Fault O/C = TOC IEC), you first set the mode:
Characteristic Address 3140 Op. mode 3I0p. This stage can be set to operate Forward (usually
towards line) or Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both di-
rections). If the stage is not required, set its mode to Inactive.
For the inverse time overcurrent stage 3I0P it is possible to select from a variety of
characteristics depending on the version of the relay and the configuration (Section
2.1.1.2, address 131) that was selected. If an inverse overcurrent stage is not re-
quired, set address 131 Earth Fault O/C = Definite Time. The 3I0P stage can
then be used as a fourth definite time stage (refer to Definite Time Stages above) or
deactivated. With IEC characteristics (address 131 Earth Fault O/C = TOC IEC)
the following options are available in address 3151 IEC Curve:
Normal Inverse (inverse, type A according to IEC 602553),
Very Inverse (very inverse, type B according to IEC 602553),
Extremely Inv. (extremely inverse, type C according to IEC 602553), and
LongTimeInverse (longtime, type B according to IEC 602553).
The characteristics and equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data.
The setting of the pickup threshold 3I0p PICKUP (address 3141) is similar to the
setting of definite time stages (see above). In this case it must be noted that a safety
margin between the pickup threshold and the set value has already been incorporat-
ed. Pickup only occurs at a current which is approximately 10 % above the set value.
The time multiplier setting 3I0p Time Dial (address 3143) is derived from the
grading coordination chart which was set up for earth faults in the system.
In addition to the inverse current dependant time delay, a constant (fixed length) time
delay can also be set if this is required. The setting Add.T-DELAY (address 3147) is
added to the time of the set curve.
7SA6 Manual 213

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Inverse-Time Stage If the fourth stage has been configured as an inverse time overcurrent stage with ANSI
with ANSI characteristic (address 131 Earth Fault O/C = TOC ANSI), you first set the mode:
Characteristic Address 3140 Op. mode 3I0p. This stage can be set to operate Forward (usually
towards line) or Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both di-
rections). If the stage is not required, set its mode to Inactive.
For the inverse time overcurrent stage 3I0P it is possible to select from a variety of
characteristics depending on the version of the relay and the configuration (Section
2.1.1, address 131) that was selected. If an inverse overcurrent stage is not required,
set address 131 Earth Fault O/C = Definite Time. The 3I0P stage can then be
used as a fourth definite time stage (refer to Definite Time Stages above). With ANSI
characteristics (address 131 Earth Fault O/C = TOC ANSI) the following options
are available in address 3152 ANSI Curve:
Inverse,
Short Inverse,
Long Inverse,
Moderately Inv.,
Very Inverse,
Extremely Inv.,
Definite Inv..
The characteristics and equations they are based on are listed in the Technical Data.
The setting of the pickup threshold 3I0p PICKUP (address 3141) is similar to the
setting of definite time stages (see above). In this case it must be noted that a safety
margin between the pickup threshold and the set value has already been incorporat-
ed. Pickup only occurs at a current which is approximately 10 % above the set value.
The time multiplier setting 3I0p Time Dial (address 3144) is derived from the
grading coordination chart which was set up for earth faults in the system.
In addition to the inverse time delay, a constant (fixed length) time delay can also be
set if this is required. The setting Add.T-DELAY (address 3147) is added to the time
of the set curve.
214 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Inverse Time Stage If you have configured the inverse time overcurrent stage with logarithmic inverse
with Logarithmic characteristic (address 131 Earth Fault O/C = TOC Logarithm.), the operating
Inverse mode is initially set:: Address 3140 Op. mode 3I0p. This stage can be set to operate
Characteristic Forward (usually towards line) or Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-
Directional (in both directions). If the stage is not required, set its mode to
Inactive.
For the logarithmic inverse characteristic (address 131 Earth Fault O/C = TOC
Logarithm.) the setting of address is 3153 LOG Curve = Log. inverse.
The characteristic and the formula on which it is based can be found in the Technical
Data.
Figure 2-98 illustrates the influence of the most important setting parameters on the
curve. 3I0p PICKUP (address 3141) is the reference value for all current values,
while 3I0p Startpoint (address 3154) determines the beginning of the curve, i.e.
the lowest operating range on the current axis (referred to 3I0p PICKUP). The timer
setting 3I0p MaxT-DELAY (address 3146) determines the starting point of the curve
(for 3I0 = 3I0p PICKUP). The time factor 3I0p Time Dial (address 3145) changes
the slope of the curve. For large currents, 3I0p MinT-DELAY (address 3142) deter-
mines the lower limit on the time axis. For currents larger than 35 3I0p PICKUP the
operating time no longer decreases.
Finally in address 3147 Add.T-DELAY a fixed time delay can be set as was done for
other curves.
Figure 2-98 Curve parameters in the logarithmicinverse characteristic
7SA6 Manual 215

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Zero Sequence If you have configured the zero sequence voltage controlled stage (address 131
Voltage Stage Earth Fault O/C = U0 inverse), the operating mode is initially set: Address 3140
with Inverse Op. mode 3I0p. This stage can be set to operate Forward (usually towards line) or
Characteristic Reverse (usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both directions). If the
stage is not required, set its mode to Inactive.
Address 3141 3I0p PICKUP indicates the minimum current value above which this
stage is required to operate. The value must be exceeded by the minimum earth fault
current value.
The voltage-controlled characteristic is based on the following formula:
U0 is the actual zero sequence voltage. U0 min is the setting value U0inv. minimum
(address 3183). Please take into consideration that the formula is based on the zero
sequence voltage U0, not on 3U0. The function is illustrated in the Technical Data.
Figure 2-99 shows the most important parameters. U0inv. minimum displaces the
voltage-controlled characteristic in direction of 3U0. The set value is the asymptote for
this characteristic (t ). In Figure 2-99, a' shows an asymptote that belongs to the
characteristic a.
The minimum voltage 3U0>(U0 inv) (address 3182) is the lower voltage threshold.
It corresponds to the line c in Figure 2-99. In characteristic b (asymptote not drawn)
the curve is cut by the minimum voltage 3U0>(U0 inv) (line c).
In address 3184, an additional time T forw. (U0inv) that is added to the voltage-
controlled characteristic can be set for directional-controlled tripping.
With the non-directional time T rev. (U0inv) (address 3185) a non-directional
back-up stage can be generated.
Figure 2-99 Characteristic settings of the zero-sequence voltage time dependent stage
without additional times
216 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Zero-Sequence If you have configured the fourth stage as zero-sequence power stage (address 131
Power Stage Earth Fault O/C = Sr inverse), set the mode first: Address 3140 Op. mode
3I0p. This stage can be set to operate Forward (usually towards line) or Reverse
(usually towards busbar) or Non-Directional (in both directions). If the stage is not
required, set its mode to Inactive. The zero-sequence power protection is to
operate always in line direction.
Address 3141 3I0p PICKUP indicates the minimum current value above which this
stage is required to operate. The value must be exceeded by the minimum earth fault
current value.
The zero-sequence power Sr is calculated according to the formula:
Sr = 3I0 3U0 cos( Comp)
The angle Comp is set as maximum-sensitivity angle at address 3168 PHI comp. It
refers to the zero-sequence voltage in relation to the zero-sequence current. The
default setting 255 thus corresponds to a zero sequence impedance angle of 75
(255 180). Refer also to margin heading Zero Sequence Power Protection.
The trip time depends on the zero sequence power according to the following formula:
Where Sr is the compensated power according to above formula. Sref is the setting
value S ref (address 3156), that indicates the pickup value of the stage at = comp.
Factor k (address 3155) can be set to displace the zero-sequence time characteristic
in time direction, the reference value S ref can be set for displacement in power di-
rection.
The time setting Add.T-DELAY (address 3147) allows an additional power-indepen-
dent delay time to be set.
Determination of The direction of each required stage was already determined when setting the differ-
Direction ent stages.
According to the requirements of the application, the directionality of each stage is in-
dividually selected. If, for instance, a directional earth fault protection with a non-direc-
tional back-up stage is required, this can be implemented by setting the 3I0>> stage
directional with a short or no delay time and the 3I0> stage with the same pickup
threshold, but a longer delay time as directional backup stage. The 3I0>>> stage could
be applied as an additional high set instantaneous stage.
If a stage is to operate with teleprotection according to Section 2.8, it may operate
without delay in conjunction with a permissive scheme. In the blocking scheme, a
short delay equal to the signal transmission time, plus a small reserve margin of
approx. 20 ms is sufficient.
Direction determination of the overcurrent stages usually uses the earth current as
measured quantity IE = 3I0, whose angle is compared with a reference quantity. The
desired reference quantity is set in POLARIZATION (address 3160):
The default setting U0 + IY or U2 is universal. The device then selects automati-
cally whether the reference quantity is composed of the zero sequence voltage plus
the transformer starpoint current, or whether the negative-sequence voltage is used,
depending on which quantity prevails. You can even apply this setting when no trans-
former starpoint current IY is connected to the device since an unconnected current
does not have any effect.
7SA6 Manual 217

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
The setting U0 + IY can also be applied with or without transformer starpoint current
connected.
If the direction determination must be carried out using only IY as reference signal,
apply the setting with IY only. This makes sense if a reliable transformer starpoint
current IY is always available at the device input I4. The direction determination is then
not influenced by disturbances in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformers.
This presupposes that the device is equipped with a current input I4 of normal sensi-
tivity and that the current from the transformer starpoint infeed is connected to I4.
If direction determination is to be carried out using exclusively the negative sequence
system signals 3I2 and 3U2, the setting with U2 and I2 is applied. In this case, only
the negative-sequence signals calculated by the device are used for direction deter-
mination. In that case, the device does not require any zero-sequence signals for di-
rection determination.
If you are using the zero-sequence power protection (address 131 Earth Fault
O/C = Sr inverse), it is reasonable to conduct the direction determination also via
the zero-sequence power. In this case, apply the option zero seq. power for
POLARIZATION.
Finally, the threshold values of the reference quantities must be set. 3U0> (address
3164) determines the minimum operating voltage for direction determination with U0.
If U0 is not used for the direction determination, this setting is of no consequence. The
set threshold should not be exceeded by asymmetries in the operational measured
voltage. The setting value relates to the triple zero-sequence voltage, that is
3U0 = |UL1 + UL2 + UL3|
If the voltage dependent characteristic (U0 inverse) is used as directional stage, it is
reasonable for the minimum polarizing voltage to use a value that is equal to or below
the minimum voltage of the voltage-controlled characteristic (address 3182).
Only if you have set in the P.System Data 1 (see Section 2.1.2.1) the connection
of the fourth current transformer I4 transformer (address 220) = IY starpoint,
address 3165 IY> will appear. It is the lower threshold for the current measured in the
starpoint of a source transformer. A relatively sensitive setting can be applied for this
value, as the measurement of the starpoint current is quite accurate by nature.
If the direction determination must be carried out with the negative sequence system
signals, the setting values 3U2> (address 3166) and 3I2> (address 3167) are deci-
sive for the lower limit of the direction determination. The setting values must in this
case also be selected such that operational asymmetry in the system does not lead to
a pickup.
If you are using the zero-sequence power protection and the fault direction is deter-
mined on the basis of the zero-sequence power, address 3169 S forward indicates
the value of the compensated zero-sequence power above which the direction is rec-
ognized as forward. This value should be smaller than the reference power S ref (ad-
dress 3156, see above paragraph at Zero-Sequence Power Stage). This ensures
the availability of direction determination even with smaller zero-sequence power con-
ditions.
218 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The position of the directional characteristic can be changed in dependance of the se-
lected method of direction determination (address 3160 POLARIZATION, see above).
All methods based on angle measurement between measured signal and reference
signal (i.e. all methods except POLARIZATION = zero seq. power), allow the angle
range of the direction determination to be changed with the setting angles Dir.
ALPHA and Dir. BETA (addresses 3162 and 3163). This parameter can only be
altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. As these set values are not critical,
the presettings may be left unchanged. If you want to change these values, refer to
margin heading Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence System for the angle
determination.
The direction determination POLARIZATION with zero seq. power determines the
directional characteristic by means of the compensation angle PHI comp (address
3168) which indicates the symmetry axis of the directional characteristic. This value
is also not critical for direction determination. For information on the angle definition,
refer to margin heading Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence Power. This
angle determines at the same time the maximum sensitivity of the zero-sequence
power stage thus also affecting indirectly the trip time as described above (margin
heading Zero-Sequence Power Stage).
Teleprotection with The earth fault protection in the 7SA6 may be expanded to a directional comparison
Earth Fault protection using the integrated teleprotection logic. Additional information regarding
Protection the available teleprotection schemes and their mode of operation may be obtained
from Section 2.8. If this is to be used, certain preconditions must already be observed
when setting the earth current stage.
Initially, it must be determined which stage must operate in conjunction with the tele-
protection. This stage must be set directional in the line direction. If, for example, the
3I0> stage should operate as directional comparison, set address 3130 Op. mode
3I0> = Forward (see above Definite Time Stages).
Furthermore, the device must be informed that the applicable stage has to function to-
gether with the teleprotection to allow undelayed release of the tripping during internal
faults. For the 3I0> stage this means that address 3133 3I0> Telep/BI is set to
YES. The time delay set for this stage T 3I0> (address 3132) then functions as a
back-up stage, e.g. during failure of the signal transmission. For the remaining stages
the corresponding setting parameter is set to NO, therefore, in this example: address
3123 3I0>> Telep/BI for stage 3I0>>, address 3113 3I0>>> Telep/BI for stage
3I0>>>, address 3148 3I0p Telep/BI for stage 3I0P (if used).
If the echo function is used in conjunction with the teleprotection scheme, or if the
weak-infeed tripping function should be used, the additional teleprotection stage
3IoMin Teleprot (address 3105) must be set to avoid non-selective tripping during
through-fault earth current measurement. For further information refer to Section 2.8,
margin heading Earth Fault Protection Prerequisites.
7SA6 Manual 219

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Switching Onto an It is possible to determine with a setting which stage trips without delay following
Earth Fault closure onto a dead fault. The parameters 3I0>>>SOTF-Trip (address 3114),
3I0>> SOTF-Trip (address 3124), 3I0> SOTF-Trip (address 3134) and, if nec-
essary, 3I0p SOTF-Trip (address 3149) are available for the stages which can be
set to YES or NO for each stage. Selection of the most sensitive stage is usually not
reasonable as a solid short-circuit may be assumed following switching onto a fault,
whereas the most sensitive stage often also has to detect high resistance faults. It is
important to avoid that the selected stage picks up in a transient way during line ener-
gization.
On the other hand, it does not matter if a selected stage may pick up due to inrush
conditions on transformers. The switch-onto-fault tripping of a stage is blocked by the
inrush stabilization even if it is set as instantaneous switch-onto-fault stage.
To avoid a spurious pickup due to transient overcurrents, the delay SOTF Time
DELAY (address 3173) can be set. Usually, the default setting 0 can be retained. In
the case of long cables, where large peak inrush currents can occur, a short delay may
be useful. The time delay depends on the severity and duration of the transient over-
currents as well as on which stages were selected for the fast switch onto fault clear-
ance.
With the parameter SOTF Op. Mode (address 3172) it is finally possible to determine
whether the fault direction must be checked (PICKUP+DIRECT.) or not (PICKUP),
before a switch-onto-fault tripping is generated. It is the direction setting for each stage
that applies for this direction check.
Phase current To avoid a spurious pickup of the stages in the case of asymmetrical load conditions
restraint or varying current transformer measuring errors in earth systems, the earth current
stages are restrained by the phase currents: as the phase currents increase, the
pickup thresholds are increased. By means of the setting in address 3104 Iph-
STAB. Slope the preset value of 10 % for all stages can be jointly changed for all
stages. This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
Inrush stabilization The inrush restraint is only required if the device is applied to transformer feeders or
on lines that end on a transformer; in this case also only for such stages that have a
pickup threshold below the inrush current and have a very short or zero delay. The pa-
rameters 3I0>>>InrushBlk (address 3115), 3I0>> InrushBlk (address 3125),
3I0> InrushBlk (address 3135) and 3I0p InrushBlk (address 3150) can be
set to YES (inrush restraint active) or NO (inrush restraint inactive) for each stage. If the
inrush restraint has been disabled for all stages, the following parameters are of no
consequence.
For the recognition of the inrush current, the portion of second harmonic current
content referred to the fundamental current component can be set in address 3170
2nd InrushRest. Above this threshold the inrush blocking is effective. The preset
value (15 %) should be sufficient in most cases. Lower values imply higher sensitivity
of the inrush blocking (smaller portion of second harmonic current results in blocking).
In applications on transformer feeders or lines that are terminated on transformers it
may be assumed that, if very large currents occur, a short-circuit has occurred in front
of the transformer. In the event of such large currents, the inrush restraint is inhibited.
This threshold value which is set in the address 3171 Imax InrushRest, should be
larger than the maximum expected inrush current (RMS value).
220 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.7.3 Settings
ditional Settings.

3101 FCT EarthFltO/C ON ON Earth Fault overcurrent
OFF function is
3102 BLOCK for Dist. every PICKUP every PICKUP Block E/F for Distance pro-
1phase PICKUP tection
multiph. PICKUP
NO
3103 BLOCK 1pDeadTim YES YES Block E/F for 1pole Dead
NO time
3104A Iph-STAB. Slope 0 .. 30 % 10 % Stabilisation Slope with
Iphase
3105 3IoMin Teleprot 1A 0.01 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A 3Io-Min threshold for Tele-
prot. schemes
5A 0.05 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
3105 3IoMin Teleprot 1A 0.003 .. 1.000 A 0.500 A 3Io-Min threshold for Tele-
prot. schemes
5A 0.015 .. 5.000 A 2.500 A
3109 Trip 1pole E/F YES YES Single pole trip with earth
NO flt.prot.
3110 Op. mode 3I0>>> Forward Inactive Operating mode
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
3111 3I0>>> 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 4.00 A 3I0>>> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 20.00 A
3112 T 3I0>>> 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.30 sec T 3I0>>> Time delay
3113 3I0>>> Telep/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
3114 3I0>>>SOTF-Trip NO NO Instantaneous trip after
YES SwitchOnToFault
3115 3I0>>>InrushBlk NO NO Inrush Blocking
YES
3116 BLK /1p 3I0>>> YES YES Block 3I0>>> during 1pole
No (non-dir.) dead time
3117 Trip 1p 3I0>>> YES YES Single pole trip with
NO 3I0>>>
3120 Op. mode 3I0>> Forward Inactive Operating mode
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
3121 3I0>> 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 2.00 A 3I0>> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 10.00 A
7SA6 Manual 221

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

3122 T 3I0>> 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.60 sec T 3I0>> Time Delay
3123 3I0>> Telep/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
3124 3I0>> SOTF-Trip NO NO Instantaneous trip after
YES SwitchOnToFault
3125 3I0>> InrushBlk NO NO Inrush Blocking
YES
3126 BLK /1p 3I0>> YES YES Block 3I0>> during 1pole
3127 Trip 1p 3I0>> YES YES Single pole trip with 3I0>>
NO
3130 Op. mode 3I0> Forward Inactive Operating mode
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
3131 3I0> 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 1.00 A 3I0> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 5.00 A
3131 3I0> 1A 0.003 .. 25.000 A 1.000 A 3I0> Pickup
5A 0.015 .. 125.000 A 5.000 A
3132 T 3I0> 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.90 sec T 3I0> Time Delay
3133 3I0> Telep/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
3134 3I0> SOTF-Trip NO NO Instantaneous trip after
YES SwitchOnToFault
3135 3I0> InrushBlk NO NO Inrush Blocking
YES
3136 BLK /1p 3I0> YES YES Block 3I0> during 1pole
3137 Trip 1p 3I0> YES YES Single pole trip with 3I0>
NO
3140 Op. mode 3I0p Forward Inactive Operating mode
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
3141 3I0p PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 1.00 A 3I0p Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 5.00 A
3141 3I0p PICKUP 1A 0.003 .. 25.000 A 1.000 A 3I0p Pickup
5A 0.015 .. 125.000 A 5.000 A
3142 3I0p MinT-DELAY 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 1.20 sec 3I0p Minimum Time Delay
3143 3I0p Time Dial 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 sec 3I0p Time Dial
3144 3I0p Time Dial 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 5.00 3I0p Time Dial
3145 3I0p Time Dial 0.05 .. 15.00 sec; 1.35 sec 3I0p Time Dial
3146 3I0p MaxT-DELAY 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 5.80 sec 3I0p Maximum Time Delay
3147 Add.T-DELAY 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 1.20 sec Additional Time Delay
222 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

3148 3I0p Telep/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
3149 3I0p SOTF-Trip NO NO Instantaneous trip after
YES SwitchOnToFault
3150 3I0p InrushBlk NO NO Inrush Blocking
YES
3151 IEC Curve Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
LongTimeInverse
3152 ANSI Curve Inverse Inverse ANSI Curve
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
3153 LOG Curve Log. inverse Log. inverse LOGARITHMIC Curve
3154 3I0p Startpoint 1.0 .. 4.0 1.1 Start point of inverse char-
acteristic
3155 k 0.00 .. 3.00 sec 0.50 sec k-factor for Sr-characteris-
tic
3156 S ref 1A 1 .. 100 VA 10 VA S ref for Sr-characteristic
5A 5 .. 500 VA 50 VA
3157 BLK /1p 3I0p YES YES Block 3I0p during 1pole
3158 Trip 1p 3I0p YES YES Single pole trip with 3I0p
NO
3160 POLARIZATION U0 + IY or U2 U0 + IY or U2 Polarization
U0 + IY
with IY only
with U2 and I2
zero seq. power
3162A Dir. ALPHA 0 .. 360 338 ALPHA, lower angle for
forward direction
3163A Dir. BETA 0 .. 360 122 BETA, upper angle for
forward direction
3164 3U0> 0.5 .. 10.0 V 0.5 V Min. zero seq.voltage 3U0
for polarizing
3165 IY> 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.05 A Min. earth current IY for
polarizing
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.25 A
3166 3U2> 0.5 .. 10.0 V 0.5 V Min. neg. seq. polarizing
voltage 3U2
3167 3I2> 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.05 A Min. neg. seq. polarizing
current 3I2
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.25 A
3168 PHI comp 0 .. 360 255 Compensation angle PHI
comp. for Sr
7SA6 Manual 223

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

3169 S forward 1A 0.1 .. 10.0 VA 0.3 VA Forward direction power
threshold
5A 0.5 .. 50.0 VA 1.5 VA
3170 2nd InrushRest 10 .. 45 % 15 % 2nd harmonic ratio for
inrush restraint
3171 Imax InrushRest 1A 0.50 .. 25.00 A 7.50 A Max.Current, overriding
inrush restraint
5A 2.50 .. 125.00 A 37.50 A
3172 SOTF Op. Mode PICKUP PICKUP+DIRECT. Instantaneous mode after
PICKUP+DIRECT. SwitchOnToFault
3173 SOTF Time DELAY 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Trip time delay after SOTF
3174 BLK for DisZone in zone Z1 in each zone Block E/F for Distance
in zone Z1/Z1B Protection Pickup
in each zone
3182 3U0>(U0 inv) 1.0 .. 10.0 V 5.0 V 3U0> setpoint
3183 U0inv. minimum 0.1 .. 5.0 V 0.2 V Minimum voltage U0min
for T->oo
3184 T forw. (U0inv) 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 0.90 sec T-forward Time delay
(U0inv)
3185 T rev. (U0inv) 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 1.20 sec T-reverse Time delay
(U0inv)
224 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

formation
1305 >EF BLK 3I0>>> SP >Earth Fault O/C Block 3I0>>>
1307 >EF BLOCK 3I0>> SP >Earth Fault O/C Block 3I0>>
1308 >EF BLOCK 3I0> SP >Earth Fault O/C Block 3I0>
1309 >EF BLOCK 3I0p SP >Earth Fault O/C Block 3I0p
1310 >EF InstTRIP SP >Earth Fault O/C Instantaneous trip
1331 E/F Prot. OFF OUT Earth fault protection is switched OFF
1332 E/F BLOCK OUT Earth fault protection is BLOCKED
1333 E/F ACTIVE OUT Earth fault protection is ACTIVE
1335 EF TRIP BLOCK OUT Earth fault protection Trip is blocked
1336 E/F L1 selec. OUT E/F phase selector L1 selected
1345 EF Pickup OUT Earth fault protection PICKED UP
1354 EF 3I0>>>Pickup OUT E/F 3I0>>> PICKED UP
1355 EF 3I0>> Pickup OUT E/F 3I0>> PICKED UP
1356 EF 3I0> Pickup OUT E/F 3I0> PICKED UP
1357 EF 3I0p Pickup OUT E/F 3I0p PICKED UP
1358 EF forward OUT E/F picked up FORWARD
1359 EF reverse OUT E/F picked up REVERSE
1361 EF Trip OUT E/F General TRIP command
1362 E/F Trip L1 OUT Earth fault protection: Trip 1pole L1
1365 E/F Trip 3p OUT Earth fault protection: Trip 3pole
1366 EF 3I0>>> TRIP OUT E/F 3I0>>> TRIP
1367 EF 3I0>> TRIP OUT E/F 3I0>> TRIP
1368 EF 3I0> TRIP OUT E/F 3I0> TRIP
1369 EF 3I0p TRIP OUT E/F 3I0p TRIP
1370 EF InrushPU OUT E/F Inrush picked up
14080 E/F 3I0>>>BLOCK OUT E/F 3I0>>> is blocked
14081 E/F 3I0>> BLOCK OUT E/F 3I0>> is blocked
14082 E/F 3I0> BLOCK OUT E/F 3I0> is blocked
14083 E/F 3I0p BLOCK OUT E/F 3I0p is blocked
7SA6 Manual 225

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.8 Teleprotection for earth fault overcurrent protection (optional)
2.8.1 General
With the aid of the integrated comparison logic, the directional earth fault protection
according to Section 2.7 can be expanded to a directional comparison protection
scheme.
Transmission One of the stages which must be directional Forward is used for the directional com-
Modes parison. This stage can only trip rapidly if a fault is also detected in the forward direc-
tion at the other line end. A release (unblock) signal or a block signal can be transmit-
ted.
The following permissive schemes exist:
Directional comparison,
Directional unblock scheme
and blocking scheme:
Blocking of the directional stage.
Further stages may be implemented as directional and/or nondirectional backup
stages.
Transmission For the signal transmission, one channel in each direction is required. Fibre optic con-
Channels nections or voice frequency modulated high frequency channels via pilot cables,
power line carrier or microwave radio links can be used for this purpose. If the same
transmission channel is used as for the transmission by the distance protection, the
transmission mode must also be the same!
If the device is equipped with an optional protection data interface, digital communica-
tion lines can be used for signal processing; these include: Fibre optic cables, commu-
nication networks or dedicated lines. The following teleprotection scheme is suited for
these kinds of transmission:
Directional comparison
7SA6 allows also the transmission of phase-segregated signals. This has the advan-
tage that single-pole automatic reclosure can be carried out even when two single-
phase faults occur on different lines in the system. When using the digital protection
interface, signal transmission is always phase-selective. If no single-phase fault is de-
tected, the signals are transmitted for all three phases. With earth fault protection,
phase-segregated transmission only makes sense if the earth faulted phase is identi-
fied by means of the phase selector (address 3109 Trip 1pole E/F is set to YES,
refer also to Section 2.7 under Tripping).
The signal transmission schemes are also suited to three terminal lines (teed feeders).
In this case, signal transmission channels are required from each of the three ends to
each of the others in both directions. Phase segregated transmission is only possible
for three terminal line applications if digital communication channels are used.
During disturbances on the transmission path, the teleprotection supplement may be
blocked. With conventional signal transmission schemes, the disturbance is signalled
by a binary input, with digital communication it is detected automatically by the protec-
tion device.
226 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Activation and The comparison function can be switched on and off by means of the parameter 3201
Deactivation FCT Telep. E/F, via the system interface (if available) and via binary input (if allo-
cated). The switched state is saved internally (refer to Figure 2-100) and secured
against loss of auxiliary supply. It is only possible to switch on from the source where
previously it had been switched off from. To be active, it is necessary that the function
is not switched off from one of the three switching sources.
Figure 2-100 Activation and deactivation of the signal transmission logic
2.8.2 Directional Comparison Pickup
Principle The directional comparison scheme is a permissive scheme. The scheme functionality
is shown in Figure 2-75.
When the earth fault protection recognizes a fault in the forward direction, it initially
sends a permissive signal to the opposite line end. If a permissive signal is also re-
ceived from the opposite end, a trip signal is routed to the trip logic. Accordingly it is a
prerequisite for fast tripping that the fault is recognized in the forward direction at both
line ends.
The send signal can be prolonged by TS (settable). The prolongation of the send signal
only comes into effect if the protection has already issued a trip command. This
ensures that the permissive signal releases the opposite line end even if the earth fault
is very rapidly cleared by a different independent protection.
7SA6 Manual 227

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-101 Operation scheme of the directional comparison pickup
Sequence Figure 2-102 shows the logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme for one
line end.
The permissive overreach transfer trip only functions for faults in the Forward direc-
tion. Accordingly the overcurrent stage intended for operation in the direction compar-
ison mode must definitely be set to Forward (3I0... DIRECTION); refer also to
Section 2.7 under margin heading Teleprotection with Earth Fault Protection.
an internal fault. With the parameter Line Config. (address 3202) the device is in-
formed as to whether it has one or two opposite line ends. If the parameter
Teleprot. E/F (address 132) is set to SIGNALv.ProtInt and parameter NUMBER
OF RELAY (address 147) is set to 3 relays, the device is informed about two remote
ends. The default setting is 2 relays, which corresponds to one remote end.
allel lines, is neutralized by the Transient Blocking (see margin heading Transient
Blocking).
On lines where there is only a single sided infeed or where the starpoint is only earthed
behind one line end, the line end without zero sequence current cannot generate a
permissive signal, as fault detection does not take place there. To also ensure tripping
by the directional comparison in this case the device has special features. This Weak
Infeed Function (echo function) is referred to under the margin heading Echo Func-
tion. It is activated when a signal is received from the opposite line end in the case
of three terminal lines from at least one of the opposite line ends without the device
having detected a fault.
228 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-102 Logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme (one line end)
Figure 2-103 shows the logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme for one
line end with protection interface.
For earth fault protection, only directional comparison pickup is offered for transmis-
sion via protection interface. The directional comparison pickup scheme is only effec-
tive if the parameter 132 Teleprot. E/F has been set to SIGNALv.ProtInt in all
devices of the setup. The message Par. different is sent in the event of a fault.
7SA6 Manual 229

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-103 Logic diagram of the directional comparison scheme with protection data interface (for one device)
230 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.8.3 Directional Unblocking Scheme
Principle The unblocking method is a permissive scheme. It differs from the directional compar-
ison scheme in that tripping is possible also when no release signal is received from
the opposite line end. It is therefore mainly used for long lines when the signal must
be transmitted across the protected feeder by means of power line carrier (PLC) and
the attenuation of the transmitted signal at the fault location may be so severe that re-
ception at the other line cannot necessarily be guaranteed.
Two signal frequencies which are keyed by the transmit output of the 7SA6 are re-
quired for the transmission. If the transmission device has a channel monitoring, then
the monitoring frequency f0 is keyed over to the working frequency fU (unblocking fre-
quency). When the protection recognizes an earth fault in the forward direction, it ini-
tiates the transmission of the unblock frequency fU. During the quiescent state or
during an earth fault in the reverse direction, the monitoring frequency f0 is transmitted.
If the unblock frequency is received from the opposite end, a signal is routed to the trip
logic. A pre-condition for fast fault clearance is therefore that the earth fault is recog-
nized in the forward direction at both line ends.
The send signal can be prolonged by TS (settable). The prolongation of the send signal
only comes into effect if the protection has already issued a trip command. This
ensures that the permissive signal releases the opposite line end even if the earth fault
is very rapidly cleared by a different independent protection.
Figure 2-104 Operation scheme of the directional unblocking method
7SA6 Manual 231

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Sequence Figure 2-105 shows the logic diagram of the unblocking scheme for one line end.
The directional unblocking scheme only functions for faults in the forward direction.
Accordingly the overcurrent stage intended for operation in the directional unblocking
scheme must definitely be set to Forward (RICH.3I0...); refer also to Section 2.7
at the margin heading Teleprotection with Earth Fault Protection.
an internal fault. With the setting parameter Line Config. (address 3202) the
An unblock logic is inserted before the receive logic, which in essence corresponds to
that of the directional comparison scheme, see Figure 2-106. If an interference free
unblock signal is received, a receive signal, e.g. >EF UB ub 1, appears and the
blocking signal, e.g. >EF UB bl 1 disappears. The internal signal Unblock 1 is
passed on to the receive logic, where it initiates the release of the tripping (when all
remaining conditions have been fulfilled).
If the transmitted signal does not reach the other line end because the short-circuit on
the protected feeder causes too much attenuation or reflection of the transmitted
signal, the unblock logic takes effect: neither the unblocking signal >EF UB ub 1
nor the monitoring signal >EF UB bl 1 are received. In this case, the release Un-
block 1 is issued after a security delay time of 20 ms and passed onto the receive
logic. This release is however removed after a further 100 ms via the timer stage
100/100 ms. When the transmission is functional again, one of the two receive signals
must appear again, either >EF UB ub 1or >EF UB bl 1; after a further 100
ms (dropout delay of the timer stage 100/100 ms) the quiescent state is reached again,
i.e. the direct release path to the signal Unblock 1 and thereby the usual release is
possible. On three terminal lines, the unblock logic can be controlled via both receive
channels.
If none of the signals is received for a period of more than 10 s the alarm EF TeleUB
Fail1 is generated.
On lines where there is only a single-sided infeed or where the starpoint is only
earthed behind one line end, the line end without zero sequence current cannot gen-
erate a permissive signal, as fault detection does not take place there. To also ensure
tripping by the directional comparison in this case the device has special features. This
Weak Infeed Function is referred to in Section Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed.
It is activated when a signal is received from the opposite line end on three terminal
lines, from at least one of the opposite ends without the device recognizing an earth
fault.
232 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-105 Logic diagram of the unblocking scheme (one line end)
7SA6 Manual 233

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-106 Unblock logic
234 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.8.4 Directional Blocking Scheme
Principle In the case of the blocking scheme, the transmission channel is used to send a block
signal from one line end to the other. The signal may be sent directly after fault incep-
tion (jump detector above dotted line) and stopped immediately, as soon as the dis-
tance protection detects a fault in the forward direction, alternatively the signal is only
sent when the distance protection detects the fault in the reverse direction. It is
stopped immediately as soon as the earth fault protection detects an earth fault in
forward direction. Tripping is possible with this scheme even if no signal is received
from the opposite line end. It is therefore mainly used for long lines when the signal
must be transmitted across the protected line by means of power line carrier (PLC)
and the attenuation of the transmitted signal at the fault location may be so severe that
reception at the other line cannot necessarily be guaranteed.
Earth faults in the forward direction cause tripping if a blocking signal is not received
from the opposite line end. Due to possible differences in the pick up time delays of
the devices at both line ends and due to the signal transmission time delay, the tripping
must be somewhat delayed by TV in this case.
To avoid signal race conditions, a transmit signal can be prolonged by the settable time
TS once it has been initiated.
Figure 2-107 Operation scheme of the directional blocking method
Sequence Figure 2-108 shows the logic diagram of the blocking scheme for one line end.
The stage to be blocked must be set to Forward (3I0... DIRECTION); refer also
to Section 2.7 under margin heading Teleprotection with Earth Fault Protection.
transmit signal is sent to both opposite line ends. The receive signal is then combined
with a logical OR gate as no blocking signal must be received from any line end during
an internal fault. With the setting parameter Line Config. (address 3202) the
7SA6 Manual 235

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-108 Logic diagram of the blocking scheme (one line end)
236 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
As soon as the earth fault protection has detected a fault in the reverse direction, a
blocking signal is transmitted (e.g. EF Tele SEND, No. 1384). The transmitted
signal may be prolonged by setting address 3203 accordingly. The blocking signal is
stopped if a fault is detected in the forward direction (e.g. EF Tele BL STOP, No.
1389). Very rapid blocking is possible by transmitting also the output signal of the jump
detector for measured values. To do so, the outputEF Tele BL Jump (No. 1390)
must also be allocated to the transmitter output relay. As this jump signal appears at
every measured value jump, it should only be used if the transmission channel can be
relied upon to respond promptly to the disappearance of the transmitted signal.
allel lines, is neutralised by the Transient Blocking. The received blocking signals
also prolong the release by the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address
3210) if it has been present for at least the waiting time TrBlk Wait Time (address
3209), see Figure 2-109). After expiration of TrBlk BlockTime (address 3210) the
delay time Release Delay (address 3208) is restarted.
It lies in the nature of the blocking scheme that single end fed short-circuits can also
be tripped rapidly without any special measures, as the non-feeding end cannot gen-
erate a blocking signal.
7SA6 Manual 237

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.8.5 Transient Blocking
Transient blocking provides additional security against erroneous signals due to tran-
sients caused by clearance of an external fault or by fault direction reversal during
clearance of a fault on a parallel line.
The principle of transient blocking scheme is that following the incidence of an external
fault, the formation of a release signal is prevented for a certain (settable) time. In the
case of permissive schemes, this is achieved by blocking of the transmit and receive
circuit.
Figure 2-109 shows the principle of the transient blocking for a directional comparison
and directional unblocking scheme.
If, following fault detection, a non-directional fault or a fault in the reverse direction is
determined within the waiting time TrBlk Wait Time (address 3209), the transmit
circuit and the trip release are prevented. This blocking is maintained for the duration
of the transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 3210) also after the reset
of the blocking criterion.
With the blocking scheme the transient blocking prolongs also the received blocking
signal as shown in the logic diagram Figure 2-109. After expiration of TrBlk
BlockTime (address 3210) the delay time Release Delay (address 3208) is re-
started.
Figure 2-109 Transient blocking for a directional comparison and directional unblocking schemes
238 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.8.6 Measures for Weak or Zero Infeed
On lines where there is only a single-sided infeed or where the starpoint is only
earthed behind one line end, the line end without zero sequence current cannot gen-
erate a permissive signal, as fault detection does not take place there. With the com-
parison schemes, using a permissive signal, fast tripping could not even be achieved
at the line end with strong infeed without special measures, as the end with weak
infeed does not transmit a permissive release signal.
To achieve rapid tripping at both line ends under these conditions, the device has a
special supplement for lines with weak zero sequence infeed.
To enable even the line end with the weak infeed to trip, 7SA6 provides a weak infeed
tripping supplement. As this is a separate protection function with a dedicated trip
command, it is described separately in Section 2.9.2.
Echo Function The received signal at the line end that has no earth current is returned to the other
line end as an echo by the echo function. The received echo signal at the other line
end enables the release of the trip command.
The common echo signal (see Figure 2-113, Section 2.9.1) is triggered both by the
earth fault protection and by the distance protection. Figure 2-110 shows the genera-
tion of the echo release by the earth fault protection.
The detection of the weak infeed condition and accordingly the requirement for an
echo are combined in a central AND gate. The earth fault protection must neither be
switched off nor blocked, as it would otherwise always produce an echo due to the
missing fault detection.
The essential condition for an echo is the absence of an earth current (current
stage3IoMin Teleprot) with simultaneous receive signal from the teleprotection
scheme logic, as shown in the corresponding logic diagrams (Figure 2-102, 2-103 or
2-105).
To prevent the generation of an echo signal after the line has been tripped and the
earth current stage 3IoMin Teleprot has reset, it is not possible to generate an
echo if a fault detection by the earth current stage had already been present (RS flip-
flop in Figure 2-110). The echo can in any event be blocked via the binary input >EF
BlkEcho.
Figure 2-110 shows the generation of the echo release signal. Since there is a corre-
lation between this function and the weak infeed tripping function, it is described sep-
arately (see Section 2.9.1).
Figure 2-110 Generation of the echo release signal
7SA6 Manual 239

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.8.7 Setting Notes
General The teleprotection supplement for earth fault protection is only operational if it was set
to one of the available modes during the configuration of the device (address 132).
Depending on this configuration, only those parameters which are applicable to the
selected mode appear here. If the teleprotection supplement is not required the
address 132 is set to Teleprot. E/F = Disabled.
If a protection interface is available, the additional setting text SIGNALv.ProtInt is
displayed in address 132 Teleprot. E/F.
Conventional The following modes are possible with conventional transmission links (as described
Transmission in Section 2.8):
Dir.Comp.Pickup Directional comparison pickup,
UNBLOCKING Directional unblocking scheme,
BLOCKING Directional blocking scheme.
At address 3201 FCT Telep. E/F the use of a teleprotection scheme can be
switched ON or OFF.
If the teleprotection has to be applied to a three terminal line, the setting in address
3202 must be Line Config. = Three terminals, if not, the setting remains Two
Terminals.
Digital The following mode is possible with digital transmission using the protection data in-
Transmission terface:
SIGNALv.ProtInt Directional comparison pickup.
At address 3201 FCT Telep. E/F the use of a teleprotection scheme can be turned
ON or OFF. Address 147 NUMBER OF RELAY indicates the number of ends and must
be set identically in all devices. The earth fault directional comparison pickup scheme
via the protection interface is only active if parameter 132 Teleprot. E/F was set
to SIGNALv.ProtInt for all devices in a constellation.
Earth Fault In the application of the comparison schemes, absolute care must be taken that both
Protection line ends recognize an external earth fault (earth fault through-current) in order to
Prerequisites avoid a faulty echo signal in the case of the permissive schemes, or in order to ensure
the blocking signal in the case of the blocking scheme. If, during an earth fault accord-
ing to Figure 2-111, the protection at B does not recognize the fault, this would be in-
terpreted as a fault with single-sided infeed from A (echo from B or no blocking signal
from B), which would lead to unwanted tripping by the protection at A. Therefore, the
earth fault protection features an earth fault stage 3IoMin Teleprot (address
3105). This stage must be set more sensitive than the earth current stage used for the
teleprotection. The larger the capacitive earth current (IEC in Figure 2-111) is, the
smaller this stage must be set. On overhead lines a setting equal to 70 % to 80 % of
the earth current stage is usually adequate. On cables or very long lines where the ca-
pacitive currents in the event of an earth fault are of the same order of magnitude as
the earth fault currents, the echo function should not be used or restricted to the case
where the circuit breaker is open; the blocking scheme should not be used under these
conditions at all.
240 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-111 Possible current distribution during external earth fault
On three terminal lines (teed feeders) it should further be noted that the earth fault
current is not equally distributed on the line ends during an external fault. The most
unfavourable case is shown in Figure 2-112. In this case, the earth current flowing in
from A is distributed equally on the line ends B and C. The setting value 3IoMin
Teleprot (address 3105), which is decisive for the echo or the blocking signal, must
therefore be set smaller than one half of the setting value for the earth current stage
used for teleprotection. In addition, the above comments regarding the capacitive
earth current which is left out in Figure 2-112 apply. If the earth current distribution is
different from the distribution assumed here, the conditions are more favourable as
one of the two earth currents IEB or IEC must then be larger than in the situation de-
scribed previously.
Figure 2-112 Possible unfavourable current distribution on a three terminal line during an ex-
ternal earth fault
Time Settings The send signal prolongation Send Prolong.(address 3203) must ensure that the
send signal reliably reaches the opposite line end, even if there is very fast tripping at
the sending line end and/or the signal transmission time is relatively long. In the case
of the permissive schemes Dir.Comp.Pickup and UNBLOCKING, this signal prolon-
gation time is only effective if the device has already issued a trip command. This
ensures the release of the other line end even if the short-circuit is cleared very rapidly
by a different protection function or other stage. In the case of the blocking scheme
BLOCKING, the transmit signal is always prolonged by this time. In this case, it corre-
sponds to a transient blocking following a reverse fault. This parameter can only be
In order to detect steady-state line faults such as open circuits, a monitoring time
Delay for alarm is started when a fault is detected (address 3207). Upon expira-
tion of this time the fault is considered a permanent failure. This parameter can only
be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
The release of the directional tripping can be delayed by means of the permissive
signal delay Release Delay (address 3208). In general, this is only required for the
blocking scheme BLOCKING to allow sufficient transmission time for the blocking
signal during external faults. This delay only has an effect on the receive circuit of the
teleprotection. Conversely, tripping by the comparison protection is not delayed by the
set time delay of the directional stage.
7SA6 Manual 241

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Transient Blocking The setting parameters TrBlk Wait Time and TrBlk BlockTime are for the tran-
sient blocking with the comparison protection. This parameter can only be altered in
DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
The time TrBlk Wait Time (address 3209) is a waiting time prior to transient block-
ing. In the case of the permissive schemes, only once the directional stage of the earth
fault protection has recognized a fault in the reverse direction, within this period of time
after fault detection, will the transient blocking be activated. In the case of the blocking
scheme, the waiting time prevents transient blocking in the event that the blocking
signal reception from the opposite line end is very fast. With the setting there is no
transient blocking.
The transient blocking time TrBlk BlockTime (address 3210) must definitely be set
longer than the duration of transients resulting from the inception or clearance of ex-
ternal faults. The send signal is delayed by this time with the permissive overreach
schemes Dir.Comp.Pickup and UNBLOCKING if the protection had initially detected
a reverse fault. In case of the blocking scheme, the blocking of the stage release is
prolonged by this time by both the detection of a reverse fault and the (blocking) re-
ceived signal. After expiration of TrBlk BlockTime (address 3210) the delay time
Release Delay (address 3208) is restarted. Since the blocking scheme always re-
quires setting the delay time Release Delay, the transient blocking time TrBlk
BlockTime (address 3210) can usually be set very short.
Echo Function The echo function settings are common to all weak infeed measures and summarized
in tabular form in Section 2.9.2.2.
Note
The ECHO SIGNAL (No 4246) must be allocated separately to the output relays for
special measures.
242 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.8.8 Settings
ditional Settings.

3201 FCT Telep. E/F ON ON Teleprotection for Earth Fault O/C
OFF
3202 Line Config. Two Terminals Two Terminals Line Configuration
Three terminals
3203A Send Prolong. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Time for send signal prolongation
3207A Delay for alarm 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 10.00 sec Unblocking: Time Delay for Alarm
3208 Release Delay 0.000 .. 30.000 sec 0.000 sec Time Delay for release after
pickup
3209A TrBlk Wait Time 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.04 sec Transient Block.: Duration exter-
nal flt.
3210A TrBlk BlockTime 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Transient Block.: Blk.T. after ext.
flt.
7SA6 Manual 243

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
1311 >EF Teleprot.ON SP >E/F Teleprotection ON
1312 >EF TeleprotOFF SP >E/F Teleprotection OFF
1313 >EF TeleprotBLK SP >E/F Teleprotection BLOCK
1318 >EF Rec.Ch1 SP >E/F Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1
1319 >EF Rec.Ch2 SP >E/F Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 2
1320 >EF UB ub 1 SP >E/F Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Channel 1
1321 >EF UB bl 1 SP >E/F Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 1
1322 >EF UB ub 2 SP >E/F Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Channel 2
1323 >EF UB bl 2 SP >E/F Unblocking: BLOCK, Channel 2
1324 >EF BlkEcho SP >E/F BLOCK Echo Signal
1325 >EF Rec.Ch1 L1 SP >E/F Carrier RECEPTION, Channel 1, Ph.L1
1328 >EF UB ub 1-L1 SP >E/F Unblocking: UNBLOCK Chan. 1, Ph.L1
1371 EF Tele SEND L1 OUT E/F Telep. Carrier SEND signal, Phase L1
1374 EF Tele STOP L1 OUT E/F Telep. Block: carrier STOP signal L1
1380 EF TeleON/offBI IntSP E/F Teleprot. ON/OFF via BI
1381 EF Telep. OFF OUT E/F Teleprotection is switched OFF
1384 EF Tele SEND OUT E/F Telep. Carrier SEND signal
1386 EF TeleTransBlk OUT E/F Telep. Transient Blocking
1387 EF TeleUB Fail1 OUT E/F Telep. Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 1
1388 EF TeleUB Fail2 OUT E/F Telep. Unblocking: FAILURE Channel 2
1389 EF Tele BL STOP OUT E/F Telep. Blocking: carrier STOP signal
1390 EF Tele BL Jump OUT E/F Tele.Blocking: Send signal with jump
1391 EF Rec.L1 Dev1 OUT EF Tele.Carrier RECEPTION, L1, Device1
244 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.9 Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed
In cases where there is no or only weak infeed present at one line end, the distance
protection does not pick up there during a short-circuit on the line. Likewise, on lines
where there is only a single sided infeed or where the star-point is only earthed behind
one line end, the line end without zero sequence current cannot generate a permissive
signal, as fault detection does not take place there. The settings and information table
applies for the following functions.
2.9.1 Echo Function
Figure 2-113 shows the method of operation of the echo function. At address 2501
FCT Weak Infeed (weak infeed FunCTion) can be activated (ECHO only) or de-
activated (OFF). By means of this switch the weak infeed tripping function can also
be activated (ECHO and TRIP, refer also to Section 2.9.2). This setting is common
to the teleprotection functions for the distance protection and for the earth fault protec-
tion.
If there is no fault detection or no earth current, the echo function causes the received
signal to be sent back to the other line end as an echo, where it is used to initiate
permissive tripping.
In applications with one common transmission channel used by both the distance and
the earth fault protection spurious trippings may occur, if distance protection and earth
fault protection create an echo independently from each other. In this case parameter
Echo:1channel has to be set to YES.
If the conditions for an echo signal are met by the distance protection or the earth fault
protection (see also Sections 2.6 and 2.8 under Echo Function), a short delay
Trip/Echo DELAY is initially activated. This delay is necessary to avoid transmission
of the echo if the protection at the weak line end has a longer fault detection time
during reverse faults or if it picks up a little later due to unfavourable short-circuit or
earth current distribution. If, however, the circuit breaker at the non-feeding line end is
open, this delay of the echo signal is not required. The echo delay time may then be
bypassed. The circuit breaker position is provided by the central information control
functions (refer to Section 2.23.1).
The echo impulse is then transmitted (alarm output ECHO SIGNAL), the duration of
which can be set with the parameter Trip EXTENSION. The ECHO SIGNAL must
be allocated separately to the output relay(s) for transmission, as it is not contained in
the transmit signals Dis.T.SEND, Dis.T.SEND L* or EF Tele SEND.
Note
special measures (Figure 2-74).
7SA6 Manual 245

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
After output of the echo pulse or transmission of the distance protection or the earth
fault protection, a new echo cannot be sent for at least 50 ms. This prevents echo rep-
etition after the line has been switched off.
In the case of the blocking scheme and the underreach transfer trip scheme, the echo
function is not required and therefore ineffective.
Figure 2-113 Logic diagram of the echo function with teleprotection
2.9.2 Classical Tripping
Transmission By coordinating the weak infeed function with the teleprotection in conjunction with
Schemes distance protection and/or earth fault protection, fast tripping can also be achieved at
both line ends in the above cases.
At the strong infeed line end, the distance protection can always trip instantaneously
for faults inside zone Z1. With permissive teleprotection schemes, fast tripping for
faults on 100% of the line length is achieved by activation of the echo function (see
section 2.6).This provides the permissive release of the trip signal at the strong infeed
line end.
The permissive teleprotection scheme in conjunction with the earth fault protection
can also achieve release of the trip signal at the strong infeed line end by means of
the echo function (refer to Section 2.8).
In many cases tripping of the circuit breaker at the weak infeeding line end is also de-
sired. For this purpose the device 7SA6 has a dedicated protection function with ded-
icated trip command.
246 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Pickup with Under- In Figure 2-114 the logic diagram of the weak-infeed tripping is shown. The function
voltage can be activated (ECHO and TRIP) or deactivated (OFF) in address 2501 FCT Weak
Infeed (Weak Infeed FunCTion). If this switch is set to ECHO only, the tripping is
also disabled; however the echo function to release the infeeding line end is activated
(refer also to Section 2.6 and 2.8). The tripping function can be blocked at any time via
the binary input >BLOCK Weak Inf.
The logic for the detection of a weak-infeed condition is built up per phase in conjunc-
tion with the distance protection and additionally once for the earth fault protection.
Since the undervoltage check is performed for each phase, single-pole tripping is also
possible, provided the device version has the single-pole tripping option.
In the event of a short-circuit, it may be assumed that only a small voltage appears at
the line end with the weak-infeed condition, as the small fault current only produces a
small voltage drop in the short-circuit loop. In the event of zero-infeed, the loop voltage
is approximately zero. The weak-infeed tripping is therefore dependent on the mea-
sured undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE which is also used for the selection of the faulty
phase.
If a signal is received from the opposite line end without fault detection by the local
protection, this indicates that there is a fault on the protected feeder. In the case of
three terminal lines when using a permissive overreach scheme a receive signal from
both ends may be present. In case of permissive underreach schemes, one receive
signal from at least one end is sufficient.
After a security margin time of 40 ms following the start of the receive signal, the weak-
infeed tripping is released if the remaining conditions are satisfied: undervoltage,
circuit breaker closed and no pickup of the distance protection or of the earth fault pro-
tection.
To avoid a faulty pickup of the weak infeed function following tripping of the line and
reset of the fault detection, the function cannot pick up anymore once a fault detection
in the affected phase was present (RS flip-flop in Figure 2-114).
In the case of the earth fault protection, the release signal is routed via the phase seg-
regated logic modules. Single-phase tripping is therefore also possible if both distance
protection and earth fault protection or exclusively earth fault protection issues a
release condition.
7SA6 Manual 247

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-114 Logic diagram of the weak infeed tripping
248 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
General It is a prerequisite for the operation of the weak infeed function that it was enabled
during the configuration of the device at address 125 Weak Infeed = Enabled.
With the parameter FCT Weak Infeed (address 2501) it is determined whether the
device shall trip during a weak infeed condition or not. With the setting ECHO and
TRIP both the echo function and the weak infeed tripping function are activated. With
the setting ECHO only the echo function for provision of the release signal at the in-
feeding line end is activated. There is, however, no tripping at the line end with missing
or weak infeed condition. As the weak-infeed measures are dependent on the signal
reception from the opposite line end, they only make sense if the protection is coordi-
nated with teleprotection (refer to Section 2.6 and/or 2.8).
The receive signal is a functional component of the trip condition. Accordingly, the
weak infeed tripping function must not be used with the blocking schemes. It is only
permissible with the permissive schemes and the comparison schemes with release
signals! In all other cases it should be switched OFF at address 2501. In such cases
it is better to disable this function from the onset by setting address 125 to Disabled
during the device configuration. The associated parameters are then not accessible.
The undervoltage setting value UNDERVOLTAGE (address 2505) must in any event be
set below the minimum expected operational phase-earth voltage. The lower limit for
this setting is given by the maximum expected voltage drop at the relay location on the
weak-infeed side during a short-circuit on the protected feeder for which the distance
protection may no longer pick up.
Echo Function In the case of line ends with weak infeed, the echo function is sensible in conjunction
with permissive overreach transfer schemes POTT and UNBLOCKING with release
signal, so that the feeding line end is also released. The setting lists concerning the
weak infeed are listed in Section 2.9.3.2. The echo function in address 2501 FCT
Weak Infeed can be activated (ECHO only or deactivated (OFF). By means of this
switch the weak infeed tripping function can also be activated (ECHO and TRIP).
Please do not fail to observe the notes on the setting of the distance protection zones
at margin heading Distance Protection Prerequisites in Section 2.6, and the notes on
earth fault protection regarding the setting of the earth current stage 3IoMin
Teleprot at margin heading Earth Fault Protection Prerequisites in Section 2.8.
The echo delay time Trip/Echo DELAY (address 2502) must be set long enough to
avoid incorrect echo signals resulting from the difference in fault detection pick-up time
of the distance protection functions or the earth fault protection function at all line ends
during external faults (through-fault current). Typical setting is approx. 40 ms (preset-
ting). This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
The echo impulse duration Trip EXTENSION (address 2503) may be matched to the
configuration data of the signal transmission equipment. It must be long enough to
ensure that the receive signal is recognized even with different pickup times by the
protection devices at the line ends and different response times of the transmission
equipment. In most cases approx. 50 ms (presetting) is sufficient. This parameter can
A continous echo signal between the line ends can be avoided (e.g. spurious signal
from the command channel) by blocking a new echo for a certain time Echo BLOCK
Time (address 2504) after each output of an echo signal. Typical setting is approx. 50
ms. In addition after the distance protection or earth fault protection signal was sent,
the echo is also blocked for the time Echo BLOCK Time. This parameter can only be
7SA6 Manual 249

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
In applications with a transmission channel used by both the distance and the earth
fault protection spurious trippings may occur, if distance protection and earth fault pro-
tection create an echo independently from each other. In this case parameter
Echo:1channel (address 2509) has to be set to YES. The default setting is NO.
Note
special measures.
2.9.3 Tripping According to Specification RTE
An alternative for detecting weak infeed is only available in the models 7SA6***-**D**.
Pickup with Rela- In addition to the classical function of weak infeed, the so called Logic no. 2 (ad-
tive Voltage Jump dress 125) presents an alternative to the method used so far.
This function operates independently of the teleprotection scheme by using its own
receive signal and it is able to trip with delay and without delay.
250 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Non-delayed
Tripping
Figure 2-115 Logic diagram for non-delayed tripping
7SA6 Manual 251

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Trip with Delay
Figure 2-116 Logic for delayed tripping
252 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Phase Selection Phase selection is accomplished via undervoltage detection. For this purpose no ab-
solute voltage threshold in volts is parameterized, but a factor (address 2510 Uphe<
Factor) which is multiplied with the measured phase-phase voltage, and yields the
voltage threshold. This method accounts for operational deviations from the nominal
voltage in the undervoltage threshold and adjusts them to the prevailing conditions.
Since a sound positive phase-to-phase voltage is not available in the event of a fault,
the undervoltage threshold is delayed. Thus changes in the positive phase--to-phase
voltage affect the threshold only slowly. The time constant can be set at address 2511
Time const. . The undervoltage is determined for all 3 phases.
If the measured phase-to-phase voltage falls below the threshold (address 1131
PoleOpenVoltage), undervoltage is no longer detected in this phase.
Figure 2-117 Undervoltage detection for UL1E
Non-delayed A non-delayed TRIP command is issued if a receive signal >WI reception is

Tripping present and an undervoltage condition is detected simultaneously. If another protec-
tion function capable to detect faults has picked up in the relay, the corresponding
phases in the weak-infeed function are blocked. The receive signal is prolonged at
address 2512 Rec. Ext., so that a trip command is still possible in the event of a
quick dropout of the transmitting line end.
To avoid a faulty pick up of the weak infeed function following tripping of the line and
reset of the fault detection, the function cannot pick up any more once an inverse-time
overcurrent fault detection in the affected phase was present.
If a receive signal applies and no undervoltage is detected, but the zero sequence
current threshold 3I0> Threshold is exceeded (address 2514), a fault on the line
can be assumed. If this state (receive signal, no undervoltage and zero sequence cur-
rent) applies for longer than 500 ms, 3-pole tripping is initiated. The time delay for the
signal 3I0> exceeded is set at address 2513 T 3I0> Ext.. If the zero sequence
current exceeds the threshold 3I0> Threshold for longer than the set time T 3I0>
alarm (address 2520), the annunciation 3I0 detected is issued.
The non-delayed stage operates only if binary input >WI rec. OK reports the
proper functioning of the transmission channel.
Moreover, the phase-selective block signals BLOCK Weak Inf affect the non-delayed
logic. Faulty pickups are thus prevented, especially after the dedicated line end was
shut down.
In address 2530 WI non delayed the stage for instantaneous tripping is switched
OFF or ON continuously.
7SA6 Manual 253

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Trip with Delay The operation of the delayed tripping is determined by three parameters:
Address 2517 1pol. Trip enables a single-pole trip command in case of single-
pole faults if set to ON.
If set to ON, address 2518 1pol. with 3I0 allows a single-pole trip command
only if the threshold 3I0> Threshold for the zero current has been exceeded. If
the threshold 3I0> Threshold is not exceeded, single-pole faults do not lead to
tripping. Position OFF allows a single-pole trip command even when 3I0>
Threshold is not exceeded. The time delay for the signal 3I0> exceeded is set
at address 2513 T 3I0> Ext..
If set to ON, address 2519 3pol. Trip allows also a three-pole trip command in
the event of a multi-pole pickup. In position OFF the multi-pole pickup is only report-
ed but a three-pole trip command is not issued (only report). But a single-pole or
three-pole trip command can nevertheless be issued.
A delayed tripping stage is implemented to allow tripping the dedicated line end in
case the transmission channel is faulted. When undervoltage conditions have been
detected, this stage picks up in one or more phases and after a configured time (ad-
dress 2515 TM and address 2516 TT) has elapsed it trips without delay.
Address 2531 WI delayed allows to set delayed tripping as operating mode. With
ON this stage is permanently active. With the setting by receive fail, this stage
will only be active if >WI rec. OK is not reported OFF.
To avoid erroneous pickup, phase selection via undervoltage is blocked entirely in the
event of voltage failure (pickup of the fuse failure monitor or of the VT mcb). Moreover,
the corresponding phases are also blocked if another protection function, capable of
detecting short circuit faults, picks up.
254 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.9.4 Table overview for classical and RTE Tripping
2.9.4.1 Settings
ditional Settings.

2501 FCT Weak Infeed OFF ECHO only Weak Infeed function is
ECHO only
ECHO and TRIP
2502A Trip/Echo DELAY 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.04 sec Trip / Echo Delay after
carrier receipt
2503A Trip EXTENSION 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Trip Extension / Echo
Impulse time
2504A Echo BLOCK Time 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Echo Block Time
2505 UNDERVOLTAGE 2 .. 70 V 25 V Undervoltage (ph-e)
2509 Echo:1channel NO NO Echo logic: Dis and EF on
YES common channel
2510 Uphe< Factor 0.10 .. 1.00 0.70 Factor for undervoltage
Uphe<
2511 Time const. 1 .. 60 sec 5 sec Time constant Tau
2512A Rec. Ext. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.65 sec Reception extension
2513A T 3I0> Ext. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.60 sec 3I0> exceeded extension
2514 3I0> Threshold 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A 3I0 threshold for neutral
current pickup
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
2515 TM 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.40 sec WI delay single pole
2516 TT 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 1.00 sec WI delay multi pole
2517 1pol. Trip ON ON Single pole WI trip allowed
OFF
2518 1pol. with 3I0 ON ON Single pole WI trip with 3I0
OFF
2519 3pol. Trip ON ON Three pole WI trip allowed
OFF
2520 T 3I0> alarm 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 10.00 sec 3I0> exceeded delay for
alarm
2530 WI non delayed ON ON WI non delayed
OFF
2531 WI delayed ON by receive fail WI delayed
by receive fail
7SA6 Manual 255

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
4203 >BLOCK Weak Inf SP >BLOCK Weak Infeed
4204 >BLOCK del. WI SP >BLOCK delayed Weak Infeed stage
4205 >WI rec. OK SP >Reception (channel) for Weak Infeed OK
4206 >WI reception SP >Receive signal for Weak Infeed
4221 WeakInf. OFF OUT Weak Infeed is switched OFF
4222 Weak Inf. BLOCK OUT Weak Infeed is BLOCKED
4223 Weak Inf ACTIVE OUT Weak Infeed is ACTIVE
4225 3I0 detected OUT Weak Infeed Zero seq. current detected
4226 WI U L1< OUT Weak Infeed Undervoltg. L1
4229 WI TRIP 3I0 OUT WI TRIP with zero sequence current
4231 WeakInf. PICKUP OUT Weak Infeed PICKED UP
4232 W/I Pickup L1 OUT Weak Infeed PICKUP L1
4241 WeakInfeed TRIP OUT Weak Infeed General TRIP command
4242 Weak TRIP 1p.L1 OUT Weak Infeed TRIP command - Only L1
4245 Weak TRIP L123 OUT Weak Infeed TRIP command L123
4246 ECHO SIGNAL OUT ECHO Send SIGNAL
256 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.10 External direct and remote tripping
Any signal from an external protection or monitoring device can be coupled into the
signal processing of the 7SA6 by means of a binary input. This signal may be delayed,
alarmed and routed to one or several output relays.
External Trip of the Figure 2-118 shows the logic diagram. If the device and circuit breaker are capable of
Local Circuit single-phase operation, it is also possible to trip single phase. The tripping logic of the
Breaker device in this case ensures that the conditions for single-phase tripping are satisfied
(e.g. single-phase tripping enabled, automatic reclosure ready).
The external tripping can be switched on and off with a setting parameter and may be
blocked via binary input.
Figure 2-118 Logic diagram of the local external tripping
7SA6 Manual 257

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Remote Trip of the On a digital communication link via protection interface, transmission of up to 4 remote
Circuit Breaker at commands is possible, as described in Section 2.5.
the Opposite Line
On conventional transmission paths, one transmission channel per desired transmis-
End
sion direction is required for remote tripping at the remote end. For example, fibre optic
connections or voice frequency modulated high frequency channels via pilot cables,
power line carrier or microwave radio links can be used for this purpose in the following
ways.
If the trip command of the distance protection is to be transmitted, it is best to use the
integrated teleprotection function for the transmission of the signal as this already in-
corporates the optional extension of the transmitted signal, as described in Section
2.6. Any of the commands can of course be used to trigger the transmitter to initiate
the send signal.
On the receiver side, the local external trip function is used. The receive signal is
routed to a binary input which is assigned to the logical binary input function >DTT
Trip L123. If single-pole tripping is desired, you can also use binary inputs >DTT
Trip L1, >DTT Trip L2 and >DTT Trip L3. Figure 2-118 therefore also
applies in this case.
General A prerequisite for the application of the direct and remote tripping functions is that
during the configuration of the scope of functions in address 122 DTT Direct Trip
= Enabled was applied. At address 2201 FCT Direct Trip it can also be switched
ON or OFF.
It is possible to set a trip delay for both the local external trip and the receive side of
the remote trip in address 2202 Trip Time DELAY. This can be used as a security
time margin, especially in the case of local trip.
Once a trip command has been issued, it is maintained for at least as long as the set
minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD which was set for the device in
general in address 240 (Section 2.1.2). Reliable operation of the circuit breaker is
therefore ensured, even if the initiating signal pulse is very short. This parameter can
258 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.10.3 Settings

2201 FCT Direct Trip ON OFF Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)
OFF
2202 Trip Time DELAY 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.01 sec Trip Time Delay

formation
4403 >BLOCK DTT SP >BLOCK Direct Transfer Trip function
4412 >DTT Trip L1 SP >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase L1
4417 >DTT Trip L123 SP >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT 3ph L123
4421 DTT OFF OUT Direct Transfer Trip is switched OFF
4422 DTT BLOCK OUT Direct Transfer Trip is BLOCKED
4432 DTT TRIP 1p. L1 OUT DTT TRIP command - Only L1
4435 DTT TRIP L123 OUT DTT TRIP command L123
7SA6 Manual 259

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.11 Overcurrent protection
The 7SA6 features a time overcurrent protection function which can be used as either
a back-up or an emergency overcurrent protection. All elements may be configured in-
dependently of each other and combined according to the user's requirements.
2.11.1 General
Whereas the distance protection can only function correctly if the measured voltage
signals are available to the device, the emergency overcurrent protection only requires
the currents. The emergency overcurrent function is automatically activated when the
measured voltage signal is lost, e.g. due to a short circuit or interruption of the voltage
transformer secondary circuits (emergency operation). The emergency operation
therefore replaces the distance protection as short circuit protection if loss of the mea-
sured voltage signal is recognized by one of the following conditions:
Pickup of the internal measured voltage monitoring (FuseFailureMonitor, refer
to Subsection 2.22.1) or
The Voltage transformer mcb tripped signal is received via binary input, indicating
that the measured voltage signal is lost.
If one of these conditions arise, the distance protection is immediately blocked and the
emergency operation is activated.
If the overcurrent protection is set as a back-up overcurrent protection, it will work in-
dependently of other protection and monitoring functions, i.e. also independently of
the distance protection. The back-up overcurrent protection could for instance be used
as the only short-circuit protection if the voltage transformers are not yet available
when the feeder is initially commissioned.
For the overcurrent protection there are in total four stages for the phase currents and
four stages for the earth currents as follows:
Two overcurrent stages with a definite time characteristic (O/C with DT),
One overcurrent stage with inverse time characteristic (IDMT),
One additional overcurrent stage which is preferably used as a stub protection, but
which can be applied as an additional normal definite time delayed stage. With the
device variants for the region Germany (10th digit of ordering code = A) this stage
is only available if the setting 126 TOC IEC /w 3ST is active.
These four stages are independent of each other and are freely combinable. Blocking
by external criteria via binary input is possible as well as rapid (non delayed) tripping
(e.g. by an external automatic reclose device). During energization of the protected
feeder onto a dead fault it is also possible to release any stage, or also several, for
non-delayed tripping. If some stages are not needed, those not needed can be deac-
tivated by setting the pickup value to .
260 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Measured The phase currents are fed to the device via the input transformers of the measuring
Quantities input. The earth current 3I0 is either measured directly or calculated from the phase
currents, depending on the ordered device version and usage of the fourth current
input I4 of the device.
If I4 is connected to the starpoint of the current transformer set, the earth current will
be available directly as measured quantity.
If the device is fitted with the highly sensitive current input for I4, this current I4 is used
with the factor I4/Iph CT (address 221, refer to Subsection 2.1.2 of the P.System
Data 1). As the linear range of this measuring input is severely restricted in the high
range, this current is only evaluated up to an amplitude of approx. 1.6A. In the event
of larger currents, the device automatically switches over to the evaluation of the zero
sequence current derived from the phase currents. Naturally, all three phase currents
obtained from a set of three star-connected current transformers must be available
and connected to the device. The processing of the earth current is then also possible
if very small as well as large earth fault currents may occur.
If the fourth current input I4 is used e.g. for a power transformer star point current or
for the earth current of a parallel line, the device derives the earth current from the
phase currents. Naturally in this case also all three phase currents derived from a set
of three star connected current transformers must be available and connected to the
device.
Definite Time Each phase current is compared with the setting value Iph>> after numerical filtering;
High-set Current the ground current is compared with 3I0>> PICKUP. Currents above the associated
Stage I>> pickup value are detected and signalled. After expiry of the associated time delays T
Iph>> or T 3I0>> a trip command is issued. The dropout value is approximately 5%
below pickup value, but at least 1.5% of the nominal current, below the pickup value.
The figure below shows the logic diagram of the I>> stages. The stages can be
blocked via a binary input >BLOCK O/C I>>. Binary inputs >O/C InstTRIP
and the function block switch-onto-fault are common to all stages and described
below. They may, however, separately affect the phase and/or earth current stages.
This is accomplished with the following setting parameters:
I>> Telep/BI (address 2614)determines whether a non-delayed trip of this
stage via binary input >O/C InstTRIP is possible (YES) or impossible (NO) and
I>> SOTF (address 2615)determines whether during switching onto a fault tripping
shall be instantaneous(YES) or not (NO) with this stage.
7SA6 Manual 261

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-119 Logic diagram of the I>> stage

1) The output indications associated with the trip signals can be found in Table 2-16
Definite Time The logic of the overcurrent stage I is the same as that of the I>> stages. In all refer-
Overcurrent Stage ences Iph>> must merely be replaced with Iph> or 3I0>> PICKUP with 3I0>. In all
I> other respects Figure 2-119 applies.
Inverse Time The logic of the inverse overcurrent stage also operates chiefly in the same way as
Overcurrent Stage the remaining stages. However, the time delay is calculated here based on the type of
IP the set characteristic, the intensity of the current and a time multiplier (following fig-
ure). A pre-selection of the available characteristics was already carried out during the
configuration of the protection functions. Furthermore, an additional constant time
delay T Ip Add or T 3I0p Add may be selected, which is added to the inverse time.
The possible characteristics are shown in the Technical Data.
The following figure shows the logic diagram. The setting addresses of the IEC char-
acteristics are shown by way of an example. In the setting information (Subsection
2.11.3) the different setting addresses are elaborated upon.
262 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-120 Logic diagram of the IP stage (inverse time overcurrent protection), for example IEC characteristics
1
) The output indications associated with the pickup signals can be found in Table 2-16
2
) The output indications associated with the trip signals can be found in Table 2-17
7SA6 Manual 263

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Stub fault A further overcurrent stage is the stub protection. It can however also be used as a
protection normal additional definite time overcurrent stage, as it functions independent of the
other stages.
A stub fault is a short-circuit located between the current transformer set and the line
isolator. It is of particular importance with the 11/2 circuit breaker arrangements.
Figure 2-121 Stub fault at an 11/2 circuit breaker arrangement
If a short circuit current IA and/or IB flows while the line isolator 1 is open, this implies
that a fault in the stub range between the current transformers IA, IB, and the line iso-
lator exists. The circuit breakers CBA and CBC that carry the short-circuit current can
be tripped without delay. The two sets of current transformers are connected in parallel
such that the current sum IA + IB represents the current flowing towards the line isola-
tor.
The stub protection is an overcurrent protection which is only in service when the state
of the line isolator indicates the open condition via a binary input >I-STUB
ENABLE. The binary input must therefore be operated via an auxiliary contact of the
isolator. In the case of a closed line isolator, the stub protection is out of service. For
more information see the next logic diagram.
If the stub protection stage is to be used as a normal definite time overcurrent stage,
the binary input >BLOCK I-STUB, should be left without allocation or routing (ma-
trix). The enable input >I-STUB ENABLE, however, has to be constantly activated
(either via a binary input or via integrated logic (CFC) functions which can be config-
ured by the user.
264 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-122 Logic diagram of stub fault protection

1) The output indications associated with the pickup signals can be found in Table 2-16
Instantaneous Trip- If automatic reclosure must be performed, a quick clearance of the fault before reclo-
ping before Auto- sure is usually desirable. A release signal from an external automatic reclosure device
matic Reclosure can be injected via binary input >O/C InstTRIP. The interconnection of the inter-
nal auto recloser is performed via an additional CFC logic, which typically connects
the output signal 2889 AR 1.CycZoneRel with the input signal >O/C
InstTRIP. Any stage of the overcurrent protection can thus perform an instanta-
neous trip before reclosure via the parameter Telep/BI ....
7SA6 Manual 265

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Switching onto The internal line energization detection can be used to achieve quick tripping of the
a fault circuit breaker in case of an earth fault. The overcurrent protection can then trip three-
pole without delay or with a reduced delay. It can be determined via parameter setting
for which stage(s) the rapid tripping following closure on to a dead fault applies. (Refer
also to the logic diagrams in 2-119, 2-120 and 2-122). This function is independent of
the high-current instantaneous tripping described in Sub-section 2.12.
Fault Detection and The pickup signals of the individual phases (or the ground) and of the stages are linked
Trip Logic in such a way that both the phase information and the stage which has picked up are
output (Table 2-16).
Table 2-16 Pickup signals of the individual phases
Internal Annunciation Figure Output Annunciation No

I>> PU L1 2-119
I> PU L1
O/C Pickup L1 7162
Ip PU L1 2-120
I>>> PU L1 2-122
I>> PU L2 2-119
I> PU L2
O/C Pickup L2 7163
Ip PU L2 2-120
I>>> PU L2 2-122
I>> PU L3 2-119
I> PU L3
O/C Pickup L3 7164
Ip PU L3 2-120
I>>> PU L3 2-122
I>> PU E 2-119
I> PU E
O/C Pickup E 7165
Ip PU E 2-120
I>>> PU E 2-122
I>> PU L1 2-119
I>> PU L2 2-119
O/C PICKUP I>> 7191
I>> PU L3 2-119
I>> PU E 2-119
I> PU L1
I> PU L2
O/C PICKUP I> 7192
I> PU L3
I> PU E
Ip PU L1 2-120
Ip PU L2 2-120
O/C PICKUP Ip 7193
Ip PU L3 2-120
Ip PU E 2-120
I>>> PU L1 2-122
I>>> PU L2 2-122
I-STUB PICKUP 7201
I>>> PU L3 2-122
I>>> PU E 2-122
(All pickups) O/C PICKUP 7161
For the tripping signals (Table 2-17), the stage which caused the tripping is also output.
If the device has the option to trip single-pole, and this option has been activated, the
pole which has been tripped is also indicated during single-pole tripping (refer also to
Section 2.23.1 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device).
266 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 2-17 Trip signals of the single phases
Internal Indication Display Output Indication No.

I>> TRIP L1 2-119
I> TRIP L1 7212 or
O/C TRIP 1p.L1 or O/C TRIP L123
Ip TRIP L1 2-120 7215
I>>> TRIP L1 2-122
I>> TRIP L2 2-119
I> TRIP L2 7213 or
Ip TRIP L2 2-120 7215
I>>> TRIP L2 2-122
I>> TRIP L3 2-119
I> TRIP L3 7214 or
Ip TRIP L3 2-120 7215
I>>> TRIP L3 2-122
I>> TRIP E 2-119
I> TRIP E
O/C TRIP L123 7215
Ip TRIP E 2-120
I>>> TRIP E 2-122
I>> TRIP L1 2-119
I>> TRIP L2 2-119
O/C TRIP I>> 7221
I>> TRIP L3 2-119
I>> TRIP E 2-119
I> TRIP L1
I> TRIP L2
O/C TRIP I> 7222
I> TRIP L3
I> TRIP E
Ip TRIP L1 2-120
Ip TRIP L2 2-120
O/C TRIP Ip 7223
Ip TRIP L3 2-120
Ip TRIP E 2-120
I>>> TRIP L1 2-122
I>>> TRIP L2 2-122
I-STUB TRIP 7235
I>>> TRIP L3 2-122
I>>> TRIP E 2-122
(General TRIP) O/C TRIP 7211
7SA6 Manual 267

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
General During configuration of the scope of functions for the device (address 126) the avail-
able characteristics were determined. Depending on the configuration and the order
variant, only those parameters that apply to the selected characteristics are accessible
in the procedures described below.
Address 2601 is set according to the desired mode of operation of the overcurrent
protection: Operating Mode = ON:always activ means that the overcurrent pro-
tection works independently of other protection functions, i.e. as a backup overcurrent
protection. If it is to work only as an emergency function in case of loss of VT supply,
ON:with VT loss must be set. Finally, it can also be set to OFF.
If not all stages are required, each individual stage can be deactivated by setting the
pickup threshold to . But if you set only an associated time delay to this does not
suppress the pickup signals but prevents the timers from running.
The stub protection remains in service even if the overcurrent mode of operation
setting is ON:with VT loss.
One or several stages can be set as instantaneous tripping stages when switching
onto a fault. This is chosen during the setting of the individual stages (see below). To
avoid a spurious pickup due to transient overcurrents, the delay SOTF Time DELAY
(address 2680) can be set. Typically, the presetting of 0 is correct. A short delay can
be useful in case of long cables for which high inrush currents can be expected, or for
transformers. The time delay depends on the severity and duration of the transient
overcurrents as well as on which stages were selected for the fast switch onto fault
clearance.
High-set Stages The I>> stages Iph>> (address 2610) and 3I0>> PICKUP (address 2612) together
Iph>>, 3I0>> with the I> stages or the Ip stages result in a two-stage characteristic. Of course, all
three stages can be combined as well. If one stage is not required, the pickup value
has to be set to . The I>> stages always operates with a defined delay time.
If the I>> stages are used for instantaneous tripping before the automatic reclosure
(via CFC interconnection), the current setting corresponds to the I> or Ip stages (see
below). In this case only the different delay times are of interest. The times T
Iph>>(address 2611) and T 3I0>> (address 2613) can than be set to 0 or a very
low value, as the fast clearance of the fault takes priority over the selectivity before the
automatic reclosure is initiated. These stages have to be blocked before final trip in
order to achieve the selectivity.
For very long lines with a small source impedance or on applications with large reac-
tances (e.g. transformers, series reactors), the I>> stages can also be used for current
grading. In this case they must be set in such a way that they do not pick up in case
of a fault at the end of the line. The times can then be set to 0 or to a small value.
tionally entered as primary or secondary values. For settings with secondary values
the currents will be converted for the secondary side of the current transformers.
268 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2:
s (length) = 60 km
R1/s = 0.19 /km
X1/s = 0.42 /km
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
S k' = 2.5 GVA
From that the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZS are calculated:
Z1/s = 0.192 + 0.422 /km = 0.46 /km
ZL = 0.46 /km 60 km = 27.66
The three-phase fault current at the line end is IF End:
With a safety factor of 10 %, the following primary setting value is calculated:

Set value I>> = 1.1 2150 A = 2365 A
or the secondary setting value:
i.e. in case of fault currents exceeding 2365 A (primary) or 19.7A (secondary) you can
be sure that a short-circuit has occurred on the protected line. This fault can immedi-
ately be cleared by the time overcurrent protection.
Note: the calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently precise
for overhead lines. If the angles of the source impedance and the line impedance vary
considerably, a complex calculation must be carried out.
A similar calculation must be carried out for earth faults, with the maximum earth
current occurring at the line end during a short-circuit being decisive.
The set time delays are pure additional delays, which do not include the operating time
(measuring time).
The parameter I>> Telep/BI (address 2614) defines whether the time delays T
Iph>> (address 2611) and T 3I0>> (address 2613) can be bypassed by the binary
input >O/C InstTRIP (No 7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure func-
tion. The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all stages of the time overcurrent pro-
tection. With I>> Telep/BI = YES you define that the I>> stages trip without delay
after pickup if the binary input was activated. For I>> Telep/BI = NO the set delays
are always active.
If the I>> stage, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with a
short delay, SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, see above under margin heading
General), the parameter I>> SOTF (address 2615) is set to YES. Any other stage
can be selected as well for this instantaneous tripping.
7SA6 Manual 269

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Overcurrent Stages For the setting of the current pickup value, Iph> (address 2620), the maximum oper-
Iph>, 3I0> in ating current is most decisive. Pickup due to overload should never occur, since the
Definite-time device in this operating mode operates as fault protection with correspondingly short
Overcurrent tripping times and not as overload protection. For this reason, a pickup value of about
Protection 10 % above the expected peak load is recommended for line protection, and a setting
of about 20 % above the expected peak load is recommended for transformers and
motors.
tionally entered as primary or secondary values. For settings with secondary values
the currents will be converted for the secondary side of the current transformers.
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2
maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
corresponding to
Imax = 630 A
Safety factor 1.1
With settings in primary quantities the following setting value is calculated:
Set value I> = 1.1 630 A = 693 A
With settings in secondary quantities the following setting value is calculated:
The earth current stage 3I0> (address 2622) should be set to detect the smallest
earth fault current to be expected. For very small earth currents the earth fault protec-
tion is most suited (refer to Section 2.7).
The time delay T Iph> (address 2621) results from the time grading schedule de-
signed for the network. If implemented as emergency overcurrent protection, shorter
tripping times are advisable (one grading time step above the fast tripping stage), as
this function is only activated in the case of the loss of the local measured voltage.
The time T 3I0> (address 2623) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate
time grading schedule for earth currents.
The set times are mere additional delays for the independent stages, which do not
include the inherent operating time of the protection. If only the phase currents are to
be monitored, set the pickup value of the earth fault stage to .
The parameter I> Telep/BI (address 2624) defines whether the time delays T
Iph> (address 2621) and T 3I0> (address 2623) can be bypassed by the binary
input >O/C InstTRIP. The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all stages of the
time-overcurrent protection. With I> Telep/BI = YES you define that the I> stages
trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For I> Telep/BI =
NO the set delays are always active.
270 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
If the I> stage, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with a
General), the parameter I> SOTF (address 2625) is set to YES. We recommend,
however, not to choose the sensitive setting for the switch on to a fault function as en-
ergizing of the line on to a fault should cause a large fault current. It is important to
avoid that the selected stage picks up due to transients during line energization.
Overcurrent Stages In the case of time inverse overcurren stages, various characteristics can be selected,
IP, 3I0P in depending on the ordering version of the device and the configuration (address 126),
Inverse-Time with IEC characteristics (address 126 Back-Up O/C = TOC IEC) the following
O/C Protection with options are available in address 2660 IEC Curve:
IEC Characteristics
Normal Inverse (inverse, type A according to IEC 60255-3),
Very Inverse (very inverse, type B according to IEC 60255-3),
Extremely Inv. (extremely inverse, type C according to IEC 60255-3), and
LongTimeInverse (longtime, type B according to IEC 60255-3).
For the setting of the current thresholds Ip> (address 2640) and 3I0p PICKUP (ad-
dress 2650) the same considerations as for the overcurrent stages of the definite time
protection (see above) apply. In this case, it must be noted that a safety margin
between the pickup threshold and the set value has already been incorporated. Pickup
only occurs at a current which is approximately 10% above the set value.
The above example shows that the maximum expected operating current may directly
be applied as setting here.
Primary: Set value IP = 630 A,
Secondary: Set value IP = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A/600 A) X 5 A.
The time multiplier setting T Ip Time Dial (address 2642) is derived from the
grading coordination plan applicable to the network. If implemented as emergency
overcurrent protection, shorter tripping times are advisable (one grading time step
above the fast tripping stage), as this function is only activated in the case of the loss
of the local measured voltage.
The time multiplier setting T 3I0p TimeDial (address 2652) can usually be set
smaller according to a separate earth fault grading plan. If only the phase currents are
to be monitored, set the pickup value of the earth fault stage to .
In addition to the current-dependent delays, a time fixed delay can be set, if necessary.
The settings T Ip Add (address 2646 for phase currents) and T 3I0p Add (address
2656 for earth currents) are in addition to the time delays resulting from the set curves.
The parameter I(3I0)p Tele/BI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays
T Ip Time Dial (address 2642), including the additional delay T Ip Add (address
2646), and T 3I0p TimeDial (address 2652), including the additional delay T
3I0p Add (address 2656), can be bypassed by the binary input >O/C InstTRIP
(No. 7110). The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all stages of the time-overcur-
rent protection. With I(3I0)p Tele/BI = YES you define that the IP stages trip
without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For I(3I0)p Tele/BI =
NO the set delays are always active.
If the IP stage, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with a
General), the parameter I(3I0)p SOTF (address 2671) is set to YES. We recom-
mend, however, not to choose the sensitive setting for the switch on to a fault function
as energizing of the line on to a fault should cause a large fault current. It is important
to avoid that the selected stage picks up due to transients during line energization.
7SA6 Manual 271

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Overcurrent Stages In the case of the inverse overcurrent stages, various characteristics can be selected,
IP, 3I0P in depending on the ordering version of the device and the configuration (address 126),
Inverse-Time With the ANSI characteristics (address 126 Back-Up O/C = TOC ANSI), the follow-
O/C Protection ing options are available at address 2661 ANSI Curve:
with ANSI
Inverse,
Characteristics
Short Inverse,
Long Inverse,
Moderately Inv.,
Very Inverse,
Extremely Inv. and
Definite Inv..
For the setting of the current thresholds Ip> (address 2640) and 3I0p PICKUP (ad-
dress 2650) the same considerations as for the overcurrent stages of the definite time
protection (see above) apply. In this case, it must be noted that a safety margin
between the pickup threshold and the set value has already been incorporated. Pickup
only occurs at a current which is approximately 10% above the set value.
The above example shows that the maximum expected operating current may directly
be applied as setting here.
Primary: Set value IP = 630 A,
Secondary: Setting value IP = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A/600 A) X 5 A.
The time multiplier setting Time Dial TD Ip (address 2643) is derived from the
grading coordination plan applicable to the network. If implemented as emergency
overcurrent protection, shorter tripping times are advisable (one grading time step
above the fast tripping stage), as this function is only activated in the case of the loss
of the local measured voltage.
The time multiplier setting TimeDial TD3I0p (address 2653) can usually be set
smaller according to a separate earth fault grading plan. If only the phase currents are
to be monitored, set the pickup value of the earth fault stage to .
In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if
necessary. The setting T Ip Add (address 2646 for phase currents) and T 3I0p
Add (address 2656 for earth currents) are in addition to the time delays resulting from
the set curves.
The parameter I(3I0)p Tele/BI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays
Time Dial TD Ip (address 2643), including the additional delay T Ip Add (ad-
dress 2646), and TimeDial TD3I0p (address 2653), including the additional delay
T 3I0p Add (address 2656), can be bypassed by the binary input >O/C
InstTRIP (No. 7110). The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all stages of the
time-overcurrent protection. With I(3I0)p Tele/BI = YES you define that the IP
stages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For I(3I0)p
Tele/BI = NO the set delays are always active.
If the IP stage, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with a
General), the parameter I(3I0)p SOTF (address 2671) is set to YES. We recom-
mend, however, not to choose the sensitive setting for the switch on to a fault function
as energizing of the line on to a fault should cause a large fault current. It is important
to avoid that the selected stage picks up due to transients during line energization.
272 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Additional Stage When using the I>>> protection the pick-up thresholds Iph> STUB (address 2630)
Iph>>> and 3I0> STUB (address 2632) are usually not critical, as this protection function is
only activated when the line isolator is open, which implies that every measured
current should represent a fault current. With a 11/2 circuit breaker arrangement, how-
ever, it is possible that large short circuit currents flow from busbar A to busbar B or to
feeder 2 via the current transformers. These currents could cause different transfor-
mation errors in the two current transformer sets IA and IB, especially in the saturation
range. The protection should therefore not be set unnecessarily sensitive. If the
minimum short circuit currents on the busbars are known, the pickup threshold Iph>
STUB is set somewhat (approx. 10 %) below the minimum two-phase short-circuit cur-
rent, 3I0> STUB is set below the minimum single-phase current. If only the phase cur-
rents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the residual current stage to .
The times T Iph STUB (address 2631) and T 3I0 STUB (address 2633) are set to
0 for this application to prevent the protection from operating while the line isolator is
closed.
If this stage is applied differently, similar considerations as for the other overcurrent
stages apply.
The parameter I-STUB Telep/BI (address 2634) defines whether the time delays
T Iph STUB (address 2631) and T 3I0 STUB (address 2633) can be bypassed by
the binary input >O/C InstTRIP. The binary input (if allocated) is applied to all
stages of the time-overcurrent protection. With I-STUB Telep/BI = YES you define
that the I>>> stages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated.
For I-STUB Telep/BI = NO the set delays are always active.
If the I>>> stage, when switching the line on to a fault, is to trip without delay or with
a short delay, SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, see above under margin heading
General), the parameter I-STUB SOTF (address 2635) is set to YES. If using the
stub protection, then set to NO as the effect of this protection function only depends on
the position of the isolator.
7SA6 Manual 273

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.11.4 Settings


2601 Operating Mode ON:with VT loss ON:with VT loss Operating mode
ON:always activ
OFF
2610 Iph>> 1A 0.10 .. 25.00 A; 2.00 A Iph>> Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 10.00 A
2611 T Iph>> 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.30 sec T Iph>> Time delay
2612 3I0>> PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.50 A 3I0>> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 2.50 A
2613 T 3I0>> 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec T 3I0>> Time delay
2614 I>> Telep/BI NO YES Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
2615 I>> SOTF NO NO Instantaneous trip after
YES SwitchOnToFault
2620 Iph> 1A 0.10 .. 25.00 A; 1.50 A Iph> Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 7.50 A
2621 T Iph> 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.50 sec T Iph> Time delay
2622 3I0> 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.20 A 3I0> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 1.00 A
2623 T 3I0> 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec T 3I0> Time delay
2624 I> Telep/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
2625 I> SOTF NO NO Instantaneous trip after
YES SwitchOnToFault
2630 Iph> STUB 1A 0.10 .. 25.00 A; 1.50 A Iph> STUB Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 7.50 A
2631 T Iph STUB 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.30 sec T Iph STUB Time delay
2632 3I0> STUB 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.20 A 3I0> STUB Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 1.00 A
2633 T 3I0 STUB 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec T 3I0 STUB Time delay
2634 I-STUB Telep/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
2635 I-STUB SOTF NO NO Instantaneous trip after
YES SwitchOnToFault
2640 Ip> 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A; A Ip> Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A; A
2642 T Ip Time Dial 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 sec T Ip Time Dial
2643 Time Dial TD Ip 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 5.00 Time Dial TD Ip
274 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

2646 T Ip Add 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec T Ip Additional Time Delay
2650 3I0p PICKUP 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A; A 3I0p Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A; A
2652 T 3I0p TimeDial 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 sec T 3I0p Time Dial
2653 TimeDial TD3I0p 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 5.00 Time Dial TD 3I0p
2656 T 3I0p Add 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec T 3I0p Additional Time
Delay
2660 IEC Curve Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
LongTimeInverse
2661 ANSI Curve Inverse Inverse ANSI Curve
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
2670 I(3I0)p Tele/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
2671 I(3I0)p SOTF NO NO Instantaneous trip after
YES SwitchOnToFault
2680 SOTF Time DELAY 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Trip time delay after SOTF
7SA6 Manual 275

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
2054 Emer. mode OUT Emergency mode
7104 >BLOCK O/C I>> SP >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I>>
7105 >BLOCK O/C I> SP >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I>
7106 >BLOCK O/C Ip SP >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ip
7110 >O/C InstTRIP SP >Backup OverCurrent InstantaneousTrip
7130 >BLOCK I-STUB SP >BLOCK I-STUB
7131 >I-STUB ENABLE SP >Enable I-STUB-Bus function
7151 O/C OFF OUT Backup O/C is switched OFF
7152 O/C BLOCK OUT Backup O/C is BLOCKED
7153 O/C ACTIVE OUT Backup O/C is ACTIVE
7161 O/C PICKUP OUT Backup O/C PICKED UP
7162 O/C Pickup L1 OUT Backup O/C PICKUP L1
7165 O/C Pickup E OUT Backup O/C PICKUP EARTH
7171 O/C PU only E OUT Backup O/C Pickup - Only EARTH
7172 O/C PU 1p. L1 OUT Backup O/C Pickup - Only L1
7173 O/C Pickup L1E OUT Backup O/C Pickup L1E
7176 O/C Pickup L12 OUT Backup O/C Pickup L12
7185 O/C PickupL123E OUT Backup O/C Pickup L123E
7191 O/C PICKUP I>> OUT Backup O/C Pickup I>>
7192 O/C PICKUP I> OUT Backup O/C Pickup I>
7193 O/C PICKUP Ip OUT Backup O/C Pickup Ip
7201 I-STUB PICKUP OUT O/C I-STUB Pickup
7211 O/C TRIP OUT Backup O/C General TRIP command
7212 O/C TRIP 1p.L1 OUT Backup O/C TRIP - Only L1
7215 O/C TRIP L123 OUT Backup O/C TRIP Phases L123
7221 O/C TRIP I>> OUT Backup O/C TRIP I>>
7222 O/C TRIP I> OUT Backup O/C TRIP I>
7223 O/C TRIP Ip OUT Backup O/C TRIP Ip
7235 I-STUB TRIP OUT O/C I-STUB TRIP
276 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.12 Instantaneous high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (SOTF)
The instantaneous high-current switch-onto-fault protection function is provided to dis-

connect immediately and without delay feeders that are switched onto a high-current
fault. It is primarily used as fast protection in the event of energizing the feeder while
the earth switch is closed, but can also be used every time the feeder is energized
in other words also following automatic reclosure (selectable).
The energization of the feeder is reported to the protection by the circuit breaker state
recognition function. This function is described in detail in Section 2.23.1.
Pickup The high-current pickup function measures each phase current and compares it with
the set value I>>> (address 2404). The currents are numerically filtered so that only
the fundamental frequency is evaluated. If the measured current is more than twice
the set value, the protection automatically reverts to the unfiltered measured values,
thereby allowing extremely fast tripping. DC current components in the fault current
and in the CT secondary circuit following the switching off of large currents virtually
have no influence on the high-current pickup operation.
The high-current switch-on-to-fault function can be phase segregated or three-phase.
In case of manual closure of the CB, it operates always in all three phases via the in-
ternal release signal SOTF O/C Release 3ph supplied by the central function control
of the protective relay, provided that the manual closure can be detected there (see
Subsection 2.23.1).
If further criteria were determined during configuration of the line energization detec-
tion (address 1134 Line Closure, refer to Section 2.1.4.1) the release signal
SOTF-O/C Release. Lx can be initiated selectively for each phase. This only applies
to devices that can trip single-pole, and is important in conjunction with single-pole au-
tomatic reclosure.
Tripping is always three-pole. The phase selectivity only applies to the pick-up due to
the coupling of the high current criterion with the circuit breaker pole which is closed.
In order to generate as quickly as possible a trip command after an energization, the
fast switch-on-to-fault protection is released selectively for each phase already when
the line is open.
The following figure shows the logic diagram.
7SA6 Manual 277

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-123 Logic diagram of the high current switch on to fault protection
Requirement A prerequisite for the operation of the switch-onto-fault protection is that in address
124 SOTF Overcurr. = Enabled was set during the configuration of the device
scope of functions. At address 2401 FCT SOTF-O/C it can also be switched ON or
OFF.
Pickup Threshold The magnitude of the current which causes pick-up of the switch onto fault function is
set as I>>> in address 2404. The setting value should be selected large enough to
ensure that the protection under no circumstances picks up due to an overload condi-
tion or due to a current increase resulting from e.g. an automatic reclosure dead time
on a parallel feeder. It is recommended to set at least 2.5 times the rated current of the
feeder.
278 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.12.3 Settings


2401 FCT SOTF-O/C ON ON Inst. High Speed SOTF-
OFF O/C is
2404 I>>> 1A 0.10 .. 25.00 A 2.50 A I>>> Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 125.00 A 12.50 A

formation
4253 >BLOCK SOTF-O/C SP >BLOCK Instantaneous SOTF Overcurrent
4271 SOTF-O/C OFF OUT SOTF-O/C is switched OFF
4272 SOTF-O/C BLOCK OUT SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED
4273 SOTF-O/C ACTIVE OUT SOTF-O/C is ACTIVE
4281 SOTF-O/C PICKUP OUT SOTF-O/C PICKED UP
4282 SOF O/CpickupL1 OUT SOTF-O/C Pickup L1
4295 SOF O/CtripL123 OUT SOTF-O/C TRIP command L123
7SA6 Manual 279

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.13 Earth fault detection in non-earthed systems (optional)
The earth fault detection function can be applied in power systems whose starpoint is
not earthed or earthed through an arc suppression coil (Petersen coil).
General Single-phase earth faults are not detected by the earth fault protection since no fault
current flows. Furthermore, since network operation is not immediately affected by an
earth fault (the voltage triangle is maintained, Figure 2-124) rapid disconnection is
usually not desired. It is more important that the earth fault is recognized, indicated
and, when possible, localized also. After having performed changes in the system it
can finally be cleared. But 7SA6 enables the user to trip on directional earth fault in
non-earthed systems.
Figure 2-124 Earth fault in non-earthed neutral network
Dependent upon the chosen model, the 7SA6 distance protection relay can be fitted
with optional earth fault detection module, which includes the following functions:
Detection of an earth fault (pick-up) by monitoring the displacement voltage,
Determination of the faulted phase by measuring the phase to earth voltages,
Determination of the direction of the earth fault (residual) current by high accuracy
real and reactive component measurement.
Pickup The pickup is achieved when the settable threshold for the displacement voltage 3U0
is exceeded. To ensure measurement of stable values, all earth fault detection func-
tions are delayed until 1 second (settable) after inception of voltage displacement. Fur-
thermore, each alteration of the earth fault conditions (e.g. altered direction) is recog-
nized only after this delay. Generally the pickup is only indicated if a fault was detected
for sure by the phase determination function (see next margin heading).
Determination of After recognition of displaced voltage conditions the first objective of the device is se-
Grounded Phase lective detection of the earth-faulted phase. To do this, the individual phase-to-earth
voltages are measured. If the voltage magnitude for any given phase is below the
setting value Umin that phase is detected as the earth faulted phase as long as the re-
maining phase-earth voltages are simultaneously above the setting value Umax.
280 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Sensitive Earth The direction of the earth fault can be determined from the direction of the earth fault
Fault Directional current in relation to the displacement voltage. The only restriction is that the active or
Determination reactive current components must be available with sufficient magnitude at the point
of measurement.
In networks with isolated starpoint, the earth fault current flows as capacitive current
from the healthy lines via the measuring point to the point of fault. For the determina-
tion of the direction the capacitive reactive power is most relevant.
In networks with arc suppression coils, the Petersen coil superimposes a correspond-
ing inductive current on the capacitive earth fault current when an earth fault occurs,
so that the capacitive current at the point of fault is compensated. Depending on the
measuring point in the system the resultant measured current may be inductive or ca-
pacitive. Therefore, the reactive current is not suitable for direction determination of
the earth current. In this case, only the ohmic (active) residual current which results
from the losses of the Petersen coil can be used for directional determination. This
earth fault residual current is only about some per cent of the capacitive earth fault cur-
rent.
Following the phase determination the earth fault direction is determined from a highly
accurate calculation of active and reactive power. The following definitions are used
for this purpose:
where T equals period of integration.

The use of an efficient calculation algorithm and simultaneous numerical filtering
allows the directional determination to be achieved with high accuracy and sharply
defined threshold limits (see Figure 2-125) and insensitivity to harmonic influences
particularly the third and fifth harmonics which are often large in earth fault currents.
The directional decision results from the signs of active and reactive power.
Figure 2-125 Measurement characteristic of the sensitive direction determination for earth
fault in a resonant-earthed system
7SA6 Manual 281

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Since the active and reactive component of the current not the power determine
the earth fault directional decision, these current components are calculated from the
power components. Thus for determination of the direction of the earth fault, active
and reactive components of the earth fault current as well as the direction of the active
and reactive power are evaluated.
In networks with isolated starpoint the following criteria apply:
Earth fault (forward direction), if QE > 0 and IEr > setting value,
Earth fault (reverse direction), if QE < 0 and IEr > setting value.
In resonant-earthed networks (with arc suppression coil) the following criteria
apply:
Earth fault (forward direction), if PE > 0 and IEa > setting value,
Earth fault (reverse direction), if PE < 0 and IEa > setting value,
In the latter case it must be noted that, dependent upon the location of the protective
relay, a considerable reactive component may be superimposed which, in the most
unfavourable cases, can attain up to 50 times the active component. The accuracy of
the calculation algorithm which is extremely high is not sufficient if the transformer is
not able to transmit the primary values exactly.
The measurement input circuit of the relay version with earth fault detection is partic-
ularly designed for this purpose and permits an extremely high sensitivity for the direc-
tional determination of the wattmetric residual current. To be able to use this sensitivity,
we recommend toroidal current transformers for earth fault detection in resonant
earthed systems. Furthermore, the angle error of the toroidal current transformer can
be compensated in the 7SA6. Since the angle error is non-linear, this is done by en-
tering two operating points of the angle error curve of the transformer. The device then
calculates the error curve with the accuracy needed.
Earth Fault In radial systems, locating the earth faults is relatively simple. Since all feeders from a
Location common bus (Figure 2-126) deliver a capacitive charging current, nearly the total earth
fault current of the system is available at the measuring point of the faulty line in the
earthed system. In the non-earthed system it is the residual wattmetric current of the
Petersen coil that flows via the measuring point. For the faulted line or cable, a definite
forward decision will result, whilst in the remaining circuits a reverse indication will
be given unless the earth current is so small that no measurement can be taken. Def-
initely the faulty line can be determined clearly.
282 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-126 Earth fault location in a radial network
In meshed or ring networks the measuring points at the ends of the faulted cable also
see a maximum of earth fault (capacitive or ohmic) current. Only in this cable will the
direction forwards be indicated on both line ends (Figure 2-127). However, also the
rest of the direction indications in the system may be useful for earth fault detection.
Some indications may not be output when earth current is too low. Further advice can
be found in the leaflet Earth fault detection in isolated neutral or arc-suppression coil
earthed high voltage systems.
Figure 2-127 Faulted line location in meshed networks using directional indications
7SA6 Manual 283

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
General This section applies only to relay models with earth fault detection module and only
when these are used in networks with isolated or compensated starpoint. In other
cases, this section can be passed over.
Earth fault detection is only possible if the function Sens. Earth Flt (address 130)
was set to Enabled during configuration). If the device is equipped with earth fault de-
tector but supposed to operate in an earthed network, address 130 Sens. Earth
Flt must be set to Disabled!
The earth fault detection can be switched ON: with Trip, turned OFF or set
to Alarm Only at address 3001 Sens. Earth Flt. In the latter case (default set-
ting) the device announces detected earth faults, identifies the faulty phases and the
earth fault direction according to the other settings.
If the earth fault detection is switched ON: with Trip it also issues a trip command.
In this case no earth fault protocol is generated, but a trip log that registers all informa-
tion about the earth fault and the earth fault tripping. The tripping can be delayed via
address 3007 T 3U0>.
Voltage Stages The displacement voltage is the pickup threshold of the earth fault detection and is set
in address 3002 3U0>.
If the displacement voltage Uen of the voltage transformer set is directly connected to
the fourth voltage measuring input U4 of the device and if this was predefined during
the configuration, the device will use this voltage, multiplied by the factor Uph /
Udelta (address 211). For the usual transformation of the voltage transformer with
enwinding
the factor is set to 1.73 (3) (see also Subsection 2.1.2.1, margin heading Voltage
Transformer Connection). In case of a complete displacement of a healthy voltage tri-
angle the displacement voltage has a value that is 3 times the phase-to-phase volt-
age.
If no displacement voltage is connected to the device, the device calculates the mon-
itored voltage from the total of the voltages:
3U0 = |UL1 + UL2 + UL3|.
In case of a complete displacement of a healthy voltage triangle the displacement
voltage also has a value that is 3 times the phase-to-phase voltage.
Since, in case of earth faults in isolated or resonant-earthed systems, the complete
displacement voltage emerges, the setting value is uncritical; it should approx. be
between 25 % to 50% of the displacement voltage: for UN = 100 V therefore between
50 V and 90 V.
The earth fault is detected and reported only when the displacement voltage has
applied for at least the time T Sens.E/F (address 3006). This stabilizing period is
also enabled if earth fault conditions change (e.g. change of direction).
If tripping is also required for earth faults (address 3001 Sens. Earth Flt = ON:
with Trip), a delay time can be set in address 3007 T 3U0>.
284 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
For phase determination Uph-e min (address 3003) is the criterion for the earth-
faulted phase, when simultaneously the other two phase voltages have exceeded
Uph-e max (address 3004). The setting Uph-e min must be set less than the
minimum allowable phase-to-earth voltage. This setting is neither critical, 40 V (default
setting) should always be correct. Uph-e max must be greater than the maximum al-
lowable phase-to-earth voltage, but less than the minimum allowable phase-to-phase
voltage. For UN = 100 V that is for example at 75 V (default setting). The definite de-
tection of the faulted phase is a further prerequisite for alarming an earth fault.
Determination of The following is valid for determination of direction during earth faults: Pickup current
Direction 3I0> (address 3005) must be set as high as possible to avoid a false pickup of the
device provoked by asymmetrical currents in the system and by current transformers
(especially in a Holmgreen-connection). Dependent upon the treatment of the network
starpoint, the magnitude of the capacitive earth fault current (for isolated networks) or
the wattmetric residual current (for compensated networks) is decisive.
In isolated networks an earth fault in a cable will allow the total capacitive earth fault
currents of the entire electrically connected network, with the exception of the faulted
cable itself, to flow through the measuring point. It is normal to use half the value of
this earth fault current as the threshold value.
Example: A 25 kV bus-bar feeds seven cable circuits. Each circuit has a current trans-
former set 300 A/1 A. The earth fault current is 2.5 A/km. The following applies for the
cables circuits:
Cable 1 3 km 7.5 A
Cable 2 5 km 12.5 A
Cable 3 2.6 km 6.5 A
Cable 4 5 km 12.5 A
Total 25.0 km 62.5 A
With an earth fault in cable 2, 62.5 A 12.5 A = 50 A earth fault current will flow through
the measuring point, since 12.5 A flows directly from cable 2 into the fault. Since that
cable is amongst the longest, this is the most unfavourable case (smallest earth fault
current flows through the measuring point). On the secondary side, flows:
50 A/300 = 0.167 A.
The relay should be set at approximately half this value for example 3I0> = 0.080 A.
In resonant-earthed networks directional determination is made more difficult since
a much larger reactive current (capacitive or inductive) is superimposed on the critical
wattmetric (active) current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and the
position of the arc-suppression coil, the total earth current supplied to the device may
vary considerably in its values concerning magnitude and phase angle. The relay,
however, must evaluate only the active component of the earth fault current, the earth
fault residual current, that is IEcos. This demands extremely high accuracy, particu-
larly with regard to phase angle measurement of all the instrument transformers. Also,
the relay should not be set unnecessarily sensitive. When applying this function in res-
onant-earthed systems, a reliable direction determination can only be achieved when
connecting cable core balance current transformers. Here also, use the rule of thumb:
setting at half the expected measured current, whereby only the residual wattmetric
current is applicable. Residual wattmetric current predominantly derives from losses
of the Petersen coil.
7SA6 Manual 285

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Example: The same network, as in the previous example, is considered to be compen-

sated by a Petersen coil. The coil is matched to the total network. The compensation
current is thus 62.5 A. The losses should be 4 %. For earth fault directional determi-
nation, core balance current transformers 60 A/1 A are fitted.
Since the residual wattmetric current is derived principally from the coil losses, it is,
independent of earth fault location, approximately the same:
4 % of 62.5 A = 2.5 A or secondary
2.5 A/60 A = 0.042 A.
As setting value 3I0> = 0.020A is selected.
If the earth fault protection is also to trip (address 3001 Sens. Earth Flt = ON:
with Trip), set in address 3008 TRIP Direction, if for earth faults the signal is
tripped Forward (normally in line direction), Reverse (normally in direction of
busbar) or Non-Directional. This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at
Angle Error The high reactive current component in resonant-earthed networks and the unavoid-
Compensation able air gap of the core balance type current transformers require a phase angle com-
pensation of the current transformer. This is possible with addresses 3010 to 3013.
For the actual connected burden the maximum angle phase displacementCT Err.
F1 (address 3011) of the CT with its associated current CT Err. I1 (address 3010)
as well as a further CT operating point CT Err. F2/CT Err. I2 (address 3013 and
3012), above which the angle displacement remains practically constant (see Figure
2-128). The device thus approximates the transformation curve of the transformer with
considerable accuracy. In isolated systems angle compensation is not required.
Figure 2-128 Parameters for the phase angle correction
286 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.13.3 Settings
ditional Settings.

3001 Sens. Earth Flt Alarm Only Alarm Only Sensitive Earth Flt.(comp/ isol.
ON: with Trip starp.)
OFF
3002 3U0> 1 .. 150 V 50 V 3U0> pickup
3003 Uph-e min 10 .. 100 V 40 V Uph-e min of faulted phase
3004 Uph-e max 10 .. 100 V 75 V Uph-e max of healthy phases
3005 3I0> 0.003 .. 1.000 A 0.050 A 3I0> Release directional element
3006 T Sens.E/F 0.00 .. 320.00 sec 1.00 sec Time delay for sens. E/F detection
3007 T 3U0> 0.00 .. 320.00 sec 0.00 sec Time delay for sens. E/F trip
3008A TRIP Direction Forward Forward Direction for sens. E/F trip
Reverse
Non-Directional
3010 CT Err. I1 0.003 .. 1.600 A 0.050 A Current I1 for CT Angle Error
3011 CT Err. F1 0.0 .. 5.0 0.0 CT Angle Error at I1
3012 CT Err. I2 0.003 .. 1.600 A 1.000 A Current I2 for CT Angle Error
3013 CT Err. F2 0.0 .. 5.0 0.0 CT Angle Error at I2

formation
1219 3I0senA= VI Active 3I0sen (sensitive Ie) =
1220 3I0senR= VI Reactive 3I0sen (sensitive Ie) =
1251 >SensEF on SP >Switch on sensitive E/F detection
1252 >SensEF off SP >Switch off sensitive E/F detection
1253 >SensEF block SP >Block sensitive E/F detection
1260 SensEF on/offBI IntSP Sensitve E/F detection ON/OFF via BI
1261 SensEF OFF OUT Sensitve E/F detection is switched OFF
1262 SensEF BLOCK OUT Sensitve E/F detection is BLOCKED
1263 SensEF ACTIVE OUT Sensitve E/F detection is ACTIVE
1271 SensEF Pickup OUT Sensitve E/F detection picked up
1272 SensEF Phase L1 OUT Sensitve E/F detection Phase L1
1276 SensEF Forward OUT Sensitve E/F detection Forward
1277 SensEF Reverse OUT Sensitve E/F detection Reverse
1278 SensEF undefDir OUT Sensitve E/F detection Undef. Direction
1281 SensEF TRIP OUT Sensitve E/F detection TRIP command
1291 SensEF 3U0> OUT Sensitve E/F detection 3U0> pickup
7SA6 Manual 287

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.14 Automatic reclosure function (optional)
Experience shows that about 85% of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished
automatically after being tripped by the protection. The line can therefore be re-ener-
gised. Reclosure is performed by an automatic reclose function (AR).
Automatic reclosure is only permitted on overhead lines because the option of auto-
matic extinguishing of a fault arc only exists there. It should not be used in any other
case. If the protected object consists of a mixture of overhead lines and other equip-
ment (e.g. overhead line directly connected to a transformer or overhead line/cable),
it must be ensured that reclosure can only be performed in the event of a fault on the
overhead line.
If the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually, a single-phase auto-reclosure
is usually initiated for single-phase faults and a three-pole auto-reclosure for multiple-
phase faults in the network with earthed system starpoint. If the short-circuit is still
present after reclosure (arc not extinguished or metallic short-circuit), the protection
issues a final trip. Several reclosure attempts are made in some networks.
In a model with single-pole tripping, the 7SA6 allows phase-selective, single-pole trip-
ping. A single and three-pole, single and multiple shot automatic reclosure function is
integrated, depending on the ordered version.
The 7SA6 can also operate in conjunction with an external automatic reclosure device.
In this case, the signal exchange between 7SA6 and the external reclosure device
must be effected via binary inputs and outputs.
It is also possible to initiate the integrated auto reclose function by an external protec-
tion device (e.g. a backup protection). The use of two 7SA6 with automatic reclosure
function or the use of one 7SA6 with an automatic reclosure function and a second
protection with its own automatic reclosure function is also possible.
288 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Reclosure is performed by an automatic reclosure circuit (ARC). An example of the

normal time sequence of a double reclosure is shown in the figure below.
Figure 2-129 Timing diagram of a double-shot reclosure with action time (2nd reclosure successful)
The integrated automatic reclosure circuit allows up to 8 reclosure attempts. The first
four interrupt cycles may operate with different parameters (action and dead times,
single/three-pole). The parameters of the fourth cycle also apply for the fifth cycle and
onwards.
Selectivity before In order for the automatic reclosure to be successful, all faults on the entire overhead
Reclosure line must be cleared at all line ends simultaneously as fast as possible.
In the distance protection, for example, the overreach zone Z1B may be released
before the first reclosure. This implies that faults up to the zone reach limit of Z1B are
tripped without delay for the first cycle (Figure 2-130). A limited unselectivity in favour
of fast simultaneous tripping is accepted here because a reclosure will be performed
in any case. The normal stages of the distance protection (Z1, Z2, etc.) and the normal
grading of the other short-circuit functions are independent of the automatic reclosure
function.
7SA6 Manual 289

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-130 Reach control before first reclosure, using distance protection
If the distance protection is operated with one of the signal transmission methods de-
scribed in Section 2.6 the signal transmission logic controls the overreaching zone, i.e.
it determines whether a non-delayed trip (or delayed with T1B) is permitted in the
event of faults in the overreaching zone (i.e. up to the reach limit of zone Z1B) at both
line ends simultaneously. Whether the automatic reclosure device is ready for reclo-
sure or not is irrelevant, because the teleprotection function ensures the selectivity
over 100% of the line length and fast, simultaneous tripping. The same applies for the
earth fault-direction comparison protection (Section 2.8).
If, however, the signal transmission is switched off or the transmission path is dis-
turbed, the internal automatic reclosure circuit can determine whether the overreach-
ing zone (Z1B in the distance protection) is released for fast tripping. If no reclosure is
expected (e.g. circuit breaker not ready) the normal grading of the distance protection
(i.e. fast tripping only for faults in zone Z1) must apply to retain selectivity.
Fast tripping before reclosure is also possible with multiple reclosures. Appropriate
links between the output signals (e.g. 2nd reclosure ready: AR 2.CycZoneRel)
and the inputs for enabling/releasing non-delayed tripping of the protection functions
can be established via the binary inputs and outputs or the integrated user-definable
logic functions (CFC).
Mixed Lines In the distance protection, it is possible to use the distance zone signals to distinguish
Overhead Line/ between cable and overhead line faults to a certain extent. The automatic reclosure
Cable circuit can then be blocked by appropriate signals generated by means of the user-
programmable logic functions (CFC) if there is a fault in the cable section.
290 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Initiation Initiation of the automatic reclosure means storing the first trip signal of a power
system fault that was generated by a protection function which operates with the au-
tomatic reclosure function. In case of multiple reclosure, initiation therefore only takes
place once, with the first trip command. This storing of the first trip signal is necessary
for the correct functionality of the auto reclose function.
Starting is important when the first trip command has not appeared before expiry of an
action time (see below under Action times).
Automatic reclosure is not started if the circuit breaker has not been ready for at least
one OPEN-CLOSE-OPENcycle at the instant of the first trip command. This can be
achieved by setting parameters. For further information, please refer to Interrogation
of Circuit Breaker Ready State.
Each short-circuit protection function can be parameterized as to whether it should
operate with the automatic reclose function or not, i.e. whether it should start the
reclose function or not. The same goes for external trip commands applied via binary
input and/or the trip commands generated by the teleprotection via permissive or in-
tertrip signals.
Those protection and monitoring functions in the device which do not respond to short-
circuits or similar conditions (e.g. an overload protection) do not initiate the automatic
reclosure function because a reclosure will be of no use here. The breaker failure pro-
tection must not start the auto-reclosure either.
Action Times It is often desirable to remove the ready-for-reclosure-state if the short-circuit condition
was sustained for a certain time, e.g. because it is assumed that the arc has burned
in to such an extent that there is no longer any chance of automatic arc extinction
during the reclose dead time. Also for reasons of selectivity (see above), faults that are
usually cleared after a time delay should not lead to reclosure. It is therefore recom-
mended to use action times in conjunction with the distance protection.
The automatic reclosure function of the 7SA6 can be operated with or without action
times (configuration parameter AR control mode, address 134, see Section
2.1.1.2). No starting signal is necessary from the protection functions or external pro-
tection devices that operate without action time. Initiation takes place as soon as the
first trip command appears.
When operating with action time, an action time is available for each reclose cycle.
The action times are always started by the general starting signal (with logic OR com-
bination of all internal and external protection functions which can start the automatic
reclose function). If no trip command is present before the action time expires, the cor-
responding reclosure cycle is not carried out.
For each reclosure cycle, you may set whether or not it allows the initiation. Following
the first general pickup, only the action times of those cycles that are set such that they
may start off the recloser are considered since the other cycles are not allowed to be
the first cycle under any circumstances. By means of the action times and the permis-
sion to start the recloser (permission to be the first cycle that is executed) it is possible
to determine which reclose cycles are executed depending on the time used by the
protection function to trip.
Example 1: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is allowed for at least the
first cycle. The action times are set as follows:
1st Reclosure: T Action = 0.2 s;
2nd Reclosure: T Action = 0.8 s;
3rd Reclosure: T Action = 1.2 s;
7SA6 Manual 291

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Since reclosure is ready before the fault occurs, the first trip of a time overcurrent pro-
tection following a fault is fast, i.e. before the end of any action time. The automatic
reclosure function is therefore started (the first cycle is initiated). After unsuccessful
reclosure the 2nd cycle would then become active; but the time overcurrent protection
would not trip in this example until after 1s according to its grading time. Since the
action time for the second cycle was exceeded here, it is blocked. The 3rd cycle with
its parameters is therefore carried out now. If the trip command only appeared more
than 1.2s after the 1st reclosure, there would have been no further reclosure.
Example 2: 3 cycles are set. Starting is only allowed for the first. The action times are
set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the
action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at this time, this cannot start the au-
tomatic reclose function. As the 2nd and 3rd cycles are not permitted to start the
reclose function they will also not be initiated. Therefore no reclosure takes place as
no starting took place.
Example 3: 3 cycles are set. At least the first two cycles are set such that they can start
the recloser. The action times are set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes
place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at
this time, it cannot start the automatic reclosure function, but the 2nd cycle, for which
initiating is allowed, is activated immediately. This 2nd cycle therefore starts the auto-
matic reclosure circuit, the 1st cycle is practically skipped.
Control Mode of The dead times these are the times from elimination of the fault (dropout of the trip
the Automatic command or signalling via auxiliary contacts) to the initiation of the automatic close
Reclosure command may vary, depending on the automatic reclosure control mode selected
when determining the functional scope and the resulting signals of the starting protec-
tive functions.
In control mode TRIP ... (With TRIP command...) single-pole or single/three-pole
reclose cycles are possible if the device and the circuit breaker are suitable. In this
case, different dead times (for every AR-cycle) are possible after single-pole tripping
and after three-pole tripping. The tripping protection function determines the type of
tripping: single-pole or three-pole. The dead time is controlled dependent on this.
In control mode PICKUP ...(With PICKUP...) different dead times can be set for
every reclosure cycle after single-phase, two-phase and three-phase faults. Selection
of the dead time in this case depends on the type of fault determined by the initiating
protective function at the instant that the trip command resets. This operating mode
allows the dead times to be dependent on the type of fault in the case of three-pole
reclose cycles.
ReclosureBlocking Different conditions lead to blocking of the automatic reclosure. No reclosure is possi-
ble, for example, if it is blocked via a binary input. If the automatic reclosure has not
yet been started, it cannot be started at all. If a reclosure cycle is already in progress,
dynamic blocking takes place (see below).
Each individual cycle may also be blocked via binary input. In this case the cycle con-
cerned is declared as invalid and will be skipped in the sequence of permissible
cycles. If blocking takes place while the cycle concerned is already running, this leads
to aborting of the reclosure, i.e. no reclosure takes place even if other valid cycles
have been parameterized.
Internal blocking signals, with a limited duration, arise during the course of the reclose
cycles:
292 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The reclaim time T-RECLAIM (address 3403) is started with each automatic reclosure
command. The only exception is the ADT mode where the reclaim time can be dis-
abled by setting it to 0 s. If the reclosure is successful, all the functions of the automatic
reclosure return to the idle state at the end of the reclaim time; a fault after expiry of
the reclaim time is treated as a new power system fault. If the reclaim time is disabled
in ADT mode, each new trip after reclosing is considered as a new fault. If one of the
protection functions causes another trip during the reclaim time, the next reclosure
cycle will be started if repeated reclosure has been set. If no more reclosure attempts
are permitted, the last reclosure is regarded as unsuccessful in case of another trip
during the reclaim time. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically.
The dynamic lock-out locks the reclosure for the duration of the dynamic lock-out time
(0.5 s). This occurs, for example, after a final tripping or other events which block the
auto reclose function after it has been started. Restarting is locked out for this time.
When this time expires, the automatic reclosure function returns to its quiescent state
and is ready for a new fault in the network.
If the circuit breaker is closed manually (by the control discrepancy switch connected
to a binary input, the local control functions or via one of the serial interfaces), the au-
tomatic reclosure is blocked for a manual-close-blocking time T-BLOCK MC, address
3404. If a trip command occurs during this time, it can be assumed that a metallic
short-circuit is present (e.g. closed earth switch). Every trip command within this time
is therefore final. With the user definable logic functions (CFC) further control functions
can be processed in the same way as a manualclose command.
Interrogation of the A precondition for automatic reclosure following clearance of a short-circuit is that the
Circuit Breaker circuit breaker is ready for at least one OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN-cycle when the automat-
Ready State ic reclosure circuit is started (i.e. at the time of the first trip command). The readiness
of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device via the binary input >CB1 Ready
(No. 371). If no such signal is available, the circuit-breaker interrogation can be sup-
pressed (presetting of address 3402) as automatic reclosure would otherwise not be
possible at all.
In the event of a single cycle reclosure this interrogation is usually sufficient. Since, for
example, the air pressure or the spring tension for the circuit breaker mechanism
drops after the trip, no further interrogation should take place.
Especially when multiple reclosing attempts are programmed, it is recommended to
monitor the circuit breaker condition not only prior to the first, but also before each fol-
lowing reclosing attempt. Reclosure will be blocked until the binary input indicates that
the circuit breaker is ready to complete another CLOSE-TRIP cycle.
The time needed by the circuit breaker to regain the ready state can be monitored by
the 7SA6. This monitoring time CB TIME OUT (address 3409) starts as soon as the
CB indicates the not ready state. The dead time may be extended if the ready state is
not indicated when it expires. However, if the circuit breaker does not indicate its ready
status for a longer period than the monitoring time, reclosure is dynamically blocked
(see also above under margin heading Reclosure Blocking).
7SA6 Manual 293

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Processing the If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, the reaction of the
Circuit Breaker circuit breaker is also checked for plausibility.
Auxiliary Contacts
In the case of single-pole tripping this applies to each individual breaker pole. This
assumes that the auxiliary contacts are connected to the appropriate binary inputs for
each pole (>CB1 Pole L1, No. 366; >CB1 Pole L2, No. 367; >CB1 Pole
L3, No. 368).
If, instead of the individual pole auxiliary contacts, the series connections of the nor-
mally open and normally closed contacts are used, the CB is assumed to have all
three poles open when the series connection of the normally closed contacts is closed
(binary input >CB1 3p Open, No.411). All three poles are assumed closed when
the series connection of the normally open contacts is closed (binary input >CB1 3p
Closed, No. 410). If none of these input messages is active, it is assumed that the
breaker is open at one pole (even if this condition also exists theoretically when two
poles are open).
The device continuously checks the switching state of the circuit breaker: as long as
the auxiliary contacts indicate that the CB is not closed (three-pole), the automatic re-
closure function cannot be started. This guarantees that a close command can only
be issued if the CB previously tripped (out of the closed state).
The valid dead time begins when the trip command disappears or signals taken from
the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that the CB (pole) has opened.
If the CB opens three-pole after a single-pole trip command, this is considered as a
three-pole tripping. If three-pole reclosure cycles are allowed, the dead time for three-
pole tripping becomes active in the control mode with trip command (see margin
heading Control Mode of the Automatic Reclosure); in control by pickup, the pickup
configuration of the starting protective function(s) is still decisive. If three-pole cycles
are not allowed, the reclosure is locked out dynamically. The trip command is final.
The latter also applies if the CB trips two poles following a single-pole trip command.
The device can only detect this if the auxiliary contacts of each pole are connected in-
dividually. The device immediately initiates three pole coupling thus resulting in a
three-pole trip command.
If the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that at least one further pole has opened during
the dead time following a single-pole trip, a three-pole reclose cycle is initiated with the
dead time for three-pole reclosure if this is allowed. If the auxiliary contacts are con-
nected for each pole individually, the device can detect a two-pole open CB. In this
case the device immediately sends a three-pole trip command provided the forced
three-pole trip is activated (see Section 2.14.2 at margin heading Forced three-pole
Trip).
294 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Sequence of a If the automatic reclosure function is ready, the fault protection trips three-pole for all
Three-pole faults inside the stage selected for reclosure. The auto reclose function is then started.
Interrupt Cycle When the trip command resets or the circuit breaker opens (auxiliary contact criterion)
an (adjustable) dead time starts. At the end of this dead time, the circuit breaker re-
ceives a close command. At the same time, the (adjustable) blocking time is started.
If during configuration of the protection function address 134 AR control mode =
with Pickup ... was set, different dead times can be parameterised depending
on the type of protection pickup.
If the fault is cleared (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all functions
return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared.
If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protec-
tion initiates a final trip following a protection stage active without reclosure. Any fault
during the reclaim time leads to a final trip.
After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping) the automatic reclosure is blocked dynam-
ically (see also margin heading Reclose Block, above).
The sequence above applies for single reclosure cycles. In 7SA6 multiple reclosure
(up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below).
Sequence of a Single-pole reclose cycles are only possible with the appropriate device version and if
Single-Pole this was selected during the configuration of the protection functions (address 110
Reclose Cycle Trip mode, see also Section 2.1.1.2). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be suit-
able for single-pole tripping.
If the automatic reclosure function is ready, the short-circuit protection trips single pole
for all single-phase faults inside the stage selected for reclosure. Under the general
settings (address 1156 Trip2phFlt, see also Section 2.1.4.1) it can also be select-
ed that single-pole tripping takes place for two-phase faults without earth. Single-pole
tripping is of course only possible with short-circuit protection functions that can deter-
mine the faulty phase.
If only single-pole reclosure is selected, then the fault protection issues a final three-
pole trip with the stage that is valid/selected without reclosure. Any three-pole trip is
final. The automatic reclose function is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading
Reclosure Block, above).
The automatic reclosure function is started following a single-pole trip. The (adjust-
able) dead time for the single-pole reclose cycles starts with reset of the trip command
or opening of the circuit breaker pole (auxiliary contact criterion). After expiry of the
dead time, the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time, the (ad-
justable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time fol-
lowing a single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option
(forced three-pole coupling).
If the fault is not cleared (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection issues a
final trip with the protection stage that is valid/selected without reclosure. All faults
during the reclaim time also lead to the issue of a final three-pole trip.
After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping) the automatic reclosure is blocked dynam-
ically (see also margin heading Reclose Block, above).
7SA6 Manual 295

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Sequence of a This operating mode is only possible with the appropriate device version and if this
Single and was selected during configuration of the protection functions (address 110, see also
Three-pole Section 2.1.1.2). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be suitable for single-pole
Interrupt Cycle tripping.
If the automatic reclosure function is ready, the short-circuit protection trips single-
pole for single-phase faults and three-pole for multi-phase faults. Under the general
settings (address 1156 Trip2phFlt, see also Section 2.1.4.1) it can also be select-
ed that single-pole tripping takes place for two-phase faults without earth. Single-pole
tripping is of course only possible with short-circuit protection functions that can deter-
mine the faulty phase. The valid protection stage selected for reclosure ready state
applies for all fault types.
The automatic reclosure function is started in the event of a trip. Depending on the
type of fault, the (adjustable) dead time for the single-pole reclose cycle or the (sepa-
rately adjustable) dead time for the three-pole reclose cycle starts following the reset
of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole). After expiry of the dead
time, the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time, the (adjustable)
reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time following a
single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option (forced
three-pole coupling).
If the fault is not cleared (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection initiates
a final three-pole trip with the protection stage that is valid/selected when reclosure is
not ready. All faults during the reclaim time also lead to the issue of a final three-pole
trip.
After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is blocked dy-
namically (see also margin heading Reclose Block, above).
Multiple Reclosure If a short-circuit still exists after a reclosure attempt, further reclosure attempts can be
made. Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the automatic reclosure function
integrated in the 7SA6.
The first four reclosure cycles are independent of each other. Each one has separate
action and dead times, can operate single-or three-pole and can be blocked separate-
ly via binary inputs. The parameters and intervention possibilities of the fourth cycle
also apply to the fifth cycle and onwards.
The sequence is the same in principle as in the different reclosure programs described
above. However, if the first reclosure attempt was unsuccessful, the reclosure function
is not blocked, but instead the next reclose cycle is started. The appropriate dead time
starts with the reset of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole) (aux-
iliary contact criterion). The circuit breaker receives a new close command after expiry
of the dead time. At the same time the reclaim time is started.
Until the set maximum number of permissible auto-reclose cycles has been reached,
the reclaim time is reset with every new trip command after reclosure and started
again with the next close command.
296 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
If one of the reclosing attempts is successful, i.e. the fault disappeared after reclosure,
the blocking time expires and the automatic reclosing system is reset. The fault is
cleared.
If none of the cycles is successful, the short-circuit protection initiates a final three-pole
trip after the last permissible reclosure, following a protection stage active without
auto-reclosure. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also margin
heading Reclose Block, above).
Handling Evolving When single-pole and single-and three-pole reclose cycles are executed in the net-
Faults work, particular attention must be paid to sequential faults.
Sequential faults are faults which occur during the dead time after clearance of the first
fault.
There are various ways of handling sequential faults in the 7SA6 depending on the re-
quirements of the network:
For the Detection of an evolving fault you can select whether the trip command of a
protective function during the dead time or every further pickup is the criterion for an
evolving fault.
There are also various selectable possibilities for the response of the internal auto-
reclose function to a detected evolving fault.
EV. FLT. MODE blocks AR:
The reclosure is blocked as soon as an evolving fault is detected. Tripping as a
result of the sequential fault is three-pole. This applies irrespective of whether three-
pole cycles are permitted or not. There are no further reclosure attempts; the auto-
reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also margin heading Reclose Block,
above).
EV. FLT. MODE starts 3p AR:
As soon as a sequential fault is detected the recloser switches over to a three-pole
reclose cycle. All trip commands are now three-pole. The separately settable dead
time for sequential faults starts with the clearance of the sequential fault; after the
dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. The further sequence is
the same as for single and three-pole cycles.
The complete dead time in this case consists of the portion of the single-pole dead
time up to clearance of the sequential fault plus the dead time for the sequential
fault. This makes sense because the duration of the three-pole dead time is most
important for the stability of the network.
If reclosure is blocked due to a sequential fault without the protection issuing a three-
pole trip command (e.g. for sequential fault detection with starting), the device can
send a three-pole trip command so that the circuit breaker does not remain open with
one pole (forced three-pole coupling).
Dead Line Check If the voltage of a disconnected phase does not disappear following a trip, reclosure
(DLC) can be prevented. A prerequisite for this function is that the voltage transformers are
connected on the line side of the circuit breaker. To select this function the dead line
check must be activated. The automatic reclosure function then checks the discon-
nected line for no-voltage: the line must have been without voltage for at least an ad-
equate measuring time during the dead time. If this was not the case, the reclosure is
blocked dynamically.
This no-voltage check on the line is of advantage if a small generator (e.g. wind gen-
erator) is connected along the line.
7SA6 Manual 297

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Reduced If automatic reclosure is performed in connection with time-graded protection, non-se-

Dead Time (RDT) lective tripping before reclosure is often unavoidable in order to achieve fast, simulta-
neous tripping at all line ends. The 7SA6 has a reduced dead time (RDT) procedure
which reduces the effect of the short-circuit on healthy line sections to a minimum. All
phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth voltages are measured for the reduced dead time
procedure. These voltages must rise above the threshold U-live> (address 3440)
for the voltage measuring time T U-stable (address 3438). The value set for U-
live> is appropriately converted for the phase-to-phase voltages. The voltage trans-
formers must be located on the line side of the circuit breaker.
In the event of a short-circuit close to one of the line ends, the surrounding lines can
initially be tripped because, for example, a distance protection detects the fault in its
overreaching zone Z1B (Figure 2-131, relay location III). If the network is meshed and
there is at least one other infeed on the busbar B, the voltage there returns immedi-
ately after clearance of the fault. For single-pole tripping it is sufficient if there is an
earthed transformer with delta winding connected at busbar B which ensures symme-
try of the voltages and thus induces a return voltage in the open phase. This allows a
distinction between the faulty line and the unfaulted line to be made as follows:
Since line B - C is only tripped singled-ended at C, it receives a return voltage from the
end B which is not tripped so that at C the open phase(s) also has(have) voltage. If
the device detects this at position III, reclosure can take place immediately or in a
shorter time (to ensure sufficient voltage measuring time). The healthy line B - C is
then back in operation.
Line AB is tripped at both ends. No voltage is therefore present identifying the line as
the faulted one at both ends. The normal dead time comes into service here.
Figure 2-131 Example of a reduced dead time (RDT)

A, B, C Busbars
I, II, III Relay locations
X Tripped circuit breakers
298 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Adaptive In all the previous alternatives it was assumed that defined and equal dead times were
Dead Time (ADT) set at both line ends, if necessary for different fault types and/or reclose cycles.
It is also possible to set the dead times at one line end only and to configure the adap-
tive dead time at all other ends. This can be done provided that the voltage transform-
ers are located on the line side of the circuit breaker or that a means for transfer of a
close command to the remote line end exists.
Figure 2-132 shows an example with voltage measurement. It is assumed that the
device I is operating with defined dead times whereas the adaptive dead time is con-
figured at position II. It is important that the line is at least fed from busbar A, i.e. the
side with the defined dead times.
With the adaptive dead time, the automatic reclosure function at line end II decides
independently if and when reclosure is sensible and allowed and when it is not. The
criterion is the line voltage at end II, which was re-applied from end I following reclo-
sure there. Reclosure therefore takes place at end II as soon as it is apparent that
voltage has been re-applied to the line from end I. All phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth voltages are monitored.
In the illustrated example, the lines are disconnected at positions I, II and III. At I re-
closure takes place after the parameterized dead time. At III a reduced dead time can
take place (see above) if there is also an infeed on busbar B.
If the fault has been cleared (successful reclosure), line A - B is re-connected to the
voltage at busbar A through position I. Device II detects this voltage and also recloses
after a short delay (to ensure a sufficient voltage measuring time). The fault is cleared.
If the fault has not been cleared after reclosure at I (unsuccessful reclosure), a switch
on to fault occurs at I, no healthy voltage appears at II. The device there detects this
and does not reclose.
In the case of multiple reclosure the sequence may be repeated several times follow-
ing an unsuccessful reclosure until one of the reclosures attempts is successful or a
final trip takes place.
Figure 2-132 Example of adaptive dead time (ADT)

A, B, C Busbars
I, II, III Relay locations
X Tripped circuit breakers
7SA6 Manual 299

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
As is shown by the example, the adaptive dead time has the following advantages:
The circuit breaker at position II is not reclosed at all if the fault persists and is not
unnecessarily stressed as a result.
With non-selective tripping by overreach at position III no further trip and reclose
cycles occur here because the short-circuit path via busbar B and position II
remains interrupted even in the event of several reclosure attempts.
At position I overreach is allowed in the case of multiple reclosures and even in the
event of final tripping because the line remains open at position II and therefore no
actual overreach can occur at I.
The adaptive dead time also includes the reduced dead time because the criteria are
the same. There is no need to set the reduced dead time as well.
CLOSE Command With close command transmission via the digital connection paths the dead times are
Transmission only set at one line end. The other line end (or line ends in lines with more than two
(Remote-CLOSE) ends) are set to Adaptive Dead Time (ADT). The latter just responds to the received
close commands from the transmitting end.
At the sending line end, the trasmission of the close command is delayed until it is sure
that the local reclosure was successful. This means that after reclosure still a possible
local pickup is waited for. This delay prevents unnecessary closing at the remote end
on the one hand but also increases the time until reclosure takes place there. This is
not critical for a single-pole interruption or in radial or meshed networks if no stability
problems are expected under these conditions.
Figure 2-133 AR Remote-Close function via protection data interface
The close command can be transmitted by a teleprotection scheme using the protec-
tion interfaces (ordering variant). When the annunciation AR Remote Close is
output, this information is transmitted at the same time to the remote end via the pro-
tection data interface. The information is OR-combined with the information of the
binary input >AR RemoteClose and made available for the automatic reclosure.
(Figure 2-133).
Connecting an If the 7SA6 has to work with an external reclosure device, the binary inputs and
External Auto- outputs provided for this purpose must be taken into consideration. The following
Reclosure Device inputs and outputs are recommended:
300 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Binary inputs:
383 >Enable ARzones With this binary input, the external reclosure device
controls stages of the individual short-circuit protection
functions which are active before reclosure (e.g. over-
reaching zone in the distance protection). This input is
not required if no overreaching stage is used (e.g. dif-
ferential protection or comparison mode with distance
protection, see also above margin heading Selectivity
before Reclosure).
382 >Only 1ph AR The external reclosure device is only programmed for
one pole; the stages of the individual protection func-
tions that are activated before reclosure via No. 383
only do so in the case of single-phase faults; in the
event of multiple-phase faults these stages of the indi-
vidual short-circuit functions do not operate. This input
is not required if no overreaching stage is used (e.g.
differential protection or comparison mode with dis-
tance protection, see also above margin heading Se-
lectivity before Reclosure).
381 >1p Trip Perm The external reclosure device allows one-pole tripping
(logic inversion or three-pole coupling). If this input is
not assigned or not routed (matrix), the protection
functions trip three-pole for all faults. If the external re-
closure device cannot supply this signal but supplies a
three-pole coupling signal instead, this must be taken
into account in the allocation of the binary inputs: the
signal must be inverted in this case (L-active = active
without voltage).
Binary outputs:
501 Relay PICKUP Start of protection device, general (if required by exter-
nal recloser device).
512 Relay TRIP 1pL1 Trip of the device 1-pole L1.
515 Relay TRIP 3ph. Trip protective device 3-pole.
In order to obtain a phase-segregated trip indication, the respective single-pole trip
commands must be combined with the three-pole trip command on one output.
Figure, 2-134 for example, shows the interconnection between a 7SA6 and an exter-
nal reclosure device with a mode selector switch.
Depending on what the external recloser device requires, the three single-pole outputs
(No. 512, 513, 514) may also be combined to one single-pole tripping output; the No.
515 provides the three-pole tripping signal to the external device.
For exclusively three-pole auto-reclosure cycles, the general pickup (No. 501, if re-
quired by the external reclosure device) and general trip signal (No. 511) from 7SA6
(see Figure 2-135) usually suffice.
7SA6 Manual 301

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-134 Connection example with external auto-reclosure device for 1-/3-pole AR with
mode selector switch
Figure 2-135 Connection example with external reclosure device for 3-pole AR
Control of the If the 7SA6 is equipped with the internal automatic reclosure function, it may also be
Internal Automatic controlled by an external protection device. This is of use, for example, on line ends
Reclosure by an with redundant protection or additional back-up protection when the second protection
External Protection is used for the same line end and has to work with the automatic reclosure function
Device integrated in the 7SA6.
The binary inputs and outputs provided for this functionality must be considered in this
case. It must be decided whether the internal auto-reclosure is to be controlled by the
starting (pickup) or by the trip command of the external protection (see also above
under Control Mode of the Automatic Reclosure).
If the auto-reclosure is controlled by the trip command, the following inputs and
outputs are recommended to be used:
302 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The automatic reclosure function is started via the Binary inputs:

2711 >AR Start General fault detection for the automatic reclosure
circuit (only required for action time),
2712 >Trip L1 AR Trip command L1 for the automatic reclosure circuit,
2713 >Trip L2 AR Trip command L2 for the automatic reclosure circuit,
2714 >Trip L3 AR Trip command L3 for the automatic reclosure circuit.
The general fault detection determines the starting of the action times. It is also nec-
essary if the automatic reclosure circuit is to detect sequential faults by fault detection.
In other cases this input information is superfluous.
The trip commands decide whether the dead time for single-pole or three-pole reclose
cycles is activated or whether the reclosure is blocked in the event of a three-pole trip
(depending on the set dead times).
Figure 2-136 shows the interconnection between the internal automatic reclosure of
7SA6 and an external protection device, as a connection example for single-pole
cylces.
To achieve three-pole coupling of the external protection and to release, if necessary,
its accelerated stages before reclosure the following output functions are suitable:
2864 AR 1p Trip Perm Internal automatic reclosure function ready for single-
pole reclose cycle, i.e. allows single-pole tripping (logic
inversion of the three-pole coupling).
2889 AR 1.CycZoneRel Internal automatic reclosure function ready for the first
reclose cycle, i.e. releases the stage of the external
protection device for reclosure, the corresponding
outputs can be used for other cycles. This output can
be omitted if the external protection does not require
an overreaching stage (e.g. differential protection or
comparison mode with distance protection).
2820 AR Program1pole Internal automatic reclosure function is programmed
for one pole, i.e. only recloses after single-pole trip-
ping. This output can be omitted if no overreaching
stage is required (e.g. differential protection or compar-
ison mode with distance protection).
Instead of the three-phase-segregated trip commands, the single-pole and three-pole
tripping may also be signalled to the internal automatic reclosure function provided
that the external protection device is capable of this. In that case, the following binary
inputs of the 7SA6 are assigned:
2711 >AR Start General fault detection for the internal automatic reclo-
sure function (only required for action time),
2715 >Trip 1pole AR Trip command single-pole for the internal automatic re-
closure,
2716 >Trip 3pole AR Trip command three-pole for the internal automatic re-
closure function,
If only three-pole reclosure cycles are to be executed, it is sufficient to assign the
binary input >Trip 3pole AR (No. 2716) for the trip signal. Figure 2-137 shows
an example. Any overreaching stages of the external protection are enabled again by
AR 1.CycZoneRel (No. 2889) and of further cycles, if applicable.
7SA6 Manual 303

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-136 Connection example with external protection device for 1-/3-pole reclosure; AR
control mode = with TRIP
Figure 2-137 Connection example with external protection device for 3-pole reclosure; AR
control mode = with TRIP
But if the internal automatic reclose function is controlled by the pickup (only possible
for three-pole tripping: 110 Trip mode = 3pole only), the phase-dedicated pickup
signals of the external protection must be connected if distinction shall be made
between different types of fault. The general trip command then suffices for tripping
(No. 2746). Figure 2-138 shows a connection example.
304 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-138 Connection example with external protection device for fault detection depen-
dent dead time dead time control by pickup signals of the protection device;
AR control mode = with PICKUP
7SA6 Manual 305

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2 Protection Relays If redundant protection is provided for a line and each protection operates with its own
with 2 Automatic automatic reclosure function, a certain signal exchange between the two combinations
Reclosure Circuits is necessary. The connection example in Figure 2-139 shows the necessary cross-
connections.
If phase segregated auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker are connected, a three-
pole coupling by the 7SA6 is guaranteed when more than one CB pole is tripped. This
requires activation of the forced three-pole trip (see Section 2.14.2 at margin heading
Forced Three-Pole Trip). An external automatic three-pole coupling is therefore not
necessary when the above conditions are satisfied. This rules out two-pole tripping
under all circumstances.
Figure 2-139 Connection example for 2 protection devices with 2 automatic reclosure func-
tions
BI Binary inputs
M Signal output
K Command
*
) for all protection functions operating with AR.
306 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
General If no reclosure is required on the feeder to which the 7SA6 distance protection is
applied (e.g. for cables, transformers, motors or similar), the automatic reclosure func-
tion must be inhibited during configuration of the device (see Section 2.1.1.2, address
133). The auto reclose function is then fully disabled, i.e. the automatic reclosure is
not processed in the 7SA6. No signals regarding the auto reclose function are gener-
ated, and the binary inputs for the auto reclose function are ignored. All parameters for
setting the auto reclose function are inaccessible and of no significance.
If, on the other hand, the internal automatic reclosure function is to be used, the type
of reclosure must be selected during the configuration of the functions (see Section
2.1.1.2) in address 133 Auto Reclose the AR control mode and in address 134 the
AR control mode.
Up to 8 reclosure attempts are allowed with the integrated automatic reclosure func-
tion in the 7SA6. Whereas the settings in address 3401 to 3441 are common to all
reclosure cycles, the individual settings of the cycles are made from address 3450 on-
wards. It is possible to set different individual parameters for the first four reclose
cycles. From the fifth cycle on the parameters for the fourth cycle apply.
The automatic reclosing function can be turned ON or OFF under address 3401 AUTO
RECLOSE.
A prerequisite for automatic reclosure taking place after a trip due to a short-circuit is
that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one OPEN-CLOSE-OPEN cycle at the time
the automatic reclosure circuit is started, i.e. at the time of the first trip command. The
readiness of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device via the binary input >CB1
Ready (No. 371). If no such signal is available, leave the setting under address 3402
CB? 1.TRIP = NO because no automatic reclosure would be possible at all otherwise.
If circuit breaker interrogation is possible, you should set CB? 1.TRIP = YES.
Furthermore, the circuit breaker ready state can also be interrogated prior to every re-
closure. This is set when setting the individual reclose cycles (see below).
To check that the ready status of the circuit breaker is regained during the dead times,
you can set a circuit breaker ready monitor time under address 3409 CB TIME OUT.
The time is set slightly longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker after a TRIP-
CLOSE-TRIP cycle. If the circuit breaker is not ready again by the time this timer ex-
pires, no reclosure takes place, the automatic reclosure function is blocked dynami-
cally.
Waiting for the circuit breaker to be ready can lead to an increase of the dead times.
Interrogation of a synchro-check (if used) can also delay reclosure. To avoid uncon-
trolled prolongation, it is possible to set a maximum prolongation of the dead time in
this case in address 3411 T-DEAD EXT.. This prolongation is unlimited if the setting
is applied. This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Set-
tings. Remember that longer dead times are only permissible after three-pole tripping
when no stability problems arise or when a synchro-check takes place before reclo-
sure.
The reclaim time T-RECLAIM (address 3403) defines the time that must elapse, after
a successful reclosing attempt, before the auto reclose function is reset. Re-tripping
by a protective function within this time initiates the next reclose cycle in the event of
multiple reclosure; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as
unsuccessful. The reclaim time must therefore be longer than the longest response
time of a protective function which can start the automatic reclosure circuit. When op-
erating the AR in ADT mode, it is possible to deactivate the reclaim time by setting it
to 0 s.
7SA6 Manual 307

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
A few seconds are generally sufficient. In areas with frequent thunderstorms or

storms, a shorter blocking time may be necessary to avoid feeder lockout due to se-
quential lightning strikes or cable flashovers.
A longer reclaim time should be chosen where circuit breaker supervision is not pos-
sible (see above) during multiple reclosures, e.g. because of missing auxiliary con-
tacts and information on the circuit breaker ready status. In this case, the reclaim time
should be longer than the time required for the circuit breaker mechanism to be ready.
The blocking duration following Manual-Close detection T-BLOCK MC (address 3404)
must guarantee the circuit breaker to open and close reliably (0.5 s to 1 s). If a fault is
detected by a protective function within this time after closing of the circuit breaker was
detected, no reclosure takes place and a final three-pole trip command is issued. If this
is not desired, address 3404 is set to 0.
The options for handling evolving faults are described in Section 2.14 under margin
heading Handling Evolving Faults. The treatment of sequential faults is not neces-
sary on line ends where the adaptive dead time is applied (address 133 Auto
Reclose = ADT). The addresses 3406 and 3407 are then of no consequence and
therefore not accessible.
The detection of an evolving fault can be defined under address 3406 EV. FLT.
RECOG.. EV. FLT. RECOG. with PICKUP means that, during a dead time, every
pickup of a protective function will be interpreted as an evolving fault. With EV. FLT.
RECOG. with TRIP a fault during a dead time is only interpreted as an evolving fault
if it has led to a trip command by a protection function. This may also include trip com-
mands which are coupled in from external via a binary input or which have been trans-
mitted from an opposite end of the protected object. If an external protection device
operates together with the auto-reclosure, evolving fault detection with pickup presup-
poses that a pickup signal from the external device is also connected to the 7SA6; oth-
erwise an evolving fault can only be detected with the external trip command even if
with PICKUP was set here.
The reaction in response to sequential faults can be selected under address 3407.
EV. FLT. MODE blocks AR means that no reclosure takes place after detection of
a sequential fault. This is always useful when only single-pole reclosure is to take
place or when stability problems are expected due to the subsequent three-pole dead
time. If a three-pole reclose cycle is to be initiated by tripping of the evolving fault, set
EV. FLT. MODE = starts 3p AR. In this case, a separately adjustable three-pole
dead time is started with the three-pole trip command due to the sequential fault. This
is only useful if three-pole reclosure is also permitted.
Address 3408 T-Start MONITOR monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker after a
trip command. If the CB has not opened during this time (from the beginning of the trip
command), the automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically. The criterion for circuit
breaker opening is the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact or the disappear-
ance of the trip command. If a circuit breaker failure protection (internal or external) is
used on the feeder, this time should be shorter than the delay time of the circuit
breaker failure protection so that no reclosure takes place if the circuit breaker fails.
308 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Note
For the breaker failure protection (BF) to perform a single-pole TRIP repetition, the
time setting of parameter 3408 T-Start MONITOR must be longer than the time
setting for parameter 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1).
To enable that the busbar is tripped by the breaker failure protection without preceding
three-pole coupling of the trip command (by AR or BF), the time setting for 3408 T-
Start MONITOR must also be longer than that for 3906 T2. In this case, the AR must
be blocked by a signal from the BF to prevent the AR from reclosing after a busbar
TRIP. It is recommended to connect the signal 1494 BF T2-TRIP(bus) to the AR
input 2703 >AR block via CFC.
If the reclosure command is transmitted to the opposite end, this transmission can be
delayed by the time setting in address 3410 T RemoteClose. This transmission is
only possible if the device operates with adaptive dead time at the remote end (ad-
dress 133 Auto Reclose = ADT). This parameter is otherwise irrelevant. On the one
hand, this delay serves to prevent the remote end device from reclosing unnecessarily
when local reclosure is unsuccessful. On the other hand, it should be noted that the
line is not available for energy transport until the remote end has also closed. This
delay must therefore be added to the dead time for consideration of the network sta-
bility.
Configuration of This configuration concerns the interaction between the protection and supplementary
auto-reclosure functions of the device and the auto reclose function. The selection of device functions
which are to start the automatic reclosure circuit and which are not to, is made here.
Address 3420 AR w/ DIST., i.e. with distance protection

Address 3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C, i.e. with high-current fast tripping
Address 3422 AR w/ W/I, i.e. with weakinfeed trip function
Address 3423 AR w/ EF-O/C, i.e. with transfer trip and remote trip
Address 3424 AR w/ DTT, i.e. with externally fed trip command
Address 3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C, i.e. with time overcurrent protection
For the functions which are to start the auto-reclosure function, the corresponding
address is set to YES, for the others to NO. The other functions cannot start the auto-
matic reclosure because reclosure is of little use here.
Forced If reclosure is blocked during the dead time of a single-pole cycle without a three-pole
three-pole trip trip command having been initiated, the breaker remains open at one pole. With
address 3430 AR TRIP 3pole it is possible to determine that the tripping logic of the
device issues a three-pole trip command in this case (pole discrepancy prevention for
the CB poles). Set this address to YES if the CB can be tripped single-pole and has no
pole discrepancy protection itself. Nevertheless, the device pre-empts the pole dis-
crepancy supervision of the CB because the forced three-pole trip of the device is im-
mediately initiated as soon as the reclosure is blocked following a single-pole trip or if
the CB auxiliary contacts report an implausible breaker state (see also Section 2.14 at
margin heading Processing the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts). The forced
three-pole coupling is also activated when only three-pole cycles are allowed, but a
single-pole trip is signalled externally via a binary input.
The forced three-pole coupling is unnecessary if only a common three-pole control of
the CB is possible.
7SA6 Manual 309

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Dead line check / Under address 3431 the dead line check or the reduced dead time function can be
reduced dead time activated. Either the one or the other can be used as the two options are contradictory.
The voltage transformers must be connected to the line side of the circuit breaker if
either of these modes is to be used. If this is not the case or if neither of the two func-
tions is used, set DLC or RDT = WITHOUT. If the adaptive dead time is used (see
below), the parameters mentioned here are omitted because the adaptive dead time
implies the properties of the reduced dead time.
DLC or RDT = DLC means that the dead line check of the line voltage is used. This
only enables reclosure after it becomes apparent that the line is dead. In this case, the
phase-earth voltage limit is set in address 3441 U-dead< below which the line is con-
sidered voltage-free (disconnected). The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This
value can be entered as a primary value when parameterising with a PC and DIGSI.
Address 3438 T U-stable determines the measuring time available for determining
the no-voltage condition. Address 3440 is irrelevant here.
DLC or RDT = RDT means that the reduced dead time is used. This is described in
detail in Section 2.14 at margin heading Reduced Dead Time (RDT). In this case the
setting under address 3440 U-live> determines the limit voltage, PhaseEarth,
above which the line is considered to be fault-free. The setting must be smaller than
the lowest expected operating voltage. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This
Address 3438 T U-stable establishes the measuring time used to determine that
the line is fault-free with this returning voltage. It should be longer than any transient
oscillations resulting from line energization. Address 3441 is irrelevant here.
Adaptive When operating with adaptive dead time, it must be ensured in advance that one end
Dead Time (ADT) per line operates with defined dead times and has an infeed. The other (or the others
in multi-branch lines) may operate with adaptive dead time. It is essential that the
voltage transformers are located on the line side of the circuit breaker. Details about
this function can be found in Section 2.14 at margin heading Adaptive Dead Time
(ADT) and Close Command-transfer (Remote-CLOSE).
For the line end with defined dead times the number of desired reclose cycles must be
set during the configuration of the protective functions (Section 2.1.1) in address 133
Auto Reclose. For the devices operating with adaptive dead time Auto Reclose
= ADT must be set during the configuration of the protective functions under address
133. Only the parameters described below are interrogated in the latter case. No set-
tings are then made for the individual reclosure cycles. The adaptive dead time implies
functionality of reduced dead time.
The adaptive dead time may be voltage-controlled or RemoteCLOSEcontrolled.
Both are possible at the same time. In the first case, reclosure takes place as soon as
the returning voltage, after reclosure at the remote end, is detected. For this purpose
the device must be connected to voltage transformers located on the line side. In the
case of Remote-CLOSE, the autoreclosure waits until the Remote-CLOSE command
is received from the remote end.
The action time T-ACTION ADT (address 3433) is the timeframe after initiation (fault
detection) by any protective function which can start the automatic reclosure function
within which the trip command must appear. If no trip command is issued until the
action time has expired, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the
protective functions (see Section 2.1.1.2), the action time may also be omitted; this
applies especially when an initiating protective function has no fault detection signal.
310 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The dead times are determined by the reclosure command of the device at the line
end with the defined dead times. In cases where this reclosure command does not
appear, e.g. because the reclosure was in the meantime blocked at this end, the readi-
ness of the local device must return to the quiescent state at some time. This takes
place after the maximum wait time T-MAX ADT (address 3434). This must be long
enough to include the last reclosure of the remote end. In the case of single cycle re-
closure, the sum total of maximum dead time plus reclaim time of the other device is
sufficient. In the case of multiple reclosure the worst case is that all reclosures of the
other end except the last one are unsuccessful. The time of all these cycles must be
taken into account. To save having to make exact calculations, it is possible to use the
sum of all dead times and all protection operating times plus one reclaim time.
Under address 3435 ADT 1p allowed it can be determined whether single-pole trip-
ping is allowed (on condition that single-pole tripping is possible). If NO, the protection
trips three-pole for all fault types. If YES, the actual trip signal of the starting protective
functions is decisive. If the reclaim time is unequal to 0 s and single-pole tripping is
allowed, single-pole tripping will be prevented during the relcaim time. Each fault is
thus disconnected in three poles while the reclaim time is active.
Address 3403 T-RECLAIM allows disabling the reclaim time in the ADT mode. In
doing so, the ADT cycle including its settings and release conditions is restarted after
unsuccessfull automatic reclosing. If the reclaim time is activated, the single-pole per-
mission at address 3435 and the protection releases are disabled while the reclaim
time is active.
Under address 3436 ADT CB? CLOSE it can be determined whether circuit breaker
ready is interrogated before reclosure after an adaptive dead time. With the setting
YES, the dead time may be extended if the circuit breaker is not ready for a CLOSE
OPENcycle when the dead time expires. The maximum extension that is possible is
the circuit breaker monitoring time; this was set for all reclosure cycles under address
3409 (see above). Details about the circuit breaker monitoring can be found in the
function description, Section 2.14, at margin heading Interrogation of the Circuit
Breaker Ready State.
If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure
cycle, you should set address 3437 ADT SynRequest to YES. In this case, the volt-
ages from line and busbar are checked after a three-pole trip and before reclosure to
determine if sufficient synchronism exists. This is only done on condition that either the
internal synchronism and voltage check functions are available, or that an external
device is available for synchronism check. If only single-pole reclose cycles are exe-
cuted or no stability problems are expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to
closely meshed networks or in radial networks), set address 3437 to NO.
Addresses 3438 and 3440 are only significant if the voltage-controlled adaptive dead
time is used. 3440 U-live> is the phase-earth voltage limit above which the line is
considered to be fault-free. The setting must be smaller than the lowest expected op-
erating voltage. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered
as a primary value when parameterising with a PC and DIGSI. Address 3438 T U-
stable establishes the measuring time used to determine that the line is fault-free
with this returning voltage. It should be longer than any transient oscillations resulting
from line energization.
7SA6 Manual 311

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
1. Reclosure cycle If working on a line with adaptive dead time, no further parameters are needed for the
individual reclose cycles in this case. All the following parameters assigned to the in-
dividual cycles are then superfluous and inaccessible.
Address 3450 1.AR: START is only available if the automatic reclosure is config-
ured with action time in the operating mode, i. e. if during configuration of the protec-
tion functions (see Section 2.1.1.2) address 134 AR control mode = Pickup w/
Tact or Trip w/ Tact was set (the first setting only applies to three-pole tripping).
It determines whether automatic reclosure should be started at all with the first cycle.
This address is included mainly for the sake of uniformity of the parameters for every
reclosure attempt and is set to YES for the first cycle. If several cycles are performed,
you can (at AR control mode = Pickup ...) set this parameter and different
action times to control the effectiveness of the individual cycles. Notes and examples
can be found in Section 2.14 at margin heading Action Times.
The action time 1.AR: T-ACTION (address 3451) is the timeframe after initiation
(fault detection) by any protective function which can start the automatic reclosure
function within which the trip command must appear. If no trip command is issued until
the action time has expired, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of
the protective functions, the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially
when an initiating protective function has no fault detection signal.
Depending on the configured operating mode of the automatic reclosure (address 134
AR control mode) only address 3456 and 3457 (if AR control mode = with
TRIP...) are available or address 3453 to 3455 (if AR control mode = with
PICKUP ...).
In AR control mode = with TRIP... you can set different dead times for single-
pole and three-pole reclose cycles. Whether single-pole or three-pole tripping takes
place depends solely on the initiating protection functions. Single-pole tripping is only
possible of course if the device and the corresponding protective function are also
capable of single-pole tripping.
Table 2-18 AR control mode = with TRIP...
3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip is the dead time after single-pole tripping,

3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip is the dead time after three-pole tripping.
If only single-pole reclosure cycles are required, set the dead time for three-pole trip-
ping to . If only three-pole reclosure cycles are required, set the dead time for single-
pole tripping to ; the protection then trips three-pole for every fault type.
The dead time after single-pole tripping (if set) 1.AR Tdead1Trip (address 3456)
should be long enough for the short-circuit arc to be extinguished and the surrounding
air to be de-ionized so that the reclosure promises to be successful. The longer the
line, the longer is this time due to the charging of the conductor capacitances. Con-
ventional values are 0.9 s to 1.5 s.
For three-pole tripping (address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip), the stability of the
network is the main concern. Since the disconnected line cannot transfer any synchro-
nizing forces, only a short dead time is often permitted. The usual values are 0.3 s to
0.6 s. If the device is operating with a synchronism check (compare Section 2.15), a
longer time may be tolerated under certain circumstances. Longer three-pole dead
times are also possible in radial networks.
For AR control mode = with PICKUP ... it is possible to make the dead times
dependent on the type of fault detected by the initiating protection function(s).
312 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 2-19 AR control mode = with PICKUP ...
3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt is the dead time after single-phase pickup,
3454 1.AR Tdead 2Flt is the dead time after two-phase pickup,
3455 1.AR Tdead 3Flt is the dead time after three-phase pickup.
If the dead time is to be the same for all types of faults, set all three parameters the
same. Note that these settings only cause different dead times for different pickups.
The tripping can only be three-pole.
With the setting in address 3407 EV. FLT. MODE starts 3p AR, it is possible to
apply a separate dead time 1.AR: Tdead EV. (address 3458) for the three-pole
dead time after clearance of the sequential fault (see above at heading General).
Stability aspects are also decisive here. Normally the setting constraints are similar to
address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip.
Under address 3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE it can be determined whether the readiness
of the circuit breaker ("circuit breaker ready") is interrogated before this first reclosure.
With the setting YES, the dead time may be extended if the circuit breaker is not ready
for a CLOSETRIPcycle when the dead time expires. The maximum extension that
is possible is the circuit breaker monitoring time; this time was set for all reclosure
cycles under address 3409 CB TIME OUT (see above). Details about the circuit
breaker monitoring can be found in the function description, Section 2.14, at margin
heading Interrogation of the Circuit Breaker Ready State.
If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure
cycle, you should set address 3460 1.AR SynRequest to YES. In this case, a check
is made before every reclosure following three-phase tripping to verify that voltages
from feeder and busbar are synchronized sufficiently. This is only done on condition
that either the internal synchronism and voltage check functions are available, or that
an external device is available for synchronism check. If only single-pole reclose
cycles are executed or no stability problems are expected during three-pole dead
times (e.g. due to closely meshed networks or in radial networks), set address 3460
to NO.
2. to 4th If several cycles have been set in the configuration of the scope of protection func-
Reclosure Cycle tions, you can set individual reclosure parameters for the 2nd to 4th cycles. The same
options are available as for the first cycle. Again, only some of the parameters shown
below will be available depending on the selections made during configuration of the
scope of protection functions.
For the 2nd cycle:
3461 2.AR: START Start in 2nd cycle generally allowed

3462 2.AR: T-ACTION Action time for the 2nd cycle
3464 2.AR Tdead 1Flt Dead time after single-phase pickup
3465 2.AR Tdead 2Flt Dead time after two-phase pickup
3466 2.AR Tdead 3Flt Dead time after three-phase pickup
3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip Dead time after single-pole tripping
3468 2.AR Tdead3Trip Dead time after three-pole tripping
3469 2.AR: Tdead EV. Dead time after evolving fault
3470 2.AR: CB? CLOSE CB ready interrogation before reclosing
3471 2.AR SynRequest Sync. check after three-pole tripping
7SA6 Manual 313

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
For the 3rd cycle:
3472 3.AR: START Start in 3rd cycle generally allowed

3473 3.AR: T-ACTION Action time for the 3rd cycle
For the 4th cycle:
3483 4.AR: START Start in 4th cycle generally allowed

3484 4.AR: T-ACTION Action time for the 4th cycle
5. to 8th If more than four cycles were set during configuration of the functional scope, the dead
Reclosure Cycle times preceding the fifth (5th) through the ninth (9th) reclosing attempts are equal to
the open breaker time which precedes the fourth (4th) reclosing attempt.
Notes on the The most important information about automatic reclosure is briefly explained insofar
Information as it was not mentioned in the following lists or described in detail in the preceding text.
Overview
>BLK 1.AR-cycle (No. 2742) to >BLK 4.-n. AR (No. 2745)

The respective auto-reclose cycle is blocked. If the blocking state already exists when
the automatic reclosure function is initiated, the blocked cycle is not executed and may
be skipped (if other cycles are permitted). The same applies if the automatic reclosure
function is started (running), but not internally blocked. If the block signal of a cycle
appears while this cycle is being executed (in progress), the automatic reclosure func-
tion is blocked dynamically; no further automatic reclosures cycles are then executed.
AR 1.CycZoneRel (No. 2889) to AR 4.CycZoneRel (No. 2892)

The automatic reclosure is ready for the respective reclosure cycle. This information
indicates which cycle will be run next. For example, external protection functions can
use this information to release accelerated or overreaching trip stages prior to the cor-
responding reclose cycle.
314 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
AR is blocked (No. 2783)

The automatic reclosure is blocked (e.g. circuit breaker not ready). This information
indicates to the operational information system that in the event of an upcoming
system fault there will be a final trip, i.e. without reclosure. If the automatic reclosure
has been started, this information does not appear.
AR not ready (No. 2784)

The automatic reclosure is not ready for reclosure at the moment. In addition to the
AR is blocked (No. 2783) mentioned above there are also obstructions during
the course of the auto-reclosure cycles such as action time run out or last reclaim
time running. This information is particularly helpful during testing because no protec-
tion test cycle with reclosure may be initiated during this state.
AR in progress (No. 2801)

This information appears following starting of the auto reclose function, i.e. with the
first trip command that can start the auto reclose function. If this reclosure was suc-
cessful (or any in the case of multiple cycles), this information resets with the expiry of
the last reclaim time. If no reclosure was successful or if reclosure was blocked, it ends
with the last the final trip command.
AR Sync.Request (No. 2865)

Measuring request to an external synchronism check device. The information appears
at the end of a dead time subsequent to three-pole tripping if a synchronism request
was parameterized for the corresponding cycle. Reclosure only takes place when the
synchronism check device has provided release signal >Sync.release (No
2731).
>Sync.release (No. 2731)

Release of reclosure by an external synchronism check device if this was requested
by the output information AR Sync.Request (No. 2865).
7SA6 Manual 315

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.14.3 Settings
ditional Settings.

3401 AUTO RECLOSE OFF ON Auto-Reclose function
ON
3402 CB? 1.TRIP YES NO CB ready interrogation at 1st trip
NO
3403 T-RECLAIM 0.50 .. 300.00 sec 3.00 sec Reclaim time after successful AR
cycle
3403 T-RECLAIM 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 0 3.00 sec Reclaim time after successful AR
cycle
3404 T-BLOCK MC 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after manual
close
3406 EV. FLT. RECOG. with PICKUP with TRIP Evolving fault recognition
with TRIP
3407 EV. FLT. MODE blocks AR starts 3p AR Evolving fault (during the dead
starts 3p AR time)
3408 T-Start MONITOR 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 0.20 sec AR start-signal monitoring time
3409 CB TIME OUT 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision
Time
3410 T RemoteClose 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; sec Send delay for remote close
command
3411A T-DEAD EXT. 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; sec Maximum dead time extension
3420 AR w/ DIST. YES YES AR with distance protection
NO
3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C YES YES AR with switch-onto-fault overcur-
NO rent
3422 AR w/ W/I YES YES AR with weak infeed tripping
NO
3423 AR w/ EF-O/C YES YES AR with earth fault overcurrent
NO prot.
3424 AR w/ DTT YES YES AR with direct transfer trip
NO
3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C YES YES AR with back-up overcurrent
NO
3430 AR TRIP 3pole YES YES 3pole TRIP by AR
NO
3431 DLC or RDT WITHOUT WITHOUT Dead Line Check or Reduced
RDT Dead Time
DLC
3433 T-ACTION ADT 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time
3434 T-MAX ADT 0.50 .. 3000.00 sec 5.00 sec Maximum dead time
3435 ADT 1p allowed YES NO 1pole TRIP allowed
NO
316 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

3436 ADT CB? CLOSE YES NO CB ready interrogation before re-
NO closing
3437 ADT SynRequest YES NO Request for synchro-check after
NO 3pole AR
3438 T U-stable 0.10 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time for dead/ live
voltage
3440 U-live> 30 .. 90 V 48 V Voltage threshold for live line or
bus
3441 U-dead< 2 .. 70 V 30 V Voltage threshold for dead line or
bus
3450 1.AR: START YES YES Start of AR allowed in this cycle
NO
3451 1.AR: T-ACTION 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time
3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults
3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1pole trip
3458 1.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault
3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE YES NO CB ready interrogation before re-
NO closing
3460 1.AR SynRequest YES NO Request for synchro-check after
NO 3pole AR
3461 2.AR: START YES NO AR start allowed in this cycle
NO
3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; sec Dead time after 1pole trip
NO closing
NO 3pole AR
NO
7SA6 Manual 317

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

NO closing
NO 3pole AR
NO
NO closing
NO 3pole AR
318 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

formation
2701 >AR on SP >AR: Switch on auto-reclose function
2702 >AR off SP >AR: Switch off auto-reclose function
2703 >AR block SP >AR: Block auto-reclose function
2711 >AR Start SP >External start of internal Auto reclose
2712 >Trip L1 AR SP >AR: External trip L1 for AR start
2715 >Trip 1pole AR SP >AR: External 1pole trip for AR start
2716 >Trip 3pole AR SP >AR: External 3pole trip for AR start
2727 >AR RemoteClose SP >AR: Remote Close signal
2731 >Sync.release SP >AR: Sync. release from ext. sync.-check
2737 >BLOCK 1pole AR SP >AR: Block 1pole AR-cycle
2738 >BLOCK 3pole AR SP >AR: Block 3pole AR-cycle
2739 >BLK 1phase AR SP >AR: Block 1phase-fault AR-cycle
2742 >BLK 1.AR-cycle SP >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle
2743 >BLK 2.AR-cycle SP >AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle
2744 >BLK 3.AR-cycle SP >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle
2745 >BLK 4.-n. AR SP >AR: Block 4th and higher AR-cycles
2746 >Trip for AR SP >AR: External Trip for AR start
2747 >Pickup L1 AR SP >AR: External pickup L1 for AR start
2750 >Pickup 1ph AR SP >AR: External pickup 1phase for AR start
2781 AR off OUT AR: Auto-reclose is switched off
2782 AR on IntSP AR: Auto-reclose is switched on
2783 AR is blocked OUT AR: Auto-reclose is blocked
2784 AR not ready OUT AR: Auto-reclose is not ready
2787 CB not ready OUT AR: Circuit breaker not ready
2788 AR T-CBreadyExp OUT AR: CB ready monitoring window expired
2796 AR on/off BI IntSP AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI
2801 AR in progress OUT AR in progress
2809 AR T-Start Exp OUT AR: Start-signal monitoring time expired
2810 AR TdeadMax Exp OUT AR: Maximum dead time expired
2818 AR evolving Flt OUT AR: Evolving fault recognition
2820 AR Program1pole OUT AR is set to operate after 1p trip only
2821 AR Td. evol.Flt OUT AR dead time after evolving fault
2839 AR Tdead 1pTrip OUT AR dead time after 1pole trip running
2840 AR Tdead 3pTrip OUT AR dead time after 3pole trip running
2841 AR Tdead 1pFlt OUT AR dead time after 1phase fault running
7SA6 Manual 319

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
2844 AR 1stCyc. run. OUT AR 1st cycle running
2845 AR 2ndCyc. run. OUT AR 2nd cycle running
2846 AR 3rdCyc. run. OUT AR 3rd cycle running
2847 AR 4thCyc. run. OUT AR 4th or higher cycle running
2848 AR ADT run. OUT AR cycle is running in ADT mode
2851 AR CLOSE Cmd. OUT AR: Close command
2852 AR Close1.Cyc1p OUT AR: Close command after 1pole, 1st cycle
2853 AR Close1.Cyc3p OUT AR: Close command after 3pole, 1st cycle
2854 AR Close 2.Cyc OUT AR: Close command 2nd cycle (and higher)
2857 AR CLOSE RDT TD OUT AR: RDT Close command after TDEADxTRIP
2861 AR T-Recl. run. OUT AR: Reclaim time is running
2862 AR successful OUT AR successful
2864 AR 1p Trip Perm OUT AR: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR
2865 AR Sync.Request OUT AR: Synchro-check request
2871 AR TRIP 3pole OUT AR: TRIP command 3pole
2889 AR 1.CycZoneRel OUT AR 1st cycle zone extension release
2890 AR 2.CycZoneRel OUT AR 2nd cycle zone extension release
2891 AR 3.CycZoneRel OUT AR 3rd cycle zone extension release
2892 AR 4.CycZoneRel OUT AR 4th cycle zone extension release
2893 AR Zone Release OUT AR zone extension (general)
2894 AR Remote Close OUT AR Remote close signal send
320 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.15 Synchronism and voltage check (optional)
The synchronism and voltage check function ensures, when switching a line onto a
busbar, that the stability of the network is not endangered. The voltage of the feeder
to be energized is compared to that of the busbar to check conformances in terms of
magnitude, phase angle and frequency within certain tolerances. Optionally, deener-
gization of the feeder can be checked before it is connected to an energized busbar
(or vice versa).
The synchronism check can either be conducted only for automatic reclosure, only for
manual closure (this includes also closing via control command) or in both cases. Dif-
ferent close permission (release) criteria can also be programmed for automatic and
manual closure.
Synchro check is also possible without external matching transformers if a power
transformer is located between the measuring points.
Closing is released for synchronous or asynchronous system conditions. In the latter
case, the device determines the time for issuing the close command such that the volt-
ages are identical the instant the breaker poles make contact.
General For comparing the two voltages, the synchro check uses the voltages Usy1 and Usy2. If
the voltage transformers for the protective functions Usy1 are connected to the outgo-
ing feeder side, the Usy2 has to be connected to a busbar voltage.
If, however, the voltage transformers for the protective functions Usy1 are connected to
the busbar side, the Usy2 has to be connected to a feeder voltage.
Usy2 may be any phase-to-earth or phase-to-phase voltage (see Section 2.1.2.1 at
margin heading Voltage Connection).
Figure 2-140 Synchronism check on closing Example
7SA6 Manual 321

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
If a power transformer is located between the feeder voltage transformers and the
busbar voltage transformers (Figure 2-141), its vector group can be compensated for
by the 7SA6 relay, so that no external matching transformers are necessary.
Figure 2-141 Synchronism check across a transformer Example
The synchronism check function in the 7SA6 usually operates in conjunction with the
integrated automatic reclose, manual close, and the control functions of the relay. It is
also possible to employ an external automatic reclosing system. In such a case signal
exchange between the devices is accomplished via binary inputs and outputs (see
Figure 2-142).
When closing via the integrated control function, the configured interlocking conditions
may have to be verified before checking the conditions for synchronism. After the syn-
chronism check grants the release, the interlocking conditions are not checked a
second time.
Furthermore, switching is possible with synchronous or asynchronous system condi-
tions or both. Synchronous switching means that the closing command is issued as
soon as the critical values (voltage magnitude difference AR maxVolt.Diff or MC
maxVolt.Diff, angle difference AR maxAngleDiff or MC maxAngleDiff and
frequency difference AR maxFreq.Diff or MC maxFreq.Diff) lie within the set tol-
erances. For switching with asynchronous system conditions, the device calculates
the correct timing of the closing command from the angle difference AR
maxAngleDiff or MC maxAngleDiff and the frequency difference AR
maxFreq.Diff or MC maxFreq.Diff so that the angle difference of the voltages
(between busbar and feeder) is nearly 0 at the instant the circuit breaker primary con-
tacts close. For this purpose, the device must be informed of the operating time of the
circuit breaker for closing. Different frequency limit thresholds apply to switching under
synchronism and asynchronous conditions. If closing is permitted exclusively under
synchronous system conditions, the frequency difference limit for this condition can be
set. If closing is permitted under synchronous as well as under asynchronous system
conditions, a frequency difference below 0.01 Hz is treated as a synchronous condi-
tion, a higher frequency difference value can then be set for closing under asynchro-
nous system conditions.
322 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The synchro check function only operates when it is requested to do so. Various pos-
sibilities exist for this purpose:
Measuring request from the internal automatic reclosure device. If the internal au-
tomatic reclosing function is set accordingly (one or more reclosing attempts set to
synchronism check, see also Section 2.14.2), the measuring request is accom-
plished internally. The release conditions for automatic reclosing apply (parameter
AR...).
Request to execute a check synchronism measurement from an external automatic
reclosure device. The measuring request must be activated via the binary input
>Sync. Start AR (No. 2906). The release conditions for automatic reclosing
apply (parameter AR...).
Measuring request from the manual CLOSE detection. The manual CLOSE detec-
tion of the central function control (Section 2.23.1) issues a measuring request pro-
vided this was configured in the power system data 2 (Section 2.1.4.1, address
1151). This requires the device to be informed of the manual closing via binary
input >Manual Close (No 356). The release conditions for manual closure
apply (parameter MC...).
Request to execute a check synchronism measurement from an external closing
command. Binary input >Sync. Start MC (No. 2905) fulfills this purpose.
Unlike the >Manual Close (see previous paragraph), this merely affects the
measuring request to the synchronism check function, but not other integrated
manual CLOSE function such as instantaneous tripping when switching onto a fault
(e.g. overreaching zone for distance protection or accelerated tripping of a time
overcurrent stage). The release conditions for manual closure apply (parameter
MC...).
Measuring request from the integrated control function via control keys or via the
serial interface using DIGSI on a PC or from a control centre. The release condi-
tions for manual closure apply (parameter MC...).
The synchronism-check function gives permission for passage Sync. release
(No. 2951) of the closing command to the required function. Furthermore, a separate
closing command is available as output indication Sync.CloseCmd (No. 2961).
The check of the release conditions is limited by an adjustable synchronous monitor-
ing time T-SYN. DURATION. The configured conditions must be fulfilled within this
time. If they are not, the synchronism will not be checked. A new synchronism check
sequence requires a new request.
The device generates messages if, after a request to check synchronism, the condi-
tions for release are not fulfilled, i.e. if the absolute voltage difference AR
maxVolt.Diff or. MC maxVolt.Diff, frequency difference AR maxFreq.Diff or
MC maxFreq.Diff or angle difference AR maxAngleDiff or MC maxAngleDiff
lie outside the permissible limit values. A precondition for these indications is that volt-
ages within the operating range of the relay are available. When a closing command
originates from the integrated control function and the conditions for synchronism are
not fulfilled, the command is cancelled, i.e. the control function outputs CO (refer
also to Section 2.25.1).
7SA6 Manual 323

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
324 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-142 Synchro check logic
7SA6 Manual 325

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Operating Modes The closing check for automatic reclosing is possible in one of the following operating
modes:
AR SYNC-CHECK Release at synchronism, that is when the critical
values AR maxVolt.Diff, AR maxFreq.Diff and
AR maxAngleDiff lie within the set limits.
AR Usy1<Usy2> Release if measuring point Usy1< is de-energised and
the measuring point Usy2> is energised.
AR Usy1>Usy2< Release if measuring point Usy1> is energised and the
measuring point Usy2< is de-energised.
AR Usy1<Usy2< Release if measuring point Usy1< is de-energised and
the measuring point Usy2< is also de-energised.
AR OVERRIDE Release without any check.
The closing check for manual reclosing is possible in one of the following operating
modes:
MC SYNCHR Release at synchronism, that is when the critical
values MC maxVolt.Diff, MC maxFreq.Diff and
MC maxAngleDiff lie within the set limits.
MC Usy1< Usy2> Release if measuring point Usy1< is de-energised and
the measuring point Usy2> is energised.
MC Usy1> Usy2< Release if measuring point Usy1> is energised and the
measuring point Usy2< is de-energised.
MC Usy1< Usy2< Release if measuring point Usy1< is de-energised and
the measuring point Usy2< is also de-energised.
MC OVERRIDE Release without any check.
Each of these conditions can be enabled or disabled individually; combinations are
also possible, e.g. release if AR Usy1<Usy2> or AR Usy1>Usy2< are fulfilled. Com-
bination of AR OVERRIDE with other parameters is, of course, not reasonable (see
also Figure 2-142).
The release conditions can be configured individually for automatic reclosing or for
manual closing or for closing via control commands. For example, manual closing and
control closing can be allowed in cases of synchronism or dead line, whilst, before an
automatic reclose attempt dead line conditions are only checked at one line end and
after the automatic reclose attempt only synchronism at the other end.
Dead-line Closing To release the closing command to couple a dead overhead line to a live busbar, the
following conditions are checked:
Is the feeder voltage below the set value Dead Volt. Thr.?
Is the busbar voltage above the setting value Live Volt. Thr. but below the
maximum voltage Umax?
Is the frequency within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz?
After successful check the closing command is released.
Corresponding conditions apply when switching a live line onto a dead busbar or a
dead line onto a dead busbar.
326 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Closing under Before releasing a closing command at synchronous conditions, the following condi-
Synchronous tions are checked:
SystemConditions Is the busbar voltage above the setting value Live Volt. Thr. but below the
Is the feeder voltage above the setting value Live Volt. Thr. but below the
Is the voltage difference |Usy1 Usy2| within the permissible tolerance AR
maxVolt.Diff or MC maxVolt.Diff?
Are the two frequencies fsy1 and fsy2 within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz?
Does the frequency difference |fsy1 fsy2| lie within the permissible tolerance AR
maxFreq.Diff or MC maxFreq.Diff?
Does the angle difference |sy1 sy2| lie within the permissible tolerance AR
maxAngleDiff or MC maxAngleDiff?
To check whether these conditions are fulfilled for a certain minimum time, you can set
this minimum time as T SYNC-STAB. Checking the synchronism conditions can also
be confined to the a maximum monitoring time T-SYN. DURATION. This implies that
the conditions must be fulfilled within the time T-SYN. DURATION for the duration of
T SYNC-STAB. This the case, the closing release is granted.
Closing under Before releasing a closing command at asynchronous conditions, the following condi-
Asynchronous tions are checked:
Systemconditions Is the busbar voltage above the setting value Live Volt. Thr. but below the
Is the feeder voltage above the setting value Live Volt. Thr. but below the
Is the voltage difference |Usy1 Usy2| within the permissible tolerance AR
maxVolt.Diff or MC maxVolt.Diff?
Are the two frequencies fsy1 and fsy2 within the permitted operating range fN 3 Hz?
Does the frequency difference |fsy1 fsy2| lie within the permissible tolerance AR
maxFreq.Diff or MC maxFreq.Diff?
When the check has been terminated successfully, the device determines the next
synchronizing time from the angle difference and the frequency difference. The close
command is issued at synchronization time minus the operating time of the circuit
breaker.
7SA6 Manual 327

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Preconditions When setting the general power system data (Power system data 1, refer to Section
2.1.2.1) a number of parameters regarding the measured quantities and the operating
mode of the synchronism check function must be applied.
This concerns the following parameters:
203 Unom PRIMARY Nominal primary voltage of the voltage transformers
for the protective functions (phase-to-phase) in kV,
measuring point Usy1;
204 Unom SECONDARY Nominal secondary voltage of the voltage transformers
for the protective functions (phase-phase) in V, mea-
suring point Usy1;
210 U4 transformer Voltage measuring input U4 must be set to Usy2
transf.;
212 Usy2 connection voltage connection of the measuring point Usy2 (e.g.
UL1L2),
214 Usy2-Usy1 the phase displacement between the voltages Usy2 and
Usy1 if a power transformer is switched in between;
215 Usy1/Usy2 ratio the ratio between the secondary voltage Usy1 to
voltage Usy2 under nominal condition;
230 Rated Frequency the operating range of the synchronism check refers to
the nominal frequency of the power system (fN 3 Hz);
1103 FullScaleVolt. Nominal operational voltage of the primary power
system (phase-phase) in kV;
and, if closing at asynchronous system conditions is allowed,
239 T-CB close the closing time of the circuit breaker.
WARNING!
Closing at Asynchronous System Conditions!
Closing under asynchronous system conditions requires the closing time of the circuit
breaker to be set correctly in the Power System Data 1 (address 239).
Otherwise, faulty synchronization may occur.
328 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
General The synchronism check can only operate if it has been set to Enabled and parameter
U4 transformer (address 210) to Usy2 transf. during configuration of the
device scope (address 135).
The measured values of synchronism check (636 Udiff =, 637 Usy1=, 638
Usy2=, 647 F-diff=, 649 F-sy1 =, 646 F-sy2 = and 648 dif=)
are only available if the synchronism check is in service.
Different interrogation conditions can be parameterized for automatic reclosure on the
one hand and for manual closure on the other hand. Each closing command is con-
sidered a manual reclosure if it was initiated via the integrated control function or via
a serial interface.
The general limit values for synchronism check are set at address 3501 to 3508. Ad-
ditionally, addresses 3510 to 3519 are relevant for automatic reclosure, addresses
3530 to 3539 are relevant for manual closure. Moreover, address 3509 is relevant for
closure via the integrated control function.
The complete synchronism check function is switched ON or OFF in address 3501 FCT
Synchronism. If switched off, the synchronism check does not verify the synchroni-
zation conditions and release is not granted. You can also set ON:w/o CloseCmd:
the CLOSE command is in this case not included in the common device alarm Relay
CLOSE (No. 510), but the alarm Sync.CloseCmd (No. 2961) is issued.
Address 3502 Dead Volt. Thr. indicates the voltage threshold below which the
feeder or the busbar can safely be considered de-energised (for checking a de-ener-
gised feeder or busbar). The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be
entered as a primary value when parameterising with a PC and DIGSI. Depending on
the VT connection these are phase-to-earth voltages or phase-to-phase voltages.
The voltage above which the feeder or busbar is regarded as being definitely ener-
gised is set under address 3503 Live Volt. Thr. (for energised line or busbar
check and for the lower limit of synchronism check). It must be set below the minimal
anticipated operational undervoltage. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This
Depending on the VT connection these are phase-to-earth voltages or phase-to-
phase voltages.
The maximum permissible voltage for the operating range of the synchronism check
function is set in address 3504 Umax. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This
Depending on the VT connection these are phase-to-earth voltages or phase-to-
phase voltages.
Verification of the release conditions via synchronism check can be limited to a con-
figurable synchronous monitoring time T-SYN. DURATION (address 3507). The con-
figured conditions must be fulfilled within this time. If not, closure will not be released.
If this time is set to , the conditions will be checked until they are fulfilled or the mea-
surement request is cancelled.
If the conditions for synchronous operation must be checked to be maintained for a
certain duration, this minimum duration T SYNC-STAB can be set in address 3508.
7SA6 Manual 329

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Synchronism Addresses 3510 to 3519 are relevant to the check conditions before automatic reclo-
conditions for sure of the circuit breaker. When setting the parameters for the internal automatic re-
automatic closing function (Section 2.14.2), it is decided with which automatic reclosing cycle
reclosure synchronism and voltage check should be carried out.
Address 3510 Op.mode with AR determines whether closing under asynchronous
system conditions is allowed for automatic reclosure. Set this parameter to with T-
CB close to allow asynchronous closing; the relay will then consider the circuit
breaker closing time before determining the correct instant for the close command.
Remember that closing under asynchronous system conditions is allowed only if the
circuit breaker closing time is set correctly (see above under Preconditions)! If you
wish to permit automatic reclosure only under synchronous system conditions, set this
address to w/o T-CB close.
The permissible difference between the voltages is set in address 3511 AR
maxVolt.Diff. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered
as a primary value when parameterising with a PC and DIGSI. Depending on the VT
connection these are phase-to-earth voltages or phase-to-phase voltages.
The permissible frequency difference between the voltages is set in address 3512 AR
maxFreq.Diff, the permissible phase angle difference in address 3513 AR
maxAngleDiff.
The further release conditions for automatic reclosing are set at addresses 3515 to
3519.
The following addresses mean:
3515 AR SYNC-CHECK both measuring points Usy1 and Usy2 must be ener-
gised (Live Volt. Thr., address 3503); the syn-
chronism conditions are checked i.e. AR
maxVolt.Diff (address 3511), AR maxFreq.Diff
(address 3512) and AR maxAngleDiff (address
3513). This setting is only possible in DIGSI under
Display Additional Settings;
3516 AR Usy1<Usy2> the measuring point Usy1 must be de-energised (Dead
Volt. Thr., address 3502), measuring point Usy2
must be energised (Live Volt. Thr., address
3503) ;
3517 AR Usy1>Usy2< the measuring point Usy1 must be energised (Live
must be de-energised (Dead Volt. Thr., address
3502);
3518 AR Usy1<Usy2< both measuring points Usy1 and Usy2 must be de-ener-
gised (Dead Volt. Thr., address 3502);
3519 AR OVERRIDE Automatic reclosure is released without any check.
The five possible release conditions are independent from each other and can be
combined.
330 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Synchronism Addresses 3530 to 3539 are relevant to the check conditions before manual closure
conditions for and closing via control command of the circuit breaker. When setting the general pro-
manual closure and tection data (Power System Data 2, Section 2.1.4.1) it was already decided at address
control command 1151 whether synchronism and voltage check should be carried out before manual
closing. With the following setting in address MAN. CLOSE = w/o Sync-check, no
checks are performed before manual closing.
For commands through the integrated control (local, DIGSI, serial interface), address
3509 SyncCB determines whether synchronism checks will be performed or not. This
address also informs the device to which switching device of the control the synchro-
nising request refers. You can select from the switching devices which are available
for the integrated control. Choose the circuit breaker to be operated via the synchro-
nism check. This is usually the circuit breaker which is operated in case of manual
closing or automatic reclosure. If you set SyncCB = none here, a CLOSE command
via the integrated control will be carried out without synchronism check.
Address 3530 Op.mode with MC determines whether closing under asynchronous
system conditions is allowed for manual closing or reclosure via control command. Set
this parameter to with T-CB close to allow asynchronous closing; the relay will
then consider the circuit breaker closing time before determining the correct instant for
the close command. Remember that closing under asynchronous system conditions
is allowed only if the circuit breaker closing time is set correctly (see above under Pre-
conditions)! If you wish to permit manual closure or closing via control command only
under synchronous system conditions, set this address to w/o T-CB close.
The permissible difference between the voltages is set in address 3531 MC
maxVolt.Diff. The setting is applied in Volts secondary. This value can be entered
as a primary value when parameterising with a PC and DIGSI. Depending on the VT
connection these are phase-to-earth voltages or phase-to-phase voltages.
The permissible frequency difference between the voltages is set at address 3532 MC
maxFreq.Diff, the permissible phase angle difference at address 3533 MC
maxAngleDiff.
The further release conditions for manual reclosing or reclosure via control command
are set under addresses 3535 to 3539.
7SA6 Manual 331

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
The following addresses mean:

3535 MC SYNCHR both measuring points Usy1 and Usy2 must be ener-
gised (Live Volt. Thr., address 3503); the syn-
chronism conditions are checked i.e. MC
maxVolt.Diff (address 3531), MC maxFreq.Diff
(address 3532) and MC maxAngleDiff (address
3533). This parameter can only be altered in DIGSI at
Display Additional Settings;
3536 MC Usy1< Usy2> the measuring point Usy1 must be de-energised (Dead
must be energised (Live Volt. Thr., address
3503) ;
3537 MC Usy1> Usy2< the measuring point Usy1 must be energised (Live
must be de-energised (Dead Volt. Thr., address
3502);
3538 MC Usy1< Usy2< both measuring points Usy1 and Usy2 must be de-ener-
gised (Dead Volt. Thr., address 3502);
3539 MC OVERRIDE Manual closing or closing via control command is re-
leased without any check.
The five possible release conditions are independent from each other and can be
combined.
Note
The closing functions of the device issue individual output indications for the corre-
sponding close command. Be sure that the output indications are assigned to the
correct output relays.
No. 2851 AR CLOSE Cmd. for CLOSE via command of the automatic reclosure,
No. 562 Man.Close Cmd for manual CLOSE via binary input,
No. 2961 Sync.CloseCmd for CLOSE via synchronism check (not required if syn-
chronism check releases the other CLOSE commands),
No. 7329 CB1-TEST close for CLOSE by circuit breaker test,
additionally CLOSE command via control, e.g. Brk Close.
No. 510 Relay CLOSE general CLOSE command. It comprises all CLOSE com-
mands described above.
332 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Notes on the The most important information of the device is briefly explained in so far as it cannot
Information List be interpreted in the following information lists or described in detail in the foregoing
text.
>Sync. Start MC (No. 2905)

Binary input which enables direct initiation of the synchronism check with setting pa-
rameters for manual close. This initiation with setting parameter for manual close has
always precedence if binary inputs >Sync. Start MC (No. 2905) and >Sync.
Start AR (No. 2906, see below) are activated at the same time.
>Sync. Start AR (No 2906)

Measuring request from an external automatic reclosure device. The parameters of
synchronism check set for automatic reclosure are valid here.
Sync. req.CNTRL (No 2936)

Measurement request of the control function; this request is evaluated on event-trig-
gered basis and only generated if the control issues a measurement request.
Sync. release (No 2951)

Release signal to an external automatic reclosure device.
2.15.3 Settings
ditional Settings.

3501 FCT Synchronism ON ON Synchronism and Voltage Check
OFF function
ON:w/o CloseCmd
3502 Dead Volt. Thr. 1 .. 100 V 5V Voltage threshold dead line / bus
3503 Live Volt. Thr. 20 .. 125 V 90 V Voltage threshold live line / bus
3504 Umax 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum permissible voltage
3507 T-SYN. DURATION 0.01 .. 600.00 sec; 1.00 sec Maximum duration of synchro-
nism-check
3508 T SYNC-STAB 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Synchronous condition stability
timer
3509 SyncCB (Setting options depend None Synchronizable circuit breaker
on configuration)
3510 Op.mode with AR with T-CB close w/o T-CB close Operating mode with AR
w/o T-CB close
3511 AR maxVolt.Diff 1.0 .. 60.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference
3512 AR maxFreq.Diff 0.03 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
3513 AR maxAngleDiff 2 .. 80 10 Maximum angle difference
7SA6 Manual 333

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

3515A AR SYNC-CHECK YES YES AR at Usy2>, Usy1>, and Synchr.
NO
3516 AR Usy1<Usy2> YES NO AR at Usy1< and Usy2>
NO
3517 AR Usy1>Usy2< YES NO AR at Usy1> and Usy2<
NO
3518 AR Usy1<Usy2< YES NO AR at Usy1< and Usy2<
NO
3519 AR OVERRIDE YES NO Override of any check before AR
NO
3530 Op.mode with MC with T-CB close w/o T-CB close Operating mode with Man.Cl
w/o T-CB close
3531 MC maxVolt.Diff 1.0 .. 60.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference
3532 MC maxFreq.Diff 0.03 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
3533 MC maxAngleDiff 2 .. 80 10 Maximum angle difference
3535A MC SYNCHR YES YES Manual Close at Usy2>, Usy1>,
NO and Synchr
3536 MC Usy1< Usy2> YES NO Manual Close at Usy1< and
NO Usy2>
3537 MC Usy1> Usy2< YES NO Manual Close at Usy1> and
NO Usy2<
3538 MC Usy1< Usy2< YES NO Manual Close at Usy1< and
NO Usy2<
3539 MC OVERRIDE YES NO Override of any check before
NO Man.Cl
334 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

formation
2901 >Sync. on SP >Switch on synchro-check function
2902 >Sync. off SP >Switch off synchro-check function
2903 >BLOCK Sync. SP >BLOCK synchro-check function
2905 >Sync. Start MC SP >Start synchro-check for Manual Close
2906 >Sync. Start AR SP >Start synchro-check for AR
2907 >Sync. synch SP >Sync-Prog. Live bus / live line / Sync
2908 >Usy1>Usy2< SP >Sync-Prog. Usy1>Usy2<
2909 >Usy1<Usy2> SP >Sync-Prog. Usy1<Usy2>
2910 >Usy1<Usy2< SP >Sync-Prog. Usy1<Usy2<
2911 >Sync. o/ride SP >Sync-Prog. Override ( bypass )
2930 Sync. on/off BI IntSP Synchro-check ON/OFF via BI
2931 Sync. OFF OUT Synchro-check is switched OFF
2932 Sync. BLOCK OUT Synchro-check is BLOCKED
2934 Sync. faulty OUT Synchro-check function faulty
2935 Sync.Tsup.Exp OUT Synchro-check supervision time expired
2936 Sync. req.CNTRL OUT Synchro-check request by control
2941 Sync. running OUT Synchronization is running
2942 Sync.Override OUT Synchro-check override/bypass
2943 Synchronism OUT Synchronism detected
2944 SYNC Usy1>Usy2< OUT SYNC Condition Usy1>Usy2< true
2945 SYNC Usy1<Usy2> OUT SYNC Condition Usy1<Usy2> true
2946 SYNC Usy1<Usy2< OUT SYNC Condition Usy1<Usy2< true
2947 Sync. Udiff> OUT Sync. Voltage diff. greater than limit
2948 Sync. fdiff> OUT Sync. Freq. diff. greater than limit
2949 Sync. -diff> OUT Sync. Angle diff. greater than limit
2951 Sync. release OUT Synchronism release (to ext. AR)
2961 Sync.CloseCmd OUT Close command from synchro-check
2970 SYNC fsy2>> OUT SYNC frequency fsy2 > (fn + 3Hz)
2971 SYNC fsy2<< OUT SYNC frequency fsy2 < (fn + 3Hz)
2972 SYNC fsy1>> OUT SYNC frequency fsy1 > (fn + 3Hz)
2973 SYNC fsy1<< OUT SYNC frequency fsy1 < (fn + 3Hz)
2974 SYNC Usy2>> OUT SYNC voltage Usy2 >Umax (P.3504)
2975 SYNC Usy2<< OUT SYNC voltage Usy2 (P.3503)
2976 SYNC Usy1>> OUT SYNC voltage Usy1 >Umax (P.3504)
2977 SYNC Usy1<< OUT SYNC voltage Usy1 (P.3503)
2978 SYNC Usy2>Usy1 OUT SYNC Udiff too large (Usy2>Usy1)
2979 SYNC Usy2<Usy1 OUT SYNC Udiff too large (Usy2<Usy1)
2980 SYNC fsy2>fsy1 OUT SYNC fdiff too large (fsy2>fsy1)
2981 SYNC fsy2<fsy1 OUT SYNC fdiff too large (fsy2<fsy1)
2982 SYNC sy2>sy1 OUT SYNC PHIdiff too large (PHIsy2>PHIsy1)
2983 SYNC sy2<sy1 OUT SYNC PHIdiff too large (PHIsy2<PHIsy1)
7SA6 Manual 335

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.16 Under and over-voltage protection (optional)
Voltage protection has the function of protecting electrical equipment against under-
voltage and overvoltage. Both operational states are unfavourable as overvoltage may
cause, for example, insulation problems or undervoltage may cause stability prob-
lems.
The overvoltage protection in the 7SA6 detects the phase voltages UL1-E, UL2-E and
UL3-E, the phase-to-phase voltages UL1-L2, UL2-L3 and UL3-L1, as well as the displace-
ment voltage 3U0. Instead of the displacement voltage any other voltage that is con-
nected to the fourth voltage input U4 of the device can be detected. Furthermore, the
device calculates the positive sequence system voltage and the negative sequence
system voltage so that the symmetrical components are also monitored. Here com-
pounding is also possible which calculates the voltage at the remote line end.
The undervoltage protection can also use the phase voltages UL1-E, UL2-E and UL3-E,
the phase-to-phase voltages UL1-L2, UL2-L3 and UL3-L1, as well as the positive sequence
system.
These voltage protection functions can be combined according to the user's require-
ments. They can be switched on or off separately, or used for alarm purposes only. In
the latter case the respective trip commands do not appear. Each voltage protection
function is two-stage, i.e. it is provided with two threshold setting stages, each one with
its respective time delay.
Abnormally high voltages often occur e.g. in low loaded, long distance transmission
lines, in islanded systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load
shutdown of a generator from the system. Even if compensation reactors are used to
avoid line overvoltages by compensation of the line capacitance and thus reduction of
the overvoltage, the overvoltage will endanger the insulation if the reactors fail (e.g.
due to fault clearance). The line must be deenergized within very short time.
The undervoltage protection can be applied, for example, for disconnection or load
shedding tasks in a system. Furthermore, this protection scheme can detect menacing
stability problems. With induction machines undervoltages have an effect on the sta-
bility and permissible torque thresholds.
2.16.1 Overvoltage Protection
Overvoltage Figure 2-143 depicts the logic diagram of the phase voltage stages. The fundamental
PhaseEarth frequency is numerically filtered from each of the three measuring voltages so that har-
monics or transient voltage peaks are largely eliminated. Two threshold stages Uph-
e> and Uph-e>> are compared with the voltages. If a phase voltage exceeds these
thresholds it is indicated phase-segregated. Furthermore, a general pickup indication
Uph-e> Pickup Uph-e>> Pickup is given. The drop-out to pickup ratio can
be set (Uph-e>(>) RESET).
Every stage starts a time delay which is common to all phases. Expiry of the respective
time delay T Uph-e> or T Uph-e>> is signalled and usually results in the trip
command Uph-e>(>) TRIP.
The overvoltage protection phaseearth can be blocked via a binary input >Uph-
e>(>) BLK.
336 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-143 Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection for phase voltage
Overvoltage The phasephase overvoltage protection operates just like the phaseearth protection
PhasePhase except that it detects phasetophase voltages. Accordingly, phasetophase voltag-
es which have exceeded one of the stage thresholds Uph-ph> or Uph-ph>>are also
indicated. Beyond this, Figure 2-143 applies in principle.
The phasephase overvoltage protection can also be blocked via a binary input
>Uph-ph>(>) BLK.
7SA6 Manual 337

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Overvoltage The device calculates the positive sequence system according to its defining equation
Positive Sequence
U1 = 1/3(UL1 + aUL2 + a2UL3)
System U1
where a = ej120.
The resulting positive sequence voltage is fed to the two threshold stages U1> and
U1>> (see Figure 2-144). Combined with the associated time delays T U1> and T
U1>> these stages form a two-stage overvoltage protection for the positive sequence
system. Here too, the drop-out to pickup ratio can be set.
The overvoltage protection for the positive sequence system can also be blocked via
a binary input >U1>(>) BLK.
Figure 2-144 Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection for the positive sequence voltage system
338 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Overvoltage U1 The overvoltage protection for the positive sequence system may optionally operate
with Configurable with compounding. The compounding calculates the positive sequence system of the
Compounding voltages at the remote line end. This option is thus particularly well suited for detecting
a steady-state voltage increase caused by long transmission lines operating at weak
load or no load due to the capacitance per unit length (Ferranti effect). In this case the
overvoltage condition exists at the other line end but it can only be removed by switch-
ing off the local line end.
For calculating the voltage at the opposite line end, the device requires the line data
(inductance per unit length, capacitance per unit length, line angle, line length) which
were entered in the Power System Data 2 (Section 2.1.4.1) during configuration.
Compounding is only available if address 137 is set to Enabl. w. comp.. In this
case the calculated voltage at the other line end is also indicated in the operational
measured values.
Note
Compounding is not suited for lines with series capacitors.
The voltage at the remote line end is calculated from the voltage measured at the local
line end and the flowing current by means of a PI equivalent circuit diagram (refer also
to Figure 2-145).
with
UEnd the calculated voltage at the remote line end,
UMeas the measured voltage at the local line end,
IMeas the measured current at the local line end,
CL the service capacitance of the line,
RL the ohmic service resistance of the line,
LL the line inductance.
Figure 2-145 PI equivalent diagram for compounding
7SA6 Manual 339

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Overvoltage The device calculates the negative sequence system voltages according to its defining
Negative Sequence equation:
System U2
U2 = 1/3(UL1 + a2UL2 + aUL3)
where a = ej120.
The resulting negative sequence voltage is fed to the two threshold stages U2> and
U2>>. Figure 2-146 shows the logic diagram. By combining the associated time delays
T U2> and T U2>> a two-stage overvoltage protection for the negative sequence
system is formed. Here too, the drop-out to pickup ratio can be set.
Figure 2-146 Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection for the negative sequence voltage system U2
The overvoltage protection for the negative sequence system can also be blocked via
a binary input >U2>(>) BLK. The stages of the negative sequence voltage protec-
tion are automatically blocked as soon as an asymmetrical voltage failure was detect-
ed (FuseFailureMonitor, also see Section 2.22.1, margin heading Fuse Failure
Monitor (Non-symmetrical Voltages)) or when the trip of the mcb for voltage trans-
formers has been signalled via the binary input >FAIL:Feeder VT (internal indi-
cation internal blocking).
340 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
During single-pole dead time the stages of the negative sequence overvoltage protec-
tion are automatically blocked since arising negative sequence values are only influ-
enced by the asymmetrical power flow, not by the fault in the system. If the device co-
operates with an external automatic reclosure function, or if a single-pole tripping can
be triggered by a different protection system (working in parallel), the overvoltage pro-
tection for the negative sequence system must be blocked via a binary input during
single-pole tripping.
Overvoltage Zero Figure 2-147 depicts the logic diagram of the zero sequence voltage stage. The fun-
Sequence System damental frequency is numerically filtered from the measuring voltage so that the har-
3U0 monics or transient voltage peaks remain largely harmless.
The triple zero sequence voltage 3U0 is fed to the two threshold stages 3U0> and
3U0>>. Combined with the associated time delays T 3U0> and T 3U0>> these stages
form a two-stage overvoltage protection for the zero sequence system. Here too, the
drop-off to pickup ratio can be set (3U0>(>) RESET). Furthermore, a restraint delay
can be configured which is implemented by repeated measuring (approx. 3 periods).
The overvoltage protection for the zero sequence system can also be blocked via a
binary input >3U0>(>) BLK. The stages of the zero sequence voltage protection
are automatically blocked as soon as an asymmetrical voltage failure was detected
(FuseFailureMonitor, also see Section 2.22.1, margin heading Fuse Failure
Monitor (Non-symmetrical Voltages)) or when the trip of the mcb for voltage trans-
formers has been signalled via the binary input >FAIL:Feeder VT (internal indi-
cation internal blocking).
The stages of the zero sequence voltage protection are automatically blocked during
single-pole automatic reclose dead time to avoid pickup with the asymmetrical power
flow arising during this state. If the device operates with an external automatic reclo-
sure function or if single-pole tripping can be triggered by a different protection system
(operating in parallel), the overvoltage protection for the zero sequence system must
be blocked via a binary input during single-pole tripping.
According to Figure 2-147 the device calculates the voltage to be monitored:
3U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3.
This applies if no suitable voltage is connected to the fourth measuring input U4.
However, if the displacement voltage Udelta of the voltage transformer set is directly
connected to the fourth measuring input U4 of the device and this information was
entered during configuration, the device will automatically use this voltage and calcu-
late the triple zero sequence voltage.
3U0 = Uph / Udelta U4
Since the voltage transformation ratio of the voltage transformer set is usually
the factor is set to Uph / Udelta = 3/3 = 3 = 1.73. For more details, refer to Power
System Data 1 in Section 2.1.4.1 at margin heading Voltage Connections via
address 211.
7SA6 Manual 341

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-147 Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection for zero sequence voltage
Freely Selectable As the zero sequence voltage stages operate separately and independent from the
Singlephase other protective overvoltage functions they can be used for any other singlephase
Voltage voltage. Therefore the fourth voltage input U4 of the device must be assigned accord-
ingly (also see Section 2.1.2, Voltage Transformer Connection).
The stages can be blocked via a binary input >3U0>(>) BLK. Internal blocking is
not accomplished in this application case.
342 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.16.2 Undervoltage Protection
Undervoltage Figure 2-148 depicts the logic diagram of the phase voltage stages. The fundamental
PhaseEarth frequency is numerically filtered from each of the three measuring voltages so that har-
monics or transient voltage peaks are largely harmless. Two threshold stages Uph-
e< and Uph-e<< are compared with the voltages. If phase voltage falls below a
threshold it is indicated phase-segregated. Furthermore, a general pickup indication
Uph-e< Pickup Uph-e<< Pickup is given. The drop-out to pickup ratio can
be set (Uph-e<(<) RESET).
Every stage starts a time delay which is common to all phases. Expiry of the respective
time delay T Uph-e< or T Uph-e<< is signalled and results in the trip command
Uph-e<(<) TRIP.
Depending on the configuration of the substations, the voltage transformers are
located on the busbar side or on the outgoing feeder side. This results in a different
behaviour of the undervoltage protection when the line is deenergized. While the
voltage usually remains present or reappears at the busbar side after a trip command
and opening of the circuit breaker, it is switched on at the outgoing side. For the und-
ervoltage protection this results in a pickup state being present if the voltage trans-
formers are on the outgoing side. If this pickup must be reset, the current can be used
as an additional criterion (current supervision CURR.SUP. Uphe<) to achieve this
result. Undervoltage will then only be detected if, together with the undervoltage con-
dition, the minimum current PoleOpenCurrent of the corresponding phase is also
exceeded. This condition is communicated by the central function control of the
device.
The undervoltage protection phaseearth can be blocked via a binary input Uph-
e<(<) BLK. The stages of the undervoltage protection are then automatically
blocked if a voltage failure is detected (FuseFailureMonitor, also see Section
2.22.1) or if the trip of the mcb of the voltage transformers is indicated (internal block-
ing) via the binary input >FAIL:Feeder VT.
Also during a single-pole automatic reclose dead time the stages of the undervoltage
protection are automatically blocked in the pole open state. If necessary, the current
criterion will be considered, so that they do not respond to the undervoltage of the dis-
connected phase when voltage transformers are located on the outgoing side. Only
such stages are blocked during the single-pole dead time that can actually generate a
trip command according to their setting.
7SA6 Manual 343

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-148 Logic diagram of the undervoltage protection for phase voltages
344 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Undervoltage Basically, the phase-phase undervoltage protection operates like the phase-earth pro-
PhasePhase tection except that it detects phase-to-phase voltages. Accordingly, both phases are
indicated during pickup of an undervoltage stage if one of the stage thresholds Uph-
ph< or Uph-ph<< was undershot. Beyond this, Figure 2-148 applies in principle.
It is sufficient for the current criterion that current flow is detected in one of the involved
phases.
The phasephase undervoltage protection can also be blocked via a binary input
>Uphph<(<) BLK. There is an automatic blocking if the measuring voltage failure
was detected or voltage mcb tripping was indicated (internal blocking of the phases
affected by the voltage failure).
During single-pole dead time for automatic reclosure the stages of the undervoltage
protection are automatically blocked in the disconnected phase so that it does not
respond to the undervoltage of the disconnected phase provided that the voltage
transformers are located on the outgoing side. Only such stages are blocked during
the single-pole dead time that can actually initiate tripping according to their setting.
Undervoltage The device calculates the positive sequence system according to its defining equation
Positive Sequence
U1 = 1/3(UL1 + aUL2 + a2UL3)
System U1
where a = ej120.
The resulting positive sequence voltage is fed to the two threshold stages U1< and
U1<< (see Figure 2-149). Combined with the associated time delays T U1< and T
U1<< these stages form a two-stage undervoltage protection for the positive sequence
system.
Current can be used as an additional criterion for the undervoltage protection of the
positive sequence system (current supervision CURR.SUP.U1<). An undervoltage is
only detected if the current flow is detected in at least one phase together with the un-
dervoltage criterion.
The undervoltage protection for the positive sequence system can be blocked via the
binary input >U1<(<) BLK. The stages of the undervoltage protection are automat-
ically blocked if voltage failure is detected (FuseFailureMonitor, also see Section
2.22.1) or, if the trip of the mcb for the voltage transformer is indicated via the binary
input >FAIL:Feeder VT (internal blocking).
7SA6 Manual 345

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-149 Logic diagram of the undervoltage protection for positive sequence voltage system
During single-pole dead time for automatic reclosure the stages of the undervoltage
protection are automatically blocked in the positive sequence system so that they do
not respond to the reduced voltage caused by the disconnected phase in case the
voltage transformers are located on the outgoing side.
346 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
General The voltage protection can only operate if it has been set to Enabled during the con-
figuration of the device scope (address 137). Compounding is only available if
address 137 is set to Enabl. w. comp..
The overvoltage and undervoltage stages can detect phase-to-earth voltages, phase-
to-phase voltages or the symmetrical positive sequence system of the voltages; for ov-
ervoltage also the symmetrical negative sequence system, zero sequence voltage or
a different single-phase voltage can be used. Any combination is possible. Detection
procedures that are not required are switched OFF.
Note
For overvoltage protection it is particularly important to observe the setting hints:
NEVER set an overvoltage stage (UL-E, UL-L, U1) lower than an undervoltage stage.
This would put the device immediately into a state of permanent pickup which cannot
be reset by any measured value operation. As a result, operation via DIGSI or via the
front display would be impossible due to the permanent pickup!
Overvoltage The phase voltage stages can be switched ON or OFF in address 3701 Uph-e>(>).
PhaseEarth In addition to this, you can set Alarm Only, i.e. these stages operate and send
alarms but do not generate any trip command. The setting U>Alarm U>>Trip
creates in addition also a trip command only for the U>> stage.
The settings of the voltage threshold and the timer values depend on the type of ap-
plication. To detect steady-state overvoltages on long lines carrying no load, set the
Uph-e> stage (address 3702) to at least 5 % above the maximum stationary phase-
earth voltage expected during operation. Additionally, a high dropout to pickup ratio is
required (address 3709 Uph-e>(>) RESET = 0.98 presetting). This parameter can
only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. The delay time T Uph-e>
(address 3703) should be a few seconds so that overvoltages with short duration may
not result in tripping.
The Uph>> stage (address 3704) is provided for high overvoltages with short duration.
Here an adequately high pickup value is set, e.g. the 11/2-fold of the nominal phase-
earth voltage. 0.1 s to 0.2 s are sufficient for the delay time T Uph-e>> (address
3705).
Overvoltage Basically, the same considerations apply as for the phase voltage stages. These
PhasePhase stages may be used instead of the phase voltage stages or be used additionally. De-
pending on your choice, set address 3711 Uph-ph>(>) to ON, OFF, Alarm Only or
U>Alarm U>>Trip.
As phasetophase voltages are monitored, the phasetophase values are used for
the settings Uph-ph> (address 3712) and Uph-ph>> (address 3714).
For the delay times T Uph-ph> (address 3713) and T Uph-ph>> (address 3715)
the same considerations apply as above. The same is true for the dropout ratios (ad-
dress 3719 Uphph>(>) RESET). The latter setting can only be altered in DIGSI at
7SA6 Manual 347

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Overvoltage You can use the positive sequence voltage stages instead of or in addition to previous-
Positive Sequence ly mentioned overvoltage stages. Depending on your choice, set address 3731
System U1 U1>(>) to ON, OFF, Alarm Only or U>Alarm U>>Trip.
For symmetrical voltages an increase of the positive sequence system corresponds to
an AND gate of the voltages. These stages are particularly suited to the detection of
steady-state overvoltages on long, weak-loaded transmission lines (Ferranti effect).
Here too, the U1> stage (address 3732) with a longer delay time T U1> (address
3733) is used for the detection of steady-state overvoltages (some seconds), the
U1>> stage (address 3734) with the short delay time T U1>> (address 3735) is used
for the detection of high overvoltages that may jeopardise insulation.
Note that the positive sequence system is established according to its defining equa-
tion U1 = 1/3|UL1 + aUL2 + a2UL3|. For symmetrical voltages this is equivalent to a
phase-to-earth voltage.
If you want the voltage at the remote line end to be decisive for overvoltage detection,
you use the compounding feature. To do so, you must have set during the configura-
tion of the protective functions (Section 2.1.1.2) address 137 U/O VOLTAGE to
Enabl. w. comp. (enabled with compounding).
In addition, the compounding feature needs the line data, which have been set in the
Power System Data 2 (Section 2.1.4.1): at address 1110 or 1112 x', address
1114 or 1115 c' and address 1111 or 1113 Line Length, and at address 1105
Line Angle. These data are vital for a correct compounding calculation. If the values
provided here do not correspond to real conditions, the compounding may calculate a
too high voltage at the remote end, which causes the protection to pick up immediately
as soon as the measured values are applied. In such a case, the pickup state can only
be reset by switching off the measuring voltage.
Compounding can be switched ON or OFF separately for each of the U1 stages: for the
U1> stage at address 3736 U1> Compound and for the U1>> stage at address 3737
U1>> Compound.
The dropout to pickup ratio (address 3739 U1>(>) RESET) is set as high as possible
with regard to the detection of even small steady-state overvoltages. This parameter
can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
Overvoltage The negative sequence voltage stages detect asymmetrical voltages. If such voltages
Negative Sequence should cause tripping, set address 3741 U2>(>) to ON. If you want only an alarm to
System U2 be generated, set address 3741 U2>(>) to Alarm Only. If you want only one stage
to generate a trip command, choose the setting U>Alarm U>>Trip. With this setting
a trip command is output by the 2nd stage only. If negative sequence voltage protec-
tion is not required, set this parameter to OFF.
This protective function also has two stages, one being U2> (address 3742) with a
greater time delay T U2> (address 3743) for steady-state asymmetrical voltages and
the other being U2>> (address 3744) with a short delay time T U2>> (address 3745)
for high asymmetrical voltages.
Note that the negative sequence system is established according to its defining equa-
tion U2 = 1/3|UL1 + a2UL2 + aUL3|. For symmetrical voltages and two swapped
phases this is equivalent to the phasetoearth voltage value.
The dropout to pickup ratio U2>(>) RESET can be set in address 3749. This param-
348 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Zero Sequence The zero sequence voltage stages can be switched ON or OFF in address 3721
System 3U0>(>) (or Ux). They can also be set to Alarm Only, i.e. these stages operate
Overvoltage and send alarms but do not generate any trip commands. If you want a trip command
of the 2nd stage to be created anyway, the setting must be U>Alarm U>>Trip. This
protection function can be used for any other single-phase voltage which is connected
to the fourth voltage measurement input U4. Also refer to Section 2.1.2.1 and see
margin heading Voltage Transformer Connection.
This protective function also has two stages. The settings of the voltage threshold and
the timer values depend on the type of application. Here no general guidelines can be
established. The stage 3U0> (address 3722) is usually set with a high sensitivity and
a longer delay time T 3U0> (address 3723). The 3U0>> stage (address 3724) and
its delay time T 3U0>> (address 3725) allow you to implement a second stage with
less sensitivity and a shorter delay time.
Similar considerations apply if this voltage stage is used for a different voltage at the
measuring input U4.
The zero-voltage stages feature a special time stabilisation due to repeated measure-
ments allowing them to be set rather sensitive. This stabilisation can be disabled in
address 3728 3U0>(>) Stabil. if a shorter pickup time is required. This parameter
can only be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. Please consider that
sensitive settings combined with short pickup times are not recommended.
The dropout to pickup ratio 3U0>(>) RESET can be set in address 3729. This pa-
When setting the voltage values please observe the following:
If the Uen voltage of the set of voltage transformers is connected to U4 and if this
was already set in the Power System Data 1 (refer also to Section 2.1.2.1 under
margin heading Voltage Connection, address 210 U4 transformer = Udelta
transf.), the device multiplies this voltage by the matching ratio Uph / Udelta
(address 211), usually with 1.73. Therefore the voltage measured is 3Uen = 3U0.
When the voltage triangle is fully displaced, the voltage will be 3 times the phase-
to-phase voltage.
If any other voltage is connected to U4, which is not used for voltage protection, and
if this was already set in the Power System Data 1 (refer also to Section 2.1.2.1
under margin heading Voltage Connection, e.g. U4 transformer = Usy2
transf. or U4 transformer = Not connected), the device calculates the zero
sequence voltage from the phase voltages according to its definition
3U0 = |UL1 + UL2 + UL3|. When the voltage triangle is fully displaced, the voltage will
be 3 times the phase-to-phase voltage.
If any other voltage is connected to U4 , which is used for voltage protection, and if
this was already set in the Power System Data 1 (refer also to Section 2.1.2.1,
under margin heading Voltage Connection, U4 transformer = Ux
transformer), this voltage will be used for the voltage stages without any further
factors. This zero sequence voltage protection then is, in reality, a single-phase
voltage protection for any kind of voltage at U4. Note that with a sensitive setting,
i.e. close to operational values that are to be expected, not only the time delay T
3U0> (address 3723) must be greater, but also the reset ratio 3U0>(>) RESET
(address 3729) must be set as high as possible.
7SA6 Manual 349

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Undervoltage The phase voltage stages can be switched ON or OFF in address 3751 Uph-e<(<).
PhaseEarth In addition to this, you can set Alarm Only, i.e. these stages operate and send
alarms but do not generate any trip command. You can generate a trip command for
the 2nd stage only in addition to the alarm by setting U<Alarm U<<Trip.
This undervoltage protection function has two stages. The Uph-e< stage (address
3752) with a longer setting of the time T Uph-e< (address 3753) operates in the case
of minor undervoltages. However, the value set here must not be higher than the un-
dervoltage permissible in operation. In the presence of higher voltage dips, the Uph-
e<< stage (address 3754) with the delay T Uph-e<< (address 3755) becomes
active.
The dropout to pickup ratio Uph-e<(<) RESET can be set in address 3759. This pa-
The settings of the voltages and times depend on the intended use; therefore no
general recommendations for the settings can be given. For load shedding, for exam-
ple, the values are often determined by a priority grading coordination chart. In case
of stability problems, the permissible levels and durations of overvoltages must be ob-
served. With induction machines undervoltages have an effect on the permissible
torque thresholds.
If the voltage transformers are located on the line side, the measuring voltages will be
missing when the line is disconnected. To avoid that the undervoltage levels in these
cases are or remain picked up, the current criterion CURR.SUP. Uphe< (address
3758) is switched ON. With busbar side voltage transformers it can be switched OFF.
However, if the busbar is dead, the undervoltage protection will pick up and expire and
then remain in a picked-up state. It must therefore be ensured in such cases that the
protection is blocked by a binary input.
Undervoltage Basically, the same considerations apply as for the phase voltage stages. These
PhasePhase stages may replace the phase voltage stages or be used additionally. Depending on
your choice, set address 3761 Uph-ph<(<) to ON, OFF, Alarm Only or U<Alarm
U<<Trip.
As phasetophase voltages are monitored, the phasetophase values are used for
the settings Uph-ph< (address 3762) and Uph-ph<< (address 3764).
The corresponding times delay are T Uph-ph< (address 3763) and T Uphph<< (ad-
dress 3765).
The dropout to pickup ratio Uphph<(<) RESET can be set in address 3769. This pa-
cases are or remain picked up, the current criterion CURR.SUP.Uphph< (address
3768) is switched ON. With busbar side voltage transformers it can be switched OFF.
However, if the busbar is dead, the undervoltage protection will pick up and expire and
then remain in a picked-up state. It must therefore be ensured in such cases that the
protection is blocked by a binary input.
350 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Undervoltage The positive sequence undervoltage stages can be used instead of or in addition to
Positive Sequence previously mentioned undervoltage stages. Depending on your choice, set address
System U1 3771 U1<(<) to ON, OFF, Alarm Only or U<Alarm U<<Trip.
Basically, the same considerations apply as for the other undervoltage stages. Espe-
cially in case of stability problems, the positive sequence system is advantageous,
since the positive sequence system is relevant for the limit of the stable energy trans-
mission.
To achieve the two-stage condition, the U1< stage (address 3772) is combined with a
greater time delay T U1< (address 3773), and the U1<< stage (address 3774) with a
shorter time delay T U1<< (address 3775).
Note that the positive sequence system is established according to its defining equa-
tion U1 = 1/3|UL1 + aUL2 + a2UL3|. For symmetrical voltages this is equivalent to a
phase-earth voltage.
The dropout to pickup ratio U1<(<) RESET can be set in address 3779. This param-
cases are or remain picked up, the current criterion CURR.SUP.U1< (address 3778)
is switched ON. With busbar side voltage transformers it can be switched OFF. How-
ever, if the busbar is dead, the undervoltage protection will pick up and expire and then
remain in a picked-up state. It must therefore be ensured in such cases that the pro-
tection is blocked by a binary input.
2.16.4 Settings
ditional Settings.

3701 Uph-e>(>) OFF OFF Operating mode Uph-e overvolt-
Alarm Only age prot.
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3702 Uph-e> 1.0 .. 170.0 V; 85.0 V Uph-e> Pickup
3703 T Uph-e> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T Uph-e> Time Delay
3704 Uph-e>> 1.0 .. 170.0 V; 100.0 V Uph-e>> Pickup
3705 T Uph-e>> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T Uph-e>> Time Delay
3709A Uph-e>(>) RESET 0.30 .. 0.99 0.98 Uph-e>(>) Reset ratio
3711 Uph-ph>(>) OFF OFF Operating mode Uph-ph overvolt-
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3712 Uph-ph> 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 150.0 V Uph-ph> Pickup
3713 T Uph-ph> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T Uph-ph> Time Delay
3714 Uph-ph>> 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 175.0 V Uph-ph>> Pickup
3715 T Uph-ph>> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T Uph-ph>> Time Delay
3719A Uphph>(>) RESET 0.30 .. 0.99 0.98 Uph-ph>(>) Reset ratio
7SA6 Manual 351

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

3721 3U0>(>) (or Ux) OFF OFF Operating mode 3U0 (or Ux) over-
Alarm Only voltage
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3722 3U0> 1.0 .. 220.0 V; 30.0 V 3U0> Pickup (or Ux>)
3723 T 3U0> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T 3U0> Time Delay (or T Ux>)
3724 3U0>> 1.0 .. 220.0 V; 50.0 V 3U0>> Pickup (or Ux>>)
3725 T 3U0>> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T 3U0>> Time Delay (or T Ux>>)
3728A 3U0>(>) Stabil. ON ON 3U0>(>): Stabilization 3U0-Mea-
OFF surement
3729A 3U0>(>) RESET 0.30 .. 0.99 0.95 3U0>(>) Reset ratio (or Ux)
3731 U1>(>) OFF OFF Operating mode U1 overvoltage
Alarm Only prot.
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3732 U1> 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 150.0 V U1> Pickup
3733 T U1> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T U1> Time Delay
3734 U1>> 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 175.0 V U1>> Pickup
3735 T U1>> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T U1>> Time Delay
3736 U1> Compound OFF OFF U1> with Compounding
ON
3737 U1>> Compound OFF OFF U1>> with Compounding
ON
3739A U1>(>) RESET 0.30 .. 0.99 0.98 U1>(>) Reset ratio
3741 U2>(>) OFF OFF Operating mode U2 overvoltage
Alarm Only prot.
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3742 U2> 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 30.0 V U2> Pickup
3743 T U2> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T U2> Time Delay
3744 U2>> 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 50.0 V U2>> Pickup
3745 T U2>> 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T U2>> Time Delay
3749A U2>(>) RESET 0.30 .. 0.99 0.98 U2>(>) Reset ratio
3751 Uph-e<(<) OFF OFF Operating mode Uph-e undervolt-
ON
U<Alarm U<<Trip
3752 Uph-e< 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 30.0 V Uph-e< Pickup
3753 T Uph-e< 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T Uph-e< Time Delay
3754 Uph-e<< 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 10.0 V Uph-e<< Pickup
3755 T Uph-e<< 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T Uph-e<< Time Delay
3758 CURR.SUP. Uphe< ON ON Current supervision (Uph-e)
OFF
3759A Uph-e<(<) RESET 1.01 .. 1.20 1.05 Uph-e<(<) Reset ratio
352 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

3761 Uph-ph<(<) OFF OFF Operating mode Uph-ph under-
Alarm Only voltage prot.
ON
U<Alarm U<<Trip
3762 Uph-ph< 1.0 .. 175.0 V; 0 50.0 V Uph-ph< Pickup
3763 T Uph-ph< 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T Uph-ph< Time Delay
3764 Uph-ph<< 1.0 .. 175.0 V; 0 17.0 V Uph-ph<< Pickup
3765 T Uphph<< 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T Uph-ph<< Time Delay
3768 CURR.SUP.Uphph< ON ON Current supervision (Uph-ph)
OFF
3769A Uphph<(<) RESET 1.01 .. 1.20 1.05 Uph-ph<(<) Reset ratio
3771 U1<(<) OFF OFF Operating mode U1 undervoltage
Alarm Only prot.
ON
U<Alarm U<<Trip
3772 U1< 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 30.0 V U1< Pickup
3773 T U1< 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T U1< Time Delay
3774 U1<< 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 10.0 V U1<< Pickup
3775 T U1<< 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T U1<< Time Delay
3778 CURR.SUP.U1< ON ON Current supervision (U1)
OFF
3779A U1<(<) RESET 1.01 .. 1.20 1.05 U1<(<) Reset ratio

formation
10201 >Uph-e>(>) BLK SP >BLOCK Uph-e>(>) Overvolt. (phase-earth)
10202 >Uph-ph>(>) BLK SP >BLOCK Uph-ph>(>) Overvolt (phase-phase)
10203 >3U0>(>) BLK SP >BLOCK 3U0>(>) Overvolt. (zero sequence)
10204 >U1>(>) BLK SP >BLOCK U1>(>) Overvolt. (positive seq.)
10205 >U2>(>) BLK SP >BLOCK U2>(>) Overvolt. (negative seq.)
10206 >Uph-e<(<) BLK SP >BLOCK Uph-e<(<) Undervolt (phase-earth)
10207 >Uphph<(<) BLK SP >BLOCK Uphph<(<) Undervolt (phase-phase)
10208 >U1<(<) BLK SP >BLOCK U1<(<) Undervolt (positive seq.)
10215 Uph-e>(>) OFF OUT Uph-e>(>) Overvolt. is switched OFF
10216 Uph-e>(>) BLK OUT Uph-e>(>) Overvolt. is BLOCKED
10217 Uph-ph>(>) OFF OUT Uph-ph>(>) Overvolt. is switched OFF
10218 Uph-ph>(>) BLK OUT Uph-ph>(>) Overvolt. is BLOCKED
10219 3U0>(>) OFF OUT 3U0>(>) Overvolt. is switched OFF
10220 3U0>(>) BLK OUT 3U0>(>) Overvolt. is BLOCKED
10221 U1>(>) OFF OUT U1>(>) Overvolt. is switched OFF
10222 U1>(>) BLK OUT U1>(>) Overvolt. is BLOCKED
10223 U2>(>) OFF OUT U2>(>) Overvolt. is switched OFF
7SA6 Manual 353

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
10224 U2>(>) BLK OUT U2>(>) Overvolt. is BLOCKED
10225 Uph-e<(<) OFF OUT Uph-e<(<) Undervolt. is switched OFF
10226 Uph-e<(<) BLK OUT Uph-e<(<) Undervolt. is BLOCKED
10227 Uph-ph<(<) OFF OUT Uph-ph<(<) Undervolt. is switched OFF
10228 Uph-ph<(<) BLK OUT Uphph<(<) Undervolt. is BLOCKED
10229 U1<(<) OFF OUT U1<(<) Undervolt. is switched OFF
10230 U1<(<) BLK OUT U1<(<) Undervolt. is BLOCKED
10231 U</> ACTIVE OUT Over-/Under-Voltage protection is ACTIVE
10240 Uph-e> Pickup OUT Uph-e> Pickup
10241 Uph-e>> Pickup OUT Uph-e>> Pickup
10242 Uph-e>(>) PU L1 OUT Uph-e>(>) Pickup L1
10245 Uph-e> TimeOut OUT Uph-e> TimeOut
10246 Uph-e>> TimeOut OUT Uph-e>> TimeOut
10247 Uph-e>(>) TRIP OUT Uph-e>(>) TRIP command
10248 Uph-e> PU L1 OUT Uph-e> Pickup L1
10251 Uph-e>> PU L1 OUT Uph-e>> Pickup L1
10255 Uphph> Pickup OUT Uph-ph> Pickup
10256 Uphph>> Pickup OUT Uph-ph>> Pickup
10257 Uphph>(>)PU L12 OUT Uph-ph>(>) Pickup L1-L2
10260 Uphph> TimeOut OUT Uph-ph> TimeOut
10261 Uphph>> TimeOut OUT Uph-ph>> TimeOut
10262 Uphph>(>) TRIP OUT Uph-ph>(>) TRIP command
10263 Uphph> PU L12 OUT Uph-ph> Pickup L1-L2
10266 Uphph>> PU L12 OUT Uph-ph>> Pickup L1-L2
10270 3U0> Pickup OUT 3U0> Pickup
10271 3U0>> Pickup OUT 3U0>> Pickup
10272 3U0> TimeOut OUT 3U0> TimeOut
10273 3U0>> TimeOut OUT 3U0>> TimeOut
10274 3U0>(>) TRIP OUT 3U0>(>) TRIP command
10280 U1> Pickup OUT U1> Pickup
10281 U1>> Pickup OUT U1>> Pickup
10282 U1> TimeOut OUT U1> TimeOut
10283 U1>> TimeOut OUT U1>> TimeOut
10284 U1>(>) TRIP OUT U1>(>) TRIP command
354 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

formation
10290 U2> Pickup OUT U2> Pickup
10291 U2>> Pickup OUT U2>> Pickup
10292 U2> TimeOut OUT U2> TimeOut
10293 U2>> TimeOut OUT U2>> TimeOut
10294 U2>(>) TRIP OUT U2>(>) TRIP command
10300 U1< Pickup OUT U1< Pickup
10301 U1<< Pickup OUT U1<< Pickup
10302 U1< TimeOut OUT U1< TimeOut
10303 U1<< TimeOut OUT U1<< TimeOut
10304 U1<(<) TRIP OUT U1<(<) TRIP command
10310 Uph-e< Pickup OUT Uph-e< Pickup
10311 Uph-e<< Pickup OUT Uph-e<< Pickup
10312 Uph-e<(<) PU L1 OUT Uph-e<(<) Pickup L1
10315 Uph-e< TimeOut OUT Uph-e< TimeOut
10316 Uph-e<< TimeOut OUT Uph-e<< TimeOut
10317 Uph-e<(<) TRIP OUT Uph-e<(<) TRIP command
10318 Uph-e< PU L1 OUT Uph-e< Pickup L1
10321 Uph-e<< PU L1 OUT Uph-e<< Pickup L1
10325 Uph-ph< Pickup OUT Uph-ph< Pickup
10326 Uph-ph<< Pickup OUT Uph-ph<< Pickup
10327 Uphph<(<)PU L12 OUT Uphph<(<) Pickup L1-L2
10330 Uphph< TimeOut OUT Uphph< TimeOut
10331 Uphph<< TimeOut OUT Uphph<< TimeOut
10332 Uphph<(<) TRIP OUT Uphph<(<) TRIP command
10333 Uphph< PU L12 OUT Uph-ph< Pickup L1-L2
10336 Uphph<< PU L12 OUT Uph-ph<< Pickup L1-L2
7SA6 Manual 355

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.17 Frequency protection (optional)
The frequency protection function detects overfrequencies or underfrequencies in the

system or in electrical machines. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, ap-
propriate actions are initiated, such as load shedding or separating a generator from
the system.
Underfrequency is caused by increased real power demand or by a reduction of the
generated power, e.g. in the event of disconnection from the network, generator failure
or faulty operation of the power frequency control. Underfrequency protection is also
applied for generators which operate (temporarily) to an island network. This is due to
the fact that the reverse power protection cannot operate in case of a drive power fail-
ure. The generator can be disconnected from the power system by means of the un-
derfrequency protection. Underfrequency results also in increased reactive power
demand of inductive loads.
Overfrequency is caused for instance in case of load shedding, system disconnection
or malfunction of the power-frequency control. There is also a risk of self-excitation for
generators feeding long lines under no-load conditions.
Frequency Stages Frequency protection consists of the four frequency elements f1 to f4. Each element
can be set as overfrequency stage (f>) or as underfrequency stage (f<) with individual
thresholds and time delays. This ensures variable matching to the application pur-
pose.
If an element is set to a value above the rated frequency, it is automatically inter-
preted to be an overfrequency stage f>.
If an element is set to a value below the rated frequency, it is automatically inter-
preted to be an underfrequency stage f<.
If an element is set exactly to the rated frequency, it is inactive.
Each element can be blocked via binary input and also the entire frequency protection
function can be blocked.
Frequency The largest of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages is used for frequency measurement. It
measurement must amount to at least 65 % of the nominal voltage set in parameter 204, Unom
SECONDARY. Below that value frequency measurement will not take place.
Numerical filters are employed to calculate from the measured voltage a quantity that
is proportional to the frequency which is virtually linear in the specified range (fN
10 %). Filters and repeated measurements ensure that the frequency evaluation is vir-
tually free from harmonic influences and phase jumps.
An accurate and quick measurement result is obtained by considering also the fre-
quency change. When changing the frequency of the power system, the sign of the
quotient f/dt remains unchanged during several repeated measurements. If, however,
a phase jump in the measured voltage temporarily simulates a frequency deviation,
the sign of f/dt will subsequently reverse. Thus the measurement results corrupted by
a phase jump are quickly discarded.
The dropout value of each frequency element is approximately 20 mHz below (for f>)
or above (for f<) of the pickup value.
356 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Operating Ranges Frequency evaluation requires a measured quantity that can be processed. This
implies that at least a sufficiently high voltage is available and that the frequency of
this voltage is within the working range of the frequency protection.
The frequency protection selects automatically the largest of the phase-phase voltag-
es. If all three voltages are below the operating range of 65 % UN (secondary), the
frequency cannot be determined. In that case the message 5215 Freq UnderV
Blk is displayed. If the voltage sinks below this minimum value after a frequency
element has picked up, the picked up element will drop out. This implies also that all
frequency stages will drop out after a line has been switched off (with voltage trans-
formers on line side).
When connecting a measuring voltage with a frequency outside the configured thresh-
old of a frequency element, the frequency protection is immediately ready to operate.
Since the filters of the frequency measurement must first go through a transient state,
the command output time may increase slightly (approx. 1 period). This is because a
frequency element picks up only if the frequency has been detected outside the con-
figured threshold in five consecutive measurements.
The frequency range is from 25 Hz to 70 Hz. If the frequency leaves this operating
range, the frequency elements will drop out. If the frequency returns into the working
range, the measurement can be resumed provided that the measuring voltage too is
inside the working range. But if the measuring voltage is switched off, the picked up
element will drop out immediately.
Power swings In interconnected networks, frequency deviations may also be caused by power
swings. Depending on the power swing frequency the mounting location of the device
and the setting of the frequency elements, power swings may cause the frequency
protection to pickup and even to trip. In such cases out-of-step trips can not be pre-
vented by operating the distance protection with power swing blocking (see also
Section 2.3). Rather, it is reasonable to block the frequency protection once power
swings are detected. This can be accomplished via binary inputs and binary outputs
or by corresponding logic operations using the user-defined logic (CFC). If, however,
the power swing frequencies are known, tripping of the frequency protection function
can also be avoided by adapting the delay times of the frequency protection corre-
spondingly.
Pickup/Tripping Figure 2-150 shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function.
Once the frequency was reliably detected to be outside the configured thresholds of a
stage (above the setting value for f> elements or below for f< elements), a pickup
signal of the corresponding stage is generated. The decision is considered reliable if
5 measurements taken in intervals of 1/2 period yield one frequency outside the set
threshold.
After pickup, a delay time per element can be started. When the associated time has
elapsed, one trip command per element is issued. A picked up element drops out if the
cause of the pickup is no longer valid after 5 measurements or if the measuring voltage
was switched off or the frequency leaves the working range. When a frequency
element drops out, the tripping signal of of the corresponding frequency element is im-
mediately terminated, but the trip command is maintained for at least the minimum
command duration which was set for all tripping functions of the device.
Each of the four frequency elements can be blocked individually by binary inputs. The
blocking takes immediate effect. It is also possible to block the entire frequency pro-
tection function via binary input.
7SA6 Manual 357

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-150 Logic diagram of the frequency protection
358 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
General Frequency protection is only in effect and accessible if address 136 FREQUENCY
Prot. is set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the function is
not required, Disabled is to be set.
The frequency protection function features 4 frequency stages f1 to f4 each of which
can function as overfrequency stage or underfrequency stage. Each stage can be set
active or inactive. This is set in addresses:
3601 O/U FREQ. f1 for frequency stage f1,
The following 3 options are available:
Stage OFF: The stage is ineffective;
Stage ON: with Trip: The stage is effective and issues an alarm and a trip
command (after time has expired) following irregular frequency deviations;
Stage ON: Alarm only: The stage is effective and issues an alarm but no trip
command following irregular frequency deviations.
Pickup Values, The configured pickup value determines whether a frequency element is to respond
Delay Time to overfrequency or underfrequency.
If a stage is set to a value above the rated frequency, it is automatically interpreted
to be an overfrequency stage f>.
If a stage is set to a value below the rated frequency, it is automatically interpreted
to be an underfrequency stage f<.
If a stage is set exactly to the rated frequency, it is inactive.
A pickup value can be set for each stage according to above rules. The addresses and
possible setting ranges are determined by the nominal frequency as configured in the
Power System Data 1 (Section 2.1.2.1) in Rated Frequency (address 230).
Please note that none of the frequency stages is set to less than 30 mHz above (for
f>) or below (for f<) of the nominal frequency. Since the frequency stages have a hys-
teresis of approx. 20 mHz, it may otherwise happen that the element does not drop
out when returning to the nominal frequency.
7SA6 Manual 359

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Only those addresses are accessible that match the configured nominal frequency.
For each element, a trip delay time can be set:
Address 3602 f1 PICKUP pickup value for frequency stage f1 at fN = 50 Hz,
Address 3604 T f1 trip delay for frequency stage f1;
Address 3614 T f2 trip delay for frequency element f2;
Address 3624 T f3 trip delay for frequency stage f3;
Address 3634 T f4 trip delay for frequency element f4.
The set times are additional delay times not including the operating times (measuring
time, dropout time) of the protective function.
If underfrequency protection is used for load shedding purposes, then the frequency
settings relative to other feeder relays are generally based on the priority of the cus-
tomers served by the protective relay. Normally, it is required for load shedding a fre-
cuency / time grading that takes into account the importance of the consumers or con-
sumer groups.
In interconnected networks, frequency deviations may also be caused by power
swings. Depending on the power swing frequency, the mounting location of the device
and the setting of the frequency stages, it is reasonable to block the entire frequency
protection function or single stages once a power swing has been detected. The delay
times must then be co-ordinated thus that a power swing is detected before the fre-
quency protection trips.
Further application examples exist in the field of power stations. The frequency values
to be set mainly depend, also in these cases, on the specifications of the power sys-
tem/power station operator. In this context, the underfrequency protection also
ensures the power stations own demand by disconnecting it from the power system
on time. The turbo regulator regulates the machine set to the nominal speed. Conse-
quently, the station's own demands can be continuously supplied at nominal frequen-
cy.
Since the dropout threshold is 20 mHz below or above the trip frequency, the resulting
minimum trip frequency is 30 mHz above or below the nominal frequency.
A frequency increase can, for example, occur due to a load shedding or malfunction
of the speed regulation (e.g. in a stand-alone system). In this way, the frequency pro-
tection can, for example, be used as overspeed protection.
360 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.17.3 Settings

3601 O/U FREQ. f1 ON: Alarm only ON: Alarm only Over/Under Frequency Protection
ON: with Trip stage f1
OFF
3602 f1 PICKUP 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 49.50 Hz f1 Pickup
3604 T f1 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 60.00 sec T f1 Time Delay
OFF
OFF
OFF
7SA6 Manual 361

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
5203 >BLOCK Freq. SP >BLOCK frequency protection
5206 >BLOCK f1 SP >BLOCK frequency protection stage f1
5211 Freq. OFF OUT Frequency protection is switched OFF
5212 Freq. BLOCKED OUT Frequency protection is BLOCKED
5213 Freq. ACTIVE OUT Frequency protection is ACTIVE
5215 Freq UnderV Blk OUT Frequency protection undervoltage Blk
5232 f1 picked up OUT Frequency protection: f1 picked up
5236 f1 TRIP OUT Frequency protection: f1 TRIP
5240 Time Out f1 OUT Frequency protection: TimeOut Stage f1
362 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.18 Fault locator
2.18 Fault locator
The measurement of the distance to a fault is an important supplement to the protec-

tion functions. Availability of the line for power transmission within the system can be
increased when the fault is located and cleared faster.
2.18.1 Functional Description
Initiation The fault location function in the 7SA6 distance protection is a function which is inde-
Conditions pendent of the distance measurement. It has a separate measured value memory and
dedicated filter algorithms. The short-circuit protection merely has to provide a start
command to allow the selection of the valid measuring loop and the best suited time
interval for the storage of the measured signals.
The fault location function can be triggered by the trip command of the short-circuit
protection, or also by each fault detection. In the latter case, a fault location calculation
is also possible if a different protection device clears the fault. For a fault outside the
protected line, the fault location information is not always correct, as the measured
values can be distorted by e.g. intermediate infeeds.
Determination of The measured value pairs of fault currents and fault voltages (in intervals of 1/20
the Fault Location period) are stored in a cyclic buffer and frozen shortly after the trip command is issued
before any distortion of the measured values occurs due to the opening of the circuit
breaker even with very fast circuit breakers. Filtering of the measured values and the
number of impedance calculations are automatically adapted to the number of stabi-
lized measured value pairs in the determined data window. If a sufficient data window
with stabilized values could not be determined, the annunciation
Flt.Loc.invalid is issued.
The evaluation of the measured values in the short-circuit loops is carried out after the
short-circuit has been cleared. Short-circuit loops are those which caused the trip. In
the event of tripping by the earth fault protection, the three phaseearth loops are eval-
uated.
Output of the The fault locating issues the following results:

Fault Locator The short-circuit loop which was used to determine the fault reactance,
Fault reactance X in primary and secondary,
Fault resistance R in primary and secondary,
The distance to fault d in kilometres or miles of the line proportional to the reac-
tance, converted on the basis of the set line reactance per unit line length,
The distance to fault d in % of the line length, calculated on the basis of the set re-
actance per unit length and the set line length.
The fault location indicated in per cent can, at the same time, be output as BCD-code
(Binary Coded Decimal). This, however, must have been preset in address 138 during
the configuration of the protection functions (Section 2.1.1.2). A further prerequisite is
that the required number of binary outputs is allocated for this purpose.
7SA6 Manual 363

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
10 output relays are needed. They are classified as follows:

4 outputs for the units (120 + 121 + 122 + 123),
4 outputs for the tens (1020 + 1021 + 1022 + 1023),
1 output for the hundreds (10020),
1 output for the ready-state annunciation BCD dist. VALID (No. 1152).
Once a fault was located, the corresponding binary outputs pick up. Then the output
BCD dist. VALID signals that the data are now valid. The duration can be set.
In the event of a new fault, the data of the former fault are cleared automatically.
The output range extends from 0 % to 195 %. Output 197 means that a negative fault
was detected. Output 199 describes an overflow, i. e. the calculated value is higher
than the maximum possible value of 195 %.
The fault location indicated in per cent can also be output as analog value (0 mA to 20
mA). It is a prerequisite that the device is provided with (an) analog output(s) (accord-
ing to the ordering code) and that an analog output was allocated to the fault location
in address 150 to 153 during the configuration of the protection functions (Section
2.1.1.2). For more information about the analog output settings please refer to Sub-
section 2.21.
Note
The distance can only be applicable in the form of kilometres, miles or percent if the
relevant line section is homogeneous. If the line is made up of several sections with
different reactances, e.g. overhead line - cable sections, then the reactance calculated
by the fault location can be evaluated for a separate calculation of the fault distance.
Parallel Line In the case of earth faults on double circuit lines, the measured values obtained for
Measured Value calculation of the impedance are influenced by the mutual coupling of the earth imped-
Correction ance of both parallel lines. This causes measuring errors in the result of the imped-
(optional) ance computation unless special measures are taken. The device is therefore provid-
ed with a parallel line compensation function. This function takes the earth current of
the parallel line into consideration when solving the line equation, thereby compensat-
ing for the coupling influence as was the case with the derivation of the distance by
the distance protection (refer to Section 2.2.1 under Parallel Line Measured Value
Correction). The earth current of the parallel line must, of course, be connected to the
device and the current input I4 must be configured accordingly during the setting of the
Power System Data 1 (Section 2.1.2.1 under Current Transformer Connection).
The parallel line compensation only applies to faults on the protected feeder. For ex-
ternal faults, including those on the parallel line, compensation is impossible.
364 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.18 Fault locator
Correction of When faults occur on loaded lines fed from both ends (Figure 2-151), the fault voltage
Measured Values UF1 is influenced not only by the source voltage E1, but also by the source voltage E2,
for Load Current on when both voltages are applied to the common earth resistance RF. This causes mea-
Double-end suring errors in the result of the impedance computation unless special measures are
Fed Lines taken, since the current component IF2 cannot be seen at the measuring point M. For
long heavily loaded lines, this can give a significant error in the Xcomponent of the
fault impedance (the determining factor for the distance calculation).
A load compensation feature in 7SA6 is provided for the fault location calculation
which largely corrects this measurement inaccuracy for single-phase short-circuits.
Correction for the Rcomponent of the fault impedance is not possible; but the result-
ant inaccuracy is not critical, since only the Xcomponent is critical for the distance to
fault indication.
Load compensation is effective for singlephase faults. For singlephase to earth
faults, positive and zero phase sequence components of the symmetrical components
are used in the compensation.
Load compensation can be switched on or off. Off-switching is useful, for example,
during relay testing, in order to avoid influences caused by the test quantities.
Figure 2-151 Fault currents and voltages on doubleend fed lines

M : Measuring point
E1, E2 : Source voltage (EMF)
IF1, IF2 : Partial fault currents
IF1 + IF2 : Total fault current
UF1 : Fault voltage at the measuring point
RF : Common fault resistance
ZF1, ZF2 : Fault impedances
ZF1E, ZF2E : Earth fault impedances
ZS1, ZS2 : Source impedances
ZS1E, ZS2E : Earth source impedances
7SA6 Manual 365

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
General The fault location function is only in service if it was selected to Enabled during the
configuration of the device functions (Section 2.1.1.2, address 138).
If the fault location calculation is to be started by the trip command of the protection,
set address 3802 START = TRIP. In this case a fault location is only output if the
device has also issued a trip. The fault location calculation can however also be
started with each fault detection of the device (address 3802 START = Pickup). In
this case the fault location is also calculated if for example a different protection device
cleared the fault. For a fault outside the protected line, the fault location information is
not always correct, as the measured values can be distorted by e.g. intermediate in-
feeds.
To calculate the distance to fault in kilometres or miles, the device requires the reac-
tance per unit length data in /km or /mile. For correct indication of the fault location
in % of line length, the correct line length has also to be entered. These setting param-
eters were already applied with the Power System Data 2 (Section 2.1.4.1 at General
Line Data).
A prerequisite for the correct indication of the fault location furthermore is that the other
parameters that influence the calculation of the distance to fault have also been set
correctly. This concerns the following addresses
1116 RE/RL(Z1),
1117 XE/XL(Z1)
or
1120 K0 (Z1),
1121 Angle K0(Z1).
If the parallel line compensation is used, set address 3805 Paral.Line Comp to YES
(presetting for devices with parallel line compensation). Further prerequisites are that
the earth current of the parallel line has been connected to the fourth current input
I4 with the correct polarity and
the current transformer ratio I4/Iph CT (address 221) in the Power System Data
1 has been set correctly (refer also to Section 2.1.2.1 under Current Transformer
Connection) and
the parameter for the fourth current input I4 transformer has been set to In
paral. line (address 220) in the Power System Data 1 (Section 2.1.2.1 under
Current Transformer Connection) and
the mutual impedances RM/RL ParalLine and XM/XL ParalLine (addresses
1126 and 1127) have been set correctly in the general protection data (plant data
2, Section 2.1.4.1).
If load compensation is applied to single-phase faults in double-fed lines of an earthed
system, set 3806 in address Load Compensat. YES. In case high fault resistances
are expected for single-phase faults, e.g. at overhead lines without overhead earth
wire or unfavourable footing of the towers, this will improve the accuracy of the dis-
tance calculation.
If the fault location is required to be output as BCD-code, set the maximum time period
the data should be available at the outputs using address 3811 Tmax OUTPUT BCD.
If a new fault occurs, the data are terminated immediately even when it occurs before
this time has expired. Allocate the corresponding output relays as stored if a longer
366 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.18 Fault locator
time period is desired for the output. Once a fault occurred the data will be latched until
the memory is reset or a new fault is registered.
2.18.3 Settings

3802 START Pickup Pickup Start fault locator with
TRIP
3805 Paral.Line Comp NO YES Mutual coupling parall.line com-
YES pensation
3806 Load Compensat. NO NO Load Compensation
YES
3811 Tmax OUTPUT BCD 0.10 .. 180.00 sec 0.30 sec Maximum output time via BCD

formation
1114 Rpri = VI Flt Locator: primary RESISTANCE
1115 Xpri = VI Flt Locator: primary REACTANCE
1117 Rsec = VI Flt Locator: secondary RESISTANCE
1118 Xsec = VI Flt Locator: secondary REACTANCE
1119 dist = VI Flt Locator: Distance to fault
1120 d[%] = VI Flt Locator: Distance [%] to fault
1122 dist = VI Flt Locator: Distance to fault
1123 FL Loop L1E OUT_Ev Fault Locator Loop L1E
1126 FL Loop L1L2 OUT_Ev Fault Locator Loop L1L2
1132 Flt.Loc.invalid OUT Fault location invalid
1133 Flt.Loc.ErrorK0 OUT Fault locator setting error K0,angle(K0)
1143 BCD d[1%] OUT BCD Fault location [1%]
1152 BCD dist. VALID OUT BCD Fault location valid
7SA6 Manual 367

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.19 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional)
The circuit breaker failure protection provides rapid back-up fault clearance, in the
event that the circuit breaker fails to respond to a trip command from a protective func-
tion of the local circuit breaker.
General Whenever e.g. a short-circuit protection relay of a feeder issues a trip command to the
circuit breaker, this is repeated to the breaker failure protection (Figure 2-152). A timer
TBF in the breaker failure protection is started. The timer runs as long as a trip
command is present and current continues to flow through the breaker poles.
Figure 2-152 Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection

with current flow monitoring
Normally, the breaker will open and interrupt the fault current. The current monitoring
stage quickly resets (typical 10 ms) and stops the timer TBF.
If the trip command is not carried out (breaker failure case), current continues to flow
and the timer runs to its set limit. The breaker failure protection then issues a
command to trip the back-up breakers and interrupt the fault current.
The reset time of the feeder protection is not relevant because the breaker failure pro-
tection itself recognizes the interruption of the current.
For protection functions where the tripping criterion is not dependent on current (e.g.
Buchholz protection), current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the
breaker. In such cases, the circuit breaker position can be derived from the auxiliary
contacts of the breaker. Therefore, instead of monitoring the current, the condition of
the auxiliary contacts is monitored (see Figure 2-153). For this purpose, the outputs
from the auxiliary contacts must be fed to binary inputs on the relay (refer also to
Section 2.23.1).
368 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-153 Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection

controlled by circuit breaker auxiliary contact
Current Flow Each of the phase currents and an additional plausibility current (see below) are fil-
Monitoring tered by numerical filter algorithms so that only the fundamental component is used
for further evaluation.
Special measures are taken in order to detect a current interruption. In case of sinu-
soidal currents the current interruption is detected after approximately 10 ms. With
aperiodic DC current components in the fault current and/or in the current transformer
secondary circuit after interruption (e.g. current transformers with linearized core), or
saturation of the current transformers caused by the DC component in the fault cur-
rent, it can take one AC cycle before the interruption of the primary current is reliably
detected.
The currents are monitored and compared with the set threshold. Besides the three
phase currents, two further current detectors are provided in order to allow a plausibil-
ity check. For this plausibility check, a separate threshold value can be used if the con-
figuration is set accordingly (see Figure 2-154).
As plausibility current, the earth current (residual current IE (3I0) is preferably used. If
the residual current from the starpoint of the current transformer set is connected to
the device it is used. If the residual current is not available, the device calculates it with
the formula:
3 I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
Additionally, the value calculated by 7SA6 of three times the negative sequence
current 3I2 is used for plausibility check. This is calculated according to the equation:
3 I2 = IL1 + a2IL2 + aIL3
where
a = ej120.
These plausibility currents do not have any direct influence on the basic functionality
of the breaker failure protection but they allow a plausibility check in that at least two
current thresholds must have been exceeded before any of the breaker failure delay
times can be started, thus providing high security against false operation.
7SA6 Manual 369

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-154 Current flow monitoring with plausibility currents 3I0 and 3I2
Processing of the It is the central function control of the device that informs the breaker failure protection
Circuit Breaker on the position of the circuit breaker (refer also to Section 2.23.1). Evaluation of the
Auxiliary Contacts breaker auxiliary contacts is carried out in the breaker failure protection function only
when the current flow monitoring has not picked up. Once the current flow criterion has
picked up during the trip signal from the feeder protection, the circuit breaker is
assumed to be open as soon as the current disappears, even if the associated auxil-
iary contact does not (yet) indicate that the circuit breaker has opened (Figure 2-155).
This gives preference to the more reliable current criterion and avoids overfunctioning
due to a defect e.g. in the auxiliary contact mechanism or circuit. This interlock feature
is provided for each individual phase as well as for three-pole trip.
It is possible to disable the auxiliary contact criterion. If you set the parameter switch
Chk BRK CONTACT (Figure 2-157 top) to NO, the breaker failure protection can only
be started when current flow is detected. The position of the auxiliary contacts is then
not evaluated even if the auxiliary contacts are connected to the device.
370 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-155 Interlock of the auxiliary contact criterion - example for phase L1
1) if phase-segregated auxiliary contacts are available
2
) if series-connected NC contacts are available
On the other hand, current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the
circuit breaker for faults which do not cause detectable current flow (e.g. Buchholz pro-
tection). Information regarding the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts is
required in these cases to check the correct response of the circuit breaker. For this
purpose, the binary input >BF Start w/o I No. 1439 is provided (Figure 2-157
left). This input initiates the breaker failure protection even if no current flow is detect-
ed.
Common Phase Common phase initiation is used, for example, for lines with only three-pole automatic
Initiation reclosure, for transformer feeders, or if the bus-bar protection trips. This is the only
available initiation mode if the actual 7SA6 model is able to trip three-pole only.
If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection
devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two starting criteria to the
device. Besides the trip command of the external relay to the binary input >BF
Start 3pole No. 1415 it is recommended to connect also the general device
pickup to binary input >BF release No. 1432. For Buchholz protection it is rec-
ommended that the trip command is connected to the device by two separate wire
pairs.
Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel
mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input >BF
release (No. 1432) must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device
during configuration.
Figure 2-157 shows the operating principle. When the trip signal appears from any in-
ternal or external feeder protection and at least one current flow criterion (according
to Figure 2-154) is present, the breaker failure protection is initiated and the corre-
sponding delay time(s) is (are) started.
If the current criterion is not fulfilled for any of the phases, the position of the circuit
breaker auxiliary contact(s) is queried provided that this is available according to
Figure 2-156. If the circuit breaker poles have individual auxiliary contacts, the series
connection of the three normally closed (NC) auxiliary contacts is used. The circuit
breaker has operated correctly after a three-pole trip command only when none of the
phases carries current or when all three NC auxiliary contacts have closed.
Figure 2-156 illustrates how the internal signal CB pole L1 closed is created (see
Figure 2-157 left) if at least one circuit breaker pole is closed.
7SA6 Manual 371

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-156 Creation of signal "CB any pole closed"
If an internal protection function or an external protection device trips without current

flow, the breaker failure protection is initiated by the internal input Start internal w/o I,
if the trip signal comes from the internal voltage protection or frequency protection, or
by the external input >BF Start w/o I. In this case the start signal is maintained
until the circuit breaker is reported to be open by the auxiliary contact criterion.
Initiation can be blocked via the binary input >BLOCK BkrFail (e.g. during test of
the feeder protection relay).
Figure 2-157 Breaker failure protection with common phase initiation
372 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Phase Segregated Phase segregated initiation of the breaker failure protection is necessary if the circuit
Initiation breaker poles can be operated individually, e.g. if single-pole automatic reclosure is
used. This is possible if the device is able to trip single-pole.
If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection
devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two binary inputs to the
device. Besides the three trip commands of the external relay to the binary input >BF
Start L1, >BF Start L2 and >BF Start L3 it is recommended to connect
also, for example, the general device pickup to binary input >BF release. Figure
2-158 shows this connection.
Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel
mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input >BF
release must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during con-
figuration.
If the external protection device does not provide a general fault detection signal, a
general trip signal can be used instead. Alternatively, the parallel connection of a sep-
arate set of trip contacts can produce such a release signal as shown in Figure 2-159.
Figure 2-158 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation example for initia-
tion by an external protection device with release by a fault detection signal
Figure 2-159 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation example for initia-
tion by an external protection device with release by a separate set of trip con-
tacts
7SA6 Manual 373

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
The starting condition logic for the delay times is shown in Figure 2-160. In principle,
it is designed similar to that for the common phase initiation, but, individually for each
of the three phases. Thus, current flow and initiation conditions are processed for each
phase. In case of single-pole interruption before an automatic reclose cycle, current
disappearance is reliably monitored for the tripped breaker pole only.
Initiation of a single phase, e.g. Start L1 only, is valid when the starting input (= trip
command of any feeder protection) appears for only this phase and current flow is de-
tected in at least this phase. If current flow is not detected, the auxiliary contact posi-
tion can be interrogated according to Figure 2-155, dependent on the setting (Chk
BRK CONTACT = YES).
The auxiliary contact criterion is also processed for each individual breaker pole. If
however the breaker auxiliary contacts are not available for each individual breaker
pole, then a single-pole trip command is assumed to be executed only once the series
connection of the normally open (NO) auxiliary contacts is interrupted. This informa-
tion is provided to the breaker failure protection by the central function control of the
device (refer to Section 2.23.1).
The three-phase starting signal Start L123 is generated if trip signals appear in more
than one pole (regardless from which protection function). Phase segregated initiation
is then blocked. The input "BF Start w/o I" (e.g. from Buchholz protection) operates in
three-phase mode as well. The function is the same as with common phase initiation.
The additional release-signal >BF release (if assigned to a binary input) affects
all initiation conditions. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input >BLOCK
BkrFail (e.g. during test of the feeder protection relay).
374 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-160 Initiation conditions with single-pole trip command
7SA6 Manual 375

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Delay Times When the initiate conditions are fulfilled, the associated timers are started. The circuit
breaker pole(s) must open before the associated time has elapsed.
Different delay timers are provided for operation after common phase initiation and
phase segregated initiation. A third time stage can be used for two-stage breaker
failure protection.
With single-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command is routed to the adjacent
circuit breakers should the local feeder breaker fail (refer to Figure 2-152 or 2-153).
The adjacent circuit breakers are those which must trip in order to interrupt the fault
current, i.e. the breakers which feed the busbar or the busbar section to which the
feeder under consideration is connected. The possible initiation conditions for the
breaker failure protection are those discussed above. Depending on the application of
the feeder protection, common phase or phase segregated initiation conditions may
occur. Tripping by the breaker failure protection is always three-pole.
The simplest solution is to start the delay timer T2 (Figure 2-161). The phase-segre-
gated initiation signals are omitted if the feeder protection always trips three-pole or if
the circuit breaker is not capable of single-pole tripping.
If different delay times are required after a single-pole trip or three-pole trip it is possi-
ble to use the timer stages T1-1pole and T1-3pole according to Figure 2-162.
Figure 2-161 Single-stage breaker failure protection with common phase initiation
Figure 2-162 Single-stage breaker failure protection with different delay timers
With two-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command of the feeder protection is
usually repeated, after a first time stage, to the feeder circuit breaker, often via a
second trip coil or set of trip coils, if the breaker has not responded to the original trip
command. A second time stage monitors the response to this repeated trip command
and trips the breakers of the relevant bus-bar section, if the fault has not yet been
cleared after this second time.
For the first time stage, a different time delay T1-1pole can be selected for a single-
pole trip than for a three-pole trip by the feeder protection. Additionally, you can select
(parameter 1p-RETRIP (T1)) whether this repeated trip should be single-pole or
three-pole.
376 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-163 Two-stage breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation
Circuit Breaker not There may be cases when it is already obvious that the circuit breaker associated with
Operational a feeder protection relay cannot clear a fault, e.g. when the tripping voltage or the trip-
ping energy is not available.
In such a case it is not necessary to wait for the response of the feeder circuit breaker.
If provision has been made for the detection of such a condition (e.g. control voltage
monitor or air pressure monitor), the monitor alarm signal can be fed to the binary input
>CB faulty of the 7SA6. On occurrence of this alarm and a trip command by the
feeder protection, a separate timer T3-BkrDefective, which is normally set to 0, is
started (Figure 2-164). Thus, the adjacent circuit breakers (bus-bar) are tripped imme-
diately in case the feeder circuit breaker is not operational.
Figure 2-164 Circuit breaker faulty
7SA6 Manual 377

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Transfer Trip to the The device has the facility to provide an additional intertrip signal to the circuit breaker
Remote End at the remote line end in the event that the local feeder circuit breaker fails. For this, a
Circuit Breaker suitable protection signal transmission link is required (e.g. via communication cable,
power line carrier transmission, radio transmission, or optical fibre transmission). With
devices using digital transmission via protection interface, the remote commands can
be applied (see also Section 2.5).
To perform this intertrip, the desired command usually the trip command which is
intended to trip the adjacent breakers is assigned to a binary output of the device.
The contact of this output triggers the transmission device. When using digital signal
transmission the command is connected to a remote command via the user-defined
logic (CFC).
Stub Fault An end fault is defined here as a shortcircuit which has occurred at the end of a line
Protection or protected object, between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set.
This situation is shown in Figure 2-165. The fault is located as seen from the current
transformers (= measurement location) on the bus-bar side, thus, it will not be re-
garded by the feeder protection relay as a feeder fault. It can only be detected by either
a reverse stage of the feeder protection or by a busbar protection. Nevertheless, a trip
command given to the feeder circuit breaker cannot clear the fault since the opposite
end continues to feed the fault. Thus, the fault current does not stop flowing even
though the feeder circuit breaker has properly responded to the trip command.
Figure 2-165 End fault between circuit breaker and current transformers
The end fault protection has the task to recognize this situation and to transmit a trip
signal to the remote end(s) of the protected object to clear the fault. For this purpose,
the output command BF EndFlt TRIP is available to trigger a signal transmission
device (e.g. power line carrier, radio wave, or optical fibre) if applicable, together
with other commands that need to be transferred or (when using digital signal trans-
mission) as command via the protection interface.
The end fault is recognized when the current continues flowing although the circuit
breaker auxiliary contacts indicate that the breaker is open. An additional criterion is
the presence of any breaker failure protection initiate signal. Figure 2-166 illustrates
the functional principle. If the breaker failure protection is initiated and current flow is
detected (current criteria L*> current criterion according to Figure 2-154), but no
circuit breaker pole is closed (auxiliary contact criterion any pole closed), then the
timer T-EndFault is started. At the end of this time an intertrip signal is transmitted
to the opposite end(s) of the protected object.
378 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-166 Operation scheme of end fault protection
Pole Discrepancy The pole discrepancy supervision has the task to detect discrepancies in the position
Supervision of the three circuit breaker poles. Under steady-state operating conditions, either all
three poles of the breaker must be closed, or all three poles must be open. Discrep-
ancy is permitted only for a short time interval during a single-pole automatic reclose
cycle.
The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 2-167. The signals which are processed
here are the same as those used for the breaker failure protection. The pole discrep-
ancy condition is established when at least one pole is closed ( one pole closed)
and at the same time not all three poles are closed ( one pole open).
Additionally, the current criteria (from Figure 2-154) are processed. Pole discrepancy
can only be detected when current is not flowing through all three poles, i.e. through
only one or two poles. When current is flowing through all three poles, all three poles
must be closed even if the breaker auxiliary contacts indicate a different status.
If pole discrepancy of the breaker poles is detected, this is indicated in each phase by
a fault detection signal. This signal identifies the pole which was open before the trip
command of the pole discrepancy supervision occurred.
Figure 2-167 Function diagram of pole discrepancy supervision
7SA6 Manual 379

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
General The circuit breaker failure protection and its ancillary functions (end fault protection,
pole discrepancy supervision) can only operate if they were set during configuration
of the scope of functions (address 139 BREAKER FAILURE, setting Enabled or
enabled w/ 3I0>).
Breaker failure The breaker failure protection is switched ON or OFF at address 3901 FCT
protection BreakerFail.
The current threshold I> BF (address 3902) should be selected such that the protec-
tion will operate with the smallest expected short-circuit current. A setting of 10 %
below the minimum fault current for which breaker failure protection must operate is
recommended. On the other hand, the value should not be set lower than necessary.
If the breaker failure is configured with zero sequence current threshold (address 139
= enabled w/ 3I0>), the pickup threshold for the zero sequence current 3I0> BF
(address 3912) can be set independently of I> BF.
Normally, the breaker failure protection evaluates the current flow criterion as well as
the position of the breaker auxiliary contact(s). If the auxiliary contact(s) status is not
available in the device, this criterion cannot be processed. In this case, set address
3909 Chk BRK CONTACT to NO.
Two-stage breaker With two-stage operation, the trip command is repeated after a time delay T1 to the
failure protection local feeder breaker, normally to a different set of trip coils of this breaker. A choice
can be made whether this trip repetition shall be single-pole or three-pole if the initial
feeder protection trip was single-pole (provided single-pole trip is possible). This
choice is made in address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1). Set this parameter to YES if you
wish single-pole trip for the first stage, otherwise to NO.
If the breaker does not respond to this trip repetition, the adjacent circuit breakers are
tripped after T2, i.e. the circuit breakers of the busbar or of the concerned busbar
section and, if necessary, also the circuit breaker at the remote end unless the fault
has been cleared.
Separate delay times can be set
for single- or three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after a 1-
pole trip of the feeder protection T1-1pole at address 3904,
for three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 3-pole trip of the
feeder protection T1-3pole (address 3905),
for trip of the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar zone and remote end if applicable)
T2 at address 3906.
Note
If three-pole coupling is executed for a pending single-pole TRIP, the T2 delay is re-
started with the three-pole coupling.
380 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The delay times are set dependant on the maximum operating time of the feeder
circuit breaker and the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protec-
tion, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. Figure 2-
168 illustrates the timing of a typical breaker failure scenario. The dropout time for si-
nusoidal currents is 15 ms. If current transformer saturation is anticipated, the time
should be set to 25 ms.
Note
For the breaker failure protection to perform a single-pole TRIP repetition, the time set
for the AR, address 3408 T-Start MONITOR, must be longer than the time setting
for address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1).
To enable that the busbar is tripped by the breaker failure protection without preceding
three-pole coupling of the trip command (by AR or BF), the time setting for 3408 T-
Start MONITOR must also be longer than that for 3906 T2. In this case, the AR must
be blocked by a signal from the BF to prevent the AR from reclosing after a busbar
TRIP. It is recommended to connect the signal 1494 BF T2-TRIP(bus) to the AR
input 2703 >AR block.
Figure 2-168 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker
failure, using two-stage breaker failure protection
7SA6 Manual 381

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Single-stage With single-stage operation, the adjacent circuit breakers (i.e. the breakers of the
breaker failure busbar zone and, if applicable, the breaker at the remote end) are tripped after a delay
protection time T2 (address 3906) following initiation, should the fault not have been cleared
within this time.
The timers T1-1pole (address 3904) and T1-3pole (address 3905) are then set to
since they are not needed.
However, you may use the T1-timers for single-stage protection if you wish to utilize
the facility of setting different delay times after single-pole trip and three-pole trip of the
feeder protection. In this case set T1-1pole (address 3904) and T1-3pole (ad-
dress 3905) separately, but address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) to NO, to avoid a single-
pole trip to the busbar. Set T2 (address 3906) to or equal to T1-3pole (address
3905). Be sure that the correct trip commands are assigned to the desired trip re-
lay(s).
The delay time is determined from the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit
breaker, the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a
safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence
is illustrated in Figure 2-169. The dropout time for sinusoidal currents is 15 ms. If
current transformer saturation is anticipated, the time should be set to 25 ms.
Figure 2-169 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker
failure, using single-stage breaker failure protection
Circuit Breaker not If the circuit breaker associated with the feeder is not operational (e.g. control voltage
Operational failure or air pressure failure), it is apparent that the local breaker cannot clear the
fault. If the relay is informed about this disturbance (via the binary input >CB
faulty), the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar and remote end if applicable) are
tripped after the time T3-BkrDefective (address 3907) which is usually set to 0.
Address 3908 Trip BkrDefect. determines to which output the trip command is
routed in the event that the breaker is not operational when a feeder protection trip
occurs. Select that output which is used to trip the adjacent breakers (bus-bar trip).
382 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Stub fault The end fault protection can be switched separately ON or OFF in address 3921 End
protection Flt. stage. An end fault is a short-circuit between the circuit breaker and the current
transformer set of the feeder. The end fault protection presumes that the device is in-
formed about the circuit breaker position via breaker auxiliary contacts connected to
binary inputs.
If, during an end fault, the circuit breaker is tripped by a reverse stage of the feeder
protection or by the bus-bar protection (the fault is a bus-bar fault as determined from
the location of the current transformers), the fault current will continue to flow, because
the fault is fed from the remote end of the feeder circuit.
The time T-EndFault (address 3922) is started when, during the time of pickup con-
dition of the feeder protection, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate open poles
and, at the same time, current flow is still detected (address 3902). The trip command
of the end fault protection is intended for the transmission of an intertrip signal to the
remote end circuit breaker.
Thus, the delay time must be set such that it can bridge out short transient apparent
end fault conditions which may occur during switching of the breaker.
Pole Discrepancy The pole discrepancy supervision can be switched ON or OFF independently at
Supervision address 3931 PoleDiscrepancy. It is only useful if the breaker poles can be oper-
ated individually. It avoids that only one or two poles of the local breaker are open
during steady state. It has to be provided that either the auxiliary contacts of each pole
or the series connection of the NO auxiliary contacts and the series connection of the
NC auxiliary contacts are connected to the device's binary inputs. If these conditions
are not fulfilled, switch address 3931 OFF.
The delay time T-PoleDiscrep. (address 3932) determines how long a breaker
pole discrepancy condition of the feeder circuit breaker, i.e. only one or two poles
open, may be present before the pole discrepancy supervision issues a three-pole trip
command. This time must clearly be longer than the duration of a single-pole automat-
ic reclose cycle. The time should be less than the permissible duration of an unbal-
anced load condition which is caused by the unsymmetrical position of the circuit
breaker poles. Usual values are 2 s to 5 s.
7SA6 Manual 383

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.19.3 Settings


3901 FCT BreakerFail ON ON Breaker Failure Protection
OFF is
3902 I> BF 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold I>
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) NO YES 1pole retrip with stage T1
YES (local trip)
3904 T1-1pole 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 1pole start
(local trip)
3905 T1-3pole 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 3pole start
(local trip)
3906 T2 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.15 sec T2, Delay of 2nd stage
(busbar trip)
3907 T3-BkrDefective 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T3, Delay for start with de-
fective bkr.
3908 Trip BkrDefect. NO NO Trip output selection with
with T1-trip defective bkr
with T2-trip
w/ T1/T2-trip
3909 Chk BRK CONTACT NO YES Check Breaker contacts
YES
3912 3I0> BF 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold 3I0>
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
3921 End Flt. stage ON OFF End fault stage is
OFF
3922 T-EndFault 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec Trip delay of end fault
stage
3931 PoleDiscrepancy ON OFF Pole Discrepancy supervi-
OFF sion
3932 T-PoleDiscrep. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec Trip delay with pole dis-
crepancy
384 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

formation
1401 >BF on SP >BF: Switch on breaker fail protection
1402 >BF off SP >BF: Switch off breaker fail protection
1403 >BLOCK BkrFail SP >BLOCK Breaker failure
1415 >BF Start 3pole SP >BF: External start 3pole
1432 >BF release SP >BF: External release
1435 >BF Start L1 SP >BF: External start L1
1439 >BF Start w/o I SP >BF: External start 3pole (w/o current)
1440 BkrFailON/offBI IntSP Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI
1451 BkrFail OFF OUT Breaker failure is switched OFF
1452 BkrFail BLOCK OUT Breaker failure is BLOCKED
1453 BkrFail ACTIVE OUT Breaker failure is ACTIVE
1461 BF Start OUT Breaker failure protection started
1472 BF T1-TRIP 1pL1 OUT BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L1
1476 BF T1-TRIP L123 OUT BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole
1493 BF TRIP CBdefec OUT BF Trip in case of defective CB
1494 BF T2-TRIP(bus) OUT BF Trip T2 (busbar trip)
1495 BF EndFlt TRIP OUT BF Trip End fault stage
1496 BF CBdiscrSTART OUT BF Pole discrepancy pickup
1497 BF CBdiscr L1 OUT BF Pole discrepancy pickup L1
1500 BF CBdiscr TRIP OUT BF Pole discrepancy Trip
7SA6 Manual 385

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.20 Thermal overload protection (optional)
The thermal overload protection prevents damage to the protected object caused by
thermal overloading, particularly in case of transformers, rotating machines, power re-
actors and cables. It is in general not necessary for overhead lines, since no meaning-
ful overtemperature can be calculated because of the great variations in the environ-
mental conditions (temperature, wind). In this case, however, a current-dependent
alarm stage can signal an imminent overload.
The unit computes the overtemperature according to a thermal single-body model as

per the following thermal differential equation
with
Actual operating temperature expressed in per cent of the oper-

ating temperature corresponding to the maximum permissible
operating current kIN
th Thermal time constant for the heating
I Present rms current
k kfactor indicating the maximum permissible constant current
referred to the nominal current of the current transformers
IN Nominal current of the current transformers
The solution of this equation is in steady-state operation is an e-function whose as-

ymptote represents the final temperature End. When the overtemperature reaches
the first settable temperature threshold alarm, which is below the overtemperature, a
warning alarm is given in order to allow a preventive load reduction. When the second
temperature threshold, i.e. the final overtemperature = tripping temperature, is
reached, the protected object is disconnected from the network. The overload protec-
tion can, however, also be set to Alarm Only. If this option is set, the device only
outputs an alarm, even if the end temperature is reached.
The temperature rises are calculated separately for each phase in a thermal replica
from the square of the associated phase current. This guarantees a true RMS value
measurement and also considers the effect of harmonic content. A choice can be
made whether the maximum calculated overtemperature of the three phases, the
average overtemperature, or the overtemperature calculated from the phase with
maximum current should be decisive for evaluation of the thresholds.
The maximum permissible continuous thermal overload current Imax is described as a
multiple of the nominal current IN:
Imax = kIN
In addition to the k-factor, the time constant th as well as the alarm temperature alarm
must be entered as settings of the protection.
386 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Overload protection also features a current warning element Ialarm in addition to the
temperature warning stage. It reports an overload current prematurely, even if the cal-
culated excessive temperature has not yet attained the warning or tripping tempera-
ture levels.
The overload protection can be blocked via a binary input. In doing so, the thermal
images are also reset to zero.
Figure 2-170 Logic diagram of the thermal overload protection
7SA6 Manual 387

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
General A prerequisite for the application of the thermal overload function is that during the
configuration of the functional scope in address 142 Ther. OVERLOAD = Enabled
was set. The function can be turned ON or OFF in address 4201 Ther. OVERLOAD.
Furthermore, Alarm Only can be set. With that latter setting, the protection function
is active but only outputs an alarm when the tripping temperature is reached, i.e. the
output function Th.O/L TRIP is not active.
K- Factor The nominal device current is taken as a basis for overload detection. The setting
factor k is set under address 4202 K-FACTOR. It is determined by the relation between
the permissible thermal continuous current and this nominal current:
The permissible continuous current is at the same time the current at which the e-func-
tion of the overtemperature has its asymptote. It is not necessary to determine the trip-
ping temperature since it results automatically from the final rise temperature at k IN.
Manufacturers of electrical machines usually state the permissible continuous current.
If no data are available, k is set to 1.1 times the nominal current of the protected object.
For cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross section, the in-
sulation material, the design and the way they are laid, and can be derived from the
relevant tables.
Please note that the overload capability of electrical equipment relates to its primary
current. This has to be considered if the primary current differs from the nominal
current of the current transformers.
Example:
Belted cable 10 kV 150 mm2
Permissible continuous current Imax = 322 A
Current transformers 400 A / 5 A
Setting value K-FACTOR = 0.80
388 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Time Constant The thermal time constant th is set at address 4203 TIME CONSTANT. This is also
provided by the manufacturer. Please note that the time constant is set in minutes.
Quite often other values for determining the time constant are stated which can be
converted into the time constant as follows:
1-s current
Permissible current for application time other than 1 s, e.g. for 0.5 s
t6-time; this is the time in seconds for which a current of 6 times the nominal current of
the protected object may flow
Example:
Cable as above with
Permissible 1-s current 13.5 kA
Setting value TIME CONSTANT = 29.4 min
Warning By setting a thermal alarm stage ALARM (address 4204) an alarm can be provided
Temperature Levels before the tripping temperature is reached, so that a trip can be avoided by preventive
load reduction or by switching over. The percentage is referred to the tripping temper-
ature rise.
The current overload alarm setpoint I ALARM (address 4205) is stated as a factor of
the nominal device current and should be set equal to or slightly below the permissible
continuous current k IN. It can also be used instead of the thermal alarm stage. In this
case, the thermal alarm stage is set to 100 % and thus practically ineffective.
Calculating the The thermal replica is calculated individually for each phase. Address 4206 CALC.
Overtemperature METHOD decides whether the highest of the three calculated temperatures ( max) or
their arithmetic average (Average ) or the temperature calculated from the phase
with maximum current ( from Imax) should be decisive for the thermal alarm and
tripping stage.
Since an overload usually occurs in a balanced way, this setting is of minor impor-
tance. If unbalanced overloads are to be expected, however, these options lead to dif-
ferent results.
Averaging should only be used if a rapid thermal equilibrium is possible in the protect-
ed object, e.g. with belted cables. If the three phases are, however, more or less ther-
mally isolated (e.g. single conductor cables or overhead lines), one of the maximum
settings should be chosen at any rate.
7SA6 Manual 389

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.20.3 Settings


4201 Ther. OVERLOAD OFF OFF Thermal overload protec-
ON tion
Alarm Only
4202 K-FACTOR 0.10 .. 4.00 1.10 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT 1.0 .. 999.9 min 100.0 min Time constant
4204 ALARM 50 .. 100 % 90 % Thermal Alarm Stage
4205 I ALARM 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm
setpoint
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
4206 CALC. METHOD max max Method of Acquiring Tem-
Average perature
from Imax

formation
1503 >BLK ThOverload SP >BLOCK Thermal Overload Protection
1511 Th.Overload OFF OUT Thermal Overload Protection OFF
1512 Th.Overload BLK OUT Thermal Overload Protection BLOCKED
1513 Th.O/L ACTIVE OUT Thermal Overload Protection ACTIVE
1515 Th.O/L I Alarm OUT Th. Overload: Current Alarm (I alarm)
1516 Th.O/L Alarm OUT Th. Overload Alarm: Near Thermal Trip
1517 Th.O/L Pickup OUT Th. Overload Pickup before trip
1521 Th.O/L TRIP OUT Th. Overload TRIP command
390 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.21 Analog outputs (optional)
Depending on the ordering version of 7SA6 relay up to four analog outputs are avail-
able. The values to be transmitted via these analog outputs have been specified
during the configuration of the scope of protection functions (see Section 2.1.1.2). A
maximum of four of the following analog outputs are available:
Measured value IL2 (current of phase L2) in per cent of the operational nominal cur-
rent,
Measured value UL2-L3 (phase-to-phase voltage L2-L3) in per cent of the operation-
al nominal voltage,
Measured value |P| (absolute value of active power) in per cent of operational rated
apparent power 3UNIN,
Measured value |Q| (absolute value of reactive power) in per cent of operational
rated apparent power 3UNIN,
Fault distance d in per cent of line length on the basis of the configured reactance
per unit length and the line length (for addresses 1110 to 1113 refer to Section
2.1.4.1),
Fault distance d in kilometres or miles, depending on the configured length unit (ad-
dress 236), on the basis of the configured reactance per unit length (for address
1110 or 1112 see also Section 2.1.4),
Fault current Imax, i. e. the maximum of 3 phase currents during clearance of the last
fault, in primary Ampere, on the basis of the configured primary and secondary
nominal current (addresses 205 and 206 see also Section 2.1.2.1).
The operational nominal values are the nominal values configured according to
address 1103 and 1104 (refer to Section 2.1.4.1).
Analog values are output as load-independent currents. The analog outputs have a
nominal range between 0 mA and 20 mA, their operating range can be up to 22.5 mA.
The conversion factor and the valid range can be set.
If measured values are transmitted, they are cyclically updated. Always the last of the
event-specific values i.e. fault distance and fault current, which are only indicated
after a fault, remains unchanged until
A new value is computed due to a new fault or
Until binary input >RES Analog Out (No. 11000) is activated or
The maximum output time set for the corresponding analog channel has elapsed
e.g., Tmax OUTPUT(B1) (address 5009 for channel B1).
If the maximum output time is set to only the first two options apply. After the output
was reset via the binary input, the output value goes back to 0.
7SA6 Manual 391

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Measured Values Once the measured values are selected for the analog outputs (Section 2.1.1.2, Ad-
dresses 150 to 153), set the conversion factor and the valid range for the available
outputs, as follows:
For analog output 1 at mounting location B (Port B1):
Address 5001 20 mA (B1) = the percent value to be displayed at 20 mA.
Address 5006 MIN VALUE (B1) the smallest valid value.
Address 5016 MIN VALUE (B2) the smallest valid value.
For analog output 1 at mounting location D (Port D1):
Address 5021 20 mA (D1) = the percent value to be displayed at 20 mA.
Address 5026 MIN VALUE (D1) the smallest valid value.
Address 5036 MIN VALUE (D2) the smallest valid value.
The maximum value is 22.0 mA. In case there is an overflow (value is outside of the
maximal permissible threshold), then 22.5 mA is output.
Example:
The phase current IL2 is output as analog output 1 at mounting location B. 10 mA are
the value at nominal operational current, consequently 20 mA mean 200 %. Values
below 4 mA are invalid.
Settings
Address 5001 20 mA (B1) = 200.0 %,
Address 5006 MIN VALUE (B1) = 4,0 mA,
Fault Location For the fault location the conversion factor, i. e. the value to be output, is also set to
20 mA. Dependening on whether the fault location should be output in per cent of the
line length or in length unit, set the following:
or
Address 5003 or 5004 20 mA (B1) = the value in kilometres or miles to be indi-
cated at 20 mA.
or
Address 5013 or 501420 mA (B2) = the value in kilometres or miles to be indi-
cated at 20 mA.
392 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

or
Address 5023 or 5024 20 mA (D1) = the value in kilometres or miles to be indi-
cated at 20 mA.
Address 5031 20 mA (D2) =the percent value to be displayed at 20 mA.
or
Address 5033 or 5034 20 mA (D2) = the value in kilometres or miles to be indi-
cated at 20 mA.
Set under Addresses 5007 NEG VALUE (B1), 5017 NEG VALUE (B2), 5027 NEG
VALUE (D1) or 5037 NEG VALUE (D2) which output value is to be indicated in case
the fault location is negative (fault in reverse direction). In addresses 5008 OVERFLOW
(B1), 5018 OVERFLOW (B2), 5028 OVERFLOW (D1) or 5038 OVERFLOW (D2)the
value of the numerical overflow (fault outside the maximum permissible range) is set.
The values for the negative fault location and the overflow must be set as large as pos-
sible since the linear transmission range of the fault location values ends 0.5 mA below
the smallest of these values.
Set in addresses 5009 Tmax OUTPUT(B1), 5019 Tmax OUTPUT(B2), 5029 Tmax
OUTPUT(D1) or 5039 Tmax OUTPUT(D2) for how long the valid fault location is to
be indicated. If a new fault occurs, the fault location is updated. Having set the value
to the output of the last fault location will be maintained until a new one has been
calculated or the output has been reset by activation of binary input >RES Analog
Out (No. 11000).
Example:
The fault location is to be output in kilometres at mounting location B via the analog
output 2; at 20 mA the value 50 kilometres is to be displayed. The output in the event
of a fault in reverse direction is 19.84 mA, and 22.50 mA in case of an overflow. The
value must be output for a time period of 5 s provided that no other fault occurs in the
meantime.
Settings
Address 5013 20 mA (B2) = 50.0 km,
Address 5017 NEG VALUE (B2) = 19.84 mA,
Address 5018 OVERFLOW (B2) = 22.50 mA,
Adresse 5019 Tmax OUTPUT(B2) = 5.00 s,
In this case the fault location values can be output up to 19.84 mA -0.5 mA = 19.34
mA. Theoretically, this corresponds to a value of 48.35 km.
7SA6 Manual 393

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Maximum Fault Set the conversion factor and the maximum output time for the maximum fault current:
Current For analog output 1 at mounting location B (Port B1):
address 5002 20 mA (B1) = value in A, to be displayed at 20 mA,
address 5009 Tmax OUTPUT(B1) maximum output time of the value;
address 5012 20 mA (B2) = value in A, to be displayed at 20 mA,
address 5019 Tmax OUTPUT(B2) maximum output time of the value;
address 5022 20 mA (D1) = value in A, to be displayed at 20 mA,
address 5029 Tmax OUTPUT(D1) maximum output time of the value;
address 5032 20 mA (D2) = value in A, to be displayed at 20 mA,
address 5039 Tmax OUTPUT(D2) maximum output time of the value;
If you set the maximum output time to the value the output of the last fault current
will be maintained until a new one is calculated or the output is reset by activation of
the binary input >RES Analog Out (FNo. 11000).
The maximum possible value is 22.0 mA; in case of an overflow (a value which sur-
passed the operating range) 22.5 mA is output.
Example:
The fault current is to be output at mounting location D via the analog output 2; at
20 mA will correspond to 20000 A. The value must be output for a time period of 60 s
provided that no other fault occurs in the meantime.
Settings
Address 5032 20 mA (D2) = 20000 A,
Address 5039 Tmax OUTPUT(D2) = 60.00 s
2.21.3 Settings

5001 20 mA (B1) = 10.0 .. 1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (B1) correspond to
5002 20 mA (B1) = 10 .. 100000 A 20000 A 20 mA (B1) correspond to
5003 20 mA (B1) = 1.0 .. 1000.0 km 50.0 km 20 mA (B1) correspond to
5004 20 mA (B1) = 1.0 .. 1000.0 Miles 50.0 Miles 20 mA (B1) correspond to
5006 MIN VALUE (B1) 0.0 .. 5.0 mA 4.0 mA Output value (B1) valid from
5007 NEG VALUE (B1) 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 19.84 mA Output value (B1) for negative
values
5008 OVERFLOW (B1) 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 22.50 mA Output value (B1) for overflow
5009 Tmax OUTPUT(B1) 0.10 .. 180.00 sec; 5.00 sec Maximum output time (B1)
5011 20 mA (B2) = 10.0 .. 1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (B2) correspond to
5012 20 mA (B2) = 10 .. 100000 A 20000 A 20 mA (B2) correspond to
5013 20 mA (B2) = 1.0 .. 1000.0 km 50.0 km 20 mA (B2) correspond to
5014 20 mA (B2) = 1.0 .. 1000.0 Miles 50.0 Miles 20 mA (B2) correspond to
394 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

5016 MIN VALUE (B2) 0.0 .. 5.0 mA 4.0 mA Output value (B2) valid from
5017 NEG VALUE (B2) 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 19.84 mA Output value (B2) for negative
values
5018 OVERFLOW (B2) 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 22.50 mA Output value (B2) for overflow
5019 Tmax OUTPUT(B2) 0.10 .. 180.00 sec; 5.00 sec Maximum output time (B2)
5021 20 mA (D1) = 10.0 .. 1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (D1) correspond to
5022 20 mA (D1) = 10 .. 100000 A 20000 A 20 mA (D1) correspond to
5023 20 mA (D1) = 1.0 .. 1000.0 km 50.0 km 20 mA (D1) correspond to
5024 20 mA (D1) = 1.0 .. 1000.0 Miles 50.0 Miles 20 mA (D1) correspond to
5026 MIN VALUE (D1) 0.0 .. 5.0 mA 4.0 mA Output value (D1) valid from
5027 NEG VALUE (D1) 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 19.84 mA Output value (D1) for negative
values
5028 OVERFLOW (D1) 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 22.50 mA Output value (D1) for overflow
5029 Tmax OUTPUT(D1) 0.10 .. 180.00 sec; 5.00 sec Maximum output time (D1)
5031 20 mA (D2) = 10.0 .. 1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (D2) correspond to
5032 20 mA (D2) = 10 .. 100000 A 20000 A 20 mA (D2) correspond to
5033 20 mA (D2) = 1.0 .. 1000.0 km 50.0 km 20 mA (D2) correspond to
5034 20 mA (D2) = 1.0 .. 1000.0 Miles 50.0 Miles 20 mA (D2) correspond to
5036 MIN VALUE (D2) 0.0 .. 5.0 mA 4.0 mA Output value (D2) valid from
5037 NEG VALUE (D2) 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 19.84 mA Output value (D2) for negative
values
5038 OVERFLOW (D2) 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 22.50 mA Output value (D2) for overflow
5039 Tmax OUTPUT(D2) 0.10 .. 180.00 sec; 5.00 sec Maximum output time (D2)

formation
11000 >RES Analog Out SP >RESET Analog Outputs
7SA6 Manual 395

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.22 Monitoring Function
The device incorporates extensive monitoring functions of both the device hardware
and software; the measured values are also continually checked to ensure their plau-
sibility; the current and voltage transformer secondary circuits are thereby substantial-
ly covered by the monitoring function. It is also possible to implement trip circuit mon-
itoring, using appropriate binary inputs as available.
2.22.1 Measurement Supervision
2.22.1.1 Hardware Monitoring
The device is monitored from the measuring inputs up to the command relays. Moni-
toring checks the hardware for malfunctions and disallowed conditions.
Auxiliary and The processor voltage of 5 V is monitored by the hardware, and if the voltage decreas-
Reference Voltages es below the minimum value, the processor is no longer operative. If it falls below the
minimum value, the device will be put out of service. When the normal voltage returns,
the processor system is restarted.
Failure of or switching off the supply voltage puts the device out of operation and a
message is immediately generated by a normally closed contact. Brief voltage inter-
ruptions of up to 50 ms do not disturb the operational readiness of the device (see for
the Technical Data).
The processor monitors the reference voltage of the ADC (analog-to-digital converter).
The protection is suspended if the voltages deviate outside an allowable range, and
persistent deviations are reported.
Back-up battery The buffer battery, which ensures operation of the internal clock and storage of
counters and messages if the auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for charge
status. On its undershooting a minimum admissible voltage, the indication Fail
Battery (No. 177) is issued.
If the device is not supplied with auxiliary voltage for more than 1 or 2 days, the internal
clock is switched off automatically, i.e. the time is not registered any more. The data
from message buffers and fault record buffers, however, are kept stored.
Memory modules The main memory (RAM) is tested when the system starts up. If a malfunction occurs
then, the starting sequence is interrupted, the error LED and LED 1 flash while the
other LEDs blink at the same intervals. During operation, the memory is checked using
its checksum.
A checksum of the program memory (EPROM) is cyclically generated and compared
with the stored program checksum.
A checksum for the parameter memory (FLASH-EPROM) is cyclically generated and
compared with the checksum which is computed after each change of the stored pa-
rameters.
If a malfunction occurs, the processor system is restarted.
396 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Offset of the The offset of the ADC is measured cyclically for each channel and corrected. When
Analog-to-Digital the offset reaches an inadmissibly high value, the message Error Offset (No.
Converter 191) is displayed. The protective functions remain active.
Sampling The sampling frequency and the synchronism of the analog-digital converters is con-
Frequency tinuously monitored. If any deviations cannot be removed by remedied synchroniza-
tion, then the processor system is restarted.
Measurement Up to four input currents are measured by the device. If the three phase currents and
Value Acquisition the earth fault current from the current transformer starpoint or a separated earth
Currents current transformer of the line to be protected are connected to the device, their digi-
tized sum must be zero. Faults in the current circuit are recognized if
IF = |IL1 + IL2 + IL3 + kIIE| > I THRESHOLDIN + I FACTOR | I |
Factor kI (address I4/Iph CT) takes into account a possible different ratio of a sep-
arate IE-transformer (e.g. cable core balance current transformer). I THRESHOLD
and I FACTOR are setting parameters. The component I FACTOR | I | takes into
account the allowable current proportional ratio errors of the input transducers which
are particularly prevalent during large fault currents (Figure 2-171). | I | is the sum of
all currents:
| I | = |IL1| + |IL2| + |IL3| + |kIIE|
This malfunction is signalled as Failure I (No. 162).
Note
Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the
protected line is fed to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.
Figure 2-171 Current sum monitoring
7SA6 Manual 397

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Measurement Four measuring inputs are available in the voltage path: three for phaseearth voltag-
Value Acquisition es as well as one input for the displacement voltage (e-n voltage of an open delta con-
Currents nection) or a busbar voltage. If the displacement voltage is connected to the device,
the sum of the three digitized phase voltages must equal three times the zero se-
quence voltage. Errors in the voltage transformer circuits are detected when
UF = |UL1 + UL2 + UL3 + kUUEN| > 25 V.
Factor kU considers the transformation ratio differences between the displacement
voltage input and the phase voltage inputs (parameter Uph / Udelta).
This malfunction is signalled as Fail U Ph-E (No. 165).
Note
Voltage sum monitoring can operate properly only when an externally formed open
delta voltage is connected to the residual voltage input of the relay.
2.22.1.2 Software Monitoring
Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the
hardware (watchdog for hardware) that expires upon failure of the processor or an in-
ternal program, and causes a reset of the processor system with complete restart.
An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of
programs are discovered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system.
To the extent such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart
attempt is begun. Following three failed restarts within 30 s the protection takes itself
out of service and the red LED ERROR is illuminated. The device ready relay resets
and alarms the device failure state with its normally closed contact (life contact).
2.22.1.3 Monitoring External Transformer Circuits
Interruptions or short-circuits in the secondary circuits of the current and voltage trans-
formers, as well as faults in the connections (important for commissioning!), are de-
tected and reported by the device. The measured quantities are periodically checked
in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is present.
Current Symmetry During normal system operation, symmetry among the input currents is expected. The
symmetry is monitored in the device by magnitude comparison. The smallest phase
current is compared to the largest phase current. Asymmetry is recognized if:
|Imin | / | Imax | < BAL. FACTOR I as long as Imax / IN > BALANCE I LIMIT / IN
Thereby Imax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin the smallest. The sym-
metry factor BAL. FACTOR I represents the allowable asymmetry of the phase cur-
rents while the limit value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range
of this monitoring (see Figure 2-172). Both parameters can be set. The resetting ratio
is about 97 %.
After a settable time (5-100 s) this malfunction is signalled as Fail I balance
(No. 163).
398 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-172 Current symmetry monitoring
Broken Wire A broken wire of the protected line or in the current transformer secondary circuit can
be detected, if the minimum current PoleOpenCurrent flows via the feeder. If a
current symmetry failure is detected and the minimum current is below the threshold,
an interruption of this conductor may be assumed. If current symmetry occurs (see
margin heading Current Symmetry) the device issues the message Fail
Conductor (No. 195).
Voltage Balance During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault), symmetry
among the input voltages is expected. The symmetry is monitored in the device with
a magnitude comparison. The smallest phase voltage is compared to the largest.
Asymmetry is recognized if:
|Umin | / | Umax | < BAL. FACTOR U as long as | Umax | > BALANCE U-LIMIT
Thereby Umax is the largest of the three phase-to-phase voltages and Umin the small-
est. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR U is the measure for the asymmetry of the
conductor voltages; the limit BALANCE U-LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating
range of this monitoring (see figure 2-173). Both parameters can be set. The dropout
ratio is about 97 %.
After a settable time, this malfunction is signalled as Fail U balance (No. 167).
7SA6 Manual 399

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-173 Voltage symmetry monitoring
Voltage Phase The verification of the faulted phases and the phase preference, direction measure-
Sequence ment and polarization with quadrature voltages usually demand clockwise rotation of
the measured values. Phase rotation of measured voltages is checked by verifying the
phase sequences of the voltages
UL1 before UL2 before UL3
This check takes place if each measured voltage has a minimum magnitude of
|UL1|, |UL2|, |UL3| > 40 V/3
In case of negative phase rotation, the indication Fail Ph. Seq. (No. 171) is
issued.
If the system has a negative phase rotation, this must have been set during the con-
figuration of the power system data (refer to Section 2.1.2.1, address 235). In such
event, the phase rotation monitoring applies to the corresponding opposite phase se-
quence.
400 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Asymmetrical In the event of measured voltage failure due to a short-circuit or a broken conductor in
Measuring Voltage the voltage transformer secondary circuit, certain measuring loops may mistakenly
Failure "Fuse see a voltage of zero, which due to the load current may result in an unwanted pickup
Failure Monitor" or even trip.
If fuses are used instead of a secondary miniature circuit breaker (VT mcb) with con-
nected auxiliary contacts, then the fuse failure monitoring can detect problems in the
voltage transformer secondary circuit. Of course, the miniature circuit breaker and the
fuse failure monitor can be used at the same time.
The asymmetrical measured voltage failure is characterized by its voltage asymmetri-
cal with simultaneous current symmetry. Figure 2-174 depicts the logic diagram of the
fuse failure monitor during asymmetrical failure of the measured voltage.
If there is substantial voltage asymmetry of the measured values, without asymmetry
of the currents being registered at the same time, this indicates the presence of an
asymmetrical failure in the voltage transformer secondary circuit.
The asymmetry of the voltage is detected by the fact that either the zero sequence
voltage or the negative sequence voltage exceed a settable value FFM U>(min). The
current is assumed to be sufficiently symmetrical if both the zero sequence as well as
the negative sequence current are below the settable threshold FFM I< (max) .
In non-earthed systems, the zero-sequence system quantities are not a reliable crite-
rion as a considerable zero-sequence voltage also occurs in the case of a simple earth
fault where a significant zero-sequence current does not necessarily flow. Therefore,
the zero-sequence voltage is not evaluated in such networks but only the negative-
sequence voltage (parameter SystemStarpoint).
As soon as this state is recognized, the distance protection and all other functions that
operate on the basis of undervoltage (e.g. also weak infeed tripping) are blocked. The
immediate blocking demands that current flows in at least one of the phases. The dis-
tance protection can be switched to O/C emergency operation, provided that this func-
tion is parameterized accordingly (refer also to Sections 2.11).
The fast blocking may not occur as long as one phase is without voltage due to a
single-pole dead time condition, as the non-symmetry of the measured values arising
in this state is due to the switching state of the line and not due to a failure in the sec-
ondary circuits. Accordingly, the fast blocking is disabled when the line is tripped
single-pole (internal information 1 pole open in the logic diagram).
If a zero sequence or negative sequence current is detected within approximately 10
s after recognition of this criterion, the protection assumes a short-circuit and removes
the blocking by the fuse failure monitor for the duration of the fault. If on the other
hand the voltage failure criterion is present for longer than approx. 10 s, the blocking
is permanently activated (latching of the voltage criterion after 10 s). Only 10 s after
the voltage criterion has been removed by correction of the secondary circuit failure,
will the blocking automatically reset, thereby releasing the blocked protection func-
tions again.
7SA6 Manual 401

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-174 Logic diagram of the fuse failure monitor with zero and negative sequence system
402 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Three-Phase A three-phase failure of the secondary measured voltage can be distinguished from
Measuring Voltage an actual system fault by the fact that the currents have no significant change in the
Failure "Fuse event of a failure in the secondary measured voltage. For this reason, the sampled
Failure Monitor" current values are routed to a buffer, so that the difference between the present and
stored current values can be analysed to recognize the magnitude of the current dif-
ferential (current differential criterion). A three-pole voltage failure is detected if
All three phase-to-earth voltages are smaller than the threshold FFM U<max
(3ph),
The current differential in all three phases is smaller than the threshold FFM
Idelta (3p).
All three phase current amplitudes are greater than the minimum current Iph> for
impedance measurement by the distance protection.
If no stored current values are present (yet), the current magnitude criterion is resorted
to. Figure 2-175 shows the logic diagram of the three-phase measured voltage failure
monitoring. A three-pole system voltage failure is detected in this case if
All three phase-to-earth voltages are smaller than the threshold FFM U<max
(3ph),
All three phase current amplitudes are smaller than the minimum current Iph> for
impedance measurement by the distance protection, and
All three phase current amplitudes are greater than a fixed set noise threshold (40
mA).
If such a voltage failure is recognized, the distance protection and all other functions
that operate on the basis of undervoltage (e.g. also weak infeed tripping) are blocked
until the voltage failure is removed; thereafter the blocking is automatically removed.
The O/C emergency operation is possible during the voltage failure, provided that the
differential protection is parameterized accordingly (refer to Section 2.11).
7SA6 Manual 403

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-175 Logic diagram of the three-phase measured voltage failure monitoring
Additional If no measuring voltage is available after power-on of the device (e.g. because the
Measured Voltage voltage transformers are not connected), the absence of the voltage can be detected
Failure Monitoring and reported by an additional monitoring function. Where circuit breaker auxiliary con-
tacts are used, they should be used for monitoring as well. Figure 2-176 shows the
logic diagram of the measured voltage failure monitoring. A failure of the measured
voltage is detected if the following conditions are met at the same time:
All three phase-to-earth voltages are smaller than FFM U<max (3ph),
At least one phase current is larger than PoleOpenCurrent or at least one
breaker pole is closed (can be set),
No protection function has picked up,
This condition persists for a settable time T V-Supervision (default setting: 3 s).
This time T V-Supervision is required to prevent that a voltage failure is detected
before the protection picks up.
If a failure is detected by these criteria, the indication Fail U absent (No. 168)
is output, and the device switches to emergency operation (see Section 2.11).
404 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-176 Logic diagram of the additional measured voltage failure monitoring
2.22.1.4 Monitoring the Phase Angle of the Positive Sequence Power
This monitoring function allows to determine the direction of power flow. You can
monitor the phase angle of the complex power, and generate an indication when the
power phasor is inside a settable segment.
One example of this application is the indication of capacitive reactive power. The
monitoring indication can then be used to control the overvoltage protection function.
For this purpose, two angles must be set, as shown in Figure 2-177. In this example,
A = 200 and B = 340 has been set.
If the measured phase angle (S1) of the positive sequence power is within the area
of the P-Q plane delimited by the angles A and B, the indication (PQ Pos.
Seq.) (No. 130) is output. The angles A and B can be freely set in the range
between 0 and 359. The area starts at A and extends in a mathematically positive
sense as far as the angle B. A hysteresis of 2 is provided to prevent erroneous in-
dications which might emerge at the threshold limits.
7SA6 Manual 405

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-177 Characteristic of the Positive Sequence System Phase Angle Monitoring
The monitoring function can also be used for the display of negative active power. In
this case the areas must be defined as shown in Figure 2-178.
406 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-178 Phase Angle Monitoring for Negative Active Power
The two angles must be at least 3 apart; if they are not, monitoring is blocked, and
the indication Set wrong (No. 132) is output.
The following conditions must be fulfilled for measurement to be enabled:
The positive sequence current I1 is higher than the value set in parameter 2943
I1>.
The positive sequence voltage U1 is higher than the value set in parameter 2944
U1>.
The angles set in address 2941 A and 2942 B must be at least 3 apart. Incorrect
parameter settings cause the indication 132 Set wrong to be output.
The Fuse-Failure-Monitor and the measured voltage failure monitoring must not
have responded, and binary input indication 361 >FAIL:Feeder VT must not
be present.
If monitoring is not active, this fact is signalled by the indication (PQ Pos) block
(No. 131).
Figure 2-179 shows the logic of the positive sequence system phase angle monitoring.
7SA6 Manual 407

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-179 Logic of the Positive Sequence System Phase Angle Monitoring
2.22.1.5 Fault Reactions
Depending on the kind of fault detected, an alarm is given, the processor is restarted
or the device is taken out of operation. If the fault is still present after three restart at-
tempts, the protection system will take itself out of service and indicate this condition
by dropout of the Device OK relay, thus indicating device failure. The red LED
ERROR on the device front lights up, provided that there is an internal auxiliary volt-
age, and the green LED RUN goes off. If the internal auxiliary voltage supply fails,
all LEDs are dark. Table 2-20 shows a summary of the monitoring functions and the
malfunction responses of the relay.
408 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 2-20 Summary of malfunction responses of the device
Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction Response Indication (No.) Output

Auxiliary Supply Voltage External (aux. voltage) Device out of operation All LEDs dark DOK2) drops out
Loss internal (converter) or alarm Error 5V (144)
Measured Value Acqui- Internal (converter or refer- Protection out of opera- LED ERROR DOK2) drops out
sition ence voltage) tion, alarm Error A/D-conv.
(181)
Buffer battery Internal (battery) Indication Fail Battery (177) As allocated
Hardware Watchdog Internal (processor failure) Device not in operation LED ERROR DOK2) drops out
Software Watchdog Internal (program sequence) Restart attempt 1) LED ERROR DOK2) drops out
1)
RAM Internal (RAM) Restart attempt ), LED flashes DOK2) drops out
Restart abort
Device not in operation
ROM Internal (EPROM) Restart attempt 1) LED ERROR DOK2) drops out
Settings memory internal (Flash-EPROM Restart attempt 1) LED ERROR DOK2) drops out
or RAM)
Scanning frequency Internal (clock generator) Restart attempt 1) LED ERROR DOK2) drops out
1 A/5 A setting 1/5 A jumper wrong Messages: Error1A/5Awrong DOK2) drops out
Protection out of operation (192) Error A/D-
conv. (181)
LED ERROR
Adjustment values Internal (EEPROM or RAM) Indication: Alarm adjustm. As allocated
Using default values (193)
ADC offset Internal (ADC) Indication Error Offset (191) as allocated
Earth current I/O module does not corre- Messages: Error neutralCT DOK2) drops out
transformer spond to the order number Protection out of operation (194), Error A/D-
sensitive/insensitive (MLFB) of the device. conv. (181)
LED ERROR
Modules Module does not comply Messages: Error Board DOK2) drops out
with ordering number Protection out of operation BG1...7 (183 ...
(MLFB). 189)
and if applicable
Error A/D-conv..
(181)
Current sum Internal (measured value Indication Failure I (162) As allocated
acquisition)
Current symmetry External (power system or Indication Fail I balance (163) As allocated
current transformer)
Broken Conductor External (power system or Message Fail Conductor As allocated
current transformer) (195)
Voltage sum Internal (measured value Indication Fail U Ph-E (165) As allocated
acquisition)
Voltage symmetry External (power system or Indication Fail U balance As allocated
voltage transformer) (167)
Voltage phase External (power system or Indication Fail Ph. Seq. (171) As allocated
sequence connection)
7SA6 Manual 409

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction Response Indication (No.) Output

Measuring voltage External Message VT FuseFail>10s as allocated
failure, three-phase (power system or Distance protection is (169),
Fuse Failure Monitor connection) blocked, VT FuseFail (170)
Undervoltage protection is
blocked,
Weak-infeed tripping is
blocked,
Frequency protection is
blocked, and
Direction determination of
the earth fault protection is
blocked
Voltage failure, External Message VT FuseFail>10s As allocated
one-/two-phase (voltage transformers) Distance protection is (169),
Fuse Failure Monitor blocked, VT FuseFail (170)
blocked,
blocked,
blocked, and
blocked
Voltage failure, External Indication Fail U absent (168) As allocated
three-phase (power system or Distance protection is
connection) blocked,
blocked,
blocked,
blocked, and
blocked
Trip Circuit Monitoring External (trip circuit or Message FAIL: Trip cir. as allocated
control voltage) (6865)
1)
after three unsuccessful restarts, the device is taken out of service.
2) DOK = Device OK = NC contact of the operational readiness relay = life contact
410 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
General The sensitivity of the measurement supervision function can be modified. Default
values are set at the factory, which are sufficient in most cases. If especially high op-
erating asymmetry in the currents and/or voltages is to be expected for the application,
or if it becomes apparent during operation that certain monitoring functions activate
sporadically, then the setting should be less sensitive.
The measurement supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2901
MEASURE. SUPERV.
Symmetry Address 2902 BALANCE U-LIMIT determines the limit voltage (phase-to-phase),
Monitoring above which the voltage symmetry monitor is effective. Address 2903 BAL. FACTOR
U is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the balance characteristic. The
alarm Fail U balance (No. 167) can be delayed in address 2908 T BAL. U
LIMIT. These settings can only be changed via DIGSI at Display Additional Set-
tings.
Address 2904 BALANCE I LIMIT determines the limit current, above which the
current symmetry monitor is effective. Address 2905 BAL. FACTOR I is the associ-
ated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the balance characteristic. The alarm Fail
I balance (No. 163) can be delayed in address 2909 T BAL. I LIMIT. These
settings can only be changed via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
Summation Address 2906 I THRESHOLD determines the limit current, above which the current
Monitoring sum monitor is activated (absolute portion, only relative to IN). The relative portion (rel-
ative to the maximum conductor current) for activating the current sum monitor is set
at address 2907 I FACTOR. These settings can only be changed via DIGSI at
Note
Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the
protected line is fed to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.
Asymmetrical The settings for the fuse failure monitor for non-symmetrical measuring voltage
Measuring Voltage failure (address 2911 FFM U>(min)) are to be selected so that reliable activation
"Failure Fuse occurs if a phase voltage fails, but not such that false activation occurs during ground
Failure Monitor" faults in a grounded network. Address 2912 FFM I< (max) must be set as sensitive
as required (with earth faults, below the smallest fault current). These settings can only
be changed via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
In address 2910 FUSE FAIL MON., the fuse failure monitor can be switched OFF,
e.g. during asymmetrical testing.
7SA6 Manual 411

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Three-Phase In address 2913 FFM U<max (3ph) the minimum voltage threshold is set. If the mea-
Measuring Voltage sured voltage drops below this threshold and a simultaneous current jump which
Failure "Fuse exceeds the limits according to address 2914 FFM Idelta (3p) is not detected
Failure Monitor" while all three phase currents are greater than the minimum current required for the
impedance measurement by the distance protection according to address 1202
Minimum Iph>, a three-phase measured voltage failure is recognized. These set-
tings can only be changed via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
In address 2910 FUSE FAIL MON., the fuse failure monitor can be switched OFF,
e.g. during asymmetrical testing.
Measured Voltage In address 2915 V-Supervision, the measured voltage supervision can be
Failure Supervision switched to w/ CURR.SUP, w/ I> & CBaux or OFF. Address 2916 T V-
Supervision is used to set the waiting time of the voltage failure supervision. This
setting can only be changed in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
Circuit Breaker If a circuit breaker for voltage transformers (VT mcb) is installed in the secondary
for Voltage circuit of the voltage transformers, the status is sent, via binary input, to the device in-
Transformers forming it about the position of the VT mcb. If a short-circuit in the secondary side ini-
tiates the tripping of the VT mcb, the distance protection function has to be blocked
immediately, since otherwise it would be spuriously tripped due to the lacking mea-
sured voltage during a load current. The blocking must be faster than the first stage of
the distance protection.This requires an extremely short reaction time for VT mcb
( 4 ms at 50 Hz, 3 ms at 60 Hz nominal frequency). If this cannot be ensured, the
reaction time is to be set under address 2921 T mcb.
Monitoring the The parameters 2943 I1> and 2944 U1> are used to specify the minimum positive
Phase Angle of the sequence system quantities required for measurement of the positive sequence
Positive Sequence power. The angles set in address 2941 A and 2942 B must be at least 3 apart.
Power Incorrect parameter settings cause the indication 132 Set wrong to be output.
412 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.22.1.7 Settings
ditional Settings.

2901 MEASURE. SUPERV ON ON Measurement Supervision
OFF
2902A BALANCE U-LIMIT 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for
Balance Monitoring
2903A BAL. FACTOR U 0.58 .. 0.95 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Monitor
2904A BALANCE I LIMIT 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
2905A BAL. FACTOR I 0.10 .. 0.95 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Monitor
2906A I THRESHOLD 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.10 A Summated Current Moni-
toring Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 0.50 A
2907A I FACTOR 0.00 .. 0.95 0.10 Summated Current Moni-
toring Factor
2908A T BAL. U LIMIT 5 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Balance Factor for
Voltage Monitor
2909A T BAL. I LIMIT 5 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Current Balance Monitor
2910 FUSE FAIL MON. ON ON Fuse Failure Monitor
OFF
2911A FFM U>(min) 10 .. 100 V 30 V Minimum Voltage Thresh-
old U>
2912A FFM I< (max) 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Maximum Current Thresh-
old I<
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
2913A FFM U<max (3ph) 2 .. 100 V 5V Maximum Voltage Thresh-
old U< (3phase)
2914A FFM Idelta (3p) 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Delta Current Threshold
(3phase)
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
2915 V-Supervision w/ CURR.SUP w/ CURR.SUP Voltage Failure Supervi-
w/ I> & CBaux sion
OFF
2916A T V-Supervision 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 3.00 sec Delay Voltage Failure Su-
pervision
2921 T mcb 0 .. 30 ms 0 ms VT mcb operating time
2941 A 0 .. 359 200 Limit setting PhiA
2942 B 0 .. 359 340 Limit setting PhiB
7SA6 Manual 413

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

2943 I1> 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.05 A Minimum value I1>
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 0.25 A
2944 U1> 2 .. 70 V 20 V Minimum value U1>

formation
130 (PQ Pos. Seq.) OUT Load angle Phi(PQ Positive sequence)
131 (PQ Pos) block OUT Load angle Phi(PQ) blocked
132 Set wrong OUT Setting error: |PhiA - PhiB| < 3
161 Fail I Superv. OUT Failure: General Current Supervision
162 Failure I OUT Failure: Current Summation
163 Fail I balance OUT Failure: Current Balance
164 Fail U Superv. OUT Failure: general Voltage Supervision
165 Fail U Ph-E OUT Failure: Voltage summation Phase-Earth
167 Fail U balance OUT Failure: Voltage Balance
168 Fail U absent OUT Failure: Voltage absent
169 VT FuseFail>10s OUT VT Fuse Failure (alarm >10s)
170 VT FuseFail OUT VT Fuse Failure (alarm instantaneous)
171 Fail Ph. Seq. OUT Failure: Phase Sequence
195 Fail Conductor OUT Failure: Broken Conductor
196 Fuse Fail M.OFF OUT Fuse Fail Monitor is switched OFF
197 MeasSup OFF OUT Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
414 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.22.2 Trip circuit supervision
Trip Circuit The 7SA6 incorporates an integrated trip circuit supervision function. Depending on
Monitoring the number of available binary inputs (not connected to a common potential), monitor-
ing with one or two binary inputs can be selected. If the routing of the required binary
inputs does not comply with the selected monitoring mode, an alarm is issued (TripC
ProgFAIL) with identification of the non-compliant circuit. When using two binary
inputs, malfunctions in the trip circuit can be detected under all circuit breaker condi-
tions. When only one binary input is used, malfunctions in the circuit breaker itself
cannot be detected. If single-pole tripping is possible, a separate trip circuit supervi-
sion can be implemented for each circuit breaker pole provided the required binary
inputs are available.
Supervision with When using two binary inputs, these are connected according to Figure 2-180, parallel
Two Binary Inputs to the associated trip contact on one side, and parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary
contacts on the other.
A precondition for the use of the trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for
the circuit breaker is higher than the total of the minimum voltages drops at the two
binary inputs (UCtrl > 2UBImin). Since at least 19 V are needed for each binary input,
the supervision function can only be used with a system control voltage of over 38 V.
Figure 2-180 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
TR Trip relay contact
CB Circuit breaker
TC Circuit breaker trip coil
Aux1 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (NO contact)
Aux2 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (NC contact)
U-Ctrl Control voltage (trip voltage)
U-BI1 Input voltage of 1st binary input
U-BI2 Input voltage of 2nd binary input
7SA6 Manual 415

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Supervision with binary inputs not only detects interruptions in the trip circuit and loss
of control voltage, it also supervises the response of the circuit breaker using the po-
sition of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary
inputs are activated (logical condition H in the following table), or short-circuited (log-
ical condition L).
A state in which both binary inputs are not activated (L) is only possible in intact trip
circuits for a short transition period (trip relay contact closed but circuit breaker not yet
open).
A continuous state of this condition is only possible when the trip circuit has been in-
terrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip circuit, a loss of battery voltage occurs, or
malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism. Therefore, it is used as moni-
toring criterion.
Table 2-21 Condition table for binary inputs, depending on RTC and CB position
No. Trip Contact Circuit Breaker Aux 1 Aux 2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State
1 Open ON Closed Open H L Normal operation with circuit
breaker closed
2 Open OFF Open Closed H H Normal operation with circuit
breaker open
3 Closed ON Closed Open L L Transition or Malfunction
malfunction
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L H TR has tripped successfully
The conditions of the two binary inputs are scanned periodically. A query takes place
about every 500 ms. If three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality, an
annunciation is reported (see Figure 2-181). The repeated measurements help to de-
termine the delay of the alarm message and to avoid that an alarm is output during
short-time transition periods. After the fault in the trip circuit is removed, the alarm is
reset automatically after the same time.
Figure 2-181 Logic diagram of the trip circuit monitoring with two binary inputs
Supervision with The binary input is connected in parallel to the respective command relay contact of
One Binary Input the protection device according to Figure 2-182. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact
is bridged with a high-ohm equivalent resistor R.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be at least twice as high as the
minimum voltage drop at the binary input (UCtrl > 2UBImin). Since at least 19 V are
needed for the binary input, the monitor can be used with a system control voltage of
over 38 V.
A calculation example for the equivalent resistor R is shown in the configuration notes
in Section Mounting and Connections, margin heading Trip Circuit Supervision.
416 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-182 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input
CB Circuit breaker
U-BI Input voltage of binary input
R Substitute resistor
UR Voltage across the substitute resistor
During normal operation, the binary input is activated (logical condition H) when the
trip contact is open and the trip circuit is intact, because the supervision circuit is
closed either by the circuit breaker auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or
through the equivalent resistor R. Only as long as the trip contact is closed, the binary
input is short-circuited and thereby deactivated (logical condition L).
If the binary input is permanently deactivated during operation, an interruption in the
trip circuit or a failure of the (trip) control voltage can be assumed.
The trip circuit supervision does not operate during system faults. A momentary closed
tripping contact does not lead to a failure indication. If, however, other trip relay con-
tacts from different devices are connected in parallel in the trip circuit, the fault indica-
tion must be delayed by Alarm Delay (see also Figure 2-183). After the fault in the
trip circuit is removed, the alarm is reset automatically after the same time.
Figure 2-183 Logic diagram for trip circuit supervision with one binary input
7SA6 Manual 417

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
General The number of circuits to be supervised was set during the configuration in address
140 Trip Cir. Sup. (Section 2.1.1.2). If the trip circuit supervision is not used at
all, the setting Disabled must be applied there.
The trip circuit supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 4001 FCT
TripSuperv.. The number of binary inputs that shall be used in each of the super-
vised circuits is set in address 4002 No. of BI. If the routing of the binary inputs
required for this does not comply with the selected supervision mode, an alarm is
given (TripC1 ProgFAIL ..., with identification of the non-compliant circuit).
Supervision with The alarm for supervision with two binary inputs is always delayed by approx. 1 s to
One Binary Input 2 s, whereas the delay time of the alarm for supervision with one binary input can be
set in address 4003 Alarm Delay. 1 s to 2 s are sufficient if only the 7SA6 device is
connected to the trip circuits as the trip circuit supervision does not operate during a
system fault. If, however, trip contacts from other devices are connected in parallel in
the trip circuit, the alarm must be delayed such that the longest trip command duration
can be reliably bridged.
2.22.2.3 Settings

4001 FCT TripSuperv. ON OFF TRIP Circuit Supervision is
OFF
4002 No. of BI 1 .. 2 2 Number of Binary Inputs per trip
circuit
4003 Alarm Delay 1 .. 30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm

formation
6854 >TripC1 TripRel SP >Trip circuit superv. 1: Trip Relay
6855 >TripC1 Bkr.Rel SP >Trip circuit superv. 1: Breaker Relay
6861 TripC OFF OUT Trip circuit supervision OFF
6865 FAIL: Trip cir. OUT Failure Trip Circuit
6866 TripC1 ProgFAIL OUT TripC1 blocked: Binary input is not set
418 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.23 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test
2.23.1 Function Control
The function control is the control centre of the device. It coordinates the sequence of
the protection and ancillary functions, processes their decisions and the information
coming from the power system.
Applications Line energization recognition,

Processing of the circuit breaker position,
Open Pole Detector,
Fault detection logic,
Tripping logic.
2.23.1.1 Line Energisation Detection
During energisation of the protected object, several measures may be required or de-
sirable. Following a manual closure onto a short-circuit, immediate trip of the circuit
breaker is usually required. In the distance protection for example, this is implemented
by activation of the overreaching zone Z1B and the switch on to fault function for a
short period following manual closure. In addition at least one stage of each short-
circuit protection function can be selected to trip without time delay following manual
closure as described in the corresponding sections. Also see Section 2.1.4.1 at margin
heading Circuit Breaker Status.
The manual closing command must be indicated to the device via a binary input. In
order to be independent of the duration that the switch is closed, the command is set
to a defined length in the device (adjustable with the address 1150 SI Time
Man.Cl). This setting can only be changed in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
Figure 2-184 shows the logic diagram.
7SA6 Manual 419

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-184 Logic diagram of the manual closing procedure
Reclosure via the integrated control functions on-site control, control via DIGSI
control via serial interface can have the same effect as manual reclosure, see pa-
rameter 1152 in Chapter 2.1.4.1 at margin heading Circuit Breaker Status.
If the device has an integrated automatic reclosure, the integrated manual closure
logic of the 7SA6 automatically distinguishes between an external control command
via the binary input and an automatic reclosure by the internal automatic reclosure so
that the binary input >Manual Close can be connected directly to the control
circuit of the close coil of the circuit breaker (Figure 2-185). Each reclosure that is not
initiated by the internal automatic reclosure function is interpreted as a manual reclo-
sure, even it has been initiated by a control command from the device.
420 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-185 Manual closure with internal automatic reclosure

CB Circuit breaker
ON Circuit breaker close coil
CBaux Circuit breaker auxiliary contact
If, however, external close commands which should not activate the manual close
function are possible (e.g. external reclosure device), the binary input >Manual
Close must be triggered by a separate contact at the control discrepancy switch
(Figure 2-186).
If in that latter case a manual close command can also be given by means of an inter-
nal control command from the device, such a command must be combined with the
manual CLOSE function via parameter 1152 Man.Clos. Imp. (Figure 2-184).
Figure 2-186 Manual closing with external automatic reclosure device

CB Circuit breaker
ON Circuit breaker close coil
CBaux Circuit breaker auxiliary contact
7SA6 Manual 421

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Besides the manual CLOSE detection, the device records any energization of the line
via the integrated line energization detection. This function processes a change-of-
state of the measured quantities as well as the position of the breaker auxiliary con-
tacts. The current status of the circuit breaker is detected, as described in the following
Section at Detection of the Circuit Breaker Position. The criteria for the line energi-
zation detection change according to the local conditions of the measuring points and
the setting of the parameter address 1134 Line Closure (see Section 2.1.4 at
margin heading Circuit Breaker Status).
The phase-phase currents and the phase-earth voltages are available as measuring
quantities. A flowing current excludes that the circuit breaker is open (exception: a
fault between current transformer and circuit breaker). If the circuit breaker is closed,
it may, however, still occur that no current is flowing. The voltages can only be used
as a criterion for the de-energized line if the voltage transformers are installed on the
feeder side. Therefore, the device only evaluates those measuring quantities that
provide information on the status of the line according to address 1134.
But a change-of-state, such as a voltage jump from zero to a considerable value (ad-
dress 1131 PoleOpenVoltage) or the occurrence of a considerable current (ad-
dress 1130 PoleOpenCurrent), can be a reliable indicator for line energization as
such changes can neither occur during normal operation nor in case of a fault. These
settings can only be changed via DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
The position of the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breakers indicate directly the posi-
tion of the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker is controlled single-pole, the critierion
for energization is if at least one contact changes from open to closed.
The detected energization is signalled through the message Line closure (No.
590). The parameter 1132 SI Time all Cl. is used to set the signal to a defined
length. These settings can only be changed via DIGSI at Display Additional Set-
tings. Figure 2-187 shows the logic diagram.
In order to avoid that an energization is detected mistakenly, the state line open,
which precedes any energization, must apply for a minimum time (settable with the
address 1133 T DELAY SOTF). The default setting for this enable delay is 250 ms.
This setting can only be changed in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings.
422 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-187 Generation of the energization signal
The line energization detection enables the distance protection, earth fault protection,
time-overcurrent protection and high-current switch onto fault protection to trip without
delay after energization of their line was detected.
Depending on the configuration of the distance protection, an undelayed trip
command can be generated after energization for each pickup or for pickup in zone
Z1B. The stages of the earth fault protection and of the time-overcurrent protection to-
gether generate an undelayed TRIP command if this was provided for in the configu-
ration. The switch onto fault protection is released phase-selectively and three-pole in
case of manual closure after energization detection. In order to generate as quickly as
possible a trip command after an energization, the fast switch-on-to-fault protection is
released selectively for each phase already when the line is open.
7SA6 Manual 423

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.23.1.2 Detection of the Circuit Breaker Position
For Protection Information regarding the circuit breaker position is required by various protection and
Purposes supplementary functions to ensure their optimal functionality. This is, for example, of
assistance for
The echo function in conjunction with the distance protection with teleprotection
(refer to Section 2.6),
The echo function in conjunction with directional earth fault comparison scheme
(refer to Section 2.8),
Weak infeed tripping (refer to Section 2.9.2),
The high-current instantaneous tripping (refer to Section 2.12 ),
The circuit breaker failure protection (refer to Section 2.19),
Verification of the dropout condition for the trip command (see Section Terminating
the Trip Signal).
A circuit breaker position logic is incorporated in the device (Figure 2-188). Depending
on the type of auxiliary contact(s) provided by the circuit breaker and the method in
which these are connected to the device, there are several alternatives of implement-
ing this logic.
In most cases it is sufficient to furnish the status of the circuit breaker with its auxiliary
contacts via a binary input to the device. This always applies if the circuit breaker is
only switched three-pole. Then the NO auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker is con-
nected to a binary input which must be configured to the input function >CB 3p
Closed (No. 379). The other inputs are then not used and the logic is restricted in
principle to simply passing of this input information on.
If the circuit breaker poles can be switched individually, and only a parallel connection
of the NO individual pole auxiliary contacts is available, the relevant binary input (BI)
is allocated to the function >CB 3p Open (No. 380). The remaining inputs are again
not used in this case.
If the circuit breaker poles can be switched individually, and the individual auxiliary
contacts are available, an individual binary input should be used for each auxiliary
contact if this is possible and if the device can and should trip single-pole. With this
configuration, the device can process the maximum amount of information. Three
binary inputs are used for this purpose:
>CB Aux. L1 (No. 351) for the auxiliary contact of pole L1,
>CB Aux. L2 (No. 352) for the auxiliary contact of pole L2,
>CB Aux. L3 (No. 353) for the auxiliary contact of pole L3.
The inputs No. 379 and No. 380 are not used in this case.
If the circuit breaker can be switched individually, two binary inputs are sufficient if both
the parallel as well as series connection of the auxiliary contacts of the three poles are
available. In this case, the parallel connection of the auxiliary contacts is routed to the
input function >CB 3p Closed (No. 379) and the series connection is routed to the
input function >CB 3p Open (No. 380).
Please note that Figure 2-188 shows the complete logic for all connection alternatives.
For each particular application, only a portion of the inputs is used as described above.
The eight output signals of the circuit breaker position logic can be processed by the
individual protection and supplementary functions. The output signals are blocked if
the signals transmitted from the circuit breaker are not plausible: for example, the
circuit breaker cannot be open and closed at the same time. Furthermore, no current
can flow over an open breaker contact.
424 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The evaluation of the measuring quantities is according to the local conditions of the
measuring points (see Section 2.1.4.1 at margin heading Circuit Breaker Status).
The phase currents are available as measuring quantities. A flowing current excludes
that the circuit breaker is open (exception: a fault between current transformer and
circuit breaker). If the circuit breaker is closed, it may, however, still occur that no
current is flowing. The decisive setting for the evaluation of the measuring quantities
is PoleOpenCurrent (address 1130) for the presence of the currents.
Figure 2-188 Circuit breaker position logic
7SA6 Manual 425

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
For Automatic Separate binary inputs comprising information on the position of the circuit breaker are
Reclosure and available for the automatic reclosure and the circuit breaker test. This is important for
CircuitBreakerTest The plausibility check before automatic reclosure (refer to Section 2.14),
The trip circuit check with the help of the TRIPCLOSEtest cycle (refer to Section
2.23.2).
When using 11/2 or 2 circuit breakers in each feeder, the automatic reclosure function
and the circuit breaker test are referred to one circuit breaker. The feedback informa-
tion of this circuit breaker can be connected separately to the device.
For this, separate binary inputs are available, which should be treated the same and
configured additionally if necessary. These have a similar significance as the inputs
described above for protection applications and are marked with CB1 ... to distin-
guish them, i.e.:
>CB1 3p Closed (No. 410) for the series connection of the NO auxiliary con-
tacts of the CB,
>CB1 3p Open (No. 411) for the series connection of the NC auxiliary contacts
of the CB,
>CB1 Pole L1 (No. 366) for the auxiliary contact of pole L1,
>CB1 Pole L2 (No. 367) for the auxiliary contact of pole L2,
>CB1 Pole L3 (No. 368) for the auxiliary contact of pole L3.
2.23.1.3 Open Pole Detector
Single-pole dead times can be detected and reported via the Open Pole Detector. The
corresponding protection and monitoring functions can respond. The following figure
shows the logic structure of an Open Pole Detector.
426 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-189 Open pole detector logic
7SA6 Manual 427

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Single-pole During a single-pole dead time, the load current flowing in the two healthy phases
dead time forces a current flow via earth which may cause undesired pickup. The resulting zero-
sequence voltage may also prompt undesired responses of the protection functions.
The alarms 1pole open L1 (No. 591), 1pole open L2 (No. 592) and 1pole
open L3 (No. 593) are generated in addition if the Open Pole Detector recognizes
that current and voltage are absent in one phase but neither in the other phases
current is flowing. In this case, the message will be held up only for as long as the con-
dition is fulfilled. This enables a single-pole automatic reclosure to be detected on an
unloaded line.
Especially for applications with busbar side voltage transformers, the indication
1pole open Lx is additionally transmitted if the phase-selective CB auxiliary con-
tacts clearly show a single-pole open circuit breaker, and the current of the affected
phase falls below the parameter 1130 PoleOpenCurrent.
Depending on the setting of parameter 1136 OpenPoleDetect., the Open Pole De-
tector evaluates all available measured values including the auxiliary contacts (default
setting w/ measurement) or it processes only the information from the auxiliary con-
tacts including the phase current values (setting Current AND CB). To disable the
Open Pole Detector, set parameter 1136 to OFF.
2.23.1.4 Pickup Logic of the Entire Device
Phase Segregated The fault detection logic combines the fault detection (pickup) signals of all protection
Fault Detection functions. In the case of those protection functions that allow for phase segregated
pickup, the pickup is output in a phase segregated manner. If a protection function
detects an earth fault, this is also output as a common device alarm. Thus, the alarms
Relay PICKUP L1, Relay PICKUP L2, Relay PICKUP L3 and Relay
PICKUP E are available.
The above annunciations can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. For the local
display of fault event messages and for the transmission of event messages to a per-
sonal computer or a centralized control system, several protection functions provide
the possibility to display the faulted phase information in a single message, e.g.
Dis.Pickup L12E for the distance protection fault detection in L1-L2-E only one
such message appears. It represents the complete definition of the fault detection.
428 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
General Pickup The pickup signals are combined with OR and lead to a general pickup of the device.
It is signalled with the alarm Relay PICKUP. If no protection function of the device
has picked up any longer, Relay PICKUP disappears (indication: OFF).
General device pickup is a precondition for a series of internal and external functions
that occur subsequently. The following are among the internal functions controlled by
general device pickup:
Opening of fault case: from general device pickup to general device dropout, all
fault indications are entered in the trip log.
Initialization of fault storage: the storage and maintenance of fault values can also
be made dependent on the occurrence of a trip command.
Generation of spontaneous indications: certain fault indications can be displayed as
so-called spontaneous indications (see Spontaneous Indications below). This in-
dication can also be made dependent on the general device trip.
Start action time of automatic reclosure (if available and used).
External functions may be controlled by this indication via an output contact. Examples
are:
Automatic reclose devices,
Channel boost in conjunction with signal transmission by PLC,
Further additional devices or similar.
Spontaneous Spontaneous indications are fault indications which appear in the display automatical-
Indications ly following a general fault detection or trip command of the device. For the 7SA6,
these indications include:
Relay PICKUP: protective function that picked up;
S/E/F TRIP: protection function which tripped (only device with
graphic display);
PU Time: Operating time from the general pickup to the dropout
of the device, in ms;
TRIP Time: the operating time from general pickup to the first trip
command of the device, in ms;
dist =: Distance to fault in kilometers or miles derived by the
distance to fault location function (if possible).
7SA6 Manual 429

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.23.1.5 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device
Three-pole Tripping In general, the device trips three-pole in the event of a fault. Depending on the version
ordered (see Section A.1, Ordering Information), single-pole tripping is also possible.
If, in general, single-pole tripping is not possible or desired, the output function
Relay TRIP is used for the trip command output to the circuit breaker. In these
cases the following sections regarding single-pole tripping are not of interest.
Single-pole Single-pole tripping only makes sense on overhead lines, on which automatic reclo-
Tripping sure shall be carried out and where the circuit breakers at both ends of the line are
capable of single-pole tripping. In such cases, the faulted phase may be tripped single-
pole and subsequently reclosed; in the case of two-phase and three-phase faults with
or without earth, three-pole tripping is usually carried out.
Device prerequisites for phase segregated tripping are:
Phase segregated tripping is provided by the device (according to the ordering
code);
The tripping protection function is suitable for pole-segregated tripping (for exam-
ple, not for frequency protection, overvoltage protection or overload protection),
The binary input >1p Trip Perm is configured and activated or the internal au-
tomatic reclosure function is ready for reclosure after single-pole tripping.
In all other cases tripping is always three-pole. The binary input >1p Trip Perm
is the logic inversion of a three-pole coupling and is activated by an external auto-re-
closure device as long as this is ready for a single-pole auto-reclosure cycle.
With the 7SA6, it is also possible to trip three-pole when only one phase is subjected
to the trip conditions, but more than one phase indicates a fault detection. With dis-
tance protection this is the case when two faults at different locations occur simulta-
neously but only one of them is within the range of the fast tripping zone (Z1 or Z1B).
This is selected with the setting parameter 3pole coupling (address 1155), which
is set to with PICKUP (every multiple-phase fault detection causes three-pole trip)
or with TRIP (in the event of multi-phase faults in the tripping area, the tripping is
three-pole).
The tripping logic combines the trip signals from all protection functions. The trip com-
mands of those protection functions that allow single-pole tripping are phase segre-
gated. The corresponding messages are named Relay TRIP L1, Relay TRIP
L2 and Relay TRIP L3.
These alarms can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. In the event of three-pole trip-
ping all three alarms pick up.
If single-pole tripping is possible, the protection functions generates a group signal for
the local displaying of alarms and for the transmission of the alarms to a PC or a
central control system, e.g. Dis.Trip 1pL1, Dis.Trip 1pL2, Dis.Trip
1pL3, for single-pole tripping by the distance protection and Dis.Trip 3p for
three-pole tripping. Only one of these alarms is displayed at a time. These alarms are
also intended for the trip command output to the circuit breaker.
430 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Single-pole Single-pole tripping for two-phase faults is a special feature. If a phase-phase fault
Tripping after without earth occurs in an earthed system, this fault can be cleared by single-pole trip
Two-Phase Fault and automatic reclosure in one of the faulted phases, as the short-circuit path is inter-
rupted in this manner. The phase selected for tripping must be the same at both line
ends (and should be the same for the entire system).
The setting parameter Trip2phFlt (address 1156) allows to select whether this trip-
ping should be 1pole leading , i.e. single-pole tripping of the leading phase, or
1pole lagging , i.e. single-pole tripping of the lagging phase. Standard setting is
3pole, i.e. three-pole tripping after two-phase faults (default setting).
Table 2-22 Single-pole and three-pole trip depending on fault type
Type of Fault Parameter Output signals for trip

(from Protection Func- Trip2phFlt TRIP 1p.L1 TRIP 1p.L2 TRIP 1p.L3 Relay TRIP
tion) 3ph.
L1 (any) X
L2 (any) X
L3 (any) X
L1 E (any) X
L2 E (any) X
L3 E (any) X
L1 L2 3pole X
L1 L2 1pole leading X
L1 L2 1pole lagging X
L2 L3 3pole X
L1 L3 3pole X
L1 L2 E (any) X
L2 L3 E (any) X
L1 L3 E (any) X
L1 L2 L3 (any) X
L1 L2 L3 E (any) X
E (any) X
General Trip All trip signals for the protective functions are connected by OR and generate the
message Relay TRIP. This can be allocated to LED or output relay.
7SA6 Manual 431

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Terminating the Once a trip command is initiated, it is phase segregatedly latched (in the event of
Trip Signal three-pole tripping for each of the three poles) (refer to Figure 2-190). At the same
time, the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is started. This ensures
that the command is transmitted to the circuit breaker for a sufficient amount of time,
even if the function which issued the trip signal drops out quickly. The trip commands
can only be terminated when the last protection function dropped out (i.e. functions no
longer pick up) AND the minimum trip signal duration expired.
A further condition for the reset of the trip command is that the circuit breaker has
opened, in the event of single-pole tripping the relevant circuit breaker pole. In the
function control of the device, this is checked by means of the circuit breaker position
feedback (Section Detection of the Circuit Breaker Position) and the flow of current.
The residual current PoleOpenCurrent that is certainly undershot when the circuit
breaker pole is open is set in address 1130. Address 1135 Reset Trip CMD deter-
mines under which conditions a trip command is reset. If CurrentOpenPole is set,
the trip command is reset as soon as the current disappears. It is important that the
value set in address 1130 PoleOpenCurrent (see above) is undershot. If Current
AND CB is set, the circuit breaker auxiliary contact must send a message that the
circuit breaker is open. It is a prerequisite for this setting that the position of the auxil-
iary contacts is allocated via a binary input. If this additional condition is not required
for resetting the trip command (e.g. if test sockets are used for protection testing), it
can be switched off with the setting Pickup Reset.
Figure 2-190 Storage and termination of the trip command
432 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Reclosure When tripping the circuit breaker by a protection function, the manual reclosure must
Interlocking often be blocked until the cause for the protection function operation is found. 7SA6
enables this via the integrated reclosure interlocking.
The interlocking state (LOCKOUT) will be realized by a RS flipflop which is protected
against auxiliary voltage failure (see Figure 2-191). The RS flipflop is set via binary
input >Lockout SET (No. 385). With the output alarm LOCKOUT (No. 530), if
interconnected correspondingly, a reclosure of the circuit breaker (e.g. for automatic
reclosure, manual close signal, synchronization, closing via control) can be blocked.
Only once the cause for the protection operation is known, should the interlocking be
reset by a manual reset via binary input >Lockout RESET (No. 386).
Figure 2-191 Reclosure interlocking
Conditions which cause reclosure interlocking and control commands which have to
be interlocked can be set individually. The two inputs and the output can be wired via
the correspondingly allocated binary inputs and outputs or be linked via user-defined
logic functions (CFC).
If, for example, each trip by the protection function has to cause a closing lock-out,
then combine the tripping command Relay TRIP (No. 511) with the binary input
>Lockout SET. If automatic reclosure is applied, only the final trip of the protection
function should activate reclosing lock-out. Please bear in mind that the message
Definitive TRIP (No. 536) applies only for 500 ms. Then combine the output
alarm Definitive TRIP (No. 536) with the interlocking input >Lockout SET,
so that the interlocking function is not established when an automatic reclosure is still
expected to come.
In the most simple case, the output alarm LOCKOUT (No. 530) can be allocated to
the output which trips the circuit breaker without creating further links. Then the trip-
ping command is maintained until the interlock is reset via the binary reset input. Nat-
urally it has to be ensured in advance that the close coil at the circuit breaker as is
usually done is blocked as long as a tripping command is maintained.
The output alarm LOCKOUT can also be applied to interlock certain closing com-
mands (externally or via CFC), e.g. by combining the output alarm with the binary input
>Blk Man. Close (No. 357) or by connecting the inverted alarm with the bay in-
terlocking of the feeder.
The reset input >Lockout RESET (No. 386) resets the interlocking state. This input
is initiated by an external device which is protected against unauthorized or uninten-
tional operation. The interlocking state can also be controlled by internal sources using
CFC, e.g. a function key, operation of the device or using DIGSI on a PC.
For each case please make sure that the corresponding logical combinations, security
measures, etc. are taken into account for the routing of the binary inputs and outputs
and are also considered for the setting of user-defined logic functions, if necessary.
See also the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
7SA6 Manual 433

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Breaker Tripping While on feeders without automatic reclosure every trip command by a protection
Alarm Suppression function is final, it is desirable, when using automatic reclosure, to prevent the opera-
tion detector of the circuit breaker (transient contact on the breaker) from sending an
alarm if the trip of the breaker is not final (Figure 2-192).
For this purpose, the signal from the circuit breaker is routed via a correspondingly al-
located output contact of the 7SA6 (output alarm CB Alarm Supp, No. 563). In the
idle state and when the device is turned off, this contact is closed. Therefore an output
contact with a normally closed contact (NC contact) has to be allocated. Which contact
is to be allocated is dependent on the device version. Refer to the general views in the
Appendix.
Prior to the command, with the internal automatic reclosure in the ready state, the
contact is opened so that no signal from the circuit breaker is forwarded. This is only
the case if the device is equipped with internal automatic reclosure and if the latter was
taken into consideration when configuring the protection functions (address 133).
Also when closing the breaker via the binary input >Manual Close (No 356) or via
the integrated automatic reclosure the contact is interrupted so that the breaker alarm
is inhibited.
Further optional closing commands which are not sent via the device cannot be taken
into consideration. Closing commands for control can be linked to the alarm suppres-
sion via the user-defined logic functions (CFC).
Figure 2-192 Breaker tripping alarm suppression
If the device issues a final trip command, the contact remains closed. This is the case,
during the reclaim time of the automatic reclosure cycle, when the automatic reclosure
is blocked or switched off or, due to other reasons is not ready for automatic reclosure
(e.g. tripping only occurred after the action time expired).
Figure 2-193 shows time diagrams for manual trip and close as well as for short-circuit
tripping with a single, failed automatic reclosure cycle.
434 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-193 Breaker tripping alarm suppression sequence examples
7SA6 Manual 435

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.23.2 Circuit breaker trip test
The 7SA6 distance protection relay allows for convenient testing of the trip circuits and
the circuit breakers.
The test programs as shown in Table 2-23 are available. The single-pole tests are nat-
urally only available if the device at hand allows for single-pole tripping.
The output alarms mentioned must be allocated to the relevant command relays that
are used for controlling the circuit breaker coils.
The test is started using the operator panel on the front of the device or using the PC
with DIGSI. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Descrip-
tion. Figure 2-194 shows the chronological sequence of one TRIPCLOSE test cycle.
The set times are those stated in Section 2.1.2.1 for Trip Command Duration and
Circuit Breaker Test.
Where the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate the status of the circuit breaker or
of its poles to the device via binary inputs, the test cycle can only be initiated if the
circuit breaker is closed.
The information regarding the position of the circuit breakers is not automatically
derived from the position logic according to the above section. For the circuit breaker
test function (auto recloser) there are separate binary inputs for the switching status
feedback of the circuit breaker position. These must be taken into consideration when
allocating the binary inputs as mentioned in the previous section.
The alarms of the device show the respective state of the test sequence.
Table 2-23 Circuit breaker test programs
Serial Test Programs Circuit Output Indications (No.)

No. Breaker
1 1-pole TRIP/CLOSE-cycle phase L1 CB1-TESTtrip L1 (7325)
2 1-pole TRIP/CLOSE-cycle phase L2 CB1-TESTtrip L2 (7326)
3 1-pole TRIP/CLOSE-cycle phase L3 CB 1 CB1-TESTtrip L3 (7327)
4 3-pole TRIP/CLOSE-cycle CB1-TESTtrip 123 (7328)
Associated close command CB1-TEST CLOSE (7329)
Figure 2-194 TRIP-CLOSE test cycle
436 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The timer setting values are according to Subsection 2.1.2.1 for command duration
and circuit breaker test.

formation
- CB1tst L1 - CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L1
- CB1tst 123 - CB1-TEST trip/close Phases L123
7325 CB1-TESTtrip L1 OUT CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L1
7328 CB1-TESTtrip123 OUT CB1-TEST TRIP command L123
7329 CB1-TEST close OUT CB1-TEST CLOSE command
7345 CB-TEST running OUT CB-TEST is in progress
7346 CB-TSTstop FLT. OUT_Ev CB-TEST canceled due to Power Sys. Fault
7347 CB-TSTstop OPEN OUT_Ev CB-TEST canceled due to CB already OPEN
7348 CB-TSTstop NOTr OUT_Ev CB-TEST canceled due to CB was NOT READY
7349 CB-TSTstop CLOS OUT_Ev CB-TEST canceled due to CB stayed CLOSED
7350 CB-TST .OK. OUT_Ev CB-TEST was succesful
7SA6 Manual 437

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.23.3 Device
The device requires some general information. This may be, for example, the type of
indication to be issued in the event a power system fault occurs.
2.23.3.1 Trip-dependent Messages
The indication of messages masked to local LEDs, and the maintenance of spontane-
ous messages, can be made dependent on whether the device has issued a trip
signal. This information is not output if one or more protection functions have picked
up due to a fault, but the 7SA6 has not initiated the tripping because the fault was
cleared by another device (e.g. on another line). These messages are then limited to
faults on the protected line.
The following figure illustrates the creation of the reset command for stored messages.
When the relay drops off, stationary conditions (fault display Target on PU / Target on
TRIP; Trip / No Trip) decide whether the new fault will be stored or reset.
Figure 2-195 Creation of the reset command for the latched LED and LCD messages
2.23.3.2 Spontaneous Indications on the Display
You can determine whether or not the most important data of a fault event is displayed
automatically after the fault has occurred (see also Fault indications in Section 2.24.2
Ancillary Functions).
2.23.3.3 Switching Statistics
The number of trips initiated by the device 7SA6 are counted. If the device is capable
of single-pole tripping, a separate counter for each circuit breaker pole is provided.
Furthermore, for each trip command the interrupted current for each pole is acquired,
output in the trip log and accumulated in a memory. The maximum interrupted current
is stored as well.
If the device is equipped with the integrated automatic reclosure, the automatic close
commands are also counted, separately for reclosure after single-pole tripping, after
three-pole tripping as well as separately for the first reclosure cycle and other reclo-
sure cycles.
The counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage. They can
be set to zero or to any other initial value. For more details, refer to the SIPROTEC 4
System Description.
438 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Fault Pickup of a new protective function generally turns off any previously lit LEDs, so that
Annunciations only the latest fault is displayed at any time. It can be selected whether the stored LED
displays and the spontaneous annunciations on the display appear upon renewed
pickup, or only after a renewed trip signal is issued. In order to enter the desired type
of display, select the submenu General Device Settings in the SETTINGS menu. At
address 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD the two alternatives Target on PU and Target
on TRIP (No trip - no flag) are offered.
For devices with graphical display use parameter 615 Spont. FltDisp. to specify
whether a spontaneous indication will appear automatically on the display (YES) or not
(NO). For devices with text display such indications will appear after a system fault by
any means.
After startup of a device featuring a 4-line display, measured values are displayed by
default. Use the arrow keys on the device front to select the different represenations
of the measured values for the so-called default display. The start page of the default
display, which is displayed by default after startup of the device, can be selected via
parameter 640 Start image DD. The available representation types for the mea-
sured values are listed in the appendix .
7SA6 Manual 439

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.23.3.5 Settings

610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Target on PU Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD
Target on TRIP
615 Spont. FltDisp. NO NO Spontaneous display of flt.annun-
YES ciations
640 Start image DD image 1 image 1 Start image Default Display
image 2
image 3
image 4
image 5

formation
- Test mode IntSP Test mode
- DataStop IntSP Stop data transmission
- Reset LED IntSP Reset LED
- SynchClock IntSP_Ev Clock Synchronization
- >Light on SP >Back Light on
- HWTestMod IntSP Hardware Test Mode
- Error FMS1 OUT Error FMS FO 1
- Error FMS2 OUT Error FMS FO 2
- Distur.CFC OUT Disturbance CFC
- Brk OPENED IntSP Breaker OPENED
- FdrEARTHED IntSP Feeder EARTHED
1 Not configured SP No Function configured
2 Non Existent SP Function Not Available
3 >Time Synch SP >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock
5 >Reset LED SP >Reset LED
11 >Annunc. 1 SP >User defined annunciation 1
15 >Test mode SP >Test mode
16 >DataStop SP >Stop data transmission
51 Device OK OUT Device is Operational and Protecting
52 ProtActive IntSP At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active
55 Reset Device OUT Reset Device
56 Initial Start OUT Initial Start of Device
67 Resume OUT Resume
68 Clock SyncError OUT Clock Synchronization Error
69 DayLightSavTime OUT Daylight Saving Time
70 Settings Calc. OUT Setting calculation is running
71 Settings Check OUT Settings Check
72 Level-2 change OUT Level-2 change
440 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

formation
73 Local change OUT Local setting change
110 Event Lost OUT_Ev Event lost
113 Flag Lost OUT Flag Lost
125 Chatter ON OUT Chatter ON
126 ProtON/OFF IntSP Protection ON/OFF (via system port)
127 AR ON/OFF IntSP Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via system port)
128 TelepONoff IntSP Teleprot. ON/OFF (via system port)
140 Error Sum Alarm OUT Error with a summary alarm
144 Error 5V OUT Error 5V
160 Alarm Sum Event OUT Alarm Summary Event
177 Fail Battery OUT Failure: Battery empty
181 Error A/D-conv. OUT Error: A/D converter
183 Error Board 1 OUT Error Board 1
191 Error Offset OUT Error: Offset
192 Error1A/5Awrong OUT Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting
193 Alarm adjustm. OUT Alarm: Analog input adjustment invalid
194 Error neutralCT OUT Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB
320 Warn Mem. Data OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Data exceeded
321 Warn Mem. Para. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Parameter exceeded
322 Warn Mem. Oper. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Operation exceeded
323 Warn Mem. New OUT Warn: Limit of Memory New exceeded
4051 Telep. ON IntSP Teleprotection is switched ON
7SA6 Manual 441

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.23.4 EN100-Modul
An EN100-Modul allows to integrate the 7SA6 into 100 Mbit Ethernet communication
networks used by process control and automation systems and running IEC 61850
protocols. This standard provides consistent inter-relay communication without gate-
ways or protocol converters. This allows open and interoperable use of SIPROTEC 4
devices even in heterogeneous environments. In parallel to the process control inte-
gration of the device, this interface can also be used for communication with DIGSI
and for inter-relay communication via GOOSE.
Interface Selection No settings are required for operation of the Ethernet system interface module
(IEC 61850, EN100-Modul). If the device is equipped with such a module (see
MLFB), the module is automatically configured to the interface available for it, namely
Port B.

formation
009.0100 Failure Modul IntSP Failure EN100 Modul
009.0101 Fail Ch1 IntSP Failure EN100 Link Channel 1 (Ch1)
009.0102 Fail Ch2 IntSP Failure EN100 Link Channel 2 (Ch2)
442 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.24 Auxiliary Functions
The additional functions of the 7SA6 distance protection relay include:

commissioning tool,
processing of messages,
processing of operational measured values,
storage of fault record data.
2.24.1 Commissioning Aids
The device is provided with a comprehensive commissioning and monitoring tool that
checks the whole distance protection system: the Web-Monitor. The documentation
for this tool is available on CD-ROM with DIGSI, and in the Internet at www.sipro-
tec.com.
To ensure a proper communication between the device and the PC browser the trans-
mission speed must be equal for both. Furthermore, the user must set an IP-address
so that the browser can identify the device.
Thanks to the Web-Monitor the user is able to operate the device with the PC. On the
PC screen the front panel of the device is emulated, a function that can also be deac-
tivated by the settings. The actual operation of the device can now be simulated with
the mouse pointer. This possibility can be disabled.
If the device is equipped with an EN100 module, operation by DIGSI or the Web-
Monitor is also possible via Ethernet. All that has to be done is to set the IP configura-
tion of the device accordingly. Parallel operation using DIGSI and Web-Monitor via dif-
ferent interfaces is possible.
WEB-Monitor The Web-Monitor provides quick and easy access to the most important data in the
device. Using a personal computer equipped with a web browser, the Web-Monitor
offers a detailed illustration of the most important measured values and of the distance
protection data required for directional checks.
The measured values list can be selected from the navigation toolbar separately for
the local device and (in devices with protection data interface) the remote device. In
each case a list with the desired information is displayed (see Figures 2-196 and 2-
197).
7SA6 Manual 443

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Figure 2-196 Local measured values in the Web-Monitor examples for measured values
Figure 2-197 Measured values of the remote device Example
The currents, voltages and their phase angles derived from the primary, secondary
and remote measured values, are graphically displayed as phasor diagrams. Figure
2-198 shows this view for one device, and Figure 2-199 for two devices. In addition to
phasor diagrams of the measured values, numerical values as well as frequency and
device addresses are indicated. For details please refer to the documentation provid-
ed for the Web-Monitor.
444 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-198 Phasor diagram of the primary measured values Example
Figure 2-199 Phasor diagram of the remote measured values Example
7SA6 Manual 445

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
The following types of indications can be retrieved and displayed with the Web-
Monitor
Event Log (operational indications),
Trip Log (fault indications),
Earth Faults (Sensitive Earth Fault Log),
Spontaneous indications
You can print these lists with the Print event buffer button.
Directional Check: The illustration below (Figure 2-200) shows how the displayed measured values are
allocated to the devices of the distance protection system. The active power direction
of each device is shown by an arrow. The active power is calculated on the basis of
voltages and currents that exceed the values set for PoleOpenVoltage (address
1131) or PoleOpenCurrent (address 1130). The direction of the arrow, and its
colour, show you whether the active power flows into the line or whether the current
transformer is misconnected. This allows to check the correct connection of the
current transformers at each line end. If there are several ends, you can check the the-
oretically determined directions. This directional check is used to verify that the pro-
tection operates in the correct direction. It is not related with parameter 1107 P,Q
sign.
Figure 2-200 Directional check for three devices Example
The parameters of the Web-Monitor can be set separately for the front operator inter-
face and the service interface. The relevant IP addresses are those which relate to the
interface that is used for communication with the PC and the Web-Monitor.
Make sure that the 12-digit IP address valid for the browser is set correctly via DIGSI
in the format ***.***.***.***.
446 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.24.2 Processing of Messages
After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective
relay and the measured quantities should be saved for future analysis. For this reason
message processing is done in three ways:
Displays and Important events and states are displayed by LEDs on the front cover. The relay also
Binary Outputs contains output relays for remote signaling. Most indications and displays can be con-
(output relays) figured differently from the delivery default settings (for information on the delivery
default setting see Appendix). The SIPROTEC 4 System Description gives a detailed
description of the configuration procedure.
The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode
(each may be individually set).
The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are
reset
On site by pressing the LED key on the relay,
Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose,
Using one of the serial interfaces,
Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup.
Status messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the condition
to be reported has been cancelled. This applies to, e.g. indications from monitoring
functions, or the like.
A green LED displays operational readiness of the relay (RUN), and cannot be reset.
It goes out if the self-check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal oc-
currence, or if the auxiliary voltage fails.
When auxiliary voltage is present but the relay has an internal malfunction, the red
LED (ERROR) lights up and the processor blocks the relay.
DIGSI enables you to control selectively each output relay and LED of the device and,
in doing so, check the correct connection to the system. In a dialog box you can, for
instance, cause each output relay to pick up, and thus test the wiring between the
7SA6 and the station, without having to create the indications masked to it.
Information on the Events and conditions can be read out on the display on the front panel of the relay.
Integrated Display Using the front operator interface or the rear service interface, for instance, a personal
(LCD) or to a computer can be connected, to which the information can be sent.
PersonalComputer
In the quiescent state, i.e. as long as no system fault is present, the LCD can display
selectable operational information (overview of the operational measured values) (de-
fault display). In the event of a system fault, information regarding the fault, the so-
called spontaneous displays, are displayed instead. After the fault indications have
been acknowledged, the quiescent data are shown again. Acknowledgement can be
performed by pressing the LED buttons on the front panel (see above).
Figure 2-201 shows the default display in a 4-line display as preset. The default
display can be configured in the graphic display. For more information see the SIPRO-
TEC 4 System Description and the Display Editor manual.
7SA6 Manual 447

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Various default displays can be selected via the arrow keys. Parameter 640 can be
set to change the default setting for the default display page shown in idle state. Two
examples of possible default display selections are given below.
Figure 2-201 Operational measured values in the default display
Default display 3 shows the measured values UL1-L2 and IL2.
Figure 2-202 Operational measured values in the default display
Moreover, the device has several event buffers for operational annunciations, switch-
ing statistics, etc., which are saved against loss of auxiliary supply by means of a
backup battery. These indications can be displayed on the LCD at any time by selec-
tion using the keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service or
operator interface. Readout of indications during operation is described in detail in the
SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
After a fault on the system, for example, important information about the progression
of the fault can be retrieved, such as the pickup of a protective element or the initiation
of a trip signal. The time the initial occurrence of the short-circuit fault occurred is ac-
curately provided via the system clock. The progress of the disturbance is output with
a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection, so that the duration of the fault
until tripping and up to reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The resolution
of the time information is 1 ms.
With a PC and the DIGSI protection data processing software it is also possible to re-
trieve and display the events with the convenience of visualization on a monitor and a
menu-guided dialog. The data can be documented on a connected printer, or stored
and evaluated at another location, if desired.
The protection device stores the messages of the last eight system faults; in the event
of a ninth fault, the oldest is erased.
A system fault starts with the recognition of the fault by the fault detection of any pro-
tection function and ends with the reset of the fault detection of the last protection func-
tion or after the expiry of the auto-reclose reclaim time, so that several unsuccessful
auto-reclose cycles are also stored cohesively. Accordingly a system fault may contain
several individual fault events (from fault detection up to reset of fault detection).
448 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Information to a If the device has a serial system interface, stored information may additionally be
Control Centre transferred via this interface to a centralized control and storage device. Several com-
munication protocols are available for the transfer of this information.
You may test whether the indications are transmitted correctly with DIGSI.
Also, the information transmitted to the control centre can be influenced during oper-
ation or tests. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows to identify all messages and mea-
sured values transferred to the central control system with an added message test
operation- bit while the device is being tested on site (test mode). This identification
prevents the messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual
power system disturbance or event. Alternatively, you may disable the transmission of
annunciations to the system interface during tests (transmission block).
To influence information at the system interface during test mode (test mode and
transmission block), a CFC logic is required. Default settings already include this
logic (see Appendix).
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes in detail how to activate and deacti-
vate test mode and blocked data transmission.
Classification of Indications are classified as follows:

Messages Operational indications: messages generated while the device is in operation: They
include information about the status of device functions, measurement data, system
data, and similar information.
Fault indications: messages from the last eight network faults that were processed
by the device.
Sensitive Ground Fault Logs (when the device has sensitive ground fault detection).
Statistic indications: they include a counter for the switching actions of the circuit
breakers initiated by the device, maybe reclose commands as well as values of in-
terrupted currents and accumulated fault currents.
A complete list of all indications and output functions that can be generated by the
device, with the associated information number (No.), can be found in the Appendix.
The lists also indicate where each indication can be sent to. If functions are not present
in the specific device version, or if they are set to Disabled, then the associated in-
dications cannot appear.
Operational Operational indications contain information that the device generates during operation
Indications and about operational conditions.
Up to 200 operational indications are recorded in chronological order in the device.
Newly generated indications are added to those already there. If the maximum capac-
ity of the memory is exhausted, the oldest indication is lost.
Operational indications arrive automatically and can be read out from the device
display or a personal computer at any time. Faults in the power system are indicated
with Network Fault and the present fault number. The fault indications contain de-
tailed information on the behaviour of the power system fault.
7SA6 Manual 449

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Fault Following a system fault, it is possible, for example, to retrieve important information
Annunciations regarding its progress, such as pickup and trip. The time the initial occurrence of the
short-circuit fault occurred is accurately provided via the system clock. The progress
of the disturbance is output with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection,
so that the duration of the fault until tripping and up to reset of the trip command can
be ascertained. The resolution of the time information is 1 ms.
A system fault starts with the recognition of the fault by the fault detection, i.e. first
pickup of any protection function, and ends with the reset of the fault detection, i.e.
dropout of the last protection function. Where a fault causes several protective func-
tions to pick up, the fault is considered to include all that occurred between pickup of
the first protective function and dropout of the last protective function.
Spontaneous After a fault, the device displays automatically and without any operator action on its
Annunciations LCD display the most important fault data from the general device pickup in the se-
quence shown in Figure 2-203.
Figure 2-203 Display of spontaneous messages in the display Example
Fault Location Besides the display at the device and in DIGSI there are additional display options
Options available in particular for the fault location. They depend on the device version, the
configuration and allocation:
If the device features the BCD output for the fault location, the transmitted figures
mean the following:
0 to 195: the calculated fault location in % of the line length (if greater than 100%,
the error lies outside the protected line in a forward direction);
197: negative fault location (fault in reverse direction);
199 overflow.
If the device disposes of at least one analog output, the fault location is output via
it and is transferred to a suitable display panel where you can immediately read the
fault distance after a fault event.
Retrievable The indications of the last eight network faults can be retrieved and output. In total 600
Indications indications can be recorded. Oldest indications are erased for newest fault indications
when the buffer is full.
Sensitive Earth For devices with sensitive earth fault detection, special earth fault records are avail-
Fault Logs able. Up to 200 earth fault messages can be recorded for the last 8 faults.
450 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Spontaneous Spontaneous indications contain information that new indications have arrived. Each
Indications new incoming indication appears immediately, i.e. the user does not have to wait for
an update or initiate one. This can be a useful help during operation, testing and com-
missioning.
Spontaneous indications can be read out via DIGSI. For more information see the
General The present condition of the SIPROTEC 4 device can be retrieved via DIGSI by
Interrogation viewing the contents of the General Interrogation. It shows all indications that are
subject to general interrogation with their current value.
2.24.3 Statistics
Counting includes the number of trips initiated by 7SA6, the accumulated breaking
currents resulting from trips initiated by protection functions, the number of close com-
mands initiated by the auto-reclosure function.
2.24.3.1 Function Description
Counters and The counters and memories of the statistics are saved by the device. Therefore, the
Memories information will not get lost in case the auxiliary voltage supply fails. The counters,
however, can be reset to zero or to any value within the setting range.
Switching statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running DIGSI
and connected to the operating or service interface.
A password is not required to read switching statistics; however, a password is re-
quired to change or delete the statistics. For more information see the SIPROTEC 4
System Description.
Number of Trips The number of trips initiated by the device 7SA6 are counted. If the device is capable
of single-pole tripping, a separate counter for each circuit breaker pole is provided.
Number of If the device is equipped with the integrated automatic reclosure, the automatic close
Automatic commands are also counted, separately for reclosure after single-pole tripping, after
Reclosing three-pole tripping as well as separately for the first reclosure cycle and other reclo-
Commands sure cycles.
Breaking Currents Following each trip command the device registers the value of each current phase that
was switched off in each pole. This information is then provided in the trip log and sum-
mated in a register. The maximum current that was switched off is also stored. Mea-
sured values are indicated in primary values.
Transmission In 7SA6 the protection communication is registered in statistics. The delay times of the
Statistics information between the devices via interfaces (run and return) are measured steadily.
The values are kept stored in the Statistic folder. The availability of the transmission
media is also reported. The availability is indicated in % / min and % / h. This enables
an evaluation of the transmission quality.
7SA6 Manual 451

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Readout / Setting / The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes how to read out the statistical
Resetting counters via the device front panel or DIGSI. Setting or resetting of these statistical
counters takes place under the menu item Annunciation -> STATISTIC by overwrit-
ing the counter values displayed.

formation
1000 # TRIPs= VI Number of breaker TRIP commands
1001 TripNo L1= VI Number of breaker TRIP commands L1
1027 IL1 = VI Accumulation of interrupted current L1
1030 Max IL1 = VI Max. fault current Phase L1
2895 AR #Close1./1p= VI No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands,1pole
2896 AR #Close1./3p= VI No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3pole
2897 AR #Close2./1p= VI No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands,1p
2898 AR #Close2./3p= VI No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands,3p
7751 PI1 TD MV Prot Int 1:Transmission delay
7753 PI1A/m MV Prot Int 1: Availability per min.
7754 PI1A/h MV Prot Int 1: Availability per hour
452 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.24.4 Measurement
A series of measured values and the values derived from them are available for on-
site retrieval or for data transfer.
A precondition for the correct display of primary and percentage values is the complete
and correct entry of the nominal values of the instrument transformers and the power
system as well as the transformation ratio of the current and voltage transformers in
the earth paths.
Display of Depending on the ordering code, connection type to the device and the configured
Measured Values protection function, only some of the listed operational measured values in Table 2-24
may be available. Of the current values IEE, IY and IP only the one which is connected
to the current measuring input I4 can apply. Phase-to-earth voltages can only be mea-
sured if the phase-to-earth voltage inputs are connected. The displacement voltage
3U0 is e-n-voltage multiplied by 3 if Uen is connected or calculated from the
phase-to-earth voltages 3U0 = |UL1 + UL2 + UL3|. All three voltage inputs must be
phase-earth connected for this.
The zero-sequence voltage U0 indicates the voltage between the delta center and
earth.
For the thermal overload protection, the calculated overtemperatures are indicated in
relation to the trip overtemperature. Overload measured values can appear only if the
overload protection was configured Enabled.
If the device is provided with the earth fault detection function for non-earthed sys-
tems, the components of the earth current (active and reactive component) are indi-
cated, as well.
If the device features synchronism and voltage check and these functions were set to
Enabled during configuration of the device functions (address 135) and parameter
U4 transformer (address 210) is set to Usy2 transf., you can read out the char-
acteristic values (voltages, frequencies, differences).
The power and operating values upon delivery are set such that power in line direction
is positive. Active components in line direction and inductive reactive components in
line direction are also positive. The same applies for the power factor cos.
It is occasionally desired to define the power drawn from the line (e.g. as seen from
the consumer) positively. Using parameter 1107 P,Q sign the signs for these com-
ponents can be inverted.
The computation of the operational measured values is also executed during an exis-
tent system fault in intervals of approx. 0.5s.
7SA6 Manual 453

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Table 2-24 Operational measured values of the local device

Measured Values primary secondary % referred to
IL1; IL2; IL3 Phase currents A A Rated operational current 1)
IEE Sensitive earth current A mA Rated operational current 3)1)
3I0 calculated Earth current A A Rated operational current 1)
3I0 measured Earth current A A Rated operational current 3)1)
I1, I2 Positive and negative sequence A A Rated operational current 1)
component of currents
IY, IP Transformer Starpoint Current or A A Rated operational current 3)1)
Earth Current of the Parallel Line
UL1-E, UL2-E,UL3-E Phase-to-earth voltages kV V Rated operational voltage / 32)
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operational voltage2)
3U0 Displacement Voltage kV V Rated operational voltage / 32)
U0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operational voltage / 32)
U1, U2 Positive and negative sequence kV V Rated operational voltage / 32)
component of voltages
UX, Uen Voltage at measuring input U4 - V -
Usy2 Voltage at measuring input U4 kV V Rated operational voltage or
Rated operational voltage / 3 2)4)5)
U1compound Positive sequence component of voltag- kV V Rated operational voltage / 32)
es at the remote end (if compounding is
active in voltage protection)
RL1-E, RL2-E, Operational resistance of all loops -
RL3-E, RL1-L2,
RL1-L2, RL3-L1,
XL1-E, XL2-E, Operational reactance of all loops -
XL3-E, XL1-L2,
XL2-L3, XL3-L1,
S, P, Q Apparent, active and reactive power MVA, MW, - 3UNIN operational rated
MVAR quantities 1)2)
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated system frequency
cos Power factor (abs) (abs) -
L1/TRIP, Thermal value of each phase, referred - - Trip overtemperature
L2/TRIP, to the tripping value
L3/TRIP
/Trip Thermal resultant value, referred to the - - Trip overtemperature
tripping value, calculated according to
the set method
Usy1, Usy2, Udiff Measured voltage values kV - -
(for synchronism check)
fsy1, fsy2, fdiff Measured frequency values Hz - -
(for synchronism check)

diff Amount of phase angle difference - -
between the measuring points Usy1 and
Usy2 (for synchronism check)
3I0, 3I0reactive Active and reactive components of the S mA -
earth current
1) according to address 1104
2) according to address 1103
3) considering factor 221 I4/Iph CT
4)
according to address 212 Usy2 connection
5)
considering factor 215 Usy1/Usy2 ratio
454 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Remote During communication, the data of the other ends of the protected object can also be
Measured Values read out. For each of the devices, the currents and voltages involved as well as phase
shifts between the local and transfer measured quantities can be displayed. This is es-
pecially helpful for checking the correct and coherent phase allocation at the different
line ends. Furthermore, the device addresses of the other devices are transmitted so
that all important data of all ends are available in the substation. All possible data are
listed in Table 2-25.
Table 2-25 Operational measured values transmitted from the other ends and compared
with the local values
Data Primary value

Device ADR Device address of the remote (absolute)
device
IL1; IL2; IL3 remote Phase currents of the remote A
device
IL1, IL2, IL3 local Phase currents of the local device A
(IL1), (IL2), (IL3) Phase angle of the phase currents
remote of the remote device referred to the

local voltage UL1-E
(IL1), (IL2), (IL3) Phase angle of the phase currents
local of the local device referred to the

local voltage UL1-E
UL1, UL2, UL3 remote Voltages of the remote device kV
UL1, UL2, UL3 local Voltages of the local device kV
(UL1), (UL2) (UL3) Phase angle of the phase voltages
remote of the remote device referred to the

local voltage UL1-E
(UL1), (UL2) (UL3) Phase angle of the phase voltages
local of the local device referred to the

local voltage UL1-E

formation
601 IL1 = MV I L1
602 IL2 = MV I L2
603 IL3 = MV I L3
610 3I0 = MV 3I0 (zero sequence)
611 3I0sen= MV 3I0sen (sensitive zero sequence)
612 IY = MV IY (star point of transformer)
613 3I0par= MV 3I0par (parallel line neutral)
619 I1 = MV I1 (positive sequence)
620 I2 = MV I2 (negative sequence)
621 UL1E= MV U L1-E
622 UL2E= MV U L2-E
623 UL3E= MV U L3-E
624 UL12= MV U L12
625 UL23= MV U L23
626 UL31= MV U L31
7SA6 Manual 455

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
627 Uen = MV Uen
631 3U0 = MV 3U0 (zero sequence)
632 Usy2= MV Measured value Usy2
633 Ux = MV Ux (separate VT)
634 U1 = MV U1 (positive sequence)
635 U2 = MV U2 (negative sequence)
636 Udiff = MV Measured value U-diff (Usy1- Usy2)
641 P = MV P (active power)
642 Q = MV Q (reactive power)
643 PF = MV Power Factor
644 Freq= MV Frequency
645 S = MV S (apparent power)
646 F-sy2 = MV Frequency fsy2
647 F-diff= MV Frequency difference
648 -diff= MV Angle difference
649 F-sy1 = MV Frequency fsy1
679 U1co= MV U1co (positive sequence, compounding)
684 U0 = MV U0 (zero sequence)
701 3I0senA MV Active 3I0sen (sensitive Ie)
702 3I0senR MV Reactive 3I0sen (sensitive Ie)
801 /trip = MV Temperat. rise for warning and trip
802 /tripL1= MV Temperature rise for phase L1
966 R L1E= MV R L1E
967 R L2E= MV R L2E
970 R L3E= MV R L3E
971 R L12= MV R L12
972 R L23= MV R L23
973 R L31= MV R L31
974 X L1E= MV X L1E
975 X L2E= MV X L2E
976 X L3E= MV X L3E
977 X L12= MV X L12
978 X L23= MV X L23
979 X L31= MV X L31
456 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.24.5 Oscillographic Fault Records
2.24.5.1 Description
The 7SA6 distance protection is equipped with a fault recording function. The instan-
taneous values of the measured quantities
iL1, iL2, iL3, iE or iEE, ip, iy and uL1, uL2, uL3, uen or usync or ux, or 3u0
(voltages in accordance with connection) are sampled at intervals of 1 ms (for 50 Hz)
and stored in a circulating buffer (20 samples per cycle). For a fault, the data are stored
for an adjustable period of time, but no more than 5 seconds per fault. A total of 8
records can be saved within 15 s. The fault record memory is automatically updated
with every new fault, so no acknowledgment is required. The storage of fault values
can also be started by pickup of a protection function, via binary input and via the serial
interface.
The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer
and evaluated with the operating software DIGSI and the graphic analysis software
SIGRA 4. The latter graphically represents the data recorded during the system fault
and calculates additional information such as the impedance or r.m.s. values from the
measured values. A selection may be made as to whether the currents and voltages
are represented as primary or secondary values. Binary signal traces (marks) of par-
ticular events, e.g. fault detection, tripping are also represented.
If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on
to a central device via this interface. Data are evaluated by appropriate programs in
the central device. Currents and voltages are referred to their maximum values, scaled
to their rated values and prepared for graphic presentation. Binary signal traces
(marks) of particular events e.g. fault detection, tripping are also represented.
In the event of transfer to a central device, the request for data transfer can be exe-
cuted automatically and can be selected to take place after each fault detection by the
protection, or only after a trip.
General Other settings pertaining to fault recording (waveform capture) are found in the
submenu Oscillographic Fault Records of the Settings menu. Waveform capture
makes a distinction between the trigger instant for an oscillographic record and the cri-
terion to save the record (address 402 WAVEFORMTRIGGER). This parameter can only
be altered in DIGSI at Display Additional Settings. Normally the trigger instant is the
device pickup, i.e. the pickup of an arbitrary protective function is assigned the time.
The criterion for saving may be both the device pickup (Save w. Pickup) or the
device trip (Save w. TRIP). A trip command issued by the device can also be used
as trigger instant (Start w. TRIP); in this case it is also the saving criterion.
Recording of an oscillographic fault record starts with the pickup by a protective func-
tion and ends with the dropout of the last pickup of a protective function. Usually this
is also the extent of a fault recording (address 403 WAVEFORM DATA = Fault
event). If automatic reclosure is implemented, the entire system disturbance pos-
sibly with several reclose attempts up to the ultimate fault clearance can be stored
(address 403 WAVEFORM DATA = Pow.Sys.Flt.). This facilitates the representation
of the entire system fault history, but also consumes storage capacity during the auto-
reclosure dead time(s). This setting is only possible via DIGSI at Additional Settings.
7SA6 Manual 457

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
The actual storage time begins at the pre-fault time PRE. TRIG. TIME (address 411)
ahead of the reference instant, and ends at the post-fault time POST REC. TIME (ad-
dress 412) after the storage criterion has reset. The maximum recording duration to
each fault (MAX. LENGTH) is entered in address 410.
The fault recording can also be triggered via a binary input, via the keypad on the front
of the device or with a PC via the operation or service interface. The storage is then
dynamically triggered. The length of the fault recording is set in address 415 BinIn
CAPT.TIME (maximum length however is MAX. LENGTH, address 410). Pre-fault and
post-fault times will be included. If the binary input time is set for , then the length of
the record equals the time that the binary input is activated (static), or the MAX.
LENGTH setting in address 410, whichever is shorter.
2.24.5.3 Settings
ditional Settings.

402A WAVEFORMTRIGGE Save w. Pickup Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture
R Save w. TRIP
Start w. TRIP
403A WAVEFORM DATA Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Pow.Sys.Flt.
410 MAX. LENGTH 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Capture Record
411 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Trigger
412 POST REC. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
415 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input

formation
- FltRecSta IntSP Fault Recording Start
4 >Trig.Wave.Cap. SP >Trigger Waveform Capture
30053 Fault rec. run. OUT Fault recording is running
458 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.24.6 Demand Measurement Setup
Long-term average values are calculated by 7SA6 and can be read out with the point
of time (date and time of the last update).
2.24.6.1 Long-term Average Values
The long-term averages of the three phase currents ILx, the positive sequence com-
ponents I1 for the three phase currents, and the real power P, reactive power Q, and
apparent power S are calculated within a set period of time and indicated in primary
values.
For the long-term average values mentioned above, the length of the time window for
averaging and the frequency with which it is updated can be set. The corresponding
min/max values can be reset via binary inputs, via the integrated control panel or using
the DIGSI software.
Averages The time interval for measured value averaging is set at address 2801 DMD
Interval. The first number specifies the averaging time window in minutes while the
second number gives the frequency of updates within the time window. 15 Min., 3
Subs, for example, means that time averaging occurs for all measured values that
arrive within 15 minutes. The output is updated every 15/3 = 5 minutes.
At address 2802 DMD Sync.Time you can determine whether the averaging time,
selected under address 2801, begins on the hour (full hour) or is to be synchro-
nized with another point in time (a quarter past, half hour or a quarter to).
If the settings for averaging are changed, then the measured values stored in the
buffer are deleted, and new results for the average calculation are only available after
the set time period has passed.
7SA6 Manual 459

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.24.6.3 Settings

2801 DMD Interval 15 Min., 1 Sub 60 Min., 1 Sub Demand Calculation Intervals
15 Min., 3 Subs
15 Min.,15 Subs
30 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min., 1 Sub
2802 DMD Sync.Time On The Hour On The Hour Demand Synchronization Time
15 After Hour
30 After Hour
45 After Hour

formation
833 I1dmd = MV I1 (positive sequence) Demand
834 Pdmd = MV Active Power Demand
835 Qdmd = MV Reactive Power Demand
836 Sdmd = MV Apparent Power Demand
963 IL1dmd= MV I L1 demand
1052 Pdmd Forw= MV Active Power Demand Forward
1053 Pdmd Rev = MV Active Power Demand Reverse
1054 Qdmd Forw= MV Reactive Power Demand Forward
1055 Qdmd Rev = MV Reactive Power Demand Reverse
460 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.24.7 Min/Max Measurement Setup
Minimum and maximum values are calculated by the 7SA6 and can be read out with
the point of time (date and time of the last update).
2.24.7.1 Reset
The minimum and maximum values can be reset, using binary inputs or by using the
integrated control panel or the DIGSI software. Additionally, the reset can be carried
out cyclically, beginning with a preset point of time.
The tracking of minimum and maximum values can be reset automatically at a pre-
defined point in time. To select this feature, address 2811 MinMax cycRESET is set
to YES (default setting).
The point in time when reset is to take place (the minute of the day in which reset will
take place) is set at address 2812 MiMa RESET TIME. The reset cycle in days is
entered at address 2813 MiMa RESETCYCLE, and the beginning date of the cyclical
process, from the time of the setting procedure (in days), is entered at address 2814
MinMaxRES.START.
7SA6 Manual 461

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.24.7.3 Settings

2811 MinMax cycRESET NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset Function
YES
2812 MiMa RESET TIME 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
2813 MiMa RESETCYCLE 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle Period
2814 MinMaxRES.START 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in

formation
- ResMinMax IntSP_Ev Reset Minimum and Maximum counter
395 >I MinMax Reset SP >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
396 >I1 MiMaReset SP >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
397 >U MiMaReset SP >U MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
398 >UphphMiMaRes SP >Uphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
399 >U1 MiMa Reset SP >U1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
400 >P MiMa Reset SP >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
401 >S MiMa Reset SP >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
402 >Q MiMa Reset SP >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
403 >Idmd MiMaReset SP >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
404 >Pdmd MiMaReset SP >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
405 >Qdmd MiMaReset SP >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
406 >Sdmd MiMaReset SP >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
407 >Frq MiMa Reset SP >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
408 >PF MiMaReset SP >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
837 IL1d Min MVT I L1 Demand Minimum
838 IL1d Max MVT I L1 Demand Maximum
843 I1dmdMin MVT I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum
844 I1dmdMax MVT I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum
845 PdMin= MVT Active Power Demand Minimum
846 PdMax= MVT Active Power Demand Maximum
847 QdMin= MVT Reactive Power Demand Minimum
848 QdMax= MVT Reactive Power Demand Maximum
849 SdMin= MVT Apparent Power Demand Minimum
850 SdMax= MVT Apparent Power Demand Maximum
851 IL1Min= MVT I L1 Minimum
852 IL1Max= MVT I L1 Maximum
853 IL2Min= MVT I L2 Mimimum
462 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

formation
855 IL3Min= MVT I L3 Minimum
857 I1 Min= MVT Positive Sequence Minimum
858 I1 Max= MVT Positive Sequence Maximum
859 UL1EMin= MVT U L1E Minimum
860 UL1EMax= MVT U L1E Maximum
865 UL12Min= MVT U L12 Minimum
867 UL12Max= MVT U L12 Maximum
874 U1 Min = MVT U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum
875 U1 Max = MVT U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum
880 SMin= MVT Apparent Power Minimum
881 SMax= MVT Apparent Power Maximum
882 fMin= MVT Frequency Minimum
883 fMax= MVT Frequency Maximum
1040 Pmin Forw= MVT Active Power Minimum Forward
1041 Pmax Forw= MVT Active Power Maximum Forward
1042 Pmin Rev = MVT Active Power Minimum Reverse
1043 Pmax Rev = MVT Active Power Maximum Reverse
1044 Qmin Forw= MVT Reactive Power Minimum Forward
1045 Qmax Forw= MVT Reactive Power Maximum Forward
1046 Qmin Rev = MVT Reactive Power Minimum Reverse
1047 Qmax Rev = MVT Reactive Power Maximum Reverse
1048 PFminForw= MVT Power Factor Minimum Forward
1049 PFmaxForw= MVT Power Factor Maximum Forward
1050 PFmin Rev= MVT Power Factor Minimum Reverse
1051 PFmax Rev= MVT Power Factor Maximum Reverse
10102 3U0min = MVT Min. Zero Sequence Voltage 3U0
10103 3U0max = MVT Max. Zero Sequence Voltage 3U0
7SA6 Manual 463

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.24.8 Set Points (Measured Values)
SIPROTEC 4 devices allow thresholds (set points) to be set for some measured and
metered values. If one of these set points is reached or is exceeded positively or neg-
atively during operation, the device generates an alarm which is displayed as an op-
erational indication. This can be configured to LEDs and/or binary outputs, transferred
via the interfaces and interconnected in DIGSI CFC. In addition you can use DIGSI
CFC to configure set points for further measured and metered values and configure
these via the DIGSI device matrix.
In contrast to the actual protection functions the limit value monitoring function oper-
ates in the background; therefore it may not pick up if measured values are changed
spontaneously in the event of a fault and if protection functions are picked up. Further-
more, since a message is only issued when the set point limit is repeatedly exceeded,
the set point monitoring functions do not react as fast as protection functions trip sig-
nals.
2.24.8.1 Limit Value Monitoring
Set points can be set for the following measured and metered values:
IL1dmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value in Phase L1.
I1dmd>: Exceeding a preset maximum average value of the positive sequence
system currents.
|Pdmd|> : Exceeding a preset maximum average active power.
|Qdmd|>: Exceeding a preset maximum average reactive power.
|Sdmd|> : Exceeding a preset maximum average value of the apparent power.
|cos|< Falling below a preset power factor.
464 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Set Points for The settings are entered under MEASUREMENT in the sub-menu SET POINTS (MV)
Measured Values (MV) by overwriting the existing values.

formation
- IL1dmd> LV Upper setting limit for IL1dmd
- I1dmd> LV Upper setting limit for I1dmd
- |Pdmd|> LV Upper setting limit for Pdmd
- |Qdmd|> LV Upper setting limit for Qdmd
- Sdmd> LV Upper setting limit for Sdmd
- PF< LV Lower setting limit for Power Factor
273 SP. IL1 dmd> OUT Set Point Phase L1 dmd>
276 SP. I1dmd> OUT Set Point positive sequence I1dmd>
277 SP. |Pdmd|> OUT Set Point |Pdmd|>
278 SP. |Qdmd|> OUT Set Point |Qdmd|>
279 SP. |Sdmd|> OUT Set Point |Sdmd|>
285 cos alarm OUT Power factor alarm
7SA6 Manual 465

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.24.9 Energy
Metered values for active and reactive power are determined in the background by the
processor system. They can be called up at the front of the device, read out via the
operating interface using a PC with DIGSI, or transferred to a central master station
via the system interface.
2.24.9.1 Power Metering
7SA6 integrates the calculated power which is then made available with the measured
values. The components as listed in table 2-26 can be read out. The signs of the op-
erating values depend on the setting at address 1107 P,Q sign (see Subsection
2.24.4 at margin heading Display of Measured Values).
Please take into consideration that 7SA6 is, above all, a protection device. The accu-
racy of the measured values depends on the current transformer (normally protection
core) and the tolerances of the device. The metering is therefore not suited for tariff
purposes.
The counters can be reset to zero or any initial value (see also SIPROTEC 4 System
Description).
Table 2-26 Operational metered values
Measured Values primary

Wp+ Real power, output kWh, MWh, GWh
Wp Real power, input kWh, MWh, GWh
Wq+ Reactive power, output kVARh, MVARh, GVARh
Wq Reactive power, input kVARh, MVARh, GVARh
Retrieving The SIPROTEC System Description describes in detail how to read out the statistical
Parameters counters via the device front panel or DIGSI. The values are added up in direction of
the protected object, provided the direction was set as forward (address 201).

formation
- Meter res IntSP_Ev Reset meter
888 Wp(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wp (active)
889 Wq(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive)
924 Wp+= MVMV Wp Forward
925 Wq+= MVMV Wq Forward
928 Wp-= MVMV Wp Reverse
929 Wq-= MVMV Wq Reverse
466 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.25 Command Processing
A control command process is integrated in the SIPROTEC 4 7SA6 to coordinate the

operation of circuit breakers and other equipment in the power system. Control com-
mands can originate from four command sources:
Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device,
Operation using DIGSI,
Remote operation via network control center or substation controller (e.g. SICAM),
Automatic functions (e.g. using binary inputs, CFC).
The number of switchgear devices that can be controlled is solely limited by the
number of available and required binary inputs and outputs. For the output of control
commands it has to be ensured that all the required binary inputs and outputs are con-
figured and provided with the correct properties.
If specific interlocking conditions are needed for the execution of commands, the user
can program the device with bay interlocking by means of the user-defined logic func-
tions (CFC). The interlocking conditions of the system can be injected via the system
interface and must be allocated accordingly.
The procedure for switching resources is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System De-
scription under Control of Switchgear.
2.25.1 Control Authorization
2.25.1.1 Command Types
Commands to the This type of commands are directly output to the switchgear to change their process
System state:
Commands for the operation of circuit breakers (asynchronous; or synchronized
through integration of the synchronism check and closing control function) as well
as commands for the control of isolators and earth switches.
Step commands, e.g. for raising and lowering transformer taps,
Setpoint commands with configurable time settings, e.g. to control Petersen coils.
7SA6 Manual 467

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Device-internal These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve for initiating in-
Commands ternal functions, communicating the detection of status changes to the device or for
acknowledging them.
Manual override commands for manual update of information on process-depen-
dent objects such as annunciations and switching states, e.g. if the communication
with the process is interrupted. Manually overidden objects are marked as such in
the information status and can be displayed accordingly.
Flagging commands (for setting) the data value of internal objects, e.g. switching
authority (remote/local), parameter switchovers, transmission blockages and dele-
tion and presetting of metered values.
Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers
or data stocks.
Information status commands to set/delete the additional Information Status item
of a process object, such as
Acquisition blocking,
Output blocking.
2.25.1.2 Sequence in the Command Path
Security mechanisms in the command path ensure that a switch command can be
carried out only if the test of previously established criteria has been successfully com-
pleted. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be configured separately
for each device. The actual execution of the command is also monitored after its re-
lease. The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following.
Checking a Please observe the following:

Command Command entry, e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
Check password access rights;
Check switching mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) selection of deac-
tivated interlocking status.
User configurable interlocking checks:
Switching authority;
Device position check (set vs. actual comparison);
Zone controlled / bay interlocking (logic using CFC);
System interlocking (centrally via SICAM);
Double operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation);
Protection blocking (blocking of switching operations by protection functions);
Circuit breaker synchronization check (synchronism check before a close com-
mand).
468 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Fixed commands:
Internal process time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing
the control action between initiation of the control and final close of the relay con-
tact);
Configuration in process (if setting modification is in process, commands are re-
jected or delayed);
Equipment present as output;
Output block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and
is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is reject-
ed);
Component hardware malfunction;
Command in progress (only one command can be processed at a time for each
circuit breaker or switch);
1ofn check (for multiple allocations such as common contact relays or multiple
protection commands configured to the same contact it is checked if a command
procedure was already initiated for the output relays concerned or if a protection
command is present. Superimposed commands in the same switching direction
are tolerated).
Command The following is monitored:

Execution Interruption of a command because of a cancel command,
Monitoring
Running time monitor (feedback monitoring time).
7SA6 Manual 469

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.25.1.3 Switchgear Interlocking
Interlocking can be executed by the user-defined logic (CFC). Switchgear interlocking

checks in a SICAM/SIPROTEC 4 system are normally divided in the following groups:
System interlocking checked by a central control system (for interbay interlocking),
Zone controlled / bay interlocking checked in the bay device (for the feeder).
Cross-bay interlocking via GOOSE messages directly between bay controllers and
protection relays (with rollout of IEC 61850; inter-relay communication by GOOSE
is performed via the EN100 module)
Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking Zone controlled / bay interlocking relies on the object
database (feedback information) of the bay unit (here the SIPROTEC 4 relay) as was
determined during configuration (see SIPROTEC 4 System Description).
The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration and interlock-
ing logic of the relay. For more information on GOOSE, please refer to the SIPROTEC
4 System Description /1/.
Switching objects that require system interlocking in a central control system are
marked by a specific parameter inside the bay unit (via configuration matrix).
For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking
(test mode) can be selected:
For local commands by reprogramming the settings with password check,
For automatic commands, via command processing by CFC and Deactivated Inter-
locking Recognition,
For local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command via
PROFIBUS.
470 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Interlocked/ The configurable command checks in the SIPROTEC 4 devices are also called stan-
Non-interlocked dard interlocking. These checks can be activated via DIGSI (interlocked switch-
Switching ing/tagging) or deactivated (non-interlocked).
De-interlocked or non-interlocked switching means that the configured interlock con-
ditions are not tested.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked
within the command processing. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will
be rejected by an indication with a minus added to it, e.g. CO, followed by an oper-
ation response information. The command is rejected if a synchronism check is
carried out before closing and the conditions for synchronism are not fulfilled. Table 2-
27 shows some types of commands and indications. The indications marked with *)
are displayed only in the event logs on the device display; for DIGSI they appear in
spontaneous indications.
Table 2-27 Command types and corresponding indications
Type of Command Control Cause Indication

Control issued Switching CO CO+/
Manual tagging (positive / nega- Manual tagging MT MT+/
tive)
Information state command, Input Input blocking ST ST+/ *)
blocking
Information state command, Output blocking ST ST+/ *)
Output blocking
Cancel command Cancel CA CA+/
The plus sign indicated in the indication is a confirmation of the command execution:
The command output has a positive result, as expected. A minus sign means a neg-
ative, i.e. an unexpected result; the command was rejected. Figure 2-204 shows an
example in the operational indications command and feedback of a positively run
switching action of the circuit breaker.
The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and
tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as over-
riding or abort are not tested, i.e. are executed independently of the interlockings.
Figure 2-204 Example of an operational indication for switching circuit breaker 52
7SA6 Manual 471

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
Standard The standard interlocking includes the checks for each switchgear which were set
Interlocking during the configuration of inputs and outputs, see SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown in Figure
2-205.
Figure 2-205 Standard interlockings

1) Source of Command REMOTE includes LOCAL.
LOCAL Command using substation controller
REMOTE Command via telecontrol station to power system management and from power system management to the
device
The display shows the configured interlocking reasons. The are marked by letters ex-
plained in Table 2-28.
Table 2-28 Interlocking Commands
Interlocking Commands Command Display

Switching Authority L L
System Interlocking S S
Bay Interlocking Z Z
SET = ACTUAL (switch direction check) P P
Protection Blockage B B
472 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 2-206 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of
the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in
Table 2-28. All parametrized interlocking conditions are shown.
Figure 2-206 Example of configured interlocking conditions
Control Logic via For the bay interlocking, an enabling logic can be structured using the CFC. Via spe-
CFC cific release conditions the information released or bay interlocked are available,
e.g. object 52 Close and 52 Open with the data values: ON / OFF).

formation
- Cntrl Auth DP Control Authority
- ModeLOCAL DP Controlmode LOCAL
- ModeREMOTE IntSP Controlmode REMOTE
- Cntrl Auth IntSP Control Authority
- ModeLOCAL IntSP Controlmode LOCAL
7SA6 Manual 473

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions
2.25.2 Control Device

formation
- Breaker CF_D12 Breaker
- Breaker DP Breaker
- Disc.Swit. CF_D2 Disconnect Switch
- Disc.Swit. DP Disconnect Switch
- EarthSwit CF_D2 Earth Switch
- EarthSwit DP Earth Switch
- Brk Open IntSP Interlocking: Breaker Open
- Brk Close IntSP Interlocking: Breaker Close
- Disc.Open IntSP Interlocking: Disconnect switch Open
- Disc.Close IntSP Interlocking: Disconnect switch Close
- E Sw Open IntSP Interlocking: Earth switch Open
- E Sw Cl. IntSP Interlocking: Earth switch Close
- Q2 Op/Cl CF_D2 Q2 Open/Close
- Q2 Op/Cl DP Q2 Open/Close
- Q9 Op/Cl CF_D2 Q9 Open/Close
- Q9 Op/Cl DP Q9 Open/Close
- Fan ON/OFF CF_D2 Fan ON/OFF
- Fan ON/OFF DP Fan ON/OFF
- UnlockDT IntSP Unlock data transmission via BI
31000 Q0 OpCnt= VI Q0 operationcounter=
474 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2.25.3 Process Data
During the processing of commands, independently of the further allocation and pro-
cessing of indications, command and process feedbacks are sent to the indication pro-
cessing. These indications contain information on the cause. With the corresponding
allocation (configuration) these indications are entered in the event log, thus serving
as a report.
A listing of possible operational indications and their meaning, as well as the
command types needed for tripping and closing the switchgear or for raising and low-
ering transformer taps and detailed information are described in the SIPROTEC 4
System Description.
Acknowledgement All indications with the source of command LOCAL are transformed into a correspond-
of Commands to ing response and shown in the display of the device.
the Device Front
Acknowledgement The acknowledgement of indications which relate to commands with the origin Com-
of Commands to mand Issued = Local/ Remote/DIGSI are sent back to the initiating point independent
Local/Remote/ of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface).
DIGSI
The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not executed by a response indica-
tion as it is done with the local command but by ordinary command and feedback in-
formation recording.
Feedback Command processing time monitors all commands with feedback. Parallel to the com-
Monitoring mand, a monitoring time period (command runtime monitoring) is started which
checks whether the switchgear has achieved the desired final state within this period.
The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feed-
back information arrives, a response Time Limit Expired appears and the
process is terminated.
Commands and their feedbacks are also recorded as operational indications. Normal-
ly the execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information
(FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process
feedback information, the command output resets.
In the feedback, the plus sign means that a command has been positively completed.
The command was as expected, in other words positive. The "minus" is a negative
confirmation and means that the command was not executed as expected.
Command Output / The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising
Switching Relays and lowering transformer taps have been defined during the configuration, see also
7SA6 Manual 475

C53000-G1176-C156-5
2 Functions

formation
- >Door open SP >Cabinet door open
- >CB wait SP >CB waiting for Spring charged
- >Err Mot U SP >Error Motor Voltage
- >ErrCntrlU SP >Error Control Voltage
- >SF6-Loss SP >SF6-Loss
- >Err Meter SP >Error Meter
- >Tx Temp. SP >Transformer Temperature
- >Tx Danger SP >Transformer Danger
2.25.4 Protocol

formation
- SysIntErr. IntSP Error Systeminterface
476 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Mounting and Commissioning 3
This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning staff. The staff must be famil-
iar with the commissioning of protection and control systems, with the management of
power systems and with the relevant safety rules and guidelines. Under certain cir-
cumstances particular power system adaptations of the hardware are necessary.
Some of the primary tests require the protected line or equipment to carry load.
3.1 Mounting and Connections 478

3.2 Checking Connections 525
3.3 Commissioning 531
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 566
7SA6 Manual 477

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3 Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections
General
WARNING!
Warning of improper transport, storage, installation, and application of the
device.
Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage.
Trouble free and safe use of this device depends on proper transport, storage, instal-
lation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this instruction
manual.
Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in
a high-voltage environment (for example, VDE, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and
international regulations). These regulations must be observed.
3.1.1 Configuration Information
Prerequisites For installation and connections the following conditions must be met:
The rated device data has been tested as recommended in the SIPROTEC 4 System
Description and their compliance with the Power System Data is verified.
Connection General Diagrams are shown in Appendix A.2. Connection examples for current trans-
Variants former and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix A.3. It must be
checked that the setting of the P.System Data 1, Section 2.1.2.1, was made in ac-
cordance to the device connections.
Currents In Appendix A.3 examples for the possibilities of the current transformer connections
in dependence on network conditions are displayed.
For normal connection, address 220 I4 transformer = In prot. line must be
set and furthermore, address 221 I4/Iph CT = 1.000.
When using separate earth current transformers, address 220 I4 transformer =
In prot. line must be set. The factor 221 I4/Iph CT may deviate from 1. For
calculation hints, please refer to Section 2.1.2.1 at Current Transformer Connection.
Please observe that 2-CT-connection is permitted only for isolated or compensated
networks.
Furthermore, examples for the connection of the earth current of a parallel line (for par-
allel line compensation) are displayed. Address 220 I4 transformer must be set
In paral. line here. The factor 221 I4/Iph CT may deviate from 1. For calcu-
lation hints, please refer to Section 2.1.2.1.
The other figures show examples for the connection of the earth current of a source
transformer. The address 220 I4 transformer must be set IY starpoint here.
Hints regarding the factor 221 I4/Iph CT can also be found in Section 2.1.2.1.
478 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Voltages Connection examples for current and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Ap-
pendix A.3.
For the normal connection the 4th voltage measuring input is not used. Correspond-
ingly the address must be set to 210 U4 transformer = Not connected. Address
211 Uph / Udelta does not have any effect on the pickup values of the protective
functions, but it is used for displaying Uen-measured values and the Uen-fault record
track.
For an additional connection of an e-n-winding of a set of voltage transformers, the
address 210 U4 transformer = Udelta transf. must be set. The factor address
211 Uph / Udelta depends on the transformation ratio of the en-winding. For ad-
ditional hints, please refer to Section 2.1.2.1 under Transformation Ratio.
In further connection examples also the e-n winding of a set of voltage transformers is
connected, in this case, however of a central set of transformers at a busbar. For more
information refer to the previous paragraph.
Further figures show examples for the additional connection of a different voltage, in
this case the busbar voltage (e.g. for the voltage protection or synchronism check). For
voltage protection address 210 U4 transformer = Ux transformer must be set,
for the synchronism check U4 transformer = Usy2 transf.. The factor address
215 Usy1/Usy2 ratio is unequal to 1, only if the feeder side VT and busbar side
VT have a different transformation ratio. The factor in address 211 Uph / Udelta
must however be set to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of mea-
sured and fault recording values).
If there is a power transformer between the set of busbar and the feeder VT's, the
phase displacement of the voltages caused by the transformer must be considered for
the synchronism check (if used). In this case, also check the addresses 212 Usy2
connection, 214 Usy2-Usy1 and 215 Usy1/Usy2 ratio. You will find detailed
hints and an example in Section 2.1.2.1 under Voltage Transformer Connection.
Binary Inputs and The connections to the power plant depend on the possible allocation of the binary
Outputs inputs and outputs, i.e. how they are assigned to the power equipment. The preset al-
location can be found in the tables in Section A.4 of the Appendix. Check also whether
the labelling corresponds to the allocated indication functions.
Changing Setting If binary inputs are used to change setting groups, please observe the following:
Groups To enable the control of 4 possible setting groups 2 binary inputs have to be avail-
able. One binary input must be set for >Set Group Bit0, the other input for
>Set Group Bit1.
To control two setting groups, one binary input set for >Set Group Bit0 is suf-
ficient since the binary input >Set Group Bit1, which is not assigned, is con-
sidered to be not controlled.
The status of the signals controlling the binary inputs to activate a particular setting
group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active.
The following Table shows the relationship between binary inputs and the setting
groups A to D. Principal connection diagrams for the two binary inputs are illustrated
in the following Figure 3-1. The Figure illustrates an example in which both Set Group
Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated binary
input is energized (high).
7SA6 Manual 479

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 3-1 Changing setting groups with binary inputs
Binary Input Active Group

>Set Group Bit 0 >Set Group Bit 1
Not energized Not energized Group A
Energized Not energized Group B
Not energized Energized Group C
Energized Energized Group D
Figure 3-1 Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching with binary inputs
Trip Circuit It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one substitute resistor
Monitoring R must be connected in series. The pickup threshold of the binary inputs must there-
fore be substantially below half the rated control DC voltage.
If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must
be isolated, i.o.w. not be communed with each other or with another binary input.
If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be used (refer to Figure 3-2). This
resistor R is connected in series with the second circuit breaker auxiliary contact
(Aux2), to also allow the detection of a trip circuit failure when the circuit breaker aux-
iliary contact 1 (Aux1) is open, and the command relay contact has reset. The value
of this resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore Aux1
is open and Aux2 is closed) the circuit breaker trip coil (TC) is no longer picked up and
binary input (BI1) is still picked up if the command relay contact is open.
480 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-2 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input example for trip circuit
CB Circuit breaker
U-BI Input voltage of binary input
R Substitute resistor
UR Voltage across the substitute resistor
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin,
from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean R should be selected:
In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is
derived as:
To keep the circuit breaker trip coil not energized in the above case, Rmin is derived as:
7SA6 Manual 481

C53000-G1176-C156-5
IBI (HIGH) Constant current with activated BI ( = 1.8 mA)

UBI min Minimum control voltage for BI (=19 V for delivery setting for nominal
voltages 24/48/60 V; 88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltages
110/125/220/250 V)
USP Control voltage for trip circuit
RTC DC resistance of circuit breaker trip coil
UCBTC (LOW) Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker trip coil that does not lead to trip-
ping
If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with
the next lowest switching threshold UBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in
the relay using plug-in jumpers (see Section Hardware Modifications).
For the power consumption of the resistance:
Example: IBI (HIGH) 1.8 mA (SIPROTEC 4 7SA6)

UBI min 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltages of 24/48/60 V (from the
7SA6);
88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltages of 110/125/220/250 V (from
7SA6);
UCTR 110 V (system / trip circuit)
RTC 500 (system / trip circuit)
UCBTC (LOW) 2 V (system / trip circuit)
The closest standard value of 39 k is selected; the power is:
482 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Pilot Wires for If the distance protection is supplemented with the transmission scheme Teleprot.
Protection Dist. = Pilot wire comp (address 121), it has to be secured that the quiescent
state loop is supplied with enough auxiliary voltage. The function itself is described in
section 2.6.
Please take note that both binary inputs are interconnected and connected in series
with the resistor of the pilot wires. Therefore the loop voltage must not be too low and
the pickup voltage of the binary inputs must not be too high. In general, the lowest
threshold (19 V) must be selected for the auxiliary voltages of 60 V to 125 V, the
threshold of 88 V is selected for voltages of 220 V to 250 V.
Due to the low current consumption of the binary inputs it may be necessary to addi-
tionally burden the pilot wire loop with an external shunt connected resistor so that the
binary inputs are not blocked by the charge of the pilot wire after an interruption of the
loop. As an alternative, auxiliary relay combinations (e.g. 7PA5210-2A) can be intro-
duced.
Pilot wires used as cable connections between stations must always be checked on
their effect on high voltage. The pilot wires of the pilot cables must stand external
strains.
The worst electrical fault that may occur to the pilot cables is generated in the pilot wire
system by an earth fault. The short-circuit current induces a longitudinal voltage into
the pilot wires lying parallel to the high voltage line. The induced voltage can be
reduced by well-conductive cable jackets and by armouring (low reduction factor, for
both high voltage cable and pilot cables).
The induced voltage can be calculated with the following formula:
Ui = 2 f M Ik1 l r1 r2
with
Ui = induced longitudinal voltage in V,
f = nominal frequency in Hz,
M = mutual inductance between power line and pilot wires in mH/km,
Ik1 = maximum earth fault current via power line in kA,
l = distance between energy line and pilot wires in km,
r1 = reduction factor of power cable (r1 = 1 for overhead lines),
r2 = reduction factor of pilot wire cable.
The calculated induced voltage should neither exceed the 60% rate of the test voltage
of the pilot wires nor of the device connections (binary inputs and outputs). Since the
latter were produced for a test voltage of 2kV, only a maximum induced longitudinal
voltage of 1.2kV is allowed.
7SA6 Manual 483

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications
3.1.2.1 General
A subsequent adaptation of hardware to the power system conditions can be neces-

sary for example with regard to the control voltage for binary inputs or termination of
bus-capable interfaces. Follow the procedure described in this section, whenever
hardware modifications are carried out.
Power supply There are different ranges of input voltage for the auxiliary voltage (refer to the Order-
ing Information in Appendix A.1). The power supplies of the variants for 60/110/125
VDC and 110/125/220/250 VDC, 115 VAC are largely interchangeable by modifying
the position of the jumpers. The assignment of these jumpers to the nominal voltage
ranges and their spatial arrangement on the PCB are described further below at Pro-
cessor Board C-CPU-2 Location and ratings of the miniature fuse and the buffer
battery are also shown. When the device is delivered, these jumpers are set according
to the name-plate sticker. Generally, they do not need to be altered.
Life contact The life contact of the device is a changeover contact from which either the NC contact
or the NO contact can be connected to the device terminals via a plug-in jumper (X40).
Assignments of the jumpers to the contact type and the spatial layout of the jumpers
are described in the following Section at margin heading Processor Board C-CPU-2.
Rated currents The input transformers of the device are set to a nominal current of 1 A or 5 A with
jumpers. The position of the jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. The
assignments of the jumpers to the nominal current and the spatial layout of the
jumpers are described in the following section Board C-I/O-2 or Board C-I/O-11. All
jumpers must be set for one nominal current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X64) for each
input transformer and additionally the common jumper X60.
Note
If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be reg-
istered in addresses 206 CT SECONDARY in the power system data (see Section
2.1.2.1).
Control Voltage for When the device is delivered the binary inputs are set to operate with a voltage that
Binary Inputs corresponds to the nominal voltage of the power supply. If the nominal values differ
from the power system control voltage, it may be necessary to change the switching
threshold of the binary inputs.
A jumper position is changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The as-
signment of the jumpers to the binary inputs and the spatial layout of the jumpers is
described in the following sections at Processor Board C-CPU-2, Board(s) C-I/O-1
and C-I/O-10 and Board C-I/O-11.
484 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Note
If binary inputs are used for trip circuit monitoring, note that two binary inputs (or a
binary input and an equivalent resistance) are connected in series. The switching
threshold must lie clearly below halben of the nominal control voltage.
Contact mode for Input/output boards can have relays that are equipped with changeover contacts. For
binary outputs this it is necessary to alter a jumper. The following sections at Switching Elements on
Printed Circuit Boards explain for which relays on which boards this applies.
Replacing Only serial interfaces of devices for panel and cubicle mounting as well as of mounting
Interface Modules devices with detached operator panel are replaceable. The following section under
margin heading Replacing Interface Modules describes which interfaces can be ex-
changed, and how this is done.
Termination of If the device is equipped with a serial RS485 interface or PROFIBUS, they must be
buscapable terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmis-
Interfaces sion. For this purpose, termination resistors are provided on the PCB of the C-CPU-2
processor boards and on the RS485 or PROFIBUS interface module which can be
connected via jumpers. The spatial arrangement of the jumpers on the PCB of the pro-
cessor board C-CPU-2 is described in the following sections at margin heading Pro-
cessor board C-CPU-2 and on the interface modules at RS485-Interface and
PROFIBUS-Interface. Both jumpers must always be plugged in identically.
The termination resistors are disabled on delivery.
Spare Parts Spare parts can be the battery for storage of data in the battery-buffered RAM in case
of a power failure, and the internal power supply miniature fuse. Their spatial arrange-
ment is shown in the figure of the processor board. The ratings of the fuse are printed
on the board next to the fuse itself. When replacing the fuse, please observe the guide-
lines given in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description in the chapter Maintenance and
Corrective Maintenance.
7SA6 Manual 485

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.1.2.2 Disassembly
Work on the Printed

Circuit Boards
Note
It is assumed for the following steps that the device is not operative.
Caution!
Caution when changing jumper settings that affect nominal values of the
device:
As a consequence, the ordering number (MLFB) and the ratings that are stated on the
nameplate do no longer match the actual device properties.
If such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the
device. Self-adhesive labels are provided for this which can be used as supplementary
nameplates.
To perform work on the printed circuit boards, such as checking or moving switching
elements or exchanging modules, proceed as follows:
Prepare your workplace: prepare a suitable underlay for electrostatically sensitive
devices (ESD). Also the following tools are required:
screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip,
a crosstip screwdriver for Pz size 1,
a 5 mm socket wrench.
Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connectors on the back panel at
location A and C. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mount-
ing.
If the device features interfaces at locations B and D next to the interfaces on
location A and C , the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be re-
moved. This is not necessary if the device is designed for surface mounting.
Remove the covers on the front panel and loosen the screws which can then be ac-
cessed.
Remove the front panel and place it carefully to the side. For device versions with
detached operator control element, the front cover can directly be lifted off, after the
screws have been released.
486 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Work on the Plug

Connectors
Caution!
Mind electrostatic discharges:
Non-observance can result in minor personal injury or property damage.
In order to avoid electrotrastic discharges when handling with plug connectors first
touch an earthed metal surface .
Do not plug or unplug interface connectors under voltage!
For the assembly of the boards for the housing 1/3 refer to Figure 3-3, for the housing
1/ refer to Figure 3-4, for the housing 2/ refer to Figure 3-5 and for housing 1/ refer
2 3 1
to Figure 3-6.
Disconnect the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the front cover and the
processor board C-CPU-2 at the front cover side. Press the top latch of the plug
connector up and the bottom latch down so that the plug connector of the ribbon
cable is pressed out. This action does not apply to the device version with detached
operator panel. However, on the central processor unit C-CPU-2 (No. 1 in Figure 3-
3 to 3-6) the 7-pole plug connector X16 behind the D-subminiature connector and
the plug connector of the ribbon cable (connected to the 68-pole plug connector on
the rear side) must be removed.
Disconnect the ribbon cables between the processor board C-CPU-2 (No. 1 in
Figure 3-3 to 3-6) and the input/output board I/O (according to order variant No. 2
to No. 6 in Figure 3-3 to 3-6).
Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD
damage. In the case of the device variant for panel surface mounting, please be
aware of the fact that a certain amount of force is required in order to remove the
C-CPU-2 module due to the existing plug connectors.
Check the jumpers according to Figures 3-7 to 3-15, 3-18, 3-19 and the following
information and as the case may be change or remove them.
7SA6 Manual 487

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-3 Front view with housing size 1/3 after removal of the front cover (
simplified and scaled down)
488 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-4 Front view with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover
(simplified and scaled down)
7SA6 Manual 489

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-5 Front view with housing size 2/3 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)
490 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-6 Front view with housing size 1/1 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)
7SA6 Manual 491

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.1.2.3 Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards
Processor Module The layout of the printed circuit board for the processor board C-CPU-2 is illustrated
C-CPU-2 in the following figure. The set nominal voltage of the integrated supply is checked ac-
cording to Table 3-2, the quiescent state of the life contact according to Table 3-20 and
the selected control voltages of the binary inputs BI1 to BI5 according to Table 3-4 and
the integrated interface RS232 / RS485 according to Table 3-5 to 3-7. The location and
ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and the buffer battery (G1) are shown in the following
figure.
Before checking the integrated RS232/RS485 interface it may be necessary to
remove the interface modules placed above.
Figure 3-7 Processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 with jumpers settings required for the board configuration
492 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 3-2 Jumper setting of the rated voltage of the integrated Power Supply on the
C-CPU-2 processor board
Jumper Nominal voltage

24 to 48 VDC 60 to 125 VDC 110 VDC to 250 VDC, 115 VAC
X51 Not used 1-2 2-3
X52 Not used 1-2 and 3-4 2-3
X53 Not used 1-2 2-3
X55 Not used Not used 1-2
cannot be changed interchangeable
Fuse T4H250V T2H250V
Table 3-3 Jumper setting of the quiescent state of the Life Contact on the processor
board C-CPU-2
Jumper Open in the quiescent Closed in the quiescent Presetting
state state
X40 1-2 2-3 2-3
Table 3-4 Jumper setting of the Control Voltages of the binary inputs BI1 to BI5 on the
Binary Inputs Jumper 17 V Threshold 1) 73 V Threshold 2) 154 V Threshold 3)
BI1 X21 1-2 2-3 3-4
BI2 X22 1-2 2-3 3-4
BI3 X23 1-2 2-3 3-4
BI4 X24 1-2 2-3 3-4
BI5 X25 1-2 2-3 3-4
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC
3)
Use only with control voltages 220 or 250 VDC
By repositioning jumpers the interface RS485 can be modified into a RS232 interface
and vice versa.
Jumpers X105 to X110 must be set to the same position.
Table 3-5 Jumper settings of the integrated RS232/RS485 Interface on the C-CPU-2
processor board
Jumper RS232 RS485
X103 and X104 1-2 1-2
X105 to X110 1-2 2-3
The jumpers are preset at the factory according to the configuration ordered.
With interface RS232 jumper X111 is needed to activate CTS which enables the com-
munication with the modem.
7SA6 Manual 493

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 3-6 Jumper setting for CTS (Clear To Send, flow control) on the C-CPU-2
processor board
Jumper /CTS from Interface RS232 /CTS controlled by /RTS

X111 1-2 2-3 1)
1)
Default setting in releases from 7SA6.../DD
Jumper setting 2-3: The connection to the modem is usually established with a star
coupler or fibre-optic converter. Therefore the modem control signals according to
RS232 standard DIN 66020 are not available. Modem signals are not required since
the connection to the SIPROTEC 4 devices is always operated in the half-duplex
mode. Please use the connection cable with order number 7XV5100-4.
Jumper setting 1-2: This setting makes the modem signals available, i. e. for a direct
RS232-connection between the SIPROTEC 4 device and the modem this setting can
be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection
cable (converter 9-pin to 25-pin).
Note
For a direct connection to DIGSI with interface RS232 jumper X111 must be plugged
in position 2-3.
If there are no external terminating resistors in the system, the last devices on a
RS485 bus must be configured via jumpers X103 and X104.
Table 3-7 Jumper settings of the Terminating Resistors of interface RS485 on the
Jumper Terminating resistor Terminating resistor open Presetting
closed
X103 2-3 1-2 1-2
X104 2-3 1-2 1-2
Note: Both jumpers must always be plugged in the same way!

Jumper X90 has no function. The factory setting is 1-2.
Terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the terminal block). In
this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 or PROFIBUS interface
module or directly on the PCB of the processor board C-CPU-2 must be de-energized.
Figure 3-8 Termination of the RS485 interface (external)
494 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Input/Output The layout of the PCB for the input/output module C-I/O-1 is shown in Figure 3-9, that
module C-I/O-1 and of the input/output module C-I/O-10 up to release 7SA6.../DD in Figure 3-10 and that
C-I/O-10 of input/output module C-I/O-10 for release 7SA6.../EE and higher in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-9 Input/output board C-I/O-1 with representation of the jumper settings
required for the board configuration
7SA6 Manual 495

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-10 Input/output board C-I/O-10 up to release 7SA6.../DD, with representation of

jumper settings required for checking configuration settings
496 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Depending on the device version the contacts of some binary outputs can be changed
from normally open to normally closed (see Appendix, under Section A.2).
In version 7SA6*1*-*A/E/J (housing size 1/2 with 16 binary outputs) this is valid for
the binary output BO9 (Figure 3-4, slot 19);
In versions 7SA6*2*-*A/E/J (housing size 1/1 with 24 binary outputs) this is valid for
the binary outputs BO9 and BO17 (Figure 3-6, slot 33 left and slot 19 right);
In versions 7SA6*2*-*B/F/K (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs) this is valid for
the binary outputs BO9, BO17 and BO25 (Figure 3-6, slot 33 left, slot 19 right and
slot 19 left);
In versions7SA6*2*-*M/P/R (housing size 1/1 with 24 binary outputs) this is valid for
the binary output BO17 (Figure 3-6, slot 19 right);
In versions 7SA6*2*-*N/Q/S (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs) this is valid for
the binary outputs BO17 and BO25 (Figure 3-6, slot 19 right and slot 19 left),
In versions 7SA613*-*A (housing size 2/3 with 24 binary outputs) this is valid for the
binary outputs BO9 and BO17 (Figure 3-5, slot 19 and slot 33 left);
In versions 7SA613*-*M (housing size 2/3 with 24 binary outputs) this is valid for the
binary output BO17 (Figure 3-5, slot 33 left).
The Tables 3-8, 3-9 and 3-10 show the position of the jumpers for the contact mode.
Table 3-8 Jumper setting for the Contact Mode of the relay for BO9 on the input/output board C-I/O-1 with
housing size 1/2
Device 7SA6*1*-* Printed circuit for Jumpe Open in quies- Closed in quiescent state Preset-
board r cent state (NO) (NC) ting
A/E/J Slot 19 BO9 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
Table 3-9 Jumper setting for the Contact Mode of the relays for BO9, BO17 and BO25 on the input/output board
C-I/O-1 with housing size 1/1
Device 7SA6*2*-* Printed circuit for Jumpe Open in quies- Closed in quiescent state Preset-
board r cent state (NO) (NC) ting
A/E/J Slot 33 left side BO9 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
Slot 19 right side BO17 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
B/F/K Slot 33 left side BO9 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
Slot 19 right side BO17 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
Slot 19 left side BO25 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
M/P/R Slot 19 right side BO17 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
N/Q/S Slot 19 right side BO17 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
Table 3-10 Jumper setting for the Contact Mode of the relay for BO9 and BO17 on the input/output board C-I/O-1 with
housing size 2/3
Device 7SA613*-* Printed Circuit for Jumpe Open in quies- Closed in quiescent state Preset-
Board r cent state (NO) (NC) ting
A Slot 19 left side BO9 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
M Slot 33 left side BO17 X40 1-2 2-3 1-2
7SA6 Manual 497

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Check of the control voltages of the binary inputs:

BI6 to BI13 (with housing size 1/2) according to Table 3-11, BI6 to BI21 (with housing
size 2/3) according to Table 3-12, BI6 to BI29 (with housing size 1/1 depending on the
layout) according to Table 3-18.
Table 3-11 Jumper settings of the Control Voltages of the binary inputs BI6 to BI13 on the
input/output board C-I/O-1 or C-I/O-10 with housing size 1/2
Binary inputs Jumper 17 V Threshold 1) 73 V Threshold 2) 154 V Threshold 3)

slot 19
BI6 X21/X22 L M H
BI7 X23/X24 L M H
BI8 X25/X26 L M H
BI9 X27/X28 L M H
BI10 X29/X30 L M H
BI11 X31/X32 L M H
BI12 X33/X34 L M H
BI13 X35/X36 L M H
1)
Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
3) Use only with control voltages 220 to 250 VDC
Table 3-12 Jumper settings of the Control Voltages of the binary inputs BI6 to BE21 on the
Binary inputs Jumper 17 V 73 V 154 V
Slot 19 left side Slot 33 left side Threshold Threshold Threshold
1) 2) 3)
BI6 BI14 X21/X22 L M H

BI10 BI18 X29/X30 L M H
BI11 BI19 X31/X32 L M H
BI12 BI20 X33/X34 L M H
BI13 BI21 X35/X36 L M H
1)
Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages 24 VDC to 125 VDC
3) Use only with pickup voltages 220 or 250 VDC
498 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Binary inputs Jumper 17 V 73 V 154 V

Slot 33 left Slot 19 Slot 19 left Threshold Threshold Threshold
1) 2) 3)
side right side side
BI6 BI14 BI22 X21/X22 L M H
BI10 BI18 BI26 X29/X30 L M H
BI11 BI19 BI27 X31/X32 L M H
BI12 BI20 BI28 X33/X34 L M H
BI13 BI21 BI29 X35/X36 L M H
1)
2)
Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC
3) Use only with Control voltages 220 to 250 VDC
Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board C-I/O-10 are used to set the bus
address and must not be changed. Table 3-14, 3-15 and 3-16 list the jumper preset-
tings.
The mounting locations are shown in Figures 3-3 to 3-6.
Table 3-14 Jumper settings of the Module Address of the input/output board C-I/O-1 or
Jumper Mounting location slot
19
X71 H
X72 L
X73 H
Jumper Mounting location

Slot 33 left side Slot 19 left side
X71 L H
X72 H L
X73 H H
Slot 19 left side Slot 19 right side Slot 33 left side
X71 H L H
X72 H H L
X73 H H H
7SA6 Manual 499

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Input/Output Board
C-I/O-10 Release
../7SA6 .../EE or
Higher
Figure 3-11 Input/output board C-I/O-10 release 7SA6.../EE or higher, with representation of
jumper settings required for checking configuration settings
500 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 3-17 Jumper settings of the Control Voltages of the binary inputs BI6 to BI13
on the input/output board C-I/O-10 for release 7SA6 .../EE and higher with
housing size 1/2
Binary inputs Jumper 17 V Threshold 73 V Threshold 154 V Threshold 3)
1) 2)
slot 19
BI6 X21 L M H
BI7 X23 L M H
BI8 X25 L M H
BI9 X27 L M H
BI10 X29 L M H
BI11 X31 L M H
BI12 X33 L M H
BI13 X35 L M H
1)
Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2)
Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and
115 VAC
3)
housing size 2/3
Binary Inputs Jumper 17 V 73 V 154 V
Slot 19 left side Slot 33 left side Threshold Threshold Threshold
1) 2) 3)
BI6 BI14 X21 L M H

BI7 BI15 X23 L M H
BI8 BI16 X25 L M H
BI9 BI17 X27 L M H
BI10 BI18 X29 L M H
BI11 BI19 X31 L M H
BI12 BI20 X33 L M H
BI13 BI21 X35 L M H
1) Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2) Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and
115 VAC
3)
7SA6 Manual 501

C53000-G1176-C156-5
housing size 1/1
Binary Inputs Jumper 17 V 73 V 154 V
Slot 33 left Slot 19 Slot 19 left Threshold Threshold Threshold
1) 2) 3)
side right side side
BI6 BI14 BI22 X21 L M H
1) Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC
2)
Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and
115 VAC
3) Use only with control voltages 220 or 250 VDC
address and must not be changed. Table 3-14, 3-15 and 3-16 list the jumper preset-
tings.
502 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Input/Output Board There are two different releases available of the input output module C-I/O-2. Figure
C-I/O-2 up to 3-12 depicts the layout of the printed circuit board of devices up to the release
release .../7SA6 7SA6.../DD, Figure 3-13 for devices of release 7SA6.../EE and higher.
.../DD
Figure 3-12 Input/output board C-I/O-2 with representation of jumper settings required
for checking configuration settings
The contact type of binary output BO6 can be changed from normally open to normally
closed (see overview diagrams in section A.2 of the Appendix):
with housing size 1/3: No. 3 in Figure 3-3, slot 19
with housing size 2/3: No. 3 in Figure 3-5, slot 5 right,
with housing size 1/1: No. 3 in Figure 3-6, slot 33 right.
7SA6 Manual 503

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 3-20 Jumper setting for the contact type of binary output BO6
Jumper Open in quiescent state Closed in quiescent state Presetting
(NO) (NC)
X41 1-2 2-3 1-2
The set nominal current of the current input transformers are to be checked on the in-
put/output board C-I/O-2. All jumpers must be set for one nominal current, i.e. respec-
tively one jumper (X61 to X64) for each input transformer and additionally the common
jumper X60. But: In the version with sensitive earth fault current input (input transform-
er T8) there is no jumper X64.
address and must not be changed. The following Table lists the jumper presettings.
Mounting location:
with housing size 2/3: No. 3 in Figure 3-5, slot 5 right,
with housing size 1/1: No. 3 in Figure 3-6, slot 33 right.
Table 3-21 Jumper settings of PCB Address of the input/output board C-I/O-2
Jumper Presetting
X71 1-2(H)
X72 1-2(H)
X73 2-3(L)
504 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Input/Output Board This module is available in two configuration variants:

C-I/O-2 Release Variant with normal earth fault detection, PCB number C53207-A324-B50-*
../7SA6 .../EE or
Variant with sensitive earth fault detection, PCB number C53207-A324-B60-*
Higher
A table imprinted on the printed-circuit board indicates the respective PCB number.
The nominal current or measuring range settings are checked on the input/output
module C-I/O-2.
Figure 3-13 C-I/O-2 input/output board release 7SA6** .../EE or higher, with representation
of jumper settings required for checking configuration settings
7SA6 Manual 505

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Table 3-22 Jumper setting for nominal current or measuring range

Jumper Nominal current 1 A Nominal current 5 A
Measuring range 100 A Measuring range 500 A
X51 1-2 1-2
X60 1-2 2-3
X61 3-5 4-5
X62 3-5 4-5
X63 3-5 4-5
X641) 3-5 4-5
1) Not for variant with sensitive earth fault detection
Contacts of relays for binary outputs BO6, BO7 and BO8 can be configured as nor-
mally open or normally closed (see also General Diagrams in the Appendix).
Table 3-23 Jumper setting for the contact type of the relays for BO6, BO7 and BO8
For Jumper Open in quiescent state (NO) 1) Closed in quiescent state (NC)
BO6 X41 1-2 2-3
BO7 X42 1-2 2-3
BO8 X43 1-2 2-3
1) Factory setting
The relays for binary outputs BO1 through BO5 can be connected to common poten-
tial, or configured individually for BO1, BO4 and BO5 (BO2 and BO3 are without func-
tion in this context) (see also General Diagrams in the Appendix).
Table 3-24 Jumper settings for the configuration of the common potential of
BO1 through BO5 or for configuration of BO1, BO4 and BO5 as single relays
Jumper BO1 through BO5 connected to BO1, BO4, BO5 configured as single relays
common potential 1) (BO2, BO3 without function)
X80 1-2, 3-4 2-3, 4-5
X81 1-2, 3-4 2-3, 4-5
X82 2-3 1-2
1) Factory setting
The jumpers X71, X72 through X73 serve for setting the bus address. Their position
may not be changed. The following table shows the preset jumper positions.
Table 3-25 Jumper settings of module addresses of the input/output module C-I/O-2
Jumper Factory setting
X71 1-2 (H)
X72 1-2 (H)
X73 2-3 (L)
506 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Input/output board
C-I/O-11
Figure 3-14 C-I/O-11 input/output board with representation of jumper settings required
Table 3-26 Jumper settings for Control Voltages of the binary inputs BI6 and BI7 on the
input/output board C-I/O-11
Binary input Jumper 17 V Threshold 73 V Threshold 154 V Threshold 3)
1) 2)
BI6 X21 L M H
BI7 X22 L M H
1)
2)
3) Use only with control voltages 220 to 250 VDC
7SA6 Manual 507

C53000-G1176-C156-5
The rated current settings of the input current transformers are to be checked on the
input/output board C-I/O-11. The jumpers X60 to X64 must all be set to the same rated
current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X64) for each input transformer of the phase currents
and in addition the common jumper X60. But: In the version with sensitive earth fault
current input (input transformer T8) there is no jumper X64.
For normal earth current inputs the jumper X65 is plugged in position IE and for sen-
sitive earth current inputs in position IEE.
Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board C-I/O-11 are used for setting the
bus address and must not be changed. The following Table lists the jumper preset-
tings.
Mounting location:
with housing size 1/3: No. 4 of Figure 3-3, slot 19
with housing size 1/2: No. 2 of Figure 3-4, slot 33
with housing size 1/1: No. 2 of Figure 3-6, slot 33 right.
Table 3-27 Jumper settings of Bus Address of the input/output board C-I/O-11
Jumper Presetting
X71 1-2(H)
X72 1-2 (H)
X73 2-3 (L)
508 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Input/Output Board The layout of the printed circuit board for the B-I/O-2 input/output board is illustrated
B-I/O-2 in Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15 B-I/O-2 input/output board with representation of jumper settings required
Checking the control voltages of the binary inputs:

BI8 to BI20 (with housing size 1/2) according to Table 3-28
BI8 to BI33 (with housing size 1/1) according to Table 3-29.
7SA6 Manual 509

C53000-G1176-C156-5
input/output board B-I/O-2 for variant 7SA6*1*-*B/F/K
Binary inputs slot 19 Jumper 17 V Threshold 1) 73 V Threshold 2)
BI8 X21 1-2 2-3
BI9 X22 1-2 2-3
BI10 X23 1-2 2-3
BI11 X24 1-2 2-3
BI12 X25 1-2 2-3
BI13 X26 1-2 2-3
BI14 X27 1-2 2-3
BI15 X28 1-2 2-3
BI16 X29 1-2 2-3
BI17 X30 1-2 2-3
BI18 X31 1-2 2-3
BI19 X32 1-2 2-3
BI20 X33 1-2 2-3
1)
2)
input/output board B-I/O-2 for variant 7SA6*2*-*C/G/L
Binary inputs Jumper 17 V Threshold 1) 73 V Threshold 2)
Slot 33 left Slot 19 right
side side
BI8 BI21 X21 1-2 2-3
BI9 BI22 X22 1-2 2-3
BI10 BI23 X23 1-2 2-3
BI11 BI24 X24 1-2 2-3
BI12 BI25 X25 1-2 2-3
BI13 BI26 X26 1-2 2-3
BI14 BI27 X27 1-2 2-3
BI15 BI28 X28 1-2 2-3
BI16 BI29 X29 1-2 2-3
BI17 BI30 X30 1-2 2-3
BI18 BI31 X31 1-2 2-3
BI19 BI32 X32 1-2 2-3
BI20 BI33 X33 1-2 2-3
1)
2)
510 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output module B-I/O-2 serve to set up the bus
address. The jumpers must not be changed. The following two tables list the jumper
presettings.
The mounting locations are shown in Figures 3-3 to 3-6.
Table 3-30 Jumper settings of the PCB Address of the input/output boards B-I/O-2 for
housing size 1/2
Jumper Mounting location slot

19
X71 1-2
X72 2-3
X73 1-2
Table 3-31 Jumper settings of the PCB Address of the input/output boards B-I/O-2 for
housing size 1/1

Slot 19 right side Slot 33 left side
X71 1-2 2-3
X72 2-3 1-2
X73 1-2 1-2
7SA6 Manual 511

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.1.2.4 Interface Modules
Exchanging The interface modules are located on the processor board C-CPU-2
Interface Modules (No. 1 in Figure 3-3 to 3-6).
Figure 3-16 C-CPU-2 board with interface modules
512 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Please note the following:

Only interface modules of devices with panel flush mounting and cubicle mounting
as well as of mounting devices with detached operator panel can be exchanged.
Devices in surface mounting housings with double-level terminals can be changed
only in our manufacturing centre.
Use only interface modules that can be ordered ex-factory via the ordering code
(see also Appendix, Section A.1).
You may have to ensure the termination of the interfaces featuring bus capability
according to the margin heading RS485 Interface.
Table 3-32 Exchangeable interface modules
Interface Mounting Location / Port Exchange module

Only interface modules that can
System interface or analog be ordered in our facilities via the
output order key (see also Appendix,
B
Section A.1).
AN20
Protection data interface or AN20
D
analog output FO5 to FO8; FO17 to FO19
The order numbers of the exchange modules can be found in the Appendix in Section
A.1, Accessories.
RS232 Interface Interface RS232 can be modified to interface RS485 and vice versa (see Figures 3-17
and 3-18).
Figure 3-16 shows the C-CPU-2 PCB with the layout of the modules.
The following figure shows the location of the jumpers of interface RS232 on the inter-
face module.
Surface-mounted devices with fibre optics connection have their fibre optics module
fitted in the console housing on the case bottom. The fibre optics module is controlled
via an RS232 interface module at the associated CPU interface slot. For this applica-
tion type the jumpers X12 and X13 on the RS232 module are plugged in position 2-3.
Figure 3-17 Location of the jumpers for configuration of RS232
Terminating resistors are not required for RS232. They are disconnected.
7SA6 Manual 513

C53000-G1176-C156-5
With jumper X11 the flow control which is important for modem communication is
enabled.
Table 3-33 Jumper setting for CTS (Clear To Send, flow control) on the interface module
Jumper /CTS from Interface RS232 /CTS controlled by /RTS
X11 1-2 2-3 1)
1) Default Setting
Jumper setting 2-3: The connection to the modem is usually established with a star
coupler or fibre-optic converter. Therefore the modem control signals according to
RS232 standard DIN 66020 are not available. Modem signals are not required since
the connection to the SIPROTEC 4 devices is always operated in the half-duplex
mode. Please use the connection cable with order number 7XV5100-4.
Jumper setting 1-2: This setting makes the modem signals available, i. e. for a direct
RS232-connection between the SIPROTEC 4 device and the modem this setting can
be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection
cable (converter 9-pin to 25-pin).
Note
For a direct connection to DIGSI with interface RS232 jumper X11 must be plugged in
position 2-3.
RS485 Interface The following figure shows the location of the jumpers of interface RS485 on the inter-
face module.
Interface RS485 can be modified to interface RS232 and vice versa, according to
Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-18 Position of terminating resistors and the plug-in jumpers for configuration of the
RS485 interface
514 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Interface
PROFIBUS
Figure 3-19 Location of the jumpers for configuring the PROFIBUS and DNP 3.0 interface terminating resistors
EN100 Ethernet The Ethernet interface module has no jumpers. No hardware modifications are re-
Module (IEC 61850) quired to use it.
RS485 Termination For bus-capable interfaces a termination is necessary at the bus for each last device,
i.e. termination resistors must be connected. With the 7SA6 device, this concerns the
variants with RS485 or PROFIBUS interfaces.
The terminating resistors are located on the RS485 or PROFIBUS interface module,
which is on the board C-CPU-2 (No.1 in Figure 3-3 to 3-6), or directly on the PCB of
the processor board C-CPU-2 (see margin heading Processor Board C-CPU-2,
Table 3-7).
Figure 3-16 shows the C-CPU-2 PCB with the layout of the boards.
The board with configuration as RS485 interface is shown in Figure 3-18, the module
for the PROFIBUS interface in Figure 3-19.
For the configuration of the terminating resistors both jumpers have to be plugged in
the same way.
On delivery the jumpers are set so that the terminating resistors are disconnected.
The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the terminal block),
see Figure 3-20. In this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 or
PROFIBUS interface module or directly on the PCB of the processor board C-CPU-2
must be de-energized.
Figure 3-20 Termination of the RS485 Interface (External)
7SA6 Manual 515

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Analog Output The analog output module AN20 (see figure 3-21) is provided with 2 isolated channels
with a current range from 0 to 20 mA (unipolar, maximum 350 ).
The location on the C-CPU-2 board B or/and D depends on the ordered variant
(see Figure 3-16).
Figure 3-21 AN20 analog output interface board
3.1.2.5 Reassembly
The assembly of the device is done in the following steps:

Insert the boards carefully in the housing. The mounting locations of the boards are
shown in Figures 3-3 to 3-6. For the variant of the device designed for surface
mounting, use the metal lever to insert the processor board C-CPU-2. Installation is
easier with the lever.
First plug in the plug connectors of the ribbon cable onto the input/output board I/O
and then onto the processor board C-CPU-2. Be careful that no connector pins are
bent! Don't apply force!
Connect the plug connectors of the ribbon cable between processor board C-CPU-
2 and the front panel to the front panel plug connector. These activities are not nec-
essary if the device has a detached operator panel. Instead of this, the connector
of the ribbon cable connected to the 68-pin connector on the device rear panel must
be plugged on the connector of the processor board C-CPU-2. The 7pole X16 con-
nector belonging to the ribbon cable must be plugged behind the D-subminiature
female connector. The plugging position is not relevant in this context as the con-
nection is protected against polarity reversal.
Press plug connector interlocks together.
Replace the front panel and screw it tightly to the housing.
Put the covers back on.
Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing. This activity is not nec-
essary if the device is designed for surface mounting.
516 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.1.3 Mounting
3.1.3.1 Panel Flush Mounting
Depending on the version, the device housing can be 1/3, 1/2, 2/3 or 1/1. For housing
size 1/3 (Figure 3-22) and 1/2 (Figure 3-23) there are 4 covers and 4 holes for securing
the device, for housing size 2/3 (Figure 3-24) and housing size 1/1 (Figure 3-25) there
are 6 covers and 6 securing holes.
Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, for housing size 2/3 and 1/1
the 2 covers located centrally at the top and bottom also have to be removed. Thus
the 4 respectively 6 elongated holes in the mounting bracket are revealed and can
be accessed.
Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with four or six screws. For di-
mensions refer to Section 4.25.
Mount the four or six covers.
Connect the earth on the rear plate of the device to the protective earth of the panel.
Use at least one M4 screw for the device earth. The cross-sectional area of the
earth wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor
connected to the device. The cross-section of the earth wire must be at least
2.5 mm 2.
Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the
device according to the wiring diagram of the panel.
When using forked lugs for direct connections or screw terminal, the screws, before
having inserted the lugs and wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw
heads are even with the terminal block.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber, in such a way that the screw
thread fits in the hole of the lug.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description has pertinent information regarding wire
size, lugs, bending radii, etc. Installation notes are also given in the brief reference
booklet attached to the device.
7SA6 Manual 517

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-22 Example of panel flush mounting of a device (housing size 1/3)
518 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6 Manual 519

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.1.3.2 Rack and Cubicle Mounting
Two mounting rails are required for installing a device into a frame or cabinet. The or-
dering codes are stated in the Appendix, Section A.1
For housing size 1/3 (Figure 3-26) and 1/2 (Figure 3-27) there are 4 covers and 4 holes
for securing the device, for housing size 2/3 (Figure 3-28) and housing size 1/1 (Figure
3-29) there are 6 covers and 6 securing holes.
Screw on loosely the two angle brackets in the rack or cabinet, each with four
screws.
Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover, for housing size 2/3 and 1/1
the 2 covers located centrally at the top and bottom also have to be removed. Thus
the 4 respectively 6 elongated holes in the mounting bracket are revealed and can
be accessed.
Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws.
Mount the four or six covers.
Tighten fast the eight screws of the angle brackets in the rack or cabinet.
Screw down a robust low-ohmic protective earth or station earth to the rear of the
device using at least an M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the earth wire must
be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other conductor connected to the device.
The cross-section of the earth wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
Connections use the plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side of the device
in accordance the wiring diagram.
For screw connections with forked lugs or direct connection, before inserting wires
the screws must be tightened so that the screw heads are flush with the outer edge
of the connection block.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
520 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-26 Example of rack or cubicle mounting of a device (housing size 1/3)
7SA6 Manual 521

C53000-G1176-C156-5
522 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.1.3.3 Panel Surface Mounting
For mounting proceed as follows:

Secure the device to the panel with four screws. For dimensions see the Technical
Data in Section 4.25.
Connect the earth of the device to the protective earth of the panel. The cross-sec-
tional area of the earth wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other
conductor connected to the device. The cross-section of the earth wire must be at
least 2.5 mm2.
Connect solid, low-impedance operational earthing (cross-sectional area 2.5
mm2) to the earthing surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for the device
earth.
Connections according to the circuit diagram via screw terminals, connections for
optical fibres and electrical communication modules via the console housing. The
SIPROTEC 4 System Description has pertinent information regarding wire size,
lugs, bending radii, etc. Installation notes are also given in the brief reference
7SA6 Manual 523

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.1.3.4 Mounting with Detached Operator Panel
Caution!
Be careful when removing or plugging the connector between device and de-
tached operator panel
Non-observance of the following measure can result in property damage. Without the
cable the device is not ready for operation!
Do never pull or plug the connector between the device and the detached operator
panel during operation while the device is alive!
For mounting the device proceed as follows:

Fasten device of housing size 1/2 with 6 screws and device of housing size 1/1 with
10 screws. For dimensions see for the Technical Data in Section 4.25.
Screw down a robust low-ohmic protective earth or station earth to the rear of the
device using at least a M4. The cross-sectional area of the earth wire must be equal
to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device.
The cross-section of the earth wire must be at least 2.5 mm 2.
Connections are realized via plug terminals or screw terminals on the rear side of
the device according to the connection diagram.
When using forked lugs for direct connections or screw terminal, the screws, before
having inserted the lugs and wires, must be tightened in such a way that the screw
heads are even with the terminal block.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber, in such a way that the screw
thread fits in the hole of the lug.
For mounting the operator panel please observe the following:
Remove the 4 covers on the corners of the front plate. Thus, 4 elongated holes are
revealed in the mounting bracket and can be accessed.
Insert the operator panel into the panel cut-out and fasten with four screws. For di-
mensions see Technical Data.
Replace the 4 covers.
Connect the earth on the rear plate of the operator control element to the protective
earth of the panel using at least one M4 screw. The cross-sectional area of the
ground wire must be equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conduc-
tor connected to the device. The cross-section of the earth wire must be at least 2.5
mm 2.
Connect the operator panel to the device. To do so, plug the 68-pin connector of the
cable belonging to the operator panel into the corresponding connection at the rear
side of the device (see SIPROTEC 4 System Description). You will find hints in the
short description included in the device).
524 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.2 Checking Connections
3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Serial Interfaces
The tables of the following margin headings list the pin assignments for the different
serial interfaces, the time synchronization interface and the Ethernet interface of the
device. The position of the connections is depicted in the following pictures.
Figure 3-30 9-pin D-subminiature female connectors
Figure 3-31 Ethernet connector
OperatingInterface When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between
the SIPROTEC 4 device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix A.1
for an ordering description of the cable.
Service interface Check the data connection if the service interface (Interface C) for communicating with
the device is via fix wiring or a modem.
7SA6 Manual 525

C53000-G1176-C156-5
System interface For versions equipped with a serial interface to a control center, the user must check
the data connection. The visual check of the assignment of the transmission and re-
ception channels is of particular importance. With RS232 and fibre optic interfaces,
each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. Therefore the output of
one device must be connected to the input of the other device and vice versa.
With data cables, the connections are designated according to DIN 66020 and ISO
2110:
TxD = Data Transmit
RxD = Data Receive
RTS = Request to Send
CTS = Clear to Send
GND = Signal / Chassis Ground
The cable shield is to be earthed at both line ends. For extremely EMC-prone envi-
ronments, the earth may be connected via a separate individually shielded wire pair to
improve immunity to interference.
Table 3-34 The assignments of the D-subminiature and RJ45 connector for the various interfaces
Pin No. Operator RS232 RS485 PROFIBUS FMS Slave, RS485 DNP3.0 RS485 Ethernet
interface PROFIBUS DP Slave, RS485 EN100
1 Shield (with shield ends electrically connected) Tx+
2 RxD RxD - - - Tx-
3 TxD TxD A/A' (RxD/TxD-N) B/B' (RxD/TxD-P) A Rx+
4 - - - CNTR-A (TTL) RTS (TTL level) -
5 GND GND C/C (GND) C/C (GND) GND1 -
6 - - - +5 V (max. load 100 mA) VCC1 Rx-
7 RTS RTS - 1) - - -
8 CTS CTS B/B' (RxD/TxD-P) A/A' (RxD/TxD-N) B -
9 - - - - - Disabled
1)
Pin 7 also carries the RTS signal with RS232 level when operated as RS485 Interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be
connected!
RS485Termination The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A' and B/B'
with a common relative potential C/C' (GND). Verify that only the last device on the bus
has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do not.
The jumpers for the terminating resistors are located on the interface module RS485
(see Figure 3-17) or PROFIBUS RS485 (see Figure 3-18) or directly on the C-CPU-2
(see Figure 3-7 and Table 3-7). The terminating resistors can also be connected ex-
ternally (e.g. to the connection module as illustrated in Figure 3-8). In this case, the
terminating resistors located on the module must be disabled.
If the bus is extended, make sure again that only terminating resistors at the last
device to the bus are switched in.
526 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Analog Output Both analog values are directed as currents via a 9-pin DSUB female connector. The
outputs are isolated.
Pin no. Description

1 Channel 1 positive
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 Channel 2 positive
6 Channel 1 negative
7 -
8 -
9 Channel 2 negative
Time Synchronisa- It is optionally possible to process 5 V, 12 V or 24 V time synchronization signals, pro-

tion Interface vided that these are connected to the inputs named in the following table.
Table 3-35 D-subminiature connector assignment of the time synchronization interface
Pin No. Designation Signal meaning

1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V
2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
3 M_TSIG Return line
4 - 1) - 1)
5 SHIELD Shield potential
6 - -
7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V
8 P_TSYNC 1) Input 24 V 1)
9 SHIELD Shield potential
1) Assigned, but cannot be used
7SA6 Manual 527

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Fibre-optic cables
WARNING!
Warning of laser rays!
Non-observance of the following measure can result in death, personal injury or sub-
stantial property damage.
Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements, not even with optical devices! Laser
Class 3A according to EN 60825-1.
For the protection data communication, refer to the following section.

The transmission via fibre optics is particularly insensitive to electromagnetic interfer-
ence and thus ensures galvanic isolation of the connection. Send and receive connec-
tions are identified with the symbols for send and for receive.
The character idle state for the optical fibre interface is Light off. If the character idle
state is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI, as described in the SIPRO-
TEC 4 System Description.
3.2.2 Checking the Protection Data Communication
If the device features protection data interfaces for digital communication links, the
transmission way must be checked. The protection data communication is conducted
either directly from device to device via optical fibres or via communication converters
and a communication network or a dedicated transmission medium.
Optical Fibres,
Directly
WARNING!
Warning of laser rays!
Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements, not even with optical devices! Laser
Class 3A according to EN 60825-1.
The direct optical fibre connection is visually inspected by means of an optical fibre
connector. There is one connection for each direction. Therefore the output of the one
device must be connected to the input of the other device and vice versa. Transmit
and receive connections are represented by the symbols for send output
and for receive output. Important is the visual check of assignment of the
send and receive channels.
If using more than one device, the connections of all protection data interfaces are
checked according to the topology selected.
528 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Communication Optical fibres are usually used for the connections between the devices and commu-
Converter nication converters. The optical fibres are checked in the same manner as the optical
fibre direct connection which means for every protection data interface.
Make sure that under the address 4502 CONNEC. 1 OVER the right connection type
is parameterized.
Further For further connections a visual inspection is sufficient for the time being. Electrical
Connections and functional controls are performed during commissioning (see the following main
section).
3.2.3 Power Plant Connections
WARNING!
Warning of dangerous voltages
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or sub-
Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety proce-
dures and precautionary measures shall perform the inspection steps.
Caution!
Be careful when operating the device on a battery charger without a battery
Non-observance of the following measure can lead to unusually high voltages and
consequently, the destruction of the device.
Do not operate the device on a battery charger without a connected battery. (For limit
values see also Technical Data, Section 4.1).
Before the device is energized for the first time, it should be in the final operating en-
vironment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humidity and
avoid condensation. Connections are checked with the device at its final location. The
plant must first be switched off and earthed.
Proceed as follows in order to check the system connections:
Protective switches for the power supply and the measured voltages must be
opened.
Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the
system and connection diagrams:
Are the current transformers earthed properly?
Are the polarities of the current transformers the same?
Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct?
Are the voltage transformers earthed properly?
Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct?
Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct?
7SA6 Manual 529

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Is the polarity for current input I4 correct (if used)?

Is the polarity for voltage input U4 correct (if used, e.g. with open delta winding or
busbar voltage)?
Check the functions of all test switches that are installed for the purposes of sec-
ondary testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches
in current transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current
transformers when they are in the test mode.
The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device is to be checked. This
may be performed with secondary test equivalent or other test equipment for check-
ing continuity. Make sure that terminal continuity is not wrongly simulated in reverse
direction via current transformers or their short-circuit links.
Remove the front panel of the device (see also Figures 3-3 to 3-6).
Remove the ribbon cable connected to the input/output board with the measured
current inputs (on the front side it is the right PCB, for housing size 1/3 see Figure
3-3 slot 19, for housing size 1/2 see Figure 3-4 slot 33, for housing size 1/1 see
Figure 3-6 slot 33 right). Furthermore, remove the PCB so that there is no more
contact anymore with the plug-in terminal.
At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that re-
ceives current from the CTs.
Firmly re-insert the I/O board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Be careful that
no connector pins are bent! Don't apply force!
At the terminals of the device, again check continuity for each pair of terminals
that receives current from the CTs.
Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about
2.5 A to 5 A for the meter is appropriate.
Switch on m.c.b. for auxiliary voltage (supply protection), check the voltage level
and, if applicable, the polarity of the voltage at the device terminals or at the con-
nection modules.
The measured steady-state current should correspond to the quiescent power con-
sumption of the device. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the
charging current of capacitors.
Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches.
Disconnect the measuring test equipment; restore the normal power supply con-
nections.
Apply voltage to the power supply.
Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers.
Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct.
Open the miniature circuit breakers for the transformer voltage (VT mcb) and the
power supply.
Check tripping circuits to the circuit breakers.
Check the close circuits to the power system circuit breakers.
Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.
Check the signalling connections.
Check the analog outputs (if available and used).
Close the protective switches.
530 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
WARNING!
Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or sub-
Only qualified people shall work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly
familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with
the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
Before making any connections, the device must be earthed at the protective conduc-
tor terminal.
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current
transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits.
Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage
has been removed (capacitors can still be charged).
After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before
re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be firmly es-
tablished before the device is re-energized.
The limit values given in Technical Data must not be exceeded, neither during testing
nor during commissioning.
For tests with a secondary test equipment ensure that no other measurement voltages
are connected and the trip and close commands to the circuit breakers are blocked,
unless otherwise specified.
DANGER!
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current trans-
formers
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury
or substantial property damage.
Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to
the device are opened.
During the commissioning procedure, switching operations must be carried out. The
tests described require that they can be done without danger. They are accordingly
not meant for operational checks.
7SA6 Manual 531

C53000-G1176-C156-5
WARNING!
Warning of dangers evolving from improper primary tests
Primary tests may only be carried out by qualified persons who are familiar with com-
missioning protection systems, with managing power systems and the relevant safety
rules and guidelines (switching, earthing etc.).
3.3.1 Test Mode / Transmission Block
Activation and If the device is connected to a central control system or a server via the SCADA inter-
Deactivation face, then the information that is transmitted can be modified with some of the proto-
cols available (see Table Protocol-dependent functions in the Appendix A.5).
If Test mode is set ON, then a message sent by a SIPROTEC 4 device to the main
system has an additional test bit. This bit allows the message to be recognized as re-
sulting from testing and not an actual fault or power system event. Furthermore it can
be determined by activating the Transmission block that no indications at all are
transmitted via the system interface during test mode.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description describes how to activate and deactivate test
mode and blocked data transmission. Note that when DIGSI is being used, the
program must be in the Online operating mode for the test features to be used.
3.3.2 Checking the Time Synchronization Interface
If external time synchronization sources are used, the data of the time source (antenna
system, time generator) are checked (see Section 4 under Time Synchronization). A
correct function (IRIG B, DCF77) is recognized in such a way that 3 minutes after the
startup of the device the clock status is displayed as synchronized, accompanied
by the indication Alarm Clock OFF. For further information please refer to the
SIPROTEC System Description.
Table 3-36 Time status
No. Status text Status

1
synchronized
2 ST
3 ER
4 ER ST
not synchronized
5 NS ER
6 NS
Legend:
NS time invalid
ER time fault
ST summertime
532 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.3 Checking the System Interface
Prefacing Remarks If the device features a system interface and uses it to communicate with the control
centre, the DIGSI device operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted
correctly. This test option should however definitely not be used while the device is
in service on a live system.
DANGER!
The sending or receiving of indications via the system interface by means of the
test function is a real information exchange between the SIPROTEC 4 device
and the control centre. Connected operating equipment such as circuit breakers
or disconnectors can be switched in this way!
Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be
checked only during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by
means of the testing mode during real operation performing transmission and recep-
tion of messages via the system interface.
Note
After termination of the hardware test, transmission and reception of messages via the
system interface. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these
buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test.
The interface test is carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device
appear.
Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the window.
Double-click on Testing Messages for System Interface shown in the list view.
The dialog box Generate Indications is opened (see Figure 3-32).
Structure of the In the column Indication, all message texts that were configured for the system inter-
Dialog Box face in the matrix will then appear. In the column Setpoint you determine a value for
the indications that shall be tested. Depending on the type of message different enter-
ing fields are available (e.g. message ON / message OFF). By clicking on one of the
buttons you can select the desired value from the pull-down menu.
7SA6 Manual 533

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-32 System interface test with dialog box: Generate indications example
Changing the On clicking one of the buttons in the column Action you will be prompted for the pass-
Operating State word No. 6 (for hardware test menus). After correct entry of the password, individual
annunciations can be initiated. To do so, click on the button Send in the corresponding
line. The corresponding message is issued and can be read out either from the event
log of the SIPROTEC 4 device or from the substation control center.
Further tests remain enabled until the dialog box is closed.
Test in Indication For all information that is transmitted to the central station, test in Setpoint the desired
Direction options in the list which appears:
Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any
danger (see above and refer to DANGER!)
Click Send in the function to be tested and check whether the corresponding infor-
mation reaches the control center and possibly shows the expected effect. Data
which are normally linked via binary inputs (first character >) are likewise indicated
to the control center with this procedure. The function of the binary inputs itself is
tested separately.
Exiting the Test To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The proces-
Mode sor system is restarted, then the device is ready for operation.
Test in Command Data which are normally linked via binary inputs (first character >) are likewise
Direction checked with this procedure. The information transmitted in command direction must
be indicated by the central station. Check whether the reaction is correct.
534 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.4 Checking the States of the Binary Inputs/Outputs
Prefacing Remarks The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and
precisely controlled in DIGSI. This feature is used to verify control wiring from the
device to plant equipment (operational checks) during commissioning. This test option
should however definitely not be used while the device is in service on a live system.
DANGER!
A changing of switching states by means of the test function causes a real
change of the operating state at the SIPROTEC 4 device. Connected operating
equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors will be switched in this
way!
Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be
checked only during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by
means of the testing mode during real operation performing transmission and recep-
tion of messages via the system interface.
Note
After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation
buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to
the test.
The hardware test can be carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device
appear.
Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the window.
Double-click in the list view on Device inputs and outputs. The dialog box with this
name is opened (see Figure 3-33).
Structure of the The dialog box is classified into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output
Dialog Box relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. On the left of each group is an accordingly
labelled panel. By double-clicking these panels you can show or hide the individual in-
formation of the selected group.
In the column Status the present (physical) state of the hardware component is dis-
played. Indication is displayed symbolically. The physical actual states of the binary
inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch symbol, the LEDs by
switched on or switched off symbol.
The opposite state of each element is displayed in the column Scheduled. The display
is in plain text.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured
(masked) to the hardware components.
7SA6 Manual 535

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-33 Testing of the binary inputs and outputs example
Changing the To change the operating state of a hardware component, click on the associated
operating state switching field in the Scheduled column.
Before executing the first change of the operating state the password No. 6 will be re-
quested (if activated during configuration). After entry of the correct password a con-
dition change will be executed. Further state changes remain enabled until the dialog
box is closed.
Test of the Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between
Output Relays the output relay of the 7SA6 and the plant, without having to generate the message
that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any of the output
relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device functions,
and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This means, that e.g. a TRIP
command coming from a protection function or a control command from the operator
panel to an output relay cannot be executed.
Proceed as follows in order to check the output relay :
Make sure that the switching operations caused by the output relays can be execut-
ed without any danger (see above under DANGER!).
Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled cell in the
dialog box.
Finish the testing (see margin heading below Exiting the Procedure), so that
during further testings no unwanted switchings are initiated.
Test of the To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7SA6 the condition in
Binary Inputs the system which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the
device checked.
To do so, open the dialog box Hardware Test again to view the physical position of
the binary input. The password is not yet required.
536 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
Proceed as follows in order to check the binary inputs:

Activate in the system each of the functions which cause the binary inputs.
Check the reaction in the Status column of the dialog box. To do this, the dialog box
must be updated. The options may be found below under the margin heading Up-
dating the Display.
Finish the test sequence (see margin heading below Exiting the Procedure).
If, however, the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any
switching in the system, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hard-
ware test function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered
and the password No. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the
system and can only be activated via the hardware test function.
Test of the LEDs The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As
soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated
from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware test
function. This means e.g. that no LED is illuminated anymore by a protection function
or by pressing the LED reset button.
Updating the When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the hard-
Display ware components at that moment are read in and displayed.
An update is made:
For the particular hardware component, if a command for change to another state
was successful,
For all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
For all hardware components with cyclical updating (cycle time is 20 sec) if the Au-
tomatic Update (20 sec) field is marked.
Exiting the To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. Thus, all the hard-
Procedure ware components are set back to the operating state specified by the plant states. The
processor system is restarted, then the device is ready for operation.
7SA6 Manual 537

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3.5 Checking the Analog Outputs
7SA6 can be equipped with up to 2 analog outputs. Where analog outputs are provid-
ed and used, their functioning should be tested.
Since different measured values or results of the fault location are output, the check
depends on the values used. These values must be generated (e.g. with some sec-
ondary test equipment).
Make sure that the corresponding values are correctly output at their destination.
3.3.6 Checking the Communication Topology
General The communication topology can either be checked from the PC using DIGSI.
You can either connect the PC to the device locally using the operator interface at the
front, or the service interface at the back of the PC (Figure 3-34). Or you can log into
the device using a modem via the service interface (example in Figure 3-35).
Figure 3-34 PC interfacing directly to the device - example
Figure 3-35 PC interfacing via modem schematic example
538 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
Checking a For two devices linked with fibre optical cables (as in Figure 3-34 or 3-35), this con-
connection using nection is checked as follows. If two or more devices are linked or, if two devices have
direct link been (double-) linked with a ring topology, first check only one link.
Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on.
Check in the operating indications or in the spontaneous indications:
If the message PI1 with (protection data interface 1 connected with No.
3243) is provided with the device index of the other device, a link has been es-
tablished and one device has recognized the other.
In case of an incorrect communication link, you see the message PI1 Data
fault (No 3229). In this case, recheck the fibre optical cable link.
Have the devices been linked correctly and no cables been mixed up?
Are the cables free from mechanical damage, intact and the connectors locked?
Otherwise repeat check.
Continue with the margin heading Consistency of Topology and Parameterization.
Checking a Link If a communication converter is used, please note the instructions enclosed with the
with a Communica- device. The communication converter has a test setting where its outputs are looped
tion Converter back to the inputs.
Links via the communication converter are tested by means of local loop-back (Figure
3-36, left).
Figure 3-36 Distance protection communication via communication converter and communication network - example
DANGER!
Opening the Communication Converter
There is danger to life by energized parts.
Before opening the communication converter, it is absolutely necessary to isolate it
from the auxiliary supply voltage at all poles!
7SA6 Manual 539

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on.

First configure the communication converter CC-1:
Open the communication converter.
Set the jumpers to the matching position for the correct interface type and trans-
mission rate; they must be identical with the parameterization of the 7SA6 (ad-
dress 4502 CONNEC. 1 OVER for protection data interface 1, see also Subsec-
tion 2.4.2).
Move the communication converter into test position (jumper X32 in position 2-3).
Close the communication converter housing.
Reconnect the auxiliary supply voltage for the communication converter.
The system interface (X.21 or G703.1) must be active and connected to the com-
munication converter. Check this by means of the "device ready"-contact of the
communication converter (continuity at the NO contact).
If the "device ready"-contact of the communication converter doesn't close,
check the connection between the communication converter and the net (com-
munication device). The communication device must emit the correct transmitter
clock to the communication converter.
Change the interface parameters at the 7SA6 (at the device front or via DIGSI):
Address 4502 CONNEC. 1 OVER = F.optic direct when you are testing pro-
tection data interface 1,
Check the operating indications or in the spontaneous annunciations:
Message 3217 PI1 Data reflec (Protection interface 1 data reflection ON)
when you test protection data interface 1,
If the indication is not transmitted check for the following:
Has the 7SA6 fibre optical transmitting terminal output been correctly linked with
the fibre optical receiving terminal input of the communication converter and vice
versa (No erroneous interchanging)?
Does the 7SA6 device have the correct interface module and is it working cor-
rectly?
Are the fibre optic cables intact?
Are the parameter settings for interface type and transmission rate at the com-
munication converter correct (see above; note the DANGER instruction!)?
Repeat the check after correction, if necessary.
Reset the interface parameters at the 7SA6 correctly:
Address 4502 CONNEC. 1 OVER = required setting, when you have tested pro-
tection data interface 1,
Disconnect the auxiliary supply voltage of the communication converter at both
poles. Note the above DANGER instruction!
Reset the communication converter to normal position (X32 in position 1-2) and
close the housing again.
Reconnect the supply voltage of the communication converter.
Perform the above check at the other end with the device being connected there and
its corresponding communication converter.
Continue with the margin heading Consistency of Topology and Parameterization.
540 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
Consistency of Having performed the above checks, the linking of a device pair, including their com-
Topology and munication converters, has been completely tested and connected to auxiliary supply
Parameterisation voltage. Now the devices communicate by themselves.
Check now the Event Log or in the spontaneous annunciations of the device where
you are working:
Indication No. 3243 PI1 with (protection data interface 1 linked with) fol-
lowed by the device index of the other device, if interface 1 is applying.
If the devices are at least connected once, the message No. 3458
Chaintopology will appear.
If no other devices are involved in the topology as an entity, the message No.
3464 Topol complete will then be displayed, too.
And if the device configuration is also consistent, i.e. the prerequisites for setting
the function scope (Section 2.1.1),Power System Data 1 (2.1.2.1), Power System
Data 2 (2.1.4.1) topology and protection data interface parameters (Section
2.4.2) have been considered, the fault message, i.e. No. 3229 PI1 Data
fault, for the interface just checked will disappear. The communication and
consistency test has now been completed.
If the fault message of the interface being checked does not disappear, however,
the fault must be found and eliminated. Table 3-37 lists messages that indicate
such faults.
Table 3-37 Messages on Inconsistencies
No. LCD Text Meaning / Measures

3233 DT inconsistent Device table inconsistent: The indexing of the devices
is inconsistent (missing numbers or one number used
twice, see Section 2.4.2)
3234 DT unequal Device table unequal: the ID-numbers of the devices
are unequal (see Section 2.4.2 )
3235 Par. different Parameterization different: Different functional parame-
ters were set for the devices. They have to be equal at
both ends.
The following function parameters must agree to all ends:

Phase sequence (address 235);
If you work with teleprotection via the protection data interface (address 121 =
SIGNALv.ProtInt), the parameter FCT Telep. Dis. (address 2101) must be
controlled;
Where direction comparison with protection data interface is used in earth fault pro-
tection, parameter Teleprot. E/F (address 132) must be taken into account.
Checking Further If all devices involved in the topology communicate properly and all parameters are
Links consistent, the message No. 3464 Topol complete appears.
If there is a ring topology (only in connection with a 7SA522), the message No. 3457
Ringtopology must also appear after closing the ring.
However, if you are employing a ring topology, which only issues the indication
Chaintopology instead of Ringtopology, the protection data communica-
tion is functionable, but the ring has not yet been closed. Check the missing links as
described above including the consistency test until all links to the ring have been
made.
Finally, there should be no more fault messages of the protection data interfaces.
7SA6 Manual 541

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3.7 Test Mode for Teleprotection Scheme with Protection Data Interface
Local Test Mode The local test mode can be used for commissioning or revision tests of the telepro-
tection scheme via protection data interface.
Select from the menus Control -> Tagging -> Set to set the Test mode tagging.
The tagging is protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. The indication 3196
local Teststate is output to indicate that the test mode is activated.
When the local device is in test mode, all information transferred via the protection
data interface is marked with the attribute Test mode.
The teleprotection scheme via protection data interface can be tested as follows:
1. A fault generated at the local device by some test equipment generates the re-
quired send signals.
2. The send signals are transmitted to the remote end with the attribute Test mode.
3. The remote end receives the send signal with the attribute Test mode and mirrors
the received send signals as its own send signals, likewise with the attribute Test
mode, selectively for each phase back to the local device (the received send
signals are not evaluated in terms of protection).
4. The local device receives the mirrored signals and feeds them into its own telepro-
tection schemes, where they may cause the output of a trip signal.
Note
As long as a device is in protection data interface test mode, selective line protection
is not ensured!
542 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.8 Tests for the Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
General If the device is equipped with the breaker failure protection and this function is used,
the integration of this protection function into the system must be tested under practi-
cal conditions.
Because of the manifold application facilities and various configuration possibilities of
the plant it is not possible to give a detailed description of the necessary test steps. It
is important to consider the local conditions and the protection and plant drawings.
Before starting the circuit breaker tests it is recommended to insulate at both ends the
feeder which is to be tested, i.e. line disconnectors and busbar disconnectors should
be open so that the breaker can be operated without risk.
Caution!
Also for tests on the local circuit breaker of the feeder a trip command to the surround-
ing circuit breakers can be issued for the busbar.
Non-observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or prop-
erty damage.
Therefore, primarily it is recommended to interrupt the tripping commands to the ad-
jacent (busbar) breakers, e.g. by interrupting the corresponding pickup voltage supply.
Before the breaker is closed again for normal operation the trip command of the feeder
protection routed to the circuit breaker must be disconnected so that the trip command
can only be initiated by the breaker failure protection.
Although the following list does not claim to be complete, it may also contain points
which are to be ignored in the current application.
Auxiliary Contacts The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure pro-
of the CB tection system in case they have been connected to the device. Make sure the correct
assignment has been checked.
External Initiation If the breaker failure protection can also be started by external protection devices, the
Conditions external start conditions should be checked. Single-pole or three-pole tripping is pos-
sible depending on the setting of the breaker failure protection. Note that the internal
pole discrepancy supervision or the pole discrepancy supervision of the breaker itself
may lead to a later three-pole trip. Therefore check first how the parameters of the
breaker failure protection are set. See Section 2.19.2, addresses 3901 onwards.
In order for the breaker failure protection to be started, a current must flow at least
through the monitored phase and the earth. This may be a secondary injected current.
After every start, the message BF Start (No. 1461) must appear in the spontane-
ous or fault indications.
7SA6 Manual 543

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Only if single-pole starting possible:

Start by single-pole trip command of the external protection: L1
Binary input functions >BF Start L1 and, if necessary, >BF release (in
spontaneous or fault indications). Trip command (dependent on settings).
Starting by trip command of the external protection via all three binary inputs L1, L2
and L3:
Binary input functions >BF Start L1, >BF Start L2 and >BF Start
L3 and, if necessary, >BF release (in spontaneous or fault indications). Trip
command three-pole
For three-pole starting:
Three-pole starting by trip command of the external protection:
Binary input functions >BF Start 3pole and, if necessary, >BF release
(in spontaneous or fault indications). Trip command (dependent on settings).
Switch off test current.
If start is possible without current flow:
Starting by trip command of the external protection without current flow:
Binary input functions >BF Start w/o I and, if necessary, >BF release
(in spontaneous or fault indications). Trip command (dependent on settings).
Busbar Trip The most important thing is the check of the correct distribution of the trip commands
to the adjacent circuit breakers in case of breaker failure.
The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order
to ensure interruption of the fault current should the local breaker fail. These are there-
fore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed the busbar or busbar section to which
the feeder with the fault is connected.
A general detailed test guide cannot be specified, because the layout of the surround-
ing circuit breakers largely depends on the system topology.
In particular with multiple busbars the trip distribution logic for the surrounding circuit
breakers must be checked. Here check for every busbar section that all circuit break-
ers which are connected to the same busbar section as the feeder circuit breaker
under observation are tripped, and no other breakers.
Tripping of the If the trip command of the circuit breaker failure protection must also trip the circuit
Remote End breaker at the remote end of the feeder under observation, the transmission channel
for this remote trip must also be checked. This is done together with transmission of
other signals according to Sections Testing of the Teleprotection Scheme with ...
further below.
Termination of the All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, e.g. especially switching
Checks states, interrupted trip commands, changes to setting values or individually switched
off protection functions.
544 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.9 Current, Voltage, and Phase Rotation Testing
10 % of Load The connections of the current and voltage transformers are tested using primary
Current quantities. Secondary load current of at least 10 % of the nominal current of the device
is necessary. The line is energized and will remain in this state during the measure-
ments.
With proper connections of the measuring circuits, none of the measured-values su-
pervision elements in the device should pick up. If an element detects a problem, the
causes which provoked it may be viewed in the Event Log.
If current or voltage summation errors occur, then check the matching factors (see
Section 2.1.2.1).
Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are
asymmetrical conditions in the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal
service conditions, the corresponding monitoring functions should be made less sen-
sitive (see Section 2.22.1.6) .
Quantities Currents and voltages can be viewed in the display field on the front of the device or
the operator interface via a PC. They can be compared to the actual measured values,
as primary and secondary quantities.
If the measured values are not plausible, the connection must be checked and correct-
ed after the line has been isolated and the current transformer circuits have been
short-circuited. The measurements must then be repeated.
Phase sequence The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a
voltage clockwise phase rotation. If the system has an anti-clockwise phase rotation, this must
have been considered when the power system data was set (address 235 PHASE
SEQ.). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm Fail Ph. Seq. (No. 171) is
generated. The measured value phase allocation must be checked and corrected, if
required, after the line has been isolated and current transformers have been short-
circuited. The phase rotation check must then be repeated.
7SA6 Manual 545

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Voltage Transform- Open the miniature circuit breaker of the feeder voltage transformers. The measured
er Miniature Circuit voltages in the operational measured values appear with a value close to zero (small
Breaker measured voltages are of no consequence).
Check in the spontaneous annunciations that the VT mcb trip was entered (message
>FAIL:Feeder VT ON in the spontaneous annunciations). Beforehand it has to
be assured that the position of the VT mcb is connected to the device via a binary
input.
Close the VT mcb again: The above messages appear in the spontaneous messages
as OFF, i.e. >FAIL:Feeder VT OFF.
If one of the annunciations does not appear, check the connection and allocation of
these signals.
If the ON state and the OFF state are swapped, the contact type (Hactive or L
active) must be checked and remedied.
If synchronism check is used and if the assigned VT mcb auxiliary contact is connect-
ed to the device, its function must also be checked. When opening the mcb, the indi-
cation >FAIL:Usy2 VT ON appears. If the mcb is closed, the indication
>FAIL:Usy2 VT OFF is displayed.
Switch off the protected power line.
3.3.10 Direction Check with Load Current
10 % of Load The correct connection of the current and voltage transformers is tested via the pro-
Current tected line using the load current. For this purpose, connect the line. The load current
the line carries must be at least 0.1 IN. The load current should be in-phase or lagging
the voltage (resistive or resistive-inductive load). The direction of the load current must
be known. If there is a doubt, network or ring loops should be opened. The line
remains energized during the test.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured values. Initially
the correlation of the measured load direction with the actual direction of load flow is
checked. In this case the normal situation is assumed whereby the forward direction
(measuring direction) extends from the busbar towards the line (see the following Fig-
ure).
P positive, if active power flows into the line,
P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar,
Q positive, if reactive power flows into the line,
Q negative, if reactive power flows toward the busbar.
546 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
Figure 3-37 Apparent Load Power
The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured

values have the correct polarity. If both the active power as well as the reactive power
have the wrong sign, the polarity in address 201 CT Starpoint must be checked
and rectified.
However, power measurement itself is not able to detect all connection errors. Accord-
ingly, the impedances of all six measuring loops are evaluated. These can also be
found as primary and secondary quantities in the operational measured values.
All six measured loops must have the same impedance components (R and X). Small
variations may result due to the non-symmetry of the measured values. In addition,
the following applies for all impedances when the load is in the first quadrant:
R, X both positive, when power flows into the line,
R, X both negative, when power flows towards the busbar.
In this case the normal situation is assumed whereby the forward direction (measuring
direction) extends from the busbar towards the line. In the case of capacitive load,
caused by e.g. underexcited generators or charging currents, the X-components may
all have the opposite sign.
If significant differences in the values of the various loops are present, or if the individ-
ual signs are different, then individual phases in the current or voltage transformer cir-
cuits are swapped, not connected correctly, or the phase allocation is incorrect. After
isolation of the line and short-circuiting of the current transformers the connections
must be checked and corrected. The measurements must then be repeated.
Finally, switch off the protected power line.
7SA6 Manual 547

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3.11 Polarity Check for the Voltage Measuring Input U4
Depending on the application of the voltage measuring input U4, a polarity check may
be necessary. If no measuring voltage is connected to this input, this section is irrele-
vant.
If the input U4 is used for measuring a voltage for overvoltage protection (P.System
Data 1 address 210 U4 transformer = Ux transformer), no polarity check is
necessary because the polarity is irrelevant here. The voltage magnitude was
checked before.
If the input U4 is used for the measurement of the displacement voltage Uen
(P.System Data 1 address 210 U4 transformer = Udelta transf.), the po-
larity together with the current measurement is checked (see below).
If the input U4 is used for measuring a voltage of synchronism check (P.System
Data 1 address 210 U4 transformer = Usy2 transf.), the polarity must be
checked as follows using the synchronism check function.
Only for The device must be equipped with the synchronism and voltage check function which
Synchronism must be configured under address 135 Enabled (see section 2.1.1.2).
Check
The synchronisation voltage Usy2 must be entered correctly at address 212 Usy2
connection (see section 2.1.2.1).
If there is no transformer between the two measuring points, address 214 Usy2-
Usy1 must be set to 0 (see Section 2.1.2.1).
If the measurement is made across a transformer, this angle setting must correspond
to the phase rotation resulting from the vector group of the transformer (see also the
example in section 2.1.2.1).
If necessary, different transformation ratios of the transformers may have to be con-
sidered from both measuring points Usy1 and Usy2 at address 215 Usy1/Usy2
ratio.
The synchronism and voltage check must be switched ON under address 3501 FCT
Synchronism .
An additional help for the connection control are the messages 2947 Sync.
Udiff> and 2949 Sync. -diff> in the spontaneous annunciations.
Circuit breaker is open. The feeder is isolated (zero voltage). The VTmcb's of both
voltage transformer circuits must be closed.
For the synchronism check the program AR OVERRIDE = YES (address 3519) is
set; the other programs (addresses 3515 to 3518) are set to NO.
Via binary input (No. 2906 >Sync. Start AR) initiate the measuring request.
The synchronism check must release closing (message Sync. release, No.
2951). If not, check all relevant parameters again (synchrocheck configured and
enabled correctly, see Sections 2.1.1.2, 2.1.2.1 and 2.15.2).
Set address 3519 AR OVERRIDE to NO.
Then the circuit breaker is closed while the line isolator is open (see Figure 3-38).
Both voltage transformers therefore measure the same voltage.
The program AR SYNC-CHECK = YES (address 3515) is set for synchronism check.
2951).
548 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
Figure 3-38 Measuring voltages for the synchronism check Example
If not, first check whether one of the before named messages 2947 Sync.
Udiff> or 2949 Sync. -diff> is available in the spontaneous messages.
The message Sync. Udiff> indicates that the magnitude (ratio) adaptation is
incorrect. Check address 215 Usy1/Usy2 ratio and recalculate the adaptation
factor, if necessary.
The message Sync. -diff> indicates that the phase relation, of the busbar
voltage in this example, does not match the setting under address 212 Usy2
connection (see Section 2.1.2.1). When measuring across a transformer,
address 214 Usy2-Usy1 must also be checked; this must adapt the vector
group (see Section 2.1.2.1). If these are correct, there is probably a reverse polarity
of the voltage transformer terminals for Usy2.
The program AR Usy1>Usy2< = YES (address 3517) and AR SYNC-CHECK = YES
(address 3515) is set for synchronism check.
Open the VT mcb of the measuring point Usy2 (No. 362 >FAIL:Usy2 VT).
There should be no close release. If there is, the VT mcb for the measuring point U
sy2 is not allocated. Check whether this is the required state, alternatively check the
binary input >FAIL:Usy2 VT (No.362).
Reclose the VT mcb of the measuring point Usy2.
Open the circuit breaker.
The program AR Usy1<Usy2> = YES (address 3516) and AR Usy1<Usy2> = NO
(address 3517) is set for synchronism check.
Via binary input (No. 2906>Sync. Start AR) initiate the measuring request.
2951). If not, check all voltage connections and the corresponding parameters
again carefully as described in Section 2.1.2.1.
Open the VT mcb of the measuring point Usy1 (No. 361 >FAIL:Feeder VT).
No close release is given.
Reclose the VT mcb of the measuring point Usy1.
Addresses 3515 to 3519 must be restored as they were changed for the test. If the
allocation of the LEDs or signal relays was changed for the test, this must also be re-
stored.
7SA6 Manual 549

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3.12 Earth Fault Check in a Non-earthed System
The earth fault check is only necessary if the device is connected to an isolated or res-
onant-earthed system and the earth fault detection is applied. The device must there-
fore be provided with the earth fault detection function according to its ordering code(
16. MLFB position = 2 or 3 or 6 or 7) and must have been preset during configuration
to Sens. Earth Flt = Enabled (Address 130) . If none of this is the case, this
subsection is not relevant.
The primary check serves to find out the correct polarity of the transformer connec-
tions for the determination of the earth fault direction.
DANGER!
Energized equipment of the power system ! Capacitive coupled voltages at discon-
nected equipment of the power system !
Primary measurements must only be carried out on disconnected and earthed equip-
ment of the power system!
Using the primary earth fault method a most reliable test result is guaranteed. There-
fore please proceed as follows:
Isolate the line and earth it on both ends. During the whole testing procedure the
line must be open at the remote end.
Make a test connection between a single phase and earth. On overhead lines it can
be connected anywhere, however, it must be located behind the current transform-
ers (looking from the busbar of the feeder to be checked). Cables are earthed on
the remote end (sealing end).
Remove the protective earthing of the line.
Connect a circuit breaker to the line end that is to be checked.
Check the direction indication (LED if allocated)
The faulty phase (No. 1272 for L1 or 1273 for L2 or 1274 for L3) and the direction
of the line, i.e. SensEF Forward (No. 1276) must be displayed in the earth fault
protocol.
The active and reactive components of the earth current are also indicated, the re-
active current (3I0senR, No. 1220) is the most relevant for isolated systems, for
resonant-earthed systems it is the active current (3I0senA, No. 1219). If the
display shows the message SensEF Reverse (No. 1277), either the current or
voltage transformer terminals are swapped in the neutral path. If message
SensEF undefDir (No. 1278) appears, the earth current may be too low.
Deenergize and earth the line.
The check is then finished.
In the WebMonitor the local and remote measured values can be shown graphically.
The following figures show an example.
550 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
Figure 3-39 Local measured values in the Web-Monitor examples for measured values
3.3.13 Polarity Check for the Current Input I4
If the standard connection of the device is used whereby current input I4 is connected
in the starpoint of the set of current transformers (refer also to the connection circuit
diagram in the Appendix A.3), then the correct polarity of the earth current path in
general automatically results.
If, however, the current I4 is derived from a separate summation CT or from a different
point of measurement, e.g. transformer star-point current or earth current of a parallel
line, an additional polarity check with this current is necessary.
If the device is provided with the sensitive current input I4 and it is connected to an
isolated or resonant-earthed system, the polarity check for I4 was already carried out
with the earth fault check according to the previous section. Then this section can be
ignored.
Otherwise the test is carried out with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load cur-
rent. It must be noted that during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with
situations that may occur in practice, the non-symmetry of measured values may
cause the measured value monitoring to pickup. This must therefore be ignored during
such tests.
7SA6 Manual 551

C53000-G1176-C156-5
DANGER!
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current trans-
formers
Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to
the device are opened.
I4 from Own Line To generate a displacement voltage, the en winding of one phase in the voltage
transformer set (e.g. L1) is bypassed (refer to Figure 3-40). If no connection on the en
windings of the voltage transformer is available, the corresponding phase is open cir-
cuited on the secondary side. Via the current path only the current from the current
transformer in the phase from which the voltage in the voltage path is missing, is con-
nected; the other CTs are short-circuited. If the line carries resistive-inductive load, the
protection is in principle subjected to the same conditions that exist during an earth
fault in the direction of the line.
At least one stage of the earth fault protection must be set to be directional (address
31x0 of the earth fault protection). The pickup threshold of this stage must be below
the load current flowing on the line; if necessary the pickup threshold must be reduced.
Note down the parameters that you have changed.
After switching the line on and off again, the direction indication must be checked: in
the fault log the messages EF Pickup and EF forward must at least be
present. If the directional pickup is not present, either the earth current connection or
the displacement voltage connection is incorrect. If the wrong direction is indicated,
either the direction of load flow is from the line toward the busbar or the earth current
path has a swapped polarity. In the latter case, the connection must be rectified after
the line has been isolated and the current transformers short-circuited.
The voltages can be read on the display at the front, or called up in the PC via the op-
erator or service interface, and compared with the actual measured quantities as
primary or secondary values. The voltages can also be read out with the Web-Monitor.
For devices with protection data interface, besides the magnitudes of the phase-to-
phase and the phase-to-earth voltages, the phase angles can be read out, thus en-
abling to verify the correct phase sequence and polarity of individual voltage trans-
former.
In the event that the pickup alarms were not even generated, the measured earth (re-
sidual) current may be too small.
552 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
Figure 3-40 Polarity check for I4, example with current transformer configured in a
Holmgreen connection
Note
If parameters were changed for this test, they must be returned to their original state
after completion of the test!
I4 from Parallel Line If I4 is the current measured on a parallel line, the above procedure is done with the
set of current transformers on the parallel line (Figure 3-41). The same method as
above is used here, except that a single phase current from the parallel feeder is mea-
sured. The parallel line must carry load while the protected line should carry load. The
line remains switched on for the duration of the measurement.
If the polarity of the parallel line earth current measurement is correct, the impedance
measured in the tested loop (in the example of Figure 3-41 this is L1-E) should be
reduced by the influence of the parallel line. The impedances can be read out as
primary or secondary quantities in the list of operational measured values.
If, on the other hand, the measured impedance increases when compared to the value
without parallel line compensation, the current measuring input I4 has a swapped po-
larity. After isolation of both lines and short-circuiting of the current transformer sec-
ondary circuits, the connections must be checked and rectified. Subsequently the
measurement must be repeated.
7SA6 Manual 553

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 3-41 Polarity check of I4, example with earth current of a parallel line
I4 from a Power If I4 is the earth current measured in the starpoint of a power transformer and intended
Transformer for the earth fault protection direction determination (for earthed networks), then the
Starpoint polarity check can only be carried out with a zero sequence current flowing through
the transformer. A test voltage source is required for this purpose (single-phase low
voltage source).
Caution!
Feeding of zero sequence currents via a transformer without broken delta winding.
Inadmissible heating of the transformer is possible!
Zero sequence current should only be routed via a transformer if it has a delta winding,
therefore e.g. Yd, Dy or Yy with a compensating winding.
554 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
DANGER!
Energized equipment of the power system! Capacitive coupled voltages at discon-
nected equipment of the power system !
Primary measurements must only be carried out on disconnected and earthed equip-
ment of the power system!
The configuration shown in Figure 3-42 corresponds to an earth current flowing

through the line, in other words an earth fault in the forward direction.
At least one stage of the earth fault protection must be set to be directional (address
31xx of the earth fault protection). The pickup threshold of this stage must be below
the load current flowing on the line; if necessary the pickup threshold must be reduced.
The parameters that have been changed, must be noted.
Figure 3-42 Polarity check of I4, example with earth current from a power transformer star point
After switching the test source on and off again, the direction indication must be
checked: In the fault log the messages EF Pickup and EF forward must at
least be present. If the directional pickup alarm is missing, a connection error of the
earth current connection I4 is present. If the wrong direction is indicated, the earth
current connection I4 has a swapped polarity. In the previous case the connection
must be rectified after the test source has been switched off. The measurements must
then be repeated.
If the pickup alarm is missing altogether, this may be due to the fact that the test
current is too small.
Note
If parameters were changed for this test, they must be returned to their original state
after completion of the test !
7SA6 Manual 555

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3.14 Measuring the Operating Time of the Circuit Breaker
Only for If the device is equipped with the function for synchronism and voltage check and it is
Synchronism applied, it is necessary - under asynchronous system conditions - that the operating
Check time of the circuit breaker is measured and set correctly when closing. If the synchro-
nism check function is not used or only for closing under synchronous system condi-
tions, this section is irrelevant.
For measuring the operating time a setup as shown in Figure 3-43 is recommended.
The timer is set to a range of 1 s and a graduation of 1 ms.
The circuit breaker is closed manually. At the same time the timer is started. After
closing the circuit breaker poles the voltage Usy1 or Usy2 appears and the timer is
stopped. The time displayed by the timer is the real circuit breaker closing time.
If the timer is not stopped due to an unfavourable closing moment, the attempt will be
repeated.
It is particularly favourable to calculate the mean value from several (3 to 5) successful
switching attempts.
Set the calculated time under address 239 as T-CB close (under P.System Data
1). Select the next lower settable value.
Note
The operating time of the accelerated output relays for command tripping is taken into
consideration by the device itself. The tripping command is to be allocated to such a
relay. If this is not the case, then add 3 ms to the measured circuit breaker operating
time for achieving a greater response time of the normal output relay. If high-speed
relays are used, on the other hand, you must deduct 4 ms from the measured circuit
breaker operating time.
Figure 3-43 Measuring the circuit breaker closing time
556 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.15 Checking the Teleprotection System with Distance Protection
Note
If the device is intended to operate with teleprotection, all devices used for the trans-
mission of the signals must initially be commissioned according to the corresponding
instructions.
The following section applies only for the conventional transmission procedures. It is
not relevant for usage with protection data interfaces; refer also to the subsection Test
Mode for Teleprotection Scheme with Protection Data Interface.
For the functional check of the signal transmission, the earth fault protection should be
disabled, to avoid signals from this protection influencing the tests: address 3101 FCT
EarthFltO/C = OFF.
Check for Pilot Wire The operating mode pilot wire comparison differs considerably from other teleprotec-
Comparison tion schemes as far as the type of transmission (DC closed circuit-loop) is concerned.
The examination is described in the following. If a different transmission scheme is ap-
plied, this part can be skipped.
Detailed information on the function of the pilot-wire comparison is available in Sub-
section 2.6.
For Teleprot. Dist. in address 121 Pilot wire comp must be configured and
the FCT Telep. Dis. must be switched under address 2101 ON. The protection
relays at both line ends must be operating. First, the quiescent current loop of the pilot
wire comparison is not supplied with auxiliary voltage.
A fault is simulated outside of zone Z1, but within zone Z1B. Since stage Z1B is
blocked, the distance protection is only tripped in a higher-leveled zone (usually with
T2). This check must be carried out at both line ends.
The direct voltage for the quiescent current loop of the pilot wire comparison is
switched to the line. The loop is then fed with quiescent current.
At one line end a fault is simulated outside of the first zone, but within the overreach
zone Z1B. The command is tripped to T1B. This check must be carried out at both line
ends.
Since the quiescent current loop is part of the nature of the pilot wire comparison,
these tests also check if the transmission process is performed correctly. All other
tests which are described in this Section can be passed over. However, please
observe the last margin heading Important for All Schemes!
7SA6 Manual 557

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Checking of The checking of the reverse interlocking is described below. If a different transmission
Reverse scheme is applied, this part can be skipped.
Interlocking
For more detailed information about the reverse interlocking see Section 2.6.
For Teleprot. Dist. in address 121 Rev. Interlock must be configured and
the FCT Telep. Dis. must be switched under address 2101 ON. The distance pro-
tection of the infeed and switchgears of all outgoing feeders must operate. At the be-
ginning no auxiliary voltage is fed to the line for the reverse interlocking.
The following paragraphs describe the testing in a blocked state, i.e. the pickup signals
of the outgoing devices are connected in parallel and block the tested device of the
infeed. In case of release (the NC contacts of the outgoing devices are connected in
series) the tests have to be reinterpreted respectively.
A fault is simulated within zone Z1 and overreaching zone Z1B. As a result of the
missing blocking signal, the distance protection trips after time delay T1B (slightly de-
layed).
The direct voltage for reverse interlocking is now switched to the line. The precedent
test is repeated, the result will be the same.
At each of the protection devices of the outgoing circuits, a pickup is simulated. Mean-
while, another short-circuit is simulated as described before for the distance protection
of the infeed. Now, the distance protection trips after time T1, which has a longer set-
ting.
These tests also check the proper functioning of the transmission path. All other tests
which are described in this Section can be passed over. However, please observe the
last margin heading Important for all schemes!
Checking with Prerequisites: Teleprot. Dist. is configured in address 121 to one of the compar-
Permissive ison schemes using blocking signal, i.e. POTT or Dir.Comp.Pickup or
Schemes UNBLOCKING. Furthermore, is switched in address 2101 FCT Telep. Dis. ON. Nat-
urally, the corresponding send and receive signals must also be assigned to the cor-
responding binary output and input. For the echo function, the echo signal must be al-
located separately to the transmit output!
Detailed information on the function of permissive scheme is available in Section 2.6.
A simple check of the signal transmission path from one line end is possible via the
echo circuit if these release techniques are used. The echo function must be activated
at both line ends, i.e. address 2501 FCT Weak Infeed = ECHO only; with the
setting ECHO and TRIP at the remote end of the check a tripping command may
result!
A short-circuit is simulated outside Z1, with POTT or UNBLOCKING inside Z1B, with
Dir.Comp.Pickup somewhere in forward direction. This may be done with second-
ary injection test equipment. As the device at the opposite line end does not pick up,
the echo function comes into effect there, and consequently a trip command is issued
at the line end being tested.
If no trip command appears, the signal transmission path must be checked again, es-
pecially also the assignment of the echo signals to the transmit outputs.
In case of a phase-segregated transmission the above-mentioned checks are carried
out for each phase. The correct phase allocation is also to be checked.
This test must be performed at both line ends, in the case of three terminal lines at
each end for each signal transmission path.
558 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
The functioning of the echo delay time and the derivation of the circuit breaker switch-
ing status should also be tested at this time (the functioning of the protection at the
opposite line end is tested):
The circuit breaker on the protected feeder must be opened, as must be the circuit
breaker at the opposite line end. As described above, a fault is again simulated. A
receive signal impulse delayed by somewhat more than twice the signal transmission
time appears via the echo function at the opposite line end, and the device issues a
trip command.
The circuit breaker at the opposite line end is now closed (while the isolators remain
open). After simulation of the same fault, the receive and trip command appear again.
In this case however, they are additionally delayed by the echo delay time of the
device at the opposite line end (0.04 s presetting, address 2502 Trip/Echo DELAY).
If the response of the echo delay is opposite to the sequence described here, the op-
erating mode of the corresponding binary input (H-active/L-active) at the opposite line
end must be rectified.
The circuit breaker must be opened again.
This test must be performed at both line ends, on a three terminal line at each line end
for each transmission path. Finally, please observe the last margin heading Important
for All Schemes!
Checking in Requirements: Teleprot. Dist. is configured in address 121 to one of the com-
Blocking Scheme parison schemes using blocking signal, i.e. BLOCKING. Furthermore, under address
2101 FCT Telep. Dis. ON is switched. Naturally, the corresponding send and
receive signals must also be assigned to the corresponding binary output and input.
For more details about the function of the blocking scheme refer to Subsection 2.6. In
the case of the blocking scheme, communication between the line ends is necessary.
On the transmitting end, a fault in the reverse direction is simulated, while at the re-
ceiving end a fault in Z1B but beyond Z1 is simulated. This can be achieved with a set
of secondary injection test equipment at each end of the line. As long as the transmit-
ting end is transmitting, the receiving end may not generate a trip signal, unless this
results from a higher distance stage. After the simulated fault at the transmitting line
end has been cleared, the receiving line end remains blocked for the duration of the
transmit prolongation time of the transmitting line end (Send Prolong., address
2103). If applicable, the transient blocking time of the receiving line end (TrBlk
BlockTime, address 2110) appears additionally if a finite delay time TrBlk Wait
Time (address 2109) has been set and exceeded.
for each transmission path. However, please finally observe the last margin heading
Important for all schemes!
7SA6 Manual 559

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Checking with Requirements: Teleprot. Dist. is configured in address 121 to a permissive un-
Permissive derreach transfer trip scheme, i.e. PUTT (Z1B) or PUTT (Pickup). Furthermore, in
Underreach address 2101 FCT Telep. Dis. ON is switched. Naturally, the corresponding send
Transfer Trip and receive signals must also be assigned to the corresponding binary output and
input.
Detailed information on the function of permissive underreach transfer is available in
Subsection 2.6. Communication between the line ends is necessary.
On the transmitting end, a fault in zone Z1 must be simulated. This may be done with
secondary injection test equipment.
Subsequently, on the receiving end, at PUTT (Z1B) a fault inside Z1B, but outside Z1
is simulated, at PUTT (Pickup) any fault is simulated. Tripping takes place immedi-
ately, (or in T1B), without signal transmission only in a higher distance stage. In case
of direct transfer trip an immediate trip is always executed at the receiving end.
Important for all schemes!
Important for all If the earth fault protection was disabled for the signal transmission tests, it may be re-
Schemes enabled now. If setting parameters were changed for the test (e.g. mode of the echo
function or timers for unambiguous observation of sequences), these must now be re-
set to the prescribed values.
3.3.16 Testing the Signal Transmission with Earth Fault Protection
This section is only relevant if the device is connected to a earthed system and earth
fault protection is applied. The device must therefore be provided with the earth fault
detection function according to its ordering code (16th MLFB position = 4 or 5 or 6 or
7). Which group of characteristics are to be available must have been preset during
configuration to Earth Fault O/C (address 131). Furthermore, the teleprotection
must be used for the earth fault protection (address 132 Teleprot. E/F configured
to one of the optional methods). If none of this is the case, this section is not relevant.
If the signal transmission path for the earth fault protection is the same path that was
already tested in conjunction with the distance protection according to the previous
Section, then this Section is of no consequence and may be omitted.
For the functional check of the earth fault protection signal transmission, the distance
protection should be disabled, to avoid interference of the tests by signals from the dis-
tance protection: address 1201 FCT Distance = OFF.
560 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
Checking with Requirements: Teleprot. E/F is configured in address 132 to one of the compari-
Permissive son schemes using permissive signal, i.e. Dir.Comp.Pickup or UNBLOCKING. Fur-
Schemes thermore, FCT Telep. E/F is switched ON at address 3201. Naturally, the corre-
sponding send and receive signals must also be assigned to the corresponding binary
output and input. For the echo function, the echo signal must be assigned separately
to the transmit output.
Detailed information on the function of permissive scheme is available in Section 2.8.
A simple check of the signal transmission path from one line end is possible via the
echo circuit if these release techniques are used. The echo function must be activated
at both line ends, i.e. address 2501 FCT Weak Infeed = ECHO only; with the
setting ECHO and TRIP at the remote end of the check a tripping command may
result!
An earth fault is simulated in the direction of the line. This may be done with secondary
injection test equipment. As the device at the opposite line end does not pick up, the
echo function comes into effect there, and consequently a trip command is issued at
the line end being tested.
If no trip command appears, the signal transmission path must be checked again, es-
pecially also the assignment of the echo signals to the transmit outputs.
This test must be carried out at both line ends, in the case of three terminal lines at
each end for each signal transmission path.
The functioning of the echo delay time and monitoring of the circuit breaker switching
status must also be tested at this time if this has not already been done in the previous
section (the operation of the protection at the opposite line end is checked):
The circuit breaker on the protected feeder must be opened, as must be the circuit
breaker at the opposite line end. A fault is again simulated as before. A receive signal
impulse delayed by somewhat more than twice the signal transmission time appears
via the echo function at the opposite line end, and the device issues a trip command.
The circuit breaker at the opposite line end is now closed (while the isolators remain
open). After simulation of the same fault, the receive and trip command appear again.
In this case however, they are additionally delayed by the echo delay time of the
device at the opposite line end (0.04 s presetting, address 2502 Trip/Echo DELAY).
If the response of the echo delay is opposite to the sequence described here, the op-
erating mode of the corresponding binary input (H-active/L-active) at the opposite line
end must be rectified.
The circuit breaker must be opened again.
This test must also be carried out at both line ends, in the case of three terminal lines
at each line end and for each signal transmission path. Finally, please observe the last
margin heading Important for All Schemes!
7SA6 Manual 561

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Checking in Requirements: Teleprot. E/F is configured in address 132 to one of the compari-
Blocking Scheme son schemes using blocking signal, i.e. BLOCKING. Furthermore, under address 3201
FCT Telep. E/F ON is switched. Naturally, the corresponding send and receive
signals must also be assigned to the corresponding binary output and input.
For more details about the function of the blocking scheme refer to Section 2.8. In the
case of the blocking scheme, communication between the line ends is necessary.
An earth fault in the reverse direction is simulated at the transmitting line end. Subse-
quently, a fault at the receiving end in the direction of the line is simulated. This can be
achieved with a set of secondary injection test equipment at each end of the line. As
long as the transmitting end is transmitting, the receiving end may not generate a trip
signal, unless this results from a higher distance stage. After the simulated fault at the
transmitting line end is switched off, the receiving line end remains blocked for the du-
ration of the transmit prolongation time of the transmitting line end (Send Prolong.,
address 3203). If applicable, the transient blocking time of the receiving line end
(TrBlk BlockTime, address 3210) appears additionally if a finite delay time TrBlk
Wait Time (address 3209) has been set and exceeded.
Important for All Schemes!
Important for all If the distance protection was switched off for the signal transmission tests, it may be
Schemes switched on now. If setting parameters were changed for the test (e.g. mode of the
echo function or timers for unambiguous observation of sequences), these must now
be re-set to the prescribed values.
3.3.17 Checking the Signal Transmission for Breaker Failure Protection and/or
Stub Fault Protection
If the transfer trip command for breaker failure protection or stub fault protection is to
be transmitted to the remote end, this transmission must also be checked.
To check the transmission the breaker failure protection function is initiated by a test
current (secondary) with the circuit breaker in the open position. Make sure that the
correct circuit breaker reaction takes place at the remote end.
Each transmission path must be checked on lines with more than two ends.
3.3.18 Checking the Signal Transmission for Internal and External Remote Tripping
The 7SA6 provides the possibility to transmit a remote trip signal to the opposite line
end if a signal transmission path is available for this purpose. This remote trip signal
may be derived from both an internally generated trip signal as well as from any signal
coming from an external protection or control device.
If an internal signal is used, the initiation of the transmitter must be checked. If the
signal transmission path is the same and has already been checked as part of the pre-
vious sections, it need not be checked again here. Otherwise the initiating event is
simulated and the response of the circuit breaker at the opposite line end is verified.
562 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
In the case of the distance protection, the permissive underreach scheme may be
used to trip the remote line end. The procedure is then the same as was the case for
permissive underreach (under Checking with Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip);
however the received signal causes a direct trip.
For the remote transmission, the external command input is employed on the receiv-
ing line end; it is therefore a prerequisite that: DTT Direct Trip is set in address
122 Enabled and FCT Direct Trip is set in address 2201 ON. If the signal trans-
mission path is the same and has already been checked as part of the previous sec-
tions, it need not be checked again here. A function check is sufficient, whereby the
externally derived command is executed. For this purpose the external tripping event
is simulated and the response of the circuit breaker at the opposite line end is verified.
3.3.19 Testing User-Defined Functions
The device has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, es-
pecially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be
checked.
A general procedure cannot in the nature of things be specified. Configuration of these
functions and the set value conditions must be actually known beforehand and tested.
Especially, possible interlocking conditions of the switching devices (circuit breakers,
isolators, grounding electrodes) must be observed and checked.
3.3.20 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker
The circuit breaker and tripping circuits can be conveniently tested by the device
7SA6.
The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
If the check does not produce the expected results, the cause may be established from
the text in the display of the device or the PC. If necessary, the connections of the
circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be checked:
It must be noted that the binary inputs used for the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts
must be assigned separately for the CB test. This means it is not sufficient that the
auxiliary contacts are allocated to the binary inputs No. 351 to 353, 379 and 380 (ac-
cording to the possibilities of the auxiliary contacts); additionally, the corresponding
No. 366 to 368 or 410 and/or 411 must be allocated (according to the possibilities of
the auxiliary contacts). In the CB test only the latter ones are analyzed. See also
Section 2.23.2. Furthermore, the ready state of the circuit breaker for the CB test must
be indicated to the binary input with No. 371.
7SA6 Manual 563

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3.21 Trip / Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices
Switching by Local If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test
Command already described, all configured switching devices must be switched on and off from
the device via the integrated control element. The feedback information of the CB po-
sition injected via binary inputs should be read out and compared with the actual
breaker position. For devices with graphic display this is easy to do with the control
display.
The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The
switching authority must be set in correspondence with the source of commands used.
With the switching mode, you can choose between locked and unlocked switching. In
this case, you must be aware that unlocked switching is a safety risk.
Switching from a If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system (SCADA) interface, the
Remote Control corresponding switching tests may also be checked from the substation. Please also
Centre take into consideration that the switching authority is set in correspondence with the
source of commands used.
3.3.22 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings for Test
In order to be able to test the stability of the protection during switchon procedures
also, switchon trials can also be carried out at the end. Oscillographic records obtain
the maximum information about the behaviour of the protection.
Prerequisite Along with the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protection func-
tion, the 7SA6 also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are
given to the device via the service program DIGSI, the serial interface, or a binary
input. For the latter, event >Trig.Wave.Cap. must be allocated to a binary input.
Triggering of the recording then occurs, for example, via the binary input when the pro-
tection object is energized.
An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective
element pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal oscillographic
recording, and has a number for establishing a sequence. However, these recordings
are not displayed in the fault indication buffer, as they are not fault events.
564 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.3 Commissioning
Start Test Fault To trigger test measurement recording with DIGSI, click on Test in the left part of the
Recording window. Double click in the list view the Test fault recording entry (see Figure 3-44).
Figure 3-44 Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI Example
Oscillographic recording is immediately started. During the recording, an annunciation

is output in the left area of the status line. Bar segments additionally indicate the
progress of the procedure.
The SIGRA or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the os-
cillographic data.
7SA6 Manual 565

C53000-G1176-C156-5
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device
The used terminal screws must be tightened, including those that are not used. All the
plug connectors must be correctly inserted.
Caution!
Do not apply force!
The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers
may otherwise be damaged!
The setting values should be checked again, if they were changed during the
tests.Check if protection, control and auxiliary functions to be found with the configu-
ration parameters are set correctly (Section 2.1.1, Functional Scope). All desired ele-
ments and functions must be set to ON. Keep a copy of all of the in-service settings on
a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the
clock if the element is not automatically synchronized. Further details on this subject
are described in /1/.
The indication buffers are deleted under Main Menu Annunciation Set/Re-
set, so that in the future they only contain information on actual events and states.
The numbers in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing
prior to the testing.
The counters of the operational measured values (e.g. operation counter, if available)
are reset under Main Menu Measurement Reset.
Press the ESC key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.
Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key, so that they only show real
events and states. In this context, saved output relays are reset, too. Pressing the LED
key also serves as a test for the LEDs on the front panel because they should all light
when the button is pressed. If the LEDs display states relevant by that moment, these
LEDs, of course, stay lit.
The green RUN LED must light up, whereas the red ERROR must not light up.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the
operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.
566 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Technical Data 4
This chapter presents the technical data of SIPROTEC 4 7SA6 device and its individ-
ual functions, including the limit values that must not be exceeded under any circum-
stances. The electrical and functional data of fully equipped devices are followed by
the mechanical data, with dimensional drawings.
4.1 General 569

4.2 Distance Protection 583
4.3 Power Swing Detection (with impedance pickup) (optional) 587
4.4 Teleprotection for Distance Protection 588
4.5 Earth Fault Protection in Earthed Systems (optional) 590
4.6 Earth Fault Protection Teleprotection Schemes (optional) 599
4.7 Weak-Infeed Tripping (classical) 600
4.8 Weak-infeed tripping (French Specification) 601
4.9 Protection Data Interface and Communication Topology (optional) 602
4.10 External Direct and Remote Tripping 604
4.11 Time overcurrent protection 605
4.12 Instantaneous high-current switch-onto-fault protection 608
4.13 Earth Fault Detection in a Non-Earthed System (optional) 609
4.14 Automatic Reclosure Function (optional) 610
4.15 Synchronism and voltage check (optional) 611
4.16 Voltage Protection (optional) 613
4.17 Frequency Protection (optional) 616
4.18 Fault locator 617
4.19 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) 618
4.20 Thermal overload protection (optional) 619
4.21 Monitoring Functions 621
4.22 Transmission of Binary Information (optional) 623
4.23 User Defined Functions (CFC) 624
7SA6 Manual 567

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.24 Ancillary functions 628

4.25 Dimensions 631
568 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.1 General
4.1 General
4.1.1 Analog inputs and outputs
Nominal Frequency fN 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)
Current inputs
Nominal current IN 1 A or 5 A
Power Consumption per Phase and Earth Path
- at IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
- at IN = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA
- for sensitive earth fault detection at 1A Approx. 0.05 VA
Current Overload Capability per Current Input
- thermal (rms) 100 IN for 1 s
30 IN for 10 s
4 IN continuous
- dynamic (pulse current) 250 IN (half-cycle)
Current Overload Capability for Sensitive Earth Current Input
- thermal (rms) 300 A for 1 s
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous
- dynamic (pulse current) 750 A (half-cycle)
Voltage inputs
Rated Voltage UT 80 V to 125 V (adjustable)

Power consumption per phase at 100 V 0.1 VA
Voltage Overload Capability in Voltage Path per Input
- thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
Analog output (for measured values and fault location)
Range 0 mA to 24 mA
- Connection for Flush Mounting Housing Rear panel, mounting location B or/and D
9-pole D-subminiature female connector
- Connection for Surface Mounting Housing In console housing at case bottom
or/and at the housing top
- Max. burden 350
7SA6 Manual 569

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.1.2 Power supply
Direct Voltage
Voltage supply via integrated converter

Rated voltage Uaux DC 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC 110/125/220/250 VDC
Permissible voltage ranges 19 to 58 VDC 48 to 150 VDC 88 to 300 VDC
Permissible AC ripple voltage,
15 % of the auxiliary nominal voltage
peak to peak
Power Input
- Quiescent Approx. 5 W
- energized 7SA610*-*A/E/J Approx. 8 W
7SA610*-*B/F/K Approx. 7 W
7SA6*1*-*A/E/J/M/N/P Approx. 14 W
7SA6*1*-*B/F/K Approx. 12 W
7SA6*2*-*A/E/J/M/P/R Approx. 15 W
7SA6*2*-*B/K/F/N/Q/S Approx. 20 W
7SA6*2*-*C/G/L Approx. 16 W
7SA613*-*A/M Approx. 15 W
Plus approx. 1.5 W per Interface Module
Bridging time for power supply failure/short circuit 50 ms at UAux = 48 V and UAux 110 V
20 ms at UAux = 24 V and UAux 60 V
AC voltage
Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter

Nominal Auxiliary Voltage UAux AC 115 VAC
Permissible voltage ranges 92 to 132 VAC
Power Input
- not energized Approx. 7 VA
- energized 7SA610*-*A/E/J Approx. 14 VA
7SA610*-*B/F/K Approx. 12 VA
7SA6*1*-*A/E/J/M/N/P Approx. 17 VA
7SA6*1*-*B/F/K Approx. 17 VA
7SA6*2*-*A/E/J/M/P/R Approx. 20 VA
7SA6*2*-*B/K/F/N/Q/S Approx. 23 VA
7SA6*2*-*C/G/L Approx. 21 VA
7SA613*-*A/M Approx. 20 VA
Plus approx. 1.5 W per Interface Module
Bridging time for failure/short circuit of alternating 50 ms
auxiliary voltage
570 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.1 General
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Inputs
Variant Quantity
7SA610*-*A/E/J 5 (configurable)
7SA610*-*B/F/K 7 (configurable)
7SA61/31*-*A/E/J/M/N/P 13 (configurable)
7SA61/31*-*B/F/K 20 (configurable)
7SA61/32*-*A/E/J/M/P/R 21 (configurable)
7SA61/32*-*B/F/K/N/Q/S 29 (configurable)
7SA61/32*-*C/G/L 33 (configurable)
7SA613*-*A/M 21 (configurable)
7SA641*-*A/J/M/P 13 (configurable)
7SA641*-*B/K 20 (configurable)
7SA642*-*A/J/M/R 21 (configurable)
7SA642*-*B/K/N/S 29 (configurable)
7SA642*-*C/L 33 (configurable)
Rated voltage range 24 VDC to 250 VDC, in 3 ranges, bipolar
Switching thresholds Adjustable with jumpers

- for rated voltages 24/48 VDC and 60/110/125 VDC Uhigh 19 VDC
(pu = pickup)
Ulow 10 VDC
- for rated voltages 110/125/220/250 VDC Uhigh 88 VDC
(pu = pickup)
Ulow 44 VDC
- for rated voltages 220/250 VDC Uhigh 176 VDC
(pu = pickup)
Ulow 88 VDC
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA
independent of the control voltage
Maximum permissible voltage 300 VDC
Impulse filter on input 220 nF coupling capacitance at 220 V with recovery time >
60 ms
7SA6 Manual 571

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Binary outputs
Signalling/Trip Relays (see also terminal assignments in Appendix A.2))

Quantity and Data according to the order variant (allocatable)
Order Variant UL Listed NO Contact NO Contact NO/NC NO Contact High-duty
(normal)1) (fast)1) (switch (high- relay2)
selectable)1) speed)1)
7SA610*-*A/E/J x 7 - 1 - -
7SA610*-*B/F/K x 5 - - - -
7SA6*1*-*A/E/J x 7 7 2 - -
7SA6*1*-*B/F/K x 8 - - - 4
7SA6*1*-*M/N/P x 7 3 1 5 -
7SA6*2*-*A/E/J x 14 7 3 - -
7SA6*2*-*B/F/K x 21 7 4 - -
7SA6*2*-*M/P/R x 14 3 2 5 -
7SA6*2*-*N/Q/S x 21 3 3 5 -
7SA6*2*-*C/G/L x 11 - - - 8
7SA613*-*A - 14 7 3 - -
7SA613*-*M - 14 3 2 5 -
Switching capability MAKE 1000 W/VA 1000 W/VA -
Switching capability BREAK 30 W/VA 1000 W/VA -
40 W resistive -
25 W/VA at L/R 50 ms -
Max. switching capability for 30 s
At 48 V to 250 V - 1000 W
At 24 V - 500 W
Switching Voltage
DC 250 V
AC 250 V 200 V 250 V
(max.)
Permissible current per contact (continuous) 5A -
Permissible current per contact (close and 30 A for 0.5 s (NO contact)
hold)
Permissible total current on common path 5 A continuous -
30 A for 0.5 s -
Permissible relative closing time - 1%
Operating time, approx. 8 ms 5 ms 8 ms 1 ms -
Alarm relay 1) With 1 NC contact or 1 NO contact (switchable)

Make/break capacity MAKE 1000 W/VA
BREAK 30 VA
40 W resistive
25 VA at L/R 50 ms
Switching voltage 250 V
Permissible current per contact 5 A continuous
30 A for 0.5 s
1) UL-listed with the following Nominal Values:
572 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.1 General
Signalling/Trip Relays (see also terminal assignments in Appendix A.2))

Quantity and Data according to the order variant (allocatable)
Order Variant UL Listed NO Contact NO Contact NO/NC NO Contact High-duty
(normal)1) (fast)1) (switch (high- relay2)
selectable)1) speed)1)
120 VAC Pilot duty, B300
240 VAC Pilot duty, B300
240 VAC 5 A General Purpose
24 VDC 5 A General Purpose
48 VDC 0.8 A General Purpose
240 VDC 0.1 A General Purpose
120 VAC 1/6 hp (4.4 FLA)
240 VAC 1/2 hp (4.9 FLA)
2) UL-listed with the following Nominal Values:
240 VDC 1.6 FLA
120 VDC 3.2 FLA
60 VDC 5.5 FLA
4.1.4 Communication Interfaces
Protection Data Interface
See Section 4.9 Protection Data Interfaces and Communication Topology
Operating Interface
Connection Front side, non-isolated, RS232,

9-pin D-subminiature female connector for connection of a PC
Operation With DIGSI
Transmission speed Min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud;
Factory Setting: 38400 Baud; Parity: 8E1
Transmission distance 15 m / 50 feet
7SA6 Manual 573

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Service/modem interface
RS232/RS485 Isolated interface for data transfer

Acc. to ordered variant
Operation With DIGSI
RS232/RS485
Connection for flush mounted case Rear panel, mounting location C,
9-pin D-subminiature female connector;
Shielded data cable
Connection for surface mounted case In console housing on the bottom side;
9-pin D-subminiature female connector;
Shielded data cable
Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission rate Min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud
Factory setting 38400 Baud
RS232
Maximum transmission distance 15 m
RS485
Maximum transmission distance 1,000 m
System Interface (optional)
RS232/RS485/FO Isolated interface for data transfer to a control terminal

Profibus DP RS485/Profibus
DP FO
Profibus FMS RS485/Profibus
FMS FO DNP3.0 RS485
DNP3.0 Fibre Optical Link
Ethernet EN100
acc. to ordered version
RS232
Connection for panel flush mounting Rear panel, slot B,
housing 9-pin D-subminiature female connector
Connection for panel surface mounting In the housing on the case bottom
Transmission speed Min. 4800 Baud; max. 38400 Baud
Factory setting 19200 Baud
Transmission distance Max. 15 m / 50 feet
RS485
Connection for panel surface mounting In console housing at case bottom
Transmission speed Min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
Factory setting 19200 Bd
Transmission distance Max. 1000 m / 3280 feet / 0.62 miles
574 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.1 General
Fibre optic cable (FO)

FO connector type ST connector
Connection for panel flush mounting Rear panel, mounting location B
housing
housing
Optical wavelength = 820 nm
Laser Class 1 according to EN 60825-1/-2 Using glass fibre 50/125 m or
for use of FO 62.5/125 m
Permissible link signal attenuation Max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 m
Transmission distance Max. 1.5 km / 0.93 miles
Character idle state Selectable: factory setting Light off
Profibus RS485 (FMS and DP)
Transmission speed Up to 12 MBd
Transmission distance 1000 m / 3280 feet at 93.75 kBd
500 m / 1640 feet at 187.5 kBd
200 m / 1656 feet at 1.5 MBd
100 m / 328 feet at 12 MBd
Profibus FO (FMS and DP)
FO connector type ST connector single ring / double ring
FMS: depending on ordered version;
DP: only double ring available
Connection for panel flush mounting Rear panel, mounting location B
housing
Connection for panel surface mounting Please use version with Profibus RS485 in
housing the console housing as well as separate
electrical/optical converter.
Transmission speed Conversion by means of external OLM up
to 1.5 MBaud
500 kBd for normal version
57600 Baud with detached operator
panel
Recommended transmission rate: > 500 kBd
Laser Class 1 according to EN 60825-1/-2 Using glass fibre 50/125 m or
for use of FO 62.5/125 m
Permissible link signal attenuation Max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 ma
Transmission distance between two 2m with plastic fibre
modules at redundant optical ring topolo- 500 Kbits/s max. 1.6 km (5,250 ft.)
gy and optical fiber 62.5/125 m 1500 Kbits/s 530 m (1,760 ft.)
Neutral light position (status for "No char- Light OFF
acter")
Max. number of modules in optical rings at 41
500 kB/s or 1500 kB/s
7SA6 Manual 575

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
DNP3.0 RS485
Connection for flush-mounted housing Rear panel, slot B,
9-pole D-subminiature female connector
Connection for Panel Surface-Mounted In console housing
Housing
Test Voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed Up to 19200 Baud
Bridgeable distance Max. 1 km
DNP3.0 Optical Fibre Link
FO connector type ST-connector receiver / transmitter
Connection for panel flush-mounted Rear panel, slot B
housing
Connection for panel surface-mounted In console housing
housing
Transmission speed Up to 19200 Baud
Laser class 1 according to EN60825-1/-2 Using glass fibre 50/125 m or
Using glass fibre 62.5/125 m
Permissible optical signal attenuation Max. 8 dB, with glass fibre 62.5/125 m
Bridgeable distance Max. 1.5 km
Ethernet electrical (EN 100) for
IEC 61850 and DIGSI Connection for panel flush-mounting Rear panel, slot B
housing 2 x RJ45 female connector
100BaseT acc. to IEEE802.3
Connection for panel surface mounting anticipated 02/2005
housing
Test voltage (connector) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed 100 Mbits/s
Transmission distance 20 m (67 ft.)
Time Synchronisation Interface
Time synchronization DCF77/IRIG B signal (telegram format IRIG-B000)

Connection for panel flush mounting housing Rear panel, slot A
9-pin D-subminiature female connector
Connection for surface mounted case At the double-deck terminal on the case bottom
Signal nominal voltages Selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
Signal levels and burdens DCF77/IRIG-B:

Nominal Signal Voltage
5V 12 V 24 V
UIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V
UILow 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA
IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA
RI 890 at UI = 4 V 1930 at UI = 8.7 V 3780 at UI = 17 V
640 at UI = 6 V 1700 at UI = 15.8 V 3560 at UI = 31 V
576 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.1 General
4.1.5 Electrical tests
Specifications
Standards: IEC 60255 (product standards)

IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2
UL 508
VDE 0435
For more standards see also individual functions
Insulation tests
Standards: IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1

High voltage test (routine test) 2.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz
All circuits except power supply, Binary Inputs, High
Speed Outputs, Communication Interface and Time Syn-
chronization Interfaces
High voltage test (routine test) 3.5 kVDC
Auxiliary voltage, binary inputs and high speed outputs
High voltage test (routine test) 500 V (rms), 50 Hz
only isolated communication and time synchronization
interfaces
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak), 1.2/50 s, 0.5 Ws, 3 positive and 3 negative im-
All Circuits Except Communication and Time Synchroni- pulses in intervals of 5 s
zation Interfaces, Class III
EMC Tests for Immunity (type tests)
Standards: IEC 60255-6 and -22 (product standards)

EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard)
VDE 0435 part 301DIN VDE 0435-110
High frequency test 2.5 kV (Peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s; 400 surges per s; test du-
IEC 60255-22-1, Class III ration 2 s; Ri = 200
and VDE 0435 Section 303, Class III
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge, both polarities;
IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV 150 pF; Ri = 330
and IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Irradiation with HF field, frequency sweep 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz: 80 % AM; 1 kHz
IEC 60255-22-3, Class III 10 V/m; 800 MHz to 960 MHz: 80 % AM; 1 kHz
IEC 61000-4-3, Class III 20 V/m; 1.4 GHz to 2.0 GHz 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Irradiation with HF field, single frequencies
IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 61000-4-3, Class III 10 V/m
amplitude-modulated 80; 160; 450; 900 MHz; 80 % AM 1kHz; duty cycle > 10 s
900 MHz; 50 % PM, repetition frequency 200 Hz
pulse-modulated
Fast transient disturbances 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms; repetition rate 300
Burst IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4, Class IV ms; both polarities: Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min
High energy surge voltages (SURGE), Impulse: 1.2/50 s
IEC 61000-4-5 installation Class 3
- Auxiliary voltage Common mode: 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F
Diff. mode: 1 kV; 2 ; 18 F
Analog measuring inputs, binary inputs, relay outputs Common mode: 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
diff. mode: 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F
7SA6 Manual 577

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Line conducted HF, amplitude modulated 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
IEC 61000-4-6, Class III
Power system frequency magnetic field
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
IEC 61000-4-8, Class IV 30 A/m; continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
Oscillatory surge withstand capability 2.5 kV (Peak); 1 MHz; = 15 s; 400 Surges per s; test du-
IEEE Std C37.90.1 ration 2 s; Ri = 200
Fast transient surge withstand cap. 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms; repetition rate
IEEE Std C37.90.1 300 ms; both polarities: Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min
Radiated electromagnetic interference 35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz
IEEE Std C37.90.2
Damped oscillations IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz,
10 MHz and 50 MHz, Ri = 200
EMC tests for noise emission (type test)
Standard: EN 61000-6-3 (generic standard)

Radio noise voltage to lines, only auxiliary voltage IEC- 150 kHz to 30 MHz
CISPR 22 Limit class B
Interference field strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B
Harmonic currents on the network lead at 230 VAC Class A limits are observed.
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations and flicker on the network incoming Limits are observed
feeder at 230 V AC
IEC 61000-3-3
578 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.1 General
4.1.6 Mechanical stress tests
Vibration and shock stress during stationary operation
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068

Oscillation Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude;
IEC 60068-2-6 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 5 g acceleration, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068-2-27 each 3 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-3, Class 1 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis)
IEC 60068-3-3 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude (vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (horizontal axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (vertical axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and shock stress during transport
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068

Oscillation Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm Amplitude;
IEC 60068-2-6 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60068-2-27 each 3 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks each in both directions of the 3 axes
7SA6 Manual 579

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Climatic tests
Standards: IEC 60255-6

Type tested (acc. IEC 60086-2-1 and -2, Test Bd, 25 C to +85 C
Admissible temporary operating temperature (tested 20 C to +70 C or 4 F to +158 F (legibility of display may
for 96 h) be restricted from +55 C or 131 F)
Recommended for permanent operation (according to 5 C to +55 C or 23 F to +131 F
IEC 60255-6) If max. half of the inputs and outputs are subjected to the
max. permissible values
Limit temperatures for storage 25 C to +55 C or 13 F to +131 F
Limit temperatures during transport 25 C to +70 C or 13 F to +158 F
Storage and transport of the device with factory packaging!
1)Limit temperatures for normal operation (i.e. output 20 C to +70 C or 4 F to +158 F

relays not energized)
1)Limit temperatures under maximum load (max. cont. 5 C to +55 C or 23 F to +131 F for 1/3 housing
admissible input and output values) 5 C to +40 C or 23 F to +104 F for 1/2, 2/3 and 1/1
housing
1) UL-certified according to Standard 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
Humidity
Admissible humidity Annual average 75 % relative humidity;

On 56 days of the year up to 93% relative humidity. Conden-
sation must be avoided in operation!
It is recommended that all devices be installed so that they are not exposed to direct sunlight nor subject to large fluc-
tuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.
4.1.8 Service conditions
The protection device is designed for installation in normal relay rooms and plants, so that electromagnetic immunity
is ensured if installation is done properly.
In addition the following is recommended:
Contacts and relays operating within the same cabinet or on the same relay board with digital protection equipment,
should be in principle provided with suitable surge suppression components.
For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables shall be shielded with a conductive
shield earthed at both ends. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special measures are normally re-
quired.
For substations with lower operating voltages, no special measures are normally required. When removed, many
components are electrostatically endangered; when handling the EEC standards (standards for Electrostatically
Endangered Components) must be observed. The modules, boards, and device are not endangered when the
device is completely assembled.
4.1.9 Specifications
580 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.1 General
UL Listing UL Recognition
7SA6*0*-*A***-**** 7SA6***-*J***-****
7SA6*1*-*A***-**** 7SA6***-*K***-****
7SA6*2*-*A***-**** 7SA6***-*L***-****
7SA6***-*B***-**** 7SA641*-*P***-****
7SA6***-*C***-**** 7SA6***-*R***-****
7SA6***-*E***-**** 7SA6***-*S***-****
7SA6***-*F***-****
7SA6***-*G***-**** Models with threaded termi- Models with plugin termi-
7SA6***-*Q***-**** nals nals
7SA6*1*-*M***-****
7SA6*2*-*M***-****
7SA6***-*N***-****
7SA641*-*P***-****
7SA612*-*P***-****
7SA631*-*P***-****
7SA612*-*P***-****
7SA6 Manual 581

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.1.10 Constructions
Housing 7XP20
Dimensions See dimensional drawings, Section 4.25
Variant Housing Size Weight

(for maximum
number of compo-
nents)
1/ 5 kg / 11.02 lb
3
7SA61 1
/2 6 kg / 13.23 lb
For panel flush mounting 2
/3 8 kg / 17.64 lb
1/ 10 kg / 22.04 lb
1
1
/3 9.5 kg / 20.94 lb
1
For panel surface mounting /2 11 kg / 24.24 lb
1/ 19 kg / 41.88 lb
1
1
7SA63 /2 6 kg / 13.23 lb
For panel flush mounting 1/
1 10 kg / 22.04 lb
1/ 11 kg / 24.24 lb
2
For panel surface mounting 1
/1 19 kg / 41.88 lb
Mounting with detached operator panel 1/ 8 kg / 17.64 lb
7SA64 2
1
Mounting with detached operator panel /1 12 kg / 26.45 lb
Detached operator panel 2.5 kg / 5.51 lb
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529

For equipment of the panel surface mounting housing IP 51
for device in flush mounted case and in model with detached operator panel
Front IP 51
Rear IP 50
For human safety IP 2x with cover
UL-certification conditions For use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1 Enclosure
582 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Earth Impedance Ratio
RE/RL -0.33 to 7.00 Increments 0.01

XE/XL -0.33 to 7.00 Increments 0.01
Separate for first and higher zones
K0 0.000 to 4.000 Increments 0.001
PHI (K0) -135.00 to +135.00
Separate for first and higher zones
The matching factors for earth impedance are valid also for fault locating.
Mutual Impedance Ratio
RM/RL 0.00 to 8.00 Increments 0.01

XM/XL 0.00 to 8.00 Increments 0.01
The matching factors for the mutual impedance ratio are valid also for fault locating.
Phase Preferences
For double earth fault in earthed net Block leading phase-earth

Block lagging phase-earth
Release all associated loops
Release only phase-to-earth loops
Release of phase-to-phase loops
For double earth fault in isolated or resonant-earthed L3(L1) acyclic
systems L1(L3) acyclic
L2(L1) acyclic
L1(L2) acyclic
L3(L2) acyclic
L2(L3) acyclic
L3(L1) acyclic
L1(L3) acyclic
All associated loops
Earth Fault Detection
Earth current 3I0> for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A

for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A
Earth voltage 3U0> 1 V to 100 V; Increments 1 V
Dropout to pickup ratio Approx. 0.95
Measuring tolerances for sinusoidal measured values 5 %
7SA6 Manual 583

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Pickup
Overcurrent Pickup
Overcurrent Iph>> for IN = 1 A 0.25 A to 10.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for IN = 5 A 1.25 A to 50.00 A
Measuring tolerances for sinusoidal measured values 5 %
Voltage and angle-dependent current pickup (U/I/) (selectable)
Characteristic Different stages with settable inclinations
Minimum current Iph> for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A
Current in fault angle range I for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 8.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 40.00 A
Undervoltage phase-earth Uphe 20 V to 70 V Increments 1 V
(segregated for Iph>, I> and Iph>>)
Undervoltage phase-phase Uphph 40 V to 130 V Increments 1 V
(segregated for Iph>, I> and Iph>>)
Lower threshold angle > 30 to 60 In increments of 1
Upper threshold angle < 90 to 120 In increments of 1
Dropout to pickup ratio
Iph>, I> Approx. 0.95
Uphe, Uphph Approx. 1.05
Measuring tolerances for sinusoidal measured values
Values of U, I 5%
Angle 3
Impedance starting (selectable)
Minimum current Iph> for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A
The thresholds of the zone set to the highest level are relevant taking into consideration the corresponding direction
Dropout/pickup ratio Approx. 1.05
584 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Distance Measurement
Characteristic Polygonal or circular characteristic (can be set); 5 independent

zones and 1 controlled zone
Setting ranges polygon:
IPh> = min. current, phases for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A
X = reactance reach for IN = 1 A 0.050 up to 600.000 Increments 0.001
for IN = 5 A 0.010 up to 120.000
R = resistance tolerance phase-phase for IN = 1 A 0.050 up to 600.000 Increments 0.001
for IN = 5 A 0.010 up to 120.000
RE = resistance tolerance phase-earth for IN = 1 A 0.050 up to 600.000 Increments 0.001
for IN = 5 A 0.010 up to 120.000
Line = line angle 10 to 89 In increments of 1
Dist = angle of distance protection characteristic 30 to 90 In increments of 1
Pol = tilt angle for 1st zone 0 to 30 In increments of 1
Setting ranges for circle:
IPh> = min. current, phases for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A
Zr = impedance reach for IN = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments 0.001
for IN = 5 A 0.010 to 120.000
= Threshold angle for the increased resistance tol- 10 to 90 Increments 1
erance
Determination of Direction
For all types of faults With phase-true, memorized or cross-polarized voltages
Directional sensitivity Dynamically unlimited
Stationary approx. 1 V
Each zone can be set to operate in forward or reverse direction, non-directional or ineffective.
Load trapezoid:
Rload = minimum load resistance for IN = 1 A 0.100 to 600.000 ; Increments 0.001
for IN = 5 A 0.020 to 120.000 ;
load = maximum load angle 20 to 60 In increments of 1
Dropout to pickup ratio
- Currents Approx. 0.95
- Impedances Approx. 1.06
Measured value correction Mutual impedance matching for parallel lines (ordering option)
Measuring tolerances for sinusoidal measured values
7SA6 Manual 585

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Times
Shortest trip time Approx. 17 ms (50 Hz) /15 ms (60 Hz) with fast relay and
approx. 12 ms (50 Hz) /10 ms (60 Hz) with high-speed relay
Dropout time Approx. 30 ms
Stage timers 0.00 s to 30.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
for all zones; separate time setting
possibilities for single-phase and
multi-phase faults for the zones Z1,
Z2, and Z1B
Time expiry tolerances 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
The set times are pure delay times.
Emergency operation
In case of measured voltage failure, e.g. voltage transformer mcb trip see Section 4.11 Time Overcurrent Protection
586 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Power swing detection Rate of the impedance vector and observation of the path
curve
Maximum power swing frequency Approx. 7 Hz
Power swing blocking programs Block 1st zone only
Block higher zones
Block 1st and 2nd zone
Block all zones
Power swing trip Trip following instable power swings
(out-of-step)
Trip time delay after power swing block 0.08 to 5.00 s Increments 0.01 s
7SA6 Manual 587

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.4 Teleprotection for Distance Protection
Mode
For two line ends With one channel for each direction or
with three channels for each direction for phase segregated
transmission
For three line ends With one channel for each direction or connection
Underreach Transfer Trip Schemes
Method Transfer trip with overreaching zone Z1B

PUTT (Pickup)
Direct transfer trip
Send signal prolongation 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Underreach Schemes via Protection Data Interface (optional)
Phase-segregated for two or three line ends

Method Transfer trip with overreaching zone Z1B
Overreach Schemes
Method Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) (with overreach-

ing zone Z1B)
Dir. Comp. Pickup
Unblocking (with overreaching zone Z1B)
Blocking (with overreaching zone Z1B)
Pilot wire comp.
Rev. Interlock
Enable delay 0.000 s to 30.000 s Increments 0.001 s
Transient blocking time 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Wait time for transient blocking 0.00 s to 30.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Echo delay time 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Echo impulse duration 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
The set time is a pure delay time.
588 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.4 Teleprotection for Distance Protection
Overreach Schemes via Protection Data Interface (optional)

Method Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) (with overreach-
ing zone Z1B)
The set time is a pure delay time.
7SA6 Manual 589

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.5 Earth Fault Protection in Earthed Systems (optional)
Characteristics
Definite time stages 3I0>>>, 3I0>>, 3I0>

Inverse time stage (IDMT) 3I0P
one of the characteristics according to Figure
4-1 to Figure 4-4 can be selected
Voltage-dependent stage (U0 inverse) Characteristics according to Figure 4-5
Zero-sequence power protection Characteristics according to Figure 4-6
Very High Set Stage
High current pickup 3I0>>> for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A

for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A
Delay T3I0>>> 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Dropout ratio Approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.5
Pickup time (fast relays/high-speed relays) Approx. 30/25 ms
Tolerances Current 3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current
Time 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
The set times are pure delay times
High-current stage
Pickup value 3I0>> for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A

for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A
Delay T3I0>> 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Pickup time (fast relays/high-speed relays) Approx. 30/25 ms
590 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Overcurrent Stage
Pickup value 3I0> for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A

or
0.003 A to 25.000 A Increments 0.001 A
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A Increments 0.01 A
or
Delay T3I0> 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Pickup time (fast relays/high-speed relays)
(1.5 set value) Approx. 40/35 ms
(2.5 set value) Approx. 30/25 ms
Inverse Current Stage (IEC)
Pickup value 3I0P for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A

or
or
Time factor T3I0P 0.05 s to 3.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Additional time delay T3I0P add 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Characteristics See Figure 4-1
Tolerances Current Pickup at 1.05 I/3I0P 1.15
Time 5 % 15 ms for 2 I/3I0P 20 and T3I0P/s 1
Inverse Current Stage (ANSI)

or
or
Time factor D3I0P 0.50 s to 15.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
or (ineffective)
Characteristics See Figure 4-2 and 4-3
Tolerances Current Pickup at 1.05 I/3I0P 1.15
Time 5 % 15 ms for 2 I/3I0P 20 and D3I0P/s 1
7SA6 Manual 591

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Inverse Current Stage (logarithmic inverse)

or
or
Start current factor 3I0P FACTOR 1.0 to 4.0 Increments 0.1
Time factor T3I0P 0.05 s to 15.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Maximum time T3I0P max 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Minimum time T3I0P min 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Tolerances inv. 5 % 15 ms for 2 I/3I0P 20 and T3I0P/s 1
Times def. 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Zero Sequence Voltage Stage

or
or
Pickup value 3U0> 1.0 V to 10.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Voltage factor U0 inv. minimal 0.1 V to 5.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Additional time delay Tdirectional 0.00 s to 32.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Tnon-direction- 0.00 s to 32.00 s Increments 0.01 s
al
Tolerances times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Dropout ratio Current Approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.5
Voltage Approx 0.95 for 3U0 1 V
Zero Sequence Output Stage

or
0.003 A to 25,000 A Increments 0.001 A
or
0.015 A to 125,000 A Increments 0.001 A
Pickup value S FORWARD for IN = 1 A 0.1 VA to 10.0 VA Increments 0.1 VA
for IN = 5 A 0.5 VA to 50.0 VA
Additional time delay T3I0P add 0.00 s to 30.00 s; Steps 0.01 s
Characteristics (see Figure 4-6)
Tolerances pickup values 1 % of set value at sensitive earth current transformer
Tolerances times 5 % of set value or 15 ms at sensitive earth current transformer
6 % of set value or 15 ms at normal earth current transformer
/ without earth current transformer
592 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Inrush stabilization
Second harmonic content for inrush 10 % to 45 % Increments 1 %

Referred to fundamental wave
Inrush blocking is cancelled above for IN = 1 A 0.50 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for IN = 5 A 2.50 A to 125.00 A
Inrush restraint may be switched effective or ineffective for each individual stage.
Determination of direction
Each zone can be set to operate in forward or reverse direction, non-directional or ineffective.
Direction measurement With IE (= 3 I0) and 3 U0 and IY or I2 and U2
with IE (= 3 I0) and 3 U0 and IY
With IE (= 3 I0) and IY (starpoint current of a power transformer)
With I2 and U2 (negative sequence quantities)
With zero-sequence power
Limit values
Displacement voltage 3U0> 0.5 V to 10.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Starpoint current of a power transformer for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 1.00 A Increments 0.01 A
IY> for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 5.00 A
Negative sequence current 3I2> for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 1.00 A Increments 0.01 A

for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 5.00 A
Negative sequence voltage 3U2> 0.5 V to 10.0 V Increments 0.1 V
"Forward" angle
Capacitive alpha 0 to 360 Increments 1
Inductive beta 0 to 360 Increments 1
Tolerances pickup values 10 % of set value or 5 % of nominal current or 0.5 V
Tolerance forward angle 5
Re-orientation time after direction change Approx. 30 ms
7SA6 Manual 593

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Figure 4-1 Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent stage, acc. IEC (phases and earth)
594 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 4-2 Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent stage, acc. ANSI/IEEE (phases and earth)
7SA6 Manual 595

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Figure 4-3 Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent stage, acc. ANSI/IEEE (phases and earth)
596 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure 4-4 Trip time characteristic of the inverse time overcurrent stage with
logarithmic-inverse characteristic
Logarithmic inverse t = T3I0Pmax T3I0Pln(I/3I0P)
Note: For I/3I0P > 35, the time for I/3I0P = 35 applies
Figure 4-5 Trip time characteristics of the zero sequence voltage protection U0 inverse
7SA6 Manual 597

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Figure 4-6 Tripping characteristics of the zero-sequence power protection
This characteristic applies for: Sref = 10 VA and T3IOPAdd.T_DELAY = 0 s.
598 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.6 Earth Fault Protection Teleprotection Schemes (optional)
4.6 Earth Fault Protection Teleprotection Schemes (optional)
Mode
For two line ends One channel for each direction or three channels each direc-
tion for phase-segregated transmission
For three line ends With one channel for each direction or connection
Overreach Schemes
Method Dir. comp. pickup

Directional unblocking scheme
Directional blocking scheme
Overreach Schemes via Protection Data Interface (optional)

Method Dir. comp. pickup
7SA6 Manual 599

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.7 Weak-Infeed Tripping (classical)
Operating mode
Phase segregated undervoltage detection after reception of a carrier signal from the remote end
Undervoltage
Setting value UPhE< 2 V to 70 V Increments 1 V

Pickup tolerance 5 % of setting value, or 0.5 V
Times

Echo blocking duration after echo 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Pickup tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
600 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.8 Weak-infeed tripping (French Specification)
4.8 Weak-infeed tripping (French Specification)
Operating Mode
Phase segregated undervoltage detection after reception of a carrier signal from the remote end
Undervoltage
Setting value UPhE< 0.10 to 1.00 Increments 0.01

Dropout/pickup ratio Approx. 1.1
Pickup tolerance 5%
Times
Receive prolongation 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s

Extension time 3I0> 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Alarm time 3I0> 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Delay (single-pole) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Delay (multi-pole) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Time constant 1 s to 60 s Increments 1 s
Pickup tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
7SA6 Manual 601

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.9 Protection Data Interface and Communication Topology (optional)
Protection Data Interfaces
Quantity 1
- Connection optical fibre Mounting location D
For flush-mounted case On the rear side
For panel surface-mounted case At the inclined housing on the case bottom
Connection modules for protection data interface, depending on the ordering version:
Module in the Connector Type Fibre Type Optical Perm. path Distance, maximum
Device wavelength attenuation
FO5 1) ST Multimode 820 nm 8 dB 1.5 km (0.93 miles)
62.5/125 m
FO6 2) ST Multimode 820 nm 16 dB 3.5 km (2.2 miles)
62.5/125 m
FO7 1) ST Monomode 1300 nm 7 dB 10 km (7.9 miles)
9/125 m
FO8 1) FC Monomode 1300 nm 18 dB 35 km (21.2 miles)
9/125 m
FO17 1) LC Monomode 1300 nm 13 dB 24 km (15 miles)
9/125 m
FO18 1) LC Monomode 1300 nm 29 dB 60 km (37.5 miles)
9/125 m
FO19 1) LC Monomode 1550 nm 29 dB 100 km (62.5 miles)
9/125 m
1) Laser class 1 acc. to EN 60825-1/-2 using glass fibre 62.5/125 m

2) Laser class 3A acc. to EN 60825-1/-2
- Character idle state Light Off
602 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.9 Protection Data Interface and Communication Topology (optional)
Protection Data Communication
Direct connection:
Transmission rate 512 kbit/s
Fibre type
Optical wavelength
Refer to table above
Permissible link signal attenuation
Transmission distance
Connection via communication networks:
Communication converter See Appendix A.1, Subsection Accessories
Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kbit/s;
X.21 with 64 or 128 or 512 kbit/s
S0 (ISDN) with 64 kBit/s
Pilot wires with 128 Kbits/s;
Connection to communication converter See table above under module FO5
Transmission rate 64 kbit/s with G703.1
512 kbit/s or 128 kBit/s or 64 kbit/s with X.21
64 kBit/s with S0 (ISDN)
128 kBit/s with pilot wires
Max. runtime time 0.1 ms to 30 ms Increments 0.1 ms
Max. runtime difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms Increments 0.001 ms
Transmission accuracy CRC 32 according to CCITT or ITU
7SA6 Manual 603

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.10 External Direct and Remote Tripping
External Trip of the Local Breaker
Operating time, total Approx. 11 ms

Trip time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
604 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.11 Time overcurrent protection
Operating Modes
As Emergency Overcurrent Protection or Back-up Overcurrent Protection:

Emergency overcurrent protection Operates on failure of the measured voltage,
On trip of a voltage transformer mcb (via binary input)
For pickup of the Fuse Failure Monitor
Back-up overcurrent protection Operates independent of any events
Characteristics
Definite dime stages (definite) IPh>>,3I0>>, IPh>, 3I0>

Inverse time stages (IDMT) IP, 3I0P; one of the characteristics according to
Figure 4-1 to 4-3 (see Technical Data Section Earth Fault Pro-
tection)
can be selected
High-set current stages
Pickup value IPh>> (phases) for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A

or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 125.00 A
or (ineffective)
Pickup value 3I0>> (earth) for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A
or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A
or (ineffective)
Pickup value IPh>> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Delay T3I0>> (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Pickup times (fast relays/high-speed relays) Approx. 25/20 ms
Dropout times Approx. 30 ms
Tolerances Currents 3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current
Times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
7SA6 Manual 605

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Overcurrent stages
Pickup value IPh> (phases) for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A

or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 125.00 A
or (ineffective)
Pickup value 3I0> (earth) for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A
or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A
or (ineffective)
Delay TIPh> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Delay T3I0> (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Tolerances Currents 3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current
Inverse time stages (IEC)
Pickup value IP (phases) for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A

or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A
or (ineffective)
Pickup value 3I0P (earth) for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A
or (ineffective)
Time factors TIP (phas- 0.05 s to 3.00 s Increments 0.01 s
es) or (ineffective)
T3I0P 0.05 s to 3.00 s Increments 0.01 s
(earth) or (ineffective)
Additional time delays TIP delayed 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
(phases)
T3I0P delayed 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
(earth)
Tolerances currents Pickup values at 1.05 I/IP 1.15
or 1.05 I/3I0P 1.15
Tolerances times 5 % 15 ms for 2 I/IP 20 and TIP/s 1
or 2 I/3I0P 20 and T3I0P/s 1
Defined times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
606 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Inverse time stages (ANSI)
Pickup value IP (phases) for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A

or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A
or (ineffective)
Pickup value 3I0P (earth) for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 20.00 A
or (ineffective)
Time factors DIP (phas- 0.50 s to 15.00 s Increments 0.01 s
es) or (ineffective)
D3I0P 0.50 s to 15.00 s Increments 0.01 s
(earth) or (ineffective)
Additional time delays TIP delayed 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
(phases)
T3I0P delayed 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
(earth)
Characteristics See Figure 4-2 and 4-3
Tolerances currents Pickup values at 1.05 I/IP 1.15
or 1.05 I/3I0P 1.15
Tolerances times 5 % 15 ms for 2 I/IP 20 and DIP/s 1
or 2 I/3I0P 20 and D3I0P/s 1
Defined times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Stub fault protection
Pickup value IPh>>> (phases) for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A

or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 125.00 A
or (ineffective)
Pickup value 3I0>>> (earth) for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A
or (ineffective)
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 125.00 A
or (ineffective)
Delays TIPh>>> 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
T3I0>>> 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or (ineffective)
Dropout to pickup ratio Approx. 0.95 for I/IN 0.5
Tolerances currents Currents 3 % of setting value or 1 % nominal current
7SA6 Manual 607

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.12 Instantaneous high-current switch-onto-fault protection
Pickup
Pickup value I>>> for IN = 1 A 1.00 A to 25.00 A Increments 0.01 A

for IN = 5 A 5.00 A to 125.00 A
Drop-off to pick-up ratio Approx. 90 %
Pick-up tolerance 3 % of setting value or 1 % of IN
Times
Shortest trip time Approx. 13 ms for fast relays

Approx. 8 ms for high-speed relays
608 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.13 Earth Fault Detection in a Non-Earthed System (optional)
4.13 Earth Fault Detection in a Non-Earthed System (optional)
Pickup/Tripping
Displacement voltage 3U0> 1 V to 150 V Increments 1 V

Delay TSens.E/F 0.00 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Optional trip with 0.00 s to 320.00 s Increments 0.01 s
additional delay time TSens.E/F TRIP
Measuring tolerance 5 % of set value
Time tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Phase Determination
Measuring principle Voltage measurement phase-earth

Earth fault phase Uph min 10 V to 100 V Increments 1 V
Healthy phases Uph max 10 V to 100 V Increments 1 V
Determination of Direction
Measuring principle Real/reactive power measurement

Pickup value I>Sens.E/F 0.003 A to 1.000 A 1) Increments 0.001 A
Angle correction for toroidal current transformer 0.0 to 5.0 Increments 0.1
in 2 steps
for tan 20 (for real power)
1) Sensitive earth current input independent from IN
7SA6 Manual 609

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.14 Automatic Reclosure Function (optional)
Automatic Reclosures
Number of reclosures Max. 8,

first 4 with individual settings
Type (depending on ordered version) 1-pole, 3-pole or 1-/3-pole
Control With pickup or trip command
Action times 0.01 s to 300.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Initiation possible without pickup and action time
Different dead times before 0.01 s to 1800.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
reclosure can be set for all operating modes and
cycles
Dead times after evolving fault recognition 0.01 s to 1800.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Reclaim time after reclosure 0.50 s to 300.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Blocking time after dynamic blocking 0.5 s
Blocking time after manual closing 0.50 s to 300.00 s; 0 Increments 0.01 s
Start signal monitoring time 0.01 s to 300.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Circuit breaker monitoring time 0.01 s to 300.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)/ Reduced Dead Time (RDT)/ Dead Line Check
Adaptive dead time With voltage measurement or

with close command transmission
Action times 0.01 s to 300.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Initiation possible without pickup and action time
Maximum dead time 0.50 s to 3000.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Voltage measurement dead line or bus 2 V to 70 V (Ph-E) Increments 1 V
Voltage measurement live or bus 30 V to 90 V (Ph-E) Increments 1 V
Voltage measuring time 0.10 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Time delay for close command transmission 0.00 s to 300.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
610 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Operating Modes
Operating modes Synchronism check

with automatic reclosure Live bus - dead line
Dead bus - live line
Dead bus and dead line
Bypassing
Or combination of the above
Synchronism Closing the circuit breaker under asynchronous power condi-
tions possible (with circuit breaker action time)
Operating modes As for automatic reclosure,
for manual closure independently selectable
Voltages
Maximum operating voltage 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V

U< for dead status 1 V to 60 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
U> for live status 20 V to 125 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
Tolerances 2 % of pickup value or 1 V
Dropout to pickup ratio Approx. 0.9 (U>) or 1.1 (U<)
U-measurement
Voltage difference 1.0 V to 60.0 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 0.1V

Tolerance 1V
Synchronous Power Conditions
-measurement 2 to 80 Increments 1
Tolerance 2
f-measurement 0.03 Hz to 2.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Tolerance 15 mHz
7SA6 Manual 611

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Asynchronous Power Conditions
f-measurement 0.03 Hz to 2.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz

Tolerance 15 mHz
Max. angle error 5 for f 1 Hz
10 for f > 1 Hz
Synchronous/asynchronous limits 0.01 Hz
Circuit breaker operating time 0.01 s to 0.60 s Increments 0.01 s
Times
Minimum measuring time Approx. 80 ms

Maximum measuring time 0.01 s to 600.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Tolerance of all timers 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
612 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.16 Voltage Protection (optional)
Overvoltage Phase-Earth
Overvoltage UPh>> 1.0 V to 170.0 V; Increments 0.1 V

Delay TUPh>> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Overvoltage UPh> 1.0 V to 170.0 V; Increments 0.1 V
Delay TUPh> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Dropout to pickup ratio 0.30 to 0.99 Increments 0.01
Pickup time Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz)
Tolerances Voltages 3 % of setting value or 1 V
Overvoltage Phase-Phase
Overvoltage UPhPh>> 2.0 V to 220.0 V; Increments 0.1 V

Delay TUPhPh>> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Overvoltage UPhPh> 2.0 V to 220.0 V; Increments 0.1 V
Delay TUPhPh> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Dropout time 30 ms
Overvoltage Positive Sequence System U1
Overvoltage U1>> 2.0 V to 220.0 V; Increments 0.1 V

Delay TU1>> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Overvoltage U1> 2.0 V to 220.0 V; Increments 0.1 V
Delay TU1> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Compounding Can be switched on/off
7SA6 Manual 613

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Overvoltage Negative Sequence System U2
Overvoltage U2>> 2.0 V to 220.0 V; Increments 0.1 V

Delay TU2>> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Overvoltage U2> 2.0 V to 220.0 V; Increments 0.1 V
Delay TU2> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Overvoltage Zero Sequence System 3U0 or any Single-Phase Voltage UX
Overvoltage 3U0>> 1.0 V to 220.0 V; Increments 0.1 V

Delay T3U0>> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Overvoltage 3U0> 1.0 V to 220.0 V; Increments 0.1 V
Delay T3U0> 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Pickup time
With repeated measurement Approx. 75 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 65 ms (60 Hz)
Without repeated measurement Approx. 35 ms (50 Hz) / approx. 30 ms (60 Hz)
Dropout time
With repeated measurement Approx. 75 ms (50 Hz)
Without repeated measurement Approx. 30 ms (50 Hz)
Undervoltage PhaseEarth
Undervoltage UPh<< 1.0 V to 100.0 V Increments 0.1V

Delay TUPh<< 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Steps 0.01 s
Undervoltage UPh< 1.0 V to 100.0 V Increments 0.1V
Delay TUPh< 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Steps 0.01 s
Dropout to pickup ratio 1,01-1,20 Steps 0.01
Current criterion Can be switched on/off
Times 1 % of set value or 10 ms
614 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Undervoltage PhasePhase
Undervoltage UPhPh<< 1.0 V to 175.0 V Increments 0.1V

Delay TUPhPh<< 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Steps 0.01 s
Undervoltage UPhPh< 1.0 V to 175.0 V Increments 0.1V
Delay TUPhPh< 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Steps 0.01 s
Undervoltage Positive Sequence System U1
Undervoltage U1<< 1.0 V to 100.0 V Increments 0.1V

Delay TU1<< 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Steps 0.01 s
Undervoltage U1< 1.0 V to 100.0 V Increments 0.1V
Delay TU1< 0.00 s to 100.00 s; Steps 0.01 s
7SA6 Manual 615

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.17 Frequency Protection (optional)
Frequency Elements
Quantity 4, depending on setting effective on f< or f>
Pickup Values
f> or f< adjustable for each element

For fN = 50 Hz 45.50 Hz to 54.50 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
For fN = 60 Hz 55.50 Hz to 64.50 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Times
Pickup times f>, f< Approx. 85 ms

Dropout times f>, f< Approx. 30 ms
Delay times T 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Note on dropout times:
Dropout was enforced by current = 0 A and voltage = 0 V.
Enforcing the dropout by means of a frequency change below the dropout threshold extends the dropout times.
Dropout Frequency
f = | pickup value dropout value | Approx. 20 mHz
Operating Ranges
In voltage range approx. 0.65 UN up to 230 V (phase-phase)

In frequency range 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Tolerances
Frequencies f>, f< in specific range (fN 10 %) 15 mHz in range ULL: 50 V to 230 V
Time delays T(f<, f>) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
616 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.18 Fault locator
4.18 Fault locator
Start With trip command or drop-off

Setting range reactance (secondary), for IN = 1 A 0.005 /km to 9.500 /km Increments 0.001 /km
miles or km for IN = 5 A 0.001 /km to 1.900 /km
for IN = 1 A 0.005 /mile to 15.000 /mile Increments 0.001 /mile
for IN = 5 A 0.001 /mile to 3.000 /mile
Parallel line compensation (selectable) Can be switched on/off
The setting values are the same as for distance protection (see
Section 4.2)
Taking into consideration the load current in case of Correction of the X-value, can be activated and deactivated
single-phase earth faults
Output of the fault distance In primary and secondary,
in km or miles line length 1)
in % of the line length 1)
Measuring tolerances 2.5 % of the line length
with sinusoidal quantities at 30 k 90 and Uk/UN 0.1
Further output options (depending on ordered ver- As analog value 0 mA to 22.5 mA;
sion) as BCD-code 4 Bit units + 4 Bit tens + 1 Bit hundreds + validity
bit
- BCD output time 0.01 s to 180.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
1)
Output of the fault distance in km, miles, and % requires homogeneous lines
7SA6 Manual 617

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.19 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional)
Circuit Breaker Supervision
Current flow monitoring for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A

for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A
Zero sequence current monitoring for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for IN = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A
Tolerance 5 % of setting value or 1 % of nominal current
Monitoring of circuit breaker auxiliary contact position
- for three-pole tripping Binary input for circuit breaker auxiliary contact
- for single-pole tripping 1 binary input for auxiliary contact per pole or
1 binary input for series connection NO contact and NC contact
Note:
The circuit breaker failure protection can also operate without the indicated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts, but the
function range is then reduced.
Auxiliary contacts are necessary for the circuit breaker failure protection for tripping without or with a very low current
flow (e.g. Buchholz protection, stub fault protection, circuit breaker pole discrepancy monitoring).
Starting Conditions
For circuit breaker failure protection Internal or external single-pole trip 1)

Internal or external three-pole trip 1)
Internal or external three-pole trip without current 1)
1) Via binary inputs
Times
Pickup time Approx. 5 ms with measured quantities present

Approx. 20 ms after switch-on of measured quantities
Dropout time, internal (overshoot time) 15 ms at sinusoidal measured values,
25 ms maximal
Delay times for all stages 0.00 s to 30.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Stub fault protection
With signal transmission to the opposite line end

Time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Pole discrepancy supervision
Initiation criterion Not all poles are closed or open

Monitoring time 0.00 s to 30.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
618 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Setting Ranges
Factor k according to IEC 60255-8 0.10 to 4.00 Increments 0.01

Time Constant th 1.0 min to 999.9 min Increments 0.1 min
Thermal Alarm Alarm/Trip 50 % to 100 % of the trip over- Increments 1 %
temperature
Current Overload IAlarm for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A
for IN = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A
Calculation Method
Calculation method temperature rise Maximum temperature rise of 3 phases

Average of temperature rise of 3 phases
Temperature rise from maximum current
Tripping Characteristic
Dropout to Pickup Ratio
/Trip Drops out with Alarm

/Alarm Approx. 0.99
I/IAlarm Approx. 0.97
Tolerances
Referring to k IN 2 % or 1 % of nominal current; Class 2 % according to

IEC 60255-8
Referring to tripping time 3 % or 1 s for I/(k IN) > 1.25; class 3 % per IEC 60255-8
7SA6 Manual 619

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Figure 4-7 Trip time characteristics of the overload protection
620 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.21 Monitoring Functions
4.21 Monitoring Functions
Measured Quantities
Current sum IF = | IL1 + IL2 + IL3 + kI IE | >

SUM.I Threshold IN + SUM.FactorI | I |
- SUM.ILimit for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 2.00 A Increments 0.01 A
- SUM.FACTOR I 0.00 to 0.95 Increments 0.01

Voltage sum UF = | UL1 + UL2 + UL3 + kU UEN | > 25 V
Current Symmetry | Imin |/| Imax | < BAL.FACTOR.I
as long as Imax/IN > BAL.ILIMIT/IN
- BAL.FACTOR.I 0.10 to 0.95 Increments 0.01
- BAL.ILIMIT for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 1.00 A Increments 0.01 A
- T BAL.ILIMIT 5 s to 100 s Increments 1 s

Broken conductor One conductor without current, the others with current
(monitoring of current transformer circuits on current step
change in one phase without residual current)
Voltage Symmetry | Umin |/| Umax | < BAL.FACTOR.U
as long as | Umax | > BAL.ULIMIT
- BAL.FACTOR.U 0.58 to 0.95 Increments 0.01
- BAL.ULIMIT 10 V to 100 V Increments 1 V
- T BAL.ULIMIT 5 s to 100 s Increments 1 s
Voltage phase sequence UL1 before UL2 before UL3
as long as | UL1|, | UL2| , | UL3| > 40 V/3
Non-symmetrical voltages 3 U0 > FFM U> or 3 U2 > FFM U>
(Fuse failure monitoring) and at the same time
3 I0 < FFM I< and 3 I2 < FFM I<
- FFM U> 10 V to 100 V Increments 1 V
- FFM I< for IN = 1 A 0.10 A to 1.00 A Increments 0.01 A
Three-phase measuring voltage failure All UPh-E < FFM UMEAS <
(fuse failure monitoring) and at the same time
all IPh < FFM Idelta
and
All IPh > (IPh> (Dist.))
or
All UPh-E < FFM UMEAS <

and at the same time
All IPh < (IPh> (Dist.))
and
All IPh > 40 mA
- FFM UMEAS < 2 V to 100 V Increments 1 V
- FFM Idelta for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 1.00 A Increments 0.01 A
- T U-Monitoring (wait time for additional measured 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments 0.01 s
voltage failure monitoring)
7SA6 Manual 621

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
- T UT mcb 0 ms to 30 ms Increments 1 ms
Phase angle positive sequence power Message when the angle lies inside the area of the P-Q level
parameterised by A and B.
- A, B 0 to 259 Increments 1
- I1 for IN = 1 A 0.05 A to 2.00 A Increments 0.01 A
- U1 2 V to 70 V Increments 1 V
Response Time Approx. 30 ms
Trip Circuit Monitoring
Number of monitored circuits 1 to 3

Operation per circuit With 1 binary input or with 2 binary inputs
Pickup and Dropout Time Approx. 1 to 2 s
Settable delay time for operation with 1 binary input 1 s to 30 s Increments 1 s
622 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.22 Transmission of Binary Information (optional)
4.22 Transmission of Binary Information (optional)
General
Note: The setting for remote signal reset delay for communication failure may be 0 s to 300 s or . With setting an-
nunciations are maintained indefinitely.
Remote commands
Number of possible remote commands 4

Operating times, total approx.
Transmission speed 512 kbit/s 128 kbit/s 64 kbit/s
2 ends, minimum, 12 ms 14 ms 16 ms
typical 14 ms 16 ms 18 ms
Drop-off times, total approx.

The operating times refer to the entire signal path from entry via binary inputs until output of commands via fast output
relays. For high-speed relays (7SA6***-*M/N/P/Q/R/S) approx. 5 ms can be subtracted from the time values.
Remote indications
Number of possible remote signals 24

Operating times, total approx.
Drop-off times, total approx.

The operating times refer to the entire signal path from entry via binary inputs until output of commands via fast output
relays. For high-speed relays (7SA6***-*M/N/P/Q/R/S) approx. 5 ms can be subtracted from the time values.
7SA6 Manual 623

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.23 User Defined Functions (CFC)
Function Blocks and Their Possible Allocation to the Priority Classes
Function Module Explanation Task Level

MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB
ABSVALUE Magnitude Calculation X
ADD Addition X X X X
ALARM Alarm clock X X X X
AND AND - Gate X X X X
BLINK Flash block X X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to Control X X
(conversion)
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to Double Point X X X
(conversion)
BOOL_TO_DL Boolean to Double Point X X X
(conversion)
BOOL_TO_IC Bool to Internal SI, X X X
Conversion
BUILD_DI Create Double Point X X X
Annunciation
CMD_CANCEL Cancel command X X X X
CMD_CHAIN Switching Sequence X X
CMD_INF Command Information X
COMPARE Measured value compari- X X X X
son
CONNECT Connection X X X
COUNTER Counter X X X X
CV_GET_STATUS Information status of the X X X X
metered value, decoder
D_FF D- Flipflop X X X
D_FF_MEMO Status Memory for Restart X X X X
DI_GET_STATUS Information status double X X X X
point indication, decoder
DI_SET_STATUS Double point indication with X X X X
status, encoder
DI_TO_BOOL Double Point to Boolean X X X
(conversion)
DINT_TO_REAL DoubleInt after real, adapter X X X X
DIST_DECODE Double point indication with X X X X
status, decoder
DIV Division X X X X
DM_DECODE Decode Double Point X X X X
DYN_OR Dynamic OR X X X X
LIVE_ZERO Live-zero, non-linear Curve X
LONG_TIMER Timer (max.1193h) X X X X
LOOP Feedback Loop X X X X
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower Limit X
MUL Multiplication X X X X
624 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
MV_GET_STATUS Information status mea- X X X X

sured value, decoder
MV_SET_STATUS Measured value with status, X X X X
encoder
NAND NAND - Gate X X X X
NEG Negator X X X X
NOR NOR - Gate X X X X
OR OR - Gate X X X X
REAL_TO_DINT Real after DoubleInt, X X X X
adapter
REAL_TO_UINT Real after U-Int, adapter X X X X
RISE_DETECT Rising edge detector X X X X
RS_FF RS- Flipflop X X X
RS_FF_MEMO Status memory for restart X X X X
SI_GET_STATUS Information status single X X X X
point indication, decoder
SI_SET_STATUS Single point indication with X X X X
status, encoder
SQUARE_ROOT Root Extractor X X X X
SR_FF SR- Flipflop X X X
SR_FF_MEMO Status memory for restart X X X X
ST_AND AND gate with status X X X X
ST_NOT Negator with status X X X X
ST_OR OR gate with status X X X X
SUB Substraction X X X X
TIMER Timer X X
TIMER_SHORT Simple timer X X
UINT_TO_REAL U-Int to real, adapter X X X X
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper Limit X
X_OR XOR - Gate X X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero Supression X
7SA6 Manual 625

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
General Limits
Description Limit Comments

Maximum number of all CFC charts considering all task 32 When the limit is exceeded, an error
levels message is output by the device. Conse-
quently, the device is put into monitoring
mode. The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of all CFC charts considering one task 16 Only error message
level (evolving error in processing procedure)
Maximum number of all CFC inputs considering all charts 400 When the limit is exceeded, an error
message is output by the device. Conse-
quently, the device starts monitoring.
The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of inputs of one chart for each task level 400 Only error message; here the number of
(number of unequal information items of the left border per elements of the left border per task level
task level) is counted. Since the same information
is indicated at the border several times,
only unequal information is to be count-
ed.
Maximum number of reset-resistant flipflops 350 When the limit is exceeded, an error in-
D_FF_MEMO, RS_FF_MEMO, SR_FF_MEMO dication is output by the device. Conse-
quently, the device is put into monitoring
Device-specific Limits
Description Limit Comments

Maximum number of synchronous changes of chart inputs 50 When the limit is exceeded, an error
per task level message is output by the device. Conse-
Maximum number of chart outputs per task level 150 quently, the device is put into monitoring
Additional Limits
Additional limits 1) for the following 4 CFC blocks:

Task Level
TIMER 2) 3) TIMER_SHORT2) 3) CMD_CHAIN D_FF_MEMO
MW_BEARB
PLC1_BEARB
15 30 20 350
PLC_BEARB
SFS_BEARB
1) When the limit is exceeded, an error indication is output by the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring. The
red ERROR-LED lights up.
2)
TIMER and TIMER_SHORT share the available timer resources. The relation is TIMER = 2 system timer and
TIMER_SHORT = 1 system timer. For the maximum used timer number the following side conditions are valid: (2
number of TIMERs + number of TIMER_SHORTs) < 20. The LONG_TIMER is not subject to this condition.
3) The time values for the blocks TIMER and TIMER_SHORT must not be smaller than the time resolution of the device,
i.e. 5 ms, otherwise the blocks will not start with the starting impulse issued.
626 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Maximum Number of TICKS in the Task Levels
Task Level Limit in TICKS 1)

MW_BEARB (Measured Value Processing) 10 000
PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC Processing) 1 900
PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC Processing) 200
SFS_BEARB (switchgear interlocking) 10 000
1) When the sum of TICKS of all blocks exceeds the limits before-mentioned, an error message is output by CFC.
Processing Times in TICKS required by the Individual Elements
Individual Element Number of TICKS

Block, basic requirement 5
Each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules 1
Connection to an input signal 6
Connection to an output signal 7
Additional for each chart 1
Operating sequence module CMD_CHAIN 34
Flipflop D_FF_MEMO 6
Loop module LOOP 8
Decoder DM_DECODE 8
Dynamic OR DYN_OR 6
Addition ADD 26
Subtraction SUB 26
Multiplication MUL 26
Division DIV 54
Square root SQUARE_ROOT 83
Timer TIMER_SHORT 8
Timer LONG_TIMER 11
Blinker lamp BLINK 11
Counter COUNTER 6
Adapter REAL_TO_DINT 10
Adapter REAL_TO_UINT 10
Alarm clock ALARM 21
Comparison COMPARE 12
Decoder DIST_DECODE 8
7SA6 Manual 627

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.24 Ancillary functions
Measured Values
Operational measured values for currents IL1; IL2; IL3; 3I0; I1; I2; IY; IP; IEE;
in A primary and secondary and in % INOp
Tolerance 0.5 % of measured value or 0.5 % of IN
Operational measured values for voltages UL1-E, UL2-E, UL3-E; 3U0, U0, U1, U2, U1Co, Usy2
(phase-earth connection)
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % UNOp/3
Tolerance 0.5 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of UN
Operational measured values for voltages Ux, Uen
in V secondary
Tolerance 0.5 % of measured value, or 0.5 % of UN
Operational measured values for voltages UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1, Usy2 (phase-phase connection)
in kV primary, in V secondary or in % UNOp
Tolerance 0.5 % of measured value or 0.5 % of UN
Operational measured values of impedances RL1-L2, RL2-L3, RL3-L1, RL1-E, RL2-E, RL3-E,
XL1-L2, XL2-L3, XL3-L1, XL1-E, XL2-E, XL3-E
in primary and secondary
Operational measured values for power S; P; Q (apparent, active and reactive power)
in MVA; MW; Mvar primary and % SN
(operational nominal power) = 3 UNOp INOp
Tolerance 1 % of SN at I/IN and U/UN in range 50 to 120 %
1 % von PN at I/IN and U/UN in range 50 to 120 % and ABS(cos )
in range 0.7 to 1
1 % of QN at I/IN and U/UN in range 50 to 120 % and ABS(cos )
in range 0.7 to 1
Operating measured value for power factor cos
Tolerance 0.02
Counter values for energy Wp+, Wq+; Wp-; Wq- (active and reactive energy)
in kWh (MWh or GWh) and
in kVARh (MVARh or GVARh)
Tolerance 1) 5 % for I > 0.5 IN, U > 0.5 UN and | cos | 0.707
Operational measured values for frequency f in Hz and % fN
Range 94 % to 106 % of fN
Tolerance 10 mHz or 0.02 % of fN
Thermal measured values L1/TRIP; L2/TRIP; L3/TRIP; /TRP
related to tripping temperature rise
Operational measured values of synchro check Usy1; Usy2; Udiff in kV primary
fsy1; fsy2; fdiff in Hz;
diff in
Measured values of earth fault IEa; IEr active and reactive component of the earth fault (residual)
current
In A primary and mA secondary
Long-term mean value IL1dmd; IL2dmd; IL3dmd; I1dmd;
Pdmd; Pdmd Forw, Pdmd Rev;
Qdmd; QdmdForw; QdmdRev;
Sdmd
in primary values
628 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.24 Ancillary functions
Minimum and maximum values IL1; IL2; IL3; I1; IL1d; IL2d; IL3d; I1d;
UL1-E; UL2-E; UL3-E; U1;
UL1-L2; UL2-L3; UL3-L1; 3U0;
P Forw; P Rev; Q Forw; Q Rev; S; Pd; Qd; Sd;
cos Pos; cos Neg; f
in primary values
Remote measured values for currents IL1; IL2; IL3 of the remote end in A primary
(IL1); (IL2); (IL3), referred to the local voltage UL1-E
in
Remote measured values for currents UL1; UL2; UL3 of the remote end in kV primary
(UL1); (UL2); (UL3), referred to the local voltage UL1-E in
1) at nominal frequency
Analog outputs (optional)
Quantity Max. 4 (depending on variant)

Possible measured values IL2;UL2-L3; |P|; |Q| in %
Possible fault values Fault distance d in % or km/miles;
latest max. fault current
Range 0 mA to 22.5 mA
Output time for fault values 0.10 s to 180.00 s; Increments 0.01 s
Operational indication buffer
Capacity 200 records
Earth fault detection buffer
Capacity 8 earth faults with a total of max. 200 messages
Fault Logging
Capacity 8 faults with a total of max. 600 messages
Fault Recording
Number of stored fault records Max. 8

Storage time Max. 5 s for each fault
Approx. 15 s in total
Sampling rate at fN = 50 Hz 1 ms
Sampling rate at fN = 60 Hz 0.83 ms
7SA6 Manual 629

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Statistics (serial protection data interface)
Availability of transmission for applications with pro- Availability in %/min and %/h
tection data interface
Delay time of transmission Resolution 0.01 ms
Switching statistics
Number of trip events caused by the device Separately for each breaker pole (if single-pole tripping is pos-
sible)
Number of automatic reclosures Separate for 1-pole and 3-pole AR;
initiated by the device Separately for 1st AR cycle
and for all further cyles
Total of interrupted currents Pole segregated
Maximum interrupted current Pole segregated
Real Time Clock and Buffer Battery
Resolution for operational messages 1 ms

Resolution for fault messages 1 ms
Back-up battery Type: 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA
Self-discharging time approx. 10 years
IEC 61850 GOOSE (inter-relay communication)
The GOOSE communication service of IEC 61850 is qualified for switchgear interlocking.
The runtime of GOOSE messages with the protection relay picked up depends on the
number of connected IEC 61850 clients. For the devices applications with protective func-
tions have to be checked in terms of their required runtime. In each case, the manufacturer
has to be consulted to define the requirements that ensure that the application functions
safely.
630 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.25 Dimensions
4.25 Dimensions
Figure 4-8 Dimensions of a device for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/3)
7SA6 Manual 631

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Figure 4-9 Dimensions of a device for panel flush or cubicle mounting (size 1/2)
632 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.25 Dimensions
Figure 4-10 Dimensions of a device for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 2/3)
7SA6 Manual 633

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
Figure 4-11 Dimensions of a device for panel flush or cubicle mounting (size 1/1)
634 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.25 Dimensions
4.25.5 Housing for Panel Surface Mounting (housing size 1/3)
Figure 4-12 Dimensions of a device for panel surface mounting (size 1/3)
4.25.6 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/2)
7SA6 Manual 635

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.25.7 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/1)
636 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.25 Dimensions
4.25.8 Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel (housing size 1/2)
Figure 4-15 Dimensions of a device for surface mounting with detached operator panel (size 1/2)
7SA6 Manual 637

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
4.25.9 Surface Mounting Housing with Detached Operator Panel (Housing Size 1/1)
Figure 4-16 Dimensions of a device for surface mounting with detached operator panel (size 1/1)
638 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4.25 Dimensions
4.25.10 Detached Operator Panel
Figure 4-17 Dimensions of a Detached Operator Panel
7SA6 Manual 639

C53000-G1176-C156-5
4 Technical Data
640 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Appendix A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This section provides
ordering information for the models of this device. Connection diagrams for indicating
the terminal connections of the models of this device are included. Following the
general diagrams are diagrams that show the proper connections of the devices to
primary equipment in many typical power system configurations. Tables with all set-
tings and all information available in this device equipped with all options are provided.
Default settings are also given.
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 642

A.2 Terminal Assignments 655
A.3 Connection Examples 698
A.4 Default Settings 713
A.5 Protocol-dependent Functions 724
A.6 Functional Scope 725
A.7 Settings 728
A.8 Information List 746
A.9 Group Alarms 780
A.10 Measured Values 781
7SA6 Manual 641

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1.1 Ordering Information
A.1.1.1 Ordering Code (MLFB)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Numerical 7 S A 6 + L/M/N
Distance Protection
(position 1 to 9 3))
Function Package/Version Pos. 5

Distance protection with 4-line display 1
Device Type Pos. 6

Distance protection, medium/high voltage, housing size 1/3 x 19 0
Measuring Inputs (4 x U, 4 x I) Pos. 7

IPh = 1 A, IE = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A) 1
IPh = 1 A, IE = sensitive (min. = 0.005 A) 2
IPh = 5 A, IE = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5
Auxiliary Voltage (Power Supply, Pickup Threshold of Binary Inputs) Pos. 8

2)
24 to 48 VDC, binary input threshold 17 V 2
60 to 125 VDC 1), Binary Input Threshold 17 V 2) 4
110 to 250 VDC 1), 115 VAC, binary input threshold 73 VDC 2) 5
Housing / Number of Binary Inputs (BI) and Outputs (BO) Pos. 9

Flush mounting housing 1/3 x 19'', 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact A
1
Flush mounting housing /3 x 19'', 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live status contact B
Surface mounting housing 1/3 x 19'', 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact E
Surface mounting housing 1/3 x 19'', 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live status contact Z
Housing, 1/3 x 19, with plug-in terminals, 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact J
Housing, 1/ x 19, with plug-in terminals, 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live status contact K
3
1)
with plug-in jumper one of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected
2)
for each binary input one of 3 pickup threshold ranges can be selected with plug-in jumper
3) for details on positions 10 to 19 see beneath
642 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Distance Protection

Distance protection with graphic display and control keys (integrated) 3
Device Type Pos. 6

Distance protection, medium voltage / high voltage. Housing size 1/2 x 19 1

IPh = 1 A, IE = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A) 1
IPh = 5 A, IE = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5

60 to 125 VDC 1), binary input threshold 17 V 4
110 to 250 VDC 1), 115 VAC, binary input threshold 73 VDC 5

Flush mounting housing 1/2 x 19'', 13 BI, 16 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact A
1 4)
Flush mounting housing /2 x 19'', 20 BI, 8 BO, 4 (2) power relays , 1 live status contact B
Surface mounting housing 1/2 x 19'', 13 BI, 16 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact E
Surface mounting housing 1/ x 19'', 20 BI, 8 BO, 4 (2) power relays 4), 1 life contact F
2
Flush mounting housing, 1/2 x 19, with plug-in terminals, 13 BI, 16 BO , thereof 7 fast, 1 life contact J
Flush mounting housing, 1/ x 19, with plug-in terminals, 20 BI, 8 BO, 4 (2) Power relays 4), 1 life contact K
2
Flush mounting housing, 1/2 x 19, 13 BI, 16 BO (thereof 5 BO with high-speed relay), 1 live status contact M
Surface mounting housing, 1/2 x 19, 13 BI, 16 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 life contact N
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/2 x 19, 13 BI, 16 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 life contact P
1)
2)
4) 4 (2) power relays: 4 power relays (can be used in pairs)
7SA6 Manual 643

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Distance Protection

Distance protection with graphic display and control keys (integrated) 3
Device Type Pos. 6

Distance protection, medium/high voltage, housing size 1/1 x 19 2

IPh = 1 A, IE = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A) 1
IPh = 5 A, IE = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5

2)
60 to 125 VDC 1), binary input threshold 17 V 2) 4
110 to 250 VDC 1), 115 VAC, binary input threshold 73 V DC 2) 5

Flush mounting housing 1/1 x 19'', 21 BI, 24 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact A
1
Flush mounting housing /1 x 19'', 29 BI, 32 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact B
Flush mounting housing 1/1 x 19'', 33 BI, 11 BO, 8 (4) power relays 4), 1 live status contact C
Surface mounting housing 1/1 x 19'', 21 BI, 24 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact E
Surface mounting housing 1/1 x 19'', 29 BI, 32 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact F
Surface mounting housing 1/ x 19'', 33 BI, 11 BO, 8 (4) power relays 4), 1 live status contact G
1
Flush mounting housing, 1/1 x 19, with plug-in terminals, 21 BI, 24 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), J
1 live status contact
Flush mounting housing, 1/1 x 19, with plug-in terminals, 29 BI, 32 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), K
Flush mounting housing, 1/1 x 19, with plug-in terminals, 33 BI, 11 BO, 8 (4) power relays 4), L
Flush mounting housing, 1/1 x 19, 21 BI, 24 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 life contact M
Flush mounting housing, 1/1 x 19, 29 BI, 32 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 life contact N
Surface mounting housing, 1/ x 19, 21 BI, 24 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 life contact P
1
Surface mounting housing, 1/1 x 19, 29 BI, 32 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 life contact Q
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 x 19, 21 BI, 24 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 life contact R
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 x 19, 29 BI, 32 BO (5 high-speed relays), 1 life contact S
1)
2)
4) 8 (4) Power Relay: 8 Power Relay (can be used in pairs)
644 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Distance Protection

Device Type Pos. 6

Distance protection, medium voltage / high voltage. Housing size 2/ x 19 3
3

IPh = 1 A, IE = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A) 1
IPh = 5 A, IE = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5

24 to 48 VDC, binary input threshold 17 V 2) 2
1) 2)
60 to 125 VDC , binary input threshold 17 V 4

Flush mounting housing 2/ x 19'', 21 BI, 24 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact A
3
Flush mounting housing, 2/3 x 19, 21 BI, 24 BO (thereof 5 BO with high-speed relay), 1 live status contact M
1)
2)
3)
for details on positions 10 to 19 see beneath
7SA6 Manual 645

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Distance Protection
Function Package / Version Pos. 5

Distance protection with graphic display and detached operator panel 4
Device Type Pos. 6

Distance protection, medium/high voltage, housing size 1/ x 19 1
2

IPh = 1 A, IE = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A) 1
IPh = 5 A, IE = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5

1) 2)

Housing 1/ x 19'', with screwed terminals, 13 BI, 16 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact A
2
Housing 1/2 x 19'', with screwed terminals, 20 BI, 8 BO, 4 (2) power relay 4), 1 live status contact B
Housing 1/2 x 19'', with plug-in terminals, 13 BI, 16 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact J
Housing 1/2 x 19'', with plug-in terminals, 20 BI, 8 BO, 4 (2) power relay 4), 1 live status contact K
Housing, 1/2 x 19, with screwed terminals, 13 BI, 16 BO (thereof 5 BO with high-speed relay), 1 live status M
contact
Housing, 1/2 x 19, with plug-in terminals, 13 BI, 16 BO (thereof 5 BO with high-speed relay), 1 live status P
contact
1)
2)
3)
4) 4 (2) power relays: 4 power relays (can be used in pairs)
646 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Distance Protection

Distance protection with graphic display and detached operator panel 4
Device Type Pos. 6

Distance protection, medium voltage / high voltage. Housing size 1/ x 19 2
1

IPh = 1 A, IE = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A) 1
IPh = 5 A, IE = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5

1) 2)

Housing 1/1 x 19'', with screwed terminals, 21 BI, 24 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact A
Housing 1/1 x 19'', with screwed terminals, 29 BI, 32 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact B
Housing 1/1 x 19'', with screwed terminals, 33 BI, 11 BO, 8 (4) power relay 4), 1 Live status contact C
Housing 1/1 x 19'', with plug-in terminals, 21 BI, 24 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact J
Housing 1/1 x 19'', with plug-in terminals, 29 BI, 32 BO (thereof 7 fast BO), 1 live status contact K
Housing 1/1 x 19'', with plug-in terminals, 33 BI, 11 BO, 8 (4) power relay 4), 1 Live status contact L
Housing, 1/1 x 19, with screwed terminals, 21 BI, 24 BO (thereof 5 BO with high-speed relay), M
Housing, 1/1 x 19, with screwed terminals, 29 BI, 32 BO (thereof 5 BO with high-speed relay), N
Housing, 1/1 x 19, with plug-in terminals, 21 BI, 24 BO (thereof 5 BO with high-speed relay), R
Housing, 1/1 x 19, with plug-in terminals, 29 BI, 32 BO (thereof 5 BO with high-speed relay), S
1) with plug-in jumper one of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected

2)
3)
4)
8 (4) power relays: 8 power relays (can be used in pairs)
7SA6 Manual 647

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Distance Protection
(position 10 to 16)
Region-specific Default/Language Settings and Function Versions 1) Pos. 10

Region DE, German language (language can be changed) A
Region World, English language (GB) (language can be changed) B
Region US, language English (US) (language can be changed) C
Region FR, French language (language can be changed) D
Region world, Spanish language (language can be changed) E
Region world, Italian language (language can be changed) F
1)Regulations for Region-specific Default and Function Settings:
Region World: Default setting f = 50 Hz and line length in km, no zero sequence power protection.
Region US: Default setting f = 60 Hz and line length in miles, only ANSI-inverse characteristic available, no zero sequence
power protection.
Region FR: Default setting f = 50 Hz and line length in km, with zero sequence power protection and weak infeed logic
according to the French Specification.
Region DE: Default setting f = 50 Hz and line length in km, only IEC inverse characteristic available, no logarithmic inverse
characteristic for earth fault protection, no zero sequence power protection, U0 inverse for earth fault protection available,
polygonal or circle characteristic can be set.
Port B Pos. 11
None 0
System port, IEC protocol 60870-5-103, electrical RS232 1
System port, IEC protocol 60870-5-103, electrical RS485 2
System port, IEC protocol 60870-5-103, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
System port, Profibus FMS slave, electrical RS485 4
System port, Profibus FMS slave, optical, double ring, ST-connector 3) 6
Analog output 2 x 0 to 20 mA 7
For further protocols see additional information L (position 21 to 22) 9
Port C and D Pos. 12

DIGSI/Modem, electrical RS232, port C 1
DIGSI/Modem, electrical RS485, port C 2
With port C and D see additional information M (position 23 to 24) 9
Functions 1 Pos. 13
Only three-pole tripping, without overload protection, without BCD-output fault location 0
Only three-pole tripping, without overload protection, with BCD-output fault location 1
Only three-pole tripping, with overload protection, without BCD-output fault location 2
Only three-pole tripping, with overload protection, with BCD-output fault location 3
Single-/three-pole tripping, without overload protection, without BCD-output fault location 4
Single-/three-pole tripping, without overload protection, with BCD-output fault location 5
Single-/three-pole tripping, with overload protection, without BCD-output fault location 6
Single-/three-pole tripping, with overload protection, with BCD-output fault location 7
648 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Functions 2 Pos. 14
Pickup I>, without power swing option, without parallel line compensation A
Pickup U,I, without power swing option, without parallel line compensation B
Pickup Z<, polygon, without power swing option, without parallel line compensation C
Pickup Z<, polygon, U, I, , without power swing option, without parallel line compensation D
Pickup Z<, polygon, with power swing option, without parallel line compensation F
Pickup Z<, polygon, U, I, , with power swing option, without parallel line compensation G
Pickup U,I, without power swing option, with parallel line compensation 2) J
2)
Pickup Z<, polygon, without power swing option, with parallel line compensation K
Pickup Z<, polygon, U, I, , without power swing option, with parallel line compensation 2) L
2)
Pickup Z<, polygon, with power swing option, with parallel line compensation N
2)
Pickup Z<, polygon, U, I, , with power swing option, with parallel line compensation P
Functions 3 Pos. 15
Automatic Reclosure Synchro-Check Breaker Failure Protection Voltage Protection,
Frequency Protection
without without without without A
without without without with B
without without with without C
without without with with D
without with without without E
without with without with F
without with with without G
without with with with H
with without without without J
with without without with K
with without with without L
with without with with M
with with without without N
with with without with P
with with with without Q
with with with with R
Functions 4 Pos. 16
Earth Fault Protection / Direc- Earth Fault Detection Measured Values, Extended,
tional for Resonant-Earthed / Isolated Min / Max Values
for Earthed Systems Systems
without without without 0
without without with 1
1)
without with without 2
without with 1) with 3
with without without 4
with without with 5
1)
with with without 6
with with 1) with 7
1) available only with 2 or. 6 on position 7

2)
available only with 1 or. 5 on position 7
3)
not available with surface mounting housing
7SA6 Manual 649

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Numerical 7 S A 6 + L
Distance Protection
(position 21 to 22 )
Additional Information L, Further Protocols Port B Position

21, 22
System port, Profibus DP slave, electrical RS485 0, A
System port, Profibus DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 1) 0, B
System port, DNP3.0, electrical RS485 0, G
System port, DNP3.0, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 1) 0, H
System port, IEC 61850, 100 MBit Ethernet, electrical, double, ST connector 0, R
System port, IEC 61850, 100 MBit Ethernet, optical, double, ST connector 1) 0, S
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Numerical 7 S A 6 + M
Distance Protection
(position 23 to 24 )
Additional Information M, Port C Pos. 23

DIGSI/Modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI/Modem, electrical RS485 2
Additional Information M, Port D for A) Direct Connection, B) Communication Networks Pos. 24

Optical 820 nm, 2-ST connector, length of optical fibre up to 1.5 km for multimode-fibre (FO5), A) or B) A
Optical 820 nm, 2-ST connector, length of optical fibre up to 3.5 km for multimode-fibre (FO6) A) B
Optical 1300 nm, 2-ST connector, length of optical fibre up to 10 km for monomode-fibre (FO7) A) C
Optical 1300 nm, 2-FC connector, length of optical fibre up to 35 km for monomode-fibre (FO8) A) D
A
Optical 1300 nm, 2-LC connector, length of optical fibre up to 24 km for monomode fibre (FO17); ) G
Optical1300 nm, 2-LC connector, length of optical fibre up to 60 km for monomode fibre (FO18) A) H
Optical 1550 nm, 2-LC connector, length of optical fibre up to 100 km for monomode fibre (FO19) A) J
For analog output 2 x 0 to 20 mA K
1) not available with surface mounting housing
650 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.1.2 Accessories
Voltage Transform- Nominal Values Order No.

er Miniature Circuit
Breaker Thermal 1.6 A; magnetic 6 A 3RV1611-1AG14
Communication Converter for the serial connection of the 7SA6 distance protection system to the syn-
Converter chronous/asynchronous communication interfaces X21, G.703, to ISDN S0 lines, tele-
phone or symmetrical communication cables
Name Order Number
Opticalelectrical communication converter CC-X/G with
synchronous interface 7XV5662-0AA00
Opticalelectrical communication converter CC-X/G with
asynchronous interface 7XV5662-0AA01
Opticalelectrical communication converter CC-S0 with
synchronous interface 7XV5662-0AB00
Opticalelectrical communication converter CC-S0 with
asynchronous interface 7XV5662-0AB01
Opticalelectrical communication converter CC-CC with
synchronous interface 7XV5662-0AC00
Opticalelectrical communication converter CC-CC with
asynchronous interface 7XV5662-0AC01
Optical Repeater Fibre optical repeater for long-distance transmission of serial signals (up to 100 km /
62.5 miles)
Name Order Number
Wide-area fibre optical repeater (24 km / 15 miles) 7XV5461-0BG00
Wide-area fibre optical repeater (60 km / 37.5 miles) 7XV5461-0BH00
Wide-area fibre optical repeater (100 km / 62.5 miles) 7XV5461-0BJ00
Isolating Isolating transformers are needed on copper lines if the longitudinal voltage induced
Transformers in the pilot wires can result in more than 60 % of the test voltage at the communication
converter (i.e. 3 kV for CC-CC). They are connected between the communication con-
verter and the communication line.
Name Order Number
Isolation transformer, test voltage 20 kV 7XR9516
7SA6 Manual 651

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
External Bei Optical interfaces for Profibus and DNP 3.0 are not possible with surface mounted
Converters housings. Please order in this case a device with the appropriate electrical RS485 in-
terface, and the additional OLM converters listed below . Note: The OLM converter
6GK1502-3CB10 requires an operating voltage of 24 VDC. If the operating voltage is
> 24 V DC the additional power supply 7XV5810-0BA00 is required.
Interface used Order device with addition-
al module/OLM converter
Profibus DP/FMS double ring Profibus DP/FMS RS485/
6GK1502-3CB01
DNP 3.0 820 nm DNP 3.0 RS485/
7XV5650-0BA00
Exchangeable Name Order Number

Interface Modules
RS232 C53207-A351-D641-1
RS485 C73207-A351-D642-1
FO 820 nm C53207-A351-D643-1
Profibus DP RS485 C53207-A351-D611-1
Profibus DP double ring C53207-A351-D613-1
Profibus FMS RS485 C53207-A351-D603-1
Profibus FMS double ring C53207-A351-D606-1
DNP 3.0 RS485 C53207-A351-D631-3
DNP 3.0 820 nm C53207-A351-D633-3
Ethernet electrical (EN100) C53207-A351-D675-1
FO5 with ST connector; 820 nm; multimode optical fibre -
maximum length: 1.5 km (0.94 miles)1) C53207-A351-D651-1
FO6 with ST-connector; 820 nm; multimode optical fibre -
maximum length: 3.5 km (2.2 miles) C53207-A351-D652-1
FO7 with ST-connector; 1300 nm; monomode optical fibre
- maximum length: 10 km (6.25 miles) C53207-A351-D653-1
FO8 with FC-connector; 1300 nm; monomode optical fibre
- maximum length: 35 km (22 miles) C53207-A351-D654-1
FO17 with LC duplex connector; 1300 nm; monomode
optical fibre - maximum length: 24 km (15 miles) C53207-A351-D655-1
optical fibre - maximum length: 60 km (37.5 miles) C53207-A351-D656-1
optical fibre - maximum length: 100 km (62.5 miles) C53207-A351-D657-1
1) also used for connection to the optical-electrical communication converter
652 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Terminal Block Terminal Block Covering Cap for Block Type Order No.
Covering Caps
18 terminal voltage, 12 terminal current block C73334-A1-C31-1
12 terminal voltage, 8 terminal current block C73334-A1-C32-1
Short-Circuit Links Short Circuit Links for Purpose / Terminal Type Order No.
Voltage connections (18 terminal or 12 terminal) C73334-A1-C34-1
Current connections (12 terminal or 8 terminal) C73334-A1-C33-1
Plug-in Connector Plug-in Connector Order No.

2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1
Mounting Brackets Name Order No.

for 19" Racks
2 mounting brackets C73165-A63-C200-1
Battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA Order No.

VARTA 6127 101 501
Interface Cable An interface cable and the DIGSI software is necessary for communication between
the SIPROTEC 4 device and a PC or laptop: The PC or laptop must run MS-
WINDOWS 95, MS-WINDOWS 98, MS-WINDOWS NT 4, MS-WINDOWS 2000, MS-
WINDOWS ME or MS-WINDOWS XP PRO
Name Order No.
Interface cable between PC and SIPROTEC, Cable with 9-
pin male/female connectors 7XV5100-4
7SA6 Manual 653

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
DIGSI Operating Software for setting and operating SIPROTEC 4 devices

Software
Name Order Number
DIGSI, basic version with licenses for 10 computers 7XS5400-0AA00
DIGSI, complete version with all option packages 7XS5402-0AA00
Graphical Analysis Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data (option
Program SIGRA package of the complete version of DIGSI)
Name Order No.
Graphical analysis program SIGRA; Full version with
license for 10 computers 7XS5410-0AA00
Display Editor Software for creating basic and mimic control pictures (option package of the complete
version of DIGSI)
Name Order No.
Display Editor 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5420-0AA00
Graphic Tools Graphical software to aid in the setting of characteristic curves and provide zone dia-
grams for overcurrent and distance protective devices. (option package of the com-
plete version of DIGSI).
Name Order No.
Graphic Tools 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5430-0AA00
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star
connector) using DIGSI (option package of the complete version of DIGSI)
Name Order No.
DIGSI REMOTE 4; Full version with license for 10 comput-
ers, with operator interface in German, English, French,
Italian and Spanish 7XS5440-0AA00
SIMATIC CFC 4 Graphical software for setting interlocking (latching) control conditions and creating
additional functions (option package of the complete version of DIGSI)
Name Order No.
SIMATIC CFC 4; Full version with license for 10 PCs 7XS5450-0AA00
654 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.2 Terminal Assignments
A.2.1 Housing for Panel Flush or Cubicle Mounting
7SA610*-*A/J
Figure A-1 General diagram for 7SA610*-*A/J (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SA6 Manual 655

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA610*-*B/K
Figure A-2 General diagram for 7SA610*-*B/K (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
656 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*1*-*A/J
Figure A-3 General diagram for 7SA6*1*-*A/J (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SA6 Manual 657

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA6*1*-*B/K
Figure A-4 General diagram for 7SA6*1*-*B/K (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
658 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*1*-*M/P
Figure A-5 General diagram for 7SA6*1*-*M/R (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SA6 Manual 659

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA6*2*-*A/J
Figure A-6 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*A/J (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
660 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*2*-*B/K
7SA6 Manual 661

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-7 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*B/K (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
662 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*2*-*M/R
Figure A-8 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*M/R (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SA6 Manual 663

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA6*2*-*N/S
664 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-9 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*N/S (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SA6 Manual 665

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA6*2*-*C/L
666 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-10 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*C/L (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SA6 Manual 667

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA613*-*A
Figure A-11 General diagram for 7SA613*-*A (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
668 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA613*-*M
Figure A-12 General diagram for 7SA613*-*M (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SA6 Manual 669

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
A.2.2 Housing for Panel Surface Mounting
7SA610*-*E
Figure A-13 General diagram for 7SA610*-*E (panel surface mounting)
670 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA610*-*F
Figure A-14 General diagram for 7SA610*-*F (panel surface mounting)
7SA6 Manual 671

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA6*1*-*E
Figure A-15 General diagram for 7SA6*1*-*E (panel surface mounting)
672 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*1*-*F
Figure A-16 General diagram for 7SA6*1*-*F (panel surface mounting)
7SA6 Manual 673

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA6*1*-*N
Figure A-17 General diagram for 7SA6*1*-*N (panel surface mounting)
674 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*2*-*E
7SA6 Manual 675

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-18 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*E (panel surface mounting)
676 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*2*-*F
7SA6 Manual 677

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-19 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*F (panel surface mounting)
678 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*2*-*G
7SA6 Manual 679

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-20 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*G (panel surface mounting)
680 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*2*-*P
7SA6 Manual 681

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-21 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*P (panel surface mounting)
682 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA6*2*-*Q
7SA6 Manual 683

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-22 General diagram for 7SA6*2*-*Q (panel surface mounting)
684 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.2.3 Housing for Mounting with Detached Operator Panel
7SA641*-*A/J
Figure A-23 General diagram 7SA641*-*A/J (panel surface mounting with detached opera-
tor panel)
7SA6 Manual 685

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA641*-*B/K
Figure A-24 General diagram 7SA641*-*B/K (panel surface mounting with detached opera-
tor panel)
686 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
7SA641*-*M/P
Figure A-25 General diagram 7SA641*-*M/P (panel surface mounting with detached opera-
tor panel)
7SA6 Manual 687

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA642*-*A/J
688 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-26 General diagram 7SA642*-*A/J (panel surface mounting with detached opera-
tor panel)
7SA6 Manual 689

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA642*-*B/K
690 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-27 General diagram 7SA642*-*B/K (panel surface mounting with detached opera-
tor panel)
7SA6 Manual 691

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA642*-*C/L
692 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-28 General diagram 7SA642*-*C/L (panel surface mounting with detached opera-
tor panel)
7SA6 Manual 693

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA642*-*M/R
694 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-29 General diagram 7SA642*-*M/R (panel surface mounting with detached opera-
tor panel)
7SA6 Manual 695

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
7SA642*-*N/S
696 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-30 General diagram 7SA642*-*N/S (panel surface mounting with detached opera-
tor panel)
7SA6 Manual 697

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
A.3 Connection Examples
A.3.1 Current Transformer Connection Examples
Figure A-31 Current connections to three current transformers with a starpoint connection
for earth current (residual 3I0 neutral current), normal circuit layout
698 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-32 Current connections to three current transformers with separate earth current
transformer (summation current transformer or toroidal current transformer)
7SA6 Manual 699

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-33 Current connections to three current transformers with separate earth current
transformer (summation current transformer or toroidal current transformer)
700 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-34 Current connections to 2 current transformers with separate earth

current transformer (summation current transformer or toroidal transformer)
not permitted for earthed systems
7SA6 Manual 701

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-35 Current connections to 2 current transformers with separate earth

current transformer (summation current transformer or toroidal transformer)
not permitted for earthed systems
Figure A-36 Current connections to three current transformers and earth current from the star-point connection of
a parallel line (for parallel line compensation)
702 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-37 Current connections to three current transformers and earth current from the star-point connection of
a parallel line (for parallel line compensation)
7SA6 Manual 703

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-38 Current connections to three current transformers and earth current from the star-point current of
an earthed power transformer (for directional earth fault protection)
704 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-39 Current connections to three current transformers and earth current from the star-point current of
an earthed power transformer (for directional earth fault protection)
7SA6 Manual 705

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
A.3.2 Voltage Transformer
Figure A-40 Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers

(normal circuit layout)
706 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-41 Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers

with additional open-delta windings (dadnwinding)
7SA6 Manual 707

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-42 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers

with additional open-delta windings (dadnwinding) from the busbar
708 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-43 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers

Figure A-44 Voltage connections to two V-connected voltage transformers

not permitted for earthed networks
7SA6 Manual 709

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-45 Voltage connections to two V-connected voltage transformers

not permitted for earthed networks
710 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Figure A-46 Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers and

additionally to any busbar voltage (for overvoltage protection and/or
synchronism check)
7SA6 Manual 711

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-47 Voltage connections to three wye-connected voltage transformers and

additionally to any busbar voltage (for overvoltage protection and/or
synchronism check)
712 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.4 Default Settings
When the device leaves the factory, a large number of LED indicators, binary inputs
and outputs as well as function keys are already preset. They are summarized in the
following tables.
Please note that LED8 to LED14 are not available in the 7SA610.
A.4.1 LEDs
Table A-1 LED Indication Presettings

LEDs Allocated Function Description
Function No.
LED1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
LED2 Relay PICKUP L1 503 Relay PICKUP Phase L1
LED5 Relay PICKUP E 506 Relay PICKUP Earth
LED6 EF reverse 1359 E/F picked up REVERSE
Dis. reverse 3720 Distance Pickup REVERSE
LED7 Relay TRIP 1pL1 512 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L11)
Relay TRIP 1pL2 513 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L21)
LED8 Dis.TripZ1/1p 3811 Distance TRIP single-phase Z11)
DisTRIP3p. Z1sf 3823 DisTRIP 3phase in Z1 with single-ph Flt.
DisTRIP3p. Z1mf 3824 DisTRIP 3phase in Z1 with multi-ph Flt.
LED9 Dis.TripZ1B1p 3813 Distance TRIP single-phase Z1B1)
DisTRIP3p.Z1Bsf 3825 DisTRIP 3phase in Z1B with single-ph Flt
DisTRIP3p Z1Bmf 3826 DisTRIP 3phase in Z1B with multi-ph Flt.
LED10 Dis.TripZ2/1p 3816 Distance TRIP single-phase Z21)
Dis.TripZ2/3p 3817 Distance TRIP 3phase in Z2
LED11 Dis.TripZ3/T3 3818 Distance TRIP 3phase in Z3
Dis.TRIP 3p. Z4 3821 Distance TRIP 3phase in Z4
Dis.TRIP 3p. Z5 3822 Distance TRIP 3phase in Z5
LED12 AR not ready 2784 AR: Auto-reclose is not ready2)
LED13 >Door open >Cabinet door open
>CB wait >CB waiting for Spring charged
LED14 Alarm Sum Event 160 Alarm Summary Event
1) only devices with single-pole and three-pole tripping

2) only devices with automatic reclosure function
7SA6 Manual 713

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
A.4.2 Binary Input
Table A-2 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants
Binary Input Allocated Function Description
Function No.
BI1 >Reset LED 5 >Reset LED
BI2 >Manual Close 356 >Manual close signal1)
BI3 >FAIL:Feeder VT 361 >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped)
BI4 >DisTel Rec.Ch1 4006 >Dis.Tele. Carrier RECEPTION
Channel 1
BI5 >CB1 Ready 371 >CB1 READY (for AR,CB-Test)
>CB wait >CB waiting for Spring charged
1) only devices without power relay
Table A-3 Further binary input presettings for 7SA610*-B/F/K

Function No.
BI6 >CB 3p Open 380 >CB aux. contact 3pole Open
>CB1 3p Open 411 >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB-Test)
BI7 >CB 3p Closed 379 >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed
>CB1 3p Closed 410 >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CB-Test)
Table A-4 Further binary input presettings for 7SA6*1, 7SA6*2 7SA613
Function No.
BI6 >TripC1 TripRel 6854 >Trip circuit superv. 1: Trip Relay
BI8 >CB 3p Open 380 >CB aux. contact 3pole Open
>CB1 3p Open 411 >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB-Test)
Breaker Breaker1)
BI9 >CB 3p Closed 379 >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed
>CB1 3p Closed 410 >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CB-Test)
Breaker Breaker1)
BI10 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch1)
BI11 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch1)
BI12 EarthSwit Earth Switch1)
BI13 EarthSwit Earth Switch1)
BI16 >Door open >Cabinet door open1)
1)
only devices with power relay
714 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.4.3 Binary Output
Table A-5 Output relay presettings for all devices and ordering variants
Binary Output Allocated Function Description
Function No.
BO1 Relay PICKUP 501 Relay PICKUP
BO5 Alarm Sum Event 160 Alarm Summary Event
Table A-6 Further output relay presettings for 7SA610*-*A/E/J

Function No.
BO3 AR CLOSE Cmd. 2851 AR: Close command
BO7 Dis.T.SEND 4056 Dis. Telep. Carrier SEND signal
Table A-7 Further output relay presettings for 7SA610*-*B/F/K

Function No.
BO3 AR CLOSE Cmd. 2851 AR: Close command
Table A-8 Further output relay presettings for 7SA6*1*-*A/E/J, 7SA6*2*-*A/E/J/B/F/K and
7SA613*-*A
Function No.
BO2 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
BO10 Dis.T.SEND 4056 Dis. Telep. Carrier SEND signal
BO12 AR CLOSE Cmd. 2851 AR: Close command1)
BO14 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command2)
Relay TRIP 3ph. 515 Relay TRIP command Phases L1233)
BO15 Relay TRIP 1pL2 513 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L23)

2) only devices with three-pole tripping
3)
only devices with single-pole and three-pole tripping
7SA6 Manual 715

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Table A-9 Further output relay presettings for 7SA6*1*-*B/F/K and 7SA6*2*-*C/G/L
Function No.
BO2 Breaker Breaker
Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command1)
BO3 Breaker Breaker
AR CLOSE Cmd. 2851 AR: Close command2)
BO4 Breaker Breaker
AR CLOSE Cmd. 2851 AR: Close command2)
BO6 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch
BO7 Disc.Swit. Disconnect Switch
BO8 EarthSwit Earth Switch
BO9 EarthSwit Earth Switch
1) only devices with three-pole tripping

3)
only devices with single-pole and three-pole tripping
A.4.4 Function Keys
Table A-10 Applies to all devices and ordered variants

Function Keys Allocated Function
F1 Display of operational annunciations
F2 Display of the primary operational measured values
F3 An overview of the last eight network faults
F4 Not pre-assigned
716 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.4.5 Default Display
4-line Display Table A-11 This selection is available as start page which may be configured.
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
Page 5
Graphic Display
Figure A-48 Default displays of a graphical display
7SA6 Manual 717

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Spontaneous Fault The spontaneous annunciations on devices with 4-line display serve to display the
Indication of the most important data about a fault. They appear automatically in the display after pick-
4-Line Display up of the device, in the sequence shown below.
Relay PICKUP: A message indicating the protective function that last
picked up
PU Time=: Elapsed time from pick-up until drop-off
Trip time=: Elapsed time from pick-up until the first trip command
of a protection function
Fault locator Fault distance d in km or miles
Spontaneous Fault All devices featuring a graphic display allow you to select whether or not to view auto-
Indication of the matically the most important fault data on the display after a pick-up of the device.
Graphic Display
The information is shown in the display in the following order:
Relay PICKUP: A message indicating the protective function that last
picked up
Relay TRIP A message indicating the protection function that last
initiated a trip signal
PU Time=: Elapsed time from pick-up until drop-off
Trip time=: Elapsed time from pick-up until the first trip command
of a protection function
Fault locator Fault distance d in km or miles
718 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Default Display in
the Graphic Editor
Figure A-49 Standard default display after starting the Display Editor - example
A.4.6 Pre-defined CFC Charts
Upon its delivery the SIPROTEC 4 device provides several preset CFC-charts. De-
pending on the variant the following charts may be implemented:
7SA6 Manual 719

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Device and Some of the event-controlled logical allocations are created with blocks of the slow
System Logic logic (PLC1_BEARB = slow PLC processing). This way, the binary input Data Stop
is modified from a single point indication (SP) into an internal single point indication
(IntSP) by means of a negator block.
With the double point indication EarthSwit. = CLOSE an indication saying
fdrEARTHED ON, and with EarthSwit. = OPEN or F the indication fdrEARTHED
OFF is generated.
From the output indication definite TRIP the internal indication Brk OPENED is gen-
erated. As indication definite TRIP only queued for 500 ms, also indication Device
Brk OPENED is reset after this time period.
Figure A-50 Allocation of input and output with blocks of priority class System Logic
720 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Interlocking With blocks of level Interlocking (SFS_BEARB = interlocking), standard interlocking

for three switchgears (circuit breaker, disconnector and earth switch) is pre-defined.
Due to the large functional scope of the logic you will find this level on two worksheets.
The circuit breaker can be only be opened, if
the circuit breaker is set to OPEN or CLOSE and
the disconnector is set to OPEN or CLOSE and
the earth switch is set to OPEN or CLOSE and
the disconnector and the earth switch are not set to CLOSE at the same time and
the input indication CB wait is OFF and
the input indication Door open is OFF.
The disconnector can only be closed, if:
the circuit breaker is set to OPEN and
the earth switch is set to OPEN and
The disconnector can only be closed, if:
The earth switch can only be closed, if:
the disconnector is set to OPEN and
If the above requirements are not fulfilled, the actions of the switch commands will be
blocked with error messages by DIGSI.
7SA6 Manual 721

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Figure A-51 Standard interlocking for circuit breaker, disconnector and earth switch
722 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Limit Value On two worksheets a set point supervision of the sum of power factor |cos| < and in
Handling the maximum functional scope additional set point supervisions of currents (demand
(Set Points) meter of phase currents and positive-sequence component) and supervisions of
power (apparent power, active power and reactive power) are created with blocks of
level Processing of Measured Values.
A drop-out ratio of 0.95, or at least 0.5% applies for each drop.
Figure A-52 Set point configuration with blocks of priority class Processing of Measured Values (MW_BEARB)
7SA6 Manual 723

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
A.5 Protocol-dependent Functions
Protocol IEC 60870-5- IEC 61850 Profibus FMS Profibus DP DNP3.0 Additional
Function 103 Ethernet Service
(EN-100) Interface
(optional)
Operational Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
measured values
Metered values Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fault recording Yes Yes Yes No. Only via No. Only via Yes
additional additional
service service
interface interface
Remote protection No. Only via Yes Yes No. Only via No. Only via Yes
setting additional with DIGSI via with DIGSI via additional additional
service Ethernet PROFIBUS service service
interface interface interface
User-defined Yes Yes Yes Predefined Predefined Yes
annunciations and User-defined User-defined
switching objects Alarms in CFC Alarms in CFC
Time Via protocol; Via Protocol Via protocol; Via Via Protocol; -
synchronisation DCF77/IRIG B; (NTP); DCF77/IRIG B; DCF77/IRIG B; DCF77/IRIG B;
Interface; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; Interface; Interface;
Binary input Interface; Binary input Binary input Binary input
Binary input
Messages with time Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
stamp
Commissioning aids
Measured value Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
indication blocking
Generation of test Yes Yes Yes No No Yes
indications
Physical mode Asynchronous Synchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous -

Transmission mode Cyclical/Event Cyclical/Event Cyclical/Event Cyclical Cyclical/Event -
Baud rate 4800 to 38400 up to 100 up to 1.5 up to 1.5 2400 to 19200 2400 to
MBaud MBaud MBaud 115200
Type RS 232 RS 485 Ethernet TP RS485 fibre RS485 fibre RS485 fibre RS232,
fibre optic optic cable optic cable optic cable RS485
cable
Double ring Double ring
724 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.6 Functional Scope

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
110 Trip mode 3pole only 3pole only Trip mode
1-/3pole
114 Dis. PICKUP Z< (quadrilat.) Z< (quadrilat.) Distance protection pickup
I> (overcurr.) program
U/I
U/I/
Disabled
115 DIS Charact. Quadrilateral Quadrilateral Characteristic of distance zones
Circle
120 Power Swing Disabled Disabled Power Swing detection
Enabled
121 Teleprot. Dist. PUTT (Z1B) Disabled Teleprotection for Distance prot.
PUTT (Pickup)
POTT
Dir.Comp.Pickup
UNBLOCKING
BLOCKING
Rev. Interlock
Pilot wire comp
SIGNALv.ProtInt
Disabled
122 DTT Direct Trip Disabled Disabled DTT Direct Transfer Trip
Enabled
124 SOTF Overcurr. Disabled Disabled Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF
Enabled Overcurrent
125 Weak Infeed Disabled Disabled Weak Infeed (Trip and/or Echo)
Enabled
Logic no. 2
126 Back-Up O/C Disabled TOC IEC Backup overcurrent
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
TOC IEC /w 3ST
130 Sens. Earth Flt Disabled Disabled Sensitive Earth Flt.(comp/ isol.
Enabled starp.)
131 Earth Fault O/C Disabled Disabled Earth fault overcurrent
TOC IEC
TOC ANSI
TOC Logarithm.
Definite Time
U0 inverse
Sr inverse
132 Teleprot. E/F Dir.Comp.Pickup Disabled Teleprotection for Earth fault over-
SIGNALv.ProtInt curr.
UNBLOCKING
BLOCKING
Disabled
7SA6 Manual 725

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix

133 Auto Reclose 1 AR-cycle Disabled Auto-Reclose Function
2 AR-cycles
3 AR-cycles
4 AR-cycles
5 AR-cycles
6 AR-cycles
7 AR-cycles
8 AR-cycles
ADT
Disabled
134 AR control mode Pickup w/ Tact Trip w/ Tact Auto-Reclose control mode
Pickup w/o Tact
Trip w/ Tact
Trip w/o Tact
135 Synchro-Check Disabled Disabled Synchronism and Voltage Check
Enabled
136 FREQUENCY Prot. Disabled Disabled Over / Underfrequency Protection
Enabled
137 U/O VOLTAGE Disabled Disabled Under / Overvoltage Protection
Enabled
Enabl. w. comp.
138 Fault Locator Enabled Enabled Fault Locator
Disabled
with BCD-output
139 BREAKER FAILURE Disabled Disabled Breaker Failure Protection
Enabled
enabled w/ 3I0>
140 Trip Cir. Sup. Disabled Disabled Trip Circuit Supervision
1 trip circuit
2 trip circuits
3 trip circuits
142 Ther. OVERLOAD Disabled Disabled Thermal overload protection
Enabled
145 P. INTERFACE 1 Enabled Enabled Protection Interface 1 (Port D)
Disabled
147 NUMBER OF RELAY 2 relays 2 relays Number of relays
3 relays
IL2 [%]
UL23 [%]
|P| [%]
|Q| [%]
d [%]
d [km]
d [miles]
Imax TRIP [pri]
IL2 [%]
UL23 [%]
|P| [%]
|Q| [%]
d [%]
d [km]
d [miles]
Imax TRIP [pri]
726 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

IL2 [%]
UL23 [%]
|P| [%]
|Q| [%]
d [%]
d [km]
d [miles]
Imax TRIP [pri]
IL2 [%]
UL23 [%]
|P| [%]
|Q| [%]
d [%]
d [km]
d [miles]
Imax TRIP [pri]
7SA6 Manual 727

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
A.7 Settings
ditional Settings.
Addr. Parameter Function C Setting Options Default Setting Comments

201 CT Starpoint P.System Data 1 towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint
towards Busbar
203 Unom PRIMARY P.System Data 1 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 400.0 kV Rated Primary Voltage
204 Unom SECONDARY P.System Data 1 80 .. 125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (Ph-
Ph)
205 CT PRIMARY P.System Data 1 10 .. 5000 A 1000 A CT Rated Primary Current
206 CT SECONDARY P.System Data 1 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current
5A
207 SystemStarpoint P.System Data 1 Solid Earthed Solid Earthed System Starpoint is
Peterson-Coil
Isolated
210 U4 transformer P.System Data 1 Not connected Not connected U4 voltage transformer is
Udelta transf.
Usy2 transf.
Ux transformer
211 Uph / Udelta P.System Data 1 0.10 .. 9.99 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To
Open-Delta-VT
212 Usy2 connection P.System Data 1 L1-E L1-L2 VT connection for Usy2
L2-E
L3-E
L1-L2
L2-L3
L3-L1
214A Usy2-Usy1 P.System Data 1 0 .. 360 0 Angle adjustment Usy2-Usy1
215 Usy1/Usy2 ratio P.System Data 1 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Matching ratio Usy1 / Usy2
220 I4 transformer P.System Data 1 Not connected In prot. line I4 current transformer is
In prot. line
In paral. line
IY starpoint
221 I4/Iph CT P.System Data 1 0.010 .. 5.000 1.000 Matching ratio I4/Iph for CT's
230 Rated Frequency P.System Data 1 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
60 Hz
235 PHASE SEQ. P.System Data 1 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Phase Sequence
L1 L3 L2
236 Distance Unit P.System Data 1 km km Distance measurement unit
Miles
237 Format Z0/Z1 P.System Data 1 RE/RL, XE/XL RE/RL, XE/XL Setting format for zero seq.comp.
K0 format
238A EarthFltO/C 1p P.System Data 1 stages together stages together Earth Fault O/C: setting for 1pole
stages separat. AR
239 T-CB close P.System Data 1 0.01 .. 0.60 sec 0.06 sec Closing (operating) time of CB
240A TMin TRIP CMD P.System Data 1 0.02 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Minimum TRIP Command Dura-
tion
241A TMax CLOSE CMD P.System Data 1 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Maximum Close Command Du-
ration
242 T-CBtest-dead P.System Data 1 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Dead Time for CB test-autoreclo-
sure
302 CHANGE Change Group Group A Group A Change to Another Setting
Group B Group
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
402A WAVEFORMTRIGGER Osc. Fault Rec. Save w. Pickup Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture
Save w. TRIP
Start w. TRIP
728 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.7 Settings

403A WAVEFORM DATA Osc. Fault Rec. Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Pow.Sys.Flt.
410 MAX. LENGTH Osc. Fault Rec. 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Capture Record
411 PRE. TRIG. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Trigger
412 POST REC. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
415 BinIn CAPT.TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device Target on PU Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD
Target on TRIP
615 Spont. FltDisp. Device NO NO Spontaneous display of flt.an-
YES nunciations
640 Start image DD Device image 1 image 1 Start image Default Display
image 2
image 3
image 4
image 5
1103 FullScaleVolt. P.System Data 2 1.0 .. 1200.0 kV 400.0 kV Measurement: Full Scale Voltage
(100%)
1104 FullScaleCurr. P.System Data 2 10 .. 5000 A 1000 A Measurement: Full Scale Current
(100%)
1105 Line Angle P.System Data 2 10 .. 89 85 Line Angle
1107 P,Q sign P.System Data 2 not reversed not reversed P,Q operational measured values
reversed sign
1110 x' P.System Data 2 1A 0.0050 .. 9.5000 /km 0.1500 /km x' - Line Reactance per length
unit
5A 0.0010 .. 1.9000 /km 0.0300 /km
1111 Line Length P.System Data 2 0.1 .. 1000.0 km 100.0 km Line Length
1112 x' P.System Data 2 1A 0.0050 .. 15.0000 /mi 0.2420 /mi x' - Line Reactance per length
unit
5A 0.0010 .. 3.0000 /mi 0.0484 /mi
1113 Line Length P.System Data 2 0.1 .. 650.0 Miles 62.1 Miles Line Length
1114 c' P.System Data 2 1A 0.000 .. 100.000 F/km 0.010 F/km c' - capacit. per unit line len.
F/km
5A 0.000 .. 500.000 F/km 0.050 F/km
1115 c' P.System Data 2 1A 0.000 .. 160.000 F/mi 0.016 F/mi c' - capacit. per unit line len.
F/mile
5A 0.000 .. 800.000 F/mi 0.080 F/mi
1116 RE/RL(Z1) P.System Data 2 -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. comp. factor RE/RL for
Z1
1117 XE/XL(Z1) P.System Data 2 -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. comp. factor XE/XL for
Z1
1118 RE/RL(Z1B...Z5) P.System Data 2 -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. comp.factor RE/RL for
Z1B...Z5
1119 XE/XL(Z1B...Z5) P.System Data 2 -0.33 .. 7.00 1.00 Zero seq. comp.factor XE/XL for
Z1B...Z5
1120 K0 (Z1) P.System Data 2 0.000 .. 4.000 1.000 Zero seq. comp. factor K0 for
zone Z1
1121 Angle K0(Z1) P.System Data 2 -135.00 .. 135.00 0.00 Zero seq. comp. angle for zone
Z1
1122 K0 (> Z1) P.System Data 2 0.000 .. 4.000 1.000 Zero seq.comp.factor K0,higher
zones >Z1
1123 Angle K0(> Z1) P.System Data 2 -135.00 .. 135.00 0.00 Zero seq. comp. angle, higher
zones >Z1
1126 RM/RL ParalLine P.System Data 2 0.00 .. 8.00 0.00 Mutual Parallel Line comp. ratio
RM/RL
1127 XM/XL ParalLine P.System Data 2 0.00 .. 8.00 0.00 Mutual Parallel Line comp. ratio
XM/XL
1128 RATIO Par. Comp P.System Data 2 50 .. 95 % 85 % Neutral current RATIO Parallel
Line Comp
1130A PoleOpenCurrent P.System Data 2 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Pole Open Current Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
1131A PoleOpenVoltage P.System Data 2 2 .. 70 V 30 V Pole Open Voltage Threshold
1132A SI Time all Cl. P.System Data 2 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Seal-in Time after ALL closures
1133A T DELAY SOTF P.System Data 2 0.05 .. 30.00 sec 0.25 sec minimal time for line open before
SOTF
7SA6 Manual 729

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix

1134 Line Closure P.System Data 2 only with ManCl only with ManCl Recognition of Line Closures
I OR U or ManCl with
CB OR I or M/C
I or Man.Close
1135 Reset Trip CMD P.System Data 2 CurrentOpenPole CurrentOpenPole RESET of Trip Command
Current AND CB
Pickup Reset
1136 OpenPoleDetect. P.System Data 2 OFF w/ measurement open pole detector
Current AND CB
w/ measurement
1140A I-CTsat. Thres. P.System Data 2 1A 0.2 .. 50.0 A; 20.0 A CT Saturation Threshold
5A 1.0 .. 250.0 A; 100.0 A
1150A SI Time Man.Cl P.System Data 2 0.01 .. 30.00 sec 0.30 sec Seal-in Time after MANUAL clo-
sures
1151 MAN. CLOSE P.System Data 2 with Sync-check NO Manual CLOSE COMMAND
w/o Sync-check generation
NO
1152 Man.Clos. Imp. P.System Data 2 (Setting options depend None MANUAL Closure Impulse after
on configuration) CONTROL
1155 3pole coupling P.System Data 2 with PICKUP with TRIP 3 pole coupling
with TRIP
1156A Trip2phFlt P.System Data 2 3pole 3pole Trip type with 2phase faults
1pole leading
1pole lagging
1201 FCT Distance Dis. General ON ON Distance protection is
OFF
1202 Minimum Iph> Dis. General 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.10 A Phase Current threshold for dist.
meas.
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 0.50 A
1203 3I0> Threshold Dis. General 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A 0.10 A 3I0 threshold for neutral current
pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A 0.50 A
1204 3U0> Threshold Dis. General 1 .. 100 V; 5V 3U0 threshold zero seq. voltage
pickup
1205 3U0> COMP/ISOL. Dis. General 10 .. 200 V; 40 V 3U0> pickup (comp/ isol. star-
point)
1206 T3I0 1PHAS Dis. General 0.00 .. 0.50 sec; 0.04 sec Delay 1ph-faults (comp/isol. star-
point)
1207A 3I0>/ Iphmax Dis. General 0.05 .. 0.30 0.10 3I0>-pickup-stabilisation (3I0>
/Iphmax)
1208 SER-COMP. Dis. General NO NO Series compensated line
YES
1209A E/F recognition Dis. General 3I0> OR 3U0> 3I0> OR 3U0> criterion of earth fault recognition
3I0> AND 3U0>
1210 Start Timers Dis. General on Dis. Pickup on Dis. Pickup Condition for zone timer start
on Zone Pickup
1211 Distance Angle P.System Data 2 30 .. 90 85 Angle of inclination, distance
Dis. General charact.
1212 R-reserve Dis. General NO NO Reserve for fault resistance
YES
1215 Paral.Line Comp Dis. General NO YES Mutual coupling parall.line com-
YES pensation
1220 PHASE PREF.2phe Dis. General L3 (L1) ACYCLIC L3 (L1) ACYCLIC Phase preference for 2ph-e faults
L1 (L3) ACYCLIC
L2 (L1) ACYCLIC
L1 (L2) ACYCLIC
L3 (L2) ACYCLIC
L2 (L3) ACYCLIC
L3 (L1) CYCLIC
L1 (L3) CYCLIC
All loops
1221A 2Ph-E faults Dis. General Block leading Block leading Loop selection with 2Ph-E faults
Block lagging
All loops
- loops only
-E loops only
1223 Uph-ph unbal. Dis. General 5 .. 50 % 25 % Max Uph-ph unbal. for 1ph Flt.
detection
730 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.7 Settings

1232 SOTF zone Dis. General PICKUP Inactive Instantaneous trip after Switch-
Zone Z1B OnToFault
Inactive
Z1B undirect.
1241 R load (-E) Dis. General 1A 0.100 .. 600.000 ; R load, minimum Load Imped-
ance (ph-e)
5A 0.020 .. 120.000 ;
1242 load (-E) Dis. General 20 .. 60 45 PHI load, maximum Load Angle
(ph-e)
1243 R load (-) Dis. General 1A 0.100 .. 600.000 ; R load, minimum Load Imped-
ance (ph-ph)
5A 0.020 .. 120.000 ;
1244 load (-) Dis. General 20 .. 60 45 PHI load, maximum Load Angle
(ph-ph)
1301 Op. mode Z1 Dis. Quadril. Forward Forward Operating mode Z1
Dis. Circle Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
1302 R(Z1) - Dis. Quadril. 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 1.250 R(Z1), Resistance for ph-ph-
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.250
1303 X(Z1) Dis. Quadril. 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 2.500 X(Z1), Reactance
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.500
1304 RE(Z1) -E Dis. Quadril. 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 2.500 RE(Z1), Resistance for ph-e
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.500
1305 T1-1phase Dis. General 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1-1phase, delay for single
Dis. Quadril. phase faults
Dis. Circle
1306 T1-multi-phase Dis. General 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1multi-ph, delay for multi phase
Dis. Quadril. faults
Dis. Circle
1307 Zone Reduction Dis. Quadril. 0 .. 45 0 Zone Reduction Angle (load
compensation)
1311 Op. mode Z2 Dis. Quadril. Forward Forward Operating mode Z2
Dis. Circle Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.500
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 1.000
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 1.000
1315 T2-1phase Dis. General 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.30 sec T2-1phase, delay for single
Dis. Quadril. phase faults
Dis. Circle
1316 T2-multi-phase Dis. General 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.30 sec T2multi-ph, delay for multi phase
Dis. Circle
1317A Trip 1pole Z2 Dis. General NO NO Single pole trip for faults in Z2
Dis. Quadril. YES
Dis. Circle
1321 Op. mode Z3 Dis. Quadril. Forward Reverse Operating mode Z3
Dis. Circle Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 1.000
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.000
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.000
1325 T3 DELAY Dis. General 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.60 sec T3 delay
Dis. Quadril.
Dis. Circle
7SA6 Manual 731

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix

1331 Op. mode Z4 Dis. Quadril. Forward Non-Directional Operating mode Z4
Dis. Circle Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
Dis. Quadril.
Dis. Circle
1341 Op. mode Z5 Dis. Quadril. Forward Inactive Operating mode Z5
Dis. Circle Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
1343 X(Z5)+ Dis. Quadril. 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 12.000 X(Z5)+, Reactance for Forward
direction
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
Dis. Quadril.
Dis. Circle
1346 X(Z5)- Dis. Quadril. 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 4.000 X(Z5)-, Reactance for Reverse
direction
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.800
1351 Op. mode Z1B Dis. Quadril. Forward Forward Operating mode Z1B (overrreach
Dis. Circle Reverse zone)
Non-Directional
Inactive
1352 R(Z1B) - Dis. Quadril. 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 1.500 R(Z1B), Resistance for ph-ph-
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.300
1353 X(Z1B) Dis. Quadril. 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 3.000 X(Z1B), Reactance
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.600
1354 RE(Z1B) -E Dis. Quadril. 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 3.000 RE(Z1B), Resistance for ph-e
faults
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.600
1355 T1B-1phase Dis. General 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1B-1phase, delay for single ph.
Dis. Circle
1356 T1B-multi-phase Dis. General 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1B-multi-ph, delay for multi ph.
Dis. Circle
1357 1st AR -> Z1B Dis. General NO YES Z1B enabled before 1st AR (int.
Dis. Quadril. YES or ext.)
Dis. Circle
1502 ZR(Z1) Dis. Circle 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 2.500 ZR(Z1), radius of circle Z1
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.500
1503 ALPHA(Z1) Dis. Circle 10 .. 90 ; 0 60 ALPHA(Z1), angle for R-reserve
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 1.000
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.000
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 2.400
732 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.7 Settings

1552 ZR(Z1B) Dis. Circle 1A 0.050 .. 600.000 3.000 ZR(Z1B), radius of circle Z1B
5A 0.010 .. 120.000 0.600
1553 ALPHA(Z1B) Dis. Circle 10 .. 90 ; 0 60 ALPHA(Z1B), angle for R-
reserve
1601 PROGAM U/I Dis. General LE:Uphe/LL:Uphp LE:Uphe/LL:Uphp Pickup program U/I
LE:Uphp/LL:Uphp
LE:Uphe/LL:Uphe
LE:Uphe/LL:I>>
1602 DELAY FORW. PU Dis. General 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 1.20 sec Trip delay for Forward-PICKUP
Dis. General
1603 DEL. NON-DIR PU Dis. General 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 1.20 sec Trip delay for non-directional
Dis. General PICKUP
1610 Iph>> Dis. General 1A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 1.80 A Iph>> Pickup (overcurrent)
5A 1.25 .. 50.00 A 9.00 A
1611 Iph> Dis. General 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 0.20 A Iph> Pickup (minimum current)
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 1.00 A
1612 Uph-e (I>>) Dis. General 20 .. 70 V 48 V Undervoltage (ph-e) at Iph>>
1613 Uph-e (I>) Dis. General 20 .. 70 V 48 V Undervoltage (ph-e) at Iph>
1614 Uph-ph (I>>) Dis. General 40 .. 130 V 80 V Undervoltage (ph-ph) at Iph>>
1615 Uph-ph (I>) Dis. General 40 .. 130 V 80 V Undervoltage (ph-ph) at Iph>
1616 Iphi> Dis. General 1A 0.10 .. 8.00 A 0.50 A Iphi> Pickup (minimum current at
phi>)
5A 0.50 .. 40.00 A 2.50 A
1617 Uph-e (Iphi>) Dis. General 20 .. 70 V 48 V Undervoltage (ph-e) at Iphi>
1618 Uph-ph (Iphi>) Dis. General 40 .. 130 V 80 V Undervoltage (ph-ph) at Iphi>
1619A EFFECT Dis. General forward&reverse forward&reverse Effective direction of phi-pickup
Forward
1620 > Dis. General 30 .. 60 50 PHI> pickup (lower setpoint)
1621 < Dis. General 90 .. 120 110 PHI< pickup (upper setpoint)
1630A 1ph FAULTS Dis. General PHASE-EARTH PHASE-EARTH 1ph-pickup loop selection (PU
PHASE-PHASEONLY w/o earth)
2002 P/S Op. mode Power Swing All zones block All zones block Power Swing Operating mode
Z1/Z1B block
Z2 to Z5 block
Z1,Z1B,Z2 block
2006 PowerSwing trip Power Swing NO NO Power swing trip
YES
2007 Trip DELAY P/S Power Swing 0.08 .. 5.00 sec; 0 0.08 sec Trip delay after Power Swing
Blocking
2101 FCT Telep. Dis. Teleprot. Dist. ON ON Teleprotection for Distance prot.
PUTT (Z1B) is
POTT
OFF
2102 Type of Line Teleprot. Dist. Two Terminals Two Terminals Type of Line
Three terminals
2103A Send Prolong. Teleprot. Dist. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Time for send signal prolongation
2107A Delay for alarm Teleprot. Dist. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 10.00 sec Time Delay for Alarm
2108 Release Delay Teleprot. Dist. 0.000 .. 30.000 sec 0.000 sec Time Delay for release after
pickup
2109A TrBlk Wait Time Teleprot. Dist. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.04 sec Transient Block.: Duration exter-
nal flt.
2110A TrBlk BlockTime Teleprot. Dist. 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Transient Block.: Blk.T. after ext.
flt.
2201 FCT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trip ON OFF Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)
OFF
2202 Trip Time DELAY DTT Direct Trip 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.01 sec Trip Time Delay
2401 FCT SOTF-O/C SOTF Overcurr. ON ON Inst. High Speed SOTF-O/C is
OFF
2404 I>>> SOTF Overcurr. 1A 0.10 .. 25.00 A 2.50 A I>>> Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 125.00 A 12.50 A
7SA6 Manual 733

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix

2501 FCT Weak Infeed Weak Infeed OFF ECHO only Weak Infeed function is
ECHO only
ECHO and TRIP
2502A Trip/Echo DELAY Weak Infeed 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.04 sec Trip / Echo Delay after carrier
receipt
2503A Trip EXTENSION Weak Infeed 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Trip Extension / Echo Impulse
time
2504A Echo BLOCK Time Weak Infeed 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Echo Block Time
2505 UNDERVOLTAGE Weak Infeed 2 .. 70 V 25 V Undervoltage (ph-e)
2509 Echo:1channel Weak Infeed NO NO Echo logic: Dis and EF on
YES common channel
2510 Uphe< Factor Weak Infeed 0.10 .. 1.00 0.70 Factor for undervoltage Uphe<
2511 Time const. Weak Infeed 1 .. 60 sec 5 sec Time constant Tau
2512A Rec. Ext. Weak Infeed 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.65 sec Reception extension
2513A T 3I0> Ext. Weak Infeed 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.60 sec 3I0> exceeded extension
2514 3I0> Threshold Weak Infeed 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A 3I0 threshold for neutral current
pickup
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
2515 TM Weak Infeed 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.40 sec WI delay single pole
2516 TT Weak Infeed 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 1.00 sec WI delay multi pole
2517 1pol. Trip Weak Infeed ON ON Single pole WI trip allowed
OFF
2518 1pol. with 3I0 Weak Infeed ON ON Single pole WI trip with 3I0
OFF
2519 3pol. Trip Weak Infeed ON ON Three pole WI trip allowed
OFF
2520 T 3I0> alarm Weak Infeed 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 10.00 sec 3I0> exceeded delay for alarm
2530 WI non delayed Weak Infeed ON ON WI non delayed
OFF
2531 WI delayed Weak Infeed ON by receive fail WI delayed
by receive fail
2601 Operating Mode Back-Up O/C ON:with VT loss ON:with VT loss Operating mode
ON:always activ
OFF
2610 Iph>> Back-Up O/C 1A 0.10 .. 25.00 A; 2.00 A Iph>> Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 10.00 A
2611 T Iph>> Back-Up O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.30 sec T Iph>> Time delay
2612 3I0>> PICKUP Back-Up O/C 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.50 A 3I0>> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 2.50 A
2613 T 3I0>> Back-Up O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec T 3I0>> Time delay
2614 I>> Telep/BI Back-Up O/C NO YES Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
2615 I>> SOTF Back-Up O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip after Switch-
YES OnToFault
2620 Iph> Back-Up O/C 1A 0.10 .. 25.00 A; 1.50 A Iph> Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 7.50 A
2621 T Iph> Back-Up O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.50 sec T Iph> Time delay
2622 3I0> Back-Up O/C 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.20 A 3I0> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 1.00 A
2623 T 3I0> Back-Up O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec T 3I0> Time delay
2624 I> Telep/BI Back-Up O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
2625 I> SOTF Back-Up O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip after Switch-
YES OnToFault
2630 Iph> STUB Back-Up O/C 1A 0.10 .. 25.00 A; 1.50 A Iph> STUB Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 125.00 A; 7.50 A
2631 T Iph STUB Back-Up O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.30 sec T Iph STUB Time delay
2632 3I0> STUB Back-Up O/C 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A; 0.20 A 3I0> STUB Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A; 1.00 A
2633 T 3I0 STUB Back-Up O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec T 3I0 STUB Time delay
734 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.7 Settings

2634 I-STUB Telep/BI Back-Up O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
2635 I-STUB SOTF Back-Up O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip after Switch-
YES OnToFault
2640 Ip> Back-Up O/C 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A; A Ip> Pickup
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A; A
2642 T Ip Time Dial Back-Up O/C 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 sec T Ip Time Dial
2643 Time Dial TD Ip Back-Up O/C 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 5.00 Time Dial TD Ip
2646 T Ip Add Back-Up O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec T Ip Additional Time Delay
2650 3I0p PICKUP Back-Up O/C 1A 0.05 .. 4.00 A; A 3I0p Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 20.00 A; A
2652 T 3I0p TimeDial Back-Up O/C 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 sec T 3I0p Time Dial
2653 TimeDial TD3I0p Back-Up O/C 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 5.00 Time Dial TD 3I0p
2656 T 3I0p Add Back-Up O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec T 3I0p Additional Time Delay
2660 IEC Curve Back-Up O/C Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
LongTimeInverse
2661 ANSI Curve Back-Up O/C Inverse Inverse ANSI Curve
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
2670 I(3I0)p Tele/BI Back-Up O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
2671 I(3I0)p SOTF Back-Up O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip after Switch-
YES OnToFault
2680 SOTF Time DELAY Back-Up O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Trip time delay after SOTF
2801 DMD Interval Demand meter 15 Min., 1 Sub 60 Min., 1 Sub Demand Calculation Intervals
15 Min., 3 Subs
15 Min.,15 Subs
30 Min., 1 Sub
60 Min., 1 Sub
2802 DMD Sync.Time Demand meter On The Hour On The Hour Demand Synchronization Time
15 After Hour
30 After Hour
45 After Hour
2811 MinMax cycRESET Min/Max meter NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset Function
YES
2812 MiMa RESET TIME Min/Max meter 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
2813 MiMa RESETCYCLE Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle Period
2814 MinMaxRES.START Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in
2901 MEASURE. SUPERV Measurem.Superv ON ON Measurement Supervision
OFF
2902A BALANCE U-LIMIT Measurem.Superv 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance
Monitoring
2903A BAL. FACTOR U Measurem.Superv 0.58 .. 0.95 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Monitor
2904A BALANCE I LIMIT Measurem.Superv 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
2905A BAL. FACTOR I Measurem.Superv 0.10 .. 0.95 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Monitor
2906A I THRESHOLD Measurem.Superv 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.10 A Summated Current Monitoring
Threshold
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 0.50 A
2907A I FACTOR Measurem.Superv 0.00 .. 0.95 0.10 Summated Current Monitoring
Factor
2908A T BAL. U LIMIT Measurem.Superv 5 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Balance Factor for Voltage
Monitor
2909A T BAL. I LIMIT Measurem.Superv 5 .. 100 sec 5 sec T Current Balance Monitor
2910 FUSE FAIL MON. Measurem.Superv ON ON Fuse Failure Monitor
OFF
2911A FFM U>(min) Measurem.Superv 10 .. 100 V 30 V Minimum Voltage Threshold U>
7SA6 Manual 735

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix

2912A FFM I< (max) Measurem.Superv 1A 0.10 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Maximum Current Threshold I<
5A 0.50 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
2913A FFM U<max (3ph) Measurem.Superv 2 .. 100 V 5V Maximum Voltage Threshold U<
(3phase)
2914A FFM Idelta (3p) Measurem.Superv 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.10 A Delta Current Threshold
(3phase)
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.50 A
2915 V-Supervision Measurem.Superv w/ CURR.SUP w/ CURR.SUP Voltage Failure Supervision
w/ I> & CBaux
OFF
2916A T V-Supervision Measurem.Superv 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 3.00 sec Delay Voltage Failure Supervi-
sion
2921 T mcb Measurem.Superv 0 .. 30 ms 0 ms VT mcb operating time
2941 A Measurem.Superv 0 .. 359 200 Limit setting PhiA
2942 B Measurem.Superv 0 .. 359 340 Limit setting PhiB
2943 I1> Measurem.Superv 1A 0.05 .. 2.00 A 0.05 A Minimum value I1>
5A 0.25 .. 10.00 A 0.25 A
2944 U1> Measurem.Superv 2 .. 70 V 20 V Minimum value U1>
3001 Sens. Earth Flt Sens. Earth Flt Alarm Only Alarm Only Sensitive Earth Flt.(comp/ isol.
ON: with Trip starp.)
OFF
3002 3U0> Sens. Earth Flt 1 .. 150 V 50 V 3U0> pickup
3003 Uph-e min Sens. Earth Flt 10 .. 100 V 40 V Uph-e min of faulted phase
3004 Uph-e max Sens. Earth Flt 10 .. 100 V 75 V Uph-e max of healthy phases
3005 3I0> Sens. Earth Flt 0.003 .. 1.000 A 0.050 A 3I0> Release directional element
3006 T Sens.E/F Sens. Earth Flt 0.00 .. 320.00 sec 1.00 sec Time delay for sens. E/F detec-
tion
3007 T 3U0> Sens. Earth Flt 0.00 .. 320.00 sec 0.00 sec Time delay for sens. E/F trip
3008A TRIP Direction Sens. Earth Flt Forward Forward Direction for sens. E/F trip
Reverse
Non-Directional
3010 CT Err. I1 Sens. Earth Flt 0.003 .. 1.600 A 0.050 A Current I1 for CT Angle Error
3011 CT Err. F1 Sens. Earth Flt 0.0 .. 5.0 0.0 CT Angle Error at I1
3012 CT Err. I2 Sens. Earth Flt 0.003 .. 1.600 A 1.000 A Current I2 for CT Angle Error
3013 CT Err. F2 Sens. Earth Flt 0.0 .. 5.0 0.0 CT Angle Error at I2
3101 FCT EarthFltO/C Earth Fault O/C ON ON Earth Fault overcurrent function
OFF is
3102 BLOCK for Dist. Earth Fault O/C every PICKUP every PICKUP Block E/F for Distance protection
1phase PICKUP
multiph. PICKUP
NO
3103 BLOCK 1pDeadTim Earth Fault O/C YES YES Block E/F for 1pole Dead time
NO
3104A Iph-STAB. Slope Earth Fault O/C 0 .. 30 % 10 % Stabilisation Slope with Iphase
3105 3IoMin Teleprot Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.01 .. 1.00 A 0.50 A 3Io-Min threshold for Teleprot.
schemes
5A 0.05 .. 5.00 A 2.50 A
3105 3IoMin Teleprot Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.003 .. 1.000 A 0.500 A 3Io-Min threshold for Teleprot.
schemes
5A 0.015 .. 5.000 A 2.500 A
3109 Trip 1pole E/F Earth Fault O/C YES YES Single pole trip with earth flt.prot.
NO
3110 Op. mode 3I0>>> Earth Fault O/C Forward Inactive Operating mode
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
3111 3I0>>> Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 4.00 A 3I0>>> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 20.00 A
3112 T 3I0>>> Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.30 sec T 3I0>>> Time delay
3113 3I0>>> Telep/BI Earth Fault O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
3114 3I0>>>SOTF-Trip Earth Fault O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip after Switch-
YES OnToFault
736 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.7 Settings

3115 3I0>>>InrushBlk Earth Fault O/C NO NO Inrush Blocking
YES
3116 BLK /1p 3I0>>> Earth Fault O/C YES YES Block 3I0>>> during 1pole dead
No (non-dir.) time
3117 Trip 1p 3I0>>> Earth Fault O/C YES YES Single pole trip with 3I0>>>
NO
3120 Op. mode 3I0>> Earth Fault O/C Forward Inactive Operating mode
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
3121 3I0>> Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 2.00 A 3I0>> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 10.00 A
3122 T 3I0>> Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.60 sec T 3I0>> Time Delay
3123 3I0>> Telep/BI Earth Fault O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
3124 3I0>> SOTF-Trip Earth Fault O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip after Switch-
YES OnToFault
3125 3I0>> InrushBlk Earth Fault O/C NO NO Inrush Blocking
YES
3126 BLK /1p 3I0>> Earth Fault O/C YES YES Block 3I0>> during 1pole dead
No (non-dir.) time
3127 Trip 1p 3I0>> Earth Fault O/C YES YES Single pole trip with 3I0>>
NO
3130 Op. mode 3I0> Earth Fault O/C Forward Inactive Operating mode
Reverse
Non-Directional
Inactive
3131 3I0> Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 1.00 A 3I0> Pickup
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 5.00 A
3131 3I0> Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.003 .. 25.000 A 1.000 A 3I0> Pickup
5A 0.015 .. 125.000 A 5.000 A
3132 T 3I0> Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.90 sec T 3I0> Time Delay
3133 3I0> Telep/BI Earth Fault O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
YES prot./BI
3134 3I0> SOTF-Trip Earth Fault O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip after Switch-
YES OnToFault
3135 3I0> InrushBlk Earth Fault O/C NO NO Inrush Blocking
YES
3136 BLK /1p 3I0> Earth Fault O/C YES YES Block 3I0> during 1pole dead
No (non-dir.) time
3137 Trip 1p 3I0> Earth Fault O/C YES YES Single pole trip with 3I0>
NO
3140 Op. mode 3I0p Earth Fault O/C Forward Inactive Operating mode
Earth Fault O/C Reverse
Earth Fault O/C Non-Directional
Earth Fault O/C Inactive
3141 3I0p PICKUP Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.05 .. 25.00 A 1.00 A 3I0p Pickup
Earth Fault O/C
5A 0.25 .. 125.00 A 5.00 A
Earth Fault O/C
Earth Fault O/C
3141 3I0p PICKUP Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.003 .. 25.000 A 1.000 A 3I0p Pickup
Earth Fault O/C
5A 0.015 .. 125.000 A 5.000 A
Earth Fault O/C
Earth Fault O/C
3142 3I0p MinT-DELAY Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 1.20 sec 3I0p Minimum Time Delay
3143 3I0p Time Dial Earth Fault O/C 0.05 .. 3.00 sec; 0.50 sec 3I0p Time Dial
3144 3I0p Time Dial Earth Fault O/C 0.50 .. 15.00 ; 5.00 3I0p Time Dial
3145 3I0p Time Dial Earth Fault O/C 0.05 .. 15.00 sec; 1.35 sec 3I0p Time Dial
3146 3I0p MaxT-DELAY Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 5.80 sec 3I0p Maximum Time Delay
3147 Add.T-DELAY Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 1.20 sec Additional Time Delay
Earth Fault O/C
Earth Fault O/C
Earth Fault O/C
7SA6 Manual 737

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix

3148 3I0p Telep/BI Earth Fault O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-
Earth Fault O/C YES prot./BI
Earth Fault O/C
Earth Fault O/C
3149 3I0p SOTF-Trip Earth Fault O/C NO NO Instantaneous trip after Switch-
Earth Fault O/C YES OnToFault
Earth Fault O/C
Earth Fault O/C
3150 3I0p InrushBlk Earth Fault O/C NO NO Inrush Blocking
Earth Fault O/C YES
Earth Fault O/C
Earth Fault O/C
3151 IEC Curve Earth Fault O/C Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
LongTimeInverse
3152 ANSI Curve Earth Fault O/C Inverse Inverse ANSI Curve
Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inv.
Very Inverse
Extremely Inv.
Definite Inv.
3153 LOG Curve Earth Fault O/C Log. inverse Log. inverse LOGARITHMIC Curve
3154 3I0p Startpoint Earth Fault O/C 1.0 .. 4.0 1.1 Start point of inverse characteris-
tic
3155 k Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 3.00 sec 0.50 sec k-factor for Sr-characteristic
3156 S ref Earth Fault O/C 1A 1 .. 100 VA 10 VA S ref for Sr-characteristic
5A 5 .. 500 VA 50 VA
3157 BLK /1p 3I0p Earth Fault O/C YES YES Block 3I0p during 1pole dead
Earth Fault O/C No (non-dir.) time
Earth Fault O/C
Earth Fault O/C
3158 Trip 1p 3I0p Earth Fault O/C YES YES Single pole trip with 3I0p
Earth Fault O/C NO
Earth Fault O/C
Earth Fault O/C
3160 POLARIZATION Earth Fault O/C U0 + IY or U2 U0 + IY or U2 Polarization
U0 + IY
with IY only
with U2 and I2
zero seq. power
3162A Dir. ALPHA Earth Fault O/C 0 .. 360 338 ALPHA, lower angle for forward
direction
3163A Dir. BETA Earth Fault O/C 0 .. 360 122 BETA, upper angle for forward di-
rection
3164 3U0> Earth Fault O/C 0.5 .. 10.0 V 0.5 V Min. zero seq.voltage 3U0 for po-
larizing
3165 IY> Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.05 A Min. earth current IY for polariz-
ing
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.25 A
3166 3U2> Earth Fault O/C 0.5 .. 10.0 V 0.5 V Min. neg. seq. polarizing voltage
3U2
3167 3I2> Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.05 .. 1.00 A 0.05 A Min. neg. seq. polarizing current
3I2
5A 0.25 .. 5.00 A 0.25 A
3168 PHI comp Earth Fault O/C 0 .. 360 255 Compensation angle PHI comp.
for Sr
3169 S forward Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.1 .. 10.0 VA 0.3 VA Forward direction power thresh-
old
5A 0.5 .. 50.0 VA 1.5 VA
3170 2nd InrushRest Earth Fault O/C 10 .. 45 % 15 % 2nd harmonic ratio for inrush re-
straint
3171 Imax InrushRest Earth Fault O/C 1A 0.50 .. 25.00 A 7.50 A Max.Current, overriding inrush
restraint
5A 2.50 .. 125.00 A 37.50 A
3172 SOTF Op. Mode Earth Fault O/C PICKUP PICKUP+DIRECT. Instantaneous mode after
PICKUP+DIRECT. SwitchOnToFault
3173 SOTF Time DELAY Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Trip time delay after SOTF
738 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.7 Settings

3174 BLK for DisZone Earth Fault O/C in zone Z1 in each zone Block E/F for Distance Protection
in zone Z1/Z1B Pickup
in each zone
3182 3U0>(U0 inv) Earth Fault O/C 1.0 .. 10.0 V 5.0 V 3U0> setpoint
3183 U0inv. minimum Earth Fault O/C 0.1 .. 5.0 V 0.2 V Minimum voltage U0min for T-
>oo
3184 T forw. (U0inv) Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 0.90 sec T-forward Time delay (U0inv)
3185 T rev. (U0inv) Earth Fault O/C 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 1.20 sec T-reverse Time delay (U0inv)
3201 FCT Telep. E/F Teleprot. E/F ON ON Teleprotection for Earth Fault
OFF O/C
3202 Line Config. Teleprot. E/F Two Terminals Two Terminals Line Configuration
Three terminals
3203A Send Prolong. Teleprot. E/F 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Time for send signal prolongation
3207A Delay for alarm Teleprot. E/F 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 10.00 sec Unblocking: Time Delay for
Alarm
3208 Release Delay Teleprot. E/F 0.000 .. 30.000 sec 0.000 sec Time Delay for release after
pickup
3209A TrBlk Wait Time Teleprot. E/F 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.04 sec Transient Block.: Duration exter-
nal flt.
3210A TrBlk BlockTime Teleprot. E/F 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.05 sec Transient Block.: Blk.T. after ext.
flt.
3401 AUTO RECLOSE Autoreclosure OFF ON Auto-Reclose function
ON
3402 CB? 1.TRIP Autoreclosure YES NO CB ready interrogation at 1st trip
NO
3403 T-RECLAIM Autoreclosure 0.50 .. 300.00 sec 3.00 sec Reclaim time after successful AR
cycle
3403 T-RECLAIM Autoreclosure 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 0 3.00 sec Reclaim time after successful AR
cycle
3404 T-BLOCK MC Autoreclosure 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after
manual close
3406 EV. FLT. RECOG. Autoreclosure with PICKUP with TRIP Evolving fault recognition
with TRIP
3407 EV. FLT. MODE Autoreclosure blocks AR starts 3p AR Evolving fault (during the dead
starts 3p AR time)
3408 T-Start MONITOR Autoreclosure 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 0.20 sec AR start-signal monitoring time
3409 CB TIME OUT Autoreclosure 0.01 .. 300.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision
Time
3410 T RemoteClose Autoreclosure 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; sec Send delay for remote close
command
3411A T-DEAD EXT. Autoreclosure 0.50 .. 300.00 sec; sec Maximum dead time extension
3420 AR w/ DIST. Autoreclosure YES YES AR with distance protection
NO
3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C Autoreclosure YES YES AR with switch-onto-fault over-
NO current
3422 AR w/ W/I Autoreclosure YES YES AR with weak infeed tripping
NO
3423 AR w/ EF-O/C Autoreclosure YES YES AR with earth fault overcurrent
NO prot.
3424 AR w/ DTT Autoreclosure YES YES AR with direct transfer trip
NO
3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C Autoreclosure YES YES AR with back-up overcurrent
NO
3430 AR TRIP 3pole Autoreclosure YES YES 3pole TRIP by AR
Autoreclosure NO
3431 DLC or RDT Autoreclosure WITHOUT WITHOUT Dead Line Check or Reduced
RDT Dead Time
DLC
3433 T-ACTION ADT Autoreclosure 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time
3434 T-MAX ADT Autoreclosure 0.50 .. 3000.00 sec 5.00 sec Maximum dead time
3435 ADT 1p allowed Autoreclosure YES NO 1pole TRIP allowed
NO
3436 ADT CB? CLOSE Autoreclosure YES NO CB ready interrogation before re-
NO closing
7SA6 Manual 739

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix

3437 ADT SynRequest Autoreclosure YES NO Request for synchro-check after
NO 3pole AR
3438 T U-stable Autoreclosure 0.10 .. 30.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time for dead/ live
Autoreclosure voltage
3440 U-live> Autoreclosure 30 .. 90 V 48 V Voltage threshold for live line or
Autoreclosure bus
3441 U-dead< Autoreclosure 2 .. 70 V 30 V Voltage threshold for dead line or
Autoreclosure bus
3450 1.AR: START Autoreclosure YES YES Start of AR allowed in this cycle
NO
3451 1.AR: T-ACTION Autoreclosure 0.01 .. 300.00 sec; 0.20 sec Action time
3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt Autoreclosure 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults
3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip Autoreclosure 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; 1.20 sec Dead time after 1pole trip
3458 1.AR: Tdead EV. Autoreclosure 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault
3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE Autoreclosure YES NO CB ready interrogation before re-
NO closing
3460 1.AR SynRequest Autoreclosure YES NO Request for synchro-check after
NO 3pole AR
3461 2.AR: START Autoreclosure YES NO AR start allowed in this cycle
NO
3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip Autoreclosure 0.01 .. 1800.00 sec; sec Dead time after 1pole trip
NO closing
NO 3pole AR
NO
NO closing
NO 3pole AR
NO
NO closing
NO 3pole AR
740 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.7 Settings

3501 FCT Synchronism Sync. Check ON ON Synchronism and Voltage Check
OFF function
ON:w/o CloseCmd
3502 Dead Volt. Thr. Sync. Check 1 .. 100 V 5V Voltage threshold dead line / bus
3503 Live Volt. Thr. Sync. Check 20 .. 125 V 90 V Voltage threshold live line / bus
3504 Umax Sync. Check 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum permissible voltage
3507 T-SYN. DURATION Sync. Check 0.01 .. 600.00 sec; 1.00 sec Maximum duration of synchro-
nism-check
3508 T SYNC-STAB Sync. Check 0.00 .. 30.00 sec 0.00 sec Synchronous condition stability
timer
3509 SyncCB Sync. Check (Setting options depend None Synchronizable circuit breaker
on configuration)
3510 Op.mode with AR Sync. Check with T-CB close w/o T-CB close Operating mode with AR
w/o T-CB close
3511 AR maxVolt.Diff Sync. Check 1.0 .. 60.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference
3512 AR maxFreq.Diff Sync. Check 0.03 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
3513 AR maxAngleDiff Sync. Check 2 .. 80 10 Maximum angle difference
3515A AR SYNC-CHECK Sync. Check YES YES AR at Usy2>, Usy1>, and Synchr.
NO
3516 AR Usy1<Usy2> Sync. Check YES NO AR at Usy1< and Usy2>
NO
3517 AR Usy1>Usy2< Sync. Check YES NO AR at Usy1> and Usy2<
NO
3518 AR Usy1<Usy2< Sync. Check YES NO AR at Usy1< and Usy2<
NO
3519 AR OVERRIDE Sync. Check YES NO Override of any check before AR
NO
3530 Op.mode with MC Sync. Check with T-CB close w/o T-CB close Operating mode with Man.Cl
w/o T-CB close
3531 MC maxVolt.Diff Sync. Check 1.0 .. 60.0 V 2.0 V Maximum voltage difference
3532 MC maxFreq.Diff Sync. Check 0.03 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
3533 MC maxAngleDiff Sync. Check 2 .. 80 10 Maximum angle difference
3535A MC SYNCHR Sync. Check YES YES Manual Close at Usy2>, Usy1>,
NO and Synchr
3536 MC Usy1< Usy2> Sync. Check YES NO Manual Close at Usy1< and
NO Usy2>
3537 MC Usy1> Usy2< Sync. Check YES NO Manual Close at Usy1> and
NO Usy2<
3538 MC Usy1< Usy2< Sync. Check YES NO Manual Close at Usy1< and
NO Usy2<
3539 MC OVERRIDE Sync. Check YES NO Override of any check before
NO Man.Cl
3601 O/U FREQ. f1 Frequency Prot. ON: Alarm only ON: Alarm only Over/Under Frequency Protec-
ON: with Trip tion stage f1
OFF
3602 f1 PICKUP Frequency Prot. 45.50 .. 54.50 Hz 49.50 Hz f1 Pickup
3604 T f1 Frequency Prot. 0.00 .. 600.00 sec 60.00 sec T f1 Time Delay
OFF
OFF
OFF
7SA6 Manual 741

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix

3701 Uph-e>(>) Voltage Prot. OFF OFF Operating mode Uph-e overvolt-
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3702 Uph-e> Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 170.0 V; 85.0 V Uph-e> Pickup
3703 T Uph-e> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T Uph-e> Time Delay
3704 Uph-e>> Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 170.0 V; 100.0 V Uph-e>> Pickup
3705 T Uph-e>> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T Uph-e>> Time Delay
3709A Uph-e>(>) RESET Voltage Prot. 0.30 .. 0.99 0.98 Uph-e>(>) Reset ratio
3711 Uph-ph>(>) Voltage Prot. OFF OFF Operating mode Uph-ph over-
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3712 Uph-ph> Voltage Prot. 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 150.0 V Uph-ph> Pickup
3713 T Uph-ph> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T Uph-ph> Time Delay
3714 Uph-ph>> Voltage Prot. 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 175.0 V Uph-ph>> Pickup
3715 T Uph-ph>> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T Uph-ph>> Time Delay
3719A Uphph>(>) RESET Voltage Prot. 0.30 .. 0.99 0.98 Uph-ph>(>) Reset ratio
3721 3U0>(>) (or Ux) Voltage Prot. OFF OFF Operating mode 3U0 (or Ux) ov-
Alarm Only ervoltage
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3722 3U0> Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 220.0 V; 30.0 V 3U0> Pickup (or Ux>)
3723 T 3U0> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T 3U0> Time Delay (or T Ux>)
3724 3U0>> Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 220.0 V; 50.0 V 3U0>> Pickup (or Ux>>)
3725 T 3U0>> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T 3U0>> Time Delay (or T Ux>>)
3728A 3U0>(>) Stabil. Voltage Prot. ON ON 3U0>(>): Stabilization 3U0-Mea-
OFF surement
3729A 3U0>(>) RESET Voltage Prot. 0.30 .. 0.99 0.95 3U0>(>) Reset ratio (or Ux)
3731 U1>(>) Voltage Prot. OFF OFF Operating mode U1 overvoltage
Alarm Only prot.
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3732 U1> Voltage Prot. 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 150.0 V U1> Pickup
3733 T U1> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T U1> Time Delay
3734 U1>> Voltage Prot. 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 175.0 V U1>> Pickup
3735 T U1>> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T U1>> Time Delay
3736 U1> Compound Voltage Prot. OFF OFF U1> with Compounding
ON
3737 U1>> Compound Voltage Prot. OFF OFF U1>> with Compounding
ON
3739A U1>(>) RESET Voltage Prot. 0.30 .. 0.99 0.98 U1>(>) Reset ratio
3741 U2>(>) Voltage Prot. OFF OFF Operating mode U2 overvoltage
Alarm Only prot.
ON
U>Alarm U>>Trip
3742 U2> Voltage Prot. 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 30.0 V U2> Pickup
3743 T U2> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T U2> Time Delay
3744 U2>> Voltage Prot. 2.0 .. 220.0 V; 50.0 V U2>> Pickup
3745 T U2>> Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T U2>> Time Delay
3749A U2>(>) RESET Voltage Prot. 0.30 .. 0.99 0.98 U2>(>) Reset ratio
3751 Uph-e<(<) Voltage Prot. OFF OFF Operating mode Uph-e under-
ON
U<Alarm U<<Trip
3752 Uph-e< Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 30.0 V Uph-e< Pickup
3753 T Uph-e< Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T Uph-e< Time Delay
3754 Uph-e<< Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 10.0 V Uph-e<< Pickup
742 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.7 Settings

3755 T Uph-e<< Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T Uph-e<< Time Delay
3758 CURR.SUP. Uphe< Voltage Prot. ON ON Current supervision (Uph-e)
OFF
3759A Uph-e<(<) RESET Voltage Prot. 1.01 .. 1.20 1.05 Uph-e<(<) Reset ratio
3761 Uph-ph<(<) Voltage Prot. OFF OFF Operating mode Uph-ph under-
ON
U<Alarm U<<Trip
3762 Uph-ph< Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 175.0 V; 0 50.0 V Uph-ph< Pickup
3763 T Uph-ph< Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T Uph-ph< Time Delay
3764 Uph-ph<< Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 175.0 V; 0 17.0 V Uph-ph<< Pickup
3765 T Uphph<< Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T Uph-ph<< Time Delay
3768 CURR.SUP.Uphph< Voltage Prot. ON ON Current supervision (Uph-ph)
OFF
3769A Uphph<(<) RESET Voltage Prot. 1.01 .. 1.20 1.05 Uph-ph<(<) Reset ratio
3771 U1<(<) Voltage Prot. OFF OFF Operating mode U1 undervolt-
ON
U<Alarm U<<Trip
3772 U1< Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 30.0 V U1< Pickup
3773 T U1< Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 2.00 sec T U1< Time Delay
3774 U1<< Voltage Prot. 1.0 .. 100.0 V; 0 10.0 V U1<< Pickup
3775 T U1<< Voltage Prot. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec; 1.00 sec T U1<< Time Delay
3778 CURR.SUP.U1< Voltage Prot. ON ON Current supervision (U1)
OFF
3779A U1<(<) RESET Voltage Prot. 1.01 .. 1.20 1.05 U1<(<) Reset ratio
3802 START Fault Locator Pickup Pickup Start fault locator with
TRIP
3805 Paral.Line Comp Fault Locator NO YES Mutual coupling parall.line com-
YES pensation
3806 Load Compensat. Fault Locator NO NO Load Compensation
YES
3811 Tmax OUTPUT BCD Fault Locator 0.10 .. 180.00 sec 0.30 sec Maximum output time via BCD
3901 FCT BreakerFail Breaker Failure ON ON Breaker Failure Protection is
OFF
3902 I> BF Breaker Failure 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold I>
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) Breaker Failure NO YES 1pole retrip with stage T1 (local
YES trip)
3904 T1-1pole Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 1pole start (local
trip)
3905 T1-3pole Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 3pole start (local
trip)
3906 T2 Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.15 sec T2, Delay of 2nd stage (busbar
trip)
3907 T3-BkrDefective Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 0.00 sec T3, Delay for start with defective
bkr.
3908 Trip BkrDefect. Breaker Failure NO NO Trip output selection with defec-
with T1-trip tive bkr
with T2-trip
w/ T1/T2-trip
3909 Chk BRK CONTACT Breaker Failure NO YES Check Breaker contacts
YES
3912 3I0> BF Breaker Failure 1A 0.05 .. 20.00 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold 3I0>
5A 0.25 .. 100.00 A 0.50 A
3921 End Flt. stage Breaker Failure ON OFF End fault stage is
OFF
3922 T-EndFault Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec Trip delay of end fault stage
3931 PoleDiscrepancy Breaker Failure ON OFF Pole Discrepancy supervision
OFF
3932 T-PoleDiscrep. Breaker Failure 0.00 .. 30.00 sec; 2.00 sec Trip delay with pole discrepancy
4001 FCT TripSuperv. TripCirc.Superv ON OFF TRIP Circuit Supervision is
OFF
7SA6 Manual 743

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix

4002 No. of BI TripCirc.Superv 1 .. 2 2 Number of Binary Inputs per trip
circuit
4003 Alarm Delay TripCirc.Superv 1 .. 30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm
4201 Ther. OVERLOAD Therm. Overload OFF OFF Thermal overload protection
ON
Alarm Only
4202 K-FACTOR Therm. Overload 0.10 .. 4.00 1.10 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT Therm. Overload 1.0 .. 999.9 min 100.0 min Time constant
4204 ALARM Therm. Overload 50 .. 100 % 90 % Thermal Alarm Stage
4205 I ALARM Therm. Overload 1A 0.10 .. 4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm setpoint
5A 0.50 .. 20.00 A 5.00 A
4206 CALC. METHOD Therm. Overload max max Method of Acquiring Tempera-
Average ture
from Imax
4501 STATE PROT I 1 Prot. Interface ON ON State of protection interface 1
OFF
4502 CONNEC. 1 OVER Prot. Interface F.optic direct F.optic direct Connection 1 over
Com conv 64 kB
Com conv 128 kB
Com conv 512 kB
4505A PROT 1 T-DELAY Prot. Interface 0.1 .. 30.0 ms 30.0 ms Prot 1: Maximal permissible
delay time
4509 T-DATA DISTURB Prot. Interface 0.05 .. 2.00 sec 0.10 sec Time delay for data disturbance
alarm
4510 T-DATAFAIL Prot. Interface 0.0 .. 60.0 sec 6.0 sec Time del for transmission failure
alarm
4511 Td ResetRemote Prot. Interface 0.00 .. 300.00 sec; 0.00 sec Remote signal RESET DELAY
for comm.fail
4701 ID OF RELAY 1 Prot. Interface 1 .. 65534 1 Identification number of relay 1
4710 LOCAL RELAY Prot. Interface relay 1 relay 1 Local relay is
relay 2
relay 3
5001 20 mA (B1) = AnalogOutputs 10.0 .. 1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (B1) correspond to
5002 20 mA (B1) = AnalogOutputs 10 .. 100000 A 20000 A 20 mA (B1) correspond to
5003 20 mA (B1) = AnalogOutputs 1.0 .. 1000.0 km 50.0 km 20 mA (B1) correspond to
5004 20 mA (B1) = AnalogOutputs 1.0 .. 1000.0 Miles 50.0 Miles 20 mA (B1) correspond to
5006 MIN VALUE (B1) AnalogOutputs 0.0 .. 5.0 mA 4.0 mA Output value (B1) valid from
5007 NEG VALUE (B1) AnalogOutputs 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 19.84 mA Output value (B1) for negative
values
5008 OVERFLOW (B1) AnalogOutputs 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 22.50 mA Output value (B1) for overflow
5009 Tmax OUTPUT(B1) AnalogOutputs 0.10 .. 180.00 sec; 5.00 sec Maximum output time (B1)
5011 20 mA (B2) = AnalogOutputs 10.0 .. 1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (B2) correspond to
5012 20 mA (B2) = AnalogOutputs 10 .. 100000 A 20000 A 20 mA (B2) correspond to
5013 20 mA (B2) = AnalogOutputs 1.0 .. 1000.0 km 50.0 km 20 mA (B2) correspond to
5014 20 mA (B2) = AnalogOutputs 1.0 .. 1000.0 Miles 50.0 Miles 20 mA (B2) correspond to
5016 MIN VALUE (B2) AnalogOutputs 0.0 .. 5.0 mA 4.0 mA Output value (B2) valid from
5017 NEG VALUE (B2) AnalogOutputs 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 19.84 mA Output value (B2) for negative
values
5018 OVERFLOW (B2) AnalogOutputs 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 22.50 mA Output value (B2) for overflow
5019 Tmax OUTPUT(B2) AnalogOutputs 0.10 .. 180.00 sec; 5.00 sec Maximum output time (B2)
5021 20 mA (D1) = AnalogOutputs 10.0 .. 1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (D1) correspond to
5022 20 mA (D1) = AnalogOutputs 10 .. 100000 A 20000 A 20 mA (D1) correspond to
5023 20 mA (D1) = AnalogOutputs 1.0 .. 1000.0 km 50.0 km 20 mA (D1) correspond to
5024 20 mA (D1) = AnalogOutputs 1.0 .. 1000.0 Miles 50.0 Miles 20 mA (D1) correspond to
5026 MIN VALUE (D1) AnalogOutputs 0.0 .. 5.0 mA 4.0 mA Output value (D1) valid from
5027 NEG VALUE (D1) AnalogOutputs 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 19.84 mA Output value (D1) for negative
values
5028 OVERFLOW (D1) AnalogOutputs 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 22.50 mA Output value (D1) for overflow
744 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.7 Settings

5029 Tmax OUTPUT(D1) AnalogOutputs 0.10 .. 180.00 sec; 5.00 sec Maximum output time (D1)
5031 20 mA (D2) = AnalogOutputs 10.0 .. 1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (D2) correspond to
5032 20 mA (D2) = AnalogOutputs 10 .. 100000 A 20000 A 20 mA (D2) correspond to
5033 20 mA (D2) = AnalogOutputs 1.0 .. 1000.0 km 50.0 km 20 mA (D2) correspond to
5034 20 mA (D2) = AnalogOutputs 1.0 .. 1000.0 Miles 50.0 Miles 20 mA (D2) correspond to
5036 MIN VALUE (D2) AnalogOutputs 0.0 .. 5.0 mA 4.0 mA Output value (D2) valid from
5037 NEG VALUE (D2) AnalogOutputs 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 19.84 mA Output value (D2) for negative
values
5038 OVERFLOW (D2) AnalogOutputs 1.00 .. 22.50 mA 22.50 mA Output value (D2) for overflow
5039 Tmax OUTPUT(D2) AnalogOutputs 0.10 .. 180.00 sec; 5.00 sec Maximum output time (D2)
7SA6 Manual 745

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
A.8 Information List
Indications for IEC 60 870-5-103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to
general interrogation for IEC 60 870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON.
New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60 870-5-103 are set to
ON / OFF and subjected to general interrogation if the information type is not a spon-
taneous event (.._Ev). Further information on messages can be found in detail in the
SIPROTEC 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1100-C151.
In columns Event Log, Trip Log and Ground Fault Log the following applies:
UPPER CASE NOTATION ON/OFF: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation on/off: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
In column Marked in Oscill.Record the following applies:
UPPER CASE NOTATION M: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation m: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
No. Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
of In-
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
for-
Trip (Fault) Log On/Off
General Interrogation
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF
n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
- Test mode (Test mode) Device IntSP ON * * LED BO 128 21 1 Yes

OFF
- Stop data transmission (DataS- Device IntSP ON * * LED BO 128 20 1 Yes
top) OFF
- Reset LED (Reset LED) Device IntSP ON * * LED BO 128 19 1 No
- Clock Synchronization (Synch- Device IntSP * * * LED BO
Clock) _Ev
- >Back Light on (>Light on) Device SP ON * * BI
OFF
- Hardware Test Mode (HWTest- Device IntSP ON * * LED BO
Mod) OFF
- Error FMS FO 1 (Error FMS1) Device OUT ON * * * LED BO
OFF
- Error FMS FO 2 (Error FMS2) Device OUT ON * * * LED BO
OFF
- Disturbance CFC (Distur.CFC) Device OUT on * LED BO
off
- Breaker OPENED (Brk Device IntSP * * * LED BO
OPENED)
- Feeder EARTHED Device IntSP * * * LED BO
(FdrEARTHED)
- Group A (Group A) Change Group IntSP ON * * LED BO 128 23 1 Yes
OFF
- Group B (Group B) Change Group IntSP ON * * LED BO 128 24 1 Yes
OFF
746 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
- Group C (Group C) Change Group IntSP ON * * LED BO 128 25 1 Yes
OFF
- Group D (Group D) Change Group IntSP ON * * LED BO 128 26 1 Yes
OFF
- Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta) Osc. Fault Rec. IntSP on * m LED BO
off
- Reset Minimum and Maximum Min/Max meter IntSP ON *
counter (ResMinMax) _Ev
- CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L1 Testing - * *
(CB1tst L1)
(CB1tst L2)
(CB1tst L3)
- CB1-TEST trip/close Phases Testing - * *
L123 (CB1tst 123)
- Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Cntrl Authority DP on * LED BO
off
- Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLO- Cntrl Authority DP on * LED BO
CAL) off
- Controlmode REMOTE (ModeR- Cntrl Authority IntSP on * LED BO
EMOTE) off
- Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Cntrl Authority IntSP on * LED BO 101 85 1 Yes
off
- Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLO- Cntrl Authority IntSP on * LED BO 101 86 1 Yes
CAL) off
- Breaker (Breaker) Control Device CF_D on * BO 240 160 20
12 off
- Breaker (Breaker) Control Device DP on * BI CB 240 160 1 Yes
off
- Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Control Device CF_D on * BO 240 161 20
2 off
- Disconnect Switch (Disc.Swit.) Control Device DP on * BI CB 240 161 1 Yes
off
- Earth Switch (EarthSwit) Control Device CF_D on * BO 240 164 20
2 off
- Earth Switch (EarthSwit) Control Device DP on * BI CB 240 164 1 Yes
off
- Interlocking: Breaker Open (Brk Control Device IntSP * * *
Open)
- Interlocking: Breaker Close (Brk Control Device IntSP * * *
Close)
- Interlocking: Disconnect switch Control Device IntSP * * *
Open (Disc.Open)
- Interlocking: Disconnect switch Control Device IntSP * * *
Close (Disc.Close)
- Interlocking: Earth switch Open Control Device IntSP * * *
(E Sw Open)
- Interlocking: Earth switch Close Control Device IntSP * * *
(E Sw Cl.)
- Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control Device CF_D on * BO 240 162 20
2 off
- Q2 Open/Close (Q2 Op/Cl) Control Device DP on * BI CB 240 162 1 Yes
off
- Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control Device CF_D on * BO 240 163 20
2 off
7SA6 Manual 747

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
- Q9 Open/Close (Q9 Op/Cl) Control Device DP on * BI CB 240 163 1 Yes
off
- Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Control Device CF_D on * BO 240 175 20
2 off
- Fan ON/OFF (Fan ON/OFF) Control Device DP on * BI CB 240 175 1 Yes
off
- Unlock data transmission via BI Control Device IntSP * * *
(UnlockDT)
- >Cabinet door open (>Door Process Data SP on * * LED BI BO CB 101 1 1 Yes
open) off
- >CB waiting for Spring charged Process Data SP on * * LED BI BO CB 101 2 1 Yes
(>CB wait) off
- >Error Motor Voltage (>Err Mot Process Data SP on * * LED BI BO CB 240 181 1 Yes
U) off
- >Error Control Voltage (>ErrCntr- Process Data SP on * * LED BI BO CB 240 182 1 Yes
lU) off
- >SF6-Loss (>SF6-Loss) Process Data SP on * * LED BI BO CB 240 183 1 Yes
off
- >Error Meter (>Err Meter) Process Data SP on * * LED BI BO CB 240 184 1 Yes
off
- >Transformer Temperature (>Tx Process Data SP on * * LED BI BO CB 240 185 1 Yes
Temp.) off
- >Transformer Danger (>Tx Process Data SP on * * LED BI BO CB 240 186 1 Yes
Danger) off
- Reset meter (Meter res) Energy IntSP ON *
_Ev
- Error Systeminterface (SysIn- Protocol IntSP on * LED BO
tErr.) off
- Threshold Value 1 (ThreshVal1) Thresh.-Switch IntSP ON * * LED BI FC BO CB
OFF TN
1 No Function configured (Not con- Device SP
figured)
2 Function Not Available (Non Exis- Device SP
tent)
3 >Synchronize Internal Real Time Device SP * * * LED BI BO
Clock (>Time Synch)
4 >Trigger Waveform Capture Osc. Fault Rec. SP on * m LED BI BO
(>Trig.Wave.Cap.)
5 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device SP * * * LED BI BO
7 >Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Change Group SP * * * LED BI BO
Group Bit0)
8 >Setting Group Select Bit 1 (>Set Change Group SP * * * LED BI BO
Group Bit1)
009.0100 Failure EN100 Modul (Failure EN100-Modul 1 IntSP on * LED BO
Modul) off
009.0101 Failure EN100 Link Channel 1 EN100-Modul 1 IntSP on * LED BO
(Ch1) (Fail Ch1) off
009.0102 Failure EN100 Link Channel 2 EN100-Modul 1 IntSP on * LED BO
(Ch2) (Fail Ch2) off
11 >User defined annunciation 1 Device SP * * * * LED BI BO 128 27 1 Yes
(>Annunc. 1)
(>Annunc. 2)
(>Annunc. 3)
748 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
(>Annunc. 4)
15 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device SP ON * * LED BI BO 135 53 1 Yes
OFF
16 >Stop data transmission Device SP * * * LED BI BO 135 54 1 Yes
(>DataStop)
51 Device is Operational and Pro- Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 81 1 Yes
tecting (Device OK) OFF
52 At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Device IntSP ON * * LED BO 128 18 1 Yes
Active (ProtActive) OFF
55 Reset Device (Reset Device) Device OUT * * * LED BO 128 4 1 No
56 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device OUT ON * * LED BO 128 5 1 No
67 Resume (Resume) Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 97 1 No
68 Clock Synchronization Error Device OUT on * * LED BO
(Clock SyncError) off
69 Daylight Saving Time (DayLight- Device OUT ON * * LED BO
SavTime) OFF
70 Setting calculation is running Device OUT ON * * LED BO 128 22 1 Yes
(Settings Calc.) OFF
71 Settings Check (Settings Check) Device OUT * * * LED BO
72 Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device OUT ON * * LED BO
OFF
73 Local setting change (Local Device OUT * * *
change)
110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device OUT_ ON * * LED BO 135 130 1 No
Ev
113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device OUT ON * m LED BO 135 136 1 Yes
125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 145 1 Yes
OFF
126 Protection ON/OFF (via system Device IntSP ON * * LED BO
port) (ProtON/OFF) OFF
127 Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via Device IntSP ON * * LED BO
system port) (AR ON/OFF) OFF
128 Teleprot. ON/OFF (via system Device IntSP ON * * LED BO
port) (TelepONoff) OFF
130 Load angle Phi(PQ Positive se- Measurem.Superv OUT * * * LED BO
quence) ((PQ Pos. Seq.))
131 Load angle Phi(PQ) blocked Measurem.Superv OUT * * * LED BO
((PQ Pos) block)
132 Setting error: |PhiA - PhiB| < 3 ( Measurem.Superv OUT * * * LED BO
Set wrong)
140 Error with a summary alarm Device OUT ON * * LED BO 128 47 1 Yes
(Error Sum Alarm) OFF
144 Error 5V (Error 5V) Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 164 1 Yes
OFF
160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Device OUT * * * LED BO 128 46 1 Yes
Sum Event)
161 Failure: General Current Supervi- Measurem.Superv OUT * * * LED BO 128 32 1 Yes
sion (Fail I Superv.)
162 Failure: Current Summation (Fail- Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 135 182 1 Yes
ure I) OFF
163 Failure: Current Balance (Fail I Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 135 183 1 Yes
balance) OFF
164 Failure: general Voltage Supervi- Measurem.Superv OUT * * * LED BO 128 33 1 Yes
sion (Fail U Superv.)
7SA6 Manual 749

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
165 Failure: Voltage summation Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 135 184 1 Yes
Phase-Earth (Fail U Ph-E) OFF
167 Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail U Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 135 186 1 Yes
balance) OFF
168 Failure: Voltage absent (Fail U Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 135 187 1 Yes
absent) OFF
169 VT Fuse Failure (alarm >10s) (VT Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 135 188 1 Yes
FuseFail>10s) OFF
170 VT Fuse Failure (alarm instanta- Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO
neous) (VT FuseFail) OFF
171 Failure: Phase Sequence (Fail Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 128 35 1 Yes
Ph. Seq.) OFF
177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Bat- Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 193 1 Yes
tery) OFF
181 Error: A/D converter (Error A/D- Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 178 1 Yes
conv.) OFF
183 Error Board 1 (Error Board 1) Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 171 1 Yes
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
191 Error: Offset (Error Offset) Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 211 1 Yes
OFF
192 Error:1A/5Ajumper different from Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 169 1 Yes
setting (Error1A/5Awrong) OFF
193 Alarm: Analog input adjustment Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 181 1 Yes
invalid (Alarm adjustm.) OFF
194 Error: Neutral CT different from Device OUT ON * * LED BO 135 180 1 Yes
MLFB (Error neutralCT) OFF
195 Failure: Broken Conductor (Fail Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 135 195 1 Yes
Conductor) OFF
196 Fuse Fail Monitor is switched Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 135 196 1 Yes
OFF (Fuse Fail M.OFF) OFF
197 Measurement Supervision is Measurem.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 135 197 1 Yes
switched OFF (MeasSup OFF) OFF
273 Set Point Phase L1 dmd> (SP. Set Points(MV) OUT on * * LED BO 135 230 1 Yes
IL1 dmd>) off
IL2 dmd>) off
IL3 dmd>) off
276 Set Point positive sequence Set Points(MV) OUT on * * LED BO 135 236 1 Yes
I1dmd> (SP. I1dmd>) off
277 Set Point |Pdmd|> (SP. |Pdmd|>) Set Points(MV) OUT on * * LED BO 135 237 1 Yes
off
750 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
278 Set Point |Qdmd|> (SP. |Qdmd|>) Set Points(MV) OUT on * * LED BO 135 238 1 Yes
off
279 Set Point |Sdmd|> (SP. |Sdmd|>) Set Points(MV) OUT on * * LED BO 135 239 1 Yes
off
285 Power factor alarm (cos alarm) Set Points(MV) OUT on * * LED BO 135 245 1 Yes
off
301 Power System fault P.System Data 2 OUT ON ON * 135 231 2 Yes
(Pow.Sys.Flt.) OFF
302 Fault Event (Fault Event) P.System Data 2 OUT * ON * 135 232 2 No
303 E/Flt.det. in isol/comp.netw. (E/F P.System Data 2 OUT ON * ON * 135 233 1 No
Det.) OFF
320 Warn: Limit of Memory Data ex- Device OUT on * * LED BO
ceeded (Warn Mem. Data) off
321 Warn: Limit of Memory Parameter Device OUT on * * LED BO
exceeded (Warn Mem. Para.) off
322 Warn: Limit of Memory Operation Device OUT on * * LED BO
exceeded (Warn Mem. Oper.) off
323 Warn: Limit of Memory New ex- Device OUT on * * LED BO
ceeded (Warn Mem. New) off
351 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 1 1 Yes
Pole L1 (>CB Aux. L1)
356 >Manual close signal (>Manual P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 6 1 Yes
Close)
357 >Block manual close cmd. from P.System Data 2 SP ON * * LED BI BO 150 7 1 Yes
external (>Blk Man. Close) OFF
361 >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB P.System Data 2 SP ON * * LED BI BO 128 38 1 Yes
tripped) (>FAIL:Feeder VT) OFF
362 >Failure: Usy2 VT (MCB tripped) P.System Data 2 SP ON * * LED BI BO 150 12 1 Yes
(>FAIL:Usy2 VT) OFF
366 >CB1 Pole L1 (for AR,CB-Test) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 66 1 Yes
(>CB1 Pole L1)
(>CB1 Pole L2)
(>CB1 Pole L3)
371 >CB1 READY (for AR,CB-Test) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 71 1 Yes
(>CB1 Ready)
378 >CB faulty (>CB faulty) P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO
379 >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 78 1 Yes
(>CB 3p Closed)
380 >CB aux. contact 3pole Open P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 79 1 Yes
(>CB 3p Open)
381 >Single-phase trip permitted from P.System Data 2 SP ON * * LED BI BO
ext.AR (>1p Trip Perm) OFF
382 >External AR programmed for P.System Data 2 SP ON * * LED BI BO
1phase only (>Only 1ph AR) OFF
383 >Enable all AR Zones / Stages P.System Data 2 SP ON ON * LED BI BO
(>Enable ARzones) OFF OFF
385 >Lockout SET (>Lockout SET) P.System Data 2 SP ON * * LED BI BO 150 35 1 Yes
OFF
386 >Lockout RESET (>Lockout P.System Data 2 SP ON * * LED BI BO 150 36 1 Yes
RESET) OFF
7SA6 Manual 751

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
395 >I MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
MinMax Reset)
396 >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I1 Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
MiMaReset)
397 >U MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>U Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
MiMaReset)
398 >Uphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
(>UphphMiMaRes)
399 >U1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>U1 Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
MiMa Reset)
400 >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>P Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
MiMa Reset)
401 >S MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>S Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
MiMa Reset)
402 >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Q Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
MiMa Reset)
403 >Idmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
(>Idmd MiMaReset)
404 >Pdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
(>Pdmd MiMaReset)
405 >Qdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
(>Qdmd MiMaReset)
406 >Sdmd MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
(>Sdmd MiMaReset)
407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
(>Frq MiMa Reset)
408 >Power Factor MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max meter SP ON * * LED BI BO
Reset (>PF MiMaReset)
410 >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 80 1 Yes
CB-Test) (>CB1 3p Closed)
411 >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB- P.System Data 2 SP * * * LED BI BO 150 81 1 Yes
Test) (>CB1 3p Open)
501 Relay PICKUP (Relay PICKUP) P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 128 84 2 Yes
503 Relay PICKUP Phase L1 (Relay P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 128 64 2 Yes
PICKUP L1)
PICKUP L2)
PICKUP L3)
506 Relay PICKUP Earth (Relay P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 128 67 2 Yes
PICKUP E)
507 Relay TRIP command Phase L1 P.System Data 2 OUT * * m LED BO 128 69 2 No
(Relay TRIP L1)
(Relay TRIP L2)
(Relay TRIP L3)
510 Relay GENERAL CLOSE P.System Data 2 OUT * * * * LED BO
command (Relay CLOSE)
511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command P.System Data 2 OUT * OFF m LED BO 128 68 2 No
(Relay TRIP)
512 Relay TRIP command - Only P.System Data 2 OUT * * * LED BO
Phase L1 (Relay TRIP 1pL1)
752 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
515 Relay TRIP command Phases P.System Data 2 OUT * * * LED BO
L123 (Relay TRIP 3ph.)
530 LOCKOUT is active (LOCKOUT) P.System Data 2 IntSP ON ON * LED BO 150 170 1 Yes
OFF OFF
533 Primary fault current IL1 (IL1 =) P.System Data 2 VI * ON 150 177 4 No
OFF
OFF
OFF
536 Relay Definitive TRIP (Definitive P.System Data 2 OUT ON ON * * LED BO 150 180 2 No
TRIP)
545 Time from Pickup to drop out (PU P.System Data 2 VI
Time)
546 Time from Pickup to TRIP (TRIP P.System Data 2 VI
Time)
560 Single-phase trip was coupled P.System Data 2 OUT * ON * LED BO 150 210 2 No
3phase (Trip Coupled 3p)
561 Manual close signal detected P.System Data 2 OUT ON * * LED BO 150 211 1 No
(Man.Clos.Detect)
562 CB CLOSE command for manual P.System Data 2 OUT * * * LED BO 150 212 1 No
closing (Man.Close Cmd)
563 CB alarm suppressed (CB Alarm P.System Data 2 OUT * * * LED BO
Supp)
590 Line closure detected (Line clo- P.System Data 2 OUT ON ON m LED BO
sure) OFF OFF
591 Single pole open detected in L1 P.System Data 2 OUT ON ON m LED BO
(1pole open L1) OFF OFF
1000 Number of breaker TRIP com- Statistics VI
mands (# TRIPs=)
mands L1 (TripNo L1=)
1027 Accumulation of interrupted Statistics VI
current L1 ( IL1 =)
current L2 ( IL2 =)
current L3 ( IL3 =)
1030 Max. fault current Phase L1 (Max Statistics VI
IL1 =)
IL2 =)
IL3 =)
1114 Flt Locator: primary RESIS- Fault Locator VI ON 151 14 4 No
TANCE (Rpri =) OFF
7SA6 Manual 753

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
1115 Flt Locator: primary REAC- Fault Locator VI ON 128 73 4 No
TANCE (Xpri =) OFF
1117 Flt Locator: secondary RESIS- Fault Locator VI ON 151 17 4 No
TANCE (Rsec =) OFF
1118 Flt Locator: secondary REAC- Fault Locator VI ON 151 18 4 No
TANCE (Xsec =) OFF
1119 Flt Locator: Distance to fault (dist Fault Locator VI ON 151 19 4 No
=) OFF
1120 Flt Locator: Distance [%] to fault Fault Locator VI ON 151 20 4 No
(d[%] =) OFF
1122 Flt Locator: Distance to fault (dist Fault Locator VI ON 151 22 4 No
=) OFF
1123 Fault Locator Loop L1E (FL Loop Fault Locator OUT_ ON
L1E) Ev
L2E) Ev
L3E) Ev
1126 Fault Locator Loop L1L2 (FL Fault Locator OUT_ ON
Loop L1L2) Ev
Loop L2L3) Ev
Loop L3L1) Ev
1132 Fault location invalid (Flt.Loc.in- Fault Locator OUT * ON * LED BO
valid)
1133 Fault locator setting error K0,an- Fault Locator OUT * ON * LED BO
gle(K0) (Flt.Loc.ErrorK0)
1143 BCD Fault location [1%] (BCD Fault Locator OUT * * * LED BO
d[1%])
d[2%])
d[4%])
d[8%])
d[10%])
d[20%])
d[40%])
d[80%])
d[100%])
1152 BCD Fault location valid (BCD Fault Locator OUT * * * LED BO
dist. VALID)
1219 Active 3I0sen (sensitive Ie) = Sens. Earth Flt VI * * ON
(3I0senA=) OFF
1220 Reactive 3I0sen (sensitive Ie) = Sens. Earth Flt VI * * ON
(3I0senR=) OFF
1251 >Switch on sensitive E/F detec- Sens. Earth Flt SP * * * LED BI BO
tion (>SensEF on)
1252 >Switch off sensitive E/F detec- Sens. Earth Flt SP * * * LED BI BO
tion (>SensEF off)
754 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
1253 >Block sensitive E/F detection Sens. Earth Flt SP * * * LED BI BO
(>SensEF block)
1260 Sensitve E/F detection ON/OFF Sens. Earth Flt IntSP ON * * LED BO
via BI (SensEF on/offBI) OFF
1261 Sensitve E/F detection is Sens. Earth Flt OUT ON * * LED BO 151 161 1 Yes
switched OFF (SensEF OFF) OFF
1262 Sensitve E/F detection is Sens. Earth Flt OUT ON ON * LED BO 151 162 1 Yes
BLOCKED (SensEF BLOCK) OFF OFF
1263 Sensitve E/F detection is ACTIVE Sens. Earth Flt OUT ON * * LED BO 151 163 1 Yes
(SensEF ACTIVE) OFF
1271 Sensitve E/F detection picked up Sens. Earth Flt OUT * ON * m LED BO
(SensEF Pickup) OFF
1272 Sensitve E/F detection Phase L1 Sens. Earth Flt OUT * * ON * LED BO 128 48 1 Yes
(SensEF Phase L1)
(SensEF Phase L2)
(SensEF Phase L3)
1276 Sensitve E/F detection Forward Sens. Earth Flt OUT * * ON * LED BO 128 51 1 Yes
(SensEF Forward)
1277 Sensitve E/F detection Reverse Sens. Earth Flt OUT * * ON * LED BO 128 52 1 Yes
(SensEF Reverse)
1278 Sensitve E/F detection Undef. Di- Sens. Earth Flt OUT * * ON * LED BO 151 178 1 Yes
rection (SensEF undefDir)
1281 Sensitve E/F detection TRIP Sens. Earth Flt OUT * ON ON * LED BO 151 181 2 Yes
command (SensEF TRIP)
1291 Sensitve E/F detection 3U0> Sens. Earth Flt OUT * * * LED BO
pickup (SensEF 3U0>)
1305 >Earth Fault O/C Block 3I0>>> Earth Fault O/C SP ON * * LED BI BO 166 5 1 Yes
(>EF BLK 3I0>>>) OFF
1307 >Earth Fault O/C Block 3I0>> Earth Fault O/C SP ON * * LED BI BO 166 7 1 Yes
(>EF BLOCK 3I0>>) OFF
1308 >Earth Fault O/C Block 3I0> (>EF Earth Fault O/C SP ON * * LED BI BO 166 8 1 Yes
BLOCK 3I0>) OFF
1309 >Earth Fault O/C Block 3I0p (>EF Earth Fault O/C SP ON * * LED BI BO 166 9 1 Yes
BLOCK 3I0p) OFF
1310 >Earth Fault O/C Instantaneous Earth Fault O/C SP ON ON * LED BI BO 166 10 1 Yes
trip (>EF InstTRIP) OFF OFF
1311 >E/F Teleprotection ON (>EF Teleprot. E/F SP * * * LED BI BO
Teleprot.ON)
1312 >E/F Teleprotection OFF (>EF Teleprot. E/F SP * * * LED BI BO
TeleprotOFF)
1313 >E/F Teleprotection BLOCK (>EF Teleprot. E/F SP ON * * LED BI BO 166 13 1 Yes
TeleprotBLK) OFF
1318 >E/F Carrier RECEPTION, Teleprot. E/F SP on on * LED BI BO 166 18 1 Yes
Channel 1 (>EF Rec.Ch1) off
Channel 2 (>EF Rec.Ch2) off
1320 >E/F Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Teleprot. E/F SP ON ON * LED BI BO 166 20 1 Yes
Channel 1 (>EF UB ub 1) OFF
1321 >E/F Unblocking: BLOCK, Teleprot. E/F SP ON ON * LED BI BO 166 21 1 Yes
Channel 1 (>EF UB bl 1) OFF
1322 >E/F Unblocking: UNBLOCK, Teleprot. E/F SP ON ON * LED BI BO 166 22 1 Yes
Channel 2 (>EF UB ub 2) OFF
1323 >E/F Unblocking: BLOCK, Teleprot. E/F SP ON ON * LED BI BO 166 23 1 Yes
Channel 2 (>EF UB bl 2) OFF
7SA6 Manual 755

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
1324 >E/F BLOCK Echo Signal (>EF Teleprot. E/F SP ON ON * LED BI BO 166 24 1 Yes
BlkEcho) OFF
Channel 1, Ph.L1 (>EF Rec.Ch1 off
L1)
L2)
L3)
1328 >E/F Unblocking: UNBLOCK Teleprot. E/F SP ON ON * LED BI BO 166 28 1 Yes
Chan. 1, Ph.L1 (>EF UB ub 1-L1) OFF
1331 Earth fault protection is switched Earth Fault O/C OUT ON * * LED BO 166 31 1 Yes
OFF (E/F Prot. OFF) OFF
1332 Earth fault protection is Earth Fault O/C OUT ON ON * LED BO 166 32 1 Yes
BLOCKED (E/F BLOCK) OFF OFF
1333 Earth fault protection is ACTIVE Earth Fault O/C OUT * * * LED BO 166 33 1 Yes
(E/F ACTIVE)
1335 Earth fault protection Trip is Earth Fault O/C OUT ON ON * LED BO
blocked (EF TRIP BLOCK) OFF OFF
1336 E/F phase selector L1 selected Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO
(E/F L1 selec.) OFF
(E/F L2 selec.) OFF
(E/F L3 selec.) OFF
1345 Earth fault protection PICKED UP Earth Fault O/C OUT * off m LED BO 166 45 2 Yes
(EF Pickup)
1354 E/F 3I0>>> PICKED UP (EF Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO
3I0>>>Pickup)
1355 E/F 3I0>> PICKED UP (EF 3I0>> Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO
Pickup)
1356 E/F 3I0> PICKED UP (EF 3I0> Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO
Pickup)
1357 E/F 3I0p PICKED UP (EF 3I0p Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO
Pickup)
1358 E/F picked up FORWARD (EF Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 166 58 2 No
forward)
1359 E/F picked up REVERSE (EF re- Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 166 59 2 No
verse)
1361 E/F General TRIP command (EF Earth Fault O/C OUT * * * LED BO 166 61 2 No
Trip)
1362 Earth fault protection: Trip 1pole Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON m LED BO 166 62 2 Yes
L1 (E/F Trip L1)
L2 (E/F Trip L2)
L3 (E/F Trip L3)
(E/F Trip 3p)
1366 E/F 3I0>>> TRIP (EF 3I0>>> Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 166 66 2 No
TRIP)
756 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
1367 E/F 3I0>> TRIP (EF 3I0>> TRIP) Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 166 67 2 No
1368 E/F 3I0> TRIP (EF 3I0> TRIP) Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 166 68 2 No
1369 E/F 3I0p TRIP (EF 3I0p TRIP) Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 166 69 2 No
1370 E/F Inrush picked up (EF Inrush- Earth Fault O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 166 70 2 No
PU) OFF
1371 E/F Telep. Carrier SEND signal, Teleprot. E/F OUT on on * LED BO 166 71 1 No
Phase L1 (EF Tele SEND L1)
1374 E/F Telep. Block: carrier STOP Teleprot. E/F OUT * on * LED BO 166 74 2 No
signal L1 (EF Tele STOP L1)
1380 E/F Teleprot. ON/OFF via BI (EF Teleprot. E/F IntSP ON * * LED BO
TeleON/offBI) OFF
1381 E/F Teleprotection is switched Teleprot. E/F OUT ON * * LED BO 166 81 1 Yes
OFF (EF Telep. OFF) OFF
1384 E/F Telep. Carrier SEND signal Teleprot. E/F OUT on on * LED BO 166 84 2 No
(EF Tele SEND)
1386 E/F Telep. Transient Blocking (EF Teleprot. E/F OUT * ON * LED BO 166 86 2 No
TeleTransBlk)
1387 E/F Telep. Unblocking: FAILURE Teleprot. E/F OUT ON * * LED BO 166 87 1 Yes
Channel 1 (EF TeleUB Fail1) OFF
1388 E/F Telep. Unblocking: FAILURE Teleprot. E/F OUT ON * * LED BO 166 88 1 Yes
Channel 2 (EF TeleUB Fail2) OFF
1389 E/F Telep. Blocking: carrier STOP Teleprot. E/F OUT * on * LED BO 166 89 2 No
signal (EF Tele BL STOP)
1390 E/F Tele.Blocking: Send signal Teleprot. E/F OUT * * * LED BO 166 90 2 No
with jump (EF Tele BL Jump)
1391 EF Tele.Carrier RECEPTION, L1, Teleprot. E/F OUT on on * LED BO
Device1 (EF Rec.L1 Dev1) off
1401 >BF: Switch on breaker fail pro- Breaker Failure SP * * * LED BI BO
tection (>BF on)
1402 >BF: Switch off breaker fail pro- Breaker Failure SP * * * LED BI BO
tection (>BF off)
7SA6 Manual 757

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
1403 >BLOCK Breaker failure Breaker Failure SP ON * * LED BI BO 166 103 1 Yes
(>BLOCK BkrFail) OFF
1415 >BF: External start 3pole (>BF Breaker Failure SP ON * * LED BI BO
Start 3pole) OFF
1432 >BF: External release (>BF re- Breaker Failure SP ON * * LED BI BO
lease) OFF
1435 >BF: External start L1 (>BF Start Breaker Failure SP ON * * LED BI BO
L1) OFF
L2) OFF
L3) OFF
1439 >BF: External start 3pole (w/o Breaker Failure SP ON * * LED BI BO
current) (>BF Start w/o I) OFF
1440 Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via Breaker Failure IntSP ON * * LED BO
BI (BkrFailON/offBI) OFF
1451 Breaker failure is switched OFF Breaker Failure OUT ON * * LED BO 166 151 1 Yes
(BkrFail OFF) OFF
1452 Breaker failure is BLOCKED Breaker Failure OUT ON ON * LED BO 166 152 1 Yes
(BkrFail BLOCK) OFF OFF
1453 Breaker failure is ACTIVE (Bkr- Breaker Failure OUT * * * LED BO 166 153 1 Yes
Fail ACTIVE)
1461 Breaker failure protection started Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO 166 161 2 Yes
(BF Start) OFF
1472 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO
phase L1 (BF T1-TRIP 1pL1)
1476 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole (BF Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO
T1-TRIP L123)
1493 BF Trip in case of defective CB Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO
(BF TRIP CBdefec)
1494 BF Trip T2 (busbar trip) (BF T2- Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO 128 85 2 No
TRIP(bus))
1495 BF Trip End fault stage (BF Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO
EndFlt TRIP)
1496 BF Pole discrepancy pickup (BF Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO
CBdiscrSTART) OFF
1497 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L1 Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO
(BF CBdiscr L1) OFF
(BF CBdiscr L2) OFF
(BF CBdiscr L3) OFF
1500 BF Pole discrepancy Trip (BF Breaker Failure OUT * ON * LED BO
CBdiscr TRIP)
1503 >BLOCK Thermal Overload Pro- Therm. Overload SP ON * * LED BI BO 167 3 1 Yes
tection (>BLK ThOverload) OFF
1511 Thermal Overload Protection Therm. Overload OUT ON * * LED BO 167 11 1 Yes
OFF (Th.Overload OFF) OFF
1512 Thermal Overload Protection Therm. Overload OUT ON ON * LED BO 167 12 1 Yes
BLOCKED (Th.Overload BLK) OFF OFF
1513 Thermal Overload Protection Therm. Overload OUT ON * * LED BO 167 13 1 Yes
ACTIVE (Th.O/L ACTIVE) OFF
758 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
1515 Th. Overload: Current Alarm (I Therm. Overload OUT ON * * LED BO 167 15 1 Yes
alarm) (Th.O/L I Alarm) OFF
1516 Th. Overload Alarm: Near Therm. Overload OUT ON * * LED BO 167 16 1 Yes
Thermal Trip (Th.O/L Alarm) OFF
1517 Th. Overload Pickup before trip Therm. Overload OUT ON * * LED BO 167 17 1 Yes
(Th.O/L Pickup) OFF
1521 Th. Overload TRIP command Therm. Overload OUT * ON m LED BO 167 21 2 No
(Th.O/L TRIP)
2054 Emergency mode (Emer. mode) Back-Up O/C OUT ON ON * LED BO 128 37 1 Yes
OFF OFF
2701 >AR: Switch on auto-reclose Autoreclosure SP * * * LED BI BO 40 1 1 No
function (>AR on)
2702 >AR: Switch off auto-reclose Autoreclosure SP * * * LED BI BO 40 2 1 No
function (>AR off)
2703 >AR: Block auto-reclose function Autoreclosure SP ON * * LED BI BO 40 3 1 Yes
(>AR block) OFF
2711 >External start of internal Auto Autoreclosure SP * ON * LED BI BO 40 11 2 Yes
reclose (>AR Start)
2712 >AR: External trip L1 for AR start Autoreclosure SP * ON * LED BI BO 40 12 2 Yes
(>Trip L1 AR)
(>Trip L2 AR)
(>Trip L3 AR)
2715 >AR: External 1pole trip for AR Autoreclosure SP * ON * LED BI BO 40 15 2 Yes
start (>Trip 1pole AR)
2716 >AR: External 3pole trip for AR Autoreclosure SP * ON * LED BI BO 40 16 2 Yes
start (>Trip 3pole AR)
2727 >AR: Remote Close signal (>AR Autoreclosure SP * ON * LED BI BO 40 22 2 Yes
RemoteClose)
2731 >AR: Sync. release from ext. Autoreclosure SP * * * LED BI BO 40 31 2 Yes
sync.-check (>Sync.release)
2737 >AR: Block 1pole AR-cycle Autoreclosure SP ON * * LED BI BO 40 32 1 Yes
(>BLOCK 1pole AR) OFF
2738 >AR: Block 3pole AR-cycle Autoreclosure SP ON * * LED BI BO 40 33 1 Yes
(>BLOCK 3pole AR) OFF
2739 >AR: Block 1phase-fault AR- Autoreclosure SP ON * * LED BI BO 40 34 1 Yes
cycle (>BLK 1phase AR) OFF
2742 >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle (>BLK Autoreclosure SP ON * * LED BI BO 40 37 1 Yes
1.AR-cycle) OFF
2743 >AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle (>BLK Autoreclosure SP ON * * LED BI BO 40 38 1 Yes
2.AR-cycle) OFF
2744 >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle (>BLK Autoreclosure SP ON * * LED BI BO 40 39 1 Yes
3.AR-cycle) OFF
2745 >AR: Block 4th and higher AR- Autoreclosure SP ON * * LED BI BO 40 40 1 Yes
cycles (>BLK 4.-n. AR) OFF
2746 >AR: External Trip for AR start Autoreclosure SP * ON * LED BI BO 40 41 2 Yes
(>Trip for AR)
2747 >AR: External pickup L1 for AR Autoreclosure SP * ON * LED BI BO 40 42 2 Yes
start (>Pickup L1 AR)
7SA6 Manual 759

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
2750 >AR: External pickup 1phase for Autoreclosure SP * ON * LED BI BO 40 45 2 Yes
AR start (>Pickup 1ph AR)
2781 AR: Auto-reclose is switched off Autoreclosure OUT ON * * LED BO 40 81 1 Yes
(AR off) OFF
2782 AR: Auto-reclose is switched on Autoreclosure IntSP * * * LED BO 128 16 1 Yes
(AR on)
2783 AR: Auto-reclose is blocked (AR Autoreclosure OUT ON * * LED BO 40 83 1 Yes
is blocked) OFF
2784 AR: Auto-reclose is not ready (AR Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 128 130 1 Yes
not ready)
2787 AR: Circuit breaker not ready (CB Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 87 1 No
not ready)
2788 AR: CB ready monitoring window Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 88 2 No
expired (AR T-CBreadyExp)
2796 AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI Autoreclosure IntSP * * * LED BO
(AR on/off BI)
2801 AR in progress (AR in progress) Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 101 2 Yes
2809 AR: Start-signal monitoring time Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 174 2 No
expired (AR T-Start Exp)
2810 AR: Maximum dead time expired Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 175 2 No
(AR TdeadMax Exp)
2818 AR: Evolving fault recognition Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 118 2 Yes
(AR evolving Flt)
2820 AR is set to operate after 1p trip Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 143 1 No
only (AR Program1pole)
2821 AR dead time after evolving fault Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 197 2 No
(AR Td. evol.Flt)
2839 AR dead time after 1pole trip Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 148 2 Yes
running (AR Tdead 1pTrip)
2840 AR dead time after 3pole trip Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 149 2 Yes
running (AR Tdead 3pTrip)
2841 AR dead time after 1phase fault Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 150 2 Yes
running (AR Tdead 1pFlt)
2844 AR 1st cycle running (AR 1stCyc. Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 155 2 Yes
run.)
2845 AR 2nd cycle running (AR Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 157 2 Yes
2ndCyc. run.)
2846 AR 3rd cycle running (AR 3rdCyc. Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 158 2 Yes
run.)
2847 AR 4th or higher cycle running Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 159 2 Yes
(AR 4thCyc. run.)
2848 AR cycle is running in ADT mode Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 130 2 Yes
(AR ADT run.)
2851 AR: Close command (AR CLOSE Autoreclosure OUT * ON m LED BO 128 128 2 No
Cmd.)
760 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
2852 AR: Close command after 1pole, Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 152 1 No
1st cycle (AR Close1.Cyc1p)
2853 AR: Close command after 3pole, Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 153 1 No
1st cycle (AR Close1.Cyc3p)
2854 AR: Close command 2nd cycle Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 128 129 1 No
(and higher) (AR Close 2.Cyc)
2857 AR: RDT Close command after Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO
TDEADxTRIP (AR CLOSE RDT
TD)
2861 AR: Reclaim time is running (AR Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 161 1 No
T-Recl. run.)
2862 AR successful (AR successful) Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 162 1 No
2864 AR: 1pole trip permitted by inter- Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 164 1 Yes
nal AR (AR 1p Trip Perm)
2865 AR: Synchro-check request (AR Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 165 2 Yes
Sync.Request)
2871 AR: TRIP command 3pole (AR Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 171 2 Yes
TRIP 3pole)
2889 AR 1st cycle zone extension Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 160 1 No
release (AR 1.CycZoneRel)
2890 AR 2nd cycle zone extension Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 169 1 No
2891 AR 3rd cycle zone extension Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 170 1 No
2892 AR 4th cycle zone extension Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 172 1 No
2893 AR zone extension (general) (AR Autoreclosure OUT * * * LED BO 40 173 1 Yes
Zone Release)
2894 AR Remote close signal send Autoreclosure OUT * ON * LED BO 40 129 2 No
(AR Remote Close)
2895 No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics VI
mands,1pole (AR #Close1./1p=)
2896 No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics VI
mands,3pole (AR #Close1./3p=)
2897 No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE Statistics VI
commands,1p (AR #Close2./1p=)
2898 No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE Statistics VI
commands,3p (AR #Close2./3p=)
2901 >Switch on synchro-check func- Sync. Check SP * * * LED BI BO
tion (>Sync. on)
2902 >Switch off synchro-check func- Sync. Check SP * * * LED BI BO
tion (>Sync. off)
2903 >BLOCK synchro-check function Sync. Check SP * * * LED BI BO
(>BLOCK Sync.)
2905 >Start synchro-check for Manual Sync. Check SP on * * LED BI BO
Close (>Sync. Start MC) off
2906 >Start synchro-check for AR Sync. Check SP on * * LED BI BO
(>Sync. Start AR) off
2907 >Sync-Prog. Live bus / live line / Sync. Check SP * * * LED BI BO
Sync (>Sync. synch)
2908 >Sync-Prog. Usy1>Usy2< Sync. Check SP * * * LED BI BO
(>Usy1>Usy2<)
2909 >Sync-Prog. Usy1<Usy2> Sync. Check SP * * * LED BI BO
(>Usy1<Usy2>)
2910 >Sync-Prog. Usy1<Usy2< Sync. Check SP * * * LED BI BO
(>Usy1<Usy2<)
7SA6 Manual 761

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
2911 >Sync-Prog. Override ( bypass ) Sync. Check SP * * * LED BI BO
(>Sync. o/ride)
2930 Synchro-check ON/OFF via BI Sync. Check IntSP ON * * LED BO
(Sync. on/off BI) OFF
2931 Synchro-check is switched OFF Sync. Check OUT ON * * LED BO 41 31 1 Yes
(Sync. OFF) OFF
2932 Synchro-check is BLOCKED Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO 41 32 1 Yes
(Sync. BLOCK) OFF OFF
2934 Synchro-check function faulty Sync. Check OUT ON * * LED BO 41 34 1 Yes
(Sync. faulty) OFF
2935 Synchro-check supervision time Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO 41 35 1 No
expired (Sync.Tsup.Exp)
2936 Synchro-check request by control Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO 41 36 1 No
(Sync. req.CNTRL)
2941 Synchronization is running (Sync. Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO 41 41 1 Yes
running) OFF
2942 Synchro-check override/bypass Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO 41 42 1 Yes
(Sync.Override) OFF
2943 Synchronism detected (Synchro- Sync. Check OUT ON * * LED BO 41 43 1 Yes
nism) OFF
2944 SYNC Condition Usy1>Usy2< Sync. Check OUT ON * * LED BO 41 44 1 Yes
true (SYNC Usy1>Usy2<) OFF
2945 SYNC Condition Usy1<Usy2> Sync. Check OUT ON * * LED BO 41 45 1 Yes
true (SYNC Usy1<Usy2>) OFF
2946 SYNC Condition Usy1<Usy2< Sync. Check OUT ON * * LED BO 41 46 1 Yes
true (SYNC Usy1<Usy2<) OFF
2947 Sync. Voltage diff. greater than Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO 41 47 1 Yes
limit (Sync. Udiff>) OFF OFF
2948 Sync. Freq. diff. greater than limit Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO 41 48 1 Yes
(Sync. fdiff>) OFF OFF
2949 Sync. Angle diff. greater than limit Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO 41 49 1 Yes
(Sync. -diff>) OFF OFF
2951 Synchronism release (to ext. AR) Sync. Check OUT * * * LED BO 41 51 1 Yes
(Sync. release)
2961 Close command from synchro- Sync. Check OUT * * * LED BO 41 61 1 Yes
check (Sync.CloseCmd)
2970 SYNC frequency fsy2 > (fn + Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
3Hz) (SYNC fsy2>>) OFF OFF
2971 SYNC frequency fsy2 < (fn + Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
3Hz) (SYNC fsy2<<) OFF OFF
2972 SYNC frequency fsy1 > (fn + Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
3Hz) (SYNC fsy1>>) OFF OFF
2973 SYNC frequency fsy1 < (fn + Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
3Hz) (SYNC fsy1<<) OFF OFF
2974 SYNC voltage Usy2 >Umax Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(P.3504) (SYNC Usy2>>) OFF OFF
2975 SYNC voltage Usy2 Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(P.3503) (SYNC Usy2<<) OFF OFF
2976 SYNC voltage Usy1 >Umax Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(P.3504) (SYNC Usy1>>) OFF OFF
2977 SYNC voltage Usy1 Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(P.3503) (SYNC Usy1<<) OFF OFF
2978 SYNC Udiff too large Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(Usy2>Usy1) (SYNC OFF OFF
Usy2>Usy1)
762 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
2979 SYNC Udiff too large Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(Usy2<Usy1) (SYNC OFF OFF
Usy2<Usy1)
2980 SYNC fdiff too large (fsy2>fsy1) Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(SYNC fsy2>fsy1) OFF OFF
2981 SYNC fdiff too large (fsy2<fsy1) Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(SYNC fsy2<fsy1) OFF OFF
2982 SYNC PHIdiff too large Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(PHIsy2>PHIsy1) (SYNC OFF OFF
sy2>sy1)
2983 SYNC PHIdiff too large Sync. Check OUT ON ON * LED BO
(PHIsy2<PHIsy1) (SYNC OFF OFF
sy2<sy1)
3196 Local relay in Teststate (local Prot. Interface IntSP ON ON * LED FC BO
Teststate) OFF TN
3215 Incompatible Firmware Versions Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO
(Wrong Firmware)
3217 Prot Int 1: Own Datas received Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO
(PI1 Data reflec) OFF
3227 >Prot Int 1: Transmitter is Prot. Interface SP ON * * LED BI BO
switched off (>PI1 light off) OFF
3229 Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty data Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO 93 135 1 Yes
(PI1 Data fault) OFF
3230 Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO 93 136 1 Yes
(PI1 Datafailure) OFF
3233 Device table has inconsistent Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO
numbers (DT inconsistent) OFF
3234 Device tables are unequal (DT Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO
unequal) OFF
3235 Differences between common Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO
parameters (Par. different) OFF
3236 Different PI for transmit and Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO
receive (PI1<->PI2 error) OFF
3239 Prot Int 1: Transmission delay too Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO 93 139 1 Yes
high (PI1 TD alarm) OFF
3243 Prot Int 1: Connected with relay Prot. Interface VI ON * *
ID (PI1 with) OFF
3457 System operates in a closed Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO 93 141 1 Yes
Ringtopology (Ringtopology) OFF
3458 System operates in a open Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO 93 142 1 Yes
Chaintopology (Chaintopology) OFF
3464 Communication topology is com- Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO
plete (Topol complete) OFF
3475 Relay 1 in Logout state Prot. Interface IntSP ON * * LED FC BO 93 143 1 Yes
(Rel1Logout) OFF TN
(Rel2Logout) OFF TN
(Rel3Logout) OFF TN
3484 Local activation of Logout state Prot. Interface IntSP ON * * LED FC BO 93 149 1 Yes
(Logout) OFF TN
3487 Equal IDs in constellation (Equal Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO
IDs) OFF
3491 Relay 1 in Login state (Rel1 Prot. Interface OUT ON * * LED BO 93 191 1 Yes
Login) OFF
Login) OFF
7SA6 Manual 763

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
Login) OFF
3541 >Remote Trip 1 signal input (>Re- Remote Signals SP on * * LED BI BO
mote Trip1) off
mote Trip2) off
mote Trip3) off
mote Trip4) off
3545 Remote Trip 1 received Remote Signals OUT on * * LED BO 93 154 1 Yes
(RemoteTrip1 rec) off
3549 >Remote Signal 1 input (>Rem. Remote Signals SP on * * LED BI BO
Signal 1) off
3550 >Remote Signal 2 input Remote Signals SP on * * LED BI BO
(>Rem.Signal 2) off
(>Rem.Signal 3) off
(>Rem.Signal 4) off
(>Rem.Signal 5) off
(>Rem.Signal 6) off
(>Rem.Signal 7) off
(>Rem.Signal 8) off
(>Rem.Signal 9) off
(>Rem.Signal10) off
(>Rem.Signal11) off
(>Rem.Signal12) off
(>Rem.Signal13) off
(>Rem.Signal14) off
(>Rem.Signal15) off
(>Rem.Signal16) off
(>Rem.Signal17) off
(>Rem.Signal18) off
(>Rem.Signal19) off
764 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
(>Rem.Signal20) off
(>Rem.Signal21) off
(>Rem.Signal22) off
(>Rem.Signal23) off
(>Rem.Signal24) off
3573 Remote signal 1 received Remote Signals OUT on * * LED BO 93 158 1 Yes
(Rem.Sig 1recv) off
(Rem.Sig 2recv) off
(Rem.Sig 3recv) off
(Rem.Sig 4recv) off
(Rem.Sig 5recv) off
(Rem.Sig 6recv) off
(Rem.Sig 7recv) off
(Rem.Sig 8recv) off
(Rem.Sig 9recv) off
(Rem.Sig10recv) off
(Rem.Sig11recv) off
(Rem.Sig12recv) off
(Rem.Sig13recv) off
(Rem.Sig14recv) off
(Rem.Sig15recv) off
(Rem.Sig16recv) off
(Rem.Sig17recv) off
(Rem.Sig18recv) off
(Rem.Sig19recv) off
(Rem.Sig20recv) off
(Rem.Sig21recv) off
(Rem.Sig22recv) off
(Rem.Sig23recv) off
7SA6 Manual 765

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
(Rem.Sig24recv) off
3603 >BLOCK 21 Distance (>BLOCK Dis. General SP * * * LED BI BO
21 Dist.)
3611 >ENABLE Z1B (with setted Time Dis. General SP ON * * LED BI BO 28 11 1 Yes
Delay) (>ENABLE Z1B) OFF
3613 >ENABLE Z1B instantanous (w/o Dis. General SP ON * * LED BI BO 28 13 1 Yes
T-Delay) (>ENABLE Z1Binst) OFF
3617 >BLOCK Z4-Trip (>BLOCK Z4- Dis. General SP ON * * LED BI BO 28 17 1 Yes
Trip) OFF
3618 >BLOCK Z5-Trip (>BLOCK Z5- Dis. General SP ON * * LED BI BO 28 18 1 Yes
Trip) OFF
3619 >BLOCK Z4 for ph-e loops Dis. General SP ON * * LED BI BO 28 19 1 Yes
(>BLOCK Z4 Ph-E) OFF
3620 >BLOCK Z5 for ph-e loops Dis. General SP ON * * LED BI BO 28 20 1 Yes
(>BLOCK Z5 Ph-E) OFF
3651 Distance is switched off (Dist. Dis. General OUT ON * * LED BO 28 51 1 Yes
OFF) OFF
3652 Distance is BLOCKED (Dist. Dis. General OUT ON ON * LED BO 28 52 1 Yes
BLOCK) OFF OFF
3653 Distance is ACTIVE (Dist. Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 53 1 Yes
ACTIVE)
3654 Setting error K0(Z1) or Angle Dis. General OUT ON * * LED BO
K0(Z1) (Dis.ErrorK0(Z1)) OFF
3655 Setting error K0(>Z1) or Angle Dis. General OUT ON * * LED BO
K0(>Z1) (DisErrorK0(>Z1)) OFF
3671 Distance PICKED UP (Dis. Dis. General OUT * OFF * LED BO 28 71 2 Yes
PICKUP)
3672 Distance PICKUP L1 (Dis.Pickup Dis. General OUT * * m LED BO 28 72 2 Yes
L1)
L2)
L3)
3675 Distance PICKUP Earth Dis. General OUT * * m LED BO 28 75 2 Yes
(Dis.Pickup E)
3681 Distance Pickup Phase L1 (only) Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO 28 81 2 No
(Dis.Pickup 1pL1)
3682 Distance Pickup L1E (Dis.Pickup Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO 28 82 2 No
L1E)
(Dis.Pickup 1pL2)
L2E)
3685 Distance Pickup L12 (Dis.Pickup Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO 28 85 2 No
L12)
3686 Distance Pickup L12E (Dis.Pick- Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO 28 86 2 No
up L12E)
(Dis.Pickup 1pL3)
L3E)
L31)
up L31E)
766 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
L23)
up L23E)
3693 Distance Pickup L123 (Dis.Pick- Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO 28 93 2 No
up L123)
3694 Distance Pickup123E Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO 28 94 2 No
(Dis.Pickup123E)
3695 Dist.: Phi phase L1 Pickup (Dis Dis. General OUT * * m LED BO
Pickup L1)
Pickup L2)
Pickup L3)
3701 Distance Loop L1E selected Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO
forward (Dis.Loop L1-E f) OFF
3704 Distance Loop L12 selected Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO
forward (Dis.Loop L1-2 f) OFF
reverse (Dis.Loop L1-E r) OFF
reverse (Dis.Loop L1-2 r) OFF
3713 Distance Loop L1E selected non- Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO
direct. (Dis.Loop L1E<->) OFF
3716 Distance Loop L12 selected non- Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO
direct. (Dis.Loop L12<->) OFF
3719 Distance Pickup FORWARD (Dis. Dis. General OUT * * m LED BO 128 74 2 No
forward)
3720 Distance Pickup REVERSE (Dis. Dis. General OUT * * m LED BO 128 75 2 No
reverse)
3741 Distance Pickup Z1, Loop L1E Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO
(Dis. Z1 L1E)
7SA6 Manual 767

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
(Dis. Z1 L2E)
(Dis. Z1 L3E)
3744 Distance Pickup Z1, Loop L12 Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO
(Dis. Z1 L12)
(Dis. Z1 L23)
(Dis. Z1 L31)
3747 Distance Pickup Z1B, Loop L1E Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO
(Dis. Z1B L1E)
(Dis. Z1B L2E)
(Dis. Z1B L3E)
3750 Distance Pickup Z1B, Loop L12 Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO
(Dis. Z1B L12)
(Dis. Z1B L23)
(Dis. Z1B L31)
3755 Distance Pickup Z2 (Dis. Pickup Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO
Z2)
Z3)
Z4)
Z5)
3771 DistanceTime Out T1 (Dis.Time Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 128 78 2 No
Out T1)
Out T2)
Out T3)
Out T4)
Out T5)
3780 DistanceTime Out T1B (Dis.Tim- Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 180 2 No
eOut T1B)
3781 DistanceTime Out Forward Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 160 2 No
PICKUP (Dis.TimeOut Tfw)
3782 DistanceTime Out Non-direction- Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 161 2 No
al PICKUP (Dis.TimeOut Tnd)
3801 Distance protection: General trip Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 201 2 No
(Dis.Gen. Trip)
3802 Distance TRIP command - Only Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO 28 202 2 No
Phase L1 (Dis.Trip 1pL1)
3805 Distance TRIP command Phases Dis. General OUT * ON * LED BO 28 205 2 No
L123 (Dis.Trip 3p)
768 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
3811 Distance TRIP single-phase Z1 Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 211 2 No
(Dis.TripZ1/1p)
3813 Distance TRIP single-phase Z1B Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 213 2 No
(Dis.TripZ1B1p)
3816 Distance TRIP single-phase Z2 Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 216 2 No
(Dis.TripZ2/1p)
3817 Distance TRIP 3phase in Z2 Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 217 2 No
(Dis.TripZ2/3p)
(Dis.TripZ3/T3)
3819 Dist.: Trip by fault detection, Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 219 2 No
forward (Dis.Trip FD->)
3820 Dist.: Trip by fault detec, rev/non- Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 220 2 No
dir. (Dis.Trip <->)
(Dis.TRIP 3p. Z4)
(Dis.TRIP 3p. Z5)
3823 DisTRIP 3phase in Z1 with Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 224 2 No
single-ph Flt. (DisTRIP3p. Z1sf)
3824 DisTRIP 3phase in Z1 with multi- Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 225 2 No
ph Flt. (DisTRIP3p. Z1mf)
3825 DisTRIP 3phase in Z1B with Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 244 2 No
single-ph Flt (DisTRIP3p.Z1Bsf)
3826 DisTRIP 3phase in Z1B with Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 245 2 No
multi-ph Flt. (DisTRIP3p Z1Bmf)
3850 DisTRIP Z1B with Teleprotection Dis. General OUT * * * LED BO 28 251 2 No
scheme (DisTRIP Z1B Tel)
4001 >Distance Teleprotection ON Teleprot. Dist. SP * * * LED BI BO
(>Dis.Telep. ON)
4002 >Distance Teleprotection OFF Teleprot. Dist. SP * * * LED BI BO
(>Dis.Telep.OFF)
4003 >Distance Teleprotection BLOCK Teleprot. Dist. SP ON ON * LED BI BO 29 3 1 Yes
(>Dis.Telep. Blk) OFF OFF
4005 >Dist. teleprotection: Carrier Teleprot. Dist. SP on * * LED BI BO
faulty (>Dis.RecFail) off
4006 >Dis.Tele. Carrier RECEPTION Teleprot. Dist. SP on on * LED BI BO 29 6 1 Yes
Channel 1 (>DisTel Rec.Ch1) off
4007 >Dis.Tele.Carrier RECEPTION Teleprot. Dist. SP on on * LED BI BO 29 7 1 Yes
Channel 1,L1 (>Dis.T.RecCh1L1) off
4010 >Dis.Tele. Carrier RECEPTION Teleprot. Dist. SP on on * LED BI BO 29 10 1 Yes
Channel 2 (>Dis.T.Rec.Ch2) off
4030 >Dis.Tele. Unblocking: Teleprot. Dist. SP on on * LED BI BO 29 30 1 Yes
UNBLOCK Channel 1 (>Dis.T.UB off
ub 1)
4031 >Dis.Tele. Unblocking: BLOCK Teleprot. Dist. SP on on * LED BI BO 29 31 1 Yes
Channel 1 (>Dis.T.UB bl 1) off
UNBLOCK Ch. 1, L1 (>Dis.T.UB off
ub1L1)
ub1L2)
7SA6 Manual 769

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
ub1L3)
UNBLOCK Channel 2 (>Dis.T.UB off
ub 2)
4036 >Dis.Tele. Unblocking: BLOCK Teleprot. Dist. SP on on * LED BI BO 29 36 1 Yes
Channel 2 (>Dis.T.UB bl 2) off
4040 >Dis.Tele. BLOCK Echo Signal Teleprot. Dist. SP on on * LED BI BO 29 40 1 Yes
(>Dis.T.BlkEcho) off
4050 Dis. Teleprotection ON/OFF via Teleprot. Dist. IntSP ON * * LED BO
BI (Dis.T.on/off BI) OFF
4051 Teleprotection is switched ON Device IntSP * * * LED BO 128 17 1 Yes
(Telep. ON)
4052 Dis. Teleprotection is switched Teleprot. Dist. OUT ON * * LED BO
OFF (Dis.Telep. OFF) OFF
4054 Dis. Telep. Carrier signal received Teleprot. Dist. OUT * * * LED BO 128 77 2 No
(Dis.T.Carr.rec.)
4055 Dis. Telep. Carrier CHANNEL Teleprot. Dist. OUT * * * LED BO 128 39 1 Yes
FAILURE (Dis.T.Carr.Fail)
4056 Dis. Telep. Carrier SEND signal Teleprot. Dist. OUT on on * LED BO 128 76 2 No
(Dis.T.SEND)
4057 Dis. Telep. Carrier SEND signal, Teleprot. Dist. OUT * * * LED BO
L1 (Dis.T.SEND L1)
L2 (Dis.T.SEND L2)
L3 (Dis.T.SEND L3)
4060 Dis.Tele.Blocking: Send signal Teleprot. Dist. OUT * * * LED BO 29 60 2 No
with jump (DisJumpBlocking)
4068 Dis. Telep. Transient Blocking Teleprot. Dist. OUT * ON * LED BO 29 68 2 No
(Dis.T.Trans.Blk)
4070 Dis. Tele.Blocking: carrier STOP Teleprot. Dist. OUT * ON * LED BO 29 70 2 No
signal (Dis.T.BL STOP)
4080 Dis. Tele.Unblocking: FAILURE Teleprot. Dist. OUT on * * LED BO 29 80 1 Yes
Channel 1 (Dis.T.UB Fail1) off
4081 Dis. Tele.Unblocking: FAILURE Teleprot. Dist. OUT on * * LED BO 29 81 1 Yes
Channel 2 (Dis.T.UB Fail2) off
4082 DisTel Blocking: carrier STOP Teleprot. Dist. OUT * * * LED BO
signal, L1 (Dis.T.BL STOPL1)
4085 Dis.Tele.Carrier RECEPTION, Teleprot. Dist. OUT on on * LED BO
L1, Device1 (Dis.T.RecL1Dev1) off
770 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
4160 >BLOCK Power Swing detection Power Swing SP ON ON * LED BI BO
(>Pow. Swing BLK) OFF OFF
4163 Power Swing unstable (P.Swing Power Swing OUT ON ON * LED BO
unstab.)
4164 Power Swing detected (Power Power Swing OUT ON ON * LED BO 29 164 1 Yes
Swing) OFF OFF
4166 Power Swing TRIP command Power Swing OUT ON ON * LED BO 29 166 1 No
(Pow. Swing TRIP)
4167 Power Swing detected in L1 Power Swing OUT ON ON * LED BO
(Pow. Swing L1) OFF OFF
4203 >BLOCK Weak Infeed (>BLOCK Weak Infeed SP * * * LED BI BO
Weak Inf)
4204 >BLOCK delayed Weak Infeed Weak Infeed SP ON ON * LED BI BO
stage (>BLOCK del. WI) OFF OFF
4205 >Reception (channel) for Weak Weak Infeed SP ON ON * LED BI BO
Infeed OK (>WI rec. OK) OFF OFF
4206 >Receive signal for Weak Infeed Weak Infeed SP ON ON * LED BI BO
(>WI reception) OFF OFF
4221 Weak Infeed is switched OFF Weak Infeed OUT ON * * LED BO 25 21 1 Yes
(WeakInf. OFF) OFF
4222 Weak Infeed is BLOCKED (Weak Weak Infeed OUT ON ON * LED BO 25 22 1 Yes
Inf. BLOCK) OFF OFF
4223 Weak Infeed is ACTIVE (Weak Inf Weak Infeed OUT * * * LED BO 25 23 1 Yes
ACTIVE)
4225 Weak Infeed Zero seq. current Weak Infeed OUT ON ON * LED BO
detected (3I0 detected) OFF OFF
4226 Weak Infeed Undervoltg. L1 (WI Weak Infeed OUT ON ON * LED BO
U L1<) OFF OFF
U L2<) OFF OFF
U L3<) OFF OFF
4229 WI TRIP with zero sequence Weak Infeed OUT * * * LED BO
current (WI TRIP 3I0)
4231 Weak Infeed PICKED UP (Weak- Weak Infeed OUT * OFF * LED BO 25 31 2 Yes
Inf. PICKUP)
4232 Weak Infeed PICKUP L1 (W/I Weak Infeed OUT * ON * LED BO
Pickup L1)
Pickup L2)
Pickup L3)
4241 Weak Infeed General TRIP Weak Infeed OUT * * * LED BO 25 41 2 No
command (WeakInfeed TRIP)
4242 Weak Infeed TRIP command - Weak Infeed OUT * ON * LED BO 25 42 2 No
Only L1 (Weak TRIP 1p.L1)
7SA6 Manual 771

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
4245 Weak Infeed TRIP command Weak Infeed OUT * ON * LED BO 25 45 2 No
L123 (Weak TRIP L123)
4246 ECHO Send SIGNAL (ECHO Weak Infeed OUT ON ON * LED BO 25 46 2 Yes
SIGNAL)
4247 ECHO Tele.Carrier RECEPTION, Echo Rec. ov.PI OUT ON ON * LED BO
Device1 (ECHO Rec. Dev1) OFF
4253 >BLOCK Instantaneous SOTF SOTF Overcurr. SP * * * LED BI BO
Overcurrent (>BLOCK SOTF-
O/C)
4271 SOTF-O/C is switched OFF SOTF Overcurr. OUT ON * * LED BO 25 71 1 Yes
(SOTF-O/C OFF) OFF
4272 SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED (SOTF- SOTF Overcurr. OUT ON ON * LED BO 25 72 1 Yes
O/C BLOCK) OFF OFF
4273 SOTF-O/C is ACTIVE (SOTF- SOTF Overcurr. OUT * * * LED BO 25 73 1 Yes
O/C ACTIVE)
4281 SOTF-O/C PICKED UP (SOTF- SOTF Overcurr. OUT * OFF * LED BO 25 81 2 Yes
O/C PICKUP)
4282 SOTF-O/C Pickup L1 (SOF SOTF Overcurr. OUT * ON * LED BO 25 82 2 Yes
O/CpickupL1)
O/CpickupL2)
O/CpickupL3)
4295 SOTF-O/C TRIP command L123 SOTF Overcurr. OUT * ON * LED BO 25 95 2 No
(SOF O/CtripL123)
4403 >BLOCK Direct Transfer Trip DTT Direct Trip SP * * * LED BI BO
function (>BLOCK DTT)
4412 >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT DTT Direct Trip SP ON * * LED BI BO
Phase L1 (>DTT Trip L1) OFF
4417 >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT 3ph DTT Direct Trip SP ON * * LED BI BO
L123 (>DTT Trip L123) OFF
4421 Direct Transfer Trip is switched DTT Direct Trip OUT ON * * LED BO 51 21 1 Yes
OFF (DTT OFF) OFF
4422 Direct Transfer Trip is BLOCKED DTT Direct Trip OUT ON ON * LED BO 51 22 1 Yes
(DTT BLOCK) OFF OFF
4432 DTT TRIP command - Only L1 DTT Direct Trip OUT * ON * LED BO 51 32 2 No
(DTT TRIP 1p. L1)
(DTT TRIP 1p. L2)
(DTT TRIP 1p. L3)
4435 DTT TRIP command L123 (DTT DTT Direct Trip OUT * ON * LED BO 51 35 2 No
TRIP L123)
772 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
5203 >BLOCK frequency protection Frequency Prot. SP ON * * LED BI BO 70 176 1 Yes
(>BLOCK Freq.) OFF
stage f1 (>BLOCK f1) OFF
5211 Frequency protection is switched Frequency Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 70 181 1 Yes
OFF (Freq. OFF) OFF
5212 Frequency protection is Frequency Prot. OUT ON ON * LED BO 70 182 1 Yes
BLOCKED (Freq. BLOCKED) OFF OFF
5213 Frequency protection is ACTIVE Frequency Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 70 183 1 Yes
(Freq. ACTIVE) OFF
5215 Frequency protection undervolt- Frequency Prot. OUT on on off * LED BO 70 238 1 Yes
age Blk (Freq UnderV Blk) off
5232 Frequency protection: f1 picked Frequency Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 70 230 2 Yes
up (f1 picked up) OFF
5236 Frequency protection: f1 TRIP (f1 Frequency Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 70 234 2 Yes
TRIP)
TRIP)
TRIP)
TRIP)
5240 Frequency protection: TimeOut Frequency Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
Stage f1 (Time Out f1)
6854 >Trip circuit superv. 1: Trip Relay TripCirc.Superv SP ON * * LED BI BO
(>TripC1 TripRel) OFF
6855 >Trip circuit superv. 1: Breaker TripCirc.Superv SP ON * * LED BI BO
Relay (>TripC1 Bkr.Rel) OFF
6861 Trip circuit supervision OFF TripCirc.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO
(TripC OFF) OFF
7SA6 Manual 773

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
6865 Failure Trip Circuit (FAIL: Trip cir.) TripCirc.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO 128 36 1 Yes
OFF
6866 TripC1 blocked: Binary input is TripCirc.Superv OUT ON * * LED BO
not set (TripC1 ProgFAIL) OFF
7104 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Back-Up O/C SP ON * * LED BI BO 64 4 1 Yes
I>> (>BLOCK O/C I>>) OFF
7105 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I> Back-Up O/C SP ON * * LED BI BO 64 5 1 Yes
(>BLOCK O/C I>) OFF
7106 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ip Back-Up O/C SP ON * * LED BI BO 64 6 1 Yes
(>BLOCK O/C Ip) OFF
7110 >Backup OverCurrent Instanta- Back-Up O/C SP ON ON * LED BI BO 64 10 1 Yes
neousTrip (>O/C InstTRIP) OFF OFF
7130 >BLOCK I-STUB (>BLOCK I- Back-Up O/C SP ON * * LED BI BO 64 30 1 Yes
STUB) OFF
7131 >Enable I-STUB-Bus function (>I- Back-Up O/C SP ON ON * LED BI BO 64 31 1 Yes
STUB ENABLE) OFF OFF
7151 Backup O/C is switched OFF Back-Up O/C OUT ON * * LED BO 64 51 1 Yes
(O/C OFF) OFF
7152 Backup O/C is BLOCKED (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT ON ON * LED BO 64 52 1 Yes
BLOCK) OFF OFF
7153 Backup O/C is ACTIVE (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT * * * LED BO 64 53 1 Yes
ACTIVE)
7161 Backup O/C PICKED UP (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT * OFF m LED BO 64 61 2 Yes
PICKUP)
7162 Backup O/C PICKUP L1 (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 62 2 Yes
Pickup L1)
Pickup L2)
Pickup L3)
7165 Backup O/C PICKUP EARTH Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 65 2 Yes
(O/C Pickup E)
7171 Backup O/C Pickup - Only Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 71 2 No
EARTH (O/C PU only E)
7172 Backup O/C Pickup - Only L1 Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 72 2 No
(O/C PU 1p. L1)
7173 Backup O/C Pickup L1E (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 73 2 No
Pickup L1E)
(O/C PU 1p. L2)
Pickup L2E)
7176 Backup O/C Pickup L12 (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 76 2 No
Pickup L12)
Pickup L12E)
(O/C PU 1p. L3)
Pickup L3E)
Pickup L31)
774 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
Pickup L31E)
Pickup L23)
Pickup L23E)
Pickup L123)
PickupL123E)
7191 Backup O/C Pickup I>> (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 91 2 Yes
PICKUP I>>)
7192 Backup O/C Pickup I> (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 92 2 Yes
PICKUP I>)
7193 Backup O/C Pickup Ip (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 93 2 Yes
PICKUP Ip)
7201 O/C I-STUB Pickup (I-STUB Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 101 2 Yes
PICKUP) OFF
7211 Backup O/C General TRIP Back-Up O/C OUT * * * LED BO 128 72 2 No
command (O/C TRIP)
7212 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L1 (O/C Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 112 2 No
TRIP 1p.L1)
TRIP 1p.L2)
TRIP 1p.L3)
7215 Backup O/C TRIP Phases L123 Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 115 2 No
(O/C TRIP L123)
7221 Backup O/C TRIP I>> (O/C TRIP Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 121 2 No
I>>)
7222 Backup O/C TRIP I> (O/C TRIP Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 122 2 No
I>)
7223 Backup O/C TRIP Ip (O/C TRIP Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 123 2 No
Ip)
7235 O/C I-STUB TRIP (I-STUB TRIP) Back-Up O/C OUT * ON * LED BO 64 135 2 No
7325 CB1-TEST TRIP command - Testing OUT ON * * LED BO 153 25 1 Yes
Only L1 (CB1-TESTtrip L1) OFF
7328 CB1-TEST TRIP command L123 Testing OUT ON * * LED BO 153 28 1 Yes
(CB1-TESTtrip123) OFF
7329 CB1-TEST CLOSE command Testing OUT ON * * LED BO 153 29 1 Yes
(CB1-TEST close) OFF
7345 CB-TEST is in progress (CB- Testing OUT ON * * LED BO 153 45 1 Yes
TEST running) OFF
7346 CB-TEST canceled due to Power Testing OUT_ ON *
Sys. Fault (CB-TSTstop FLT.) Ev
7347 CB-TEST canceled due to CB Testing OUT_ ON *
already OPEN (CB-TSTstop Ev
OPEN)
was NOT READY (CB-TSTstop Ev
NOTr)
7SA6 Manual 775

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
stayed CLOSED (CB-TSTstop Ev
CLOS)
7350 CB-TEST was succesful (CB- Testing OUT_ ON *
TST .OK.) Ev
10201 >BLOCK Uph-e>(>) Overvolt. Voltage Prot. SP * * * LED BI BO
(phase-earth) (>Uph-e>(>) BLK)
10202 >BLOCK Uph-ph>(>) Overvolt Voltage Prot. SP * * * LED BI BO
(phase-phase) (>Uph-ph>(>)
BLK)
10203 >BLOCK 3U0>(>) Overvolt. (zero Voltage Prot. SP * * * LED BI BO
sequence) (>3U0>(>) BLK)
10204 >BLOCK U1>(>) Overvolt. (posi- Voltage Prot. SP * * * LED BI BO
tive seq.) (>U1>(>) BLK)
10205 >BLOCK U2>(>) Overvolt. (nega- Voltage Prot. SP * * * LED BI BO
tive seq.) (>U2>(>) BLK)
10206 >BLOCK Uph-e<(<) Undervolt Voltage Prot. SP * * * LED BI BO
(phase-earth) (>Uph-e<(<) BLK)
10207 >BLOCK Uphph<(<) Undervolt Voltage Prot. SP * * * LED BI BO
(phase-phase) (>Uphph<(<)
BLK)
10208 >BLOCK U1<(<) Undervolt (posi- Voltage Prot. SP * * * LED BI BO
tive seq.) (>U1<(<) BLK)
10215 Uph-e>(>) Overvolt. is switched Voltage Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 73 15 1 Yes
OFF (Uph-e>(>) OFF) OFF
10216 Uph-e>(>) Overvolt. is BLOCKED Voltage Prot. OUT ON ON * LED BO 73 16 1 Yes
(Uph-e>(>) BLK) OFF OFF
10217 Uph-ph>(>) Overvolt. is switched Voltage Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 73 17 1 Yes
OFF (Uph-ph>(>) OFF) OFF
10218 Uph-ph>(>) Overvolt. is Voltage Prot. OUT ON ON * LED BO 73 18 1 Yes
BLOCKED (Uph-ph>(>) BLK) OFF OFF
10219 3U0>(>) Overvolt. is switched Voltage Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 73 19 1 Yes
OFF (3U0>(>) OFF) OFF
10220 3U0>(>) Overvolt. is BLOCKED Voltage Prot. OUT ON ON * LED BO 73 20 1 Yes
(3U0>(>) BLK) OFF OFF
10221 U1>(>) Overvolt. is switched OFF Voltage Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 73 21 1 Yes
(U1>(>) OFF) OFF
10222 U1>(>) Overvolt. is BLOCKED Voltage Prot. OUT ON ON * LED BO 73 22 1 Yes
(U1>(>) BLK) OFF OFF
10223 U2>(>) Overvolt. is switched OFF Voltage Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 73 23 1 Yes
(U2>(>) OFF) OFF
10224 U2>(>) Overvolt. is BLOCKED Voltage Prot. OUT ON ON * LED BO 73 24 1 Yes
(U2>(>) BLK) OFF OFF
10225 Uph-e<(<) Undervolt. is switched Voltage Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 73 25 1 Yes
OFF (Uph-e<(<) OFF) OFF
10226 Uph-e<(<) Undervolt. is Voltage Prot. OUT ON ON * LED BO 73 26 1 Yes
BLOCKED (Uph-e<(<) BLK) OFF OFF
10227 Uph-ph<(<) Undervolt. is Voltage Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 73 27 1 Yes
switched OFF (Uph-ph<(<) OFF) OFF
10228 Uphph<(<) Undervolt. is Voltage Prot. OUT ON ON * LED BO 73 28 1 Yes
BLOCKED (Uph-ph<(<) BLK) OFF OFF
10229 U1<(<) Undervolt. is switched Voltage Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 73 29 1 Yes
OFF (U1<(<) OFF) OFF
10230 U1<(<) Undervolt. is BLOCKED Voltage Prot. OUT ON ON * LED BO 73 30 1 Yes
(U1<(<) BLK) OFF OFF
10231 Over-/Under-Voltage protection is Voltage Prot. OUT ON * * LED BO 73 31 1 Yes
ACTIVE (U</> ACTIVE) OFF
776 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
10240 Uph-e> Pickup (Uph-e> Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 40 2 Yes
OFF
10241 Uph-e>> Pickup (Uph-e>> Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 41 2 Yes
Pickup) OFF
10242 Uph-e>(>) Pickup L1 (Uph-e>(>) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 42 2 Yes
PU L1) OFF
PU L2) OFF
PU L3) OFF
10245 Uph-e> TimeOut (Uph-e> Time- Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
Out)
10246 Uph-e>> TimeOut (Uph-e>> Tim- Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
eOut)
10247 Uph-e>(>) TRIP command (Uph- Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 47 2 Yes
e>(>) TRIP)
10248 Uph-e> Pickup L1 (Uph-e> PU Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO 73 133 2 Yes
L1)
L2)
L3)
10251 Uph-e>> Pickup L1 (Uph-e>> PU Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO 73 136 2 Yes
L1)
L2)
L3)
10255 Uph-ph> Pickup (Uphph> Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 55 2 Yes
OFF
10256 Uph-ph>> Pickup (Uphph>> Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 56 2 Yes
Pickup) OFF
10257 Uph-ph>(>) Pickup L1-L2 (Uph- Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 57 2 Yes
ph>(>)PU L12) OFF
ph>(>)PU L23) OFF
ph>(>)PU L31) OFF
10260 Uph-ph> TimeOut (Uphph> Time- Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
Out)
10261 Uph-ph>> TimeOut (Uphph>> Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
TimeOut)
10262 Uph-ph>(>) TRIP command (Up- Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 62 2 Yes
hph>(>) TRIP)
10263 Uph-ph> Pickup L1-L2 (Uphph> Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO 73 139 2 Yes
PU L12)
PU L23)
PU L31)
10266 Uph-ph>> Pickup L1-L2 (Uph- Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO 73 142 2 Yes
ph>> PU L12)
ph>> PU L23)
ph>> PU L31)
7SA6 Manual 777

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
10270 3U0> Pickup (3U0> Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 70 2 Yes
OFF
10271 3U0>> Pickup (3U0>> Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 71 2 Yes
OFF
10272 3U0> TimeOut (3U0> TimeOut) Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
10273 3U0>> TimeOut (3U0>> Time- Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
Out)
10274 3U0>(>) TRIP command Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 74 2 Yes
(3U0>(>) TRIP)
10280 U1> Pickup (U1> Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 80 2 Yes
OFF
10281 U1>> Pickup (U1>> Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 81 2 Yes
OFF
10282 U1> TimeOut (U1> TimeOut) Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
10283 U1>> TimeOut (U1>> TimeOut) Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
10284 U1>(>) TRIP command (U1>(>) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 84 2 Yes
TRIP)
10290 U2> Pickup (U2> Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 90 2 Yes
OFF
10291 U2>> Pickup (U2>> Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 91 2 Yes
OFF
10292 U2> TimeOut (U2> TimeOut) Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
10293 U2>> TimeOut (U2>> TimeOut) Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
10294 U2>(>) TRIP command (U2>(>) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 94 2 Yes
TRIP)
10300 U1< Pickup (U1< Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 100 2 Yes
OFF
10301 U1<< Pickup (U1<< Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 101 2 Yes
OFF
10302 U1< TimeOut (U1< TimeOut) Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
10303 U1<< TimeOut (U1<< TimeOut) Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
10304 U1<(<) TRIP command (U1<(<) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 104 2 Yes
TRIP)
10310 Uph-e< Pickup (Uph-e< Pickup) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 110 2 Yes
OFF
10311 Uph-e<< Pickup (Uph-e<< Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 111 2 Yes
Pickup) OFF
10312 Uph-e<(<) Pickup L1 (Uph-e<(<) Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 112 2 Yes
PU L1) OFF
PU L2) OFF
PU L3) OFF
10315 Uph-e< TimeOut (Uph-e< Time- Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
Out)
10316 Uph-e<< TimeOut (Uph-e<< Tim- Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
eOut)
10317 Uph-e<(<) TRIP command (Uph- Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 117 2 Yes
e<(<) TRIP)
10318 Uph-e< Pickup L1 (Uph-e< PU Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO 73 145 2 Yes
L1)
L2)
L3)
778 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
of In-

for-
Chatter Suppression
Information Number
matio
Event Log ON/OFF

n
Function Key
Binary Input
Data Unit
Relay
Type
LED
10321 Uph-e<< Pickup L1 (Uph-e<< PU Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO 73 148 2 Yes
L1)
L2)
L3)
10325 Uph-ph< Pickup (Uph-ph< Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 125 2 Yes
Pickup) OFF
10326 Uph-ph<< Pickup (Uph-ph<< Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 126 2 Yes
Pickup) OFF
10327 Uphph<(<) Pickup L1-L2 (Uph- Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 127 2 Yes
ph<(<)PU L12) OFF
ph<(<)PU L23) OFF
ph<(<)PU L31) OFF
10330 Uphph< TimeOut (Uphph< Time- Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
Out)
10331 Uphph<< TimeOut (Uphph<< Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO
TimeOut)
10332 Uphph<(<) TRIP command (Uph- Voltage Prot. OUT * ON * LED BO 73 132 2 Yes
ph<(<) TRIP)
10333 Uph-ph< Pickup L1-L2 (Uphph< Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO 73 151 2 Yes
PU L12)
PU L23)
PU L31)
10336 Uph-ph<< Pickup L1-L2 (Uph- Voltage Prot. OUT * * * LED BO 73 154 2 Yes
ph<< PU L12)
ph<< PU L23)
ph<< PU L31)
11000 >RESET Analog Outputs (>RES AnalogOutputs SP * * LED BI BO
Analog Out)
14080 E/F 3I0>>> is blocked (E/F Earth Fault O/C OUT ON ON * LED BO
3I0>>>BLOCK) OFF OFF
14081 E/F 3I0>> is blocked (E/F 3I0>> Earth Fault O/C OUT ON ON * LED BO
BLOCK) OFF OFF
14082 E/F 3I0> is blocked (E/F 3I0> Earth Fault O/C OUT ON ON * LED BO
BLOCK) OFF OFF
14083 E/F 3I0p is blocked (E/F 3I0p Earth Fault O/C OUT ON ON * LED BO
BLOCK) OFF OFF
30053 Fault recording is running (Fault Osc. Fault Rec. OUT * * * LED BO
rec. run.)
31000 Q0 operationcounter= (Q0 Control Device VI
OpCnt=)
OpCnt=)
OpCnt=)
OpCnt=)
OpCnt=)
7SA6 Manual 779

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
A.9 Group Alarms
No. Description Function No. Description

140 Error Sum Alarm 144 Error 5V
181 Error A/D-conv.
192 Error1A/5Awrong
194 Error neutralCT
160 Alarm Sum Event 162 Failure I
163 Fail I balance
165 Fail U Ph-E
167 Fail U balance
168 Fail U absent
169 VT FuseFail>10s
170 VT FuseFail
171 Fail Ph. Seq.
177 Fail Battery
183 Error Board 1
184 Error Board 2
185 Error Board 3
186 Error Board 4
187 Error Board 5
188 Error Board 6
189 Error Board 7
190 Error Board 0
191 Error Offset
193 Alarm adjustm.
361 >FAIL:Feeder VT
161 Fail I Superv. 162 Failure I
163 Fail I balance
164 Fail U Superv. 165 Fail U Ph-E
167 Fail U balance
168 Fail U absent
780 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A.10 Measured Values
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix
Information Number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
- Upper setting limit for IL1dmd (IL1dmd>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- Upper setting limit for I1dmd (I1dmd>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- Upper setting limit for Pdmd (|Pdmd|>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- Upper setting limit for Qdmd (|Qdmd|>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- Upper setting limit for Sdmd (Sdmd>) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
- Lower setting limit for Power Factor (PF<) Set Points(MV) - - - - - CFC CD DD
601 I L1 (IL1 =) Measurement 128 148 Yes 9 1 CFC CD DD
134 124 No 9 1
134 124 No 9 2
134 124 No 9 3
610 3I0 (zero sequence) (3I0 =) Measurement 134 124 No 9 14 CFC CD DD
611 3I0sen (sensitive zero sequence) (3I0sen=) Measurement 134 118 No 9 3 CFC CD DD
612 IY (star point of transformer) (IY =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
613 3I0par (parallel line neutral) (3I0par=) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
619 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
620 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
621 U L1-E (UL1E=) Measurement 128 148 Yes 9 4 CFC CD DD
134 124 No 9 4
134 124 No 9 5
134 124 No 9 6
624 U L12 (UL12=) Measurement 134 124 No 9 10 CFC CD DD
627 Uen (Uen =) Measurement 134 118 No 9 1 CFC CD DD
631 3U0 (zero sequence) (3U0 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
632 Measured value Usy2 (Usy2=) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
633 Ux (separate VT) (Ux =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
634 U1 (positive sequence) (U1 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
635 U2 (negative sequence) (U2 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
636 Measured value U-diff (Usy1- Usy2) (Udiff =) Measurement 130 1 No 9 2 CFC CD DD
637 Measured value Usy1 (Usy1=) Measurement 130 1 No 9 3 CFC CD DD
638 Measured value Usy2 (Usy2=) Measurement 130 1 No 9 1 CFC CD DD
641 P (active power) (P =) Measurement 128 148 Yes 9 7 CFC CD DD
134 124 No 9 7
642 Q (reactive power) (Q =) Measurement 128 148 Yes 9 8 CFC CD DD
134 124 No 9 8
643 Power Factor (PF =) Measurement 134 124 No 9 13 CFC CD DD
644 Frequency (Freq=) Measurement 128 148 Yes 9 9 CFC CD DD
7SA6 Manual 781

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Information Number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
134 124 No 9 9
645 S (apparent power) (S =) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
646 Frequency fsy2 (F-sy2 =) Measurement 130 1 No 9 4 CFC CD DD
647 Frequency difference (F-diff=) Measurement 130 1 No 9 5 CFC CD DD
648 Angle difference (-diff=) Measurement 130 1 No 9 6 CFC CD DD
649 Frequency fsy1 (F-sy1 =) Measurement 130 1 No 9 7 CFC CD DD
679 U1co (positive sequence, compounding) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
(U1co=)
684 U0 (zero sequence) (U0 =) Measurement 134 118 No 9 2 CFC CD DD
701 Active 3I0sen (sensitive Ie) (3I0senA) Measurement 134 124 No 9 15 CFC CD DD
702 Reactive 3I0sen (sensitive Ie) (3I0senR) Measurement 134 124 No 9 16 CFC CD DD
801 Temperat. rise for warning and trip (/trip Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
=)
802 Temperature rise for phase L1 (/tripL1=) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
833 I1 (positive sequence) Demand (I1dmd =) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
834 Active Power Demand (Pdmd =) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
835 Reactive Power Demand (Qdmd =) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
836 Apparent Power Demand (Sdmd =) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
837 I L1 Demand Minimum (IL1d Min) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
838 I L1 Demand Maximum (IL1d Max) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
843 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Minimum Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
(I1dmdMin)
844 I1 (positive sequence) Demand Maximum Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
(I1dmdMax)
845 Active Power Demand Minimum (PdMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
846 Active Power Demand Maximum (PdMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
847 Reactive Power Demand Minimum (QdMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
848 Reactive Power Demand Maximum (Qd- Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Max=)
849 Apparent Power Demand Minimum (SdMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
850 Apparent Power Demand Maximum (Sd- Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Max=)
851 I L1 Minimum (IL1Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
852 I L1 Maximum (IL1Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
853 I L2 Mimimum (IL2Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
855 I L3 Minimum (IL3Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
857 Positive Sequence Minimum (I1 Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
858 Positive Sequence Maximum (I1 Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
859 U L1E Minimum (UL1EMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
860 U L1E Maximum (UL1EMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
782 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Information Number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
865 U L12 Minimum (UL12Min=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
867 U L12 Maximum (UL12Max=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
874 U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum (U1 Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Min =)
875 U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
(U1 Max =)
880 Apparent Power Minimum (SMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
881 Apparent Power Maximum (SMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
882 Frequency Minimum (fMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
883 Frequency Maximum (fMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Energy 133 55 No 205 - CFC CD DD
889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Energy 133 56 No 205 - CFC CD DD
924 Wp Forward (Wp+=) Energy 133 51 No 205 - CFC CD DD
925 Wq Forward (Wq+=) Energy 133 52 No 205 - CFC CD DD
928 Wp Reverse (Wp-=) Energy 133 53 No 205 - CFC CD DD
929 Wq Reverse (Wq-=) Energy 133 54 No 205 - CFC CD DD
963 I L1 demand (IL1dmd=) Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
966 R L1E (R L1E=) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
971 R L12 (R L12=) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
974 X L1E (X L1E=) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
977 X L12 (X L12=) Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
1040 Active Power Minimum Forward (Pmin Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Forw=)
1041 Active Power Maximum Forward (Pmax Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Forw=)
1042 Active Power Minimum Reverse (Pmin Rev Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
=)
1043 Active Power Maximum Reverse (Pmax Rev Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
=)
1044 Reactive Power Minimum Forward (Qmin Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Forw=)
1045 Reactive Power Maximum Forward (Qmax Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Forw=)
1046 Reactive Power Minimum Reverse (Qmin Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Rev =)
1047 Reactive Power Maximum Reverse (Qmax Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Rev =)
7SA6 Manual 783

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
Information Number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
1048 Power Factor Minimum Forward (PFmin- Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Forw=)
1049 Power Factor Maximum Forward (PFmax- Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Forw=)
1050 Power Factor Minimum Reverse (PFmin Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Rev=)
1051 Power Factor Maximum Reverse (PFmax Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Rev=)
1052 Active Power Demand Forward (Pdmd Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Forw=)
1053 Active Power Demand Reverse (Pdmd Rev Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
=)
1054 Reactive Power Demand Forward (Qdmd Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Forw=)
1055 Reactive Power Demand Reverse (Qdmd Demand meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
Rev =)
7751 Prot Int 1:Transmission delay (PI1 TD) Statistics - - - - - CFC CD DD
7753 Prot Int 1: Availability per min. (PI1A/m) Statistics - - - - - CFC CD DD
7754 Prot Int 1: Availability per hour (PI1A/h) Statistics - - - - - CFC CD DD
7761 Relay ID of 1. relay (Relay ID) Measure relay1 - - - - - CFC CD DD
10102 Min. Zero Sequence Voltage 3U0 (3U0min Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
=)
10103 Max. Zero Sequence Voltage 3U0 (3U0max Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC CD DD
=)
14000 IL1 (primary) (IL1 =) Measure relay1 - - - - - CFC CD DD
14001 Angle IL1 (IL1 =) Measure relay1 - - - - - CFC CD DD
14010 UL1E (primary) (UL1E =) Measure relay1 - - - - - CFC CD DD
14011 Angle UL1E (UL1E =) Measure relay1 - - - - - CFC CD DD
784 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Information Number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
7SA6 Manual 785

C53000-G1176-C156-5
A Appendix
786 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Literature
/1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description; E50417-H1176-C151-A7

/2/ SIPROTEC DIGSI, Start UP; E50417-G1176-C152-A2
/3/ DIGSI CFC, Manual; E50417-H1176-C098-A4
/4/ SIPROTEC SIGRA 4, Manual; E50417-H1176-C070-A2
/5/ Ziegler, Gerhard; Numerical Distance Protection; Principles and Applications;
Erlangen 1999; ISBN 3-89578-142-8
7SA6 Manual 787

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Literature
788 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Glossary
Battery The buffer battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, timers and counters are re-
tained retentively.
Bay controllers Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protective
functions.
Bit pattern indica- Bit pattern indication is a processing function by means of which items of digital
tion process information applying across several inputs can be detected together in paral-
lel and processed further. The bit pattern length can be specified as 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes.
BP_xx Bit pattern indication (Bitstring Of x Bit), x designates the length in bits (8, 16, 24 or
32 bits).
C_xx Command without feedback
CF_xx Command with feedback
CFC Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphical editor with which a program can be
created and configured by using ready-made blocks.
CFC blocks Blocks are parts of the user program delimited by their function, their structure or their
purpose.
Chatter blocking A rapidly intermittent input (for example, due to a relay contact fault) is switched off
after a configurable monitoring time and can thus not generate any further signal
changes. The function prevents overloading of the system when a fault arises.
Combination Combination devices are bay devices with protection functions and a control display.
devices
Combination matrix From DIGSI V4.6 onward, up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communi-
cate with one another in an Inter Relay Communication combination (IRC combina-
tion). Which device exchanges which information is defined with the help of the com-
bination matrix.
Communication A communications branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n users that com-

branch municate by means of a common bus.
Communication The communication reference describes the type and version of a station in commu-
reference CR nication by PROFIBUS.
7SA6 Manual 789

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Glossary
Component view In addition to a topological view, SIMATIC Manager offers you a component view. The
component view does not offer any overview of the hierarchy of a project. It does, how-
ever, provide an overview of all the SIPROTEC 4 devices within a project.
COMTRADE Common Format for Transient Data Exchange, format for fault records.
Container If an object can contain other objects, it is called a container. The object Folder is an
example of such a container.
Control display The display which is displayed on devices with a large (graphic) display after you have
pressed the control key is called the control display. It contains the switchgear that can
be controlled in the feeder with status display. It is used to perform switching opera-
tions. Defining this display is part of the configuration.
Data pane The right-hand area of the project window displays the contents of the area selected
in the navigation window, for example indications, measured values, etc. of the in-
formation lists or the function selection for the device configuration.
DCF77 The extremely precise official time is determined in Germany by the "Physikalisch-
Technische-Bundesanstalt PTB" in Braunschweig. The atomic clock station of the PTB
transmits this time via the long-wave time-signal transmitter in Mainflingen near Frank-
furt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1,500 km
from Frankfurt/Main.
Device container In the Component View, all SIPROTEC 4 devices are assigned to an object of type
Device container. This object is a special object of DIGSI Manager. However, since
there is no component view in DIGSI Manager, this object only becomes visible in con-
junction with STEP 7.
Double command Double commands are process outputs which indicate 4 process states at 2 outputs:
2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate po-
sitions)
Double-point indi- Double-point indications are items of process information which indicate 4 process
cation states at 2 inputs: 2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for
example intermediate positions).
DP Double-point indication
DP_I Double point indication, intermediate position 00
Drag and drop Copying, moving and linking function, used at graphics user interfaces. Objects are
selected with the mouse, held and moved from one data area to another.
Earth The conductive earth whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every point.
In the area of earth electrodes the earth can have a potential deviating from zero. The
term "Earth reference plane" is often used for this state.
790 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Glossary
Earth (verb) This term means that a conductive part is connected via an earthing system to the
earth.
Earthing Earthing is the total of all means and measures used for earthing.
Electromagnetic Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical apparatus to function

compatibility fault-free in a specified environment without influencing the environment unduly.
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
ESD protection ESD protection is the total of all the means and measures used to protect electrostatic
sensitive devices.
ExBPxx External bit pattern indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific Bit
pattern indication
ExC External command without feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExCF External command with feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExDP External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific

Double point indication
ExDP_I External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, intermediate position
00, device-specific Double point indication
ExMV External metered value via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExSI External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific

Single point indication
ExSI_F External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific

Transient information, Single point indication
Field devices Generic term for all devices assigned to the field level: Protection devices, combina-
tion devices, bay controllers.
Floating Without electrical connection to the Earth.
FMS communica- Within an FMS communication branch, the users communicate on the basis of the
tion branch PROFIBUS FMS protocol via a PROFIBUS FMS network.
Folder This object type is used to create the hierarchical structure of a project.
General interroga- During the system start-up the state of all the process inputs, of the status and of the
tion (GI) fault image is sampled. This information is used to update the system-end process
7SA6 Manual 791

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Glossary
image. The current process state can also be sampled after a data loss by means of
a GI.
GOOSE message GOOSE messages (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) are data pakets which
are transferred event-controlled via the Ethernet communication system. They serve
for direct information exchange among the relays. This mechanism implements cross-
communication between bay units.
GPS Global Positioning System. Satellites with atomic clocks on board orbit the earth twice
a day on different paths in approx. 20,000 km. They transmit signals which also
contain the GPS universal time. The GPS receiver determines its own position from
the signals received. From its position it can derive the delay time of a satellite signal
and thus correct the transmitted GPS universal time.
Hierarchy level Within a structure with higher-level and lower-level objects a hierarchy level is a con-
tainer of equivalent objects.
HV field description The HV project description file contains details of fields which exist in a ModPara-
project. The actual field information of each field is stored in a HV field description file.
Within the HV project description file, each field is allocated such a HV field description
file by a reference to the file name.
HV project descrip- All the data is exported once the configuration and parameterization of PCUs and sub-
tion modules using ModPara has been completed. This data is split up into several files.
One file contains details about the fundamental project structure. This also includes,
for example, information detailing which fields exist in this project. This file is called a
HV project description file.
ID Internal double point indication Double point indication
ID_S Internal double point indication, intermediate position 00 Double point indication
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission, international standardisation body
IEC address Within an IEC bus a unique IEC address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4
device. A total of 254 IEC addresses are available for each IEC bus.
IEC communication Within an IEC communication branch the users communicate on the basis of the
branch IEC60-870-5-103 protocol via an IEC bus.
IEC61850 International communication standard for communication in substations. The objective

of this standard is the interoperability of devices from different manufacturers on the
station bus. An Ethernet network is used for data transfer.
Initialization string An initialization string comprises a range of modem-specific commands. These are
transmitted to the modem within the framework of modem initialization. The com-
mands can, for example, force specific settings for the modem.
792 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Glossary
Inter relay commu- IRC combination

nication
IRC combination Inter Relay Communication, IRC, is used for directly exchanging process information
between SIPROTEC 4 devices. You require an object of type IRC combination to con-
figure an inter relay communication. Each user of the combination and all the neces-
sary communication parameters are defined in this object. The type and scope of the
information exchanged between the users is also stored in this object.
IRIG-B Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
IS Internal single point indication Single point indication
IS_F Internal indication transient Transient information, Single point indication
ISO 9001 The ISO 9000 ff range of standards defines measures used to assure the quality of a
product from the development stage to the manufacturing stage.
Link address The link address gives the address of a V3/V2 device.
List view The right pane of the project window displays the names and icons of objects which
represent the contents of a container selected in the tree view. Because they are dis-
played in the form of a list, this area is called the list view.
LV Limit value
LVU Limit value, user-defined
Master Masters may send data to other users and request data from other users. DIGSI op-
erates as a master.
Metered value Metered values are a processing function with which the total number of discrete
similar events (counting pulses) is determined for a period, usually as an integrated
value. In power supply companies the electrical work is usually recorded as a metered
value (energy purchase/supply, energy transportation).
MLFB MLFB is the abbreviation for "MaschinenLesbare FabrikateBezeichnung" (machine-

readable product designation). This is the equivalent of an order number. The type and
version of a SIPROTEC 4 device are coded in the order number.
Modem connection This object type contains information on both partners of a modem connection, the
local modem and the remote modem.
Modem profile A modem profile consists of the name of the profile, a modem driver and may also
comprise several initialization commands and a user address. You can create several
modem profiles for one physical modem. To do so you need to link various initialization
commands or user addresses to a modem driver and its properties and save them
under different names.
7SA6 Manual 793

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Glossary
Modems Modem profiles for a modem connection are stored in this object type.
MV Measured value
MVMV Metered value which is formed from the measured value
MVT Measured value with time
MVU Measured value, user-defined
Navigation pane The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers
of a project in the form of a folder tree.
Object Each element of a project structure is called an object in DIGSI.
Object properties Each object has properties. These might be general properties that are common to
several objects. An object can also have specific properties.
Off-line In offline mode a connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device is not required. You work with
data which are stored in files.
OI_F Output Indication Transient Transient information
On-line When working in online mode, there is a physical connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device.
This connection can be implemented as a direct connection, as a modem connection
or as a PROFIBUS FMS connection.
OUT Output indication
Parameter set The parameter set is the set of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC 4
device.
Phone book User addresses for a modem connection are saved in this object type.
PMV Pulse metered value
Process bus Devices with a process bus interface allow direct communication with SICAM HV mod-
ules. The process bus interface is equipped with an Ethernet module.
PROFIBUS PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and field bus standard, as specified in the
standard EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. It defines the functional, electrical, and
mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus.
PROFIBUS address Within a PROFIBUS network a unique PROFIBUS address has to be assigned to
each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 PROFIBUS addresses are available for each
PROFIBUS network.
794 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Glossary
Project Content-wise, a project is the image of a real power supply system. Graphically, a
project is represented as a number of objects which are integrated in a hierarchical
structure. Physically, a project consists of a number of directories and files containing
project data.
Protection devices All devices with a protective function and no control display.
Reorganizing Frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas that can no longer
be used. By reorganizing projects, you can release these memory areas again. How-
ever, a cleanup also reassigns the VD addresses. The consequence is that all SIPRO-
TEC 4 devices have to be reinitialized.
RIO file Relay data Interchange format by Omicron.
RSxxx-interface Serial interfaces RS232, RS422/485
SCADA Interface Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting to a control system via IEC or
PROFIBUS.
Service port Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting DIGSI (for example, via modem).
Setting parameters General term for all adjustments made to the device. Parameterization jobs are exe-
cuted by means of DIGSI or, in some cases, directly on the device.
SI Single point indication
SI_F Single point indication transient Transient information, Single point indication
SICAM SAS Modularly structured station control system, based on the substation controller
SICAM SC and the SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system.
SICAM SC Substation Controller. Modularly structured substation control system, based on the
SIMATIC M7 automation system.
SICAM WinCC The SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system displays the state of your
network graphically, visualizes alarms, interrupts and indications, archives the network
data, offers the possibility of intervening manually in the process and manages the
system rights of the individual employee.
Single command Single commands are process outputs which indicate 2 process states (for example,
ON/OFF) at one output.
Single point indica- Single indications are items of process information which indicate 2 process states (for
tion example, ON/OFF) at one output.
SIPROTEC The registered trademark SIPROTEC is used for devices implemented on system
base V4.
7SA6 Manual 795

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Glossary
SIPROTEC 4 device This object type represents a real SIPROTEC 4 device with all the setting values and
process data it contains.
SIPROTEC 4 This object type represents a variant of an object of type SIPROTEC 4 device. The
variant device data of this variant may well differ from the device data of the original object.
However, all variants derived from the original object have the same VD address as
the original object. For this reason they always correspond to the same real SIPRO-
TEC 4 device as the original object. Objects of type SIPROTEC 4 variant have a
variety of uses, such as documenting different operating states when entering param-
eter settings of a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Slave A slave may only exchange data with a master after being prompted to do so by the
master. SIPROTEC 4 devices operate as slaves.
Time stamp Time stamp is the assignment of the real time to a process event.
Topological view DIGSI Manager always displays a project in the topological view. This shows the hier-
archical structure of a project with all available objects.
Transformer Tap In- Transformer tap indication is a processing function on the DI by means of which the
dication tap of the transformer tap changer can be detected together in parallel and processed
further.
Transient informa- A transient information is a brief transient single-point indication at which only the
tion coming of the process signal is detected and processed immediately.
Tree view The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers
of a project in the form of a folder tree. This area is called the tree view.
TxTap Transformer Tap Indication
User address A user address comprises the name of the user, the national code, the area code and
the user-specific phone number.
Users From DIGSI V4.6 onward , up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communi-
cate with one another in an Inter Relay Communication combination. The individual
participating devices are called users.
VD A VD (Virtual Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and
states that are used by a communication user through services. A VD can be a phys-
ical device, a module of a device or a software module.
VD address The VD address is assigned automatically by DIGSI Manager. It exists only once in
the entire project and thus serves to identify unambiguously a real SIPROTEC 4
device. The VD address assigned by DIGSI Manager must be transferred to the
SIPROTEC 4 device in order to allow communication with DIGSI Device Editor.
VFD A VFD (Virtual Field Device) includes all communication objects and their properties
and states that are used by a communication user through services.
796 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Index
A Bus address 511

Busbar Trip 544
AC voltage 570
Acknowledgement of Commands 475
Adaptive Dead Time 610
Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) 310 C
ADC offset 397 Calculation of the Impedances 73
Analog inputs 569 Change of operating state 536
Analog Output 569 Changing setting groups 479
Analog outputs 629 Check:
Ancillary functions 628 Analog outputs 538
Angle Error Compensation 286 Blocking scheme 559
Angle of inclination of the tripping characteristics Blocking scheme (earth fault protection) 562
82 Circuit breaker failure protection 543
Angular Dependence 88 Direction 546
Annunciations 449 Interface termination 526
Assignment to the polygons 99 Operating Interface 525
Asymmetrical Measuring Voltage Failure 411 Permissive schemes 558
Automatic reclosing Permissive schemes (earth fault
External automatic reclosing device 301 protection) 561
Automatic Reclosing Commands 451 Permissive underreach transfer trip 560
Automatic reclosure 289 Phase sequence voltage 545
Action times 291 Pilot wire comparison 557
Auxiliary contacts of the CB 294 Polarity check for the voltage measuring input
Blocking 292 U4 548
Circuit breaker test 426 Polarity for the current measuring input I4 551
Control 302 Reverse interlocking 558
Control modes 292 Service interface 525
Initiation 291 Signal transmission (breaker failure protec-
Multiple 296 tion/stub fault protection) 562
Single-pole reclose cycle 295 Signal transmission (earth fault protection) 560
Single-pole/three-pole reclose cycle 296 Signal transmission (int., ext. Remote
Three-pole reclose cycle 295 tripping) 562
Auxiliary contacts of the CB 370 States of the binary inputs/outputs 535
Auxiliary Functions 443 System interface 533
Averages 459 Teleprotection system (distance
protection) 557
Time Synchronisation Interface 527, 532
B User-defined functions 563
Check: System connections 529
Back-up battery 396 Check: System interface 526
Binary Inputs 571 Checking connections 539
Binary Outputs 447 Circuit breaker
Blocking 209 External local trip 257
Breaker failure protection 380 Malfunction 377
Breaking Currents 451 Measuring the operating time 556
Broken wire 399
7SA6 Manual 797

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Index
Operating time 46 Current inputs 569

Position detection 424 Current Symmetry 398
Position logic 424
Test 47
Test programs 436
D
Trip/close test 564
Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 618 Dead Line Check 310
Circuit Breaker Monitoring 618 Dead-line closing 326
End Fault Protection 618 Default displays 448
Initiation Conditions 618 Definite time high set current stage 3I0>> 198
Pole Discrepancy Supervision 618 Definite time overcurrent stage 3I0> 198
Times 618 Definite Time Stages 212
Circuit breaker failure protection 368 Definite time very high set current stage 3I0>>> 196
Circuit Breaker for Voltage Transformers 412 Delay times for single-stage/two-stage circuit
Circuit Breaker not Operational 382 breaker protection 376
Circuit breaker status 56 Dependent zone 100
Climatic Stress Tests 580 (circle) 120
Climatic tests 580 Detached Operator Panel 637
Closing Check Operating Modes 326 Determination of direction 95
Closing under asynchronous system conditions Negative sequence system 205
327 Series-compensated lines 98
Closing under synchronous system conditions 327 Zero sequence system power
Command 468 (compensated) 206
Command Execution 469 Determination of Direction (Earth Fault) 285
Command Output 475 Determination of Functional Scope 36
Command Path 468 Device and System Logic 720
Command Processing 467 Device Logout (Functional Logout) 153
Command Types 467 Dialog box 535
Commissioning aids 31 Digital Transmission 191
Web-Monitor 443 Digital Transmission (EF) 240
Communication 25 Direct Underreach Transfer Trip 167
Communication converter 539 Direct Voltage 570
Communication Failure 150 Direction Check with Load Current 546
Communication Interfaces 573 Direction determination
Communication Media 148 Zero sequence system 205
Communication Topology 147 Directional Blocking Scheme 180
Communication topology 538 Directional characteristic 97, 117
Comparison Schemes Directional Comparison Pickup 172
Earth Fault Protection 227, 599 Directional Unblocking Scheme 175
Configuration of auto-reclosure 309 Display of Measured Values 453
Consistency Display panel 447
Parameterization 541 Distance Protection 26
Topology 541 Earth Fault Detection 583
Constructions 582 Earth Impedance Ratio 583
Contact mode for binary outputs 485 Mutual Impedance Ratio 583
Control Logic 473 Phase References 583
Control Voltage for Binary Inputs 484 Times 586
Controlled Zone 109 Distance protection
Controlled zone 129 Distance measurement 585
Conventional Transmission 190 Earth impedance ratio 46
Conventional Transmission (EF) 240 Pickup 584
Counters and Memories 451 Resistance tolerance 113
CT saturation 56 Double Earth Faults in Effectively Earthed Systems
Cubicle mounting 520 82
Cubicle Mounting Panel Flush Mounting 631 Double earth faults in non-earthed systems 78
Current Flow Monitoring 369 Double Faults in Effectively Earthed Systems 77
798 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Index
E Fault Recording 24
Fault recording 448
Earth Fault 280 Feedback Monitoring 475
Earth fault Fibre-optic cables 528
Single-pole tripping 46 Final Preparation of the Device 566
Earth Fault Check in a Non-earthed System 550 Forced three-pole trip 309
Earth Fault Detection 64, 609 Frequency Protection
Earth fault detection 81 Times 616
Earth fault detection buffer 629 Tolerances 616
Earth Fault Directional Determination 281 Frequency protection
Earth Fault Location 282 Delay 359
Earth Fault Protection Frequency measurement 356
Characteristics 590, 590 Frequency stages 356
High Current Stage 590 Operating ranges 357, 616
Overcurrent stage 591 Overfrequency protection 356
Zero Sequence Power Protection Stage 592 Pickup values 359, 616
Zero Sequence Voltage Time Protection Stage Pickup/tripping 357
(U0-inverse) 592 Power swings 357
Earth fault protection 590 Underfrequency protection 356
Determination of direction 217, 593 Frequency Protection (81) 356
Inrush restraint 593 Function blocks 624
Inverse time overcurrent stage with logarithmic Function Control 419
inverse characteristic 592 Functional Logout 149
Inverse-time stage with ANSI Functional scope 35
characteristic 591 Fuse Failure Monitor 411
Inverse-time stage with IEC characteristic 591 Fuse failure monitor 401
Zero sequence power stage 217
Earth Impedance Ratio 52
Echo Function 189
Echo function 192 G
Echo function (EF) 242 General 35
Electrical tests 577 General Device Pickup 132
EMC Tests for Immunity (type tests) 577 General Diagrams 655
EMC tests for noise emission (type test) 578 General interrogation 451
Emergency operation 586 Grading Coordination Chart 101
EN100 module Grading coordination chart 121
Interface selection 442
Event buffer 448
External Direct and Remote Tripping 604
H
High-set current stage I>> 261
F High-set stages Iph>>, 3I0>> 268
Humidity 580
Fast tripping zone (circle) 120
Fast tripping zone (polygon) 100
Fault Annunciations 439
Fault Annunciations (Buffer: Trip Log) 450 I
Fault direction 95
IEC 61850 GOOSE (inter-relay communication)
Fault Location 392
630
Fault location
Increased Resistance Tolerance 125
Earth impedance ratio 46
Independent Zones 128
Fault Location Options 450
Independent zones 100, 120
Fault locator 617
Indications 449
Fault Logging 629
Information to a Control Centre 449
Fault loops 95
Initiation breaker failure protection 371
Fault Reactions 408
7SA6 Manual 799

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Index
Input/output board M
B-I/O-2 509
C-I/O-11 507 Maximum Fault Current 394
C-I/O-1; C-I/O-10 495 Measured quantities 261, 621
C-I/O-2 503 Measured value acquisition
Inrush stabilization 204, 220 Voltages 398
Installation for detached operator panel 524 Measured Value Correction 364
Installation Panel Surface Mounting 523 Measured Values 392
Instantaneous high-current switch-onto-fault protec- Measured voltage failure supervision 404, 412
tion 608 Measurement value acquisition
Instantaneous tripping Currents 397
Before automatic reclosure 265 Measuring voltage failure 403
Insulation tests 577 Mechanical stress tests 579
Interface termination 526 Memory modules 396
Interfaces Minimum Current 81
Protection Data Communication 603 Monitoring Function 396
Interlocking 721 Monitoring Functions 621
Inverse Time Overcurrent Stage 199 Mounting with Detached Operator Panel 524
Inverse time overcurrent stage (Earth fault
protection)
Logarithmic inverse characteristic 215, 592 N
Inverse time overcurrent stage (earth fault
protection) Nominal frequency 46
ANSI characteristic 214, 591 Non-delayed Tripping 253
IEC characteristic 213, 591
Inverse time overcurrent stage (overcurrent
protection) O
ANSI characteristic 607
IEC characteristic 606 Open Pole Detector 426
Inverse time overcurrent stage 3I0P 198 Operating Interface 573
Operating polygons 94
Operating time of the circuit breaker 556
Operational indication buffer 629
K Operational indications 449
K- Factor 388 Operational measured values 453
Operator interface
Check 525
Ordering Information 642
L Oscillographic recording for test 564
Life contact 484 Output Relay 447
Limit Value Handling 723 Output relays binary outputs 572
Limit Value Monitoring 464 Overcurrent pickup
Limit values 465 U/I/ pickup 85
Limits for CFC blocks 626 U/Ipickup 85
Limits for user-defined functions 626 Overcurrent Stage
Line Data 50 IP(inverse-time) 262
Line Energisation Detection 419 Overcurrent stage
Load area 115 3I0> (Definite-time O/C protection) 270
Load range (only for impedance pickup) 83 3I0P(Inverse-time O/C protection with ANSI
Long-term Average Values 459 characteristics) 272
3I0P(Inverse-time O/C protection with IEC
characteristics) 271
I> (definite-time) 262
IP(Inverse-time O/C protection with ANSI
characteristics) 272
800 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Index
IP(Inverse-time O/C protection with IEC Protection Data Interface 150

characteristics) 271 Protection Data Interfaces and communication
Iph> (Definite-time O/C protection) 270 topology 602
Overcurrent starting 68 PUTT (Pickup) 161
Overreach Schemes
Distance Protection 168, 588
Overreach schemes
R
via protection data interface 589, 599
Overtemperature 389 Rack mounting 520
Overvoltage protection 336 Rated currents 484
Any single-phase voltage 614 Readout / Setting / Resetting 452
Compounding 339 Real Time Clock and Buffer Battery 630
Negative sequence system U2 340, 348, 614 Reclosure cycle 312, 313, 314
Phase-earth 347, 613 Reduced Dead Time 310, 610
Phase-phase 337, 347, 613 Reference voltages 396
Positive sequence system U1 338, 348, 613 Remote Annunciations 156
Zero sequence system 349 Remote Command 156
Zero sequence system 3U0 341, 614 Remote commands 623
Remote indications 623
Remote Measured Values 455
P Remote tripping 258
Replacing Interface Modules 485
Panel flush mounting 632, 633, 634 Reset 461
Panel Surface Mounting 635 Resistance tolerance
Parallel Line Measured Value Correction 79 Arc resistance 102
Parallel Line Mutual Impedance 55 Retrievable indications 450
Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) Retrieving parameters 466
Distance Protection 168 Reverse Interlocking Bus Protection 186
Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip with Zone Ac-
celeration Z1B (PUTT) 164
Phase angle monitoring 405, 412
S
Phase current restraint 204
Phase Selection 253 Sampling Frequency 397
Phase selector 207 Sensitive Earth Fault Logs 450
Phase-segregated initiation of the circuit breaker Series-compensated lines 82
failure protection 373 Service conditions 580
Pickup 68 Service interface
Pickup and tripping logic 266 Check 525
Pickup logic for the entire device 428 Service/modem interface 574
Pickup Modes 70 Setting group change option 48
Pickup value (SOTF-O/C)) 278 Setting groups 48
Pickup voltage 492 Changeover 479
Pickup Voltages of BI1 to BI5 492 Signal Transmission 156
Pilot Wire Comparison 184 Single-pole dead time 428
Polarity check Single-stage breaker failure protection 382
Current measuring input I4 551 Specifications 577, 580
Polarity check: Spontaneous Annunciations 450
Voltage measuring input U4 548 Spontaneous indications 451
Pole Discrepancy Supervision 383 Spontaneous indications on the display 438
Pole discrepancy supervision 379 Stage Iph>>> 273
Polygonal characteristic 94 Standard Interlocking 472
Power Metering 466 Start Test Fault Recording 565
Power supply 484, 570, 570 Statistics 630
Power swing detection 587 Stub fault protection 264, 378, 383
Power system data 1 42 Summation Monitoring 411
Power System Data 2 50
7SA6 Manual 801

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Index
Supervision with binary input 418 Definite Time High Set Current Stage 605
Supply voltage 570 Definite Time Overcurrent Stage 606
Switchgear Interlocking 470 Operating Modes 605
Switching Stub Fault Protection 607
Onto a fault 80, 83, 266 Time overcurrent protection 605
Onto an earth fault 209 Time Synchronisation Interface 527
Switching (interlocked/non-interlocked) 471 Transfer trip to the remote end circuit breaker 378
Switching Onto an Earth Fault 220 Transient Blocking 188, 192, 238
Switching statistics 630 Transient Blocking (EF) 242
Symmetry Monitoring 411 Transmission block 532
Synchro-check 321 Transmission channels 160
Synchronism Check Transmission mode: 159
Asynchronous Power Conditions 612 Transmission of binary information 623
Operating Modes 611 Transmission Statistics 451
Synchronous Power Conditions 611 Trip Circuit Monitoring 480
Voltages 611 Trip Command Duration 47
U-measurement 611 Trip with Delay 254
Synchronism conditions for automatic reclosure Trip-dependent messages 438
330 Trip/close tests for the configured operating
Synchronism conditions for manual closure and devices 564
control command 331 Tripping Logic 137
System interface 574 Tripping logic of the entire device 430
System Power Swing 587 Trips 451
Two-stage breaker failure protection 380
T
U
Teleprotection 159
for Distance Protection 588 Underreach Schemes
With earth fault protection 219 Distance Protection 588, 588
Teleprotection Schemes Undervoltage protection
with Earth Fault Protection 599 Phase-earth 343, 350, 614
Terminal Assignments 655 Phase-phase 345, 350, 615
Termination of bus-capable interfaces 485 Positive sequence system U1 345, 351, 615
Test mode 532 User defined functions 624
Test mode: Protection data interface 542
Test mode: Teleprotection scheme 542
Test:
V
Binary inputs 536
current and voltage connection 545 Vibration and shock stress during stationary opera-
Indication direction 534 tion 579
LEDs 537 Vibration and shock stress during transport 579
Output relays 536 Voltage and angle-dependent current pickup (U/I/
Trip/close tests for the configured operating 72
devices 564 Voltage Balance 399
Voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker Voltage inputs 569
(VT mcb) 546 Voltage Jump 250
Test:Command direction 534 Voltage measuring inputs 43
Thermal Overload Protection Voltage Phase Sequence 400
Tripping Characteristic 619 Voltage protection 336
Thermal overload protection 619 Voltage Stages (Earth Fault) 284
Three-phase measuring voltage failure 412 Voltage-dependent current fault detection U/I 69
Three-pole coupling 59
Time Constant 389
Time Overcurrent Protection
Characteristics 605
802 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Index
W
Warning Temperature Levels 389
Watchdog 398
Weak Infeed 239
Weak-Infeed Tripping
Operation Mode 600
Times 600
Undervoltage 600
Weak-infeed tripping
Classic 600
French specification 601
WEB-Monitor 31
Web-Monitor
Directional check 446
WI Transmission Scheme 246
WI Undervoltage 247
Z
Zero Infeed 239
Zero Sequence Voltage Stage with Inverse Charac-
teristic 216
Zero sequence voltage stages for single-phase
voltage 342
Zero Voltage Time Protection 200
Zero-sequence power protection 202
Zone logic 132
7SA6 Manual 803

C53000-G1176-C156-5
Index
804 7SA6 Manual

C53000-G1176-C156-5

Distance Protection 7SA6xx (Manual) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Distance Protection 7SA6xx (Manual) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Distance Protection 7SA6xx (Manual) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Further Standards IEEE Std C37.90-*

This product is UL-certified according to the Technical Data:

Definition QUALIFIED PERSONNEL

Device-internal logical input signal

Device-internal (logical) output signal

Internal input signal of an analog quantity

External binary input signal with number (binary input, input

External binary output signal with number (device indication)

Input signal of an analog quantity

Exclusive OR (antivalence): output is active, if only one of

Dynamic inputs (edgetriggered) above with positive, below

Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting

Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)

Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

Static memory (RS-flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting

1.1 Overall Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1.2 Application Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2.2 Distance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

2.3 Power swing detection (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

2.4 Protection data interfaces and communication topology (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

2.5 Remote signals via protection data interface (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

2.6 Teleprotection for distance protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

2.7 Earth fault overcurrent protection in earthed systems (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

2.8 Teleprotection for earth fault overcurrent protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

2.9 Measures for Weak and Zero Infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

2.10 External direct and remote tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

2.11 Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

2.12 Instantaneous high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (SOTF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

2.13 Earth fault detection in non-earthed systems (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

2.14 Automatic reclosure function (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

2.15 Synchronism and voltage check (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

2.16 Under and over-voltage protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

2.17 Frequency protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

2.18 Fault locator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

2.19 Circuit breaker failure protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

2.20 Thermal overload protection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

2.21 Analog outputs (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

2.22 Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

2.23 Function Control and Circuit Breaker Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

2.24 Auxiliary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

2.25 Command Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

3 Mounting and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

3.1 Mounting and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

3.2 Checking Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

3.3 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

3.4 Final Preparation of the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

4 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

4.2 Distance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

4.3 Power Swing Detection (with impedance pickup) (optional)

4.4 Teleprotection for Distance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

4.5 Earth Fault Protection in Earthed Systems (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

4.6 Earth Fault Protection Teleprotection Schemes (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

4.7 Weak-Infeed Tripping (classical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

4.8 Weak-infeed tripping (French Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

4.9 Protection Data Interface and Communication Topology (optional) . . . . . 602

4.10 External Direct and Remote Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

4.11 Time overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605